VisualField Software

Function Block

Reference
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Section 1 Overview.......................................................................................................................1

1.1 Work Mode of Function Block............................................................................................1

1.1.1 OOS (Out of Service) ..............................................................................................1
1.1.2 Initial Status (IMAN).................................................................................................1
1.1.3 Track (TR) ...............................................................................................................2
1.1.4 Manual (MAN) .........................................................................................................2
1.1.5 Auto (AUTO)............................................................................................................2
1.1.6 Cascade (CAS) .......................................................................................................2
1.2 Active/Inactive ...................................................................................................................2
1.3 Data Type ..........................................................................................................................3
1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block......................................................................................3
1.5 Function Block Panel.........................................................................................................4
1.5.1 Fixed Button ............................................................................................................5
1.5.2 Close Button............................................................................................................5
1.5.3 FB Tag Name ..........................................................................................................5
1.5.4 Selected, Alarm, ACK ..............................................................................................6
1.5.5 Detailed Information of Alarm ..................................................................................6
1.5.6 Analog Data Area ....................................................................................................6
1.5.7 Basic Operation Area ..............................................................................................6
1.5.8 Digital Button or Analog Bar Diagram Display Area.................................................6
1.5.9 Auxiliary Operation Area..........................................................................................7
1.5.10 Switchover Button Area .........................................................................................7
1.5.11 Tag Description ......................................................................................................8
1.5.12 Operation Authority of Panel .................................................................................8
1.5.13 Operator Keyboard Operation ...............................................................................8
1.5.14 Function Block Panel Example..............................................................................8

Section 2 Control Function Block Library ................................................................................14

2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block.........................................................................14

2.1.1 Mode And Parameter Status (MODE) ...................................................................14
2.1.2 Input Process ........................................................................................................17
2.1.3 Set Variable Process .............................................................................................19
2.1.4 Operation Process.................................................................................................20

1
 Table of Contents

2.1.5 Output Process......................................................................................................26

2.1.6 Alarm .....................................................................................................................27
2.1.7 Others ...................................................................................................................31
2.1.8 PID Parameter Tune..............................................................................................32
2.1.9 Difference between Various PID Function Blocks .................................................35
2.2 General PID Function Block (PID) ...................................................................................35
2.2.1 Parameter Instruction ............................................................................................36
2.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................47
2.2.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................52
2.2.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................53
2.3 PIDEP Function Block (PIDEP) .......................................................................................59
2.3.1 Parameter Instruction ............................................................................................59
2.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................69
2.3.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................72
2.3.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................73
2.4 Extended PID Control Function Block (PIDEX) ...............................................................74
2.4.1 Parameters Instruction ..........................................................................................75
2.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................85
2.4.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................90
2.4.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................91
2.5 EPID Control Function Block (EPID) ...............................................................................96
2.5.1 Parameters Instruction ..........................................................................................96
2.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................100
2.5.3 Application Example ............................................................................................102
2.6 LEPID Function Block (LEPID)......................................................................................103
2.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................103
2.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................108
2.6.3 Flag ..................................................................................................................... 110
2.6.4 Application Example ............................................................................................ 110
2.7 PID for Pulse Output Function Block (PID_TP) ............................................................. 110
2.7.1 Parameter Instruction .......................................................................................... 111
2.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................121
2.7.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................125
2.8 Pulse PI Control Function Block (PI_PLS).....................................................................126
2.8.1 Parameter Description.........................................................................................126
2.8.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................137
2.8.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................141

2
 Table of Contents

2.9 Integral of Manual Set PD Function Block (PD_SI) .......................................................142

2.9.1 Parameter Description.........................................................................................142
2.9.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................152
2.9.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................156
2.10 Error Cumulation PI Control Function Block (PI_AE)...................................................157
2.10.1 Parameter Description.......................................................................................157
2.10.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................169
2.10.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................173
2.11 Ratio Control Function Block (RATIO) .........................................................................174
2.11.1 Parameter Description .......................................................................................174
2.11.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................181
2.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................183
2.11.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................184
2.12 Split Control Function Block (SPLIT) ...........................................................................187
2.12.1 Parameter Description.......................................................................................187
2.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................194
2.12.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................196
2.12.4 Application Example1 ........................................................................................197
2.12.5 Application Example 2 .......................................................................................199
2.13 Handheld Function Block (MANUAL) ..........................................................................204
2.13.1 Parameters Instruction ......................................................................................205
2.13.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................210
2.13.3 Flag ................................................................................................................... 211
2.13.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................212
2.14 Electric Manual Operation Function Block (MANUAL_EP)..........................................213
2.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................214
2.14.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................221
2.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................223
2.14.4 Example ............................................................................................................224
2.15 Maximum Selection Function Block (ASH) ..................................................................226
2.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................226
2.15.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................230
2.15.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................231
2.16 Minimum Selection Function Block (ASL)....................................................................232
2.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................232
2.16.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................236
2.16.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................237

3
 Table of Contents

2.16.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................237

2.17 Signal Distribution Function Block (FOUT) ..................................................................240
2.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................240
2.17.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................248
2.17.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................251
2.17.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................251

Section 3 Logical Control Function Block Library ................................................................254

3.1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block (SPO) ..............................................254

3.2 Digital Status Change Function Block (DSCA) ..............................................................256
3.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................256
3.2.2 Application Example ............................................................................................257
3.3 Switch Status Time Accumulation Function Block (SSTA) .............................................258
3.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................258
3.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................260
3.4 Eight Input QOR Function Block (QOR_8) ....................................................................261
3.4.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................261
3.4.2 Application Example ............................................................................................262
3.5 Digital First SN Indicator Function Block (FIRST)..........................................................263
3.6 Blink Function Block (BLINK) ........................................................................................265
3.7 Interval Control Function Block (DGAP) ........................................................................266
3.7.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................266
3.7.2 Parameters Description of Panel.........................................................................272
3.7.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................273
3.8 Pulse Position Function Block (PULPOS) .....................................................................274
3.8.1 Logic Time Sequencing .......................................................................................275
3.9 Motor Control Function Block (MOTOR)........................................................................276
3.9.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................276
3.9.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ................................................................................285
3.9.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................286
3.9.4 Example Application ............................................................................................287
3.10 Valve Control Function Block (VALVE) ........................................................................288
3.10.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................289
3.10.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................293
3.10.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................296
3.10.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................297
3.10.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................298

4
 Table of Contents

3.11 Two Outputs Balance Control Function Block (BALANCE)..........................................300

3.11.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................300
3.11.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................304
3.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................305
3.12 Single DI/DO Start/Stop Control Function Block (DIO-11M) ........................................305
3.12.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................305
3.12.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................307
3.12.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................309
3.12.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................310
3.12.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................310
3.13 Single DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-11V).........................................312
3.13.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................312
3.13.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................314
3.13.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................317
3.13.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................317
3.13.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................318
3.14 Dual-DI and Single DO Start & Stop Function Block (DIO-21M)..................................319
3.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................320
3.14.2 Logical Control ..................................................................................................321
3.14.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................324
3.14.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................324
3.14.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................325
3.15 Dual-DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-21V)...........................................327
3.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................327
3.15.2 Logical Control ..................................................................................................329
3.15.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................332
3.15.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................332
3.15.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................333
3.16 Dual-DI Start/Stop Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2M) ..........................................335
3.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................335
3.16.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................336
3.16.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................336
3.17 Dual-DI Switch Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2V)................................................337
3.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................337
3.17.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................338
3.17.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................338
3.17.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................339

5
 Table of Contents

3.18 Interlock Function Block (INTERLOCK).......................................................................340

3.18.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................340
3.18.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................341
3.18.3 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................341
3.18.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................342
3.19 Digital Setting Function Block (DSET_DI_EP).............................................................342
3.19.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................343
3.19.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................343
3.19.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................344
3.19.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................344
3.19.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................344
3.20 Control Function Block for Single Output (DIO-01V) ...................................................346
3.20.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................346
3.20.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................346
3.20.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................348
3.20.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................348
3.20.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................349
3.21 Digital Interlock Function Block (LOCK16) ..................................................................350
3.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................351
3.21.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................353
3.22 Dual-DI/ Dual-DO Switch Control Function Block (DIO-22V).......................................353
3.22.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................354
3.22.2 Logic Control .....................................................................................................355
3.22.3 Panel Parameter ...............................................................................................358
3.22.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................359

Section 4 Analog Processing Function Block Library ..........................................................361

4.1 Integral Function Block(INTEGRAL)..............................................................................361

4.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................361
4.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................364
4.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................365
4.2 Differential Function Block (DIFF)..................................................................................366
4.3 Nonlinear Error Calculation Function Block (DEV) ........................................................366
4.4 H Limit Alarm Function Block (HIGHMON) ....................................................................368
4.5 L Limit Alarm Function Block (LOWMON)......................................................................369
4.6 H/L Limit Delay Alarm Function Block (HLMON) ...........................................................369
4.7 Leading and Hysteresis Function Block (LDLAG) .........................................................370

6
 Table of Contents

4.8 Pure Hysteresis Function Block (DED)..........................................................................374

4.9 Deadband Function Block (DB) .....................................................................................375
4.10 Steam Compensation Function Block (STMCOMP) ....................................................376
4.10.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................376
4.10.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................379
4.11 Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMP) ..................................................379
4.12 Limiting Function Block (LIM) ......................................................................................380
4.13 Filter function Block (FILTER)......................................................................................381
4.13.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................381
4.13.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................383
4.14 Statistic Function Block (STAT)....................................................................................384
4.15 Hysteresis Compare Function Block (CMP_LAG) .......................................................385
4.16 Error Alarm Function Block (DVALM) ..........................................................................386
4.17 Signal Generation Function Block (SGNLGEN) ..........................................................387
4.18 Water Enthalpy Compensation Function Block (ENTHALPY) .....................................388
4.19 Natural Gas Compensation Function Block (GASCOMP) ...........................................389
4.20 Air Compensation Function Block (ATMCOMP) ..........................................................397
4.21 Linearization Function Block (FXY) .............................................................................404
4.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................404
4.21.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................408
4.21.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................410
4.21.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................410
4.22 Indication Function Block (PVI) ................................................................................... 411
4.22.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................ 411
4.22.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................416
4.22.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................417
4.23 Segment Signal Generate Function Block (CURVE) ...................................................417
4.24 Text Calculation Function Block (CALC) ......................................................................420
4.24.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................421
4.24.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................422
4.25 Text Logic Calculation Function Block(ACTION) .........................................................426
4.26 Extended Indicator Function Block (PVIEX) ................................................................428
4.26.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................429
4.26.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................435
4.26.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................437
4.26.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................438
4.27 Extended Linearization Chart Functional Block (FXYEX) ............................................438

7
 Table of Contents

4.27.1 Parameter instruction ........................................................................................438

4.27.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................445
4.27.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................450
4.28 Alarm Auto Track Function Block (ALMTR) .................................................................450
4.29 Extended Integral Function Block (INTEGRALX) ........................................................451
4.29.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................452
4.29.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................456
4.29.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................458
4.29.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................458
4.30 Extended Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMPX) ...............................459
4.30.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................460
4.30.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................461
4.31 Setting Function Block (DSET)....................................................................................463
4.31.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................464
4.31.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................467
4.31.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................468
4.32 Setting Function Block (DSET_EP) .............................................................................468
4.32.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................469
4.32.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................470
4.32.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................470
4.33 Ramp Function Block (RAMP).....................................................................................471
4.34 Date Timer Function Block (DATETIMER)...................................................................472
4.35 Moving-average Block (AVE_M)..................................................................................473
4.36 Sampling Function Block (SAMPLE) ...........................................................................475

Section 5 Selection Function Block Library User Manual.....................................................478

5.1 Two to One Selector Function Block (TWOSEL) ...........................................................478

5.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................478
5.1.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................481
5.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................482
5.2 Select One of Three Options Function Block (THRSEL) ...............................................482
5.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................482
5.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................485
5.2.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................486
5.3 Eight Input Signal Select Function Block (ISEL8)..........................................................486
5.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................487
5.3.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................489

8
 Table of Contents

5.3.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................490

5.3.4 Application Example ............................................................................................491
5.4 Digital Switch Function Block (DS) ................................................................................492
5.5 Analog Switch Function Block (ASW) ............................................................................492
5.6 Multi-choice of Eight Digital Signal Select Function Block (SS8) ...................................493
5.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................493
5.6.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................495
5.6.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................496
5.7 USINT Select Function Block (USINTSW) ....................................................................496
5.8 UINT Select Function Block (UNITSW) .........................................................................497
5.9 UDINT Select Function Block (UDINTSW) ....................................................................497
5.10 SINT Select Function Block (SINTSW)........................................................................498
5.11 INT Select Function Block (INTSW).............................................................................498
5.12 DINT Select Function Block (DINTSW) .......................................................................499
5.13 16-channel Digital Selection Function Block (BSEL16) ...............................................499
5.14 Extended Two Input Signal Selector Function Block (TWOSELX) ..............................501
5.14.1 Prameter Instruction ..........................................................................................501
5.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................504
5.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................505
5.14.4 Application Example..........................................................................................505
5.15 Extended Three Input Signal Selector Function Block (THRSELX).............................507
5.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................507
5.15.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ................................................................... 511
5.15.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................512
5.15.4 Application Example..........................................................................................512
5.16 Maximum Selection Function Block (THRSELH).........................................................514
5.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................514
5.16.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................517
5.17 Median Selection Function Block (THRSELM) ............................................................517
5.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................518
5.17.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................520
5.18 Minimum Selection Function Block (THRSELL) ..........................................................521
5.18.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................521
5.18.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................524

Section 6 Arithmetic Function Block Library .........................................................................525

6.1 ADD Function Block (ADD)............................................................................................525

9
 Table of Contents

6.2 Eight-Channel ADD Function Block (ADD8) ..................................................................525

6.3 Subtraction Function Block (SUB) .................................................................................526
6.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................526
6.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................527
6.4 (Multiplication) Function Block (MUL) ............................................................................528
6.5 Division Function Block (DIV) ........................................................................................529
6.6 Square Root Function Block (SQRT).............................................................................530
6.7 Absolute Value Function Block (ABS)............................................................................530
6.8 EXP Function Block (EXP) ............................................................................................531
6.9 POW Function Block (POW) .........................................................................................531
6.10 Natural Logarithm Function Block (LN)........................................................................532
6.11 Logarithm Function Block (LOG) .................................................................................532
6.12 Module Function Block (MOD) ....................................................................................533
6.13 Polynomial Function Block (POLY)..............................................................................534
6.14 DINT to REAL Function Block (DINT2REAL) ..............................................................534
6.15 REAL to DINT Function Block (REAL2DINT) ..............................................................535
6.16 DOUBLE to REAL Function Block (DOUBLE2REAL)..................................................535
6.17 INT to REAL Function Block (INT2REAL)....................................................................536
6.18 REAL to INT Function Block (REAL2INT)....................................................................536
6.19 REAL to LREAL Function Block (REAL2LREAL).........................................................537
6.20 LREAL to REAL Function Block (LREAL2REAL).........................................................537
6.21 SINT to INT Function Block (SINT2INT) ......................................................................538
6.22 INT to SINT Function Block (INT2SINT) ......................................................................538
6.23 UDINT to DINT Function Block (UDINT2DINT) ...........................................................538
6.24 DINT to UDINT Function Block (DINT2UDINT) ...........................................................539
6.25 UNIT to INT Function Block (UNIT2INT)......................................................................539
6.26 INT to UNIT Function Block (INT2UNIT)......................................................................540
6.27 USINT to SINT Function Block (USINT2SINT) ............................................................540
6.28 SINT to USINT Function Block (SINT2USINT) ............................................................540
6.29 INT to DINT Function Block (INT2DINT)......................................................................541
6.30 DINT to INT Function Block (DINT2INT)......................................................................541
6.31 BOOL Assignment Sentence Function Block (MOV_BOOL) .......................................542
6.32 SINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_SINT)...........................................................542
6.33 INT Assignment Function Block (MOV_INT) ...............................................................543
6.34 DINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_DINT) ..........................................................543
6.35 REAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_REAL) ........................................................544
6.36 LREAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_LREAL) ....................................................544

10
 Table of Contents

6.37 UNIT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UNIT) ..........................................................545

6.38 UDINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UDINT) .....................................................545
6.39 USINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_USINT)......................................................546
6.40 Matrix Add Function Block (MADD) .............................................................................546
6.41 Matrix Multiply Function Block (MMUL) .......................................................................549
6.42 UNIT Add Function Block (ADD_UNIT) .......................................................................551
6.43 INT Add Function Block (ADD_INT) ............................................................................552
6.44 UNIT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_UNIT) ...........................................................552
6.45 INT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_INT).................................................................553

Section 7 Logical Operation Function Block Library ............................................................554

7.1 AND Function Block.......................................................................................................554

7.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................554
7.1.2 Example ..............................................................................................................554
7.2 OR Function Block.........................................................................................................554
7.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................555
7.2.2 Application Example ............................................................................................555
7.3 NOT Function Block ......................................................................................................555
7.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................555
7.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................556
7.4 XOR Function Block ......................................................................................................556
7.5 AND8 Function Block.....................................................................................................556
7.6 OR8 Function Block.......................................................................................................557
7.7 WIPEOUT Function Block .............................................................................................558
7.8 PVDI Function Block......................................................................................................559
7.8.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................559
7.8.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................560
7.8.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................561
7.9 RS Function Block .........................................................................................................561
7.10 SR Function Block .......................................................................................................562
7.11 DFF Function Block .....................................................................................................563
7.12 COUNTER Function Block ..........................................................................................565
7.13 TRIG Function Block ...................................................................................................566
7.14 TON Function Block ....................................................................................................567
7.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................567
7.14.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................568
7.15 TOFF Function Block...................................................................................................569

11
 Table of Contents

7.16 TP Function Block .......................................................................................................570

7.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................570
7.16.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................570
7.17 TIMER Function Block.................................................................................................570
7.18 TON_HOLD Function Block.........................................................................................571
7.19 TP_TR Function Block.................................................................................................572
7.20 TIMEREX Function Block ............................................................................................573
7.20.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................573
7.21 Bypass Monitoring Function Block (MOS_SOR_WD) .................................................574
7.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................574
7.21.2 Usage................................................................................................................575
7.21.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................577
7.21.4 Examples...........................................................................................................578

Section 8 Comparison Function Block Library ......................................................................579

8.1 NE Function Block .........................................................................................................579

8.2 EQ Function Block.........................................................................................................579
8.3 GT Function Block .........................................................................................................580
8.4 GE Function Block.........................................................................................................580
8.5 LT Function Block ..........................................................................................................581
8.6 LE Function Block..........................................................................................................581
8.7 NE_INT Function Block .................................................................................................582
8.8 EQ_INT Function Block .................................................................................................582
8.9 GT_INT Function Block .................................................................................................583
8.10 GE_INT Function Block ...............................................................................................583
8.11 LT_INT Function Block.................................................................................................584
8.12 LE_INT Function Block................................................................................................584
8.13 NE_UNIT Function Block.............................................................................................584
8.14 EQ_UNIT Function Block ............................................................................................585
8.15 GT_UNIT Function Block.............................................................................................585
8.16 GE_UNIT Function Block ............................................................................................586
8.17 LT_UNIT Function Block..............................................................................................586
8.18 LE_UNIT Function Block .............................................................................................587

Section 9 I/O Special Process Function Block Library..........................................................588

9.1 PATCON Function Block................................................................................................588

9.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................588

12
 Table of Contents

9.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................595

9.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................596
9.2 TC_CJC Function Block ................................................................................................597
9.3 CABALM Function Block ...............................................................................................598
9.4 PIACCUM Function Block .............................................................................................599
9.4.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................600
9.4.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................601
9.4.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................602
9.4.4 Application Example ............................................................................................602
9.5 SOEACCUM Function Block .........................................................................................603
9.5.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................603
9.5.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................605
9.5.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................606
9.5.4 Application Example ............................................................................................606
9.6 IO_FLAG Function Block...............................................................................................606
9.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................607
9.6.2 Application Example............................................................................................608
9.7 TC_CJCX Function Block..............................................................................................610
9.8 PTM Function block....................................................................................................... 611
9.9 HCM Function Block......................................................................................................617
9.10 SSIM Function Block ...................................................................................................621
9.11 PI_MIG Function Block (Calculation PI Signal Process)..............................................624
9.11.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................625
9.11.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................627
9.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................628
9.12 PAT_MIG Function Block (PAT Position Adjust Function Block) ..................................628
9.12.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................628
9.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................634
9.12.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................635
9.13 SERVO_MIG Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module) .......................................635
9.14 SERVOCON Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module) ........................................639
9.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................639
9.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................644
9.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................645
9.15 SPEED_MIG Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed Protect Module) .......646
9.16 SPEEDTST Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed Protect Module) .........647
9.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................648

13
 Table of Contents

9.16.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................651

9.17 MODULECOMM Function Block .................................................................................651
9.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................651
9.18 CANCOMM Function Block .........................................................................................653
9.19 Cold Startup Function Block (COLD_START)..............................................................654

Section 10 Sequence Control Function Block .......................................................................656

10.1 SQC Function Block ....................................................................................................656

10.2 STP Function Block .....................................................................................................658
10.2.1 Flag ...................................................................................................................666
10.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................666
10.2.3 Program Example..............................................................................................667

Section 11 Communication Auxiliary Function Block Library ..............................................668

11.1 BCD2DEC Function Block ...........................................................................................668

11.2 DEC2BCD Function Block ...........................................................................................669
11.3 HEX2DEC Function Block ...........................................................................................670
11.4 DEC2HEX Function Block ...........................................................................................670
11.5 BIN2BCD Function Block.............................................................................................671
11.6 BCD2BIN Function Block.............................................................................................672
11.7 BLOGIC_16 Function Block.........................................................................................672
11.8 BLOGIC_32 Function Block.........................................................................................674
11.9 LSH_16 Function Block ...............................................................................................675
11.10 LSH_32 Function Block .............................................................................................676
11.11 RSH_16 Function Block .............................................................................................677
11.12 RSH_32 Function Block.............................................................................................678
11.13 ASCTRAN Function Block .........................................................................................678
11.14 ASCPARSE Function Block .......................................................................................679
11.15 USIPARSE Function Block ........................................................................................680
11.16 GETUDI Function Block.............................................................................................680
11.17 REALTRAN Function Block .......................................................................................681
11.18 UNITPARSE Function Block ......................................................................................681
11.18.1 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................682
11.18.2 Application Example ........................................................................................682
11.19 UDINTPARSE Function Block ...................................................................................686
11.20 BOOL2UDINT Function Block ...................................................................................687
11.21 Parse REAL to UDINT Function Block (SREAL_UDINT) ...........................................689

14
 Table of Contents

11.22 Parse UDINT to REAL Function Block (GREAL_UDINT) ..........................................690

Section 12 Inter-station Communication Function Block Library ........................................691

12.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................691
12.2 SEND_MIX Function Block..........................................................................................692
12.2.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................692
12.2.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................693
12.3 GET_MIX Function Block ............................................................................................696
12.3.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................696
12.3.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................698
12.4 SEND_REAL Function Block.......................................................................................698
12.5 GET_REAL Function Block .........................................................................................699
12.6 SENDSPEC Function Block ........................................................................................700
12.7 GETSPEC Function Block...........................................................................................702
12.8 UDINT Data Inter-station Send Function Block (SEND_UDINT) .................................703
12.9 UDINT Data Inter-station Get Function Block (GET_UDINT) ......................................705
12.10 Inter-station Communication Programming Example ................................................706

Section 13 Industrial Function Block Library.........................................................................708

13.1 Fuzzy Control Function Block(FLC).............................................................................708

13.1.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................708
13.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................717
13.1.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................721
13.1.4 Programming Example for Application ..............................................................722
13.2 Predictive Function Control Function Block For Single Variable(PFC) ........................722
13.2.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................723
13.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................730
13.2.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................734
13.2.4 Prediction Control Algorithm ..............................................................................735
13.2.5 Method of Place in Service................................................................................736
13.3 PID Self-tune Function Block (PID_TUN) ....................................................................736
13.3.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................737
13.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................748
13.3.3 PID Parameters Self-Tuning..............................................................................753
13.3.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................754
13.3.5 Programming Example For Apply......................................................................754
13.4 SMITH Predictor Function Block (SMITH) ...................................................................755

15
 Table of Contents

13.4.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................755

13.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................764
13.4.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................768
13.4.4 Programming Example For Apply......................................................................769
13.4.5 Matters Need Attention......................................................................................769
13.5 Branches Balance Control of Oil Furnace Function Block (BALANCE8) .....................769
13.5.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................771
13.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................790
13.5.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................800
13.5.4 HMI Parameters ................................................................................................801
13.5.5 Define branch running status (RUN_STAT) .......................................................801
13.5.6 Define Branch Mode (RUN_MODE)..................................................................802
13.5.7 Switch Mode......................................................................................................802
13.5.8 Programming Instruction For Apply ...................................................................806
13.5.9 Algorithm ...........................................................................................................807
13.5.10 Keep Difference (Only Valid for Differential Method) .......................................814
13.5.11 Dead Zone.......................................................................................................814
13.6 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block(MOTOR_PT) ..............................814
13.6.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................815
13.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................817
13.6.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................818
13.6.4 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................818
13.7 Positive/Negative Rotating Motor Control with Position Limit Function Block
(MOTOR_FM) .....................................................................................................................819
13.7.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................819
13.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................822
13.7.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................823
13.7.4 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................823
13.7.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................824
13.8 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block With Simulation Function
(MOTOR_SIM) ....................................................................................................................827
13.8.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................828
13.8.2 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................832
13.8.3 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................833
13.9 Valve Control Function Block With Simulation Function (DIO21V_SIM)......................833
13.9.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................834
13.9.2 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................837

16
 Table of Contents

Section 14 FF Standard Function Block Library ....................................................................839

14.1 FOUNDATION Overview .................................................................................................839

14.1.1 Modes ...............................................................................................................839
14.1.2 I/O Block Channel Setting .................................................................................841
14.1.3 Failsafe Function ...............................................................................................841
14.1.4 Process Alarm ...................................................................................................841
14.1.5 Extend Pin .........................................................................................................842
14.1.6 Function Block Options .....................................................................................843
14.2 Status Process.............................................................................................................844
14.2.1 Pin Status Instruction ........................................................................................845
14.2.2 Notice of FF and DCS Blocks............................................................................848
14.3 FFAI.............................................................................................................................849
14.3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................849
14.3.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................849
14.3.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................854
14.3.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................857
14.4 FFPID ..........................................................................................................................858
14.4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................858
14.4.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................858
14.4.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................869
14.4.4 Algorithm ...........................................................................................................869
14.4.5 Flag ...................................................................................................................871
14.5 FFAO ...........................................................................................................................873
14.5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................873
14.5.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................873
14.5.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................879
14.5.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................881
14.6 FFDI ............................................................................................................................882
14.6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................882
14.6.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................882
14.6.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................885
14.6.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................886
14.7 FFDO...........................................................................................................................888
14.7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................888
14.7.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................888
14.7.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................892

17
 Table of Contents

14.7.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................893

14.8 FFARTHM....................................................................................................................894
14.8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................894
14.8.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................894
14.8.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................899
14.8.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................902
14.9 FFCTLSL.....................................................................................................................904
14.9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................904
14.9.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................904
14.9.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................909
14.9.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................910
14.10 FFCUSTOM...............................................................................................................912
14.10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................912
14.10.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................912
14.10.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................917
14.10.4 Flag .................................................................................................................917
14.11 FFINT ........................................................................................................................918
14.11.1 Overview..........................................................................................................918
14.11.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................918
14.11.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................925
14.11.4 Flag..................................................................................................................929
14.12 FFISEL ......................................................................................................................930
14.12.1 Overview .........................................................................................................930
14.12.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................930
14.12.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................936
14.12.4 Flag .................................................................................................................937
14.13 FFISEL_EX ...............................................................................................................938
14.13.1 Overview .........................................................................................................938
14.13.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................938
14.13.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................944
14.13.4 Flag .................................................................................................................945
14.14 FFMAI........................................................................................................................946
14.14.1 Overview .........................................................................................................946
14.14.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................946
14.14.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................951
14.14.4 Flag .................................................................................................................952
14.15 FFMAO......................................................................................................................953

18
 Table of Contents

14.15.1 Overview .........................................................................................................953

14.15.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................953
14.15.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................958
14.15.4 Flag .................................................................................................................958
14.16 FFMDI .......................................................................................................................960
14.16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................960
14.16.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................960
14.16.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................964
14.16.4 Flag .................................................................................................................965
14.17 FFMDO......................................................................................................................966
14.17.1 Overview .........................................................................................................966
14.17.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................966
14.17.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................970
14.17.4 Flag .................................................................................................................971
14.18 FFSGCR....................................................................................................................972
14.18.1 Overview .........................................................................................................972
14.18.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................972
14.18.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................979
14.18.4 Flag .................................................................................................................981
14.19 FFSPLIT ....................................................................................................................981
14.19.1 Overview .........................................................................................................981
14.19.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................982
14.19.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................988
14.19.4 Flag .................................................................................................................990

Section 15 Revision..................................................................................................................992

19
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Reference

Section 1 Overview
The function block library includes 4 categories: system function block library, industry function
block library, user function block library and FF standard function block library. System function
block library contains control function block library, logical control function block library, analog
process function block library, select calculation function block library, arithmetic calculation
function block library, logical operation function block library, communication auxiliary function
block library, inter-station communication function block library, sequence control function block
library, IO special processing function block library and comparison function block library.

Industry function block library contains 9 industry function blocks which are aimed at industry
character design. It can effectively improve the effect of the control over specific character.

User function block library contains the application-special blocks which are designed by the users
themselves.

FF (Foundation Fieldbus) function block is basic unit for control project building control application
in FF fieldbus.

1.1 Work Mode of Function Block

There are six work modes for function block, from high priority to low priority: OOS (out of service),
IMAN (initial value), TR (Track), MAN (manual), AUTO (automatic), CAS (cascade).

Six running statuses are mutual exclusive and a function block is only in one status.

Function blocks can be set five work modes: OOS (out of service), TR (track), MAN (manual),
AUTO (automatic), CAS (cascade). Work mode cannot be set IMAN status.

1.1.1 OOS (Out of Service)

When the function block is in OOS status, calculation is stopped and output is kept the set value
(previous period or security value). However, data multicast, parameter validity check and
redundancy process proceed forward. When the function block is downloaded first time, OOS
status is suggested.

1.1.2 Initial Status (IMAN)

The function block is in initial status when conditions below are reached:

1
 Function Block Reference

1. When AO function block connected with pre-positive control function block is in manual,
track or AO tag fault status, pre-positive control function block is in initial status.

2. When two control function blocks are constructed cascaded loop, if postposition is in
non-cascade status, pre-positive control function block is in initial status.

When a function block is in initial status, its output tracks inversion calculating input value (BKIN)
of the function block. BKIN should be connected with inversion calculating output value (BKOUT)
of postposition. In this case, the function block only can be transferred to OOS mode.

1.1.3 Track (TR)

If high priority mode is not achieved, when the track switch SWTR is ON, it is in track mode and
output tracks input track value.

SWTR is set by input or output of other function blocks.

1.1.4 Manual (MAN)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is OFF,
the function block is in manual mode and the output value can be set manually.

1.1.5 Auto (AUTO)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is ON and
SWSV is OFF, the function block is in auto mode and the control arithmetic can be operated and
output.

1.1.6 Cascade (CAS)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is ON and
SWSV is ON, the function block is in sequence mode. Meanwhile, the set value of the function
block is equal to setting value of cascade and the control arithmetic can be operated.

1.2 Active/Inactive

There are two flags for each function block: Input active/Close flag and output active/Close flag.

The function block cannot deal with the Active/InActive flag and the two flags are responded by
FBD program. When a function block is in status of input close, all inputs are not updated by
program; When a function block is in status of output close, the function block is implemented and
output normally. However, its output is not updated to input of postposition function block (output
value of postposition function block is not updated by program).

After the function block is downloaded to the main controller, its input and output can be set close
in FBD software. In status of input close, input of the function block can be set forced and the

2
 Function Block Reference

function block logic can be debugged, in which way to find out if it is right. In status of output close,
the debug does not bump the field.

Note: It may destroy the running process status and the output may be bumped when it is
transferred from the close status to the active status. The engineer should select an appropriate
time to transfer.

1.3 Data Type

Table 1-1 Data Type Parameter List

Type Byte Range of Data Explain

BOOL 1 ON/OFF 0=OFF, Not 0=ON
USINT 1 0~255 -
SINT 1 -128~127 -
UNIT 2 0~65535 -
INT 2 -32768~32767 -
UDINT 4 0~4294967295 -
-2147483648~214748364
DINT 4 -
7
Exponential term is 8 digit, and
REAL 4  (~ 10 44.85 ~ 10 38.53 )
fraction term is 23 digit
Exponential term is 11digit, and
LREAL 8  (~ 10 323.3 ~ 10 308.3 )
fraction term is 52 digit

1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block

Function block parameter includes operation parameter, config parameter, supervising parameter,
alarm parameter, input pin and output parameter.

 Operation parameter

 Normally, the function block panels can be used to set parameter while the system
is running. Specific to every block, it depends on the working mode of the function
block.

 Config parameter

 Config parameter can be set while FBD programming. While programming, the
parameter can be set in the Properties window of the function block.

 Supervising parameter

 Supervising parameter can be showed by supervising image or panel. Whether to

show it or not can be set in the Properties window of the function block.

 Alarm parameter

3
 Function Block Reference

 Enable/disable the alarm of all kinds of parameters. It can be selected in the

Properties window of the function block.

 Input/ output parameter

 To find out the characters which are connected to input/ output pins, refer to line
“Link Reference” in Table 2-3 Experience data for controller parameter.

Attention:

Except for config parameter, parameters can be set during debug.

Function block Properties setting interface is divided into Basic Parameters and expansion
parameter, for normal PID control there is only need for Basic Parameters setting.

1.5 Function Block Panel

Function block evolves from instrument panel, which includes information list of function block and
operation commands of operators. It has three functions: monitor and modify status and
parameters of function block, set parameters and operation and switch to different supervision
panels.

Only complicated function block (the function block which can be named when configuration)
possesses function block panel, does not simple function block.

4
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-1 Window of panel layout of function block and function block pane

1.5.1 Fixed Button

The button is on the top right of the pop-up panel. When click the button , it will become and
the panel will always be on top.

1.5.2 Close Button

The button is on the top right of the panel and there is no close button on the panel of control
group display.

1.5.3 FB Tag Name

Tag name or instance name of function block will be displayed in the part of tag instance name,
which is used to distinguish function blocks.

5
 Function Block Reference

1.5.4 Selected, Alarm, ACK

Select: Select the panel to be operated currently.

Alarm: Indicate alarm status of the tag which the panel corresponds to.

ACK: Alarm acknowledgement of corresponding tags is implemented.

1.5.5 Detailed Information of Alarm

Display the current alarm information (such as HH, LL and so on) and status (such as manual,
auto, cascade and OOS, etc.) of tags or function blocks.

1.5.6 Analog Data Area

Display value and unit of analogy in tag or function block, for example, PV, MV, SV in PID function
block.

1.5.7 Basic Operation Area

Basic operation of operators area in tag or function block, which includes manual , auto ,

cascade , is used to set work status of function block.

1.5.8 Digital Button or Analog Bar Diagram Display Area

 Digital data: display digital value by bottom. Text likes “ON” or “OFF” will be shown on the
button. DI and DO button color can be set when configuring tag.

 Analog data: Real-time values of import parameters are dynamically displayed in form of
histogram. High and low span values are displayed on two sides of scale. There are also
marks of HH Limit, high Limit, low Limit and LL Limit.

Color of bar diagram is same with alarm status of function block or tag. As shown below,
the bar diagram is green because there parameter has no alarm.

6
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-2 Trend display

Color of bar diagram is shown by following rules:

 If tag only has H limit alarm, color of bar diagram is shown as configured in monitoring
configuration for H limit alarm.

 If tag has H/ HH limit alarms together, color of bar diagram is shown as configured in
monitoring configuration for HH limit alarm.

 Other alarms are also shown in the same manner.

1.5.9 Auxiliary Operation Area

Data can be operated by keyboard besides by basic operation buttons.

1. Fast-increased button: set the percentage when configuring function block properties.
The default value is 2.5%.

2. Slowly-increased button: set the percentage when configuring function block

properties. The default value is 0.25%.

3. Slowly-decreased button: its value is the same as the slowly-increased value.

4. Fast-decreased button: its value is the same as the fast-increased value.

1.5.10 Switchover Button Area

There are 5 switchover buttons at the bottom of the panel, from left to right, logic diagram, graphics
button, trend display button, Alarm view button and tuning panel:

Figure 1-3 Switchover buttons

1. Logic diagram button: Pop up the logic diagram associated with tag (set in
VFFBDBuilder). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in logic diagram.

2. Graphics button: Pop up graphics associated with the tag (set in supervision
configuration). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in graphics.

3. Trend display button: Pop up trend display associated with the tag (set in supervision
configuration). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in trend.

4. Alarm view button: Pop up history alarm table.

5. Tuning window button: Pop up tuning panel of the tag.

7
 Function Block Reference

1.5.11 Tag Description

Display description information of the tag or function block. It includes 64 English characters or 32
Chinese characters.

1.5.12 Operation Authority of Panel

There are operation authorities for each parameter in panel or tuning panel, which can be set in
panel authority setting of supervision configuration software.

There are ten Authorities, including: unavailable, operator-, operator, operator+, engineer-,
engineer, engineer+, privilege-, privilege, privilege+.

1.5.13 Operator Keyboard Operation

Some parameters can be operated by operator keyboard:

DO digital operation, fast-increased and fast-decreased of function block operation

and tuning panel switch.

1.5.14 Function Block Panel Example

PID Tuning Panel is shown as follow.

8
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-4 PID tuning panel

Main operations can be implemented on function block panel is shown as follows:

1. Status Switch

Click , , , to switch work status. As shown in Figure 1-3 the function

block is in the status of auto, and the status area displays “AUTO”.

2. Set Value for SV&MV

The value of SV can be set in the status of auto while the value of MV can be set in the status of
manual. Two modes of setting value are shown as follows:

9
 Function Block Reference

 Input the value via keyboard and then press “Enter”.

 Click to set value. , are fast increase buttons, , are fast

decrease buttons. The fast increase/decrease values are set in the function block
properties interface. As default, click once to increase by 2.5% of range, click
once to increase by 0.25% of range, click once to decrease by 0.25% of range, click

once to decrease by 2.5% of range.

3. Parameter Setting

 Set parameter via select the “select box “or not.

 Modify parameter value via Input the value and press “Enter”.

 Some parameters such as HH Limit, high Limit, etc, should be selected the “select box”
first, and then the corresponding parameter will be modified, as shown in Figure 1-4.

10
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-5 Set the HH limit

4. Switchover Window

Click to switch to corresponding window. Logic diagram should be

configured in VFFBDBuilder, and graphics and trend should be configured in VFHMICfg first.

5. Alarm Acknowledgement and Alarm Shield

 Click to acknowledge alarm.

 Click to implement alarm shield or cancel alarm shield.

11
 Function Block Reference

6. Parameter Page Switch

Click to switch to each parameter page.

7. Trend View

Right-click on the trend display area of function block tuning panel, then implement trend setting in
the pop-up right-click menu, as shown in Figure 1-5. The function of commands in right-click menu
is the same as the right-click menu in trend display, please refer to Real-time Supervision Software
User Manual for the corresponding instruction.

Select “Save Custom Page” after setting, then a file (.TCP) named after a tag will be saved. In
custom page of trend, click “Read Page”, users can select this file in the pop-up dialog box of “File
Selection”, and then the trend diagram of this tag can be viewed in custom page.

12
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-6 Trend view

13
 Function Block Reference

Section 2 Control Function Block Library

The control function block library contains 16 control function blocks. They are complex function
blocks and each has corresponding function block panel, and can invoke the function block panel
in the monitoring software.

2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block

Basic work flow of control function block: is shown below.

Figure 2-1 Basic work flow of control function block

2.1.1 Mode And Parameter Status (MODE)

Corresponding parameter status in different operation modes is shown below. * can refer to any
status.

Table 2-1 Operation mode list

SWOOS BKINERR SWTR SWAM SWSV Mode MODE Value

ON * * * * OOS 1
OFF ON * * * IMAN 2

14
 Function Block Reference

SWOOS BKINERR SWTR SWAM SWSV Mode MODE Value

OFF OFF ON * * TR 3
OFF OFF OFF OFF * MAN 4
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF AUTO 5
OFF OFF OFF ON ON CAS 6

1. Operation Mode

 OOS

The output value MV is configured according to OOS_OPT in this mode. Choose to hold output or
output OOSVAL safe value.

 Initial mode (IMAN)

When feedback value and feedback status of downstream function block are connected to BKIN
and BKINERR, output will be updated according to BKOUT value of downstream function block.

Only when BKINERR1= ON and BKINERR2= ON for split control (SPLIT), function block is in
IMAN mode.

 Track (TR)

When the function block is in track mode, output is equal to the track input value TV. Output MV is
still limited. If TV value is over limit, it will be in the limit range. If TV is less than MVL, MV is equal
to MVL. If TV is greater than MVH, MV is equal to MVH.

 Manual (MAN)

Set values manually, when MV=MANMV, while the output MV is limited.

 Auto (AUTO)

Output is controlled automatically. In the AUTO mode, BKOUTERR=OFF. In other modes,

BKOUTERR=ON.

 Cascade (CAS)

The setting value CSV is from output of upstream block.

Tip: details of operation mode refer to 1.1.

2. Function Block Mode Fallback

Function block fallback can be divided to manual fallback and automatic fallback, manual fall back
can be set as default. The backup operation mode (IMODE) corresponding to each operation
mode (MODE) is only a reference for field operator.

15
 Function Block Reference

When MODE_OPT=OFF, the function block mode applies manual fallback, as shown below. The
mode in the brackets is IMODE.

Figure 2-2 Manual fallback mode of control function block

When MODE_OPT is ON, function block mode is auto fallback, shown as follows.

Figure 2-3 Automatic fallback mode of control function block

There is IMODE mode in the bracket. TR and IMAN cannot be sub-mode of OOS.

When MODE is CAS, BKOUTERR is OFF. Otherwise, BKOUTERR is ON.

No matter auto or manual back, when back occurs after cold starting the system, user must return
to manual mode.

16
 Function Block Reference

2.1.2 Input Process

Figure 2-4 Input process of control function block

Process variable alarm

There are four limit alarm for process input variables: HH limit alarm (PVHH), high limit alarm
(PVH), low limit alarm (PVL) and LL limit alarm (PVLL), which are hysteresis. When PV is greater
than or equal to PVHH, HH limit alarm and high limit alarm are generated; When PV is greater
than or equal to PVH, high limit alarm is generated; When PV is less than PVL, low limit alarm is
generated; When PV is less than or equal to PVLL, LL limit alarm and low limit alarm are
generated.

Following conditions should be reached for these four values: PVHH-PVHYS>PVH,

PVH-PVHYS>PVL+PVHYS, PVL>PVLL+PVHYS.

17
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-5 Alarm process of control function block

Input compensation

Input compensation is used to add compensation value derived outside to input signal PV
operated by control function block. The expression is:

PVR  PV  IK ( IA  IB)

Input compensation is used to improve controllability of process with long deadband.

Check Validity

Note: Only function blocks PID, PIDEX and PIDEP have the function.

Check the validity of PV after input compensation, which can exclude the PV noise signal caused
by transducer disturbance and signal transmission interference.

Enable the function via SWPV. If PV exceeds the check limit PVLMT after compensation of this
and last periods, and it happens for the first time continuously, this period is applied for holding PV
in PID calculation. There will be no filter after exceeding once continuously because the signal
may change quickly.

18
 Function Block Reference

2.1.3 Set Variable Process

Figure 2-6 Set variable process of control function block

3. Set variable track

When the control mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode or from track mode to auto
mode, there may be huge error, which cause MV fluctuate to bump. Therefore, in manual or track
mode, forced SV tracks change of PV after output compensation (PVR), which can avoid bumping
when the control mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode and from track mode to
auto mode.

In the cascade control loop, the master loop can run in auto or cascade mode. If the salve loop is
transferred from cascade mode to auto mode, the cascaded loop is open, the master loop is in
IMAN mode and the salve loop can be controlled separately. In this case, SV of the master loop
can be consistent with PV by tracking PV.

Whether process value is tracked by set value can be selected by SVTR_OPT: When SVTR_OPT
is ON, track; When SVTR_OPT is OFF, not track. When it is in not track mode, there is slight bump,
transferring from manual to auto.

If PVR is over SVH and SVL, SV is equal to range limit and not equal to PVR.

1) Set value limit and alarm

High limit of set value (SVH) must be greater than or equal to low limit of set value (SVL).
Otherwise, limit will not be processed and configuration error alarm (CFGERR) will be generated.

The set value SV is limit between high limit of set value SVH and low limit of set value SVL. When
the set value is out range of SVH and SVL, it is set as high limit or low limit and an alarm is
generated. If SVH is less than SVL, SV maintains the value of last period. Similarly, in mode of
cascade, if CSV is between SVH and SVL, SV is equal to CSV. If CSV is greater than SVH, SV is
equal to SVH. If CSV is less than SVL, SV is equal to SVL; If SVH is less than SVL, SV maintains
the value of last period.

19
 Function Block Reference

2) SV and CSV

There are two set values in the control function block, SV and CSV. When one is used, the other
will be consistent with this.

3) Ramp action of set value

Ramp action of set value indicates that in auto or cascade mode, when the set value is changed,
the set value inclines to SV according to the set ramp RAMP and RAMP is in unit of second. Ramp
action of set value is enabled or disabled by switch SWRAMP. When SWRAMP is ON, ramp action
of set value is enabled; When SWRAMP is OFF, ramp action of set value is disabled.

2.1.4 Operation Process

Figure 2-7 Operation process of control function block

1. Nonlinear gain

The function of nonlinear gain can process processes with nonlinear gain by providing a gain
contrary to the process, for example, PH control, its process gain will become very big near the
target value.

The actual proportion gain KP can be gained by revising proportion gain 100/PB nonlinearly (PB
cannot be less than 0.1).

The function block provides two kinds of nonlinear gain, including gap action and EI square action.

 Gap action

When deviation EI is in the set nonlinear gain range GW, whose range is ［SCSCL-SVSCH］, the
actual proportion gain KP is 100.0/PB*KN, KN is gain factor whose valid range is [0.0, 1.0].

20
 Function Block Reference

When deviation EI is out of the nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain is

 EI square action

When deviation EI is in the set nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain is

When deviation EI is out nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain KP is 100.0/PB.

Gap action (NGN_OPT=ON) and EI square action (NGN_OPT=OFF) can be selected by the
nonlinear gain option parameter NGN_OPT.

1) Deviation deadband action

Some process control system, such as tank level control system, is not required to control the tank
level at the set value accurately and the tank level can change in the set range. In this case,
deviation deadband action is introduced to avoid adjustment valve acting frequently and system
oscillation.

When absolute value of deviation EI between SV and PV is less than deviation deadband DB
minus lag value DBHYS, dMV is set 1 (except PD_SI block, MV is set 0) and output value MV is
not changed (if DB is equal to DBHYS, dMV is not 0 for the action of deviation deadband); When
deviation EI is greater than DB, the deadband action is disabled and output value is added dMV,
shown as follows.

Figure 2-8 Deviation deadband action

When the deviation deadband action switch SWDB is ON, deviation deadband action is enabled.
When SWDB is OFF, deviation deadband action is disabled.

2) Bypass action

21
 Function Block Reference

Bypass action is available only in auto or cascade mode.

When STOPI is ON, integral action is unavailable. Only PID, PI_PLS and PI_AE function block
have integral stop function.

When STOPP is ON, integral action is not available.

When bypass output is calculated (BYPASS=ON), output MV= (SV-SVSCL)* range conversion
coefficient+ MVSCL.

SV——Set value

SVSCL——Low limit of set value range,

MVSCL——Low limit of output value range.

3) PID single function stop

When STOPI=ON, the integral action is not executed, function blocks PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE, PIDEX,
PID_TP, LEPID and PIDEP have the integral stop function.

When STOPP=ON, the proportional action is not executed.

When TD is 0, the derivative action is disabled.

Similarly, P, I action controlled in PI_PLS and PI_AE can be disabled. P, D action controlled in
PD_SI can be disabled. Bypass action of function blocks is available only in the control calculation
stage and does not affect these values in the holding stage.

4) Deviation process

 Direct or reverse action

When set value SV is fixed and direct action is available, increment of PV will cause MV value to
increase; when reverse action is available, increment of PV will cause MV value to decrease.
Direct action (SWPN=OFF) and reverse action (SWPN=ON) can be selected by parameter
SWPN.

When direct action is available:

EI= PV-SV;

When reverse action is available:

EIR = SVR – PVR;

 Deviation alarm

22
 Function Block Reference

When absolute value of deviation EI is greater than absolute value of set value of deviation DLp,
deviation alarm is generated. When EI is greater than DL, positive deviation alarm (PEI) is
generated. When EI is less than -DLp, negative deviation alarm (NEI) is generated. There is alarm
deadband action (DLHYS) when deviation is recovered, shown as follows.

Figure 2-9 Error alarm process

In order to avoid deviation alarm caused by mutation of set value, the value r got by filtering the set
value is used as compensation coefficient of deviation alarm set value (DL). Deviation set value
compensated (DLp) is deviation alarm set value DL adding compensation coefficient r, shown as
follows.

23
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-10 Diagram of deviation alarm

Expression of set value filter: r ( s)  K SV * TSV s * SV ( s)

1  TSV s

K SV * TSV ( SVn  SVn 1 )  TSV * rn 1

Expression after discretion: rn 
TS  TSV

5) Output compensation

Output compensation is used to add the compensation value got outside to the output signal MV
calculated by the control block. Expression: MV=MV0+OK (OA+OB).

Output compensation is mainly used to add feedforward signal to output signal to achieve
feedforward function.

6) Control output

Increment dMV output in this period is got by PID calculation. dMV should be conversed to the
actual output value MV in this period. There are commonly two output modes: increment and
position.

 Increment

New output value is got by adding increment dMV of the current output value to feedback input
BKIN. Expression: MV = dMV+BKIN.

 Position

New output value MV is got by adding increment dMV of the current output value to output value
LMV of last time. Expression: MV = dMV+LMV.

24
 Function Block Reference

Output mode option OUT_OPT: when OUT_OPT is OFF, position output is selected. When
OUT_OPT is ON, increment output is selected.

7) Range conversion

For general control function block, set value commonly has the same range as process value and
output value is in another range. Because range is inconsistent, the input range should be mapped
to the output range. The mapping coefficient is called range conversion coefficient KS.

Expression:

MVSCH  MVSCL
Ks 
SVSCH  SVSCL

If process value is PV, the PV is mapped to MV. The value is equal to:

MV= (PV-SVSCL)*KS+MVSCL

For ratio function block, because SV is conversion coefficient, SV is not required to converse
range. Only process value PV is conversed range.

8) Integral limit action

In control calculation of PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE, PIDEX, PID_TP, LEPID and PIDEP, the integral item
is the integral of deviation for time, the integral saturation is easily cased, and the control results
may cause overshoot and lead to unsteady process. The integral limit action is used to limit the
integral item and prevented from the integral saturation.

BKIN and RRL are used to updating calculation to dMV. When MV is limited to between MVH and
'
MVL, integral limit action acts on integral item of MV of before amplitude limiting.

T
dMVn  dMVn 0  ( BKIN  RRL  MV ' n 1 )
TI

dMVn 0 : operating output gain value (before updating) in PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE calculation

MV ' n 1 : operating output value (before output amplitude limiting) in last time calculation.

25
 Function Block Reference

2.1.5 Output Process

Figure 2-11 Output process of control function block

1) Preset MV process

If mode of last period is OOS, IMAN, TR, MAN and mode of this period is AUTO or CAS and
SWPMV=ON, MV=PMV. In this case, MV velocity alarm, lock increase/decrease/maintain are
unavailable.

If mode of last period is not MAN mode and mode of this period is MAN mode and SWMMV=ON,
MV=MMV.

2) Output limit and alarm

When output value is over its limit, the output is limited, and alarm is generated. High limit of output
limit (MVH) must be greater than or equal to low limit of output limit (MVL). Otherwise, output limit
alarm is disabled and the configuration error alarm (CFGERR) is generated.

Output maximum MVH must be less than HORLIM*(MVSCH-MVSCL)/100 + MVSCH and output
minimum MVL must be greater than

MVSCL-LORLIM*(MVSCH-MVSCL)/100.

3) Output velocity limit and alarm

When change velocity of output is over change limit, the output is limited, and alarm is generated.
Velocity limit is only available in mode of auto and cascade. In mode of auto and cascade, when
change velocity of output MV is over velocity limit DMVLIM, an alarm is generated. When the
velocity increased of MV is over DMVLIM, positive velocity alarm is generated, i.e., DMVHIND=ON;
When the velocity decreased of MV is over DMVLIM, negative velocity alarm is generated, i.e.,

26
 Function Block Reference

DMVLIND=ON. When the velocity is over limit, output is increased or decreased according to the
velocity limit.

4) Lock increase/decrease/maintain (invalid for RATIO and split control)

In the mode of auto and cascade, lock increase/decrease can be implemented for MV.

 Lock increase

 When SWING=ON, lock increase. Output MV cannot be increased.

 Lock decrease

 When SWDEC=ON, lock decrease. Output MV cannot be decreased.

 Output maintain

 In the mode of auto and cascade, when HOLD is equal to ON, output is maintained.
2.1.6 Alarm
1) Alarm enabled and alarm

 Alarm enabled

Alarms can be enabled by ENALM. The type of ENALM is ALMTYPE. For example, PID function
block can be set initial value of alarm enabled under "Function block properties/Alarm Enabled
and Suppress", shown as follows.

27
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-12 Alarm enable setting

When an alarm is selected, the alarm is enabled. The alarm not selected will be shielded.

When the function block is debugged, the alarm enabled option can be modified in real time under
"Function Block Parameter Debug", shown as follows.

28
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-13 Modify alarm enable

 Alarm

29
 Function Block Reference

The parameter Alarm in Extended Parameters can be data excerpt. Details of data excerpt refer to
the VFFBDBuilder User Manual.

If the alarm is selected in the panel, when it occurs, it shows in the detail alarm area in the panel,
and the real-time value in the function block parameter debug interface shows ON.

1) Flag code parse of general control function block list is shown below.

Table 2-2 Flag code list

RATI
Name symbols skewing PID PI_PLS PD_SI PI_AE SPLIT
O
FB Disable OOS 0 √ √ √ √ √ √
Manual Initialization IMAN 1 √ √ √ √ √ √
Manual MAN 2 √ √ √ √ √ √
Tracking TR 3 √ √ √ √ √ √
Automatic AUTO 4 √ √ √ √ √ √
Cascade CAS 5 √ √ √ √ √ √
High Limit Alarm of Output
MVH1 8 - - - - - √
1
Low Limit Alarm of Output
MVL1 9 - - - - - √
1
High Limit Alarm of Output
MVH2 10 - - - - - √
2
Low Limit Alarm of Output
MVL2 11 - - - - - √
2
PV HH Alarm PVHH 8 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV LL Alarm PVLL 9 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV High Limit Alarm PVH 10 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV Low Limit Alarm PVL 11 √ √ √ √ √ -
SV High Limit Alarm SVH 12 √ √ √ √ √ √
SV Low Limit Alarm SVL 13 √ √ √ √ √ √
MV High Limit Alarm MVH 14 √ √ √ √ √ -
MV Low Limit Alarm MVL 15 √ √ √ √ √ -
Positive Deviation Alarm PEI 16 √ √ √ √ -
Minus Deviation Alarm NEI 17 √ √ √ √ -
High/Low Limit Reversal
REVSCL 18 √ √ √ √ √ √
Alarm for Alarm
Alarm for Config Error CFGERR 19 √ √ √ √ √ √
Alarm for Control Deviation
AEH 20 - - - √ - -
is High
Alarm for Control Deviation
AEL 21 - - - √ - -
is Low
Alarm for MV Velocity High
DMVH 22 √ √ √ √ √ -
Limit
Alarm for MV Velocity
DMVL 23 √ √ √ √ √ -
Amplitude Limiting is Low
Valve Position Minus
NMF 27 √ √ √ √ - -
Deviation Alarm
Valve Position Positive
PMF 28 √ √ √ √ - -
Deviation Alarm

30
 Function Block Reference

2) Alarm for range high/low limit reversal

When SVSCH<SVSCL or MVSCH<MVSCL, alarm for range high/low limit reversal (REVSCL) is
generated.

3) Alarm for Config Error

When alarm limit of SV or MV is reversed, configuration error (CFGERR) alarm will be generated,
limit will not work.

4) Valve position deviation alarm

DVLV= MV-MF.

If DVLV<0 and absolute value of DVLV is greater than NMFLIM in TMFHYS seconds, NMF alarm
is generated.

If DVLV>0 and absolute value of DVLV is greater than PMFLIM in TMFHYS seconds, PMF alarm
is generated.

2.1.7 Others
1) BKOUT

When BK_OPT is ON, BKOUT tracks the process value. When BK_OPT is OFF, BKOUT tracks
the set value.

2) Fast increase and fast decrease (invalid for RATIO and split control)

There are buttons of fast increase, fast decrease, slow increase and slow decrease on the panel,
by which MV or SV can be modified.

 MODE=MAN

In this case, the four buttons on the panel are valid for MV. Value (engineering unit) of fast increase
or decrease is equal to (MVSCH-MVSCL) *FMV/100 and value of slow increase or decrease is
equal to (MVSCH-MVSCL) *SMV/100.

 MODE=AUTO

In this case, the four buttons are valid for SV. Value of fast increase or decrease is equal to
(SVSCH-SVSCL) *FSV/100 and value of slow increase or decrease is equal to (SVSCH-SVSCL)
*SSV/100.

The four buttons are invalid in other modes.

3) Select manual and auto signal source and auto and cascade signal source

31
 Function Block Reference

Manual and auto signal source can be selected by parameter MAN_OPT. When MAN_OPT is ON,
it is controlled by PSWAM. When MAN_OPT is OFF, it is controlled by SWAM.

Auto and cascade signal source can be selected by parameter SV_OPT. When SV_OPT is ON, it
is controlled by PSWSV. When SV_OPT is OFF, it is controlled by SWSV.

4) Decimal digits

Decimal digits configuration of SVDLEN and MVDLEN referred in the control function block library
is used to display data in the function block panel.

2.1.8 PID Parameter Tune

The proportional control is a basic control method and has the control effect corresponding to
derivation. PB selection largely affects the control performance of the system. Decrease of PB can
improve the control precision, shorten the respond time and speed up the respond action, while
reduce the stability. Adjustment for PB should consider these two indexes.

The integral action weakens with the increase of TI. Adding integral control can eliminate the
residual error which cannot be eliminated by pure proportional control, while reduce the system
stability. PB should be added to keep the original attenuation ratio of system, which will reduce the
other control indexes of system. Thus the proportional action should not be added if the
attenuation ratio is not the main control index.

Adding differential control can suppress at the moment of fast variation interference for the system
and increase its stability. The differential action is strengthened with the increase of the differential
time TD. Proper differential action can improve the control quality, while overlarge differential will
cause uncontrollable strict shock.

Integral and differential should be used with proportional action.

1) Experience Tune

It is an actually trial and error of experience. It needs no advance calculation and experiment,
while determines a group of control parameter first according to the running experience, starts the
system operation, through observing the transition process curve after adding man-made
interference (changing the set value), to change the corresponding control parameter value
according to the various effects of different control actions on the transition process, and to
perform repeat trial and error till the satisfying control quality is obtained.

Table 2-3 Experience data for controller parameter

Proportional Band Differential Time

Controlled Variable Rule Selection Integral Time TI/s
PB (%) TD/s

32
 Function Block Reference

Proportional Band Differential Time

Controlled Variable Rule Selection Integral Time TI/s
PB (%) TD/s
Object time constant is
small, parameter has
variation, PB should be
Flow 40~100 18~60 -
large; TI should be
short; differential is not
used
Object volume lag is
large, means the
parameter variation
becoming slow with
Temperature 20~60 180~600 30~180
interference, PB should
be small; TI should be
long; differential should
be added generally
Object volume lag is not
Pressure rather large, differential 30~70 24~180 -
is not added generally
Object time constant
range is large, the
requirements are not
Fluid Level high, PB can be 20~80 - -
selected in a range,
differential is not used
generally

As the proportional action is the basic control action, the experience tune meets the quality index
mainly by adjusting proportional band PB. There are two ways to tune:

2) First use the pure proportional (P) action, means to find the proper proportional band PB,
and change the transition process after adding man-made interference to the attenuation
oscillation process of 4:1. Then add integral action (I), and take the integral time TI as a
half of the attenuation oscillation cycle. As the integral action enhances the oscillation,
the proportional action should be weakened before adding integral action, and enlarge
10%~20% of the proportional band generally. Adjust the integral time till the 4:1
attenuation oscillation occurs. Add differential (D) action if needed, means to start from 0
and enlarge the differential time TD gradually. As the differential action can suppress the
oscillation, the proportional band can be adjusted to be less than pure proportional action
before adding integral action, and shorten the integral time. The transition time can be
adjusted to be shortest and the overshoot to be smallest via the trial and error of
differential time.

3) Select integral time TI and differential time TD, take TD= (1/3~1/4) TI generally. Perform
repeat trial and error for the proportional band PB till the satisfying result is obtained. The
satisfying curve may not be obtained if the setting of TI and TD are not proper at
beginning. Then adjust TI and TD properly and perform trial and error again to meet the
curve to the control requirements.

The experience tune method applies to various control system, especially the control system with
frequent object interference and irregular transition process curve. However, it will cost more time
for operator lacking of experience.

33
 Function Block Reference

1. Critical Proportional Band

Critical proportional band refers to obtain critical oscillation data in the method of pure proportional
control in the system closed loop, means the critical proportional band PBk and the critical
oscillation cycle Tk, and use some experience formulas to get the controller parameter meeting the
4:1 attenuation oscillation process. The steps are shown below.

1) Set the integral time of controller as maximum (TI=∞), differential time as minimum
(TD=0), proportional band PB behind a comparatively large value, and start system
operation.

2) Reduce the proportional band gradually. Exert stage interference for the system via
changing the set value once the PB value is modified, and observe the output of system
till the continuous oscillation occurs to the transition process. The transition process here
called critical oscillation process. PBk is critical proportional band and Tk is critical
oscillation cycle.

3) Use two testing data PBk and Tk and by the corresponding formula to figure out various
tune parameters of controller.

Table 2-4 Controller parameter calculation in critical proportional band method (attenuation ratio 4:1)

Control Rule Proportional Band PB (%) Integral Time TI/s Differential Time TD/s
P 2PBk - -
PI 2.2PBk 51Tk -
PD 1.8PBk - 6Tk
PID 1.7PBk 30Tk 7.5Tk

4) Change the proportional band of controller to the tuned value, and put the tune of integral
time and differential time successively.

2. Attenuation Curve

It is a little like the tune process of critical proportional band method, means set the integral time as
maximum in closed loop system, the differential time as minimum and the proportional time as
comparatively large value, then input the change of set value as interference, decrease the
proportional band PB value gradually, and observe the output response curve of the system.
Change the PB value according to the attenuation of transition process till the 4:1 attenuation
oscillation. Record the proportional band PBs and the attenuation oscillation cycle Ts, and figure
out the tune parameter of controller via the corresponding experience formula.

Control Rule Proportional Band PB (%) Integral Time TI/s Differential Time TD/s
P PBs - -
PI 1.2PBs 30Ts -
PID 0.8PBs 18Ts 6Ts

The attenuation curve method can apply to most systems. For its short test transition process
oscillation time, and all are attenuation oscillation, it is acceptable for operator. Thus this kind of
tune method is widely used.

34
 Function Block Reference

2.1.9 Difference between Various PID Function Blocks

Table 2-5 Difference of PID Function Blocks

Difference Item PID PIDEP PIDEX EPID LEPID

OOS, IMAN, OOS, IMAN, TR,
Supported Operation OOS, IMAN, OOS, AUTO, OOS, TR,
TR, MAN, MAN, AUTO,
Mode AUTO CAS AUTO
AUTO, CAS CAS
PID Algorithm PID, D_PI,
PID, D_PI, PD_I PID, D_PI, PD_I PID PID
Selection PD_I
SV Ramp Action √ √ √ － －
SV Track Action √ √ √ － －
Proportional
√ √ √ － －
Nonlinear Gain
Integral Cutting √ √ √ － －
Wind-up √ √ √ － －
PID Single Function Stop P, I, D Stop P, I, D Stop P, I, D
－ －
Stop Separately Separately Separately
Bypass √ √ √ － －
Lock
Increase/Decrease
√ √ √ － √
and Maintain

Position
type, Position Type, Position
MV Output Mode Position Type Position Type
Increment Increment Type Type
Type
Electrical
Recommended Electrical Power General Electrical
General Power
Industry Industry (recommended) Power Industry
Industry

2.2 General PID Function Block (PID)

The PID general function block can perform PID adjustment function based on the D-value of PV
and SV, can provide three kinds of control modes PID, PV PD_I and PV D_PI via parameter
setting, and provide output of increment type or position type for different control objects.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

35
 Function Block Reference

2.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to the 1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded.

Table 2-6 Parameter instruction and application of PID Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Configuration The same as MV
MVSCH MV high scale －
Parameters Parameter actual value H limit
Configuration The same as MV
MVSCL MV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter actual value H limit
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
setting interface
Range
Setting Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
setting interface
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block panel
[0,5] Parameter
(equal to 3 as
default)
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block panel
[0,5] Parameter
(equal to 3 as
default)
Operation Value range
MVH MV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL MV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
Limits SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation Refer to 2.1.6
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.

36
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with the
Direct/Rev
increasing of PV Operation OFF=Direct action,
erse Switch SWPN TRUE
in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse action
Settings
and decreases
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Extended Connect to BKOUT
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin of downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status
BKINERR － Input Pin BKOUTERR of
input
downstream block
Process value of
Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process
Connect to outer
CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
Base Input MV
Pin Connect to
Track input value
Settings measuring point AI,
TV (in track mode, － Input Pin
Related parameter:
MV=TV)
SWTR
Upstream interlock
Track switch:
condition input,
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
related parameter:
ON=track
TV
Connect to
Output
measuring point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
related parameters:
control
OK, OB
Advance Executor
Input Pin feedback value , Connect to
MF － Input Pin
Settings used for measuring point AI
monitoring
Input
compensation Connect to
value, used to measuring point AI,
IA improve the － Input Pin refer to 1.1.2
controllability of Related
process with long parameters: IK, IB
deadband time
Program manual
and auto control
Connect to
switch,
upstream output,
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
valid when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control

37
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Program auto/ Connect to
cascade control upstream output,
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= SV, valid when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON=
manual-automatic
Connect to
selection
MAN_OP upstream output,
controlled by － Input Pin
T related parameters:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM, SWAM
manual-automatic
selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
auto/cascade
Connect to
selection
upstream output,
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin
related parameters:
PSWSV, OFF=
PSWSV, SWSV
auto/cascade
selection
controlled by
SWSV
Connect to
Lock increase for
upstream output,
MV (MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin valid when function
Increase), ON=
block is automatic
lock increase
or cascade
Connect to
Anti-integral
measuring point AI,
saturation input,
RRL － Input Pin related parameters:
used for control
BKIN
overshoot
Refer to 2.1.4
Connect to
Lock decrease for
upstream output,
MV (MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin valid when function
decrease), ON=
block is automatic
Lock decrease
or cascade
Hold the current Connect to
output value for upstream output,
HOLD MV, ON= hold the － Input Pin valid when function
current output block is automatic
value or cascade
Output Pin Operation output Connect to electric
MV － Output Pin
value for PID manual instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback output
BKOUT － Output Pin Block,
value
Related Parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR value Upstream Block

38
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
BKOUT value
switch (ON=track Configuration Related parameter:
BK_OPT －
PV, OFF=track Parameter BKOUT
SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID Param When TD=0,
Setting Operation suppress derivation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter action
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1, Note2,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to
KD TRUE Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.2.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.2.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_O Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.2.1
PT Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
switch: Operation Valid when
SWAM －
OFF=manual, Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Valid when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal
to preset MV Operation Related parameter:
SWMMV TRUE
value when switch Parameter MMV
Operator to manual status
Command Preset MV value Operation Valid when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
Whether to equal
to preset MV
value when switch
to auto status.
PMV enable
switch. When Operation Related parameter:
SWPMV TRUE
SWPMV=ON, MV Parameter PMV
= PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decreas
e are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
OOS/IMAN/TR/M Operation Valid when
PMV TRUE
AN modes to Parameter SWPMV=ON
AUTO or CAS
mode
Operator SV for loop closed Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Data control Parameter

39
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Manual output Operation MV = MANMV in
MANMV －
value Parameter manual mode

Monitoring
EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter

PV HH limit alarm Operation

PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Input Alarm hystersis value Parameter
Settings Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant (s) Parameter
Valve position Related parameter:
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE NMF
Parameter
thresholds Refer to 2.1.6
Valve position Related parameter:
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE PMF
Parameter
thresholds Refer to 2.1.6
Valve position
positive error
Operation
TMFHYS Valve position TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
error alarm
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
operation, when When cascade
Advance BYPASS=ON, adjusting, used to
Calculation Operation
BYPASS excise PID TRUE excise inner loop
Settings Parameter
calculation, switch when it fails
SV to MV directly Refer to 2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action
Integral suppress
switch, when
Operation
STOPI STOPI=ON, TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
Operation Related parameter:
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter DB
deadband enable

40
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deadband band Operation Valid when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Non-linear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient [0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation
between error and
output change Related
value to nonlinear. parameters: GW,
NGN_OP Used for control Configuration PB and KN When
－
T when proportional Parameter NGN_OPT＝ON;
gain needs GW and PB when
nonlinear change. NGN_OPT＝OFF
OFF=Error square
root function,
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related parameter:
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
Note5
excising
Control output
type:
Related parameter:
OUT_OP OFF=position Configuration
－ MV
T type, Parameter
Refer to 2.1.4
ON=increment
type
When PID_OPT ＝
0, use standard PID
Note2
algorithm ; when
PID_OPT＝1, use
Configuration
PID_OPT PID type selection － PV D_PI
Parameter Note4
algorithm ; when
PID_OPT＝2, use
PV proportional
Note3
PD_I algorithm
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

41
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
gain IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
Compensat bias value IA
ion Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
gain OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
bias value OA
Set MV manual
Fase/Slow/ slow
Increase/D Manual slow
Operation increase/decrease
ecrease SMV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter percentage in
Settings e value (%)
function block
properties setting
Set MV manual fast
Manual fast increase/decrease
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting
Set SV manual slow
SV slow increase/decrease
Operation
SSV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting

42
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set SV manual fast
SV fast increase/decrease
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing SV,
Related parameter:
incline it to SV
RAMP,
according to the Operation
SWRAMP TRUE valid when in
set RAMP (s). Parameter
automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Operation Related parameter:
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE
Advance Parameter SWRAMP
Settings SV track PV
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVTR_O SVH/ SVL, SV= Configuration
－ Refer to 2.1.3
PT range limit. Used Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, on=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function block Set as ON at the
Operation
SWOOS disable TRUE first time of function
Parameter
(ON=disable) block downloading
Output value in Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
OOS status Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS Output value type
Settings in OOS status.
when OOS_OPT
OOS_OP =ON, Configuration Refer to 1.1.1
－
T MV=OOSVAL, Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Check Enable switch for
Operation
Input SWPV checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Validity validity

43
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

Note 1: PID Algorithm

Figure 2-14 General PID function block algorithm

There are three control modes for the function block, including PID, PV PD_I and PV D_PI.

Note 2: Standard PID control algorithm (PID)

The mode mainly applies to produce process with big time parameter and control of instantaneous
response caused by change of set value.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   E n  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, E n  E n  E n 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( E n  E n 1 )]
K D TS  TD

TS: attenuation oscillation cycle

KD: differential filter coefficient

Note 3: PV PD_I (PD_I)

44
 Function Block Reference

The mode is different from standard PID control algorithm. Change of set value does not influence
action of proportion and differential coefficient even if mutation of set value cannot cause dramatic
change of output by which stable control Properties can be obtained.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   PVn  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, PVn  PVn  PVn 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( PVn  PVn 1 )]
K D TS  T D

Note 4: PV D_PI (D_PI)

Only proportion action and integral action are implemented in this mode when the set value is
changed. The algorithm mainly applies to the field which needs to track set value, such as salve
loop of cascade control loop.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   E n  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, E n  E n  E n 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( PVn  PVn 1 )]
K D TS  TD

Note 5: Integral Cutting

In the PID control calculation, it will lead to system overshoot and oscillating when start, stop or SV
go up and down by a large margin and appear large deviation in little time. For this reason,
introduce integral cutting strategy. When the deviation less-than setting value EA, plunge into
integral function. In order to keep stability of system, diminution proportion gain with plunge
integral function, and add a gain factor DK to the proportional gain with integral cutting when error
is reduced to beneath EA, perform integral action and restore the original proportional gain to
achieve it.

45
 Function Block Reference

To make sure the stability of system after performing integral action, the proportional gain should
reduce. When cutting the integral action, the proportional gain should be KP+DK.

Note 6: Incomplete differential action of PID

Computer control can help to achieve ideal differential control. However, the PID control result of
ideal differential is not perfect, especially for the production process with high frequency
interference. Over-sensitive differential action will generate process oscillation of the process.
Thus, the real PID controller is often applied, which adds first order inertia link to the ideal
differential link. The transmission function of the algorithm is:

 
MV ( s ) 100  1 TD * s 
 1   
E (s) PB  TI * s 1  TD s 
 
 KD 

46
 Function Block Reference

2.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

47
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-7 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
PV HH alarm value setting of loop
Preference [SVSCL,SVS
Alarm HH PVHH 100.000 PV (select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
(%) is disabled).
H alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)
L alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)

48
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
LL alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
LL PVLL 0.000 PV. (select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)
PV Process value alarm
HYS PVHYS 0.000 -
hysteresis
H value setting of loop SV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[SVSCL,SVS
H SVH 40.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: SV limit is not affected by
SV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of loop SV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[SVSCL,SVS
L SVL 0.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: SV limit is not affected by
selection.
H value setting of loop MV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[MVSCL,MVS
H MVH 100.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: MV limit is not affected by
MV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of loop MV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[MVSCL,MVS
L MVL 0.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: MV limit is not affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=SV-PV (select
EI EI 0.000 － alarm enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI
Selecting the positive deviation
(sele － － －
alarm is enabled.
EI cted)
Alarm NEI
(%) Selecting the negative
(sele － － －
deviation alarm is enabled.
cted)
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
DLH
DLHYS 0.000 － Deviation alarm hystersis value
YS
Selecting the positive deviation
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 －
alarm is enabled.
MF
Alarm Selecting the negative
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 －
(%) deviation alarm is enabled.
TMF
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
HYS
DMV
H Selecting positive velocity
－ － －
(sele alarm is enabled.
MV cted)
Velocity DMV
Limits L Selecting negative velocity
(%) － － －
(sele alarm is enabled.
cted)
DMV
DMVLIM 100.000 － Loop MV velocity limit SV
LIM

49
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name

PID PB Not less than Loop proportional parameter

PB 100.000
(%) 0 SV
PID
Param Not less than Loop integral time parameter
TI(s) TI 20.000
eter 0 SV
TD(s Not less than Loop differential time
TD 0.000
) 0 parameter SV
Incomp
lete
Differe KD(s Not less than Incomplete integral filter
KD 10.000
ntial ) 0 coefficient
Param
eter
Ena
ble Selecting deadband parameter
SWDB － －
(sele is enabled.
cted)
Deadb Disa
and ble Selecting deadband parameter
SWDB √ －
(%) (sele is disabled.
cted)
DB DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
DBH
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB] Deadband band hysteresis
YS
Gap
Actio Read-only, non-linear gain
NGN_OP
n － － selection switch
T
(sele ON= Gap Action
cted)
Non-lin
ear Squ
Gain are Read-only, non-linear gain
NGN_OP
(%) Root √ － selection switch
T
(sele OFF=Square Root Action
cted)
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0] Nonlinear gain action range
KN KN 1.000 － Nonlinear gain coefficient
EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Integral Integral excising coefficient.
Separa When EI>EA, integral excising
tion (%) DK DK 0.000 －
enabled; when EI<EA, integral
excising disabled.
Ena
ble
SWRAMP － － Selecting SV ramp is enabled.
(sele
SV cted)
Ramp Disa
Action ble
(%) SWRAMP √ － Selecting SV ramp is disabled.
(sele
cted)
RAM
RAMP 100.000 － Coefficient parameter SV
P

50
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
Dire
ct Selecting direct action is
SWPN － －
(sele enabled.
Control cted)
Directio
n Rev
erse Selecting reverse action is
SWPN √ －
(sele enabled.
cted)
Run
Selecting proportional action is
Proport (sele STOPP √ －
enabled.
ional cted)
Action Selecting proportional action is
Stop STOPP － －
disabled.
Selecting integral action is
Run STOPI √ －
enabled.
Integral
Action Selecting integral action is
Stop STOPI － －
disabled.

The modification of function

block panel is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block properties
interface when debugging.
PID
The modification of function
Bypa block panel is disabled for
BYPASS － －
ss function block properties
interface when debugging.

Others Input Read-only, can be set in

IA IA 0.000 －
Compe configuration or program
nsation IK IK 1.000 － Input compensation gain
(%)
IB IB 0.000 － Input compensation bias value

Output OA OA 0.000 － Read-only, feedforward signal

Compe OK OK 1.000 － Output compensation gain
nsation
(%) Output compensation bias
OB OB 0.000 －
value
Bias KSV KSV 1.000 0~100 Deviation filter coefficient
Alarm
Filter TSV 0~1000s filter
Setting TSV 0.000 Constant between errors (s)
(s) time
s
Feedba Read-only, can be set in
PV BK_OPT － -
ck configuration or program
Output Read-only, can be set in
Track SV BK_OPT √ -
configuration or program
Trac SVTR_O Read-only, can be set in
√ -
k PT configuration or program
SV
Track Not
SVTR_O Read-only, can be set in
Trac － -
PT configuration or program
k
MAN_ Pan MAN_OP Read-only, can be set in
√ -
OPT el T configuration or program

51
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
Setting Prog MAN_OP Read-only, can be set in
－ -
ram T configuration or program
SV_OP Pan Read-only, can be set in
SV_OPT － -
T el configuration or program
Setting Prog Read-only, can be set in
s SV_OPT √ -
ram configuration or program

Read-only, track input value

TV (%) TV 0.000 －
(%)

Executive
MF 0.0 [MVH,MVL] Writable
Feedback

2.2.3 Flag
Table 2-8 Flag

Flag Instruction
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23
(DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)

52
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.2.4 Application Example

Example 1: PID single loop control

Cold water becomes hot water after heated up by steam heater. It needs to control the
temperature of hot water by adjusting steam flow. Suppose the hot water temperature TT is
measured by tag TT001, the steam flow FC is adjusted by FC001. The hot water control strategy
is that the PID function block takes hot water temperature as input and outputs a signal to AO
block, then AO block sends control signal to the steam supply valve, as shown below.

Figure 2-15 Hot water temperature PID control diagram

The program of FBD is shown below. When using PID function block, connect its input pins BKIN
and BKINERR with output pins BKOUT and BKOUTERR of downstream block. If the down stream
block is AO, it needs data interference for connection.

Figure 2-16 Single loop closed loop control program

53
 Function Block Reference

PID function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: ℃

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag TT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag TT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, run the monitoring software, invoke the function block panel and open
the adjusting interface. If the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001,
and adjust the status of FC001 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the SteamHeater is in MAN
mode. It can be switched manually.

Example 2: Feedforward control

In example 1, the thermal lag between cold and hot water will generate time lag and affect the
control. For example, if the steam supply reduces, the temperature of output hot water will be
lower than set.

The interference can be checked out before it is reflected to the hot water test point, and
participated into the PID calculation as the output compensation to eliminate its effect by improving
control algorithm. In the following figure, to measure the steam flow (FT001) before control valve
and take it as the feedforward signal to the PID function block. If the steam reduces, the function
block should increase output signal to enlarge the control valve opening. If the steam rises, the
function block should decrease output signal to lessen the control valve opening.

54
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-17 Feedforward control program

The program of FBD is shown below. Add feedforward control in the steam heating system to
improve the input/output hot water temperature response. Send the input steam flow measured
value to AI block and connect to OA of PID block. Set the parameters OK and OB via function
block panel.

Figure 2-18 Feedforward control program

PID function block parameter settings in the program (set in the function block properties settings
interface) includes: PID_OPT, SWPN, SVEU, SVSCH, SVSCL, MVEU, OK, OB, PB, TI, TD, etc.

Example 3: PID cascade control

In example 2, the adjust volume of control valve opening resulted by the steam flow modification

55
 Function Block Reference

should be preset. Another method to resolve the problem of time lag is cascade control, which
does not need the related mathematic model of steam flow modification and control valve opening
adjusting volume. In cascade loop, take the MV of master loop (temperature loop) as the set CSV
of slave loop (steam flow loop). The control strategy is shown below.

Figure 2-19 Cascade control diagram

The FBD program is shown below. Notice the function block number when programming
(executing order).

Figure 2-20 Cascade control program diagram

Function block TempControl parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings
interface):

56
 Function Block Reference

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: ℃

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag TT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag TT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 MVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FT001)

 MVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FT001)

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

Function block FlowControl parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings
interface).

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, first exit the FlowControl loop and TempControl loop from OOS mode,
debug the FlowControl loop, which is the same as the single loop control, after it finished, switch to
cascade and then debug TempControl.

Example 4: PD_I

It is different from standard PID control algorithm; the variation of set value will not affect the
proportional and differential action. Even the sudden change of set value will not cause the rapid
change of operation output, and can obtain the steady control features easily. It performs
proportional, integral and differential control actions for the modification of controlled process
features and the modification and interference of load, to achieve better control.

The program of FBD is the same as standard PID control. Refer to Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-21.

Parameter setting:

 PID_OPT: 2

57
 Function Block Reference

 Other parameter settings are the same as standard PID control.

Example 5: D_PI

It only performs proportional control and integral control, but no differential control, when the set
value changes, and is mainly used in filed needing better track feature for the change of set value,
for example, the minor loop of cascade control loop.

Parameter setting:

 PID_OPT: 1

 Other parameter settings are the same as standard PID control.

Example 6: PID control with track function

The track action is usually used for the process control beyond normal running range.

In the figure below, the flow control valve is used for controlling flow rate. When the pump is
started, the output flow is small when the pump speed increases. The control valve and function
block cannot work normally at that time. Use the track function and set the valve position at a
preset opening TV, and keep the opening in a set time range.

The pump starting signal connects to the track switch SWTR via the timer, set the time as the track
action time, and set the track value as the needed opening of control valve. When the pump starts
to track, open the valve position to the set value, close the track action after the set time ended,
and the PID adjuster starts normal work and control the valve position to adjust output flow.

Figure 2-21 Track and PID control diagram

FBD program is shown below.

58
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-22 Track and PID control program

PID function block parameter settings related to the program (set in the function block properties
settings interface) include: PID_OPT, SWTR, SVEU, SVSCH, SVSCL, MVEU, PB, TI, TD, etc.

2.3 PIDEP Function Block (PIDEP)

The control function of general PID is available in PIDEP. It has three work modesNote1 OOS, IMAN
and AUTO, and applies to electric power industry.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to 1.4.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded to the controller.

Table 2-9 Parameter instruction and application of PIDEP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Range Configuration The same as MV
MVSCH MV high scale －
Parameters Settings Parameter actual value H limit.
Configuration The same as MV
MVSCL MV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit.

59
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter actual value H limit.
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit.
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
SV decimal digits Configuration displayed on function
SVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter block panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
MV decimal digits Configuration displayed on function
MVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter block panel (equal to
3 as default).
Operation Value range
MVH MV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL MV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
Limits SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/R increases with the
everse increasing of PV Operation OFF=Direct action,
SWPN TRUE
Switch in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse action
Settings and decreases
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Extended Base Connect to BKOUT
BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters Input Pin of downstream block
Settings Connect to
Feedback status
BKINERR － Input Pin BKOUTERR of
input
downstream block
Multi-status Connect to
BKINSTA feedback - Input Pin BKOUTSTA of
inputNote4 downstream block
Process value of
Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process

60
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Setpoint value of
Connect to
SV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process
Output Connect to
compensation, measuring point AI
OA used for － Input Pin (feedforward signal),
feedforward related parameters:
control OK, OB
Input
compensation
Connect to
value, used to
measuring point AI ,
IA improve the － Input Pin
Related parameters:
controllability of
IK, IB
process with long
deadband time
MV lock increase Connect to upstream
(MV cannot output, valid when
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= function block is
lock increase automatic
MV lock decrease Connect to upstream
(MV cannot output, valid when
SWDEC － Input Pin
decrease), ON= function block is
Lock decrease automatic.
MV hold the
Advance current output
Connect to upstream
Input Pin HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin
output,
the current output
value
PID bypass
operation, when
BYPASS=ON, Bypass action is
Operation
BYPASS excise PID TRUE performed only in
Parameter
calculation, switch auto modeNote2.
SV to MV directly
for output.
Proportion shield
switch, stop Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
proportion action Parameter
when STOPP=ON
Integral shield
switch, stop Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
integral action Parameter
when STOPP=ON

61
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to electric
manual instrument
The MV changes
only when
accumulated
modification of dMV
is more than output
deadband.
PID operation
MV － Output Pin Otherwise, it holds. If
output value
set the deadband as
1, the MV will change
only when the
accumulated
modification is more
than deadband (it is 1
Output when changing from
Pin 30 to 31).
Connect to the BKIN
Feedback output of Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value related Parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR value
Upstream Block
Multi-status Connect to the
BKOUTS
feedback - Output Pin BKINSTA of
TA Note5
output Upstream Block
BKOUT value
switch (ON=track Configuration Related parameter:
BK_OPT －
PV, OFF=track Parameter BKOUT
SV)
Monitoring
IMANIND IMAN Status － -
Parameter
Status
Auto status Monitoring
AUTOIND － -
indication Parameter
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID
Param When TD=0,
Settings Operation suppress derivation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter action,
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to 2.2.1
KD TRUE Note2, Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter

Error
Monitoring
Indicatio EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
n

Input PV HH limit alarm Operation

PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm value Parameter
Settings PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter

62
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Enable switch,
Operation Related parameter:
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Precise controlled Operation
MDB TRUE Refer to Note1
zone range Parameter
Precise controlled
Operation Note1
MK zone coefficient TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Advance [0,1.0]
d Integral excise
Calculati coefficient. when
on EI > EA, excise
Settings coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related parameter:
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
excising
Note1,
Configuration Refer to 2.2.1
PID_OPT PID type selection － Note2, Note3
Parameter

Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring

PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

63
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
gain IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Compen Parameter
bias value IA
sation
Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
gain OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
bias value OA
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extende Parameter
percentage
d Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing set
value, incline it to Related parameter:
SV according to Operation RAMP
SWRAMP TRUE
the set RAMP (s). Parameter Enable when in
OFF=SV ramp automatic mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Operation Related parameter:
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE
Parameter SWRAMP
Settings
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
When it is in track
ON=track. If PV>
mode, SV tracks the
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuration PVR change of PV
range limit. Used －
PT Parameter after input
to prevent the
compensation.
output MV from
Refer to 2.1.3
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Alarm Suppress module
Enabled alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
and On=prohibit to Parameter
Suppres display alarm

64
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
s ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the first
Operation
SWOOS setting switch TRUE time of function block
Parameter
(ON= OOS mode) downloading
OOS mode output Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
value Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS
OOS mode output
Settings
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuration
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Enable switch for
Operation
Check SWPV checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Input validity
Validity PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

Some of its functions are like PID, and the setting can refer to PID function block, except
followings.

Note 1: Precise control processing

When Mdb>0 and the absolute value of bias after compensation is within precise control zone
(-MDB, MDB), ratio coefficient KP will be corrected as KP=KP×MK. The specific instructions
please refer to PID function block.

Note 2: Bypass action

It works only in AUTO mode. When BYPASS=ON, output as follows:

MV  ( SV  SVSCL)  KS  MVSCL
Note 3: Other

The fallback function should be achieved by users when the function block is connected with
manual operation but not AO tag.

Note 4:

Input pin BKINSTA and output pin BKOUTSTA, data type is USINT. Its meaning is defined by bit,
as shown below.

Table 2-10 Instruction for bits

Data High 2 Bits Data Middle 2 Bits Data Low 2 Bits

Exampl
XX...... ..XXXX.. ......XX
e

65
 Function Block Reference

Data High 2 Bits Data Middle 2 Bits Data Low 2 Bits

******00:
**0000**: Not limited
11******: Middle 4 bits setting as 0
means OK. ******01:
High 2 bits generally
Instruct Low limited
have no special
ion ******10:
meaning, and are set **1111**:
as 1. High limited
Middle 4 bits setting as 1
means Track. ******11:
Constant(low+high)

Status values of BKINSTA and BKOUTSTA combined by definition are shown below, please don’t
use other status values undefined.

Table 2-11 Instruction for status values

Status Instruction (If high 2 bts of system are

BKINSTA/BKOUTSTA Process
always 1, it is cascaded master status.)
11111100(0xFC)

11111101(0xFD)
Track if middle 4 bits are 1. Track (Highest priority)
11111110(0xFE)

11111111(0xFF)

11000000(0xC0) Good Good

11000001(0xC1) Low limited Low limited

11000010(0xC2) High limited High limited

11000011(0xC3) Low limited + High limited Low limited + High limited

Note 5:

Output influence of BKINSTA for PID are shown below. MVLT refers to MV of last period, and dMV
refers to MV increment calculated by PID of current period.

Table 2-12 Feedback pin status process of PIDEP function block

Input Output Response

BKINSTA MV BKOUSTA
GOOD Calculate output MV
(BKINSTA=0xC0) by current mode High 2 bits are set as 1

Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE:

MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

66
 Function Block Reference

Input Output Response

Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
MV limit
MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.

Track
High 2 bits are set as 1.
(BKINSTA=0XFC\0xF MV = BKIN
Middle 4 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Track.
D\0xFE\0xFF)

High 2 bits are set as 1.

Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE value:

MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

MV lock decrease, i.e. Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
only enable increase MV limit
Low limited and disable decrease MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
(BKINSTA=0xC1) (output hold if lock are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
increase signal is BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
existing too). MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
High limited MV lock increase, i.e. High 2 bits are set as 1.
(BKINSTA=0xC2) only enable decrease
and disable increase Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE value:
(output hold if lock MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
decrease signal is MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

67
 Function Block Reference

Input Output Response

existing too). Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
MV limit
MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
BKINSTA process
If PIDEP is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set
as Low limited.
If PIDEP is negative action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set
as High limited.

 When calculating BKOUTSTA: if BKINSTA has limit information, and MV or SV is limited,

it superimposes the influence of outputting BKOUSTA, i.e. same priority. The High limited
and Low limited of BKOUTSTA may exist together, i.e. set as Constant.

 When processing BKINSTA, Track has the highest priority. The limit information of
BKINSTA may be invalid only if middle 4 bits are set as Track.

 If High limited and Low limited exist together, output lock increase and decrease are valid
together, output MV hold.

 Lock increase obtained by BKINSTA, will be locked as positive dMV, i.e. including
proportion, integral items. If high limit occurs to MV calculated, only exlude the positive
integral action.

68
 Function Block Reference

2.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-13 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference [SVSCL,SVS
Alarm (s) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
CH]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

69
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
H alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SVS of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000
CH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SVS of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000
CH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVS
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
CH]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PVProcess value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SVS enabled, or it is
H SVH 40.000
CH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
SV
affected by selection.
Limits (s)
L value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SVS enabled, or it is
L SVL 0.000
CH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,MVS alarm enabled, or it is
H MVH 100.000
CH] disabled).
MV Note: MV limit is not
Limits affected by selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,MVS alarm enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
CH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
SV(select alarm
EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the positive
(select － － － deviation alarm is
Set DL ed) enabled.
(s) NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
MV DMVH Selecting positive
Limits (select － － － velocity alarm is
(%) ed) enabled.

70
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
DMVL Selecting negative
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
PID Not less than Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000
0 band parameter SV
PID
Coefficie Not less than Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000
nt 0 parameter SV
Not less than Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000
0 parameter SV

Incompl
Not less than Incomplete integral
ete Diff KD(s) KD 10.000
0 filter coefficient
Coef

Efficien
Selecting deadband
cy
SWDB － － parameter is
(select
enabled.
ed)
Deadzon
e Invalid Selecting deadband
Coefficie (select SWDB √ － parameter is
nt ed) disabled.
DB DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Precise Precision settings
MDB MDB 0.000 [0,1.0]
Controlle range
d Zone Precision settings
Setting MK MK 1.000 －
coefficient
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
separati
on Coefficient parameter
coefficie DK DK 0.000 －
SV
nt
Efficien
cy Selecting SV ramp is
SWRAMP － －
(select enabled.
Set ed)
Value Invalid
Ramp Selecting SV ramp is
(select SWRAMP √ －
disabled.
ed)
Coefficient parameter
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Direct/R
everse Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)

71
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action is
Scale ed) enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action is
disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
PID Run BYPASS √ － -
Operatio
n Bypass BYPASS － － -
Read-only, can be
IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Input program
Compen
sation Input compensation
IK IK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Output program
Compen
sation Output compensation
OK OK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Others
Output compensation
DB DB 0.000 －
bias value
Deviation filter
Set EI KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
alarm
filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s) (s)
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration or
program
2.3.3 Flag
Table 2-14 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)

72
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D22 Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVH)
D23 Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVL)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.3.4 Application Example

Continuous flash tank water level adjustment: to change the flow rate by adjusting the water level
adjusting valve of continuous flash tank, then to control the water level of continuous flash tank. If
the water level tag is WT001, adjusting valve opening feedback is LT001, adjusting valve
command is LT002.

When the control strategy is PIDEP function block, the water level of continuous flash tank is PV,
the set value input of manual instrument is SV, output it to the manual instrument function block,
then output to AO block and adjust the adjusting valve.

73
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-23 Single loop control program

2.4 Extended PID Control Function Block (PIDEX)

Functions of PIDEX are same as PID function block, except the following items.

1. Limit process: In MAN and IMAN mode, output is not limited by MVH and MVL but it must
be in the range of extended range.

2. Mode process

 In track mode, if TVERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode.

 In auto mode, if PVERR=ON or OAERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode.

 In cascade mode, if PVERR=ON or OAERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode. If

PVERR=OFF, OAERR=OFF and SVERR=ON, PID is transferred to auto mode.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

74
 Function Block Reference

2.4.1 Parameters Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to the 1.4.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded.

Table 2-15 Parameter instruction and application of PIDEX Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuration
Basic MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
Parameters value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
SV engineer Configuration
Range SVEU － properties
unit Parameter
Setting settings
s interface.
Set in the
function block
MV engineer Configuration
MVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Limits Value range
MV H limit Operation
MVH TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
value Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
SV H limit Operation
SVH TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
value Parameter
H]

75
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limit
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in
a short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is
not changed,
Direct/ the MV
Revers increases with OFF=Direct
e the increasing Operation action,
SWPN TRUE
Switch of PV in direct Parameter ON=Reverse
Setting action, and action
s decreases with
the increasing
of PV in
reverse action.
Connect to
BKOUT of
Extended BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
Parameters block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream
block ERR
Process value Connect to
PV of loop closed － Input Pin measuring
control process point AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV
Base Connect to
Input measuring
Pin Track input point AI
TV － Input Pin
Setting value Related
s parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
interlock
Track switch: condition
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV,
TVERR
Connect to
measuring
Output
point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
Related
control
parameter:
OK, OB

76
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Advanc PV is in fault or
e Input not, Connect the
PVERR － Input Pin
Pin ON=Abnormal, tag AI.ERR
Setting OFF=normal
s SV is in fault or
Connect the
not,
SVERR － Input Pin upstream
ON=Abnormal,
output
OFF=normal
TV is in fault or
not, Connect the
TVERR － Input Pin
ON=Abnormal, tag AI.ERR
OFF=normal
OA is in fault or
Connect the
not,
OAERR － Input Pin upstream
ON=Abnormal,
output
OFF=normal
PID executor
Connect to
feedback
MF － Input Pin measuring
value , used for
point AI
monitoring
Input
Connect to
compensation
measuring
value, used to
point AI, Refer
improve the
IA － Input Pin to 2.1.1 ,
controllability of
Related
process with
parameters:
long deadband
IK, IB
time
Program
manual and Connect the
auto control upstream
switch, output
PSWAM － Input Pin
OFF=program Enabled when
manual control, MAN_OPT=O
ON=program N
auto control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade upstream
PSWSV control switch, － Input Pin output
OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automa
tic control
source switch,
Connect the
ON=
upstream
manual-automa
output
tic selection
MAN_OPT － Input Pin Related
controlled by
parameter:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automa
SWAM
tic selection
controlled by
SWAM

77
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream
selection output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection SWSV
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
MV lock upstream
increase (MV output.
SWINC cannot － Input Pin enabled when
Increase), ON= function block
lock increase is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
Anti-integral measuring
saturation point AI,
RRL input, used for － Input Pin Related
control parameter:
overshoot BKIN Refer to
2.1.4
Connect the
MV lock
upstream
decrease (MV
output.
cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease),
function block
ON= Lock
is automatic or
decrease
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= － Input Pin upstream
hold the current output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation electric
MV － Output Pin
output value manual
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Block, Related
Output parameter:
Pin BK_OPT
Connect to the
Feedback BKINERR of
BKOUTERR － Output Pin
status value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
(ON=track PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track SV)
PID Proportion Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Param band size Parameter

78
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Setting Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
s Parameter
When TD=0,
suppress
Derivative time Operation
TD TRUE derivation
(s) Parameter
action, Refer
to 2.1.8
Refer to
Derivative filter Operation Note1, Note2,
KD TRUE 2.1.1
coefficient Parameter Note3, Note4

Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto
return, Configuration
MODE_OPT － Refer to 2.1.1
OFF=manual Parameter
return (default)
Manual and
Enabled when
auto switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to
equal to preset Related
Operation
SWMMV MV value when TRUE parameter:
Parameter
switch to MMV
Operat manual status
or Preset MV
Comm Operation Enabled when
MMV value (switch to TRUE
and Parameter SWMMV=ON
manual)
Whether to
equal to preset
MV value when
switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch.
Related
When Operation
SWPMV TRUE parameter:
SWPMV=ON, Parameter
PMV
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decre
ase are
disabled
Preset MV
when switching
from
Operation Enabled when
PMV OOS/IMAN/TR/ TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
MAN modes to
AUTO or CAS
mode
Operat SV for loop Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
or Data closed control Parameter

79
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV= MANMV
Manual output Operation
MANMV － in manual
value Parameter
mode
Monitoring
EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV H limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
Input DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Alarm
Setting Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
s coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter
Operation
TSV time TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
constant(s)
Related
Valve position
Operation parameter:
NMFLIM negative error TRUE
Parameter NMF Refer to
thresholds
2.1.6
Related
Valve position
Operation parameter:
PMFLIM positive error TRUE
Parameter PMF Refer to
thresholds
2.1.6
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
Advanc operation,
When cascade
ed when
adjusting,
Calcula BYPASS=ON,
Operation used to excise
tion BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter inner loop
Setting calculation,
when it fails
s switch SV to
Refer to 2.1.4
MV directly for
output
Proportion
suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Integral
suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action

80
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Enable switch,
when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband
enable
Deadband Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
band size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband
Operation
DBHYS band TRUE
Parameter
hysteresis
Non-linear gain
range Operation
GW TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
non-linear gain Parameter
range
Nonlinear gain
Operation
KN coefficient[0,1. TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
0]
Non-linear gain
selection
switch, switch
the relation
between error
and output Related
change value parameters:
to nonlinear. GW, PB and
Used for KN When
Configuration
NGN_OPT control when － NGN_OPT＝
Parameter
proportional ON; GW and
gain needs PB when
nonlinear NGN_OPT＝
change. OFF
OFF=Error
square root
function,
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient.
when EI > EA,
excise
coefficient,
when EI< EA, Operation Related
EA TRUE
excising Parameter parameter: DK
coefficient is
disabled, used
for prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter parameter: EA
excising
Control output
type:
OFF=position Configuration Related
OUT_OPT －
type, Parameter parameter: MV
ON=increment
type

81
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID type Configuration Refer to 2.2.1
PID_OPT － Note2, Note3, Note4
selection Parameter
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit
Monitoring
PVLLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive
Monitoring
DMVHIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV negative
Monitoring
DMVLIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position
error negative Monitoring
NMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
indication
Valve position
error positive Monitoring
PMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
Compe IB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
nsation bias value parameter: IA
Setting Output Refer to 2.1.4
s Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA

82
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
ase
MV manual percentage in
slow Operation function block
SMV TRUE
increase/decre Parameter properties
ase value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decre TRUE function block
Parameter
ase value (%) properties
setting
Fase/Sl
Related
ow/Incr
parameter:
ease/D
MVSCL
ecreas
e Set SV manual
Setting slow
s increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decre TRUE
Parameter properties
ase value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decre TRUE function block
Parameter
ase value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended
Extend range Configuration
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
ed maximum Parameter
Range percentage
Setting Extended
s Configuration
LORLIM range minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage

83
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp
function switch.
When changing
Related
set value,
parameter:
incline it to SV
RAMP. Enable
according to Operation
SWRAMP TRUE when in
the set RAMP Parameter
automatic or
(s). OFF=SV
cascade
ramp function
mode.
off, ON=SV
ramp function
on
SV Related
Advanc Ramp Operation
RAMP TRUE parameter:
e coefficient Parameter
SWRAMP
Setting
Track PV
s
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/ SVL,
SV= range Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
limit. Used to Parameter
prevent the
output MV from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Alarm module alarm. Operation
Enable AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit to Parameter
d and display alarm.
Suppre
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
ss
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at
setting switch Operation the first time of
SWOOS TRUE
(ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
output value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
OOS N
Setting OOS mode
s output value
type. when
OOS_OPT
=ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, Parameter
when
OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Enable switch
Operation
Check SWPV for checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Input validity
Validity PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

84
 Function Block Reference

2.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

85
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-16 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference (%) [SVSCL,SV
HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
SCH]
enabled, or it is
disabled).
H alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SV of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000
SCH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SV of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000
SCH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)

86
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SV
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
SCH]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
Hysteresis PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SV enabled, or it is
H SVH 40.000
SCH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
SV Limits affected by selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SV enabled, or it is
L SVL 0.000
SCH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,M alarm enabled, or it is
H MVH 100.000
VSCH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
MV Limits affected by selection.
(%)
L value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,M alarm enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
VSCH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
SV(select alarm
Error (EI) EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
Selecting the positive
PEI
－ － － deviation alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
EI Alarm
(%) Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.
± (Range
DL DL 100.000 H- Range Deviation alarm SV
L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the positive
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － deviation alarm is
enabled.
MF Alarm
Selecting the
(%)
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
Delay (s) Delay (s) 0.000 － Lag time SV

87
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Selecting positive
DMVH
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
MV Velocity Selecting negative
Limits (%) DMVL
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM DMVLIM 100.000 －
limit SV
PID Not less Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000
than 0 parameter SV
PID Not less Loop integral time
Parameter TI(s) TI 20.000
than 0 parameter SV
Not less Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000
than 0 parameter SV
Incomplete
Not less Incomplete integral
Differential KD(s) KD 10.000
than 0 filter coefficient
Coefficient
Selecting deadband
Efficiency
SWDB － － parameter is
(selected)
enabled.
Selecting deadband
Invalid
Deadband SWDB √ － parameter is
(selected)
(%) disabled.
Deadzone
DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
(DB)
Hysteresis Deadband band
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
(DBHYS) hysteresis
Read-only, non-linear
Gap Action
NGN_OPT － － gain selection switch
(selected)
ON= Gap Action
Read-only, non-linear
Square Root gain selection switch
Non-linear NGN_OPT √ －
(selected) OFF=Square Root
Gain (%) Action
Nonlinear gain action
Range (GW) GW 0.000 [0, 1.0]
range
Coefficient Nonlinear gain
KN 1.000 －
(KN) coefficient
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Separation Coefficient parameter
(%) DK DK 0.000 －
SV
Efficiency Selecting SV ramp is
SWRAMP － －
(selected) enabled.
SV Ramp Invalid Selecting SV ramp is
Action (%) SWRAMP √ －
(selected) disabled.
Coefficient Coefficient parameter
RAMP 100.000 －
(RAMP) SV
Direct Selecting direct
SWPN － －
Direct/Reve (selected) action is enabled.
rse Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.

88
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Selecting
Run
STOPP √ － proportional action is
(selected)
Scale enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action is
disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
action is enabled.
Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
Integral is enabled for
BYPASS BYPASS √ －
Action function block
properties interface
when debugging.
The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Input program
Compensati Input compensation
on (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Output program
Compensati Output compensation
on (%) OK OK 1.000 －
gain
Output compensation
DB DB 0.000 －
bias value
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
Set EI coefficient
alarm filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration or
Feedback program
Output
Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration or
program

89
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
Manual and Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration or
Auto program
Control Read-only, can be
Source Program MAN_OPT － － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration or
Auto/Casca program
de Control
Source Read-only, can be
Program SV_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, track
TV TV 0.000 －
input value(%)
Executive Feedback MF 0.0 [MVH,MVL] Writable
2.4.3 Flag
Table 2-17 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal
D18
(REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23
(DMVL)

90
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation
D27
(NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D20 Tricking Value Error (TVERR)
D21 Output Compensation Value Error (OCVERR)
D29 PV Error
D30 SV Error
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.4.4 Application Example

Example 1

To adjust the water level of LT-1001 in the figure below and realize automatic control for water
level. It is described in the diagram and can be applied.

Figure 2-24 Single loop diagram

The single loop, which consists into a closed-loop feedback control system with a control target, a
detect transmitter and a performer, also can be called as simple control system. It is often applied
for fields with short lag time of the control target, small change of load and interference and
general requirements for control quality.

Its programming is shown below, which can be realized via PIDEX, the interface of host computer
can be invoked by the tag of function block to monitor and control the loop in the diagram.

Figure 2-25 Programming of single loop

The function block instruction and examples are shown in the table below:

91
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-18 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 LIC_1001 Tag of PID PID
Block
002 LY_1001 AO (Output) Water Level Adjusting Valve

003 LT_1001 AI (Input) Water Detecting Signal

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

 SVSCL: the same with the unit of PV range

 SVSCH: the same with the unit of PV range

 SVEU: the same with the unit of PV range

 MVSCL: 0~100% in default

 MVSCH: 0~100% in default

 MVEU: 0~100% in default

 SVL: should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 SVH: should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 SV_OPT: ON

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

Note: the operation parameters SV_OPT, PSWSV (OFF in default) are set to prevent from wrong
operation to “CAS” mode by the operator on the panel.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

Example 2

To achieve the control for the water level of field craft tank, as shown in the figure below, by setting
the in-tank water level adjustment as the outer loop and the entrance flow adjustment as the inner
loop, and it can be shown and operated in the diagram.

92
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-26 Diagram of cascade loop control

The cascade control is a closed-loop consisted of two PID single loops. The adjusting valve is not
controlled by the major loop (outer loop), but set the output of major loop executed PID calculation
as the SV of minor loop (inner loop), and control the adjusting valve by the output of minor loop
executed PID calculation. It is often used for control targets with large time constant and pure lag,
such as heating furnace temperature+ flow control, temperature+ pressure control, steam drum
water level+ flow control, etc.

Its programming is shown below, which can be achieved by PIDEX. And the data monitoring can
be realized by the control panel of the control module via the host computer display and operation
data.

Figure 2-27 Programming of cascade control

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 2-19 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 LIC_4101 Outer Loop PID
Block
Tag of Function
002 FIC_4101 Inner Loop PID
Block
003 FY_4101 AO (Output) Control Target

004 LT_4101 AI (Input) PV of Outer Loop

005 FT_4101 AI (Input) PV of Inner Loop

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

93
 Function Block Reference

 The SVSCL, SVSCH and SVEU of SV range of major/minor loops should be the same as
its input PV range unit.

 The MVSCL, MVSCH and MVEU of output MV range of major loop should be the same
as the input PV range unit of minor loop. And its MVL, MVH should be the same as
MVSCL and MVSCH when the output limit of MV output is not required, or the MV output
will be limited in 0~100.

 The MVSCL, MVSCH and MVEU of output MV range of minor loop use default value
0~100%, and the MVL and MVH use default value 0~100.

 The SVL and SVH of SV range of major/minor loops should be the same as the SV range
when the SV limit function is not required, or the SV range will be limited in 0~100.

 When the SV_OPT of major loop is set as ON, the SV_OPT of minor loop should be set
as OFF, or the cascade operation cannot be performed manually on the panel.

 Set the MODE_OPT of major/minor loops as OFF.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

BKIN of the upstream function block should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function
block, BKINERR should connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. The
downstream function block can be minor loop for cascade major loop, and the AO tag can be the
downstream function block for minor loop.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

Example 3

To achieve the feedforward control, as shown in the figure below, and it can be operated in the
diagram.

Figure 2-28 Diagram of feedforward control

94
 Function Block Reference

Pure feedforward control is an open-loop control system, and is not often applied because of its
complexity of input or interference in application. In fact, the feedforward-feedback control system
is often used to improve the control performance. It means to reduce lag and improve the control
precision by the feedforward compensation for the major interference and feedback control
correction for other interference.

Its programming is shown below, which can be achieved by PIDEX. And the data monitoring can
be realized by the control panel of the control module via the host computer display and operation
data.

Figure 2-29 Programming of feedforward control

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 2-20 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 FIC2301 Loop PID Tag PID
Block
002 FV_2301 AO (Output) Control Target

003 FT_2301 AI (Input) PV

004 FT_2501 AI (Input) Feedforward Signal

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as PV range unit

 MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU: default value 0~100%

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 SV_OPT: ON

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

 SVL and SVH should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 Set OK and OB according to the turning result.

 When input PV error occurs, the PID loop enters into PVERR status. The loop enters into

95
 Function Block Reference

manual status automatically, and PID output MV holds.

 When AO is compelled, PID loop enters into IMAN status. The loop MV tracks the
compel value of AO.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

2.5 EPID Control Function Block (EPID)

General PID control functions can be achieved by EPID function block. It has two work modes
OOS and AUTO, and applies to electric power industry.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.5.1 Parameters Instruction

Table 2-21 Parameter instruction and application of EPID Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as PV
actual value H
limit.
Basic Range Configuration When
Parameters Settings SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter SV>SVSCH, it is
limited by the
maximum of
Range.
The same as PV
actual value L
limit.
Configuration When
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter SV<SVSCH, it is
limited by the
minimum of
Range.

96
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as MV
MVSC Configuration
MV high scale － actual value H
H Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SVDLE SV decimal digits Configuration
－ function block
N [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MVDLE MV decimal digits Configuration
－ function block
N [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,
Parameter
Output MVSCH].
Limits Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,
Parameter
MVSCH].
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
OFF=Direct
Direct/Rev increases with the
Operation action,
erse Switch SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
Settings direct action, and
action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Extended Input Pin Process value of
Connect to
Parameters PV loop closed control － Input Pin
measuring point AI
process
Connect to outer
loop control value
MV.
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
When select
cascade, SV
comes from CSV.
Connect to
Output
measuring point AI
compensation,
OA － Input Pin (feedforward
used for
signal),
feedforward control
MV=MV0+OA
Input compensation Connect to
value, used to measuring point AI
improve the Refer to 2.1.1
IA － Input Pin
controllability of Related
process with long parameter: IK, IB
deadband time PV=PV+IA

97
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/ cascade
selection:
SWSV TRUE Input Pin -
OFF=auto,
ON=cascade
Connect to electric
manual instrument
Control output
MV=last period
PID operation
Output Pin MV － Output Pin output LT_MV
output value
(before
Limits)+current
period control
increment dMV
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID Param When TD=0,
Settings Operation suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter derivation action
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to 2.2.1
KD TRUE Note2, Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter

Alarm PV LL limit alarm Operation

PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter

Error Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Indication Parameter

Refer to 2.1.3
SV for loop closed Operation
SV SV TRUE When select SV,
control Parameter
set value comes
from SV.
Extended range
HORLI Configuration
maximum － －
Extended M Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
LORLI Configuration
minimum － －
M Parameter
percentage

98
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Suppress module
Alarm alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled On=prohibit to Parameter
and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter

Set as ON at the
OOS mode setting
OOS SWOO Operation first time of
switch TRUE
Settings S Parameter function block
(ON=OOS mode)
downloading

99
 Function Block Reference

2.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-22 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction

PV HH alarm value
Preferenc Alarm setting of loop PV
e (%) HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

100
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis

SVH - － - SV H alarm enable

SV
Limits
(%)

SVL - － - SV L alarm enable

H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or
[MVSCL,MVSCH
SVH MVH 100.000 it is disabled).
]
Note: MV limit is
not affected by
MV
selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or
[MVSCL,MVSCH
SVL MVL 0.000 it is disabled).
]
Note: MV limit is
not affected by
selection.

Read-only. EI=PV
EI Alarm －SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).

Selecting the
PEI
－ － － positive deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

101
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction

Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

Deviation alarm
DL DL 100.000 DL
SV

Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value

Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV

PID
Paramet Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
er parameter SV

Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
time parameter SV

Differenti
Others Incomplete
al Filter
KD(S) KD 10.000 Not less than 0 integral filter
Coefficie
coefficient
nt

Direct Selecting direct

SWPN － －
Control (selected) action is enabled.
Direction Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.

Input
Read-only, can be
Compen
IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation
or program
(%)

Output
Read-only, can be
Compen
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation
or program
(%)

2.5.3 Application Example

Refer to 2.3.3.

102
 Function Block Reference

2.6 LEPID Function Block (LEPID)

The input of LEPID is bias. The function block provides three modes which are OOS, TR and
AUTO. It connects with electric power manual instrument but not AO, and is special for electric
power project.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 100μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

2.6.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-23 Parameter instruction and application of LEPID function block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range － The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
EISCH EI high value － the actual
Parameter
value of EI H.
The same as
Configuration
EISCL EI low value － the actual
Parameter
value of EI L.
Set in the
function block
EI actual value Configuration
EIEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
EI decimal digits Configuration function block
EIDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter panel (equal
to 3 as
default).

103
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration function block
MVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter panel (equal
to 3 as
default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Output Parameter
CH]
Limits
MVoutput rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Extended Input Pin EI Bias input － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.4
Parameters
Connect to
measuring
Track input value
point AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
interlock
Track switch: condition
SWTR OFF= not － Input Pin input,
track ,ON= track Related
parameter:
TV
Connect to
measuring
point AI
(feedforward
signal),
Related
Output parameter:
compensation, OK, OB
OA used for － Input Pin Compensate
feedforward for PID
control calculated
result, MV=
MV of last
period + PID
output
variable+OA
increment

104
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Input Refer to 2.1.2
compensation Related
value, used to parameter:
IA improve the － Input Pin IK, perform
controllability of input
process with long compensation
deadband time from I to EI,
after
compensation
, EIR=EI+IA.
Upstream
output,
enabled when
function block
MV lock increase is automatic
(MV cannot or cascade
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= when lock
lock increase increase
conflicts with
MV Limits,
MV Limits has
the priority.
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic
or cascade
Connect to
electric
manual
instrument In
Output PID operation
－ Output Pin track and
pin output value
auto modes, it
Output Pin must be in the
range of MVH
and MVL
MV H limit alarm
MVHIND － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
indication
MV L limit alarm
MVLIND － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
indication
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
TD =0,
PID Param Operation Suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Settings Parameter deviation
Action
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function block
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2, Note3,
Note4

105
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
Related
EI< EA, excising Operation
EA TRUE parameter:
coefficient is Parameter
DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion Related
modified value Operation parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
Note2
excising Refer to
Precise controlled Operation Note1
MDB TRUE Refer to
Advanced zone range Parameter
Param Precise controlled Operation
MK TRUE Refer to Note1
Setting zone coefficient Parameter
Input EI Operation
EDB TRUE Refer to Note3
Deadband Parameter
Refer to Note3,
Output EI Operation can be
MVDB TRUE
Deadband Parameter modified in
supervision
Integral suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm D limit indication Parameter
DMVLIN MV negative rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
Suppress module
alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enable and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting the first time
OOS Operation
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE of function
Settings Parameter
mode) block
downloading

106
 Function Block Reference

Note 1: Precise control processing

When Mdb>0 and the absolute value of bias after compensation is within precise control zone
(-MDB, MDB), ratio coefficient KP will be corrected as KP=KP*MK.

Note 2: Integral isolation processing

Integral will not work if the absolute value of bias after compensation is greater than
integral-separated coefficient. Ratio coefficient KP will be corrected according to set ratio
correction, which will be KP=KP+DK.

Note 3:

 Input deadband

When fabs (EI) < EDB, dMV (the variation of MV)=0, stop the change of MV. When EI>DB, output
the PID operation result.

 Output deadband

Only when cumulative variation of dMV is over output deadband, will MV changes. Otherwise it will
maintain. For example, if deadband is set “1”, only when the cumulative variation of dMV is over
“1” (eg: change from 30 to 31), will MV changes.

107
 Function Block Reference

2.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-24 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
H value setting of loop
MV (select alarm
MV Limit 100.00 [MVSCL,MVSC enabled, or it is
Preference H MVH
Settings 0 H] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.

108
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
L value setting of loop
MV (select alarm
[MVSCL,MVSC enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
H] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Positive Selecting positive
Rate － － － velocity alarm is
(selected) enabled.
MV Speed Limit Negative Selecting negative
Settings Rate － － － velocity alarm is
(selected) enabled.
100.00 Loop MV velocity limit
Limit DMVLIM －
0 SV
100.00 Loop proportional
PB(%) PB Not less than 0
0 parameter SV
PID
Parameterizati Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
on parameter SV
Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Derivation Differential filter
KD(s) KD(s) 10.000 －
Filter Coef coefficient (s)
Read-only, track input
Track Value TV TV 0.000 －
value(%)
When the absolute
value of EI is less than
error dead zone band
EDB, dMV (MV
Others Input Error variable)= 0, stop the
EDB EDB 0.000 －
Deadzone operation MV
modification. When EI
is larger than DB,
output based on
calculation result.
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Isolation Coefficient parameter
Coefficient DK DK 0.000 －
SV
Run Selecting proportional
STOPP √ －
Proportional (selected) action is enabled.
Action Selecting proportional
Stop STOPP － －
action is disabled.
Read-only, can be set
Input
Value (IA) IA 0.000 － in configuration or
Compensation
program

can be modified in
Output Error
MVDB MVDB 0.000 － supervision
Deadzone
Refer to 2.1.6

can be modified in
Precise MDB MDB －
supervision
Controlled
Zone Settings can be modified in
MK MK －
supervision

Integral Action Selecting integral

Run STOPI √ －
action is enabled.

109
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
Output Read-only, can be set
Compensation Value (OA) OA 0.000 － in configuration or
(%) program
2.6.3 Flag
Table 2-25 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit
D18
Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity
D22
Amplitude Limiting (DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity
D23
Amplitude Limiting (DMVL)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.6.4 Application Example

Refer to 2.3.3.

2.7 PID for Pulse Output Function Block (PID_TP)

The functions are the same with those of PID function block except the followings ones:

 Track is not available.

 There is no need to connect BKIN.

For there is no BKIN, it is like BKIN=MV of PID function block in the program, means PID_TP can
only be the most downstream block of the control but not the upstream block. Connect the DOOUT
with DO at last to control duty ratio of output.

 A more output BOOL whose duty ratio be calculated by current MV and pulse period.

This function block can be used in the condition in which temperature object is controlled by duty
ratio.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

110
 Function Block Reference

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.7.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-26 Parameter instruction and application of PID_TP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic The same as
Configuration
Parameters MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Range Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Limits Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]

111
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limits
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with the OFF=Direct
Direct/Rever
increasing of PV Operation action,
se Switch SWPN TRUE
in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse
Settings
and decreases action
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKINERR Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring
control process point AI
Connect to
Base Input outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
Pin Settings control value
MV
Connect to
measuring
Output
point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
Related
control
parameter:
OK, OB
Advance PID executor
Connect to
Input Pin feedback value ,
MF － Input Pin measuring
Settings used for
point AI
monitoring
Input Connect to
compensation measuring
value, used to point AI, Refer
IA improve the － Input Pin to 2.1.2
controllability of Related
process with long parameter: IK,
deadband time IB
Program manual
Connect the
and auto control
upstream
switch,
output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=O
ON=program auto
N
control

112
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect the
Program auto/
upstream
cascade control
PSWSV － Input Pin output
switch, OFF= SV,
enabled when
ON=CSV
SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON= Connect the
manual-automatic upstream
selection output
MAN_OP
controlled by － Input Pin Related
T
PSWAM, OFF= parameter:
manual-automatic PSWAM,
selection SWAM
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream
selection output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection SWSV
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output.
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin Enabled when
Increase), ON=
the function
lock increase
block is auto
or cascade.
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Anti-integral
Refer to 2.1.4
saturation input,
RRL － Input Pin Related
used for control
parameter:
overshoot
BKIN;
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic or
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output output,
value
BOOL,
Output Pin DOOUT Pulse output － Output Pin Connect the
tag DO

113
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to AO
PID operation
MV － Output Pin tag
output value Note1
Refer to
Connect to the
BKIN of
Upstream
Feedback output
BKOUT － Output Pin Block,
value
Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch (ON=track Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
PV, OFF=track Parameter
BKOUT
SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
When TD=0,
suppress
Operation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE derivation
PID Param Parameter
action Refer to
Settings 2.1.8
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function block
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2, Note3,
Note4

Operation Note1
TP Pulse Circle (s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Operator Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Command Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_O Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
PT Parameter
return
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal
Related
to preset MV Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
value when switch Parameter
MMV
to manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON

114
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to equal
Related
to present MV Operation
SWPMV TRUE parameter:
value when switch Parameter
PMV
to auto status
Operation Enabled when
PMV Preset MV TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
SV for loop closed Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
control Parameter
Operator Output value=
Manual output Operation
Data MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Input Alarm Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Settings hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
Advance adjusting,
BYPASS=ON,
Calculation Operation used to excise
BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Settings Parameter inner loop
calculation, switch
when it fails
SV to MV directly
Refer to 2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action

115
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Integral suppress
switch, when
Operation
STOPI STOPI=ON, TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
Operation Related
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE －
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change GW, PB and
value to nonlinear. KN When
NGN_OP Used for control Configuration
－ NGN_OPT＝
T when proportional Parameter
ON; GW and
gain needs
PB when
nonlinear change.
NGN_OPT＝
OFF=Error square
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter parameter: DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter parameter: EA
excising
PID control
algorithm
selection switch.
PID_OPT ＝0,
perform standard
OUT_OP PID algorithm. Configuration Related
－
T PID_OPT＝1, Parameter parameter: MV
perform PV D_PI
algorithm.
PID_OPT＝2,
perform PV PD_I
algorithm

116
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID type
Refer to
selection: Configuration Note1, Note2,
PID_OPT － 2.1.1
0=PID,1=D_PI,2= Parameter Note3, Note4
PD_I
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
Compensati bias value parameter: IA
on Settings Output Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA

117
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
MV manual slow
Operation function block
SMV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties
e value (%)
setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties
setting
Related
Fase/Slow/In parameter:
crease/Decr MVSCL
ease Set SV manual
Settings slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties
e value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage

118
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp function
switch. When
Related
changing set
parameter:
value, incline it to
RAMP.
SV according to Operation
SWRAMP TRUE Enable when
the set RAMP (s). Parameter
in automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade
function off,
mode.
ON=SV ramp
function on
Related
SV Advance Operation
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Settings Parameter
SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuration
range limit. Used － Refer to 2.1.3
PT Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
alarm,, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enabled and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode
Operation the first time of
SWOOS setting switch TRUE
Parameter function block
(ON= OOS mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
OOS value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
Settings N
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuration
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV

Note. Duty ratio output

119
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-30 Duty Ratio Output Sketch Figure

Duty ratio is calculated from the percentage of current MV according to pulse period TP. For
example, if MV=65, MVSCH=100, MVSCL=0, then MV%=65%. The ON time of DOOUT is
65%*TP, while OFF time is (1-65%)*TP.

120
 Function Block Reference

2.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-27 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference Alarm HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
(%) enabled, or it is
disabled).

121
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
Hystere PV Process value
PVHYS 0.000 －
sis alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm Deviati SV(select alarm
(%) EI 0.000 －
on (EI) enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(select － － － positive deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.

122
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF
Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
Delay
Delay (s) 0.000 － Lag time SV
(s)
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
MV ed) enabled.
Velocity DMVL Selecting negative
Limits (select － － － velocity alarm is
(%) ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
Loop proportional
PID PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
PID
Coefficie Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
nt parameter SV
Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
time parameter SV
Incompl
ete
Differenti Incomplete integral
KD(s) KD(s) 10.000 Not less than 0
al filter coefficient
coefficie
nt
Efficien
Selecting deadband
cy
SWDB － － parameter is
(select
enabled.
ed)
Invalid Selecting deadband
Deadba (select SWDB √ － parameter is
nd (%) ed) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Non-line Gap Read-only,
ar Gain Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(%) (select selection switch
ed) ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Error
non-linear gain
Square
NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
(select
OFF=Square Root
ed)
Action
Range Nonlinear gain
GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
(GW) action range

123
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
Range parameter
Integral EA EA 0.000 －
SV
Separati
on (%) Coeffici Coefficient
Coefficient 0.000 －
ent parameter SV
Efficien
cy Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
(select is enabled.
SV ed)
Ramp
Action Invalid
Selecting SV ramp
(%) (select SWRAMP √ －
is disabled.
ed)
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Direct/R
everse Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action
Scale ed) is enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
PID when debugging.
Operatio
n The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compen
sation Input compensation
IK IK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Output Read-only, can be
Compen OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation or program

124
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
(%) Output
OK OK 1.000 －
compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
Set EI KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
Alarm
Filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Read-only, can be
Proces
BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedbac s Value
or program
k Output
Track Read-only, can be
Set
BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
Value
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
Set or program
Value
Track Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
Man or program
Auto
Cntrl Src Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
Cascade or program
Cntrl Src Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Output Output
TP 10.000 － Read-only
(s) (s)
2.7.3 Flag
Table 2-28 Flag List

Flag Instruction
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D4 Cascade(AUTO)
D8 PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D10 PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)

125
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI Alarm (NEI)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal
D18
(REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Configuration Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude
D22
Limiting (DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude
D23
Limiting (DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position NEI (NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position PEI (PMF)

2.8 Pulse PI Control Function Block (PI_PLS)

Pulse PI control function block adopts the "Control-Maintain-Control" mode, which is mainly used
to fields with long deadband or control fields according to sampling data of analyzer unit.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

2.8.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-29 Parameter instruction and application of PID_PLS Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuratio
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuratio
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.

126
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuratio
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
Limits H]
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from overlarge Parameter
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/Re OFF=Direct
increases with the
verse Operation action,
SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
direct action, and
Settings action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.

Base Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters downstream
Settings
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed control － Input Pin measuring point
process AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV

127
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
Track switch: interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
measuring point
Output
AI (feedforward
compensation,
OA － Input Pin signal),
used for
Related
feedforward control
parameter: OK,
OB
Connect the
upstream
output.
Note: when up
jumping occurs
Redundancy is
to CSW, if it is in
Advance required in the case
external startup
Input Pin of control period TP
CSW － Input Pin mode, control
Settings used to control
and count the
sampling PI and TP
TC time, after
is less than 0.
TC time, set
CSW as OFF,
and the output
will be
maintained.
PID executor Connect to
MF feedback value , － Input Pin measuring point
used for monitoring AI
Connect to
Input compensation
measuring point
value, used to
AI, Refer to
improve the
IA － Input Pin 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with long
parameter: IK,
deadband time
IB
Program manual
and auto control
Connect the
switch,
upstream output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade control upstream output
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON

128
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Manual-automatic
control source
Connect the
switch, ON=
upstream output
manual-automatic
Related
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin
parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automatic
SWAM
selection controlled
by SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream output
SV_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV, SWSV
selection controlled
by SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output. enabled
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin when function
Increase), ON=
block is
lock increase
automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring point
Anti-integral AI, Related
saturation input, parameter:
RRL － Input Pin
used for control BKIN;
overshoot Refer to 2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output. enabled
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin when function
decrease), ON=
block is
Lock decrease
automatic or
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output output,
value

Output Connect to
PID operation
Pin MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block

129
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
BKOUT value Related
Configuratio
BK_OPT switch (ON=track － parameter:
n Parameter
PV, OFF=track SV) BKOUT
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
PID TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
Param
Settings Operation Note1
TC Control Time(s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Operation Note1
TP Control Cycle(s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_OP Configuratio
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
T n Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Operator
Command Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
When up-jump
Operation
CSWI CSWI control input TRUE occurs to CSWI,
Parameter
CSW=ON.
Whether to equal to
preset MV value
when switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch. Related
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWPMV=ON, MV PMV
= PMV, MV velocity
alarm, lock
increase/decrease
are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
Operation Enabled when
PMV OOS/IMAN/TR/MA TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
N modes to AUTO
or CAS mode
Operator Operation
SV SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Data Parameter
Output value=
Manual output Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode

130
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
Input Deviation alarm Operation
Alarm DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Settings
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter time Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position error
Operation
TMFHYS alarm hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
adjusting, used
BYPASS=ON,
Operation to excise inner
Advance BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter loop when it
Calculatio calculation, switch
fails Refer to
n Settings SV to MV directly
2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch, Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
when STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral action
Integral suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Enable switch,
Operation Related
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range

131
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change GW, PB and KN
value to nonlinear. When
Used for control Configuratio
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
when proportional n Parameter
ON; GW and
gain needs
PB when
nonlinear change.
NGN_OPT＝
OFF=Error square
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
Output type
selection switch.
When OUT_OPT＝ Configuratio Related
OUT_OPT －
OFF, output n Parameter parameter: MV
position type MV;
OUT_OPT
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative deviation Monitoring
NEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
MV positive rate Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position error
Monitoring
NMFIND negative alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position error
Monitoring
PMFIND positive alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Compens Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
ation IK TRUE Related
gain Parameter
Settings parameter: IA

132
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IB TRUE Related
bias value Parameter
parameter: IA
Refer to 2.1.4
Output Operation
OK TRUE Related
compensation gain Parameter
parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation bias TRUE Related
Parameter
value parameter: OA
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
Fase/Slo parameter:
w/Increas MVSCL
e/Decreas Set SV manual
e Settings slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV slow in function block
Operation
SSV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV fast
Operation in function block
FSV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuratio
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended n Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuratio
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
percentage

133
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing set value, Related
incline it to SV parameter:
according to the set Operation RAMP. Enable
SWRAMP TRUE
RAMP (s). Parameter when in
OFF=SV ramp automatic or
function off, cascade mode.
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Related
Operation
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
Settings SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_OP Configuratio
range limit. Used to － Refer to 2.1.3
T n Parameter
prevent the output
MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm.
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
OOS value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
Settings
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
Configuratio
OOS_OPT MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
n Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain the
MV

Note1: Other instruction refers to 2.2 except followings:

134
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-31 Algorithm of pulse PI control function block

PI calculation with hold function is control algorithm of pulse PI controller function block, by which
PI control calculation is implemented to get output value MV and output change value dMV. In the
mode of auto run (AUT, CAS), PI control with hold function will be implemented only in the control
time TC of each pulse time TP. Output value will be maintained in the left time (TP-TC).

Control time and sampling period (TS) must be set according to principles as follows:

Pulse period: TP=Deadband time of control objects +lag time constant * (from 2 to 3) of control
objects

Control time: TC=TP/10

The unit of time is second.

Pulse period value is the time of process variable PV reaching stable after the output value acting
on the whole process. The shortest period of the main bump which influences the process is Tn. If
Tn is shorter than sampling period, it is not available. Sampling period longer than Tn can be tuned
according to the following expression:

TP<=Tn/5

Sampling action:

Figure 2-32 Principle figure of Pulse PI control

Pulse PI control calculation expression (P_I control)

T
MV  K P * K S * (PVn  En )
TI

EI n  PVn  SVn

135
 Function Block Reference

100
KP 
PB

MVSCH  MVSCL
KS 
SVSCH  SVSCL

KP is proportional coefficient and KS is range transition coefficient.

When TP is set 0, pulse PI control can be started from outside. PI control started from outside is
achieved when the control switch (CSW) is set ON by other function blocks. Once PI control is
started, PI control will run in the control time (TC). The control switch will be set OFF after TC. If
the control switch is set OFF forcedly by outside function blocks, output values must be maintained,
shown as follows.

Figure 2-33 Principle figure of pulse PI control started from outside

136
 Function Block Reference

2.8.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-30 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference (%) HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

137
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(select － － － positive deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.

138
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFHY
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
S
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
MV Velocity
Limits (%) DMVL Selecting negative
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
PID Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
PID parameter SV
Parameter Loop integral time
TI (s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Sampling TC (s) TC 1.000 Not less than 0 Control time
Time TP (s) TP 1.000 Not less than 0 Control period
Enable Selecting deadband
(select SWDB － － parameter is
ed) enabled.
Disable Selecting deadband
Deadband (select SWDB √ － parameter is
(%) ed) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Gap Read-only,
Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(select selection switch
ed) ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Square
non-linear gain
Non-linear Root
NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (select
OFF=Square Root
ed)
Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
SV Ramp Enable
Selecting SV ramp
Action (%) (select SWRAMP － －
is enabled.
ed)

139
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Disable
Selecting SV ramp
(select SWRAMP √ －
is disabled.
ed)
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Control
Direction Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action
ed) is enabled.
Proportiona
l Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.

Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
PID
The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compensat Input compensation
ion (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compensat Output
OK OK 1.000 －
ion (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
Bias Alarm KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
Filter
Settings Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)

140
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedback or program
Output
Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, track
TV (%) TV (%) TV (%) 0.000 －
input value(%)
2.8.3 Flag
Table 2-31 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tricking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)

141
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)

2.9 Integral of Manual Set PD Function Block (PD_SI)

PD function block with manual resetting implements PD control and integral action is control
function set manually. In the process of programmable temperature control, operation conditions
are not maintained.

For example, there is powerful instant heat liberation in the chemistry process. In this case,
integral action will be weakened for a period of time. Just like these processes (deadband time is
too long or process time constant is too big), big proportion band should be set. If integral action
works, oscillation will be caused.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.9.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-32 Parameter instruction and application of PID_SI Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.

142
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
Limits
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MVoutput rate
variety limits value.
Used to prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from overlarge Parameter
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/R OFF=Direct
increases with the
everse Operation action,
SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
direct action, and
Settings action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Feedback input.
BKIN does not act in
Base Connect to
Extended the calculation. It
Input Pin BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN outputs and tracks － Input Pin
Settings downstream
the modification of
block
BKIN only in IMAN
mode.
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Connect to
Note1
PV PV, Refer to － Input Pin measuring
point AI

143
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV
Connect to
measuring
point AI.
TV Track input value － Input Pin
Related
parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
interlock
Track switch:
condition
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
input,
ON=track
Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
measuring
Output point AI
compensation, used (feedforward
OA － Input Pin
for feedforward signal),
control Related
parameter:
OK, OB
PID executor Connect to
Advance MF feedback value , － Input Pin measuring
Input Pin used for monitoring point AI
Settings Connect to
Input compensation
measuring
value, used to
point AI,
improve the
IA － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with long
parameter: IK,
deadband time
IB
Program manual and Connect the
auto control switch, upstream
OFF=program output
PSWAM － Input Pin
manual control, Enabled when
ON=program auto MAN_OPT=O
control N
Connect the
Program auto/
upstream
cascade control
PSWSV － Input Pin output
switch, OFF= SV,
enabled when
ON=CSV
SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source Connect the
switch, ON= upstream
manual-automatic output
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWAM, OFF= parameter:
manual-automatic PSWAM,
selection controlled SWAM
by SWAM

144
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/Cascade
control source Connect the
selection, ON= upstream
auto/cascade output
SV_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection controlled SWSV
by SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output.
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin enabled when
Increase), ON= lock
function block
increase
is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Anti-integral
Related
saturation input,
SWDEC － Input Pin parameter:
used for control
BKIN; Refer to
overshoot
2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
HOLD － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
PID operation output electric
MV － Output Pin
value manual
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Output
parameter:
Pin
BK_OPT
Connect to the
Feedback status BKINERR of
BKOUTERR － Output Pin
value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value switch Related
Configuration
BK_OPT (ON=track PV, － parameter:
Parameter
OFF=track SV) BKOUT
PID
Param Operation
PB Proportion band size TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Settings Parameter

Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time (s) TRUE
Parameter interference
switch

145
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
TD =0,
Operation Suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter deviation
Action
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2,
block
Note3, Note4`

Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Monitoring
IMODE Standby work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
ON=auto return,
Configuration
MODE_OPT OFF=manual return － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
(default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
Operator switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
Comma OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
nd ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
Operation Enabled when
SWSV selection: OFF=auto, －
Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
SV for loop closed Operation
SV － Refer to 2.1.3
control Parameter
Output value=
Operation
MANMV Manual output value － MANMV in
Parameter
manual mode
Operator
Data Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
Operation Note2
MR Manual Set Value － Refer to
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
Input PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Alarm
PV H limit alarm Operation
Settings PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter

146
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deviation filter time Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position error
Operation
TMFHYS alarm hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
adjusting,
BYPASS=ON,
Operation used to excise
BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter inner loop
calculation, switch
when it fails
SV to MV directly for
Refer to 2.1.4
output
Proportion suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Enable switch, when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Operation Enable when
DB Deadband band size TRUE
Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
Advance DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
d Param
Settings Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change value GW, PB and
to nonlinear. Used KN When
for control when Configuration
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
proportional gain Parameter
ON; GW and
needs nonlinear
PB when
change.
OFF=Error square NGN_OPT＝
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
PVHH alarm Monitoring
Alarm PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

147
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative deviation Monitoring
NEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
MV positive rate limit Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position error
Monitoring
NMFIND negative alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position error
Monitoring
PMFIND positive alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IK TRUE Related
gain Parameter
parameter: IA
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IB TRUE Related
Compen bias value Parameter
parameter: IA
sation
Settings Refer to 2.1.4
Output Operation
OK TRUE Related
compensation gain Parameter
parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation bias TRUE Related
Parameter
value parameter: OA
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
Fase/Slo ase
w/Increa percentage in
MV manual slow
se/Decre Operation function block
SMV increase/decrease TRUE
ase Parameter properties
value (%)
Settings setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH

148
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decrease TRUE function block
Parameter
value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
MVSCL
Set SV manual
slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decrease TRUE function block
Parameter
value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuration
Extende HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
d Range percentage
Settings Extended range Configuration
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum percentage Parameter
SV ramp function
switch. When Related
changing set value, parameter:
SV incline it to SV RAMP. Enable
Advance Operation
SWRAMP according to the set TRUE when in
Settings Parameter
RAMP (s). automatic or
OFF=SV ramp cascade
function off, ON=SV mode.
ramp function on
Related
Operation
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWRAMP

149
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV= Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
range limit. Used to Parameter
prevent the output
MV from interference
when changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled Parameter
to display alarm.
and
Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
s
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation parameter:
OOS OOSVAL TRUE
value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
Settings N
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, when Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note 1: Principle Instruction

Figure 2-34 PD control FB algorithm process with manipulating set integral item

The proportional band can be set narrower via executing proportional differential control, and
suppress overshoot via differential action to shift phase and achieve better control performance.

TD
MV  K P * K S * ( E n  * PVn )  MR  BLn
T

Among them: the formulas of EIn, KP and KS refer to 2.8.1 Note 1.

150
 Function Block Reference

T
BLn  (1  ) * BLn 1
Tbl

PVn  PVn  PVn -1

BLn is balance option, which is used to bumpless transfer revising variables from manual mode to
auto mode. Tbl is balance time. Ks is range conversion coefficient. In the mode of AUT or CAS,
CALCn is conversed to MV output by output process.

Note 2: Bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer of PD_SI function block is based on balance movement. When function block is
transferred from manual mode (MAN) to auto mode (AUTO), BLn 0 as initial value of balance item
is obtained by the following expression to achieve bumpless transfer.

TD
BLn 0  MV  K P * K S * ( E n  * PV n)  MR
T

Figure 2-35 Bumpless transfer figure of balance movement of PD_SI function block

151
 Function Block Reference

2.9.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-33 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference [SVSCL,SVSC
(%) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

152
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSC
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSC
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVSC
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
H SVH 40.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
H MVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
L MVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm (%) Bias SV(select alarm
EI 0.000 －
(EI) enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(selec － － － positive deviation
ted) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(selec － － － negative deviation
ted) alarm is enabled.

153
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
DLHY Deviation alarm
DLHYS 0.000 －
S hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFH
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
YS (s)
DMV
Selecting positive
H
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selec
enabled.
ted)
MV Velocity
Limits (%) DMVL Selecting negative
(selec － － － velocity alarm is
ted) enabled.
DMVL Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
IM limit SV
PID PB(% Loop proportional
PB 100.000 －
PID ) parameter SV
Parameter Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 －
time parameter SV
Incomplete Incomplete integral
KD(s) KD 10.000 －
Diff Coef filter coefficient
Enabl
Selecting deadband
e
SWDB － － parameter is
(selec
enabled.
ted)
Disabl
Selecting deadband
Deadband e
SWDB √ － parameter is
(%) (selec
disabled.
ted)
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
DBHY Deadband band
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
S hysteresis
Gap Read-only,
Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(selec selection switch
ted) ON= Gap Action
Squar Read-only,
e non-linear gain
Non-linear Root NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (selec OFF=Square Root
ted) Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient

154
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Balance Balance time
Balan
Switch TB 0.000 Not less than 0 without interference
ce (s)
Coefficient switch
Enabl
e Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
(selec is enabled.
ted)
SV Ramp Disabl
Action (%) e Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP √ －
(selec is disabled.
ted)
RAM Coefficient
RAMP 100.000 －
P parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(selec SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ted)
Control
Direction Rever
se Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selec action is enabled.
ted)
Run Selecting
(selec STOPP √ － proportional action
Proportional ted) is enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
PID Action
The modification of
function block panel
Bypas is disabled for
BYPASS － －
s function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compensati Input compensation
on (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compensati Output
OK OK 1.000 －
on (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value

155
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
Alarm Limit coefficient
Settings TSV(s Deviation filter time
TSV(s) 0.000 0~1000s
) constant(s)
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedback or program
Output Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OPT or program
Setting Read-only, can be
Progr
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
am
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progr
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
am
or program
MR
MR (%) MR 0.000 0~100 －
(%)

TV Read-only, track
TV (%) TV 0.000 －
(%) input value (%)

2.9.3 Flag
Table 2-34 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm(PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)

156
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI Alarm (NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm When Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm of MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)
Alarm of MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm with Valve Position Deviation Negative (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm with Valve Position Deviation Positive (PMF)

2.10 Error Cumulation PI Control Function Block (PI_AE)

PI_AE is used for multivariate flow control to maintain total flux value, which is calculated
according to certain proportion of flux of each part.

Proportional and integral control is implemented by PI_AE function block, based on accumulation
deviation. Accumulation deviation value DV is obtained by summing the difference between
process value PV and set value SV in each scan period. And the sum of difference is conversed
time range.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.10.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-35 Parameter instruction and application of PI_AE Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual value
Parameter
H limit.

157
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual value
Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
Limits variety limit
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Control
Deviation alarm
SV. Error alarm
is performed for
Cumulation Error Operation
VL TRUE accumulation
Limit Parameter
error value, not
for the current
error value.
Refer to Note2

158
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
Direct/Re OFF=Direct
the increasing of
verse Operation action,
SWPN PV in direct TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
Settings action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring point
control process AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
Base MV
Input Pin Connect to
Settings Track input value measuring point
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin AI. Related
MV=TV ) parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
Track switch: interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
Output measuring point
compensation, AI (feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin signal),
feedforward Related
control parameter: OK,
OB
Advance PID executor
Connect to
Input Pin feedback value ,
MF － Input Pin measuring point
Settings used for
AI
monitoring
Input
Connect to
compensation
measuring point
value, used to
AI, Refer to
improve the
IA － Input Pin 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with
parameter: IK,
long deadband
IB
time

159
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Program manual
and auto control
Connect the
switch,
upstream output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program
auto control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade control upstream output
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= enabled when
SV, ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automati
c control source
switch, ON=
Connect the
manual-automati
upstream output
c selection
Related
MAN_OPT controlled by － Input Pin
parameter:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automati
SWAM
c selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
auto/cascade Connect the
selection upstream output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV, SWSV
selection
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
MV lock upstream
increase (MV output. enabled
SWINC cannot － Input Pin when function
Increase), ON= block is
lock increase automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring point
Anti-integral AI, Related
saturation input, parameter:
RRL － Input Pin
used for control BKIN; Refer to
overshoot 2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
MV lock upstream
decrease (MV output. enabled
SWDEC cannot － Input Pin when function
decrease), ON= block is
Lock decrease automatic or
cascade

160
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation
MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Output parameter:
Pin BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
(ON=track PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE
size Parameter
Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time (s) TRUE
Parameter interference
PID switch
Param
Settings Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE
Parameter
Change the
Time switching
Operation time unit into
TK coefficient (No TRUE
Parameter second.
less than 0.05)
Refer to Note1
Operator Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Command Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_OP Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
T Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to
equal to preset Related
Operation
SWMMV MV value when TRUE parameter:
Parameter
switch to manual MMV
status
Preset MV value
Operation Enabled when
MMV (switch to TRUE
Parameter SWMMV=ON
manual)

161
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Reset Operation
RST TRUE
cumulation error Parameter
Whether to
equal to preset
MV value when
switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch. Related
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWPMV=ON, PMV
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decrea
se are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
OOS/IMAN/TR/ Operation Enabled when
PMV TRUE
MAN modes to Parameter SWPMV=ON
AUTO or CAS
mode
SV for loop Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
closed control Parameter
Output value=
Manual output Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
Operator Control error
Data DV resets when:
The cumulation
error reset
Cumulation
switch RST set
Monitoring error value, can
DV as ON; －
Parameter be set in
Function block
program
mode is manual;
In the mode of
process variable
track
Input PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm alarm value Parameter
Settings PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter

162
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
operation, when When cascade
Advanced BYPASS=ON, adjusting, used
Calculatio excise PID Operation to excise inner
BYPASS TRUE
n Settings calculation, Parameter loop when it
switch SV to MV fails
directly for Refer to 2.1.4
output
Proportion
suppress switch,
when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Integral
suppress switch,
when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband
enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter

163
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the
relation between Related
error and output parameters:
change value to GW, PB and KN
nonlinear. Used When
for control when Configuration
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
proportional gain Parameter
ON; GW and
needs nonlinear
PB when
change.
OFF=Error NGN_OPT＝
square root OFF
function,
ON=Gap action
function
Control output
type:
OFF=position Configuration Related
OUT_OPT －
type, Parameter parameter: MV
ON=increment
type
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive rate Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Control error H Monitoring
AEHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter

164
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Control error L Monitoring
AELIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Related
Compens Parameter
bias value parameter: IA
ation
Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrea TRUE properties
Parameter
se value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrea TRUE
Parameter properties
se value (%)
setting
Related
Fase/Slo parameter:
w/Increas MVSCL
e/Decreas Set SV manual
e Settings slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV slow in function block
Operation
SSV increase/decrea TRUE properties
Parameter
se value (%) setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV fast
Operation in function block
FSV increase/decrea TRUE
Parameter properties
se value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL

165
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp
function switch.
When changing
Related
set value, incline
parameter:
it to SV
Operation RAMP. Enable
SWRAMP according to the TRUE
Parameter when in
set RAMP (s).
automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on

SV Related
Operation
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
Settings SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_OP range limit. Used Configuration
－ Refer to 2.1.3
T to prevent the Parameter
output MV from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Alarm module alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled On=prohibit to Parameter
and display alarm.
Suppress ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at
OOS setting switch Operation the first time of
Settings SWOOS TRUE
(ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
output value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON

166
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OOS
mode
output
value
type.
when
OOS_
OPT
=ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=O Parameter
OSVAL
, when
OOS_
OPT
=OFF,
maintai
n the
MV

Note 1. PI control with cumulative departure

DVRn  DVRn1  ( SVn  PVn )

DVRn
DVn  * TS
TK

DVRn is original cumulative departure value;

DVRn1 is original cumulative departure value of front cyclic

Time conversion coefficient converses original accumulation deviation value of flow unit (m3/h) to
weight or volume unit (m3). Time conversion coefficient converses time unit of flow to second, for
example, if unit of PV is m3/h, TK is set 3600.

Calculation expression of control algorithm of PI_AE function block:

KP * KS T
MVn  * (T * E n  * ES n )  BLn
8 TI

Instruction of EIn, KP and KS refer to 2.8.1 Note1

Control accumulation deviation value ESn used for PI control calculation is equal to the value of
accumulation deviation DVn limited by set value of control deviation alarm VL.

When DVn  VL , ES n  VL * TK .

When  VL  DVn  VL , ES n  DVRn * TS .

167
 Function Block Reference

When DVn   VL , ES n   VL * TK

Note 2. Control deviation alarm

Control deviation alarm is used to check whether accumulation deviation value DV which
continues to add after accumulation deviation alarm is over absolute value of set value of control
deviation alarm VL. If exceeded, the control deviation alarm is generated.

If accumulation deviation value DV is over absolute value of set value of control deviation VL
positively, positive alarm of control alarm AEH is generated; if accumulation deviation value DV is
over set value of control deviation VL negatively, negative alarm of control deviation AEL is
generated.

168
 Function Block Reference

2.10.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-36 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
Prefere PV Alarm setting of loop PV
[SVSCL,SVSCH
nce (%) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

169
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSCH
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSCH
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVSCH
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSCH
H SVH 40.000 is disabled).
]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSCH
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
H MVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
L MVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
Selecting the
PEI
－ － － positive deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.
Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

170
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm
Selecting the
(%)
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFHYS TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
Selecting positive
DMVH
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
MV
Velocity Selecting negative
DMVL
Limits (%) － － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM DMVLIM 100.000 －
limit SV
PID Loop proportional
PID PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Paramete
r Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Selecting deadband
Enable
SWDB － － parameter is
(selected)
enabled.
Selecting deadband
Disable
Deadband SWDB √ － parameter is
(selected)
(%) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Balance time
Balance TB TB 0.000 Not less than 0 without interference
Switch switch
Coefficien
t Change the time
TK TK 1.000 －
unit into second.
Read-only,
Gap non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(selected) selection switch
ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Square non-linear gain
Non-linear Root NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (selected) OFF=Square Root
Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 －
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
SV Ramp Enable Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
Action (%) (selected) is enabled.

171
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Disable Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP √ －
(selected) is disabled.
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct Selecting direct
SWPN － －
Control (selected) action is enabled.
Direction Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.
Selecting
Run
STOPP √ － proportional action
(selected)
Proportion is enabled.
al Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
PID when debugging.
Action The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compens Input compensation
ation (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compens Output
OK OK 1.000 －
ation (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
EI Alarm coefficient
Settings Deviation filter time
TSV(s) TSV(s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Feedback Read-only, can be
Output PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Track or program

172
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not Track SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OP or program
T Settings Read-only, can be
Program MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Program SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
DV DV 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Control Enabled when
AEH AEH － －
Bias selected H alarm
Alarm Enabled when
AEL AEL － －
selected L alarm
Control Bias Alarm
VL VL 100.000 Not less than 0
SV
Read-only, track
TV (%) TV (%) TV (%) 0.000 －
input value(%)
2.10.3 Flag
Table 2-37 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialise(IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)

173
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI Alarm (NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Disable Alarm for Control Deviation High (AEH)
D21 Disable Alarm for Control Deviation Low (AEL)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Minus Deviation (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)

2.11 Ratio Control Function Block (RATIO)

Output value of ratio setting function block (RATIO) is changed with the value of PV multiplied by
set value of ratio. Ratio setting function block is used to control two variables at setting ratio.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 60μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.11.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-38 Parameter instruction and application of RATIO Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as MV

MV high Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH － actual value H
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
MV low Configuration
MVSCL － actual value L
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
SV high Configuration
SVSCH － actual value H
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.

174
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
SV engineer Configuration
SVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
MV engineer Configuration
MVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Value range
MV H limit Operation
MVH TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
value Parameter
]
Value range
MV L limit Operation
MVL TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
value Parameter
]
SV H limit Operation Value range
SVH TRUE
value Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
SV L limit Operation Value range
SVL TRUE
Limits value Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MVoutput
rate variety
limits value.
Used to
prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from Parameter
overlarge
modification
in a short
time.
Base Connect to
Extend Feedback BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN － Input Pin
Parameter input downstream
Settings
block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream
block ERR
Process
value of loop Connect to
PV closed － Input Pin measuring point
control AI
process
Connect to outer
CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
MV

175
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Track input measuring point
value (In AI.
TV － Input Pin
track mode, Related
MV=TV ) parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
Track switch:
interlock
OFF=not
SWTR － Input Pin condition input,
track,
Related
ON=track
parameter: TV
Program
manual and
auto control
switch, Connect the
OFF=progra upstream output
PSWAM － Input Pin
m manual Enabled when
control, MAN_OPT=ON
ON=progra
m auto
control
Program
auto/
Connect the
cascade
upstream output
PSWSV control － Input Pin
enabled when
switch,
SV_OPT=ON
OFF= SV,
ON=CSV
Manual-auto
matic control
source
switch, ON=
Advance manual-auto
Input Pin matic Connect the
Settings selection upstream output
MAN_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWAM, parameter:
OFF= PSWAM, SWAM
manual-auto
matic
selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascad
e control
source
selection,
ON=
Connect the
auto/cascad
upstream output
e selection
SV_OPT － Input Pin Related
controlled by
parameter:
PSWSV,
PSWSV, SWSV
OFF=
auto/cascad
e selection
controlled by
SWSV

176
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID Connect to
MV operation － Output Pin electric manual
output value instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Related
parameter:
Output BK_OPT
Pin Connect to the
Feedback
BKOUTERR － Output Pin BKINERR of
status value
Upstream Block
BKOUT
value switch
Related
(ON=track Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track
SV)
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
work mode Parameter
ON=auto
return,
Configuration
MODE_OPT OFF=manua － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
l return
(default)
Manual and
auto switch: Operation Enabled when
SWAM －
OFF=manua Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
l, ON=auto
Operator Auto/
Command cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascad
e
Whether to
equal to
preset MV
Operation Related
SWMMV value when TRUE
Parameter parameter: MMV
switch to
manual
status
Preset MV
Operation Enabled when
MMV value (switch TRUE
Parameter SWMMV=ON
to manual)
SV for loop
Operation
SV closed TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Parameter
Operator control
Data Output value=
Manual Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
output value Parameter
manual mode
Input PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm alarm value Parameter

177
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Settings PV H limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV L limit Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV LL limit Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
Process
Operation
PVHYS value alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
hysteresis
Modify
Advance
coefficient Operation
Calculatio BIAS TRUE Refer to Note1
(compensati Parameter
n Settings
on)
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV L limit
Monitoring
PVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV LL limit
Monitoring
PVLLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Alarm MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV L limit
Monitoring
SVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive
Monitoring
DMVHIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV negative
Monitoring
DMVLIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Extended
range Configuration
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
maximum Parameter
Extended percentage
Range
Settings Extended
range Configuration
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum Parameter
percentage
SV Related
Ramp Operation
Advance RP TRUE parameter:
constant Parameter
Settings SWRAMP

178
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV
switch
enable/disab
le: OFF=not
track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/
SVL, SV=
range limit. Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
Used to Parameter
prevent the
output MV
from
interference
when
changing the
control
mode.
Suppress
module
alarm, Operation
Alarm AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit Parameter
Enabled to display
and alarm.
Suppress
Alarm
ENALM TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
enable
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the
setting Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
switch (ON= Parameter function block
OOS mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
output value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode
OOS
output value
Settings
type. when
OOS_OPT
=ON,
Configuration
OOS_OPT MV=OOSVA － Refer to 1.1.1
Parameter
L, when
OOS_OPT
=OFF,
maintain the
MV

Note 1. Calculate ratio

Ratio is calculated according to the following expression:

MV n  SV e * ( PV n  SVSCL ) * KS  BIAS  MVSCL

SVe : Valid set value of ratio which is enabled set value of ratio after set value of ratio SV is
implemented ramp process of set value. Ramp process of set value is used for bumpless transfer
of function block mode.

179
 Function Block Reference

As the PV and MV are the actual values, when the maximum and minimum rages of PV and MV,
the value of KS (range) changes. The engineering unit of BIAS is the same as MV.

Note 2. Bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer indicates that output value will not be mutant in the mode of transfer function
block. The movement of bumpless transfer which is selected automatically will be different with
difference of output movement and control mode. There are two bumpless transfer modes for
RATIO function block: ratio track and ramp movement of set value of ratio.

 Ratio track

When ratio calculation is stopped, set value of ratio SV is calculated according to output value MV,
by which bumpless transfer from manual mode to auto mode can be achieved.

1
SV  ( MV  MVSCL  BIAS ) *
( PV  SVSCL) * KS

The function of ratio track can be implemented in manual mode (MAN). If ( PV  SVSCL) * KS  0 ,
SV=SVH.

 Ramp movement of set value of ratio

When set value of ratio SV is changed, change of set value of valid ratio SVe in per second is
limited to be less than or equal to ramp constant RP by ramp movement of set value of ratio. When
function block mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode, SVe calculated according to
MV is initial value of set value of valid ratio. And when set value SV is changed, ramp action of
ratio set value works.

180
 Function Block Reference

2.11.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-39 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
(%)
enabled, or it is
disabled).

181
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLIM DMVL Selecting negative
Settings (select － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
Feedback Read-only, can be
Track PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
or program

182
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OP or program
T Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, track
TV TV TV 0.000 －
input value(%)
Related parameter:
RAMP RAMP RAMP 100.000 No less than 0
SWRAMP
2.11.3 Flag
Table 2-40 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Man Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal(REVSCL)
D19 Disable Configuration Error Alarm (CFGEER)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude
D22 Disable
Limiting(DMVH)
D23 Disable Alarm for MV Negative Amplitude Limiting(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

183
 Function Block Reference

2.11.4 Application Example

Two liquids should be mixed by a ratio of F1/F2=1.4 to produce a new product. Suppose the flow
F1 is measured by tag FL001 and F2 is measured by tag FL002, the valve is controlled by FC001.

RC FC

F1 F2

产品

Figure 2-36 Ratio control diagram

Figure 2-37 Ratio control program

RATIO function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

FlowControl1

 CSV: 1.4

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FL001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 MVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL002)

 MVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FL002)

 Function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).
FlowControl2

184
 Function Block Reference

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL002)

 SVSCL:(＝range L value of tag FL002)

 MVEU: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, first invoke the function block panel and open the adjusting interface. If
the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001, and adjust the status of
FC001 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the FlowControl2 is in MAN mode.

It can be switched manually.

During industrial manufacture, technically there always have 2 or more materials mixed
proportional, wrong proportion will influence manufacture or cause accident. The control system
achieving the proportion for 2 or more parameters is ratio control system.

The master parameter (master momentum) G1 in ratio control system, is leading and not
controlled by ratio control system. The subordinate and controlled material is slave parameter
(slave momentum). Values are controlled to keep G2／G1＝K, i.e. change slave parameter to
reach the ratio with master parameter.

Ratio control system can be divided into single closed loop ratio control system and dual-closed
loop ratio control system by whether the master parameter is adjustable, or divided into static ratio
control system and change ratio control system by whether the ratio K is adjustable.

Figure 2-38 Ratio control

The program is shown in Figure 2-39, which can apply RATIO and PIDEX.

185
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-39 Building ratio control program

Function block instruction and example are shown below:

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 FV_2080 AO output Analog output tag
Slave momentum analog
002 FT_2080 AI input
input tag
Master momentum analog
003 FT_2090 AI input
input tag
Proportion control function
004 FIC2080RATIO Function block tag
block tag
PID control function block Reference loop in
005 FIC2080 Function block tag
tag graphics

Parameter settings for PIDEX function block:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same with other input PV range unit.

 SVL, SVH: same with SV range if no need SV limit function.

 MODE_OPT: OFF

Parameter settings for RATIO function block:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same (unit) with MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU. Same input PV
range and unit are recommended with PID function block.

 MVL, MVH: same range with MV.

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 MAN_OPT: ON

 PSWAM: ON

Alarm settings:

 When slave momentum (i.e. PID function block) input PV fault, the PID loop enters
into PVERR status, and the loop enters into manual status automatically, PID output
MV keeps the same.

186
 Function Block Reference

 When master momentum (i.e. RATIO function block) input PV fault, the PID loop
enters into SVERR status, and the loop will enter into auto status automatically if in
cascade status, PID SV keeps the same.
 Input PV second level H/L alarm of master and slave momentums are set as required in
RATIO and PID function blocks. Set the deviation alarm for PID loop as required if
have valve position feedback. Disable other alarms.

BKIN should connect the down stream function block BKOUT, BKINERR should connect the down
stream function block BKOUTERR. The down stream function block of proportion control function
block RATIO is PID function block. The down stream function block of PID function block is AO
tag.

Note:

Control panel can call function block name in HMI directly.

2.12 Split Control Function Block (SPLIT)

The input signal is allocated by split control function block according to range of the two output. It
only has the control output action of position type.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 50μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.12.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-41 Parameter instruction and application of SPLIT Function Block

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Range Configurati Make sure that
Parameters Settings SVSCH SV high scale － on SVSCH be greater
Parameter than SVSCL.
Configurati Make sure that
SVSCL SV low scale － on SVSCH be greater
Parameter than SVSCL.
Configurati
MVSC The same as MV1
MV1 high value － on
H1 actual value H limit.
Parameter

187
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurati
MVSCL The same as MV1
MV1 low value － on
1 actual value L limit.
Parameter
Configurati
MVSC The same as MV2
MV2 high value － on
H2 actual value H limit.
Parameter
Configurati
MVSCL The same as MV2
MV2 low value － on
2 actual value L limit.
Parameter
Configurati Set in the function
SVEU SV engineer unit － on block properties
Parameter settings interface.
Configurati Set in the function
MV1 actual value
MVEU1 － on block properties
unit
Parameter settings interface.
Configurati Set in the function
MV2 actual value
MVEU2 － on block properties
unit
Parameter settings interface.
Used for data
Configurati
SVDLE SV decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Used for data
Configurati
MVDLE MV1 decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N1 [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Used for data
Configurati
MVDLE MV2 decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N2 [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Configurati
Output1 action
SRH1 － on Refer to Note1, 3
maximum
Parameter
Configurati
Output1 action Note1, 3
Output SRL1 － on Refer to
minimum
Action Parameter
Limit Configurati
Setting Output2 action Note1, 3
SRH2 － on Refer to
maximum
Parameter
Configurati
Output2 action
SRL2 － on Refer to Note1, 3
minimum
Parameter
Operation Value range
MVH1 MV1 H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL1 MV1 L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVH2 MV2 H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Limits
Operation Value range
MVL2 MV2 L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]

188
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output
1Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV SWPN1＝OFF, direct,
SWPN increases with the Operation
TRUE SWPN1＝ON,
1 increasing of PV in Parameter
direct action, and reverse.
decreases with the
Direct/R increasing of PV in
everse reverse action.
Switch Output
Settings 2Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV SWPN2＝OFF, direct,
SWPN increases with the Operation
TRUE SWPN2＝ON,
2 increasing of PV in Parameter
direct action, and reverse.
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Extended Connect to outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
Parameters control value MV
Feedback value1 Connect to
BKIN1 － Input Pin
input downstream BKOUT
Connect to
BKINE Feedback status1
－ Input Pin downstream
RR1 input
BKOUTERR
Feedback value2 Connect to
BKIN2 － Input Pin
Base input downstream BKOUT
Input Pin Connect to
Settings BKINE Feedback status2
－ Input Pin downstream
RR2 input
BKOUTRRR
Connect to measuring
TV1 Track input value 1 － Input Pin
point AI
Connect to measuring
TV2 Track input value 2 － Input Pin
point AI
Track switch: Upstream interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related parameter: TV

Program manual and

Advance Connect the upstream
auto control switch,
Input Pin PSWA output
OFF=program －
Settings M Input Pin Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control
Program auto/ Connect the upstream
PSWS cascade control output
－ Input Pin
V switch, OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON

189
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON=
Connect the upstream
manual-automatic
MAN_ output
selection controlled － Input Pin
OPT Related parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM, SWAM
manual-automatic
selection controlled
by SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
Connect the upstream
auto/cascade
SV_OP output
selection controlled － Input Pin
T Related parameter:
by PSWSV, OFF=
PSWSV, SWSV
auto/cascade
selection controlled
by SWSV
Connect to electric
PID operation output
MV1 － Output Pin manual instrument
value 1
Refer to Note1
Connect to electric
PID operation output
MV2 － Output Pin manual instrument
value 2 Note1
Refer to
Output
Pin Connect to the BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Related parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUT Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of Upstream
ERR value
Block
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Monitoring
IMODE Standby work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
ON=auto return, Configurati
MODE
Operator OFF=manual return － on Refer to 2.1.1
_OPT
Comma (default) Parameter
nd Manual and auto
switch: Operation Enabled when
SWAM －
OFF=manual, Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
Operation Enabled when
SWSV selection: OFF=auto, －
Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Output value=
MANM Manual output Operation
－ MANMV in manual
V1 value1 Parameter
mode
Operator
Data MANM Manual output Operation Note1
－ Refer to
V2 value2 Parameter
Operation Value range
SV SV TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Advance Signal distribution Operation Note2
SW TRUE Refer to
Calculati switch Parameter
on Balance ramp Operation Related parameter:
Settings RP1 TRUE
coefficient1 Parameter SW

190
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Balance ramp Operation Related parameter:
RP2 TRUE
coefficient2 Parameter SW
SVHIN SV H limit alarm Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication Parameter
SVLIN SV L limit alarm Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication Parameter
MV1HI Monitoring
MV1HAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
Alarm
MV1LI Monitoring
MV1LAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
MV2HI Monitoring
MV2HAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
MV2LI Monitoring
MV2LAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
Output 1Extended Configurati
HORLI
range maximum － on Refer to 2.1.5
M1
percentage Parameter
Output 1Extended Configurati
LORLI
range minimum － on Refer to 2.1.5
Extende M1
percentage Parameter
d Range
Settings Output 2Extended Configurati
HORLI
range maximum － on Refer to 2.1.5
M2
percentage Parameter
Output 2Extended Configurati
LORLI
range minimum － on Refer to 2.1.6
M2
percentage Parameter
Suppress module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm,, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled Parameter
to display alarm
and
Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
s
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at the first
SWOO Function block Operation time of function block
TRUE
S disabled Parameter downloading
Refer to Note5
OOSV OOS mode safe Operation Related parameter:
TRUE
AL1 value 1 Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS OOSV OOS mode safe Operation Related parameter:
Settings TRUE
AL2 value 2 Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
Configurati
OOS_ OOS_OPT =ON,
－ on Refer to 1.1.1
OPT MV=OOSVAL, when
Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note 1. Calculate output value

The two output values MV1 and MV are calculated by SPLIT function block according to SV. Users
can preset range of the output value (SRH1, SRL1, SRH2, SRL2) according to SV. The range of
output value must be in the range of SV and SRH1>SRL1, SRH2>SRL2, SRL1=SVSCL,
SRH2=SVSCH.

191
 Function Block Reference

MV1 and MV2 can be calculated by the following expression:

MVi  CALC i  BLi (n)

When MV is increase output:

MVSCH i  MVSCLi
CALC i  MVSCLi  * ( SV  SRLi )
SRH i  SRLi

When MV is decrease output:

MVSCH i  MVSCLi
CALC i  MVSCH i  * ( SV  SRLi )
SRH i  SRLi

i=1 or 2, and BLi (n) is balance item.

Note 2. Selection Switch (Signal allocation switch)

The function block calculates output value of each output pin according to SV and allocates
signals to output terminals. And output pin can be specified by signal allocation switch.

When SW=0, signal allocation is stopped;

When SW=1, only MV1 is allocated signal;

When SW=2, only MV2 is allocated signal;

When SW=3, the two output pin are allocated signal.

Output pin not selected by SW tracks TV value.

Note 3. Control movement direction

Direct movement: Output value MV changes in the same direction with set value SV.

Reverse movement: Output value MV changes in the reverse direction with set value SV.

Note 4. Limit set value

Set value SV is limited between high limit of set value SVH and low limit of set value SVL.

Low limit of output 1 movement is equal to low limit of set value range;

High limit of output 2 movement is equal to high limit of set value range;

High limit of output 1 movement is less than or equal to high limit of set value range;

192
 Function Block Reference

Low limit of output 2 movement is less than or equal to low limit of set value range.

Note 5. SV fallback

SV fallback function is used to keep set values consistent for bumpless transfer. In auto and
manual mode, CSV is equal to SV. In cascade mode, SV is equal to CSV.

When only one used to output, if it is in auto or manual mode, set value is reversely calculated by
manual value.

When two channels used to output, if it is in the mode of manual or track, set value is reversely
calculated by manual value of two channels. If differential value between reversely calculated SV
and SV is smaller than 1% of the range, reversely calculated SV fallbacks, otherwise does not
fallback.

When MV is direct output:

( MVi  MVSCLi ) * ( SRH i  SRLi )

SVi   SRLi
( MVSCH i  MVSCLi )

When MV is reverse output:

( MVSCH i  MVi ) * ( SRH i  SRLi )

SVi   SRLi
( MVSCH i  MVSCLi )

i=1 or 2.

Note 6. Mode process

When SWOOS is OFF, if BKINERR1 and BKINERR2 are ON, the function block is in IMAN mode;
if one of them is OFF, the function block will be change to other valid mode from IMAN. Output of
the one with value OFF is in manual mode and output value of the one with value ON tracks
corresponding BKIN value.

193
 Function Block Reference

2.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-42 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Preference Output1 action
SRH1 SRH1 100.000 －
MV1 Action maximum
Limits (%) Output1 action
SRL1 SRL1 0.000 －
minimum
MV2 Action Output2 action
SRH2 SRH2 100.000 －
Limits (%) maximum

194
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Output2 action
SRL2 SRL2 0.000 －
minimum
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
H SVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits
selection.
(%)
L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV1 (select
alarm enabled, or it
H(MVH [MVSCL,MVSC
MVH1 100.000 is disabled).
1) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV1 Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV1 (select
alarm enabled, or it
L(MVL [MVSCL,MVSC
MVL1 0.000 is disabled).
1) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV2 (select
alarm enabled, or it
H(MVH [MVSCL,MVSC
MVH2 100.000 is disabled).
2) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV2 Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV2 (select
alarm enabled, or it
L(MVL [MVSCL,MVSC
MVL2 0.000 is disabled).
2) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Balance ramp
MV Ramp RP1 RP1 100.000 －
coefficient1
Parameter
Settings Balance ramp
RP2 RP2 100.000 －
coefficient2

Output Related parameter:

Others Option Output SW, SW=1,
SW － －
1 distributed to MV1.
MV2 tacks TV2.
Related parameter:
Output SW, SW=2,
SW － －
2 distributed to MV2.
MV1 tacks TV1.

195
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Related parameter:
SW, SW=3,
Both SW √ －
distributed to two
output points.
Related parameter:
Neither SW － － SW,SW=0,Stop
signal distribution
Panel MAN_OPT √ － OFF=Panel control
MAN_OPT
Settings Progra ON=Program
MAN_OPT － －
m control
Panel SV_OPT － － OFF=Panel control
SV_OPT
Settings Progra ON=Program
SV_OPT √ －
m control
TV1 TV1 0.000 － Track input value 1
TV
TV2 TV2 0.000 － Track input value 2
Output 1
direct/reverse
Direct SWPN1 － －
selection:
OFF=Direct
Output 1
Output
Revers 1direct/reverse
SWPN1 √ －
e selection:
ON=Reverse
Output
2direct/reverse
Direct SWPN2 － －
selection:
OFF=Direct
Output 2
Output
Revers 2direct/reverse
SWPN2 √ －
e selection:
ON=Reverse
2.12.3 Flag
Table 2-43 Flag List

Supervision
Flag Code Description
Assign
D0 Disable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Man Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Track (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable MV1 High Limit Alarm (MVH1)
D9 Disable MV1 Low Limit Alarm (MVL1)
D10 Disable MV2 High Limit Alarm (MVH2)
D11 Disable MV2 Low Limit Alarm (MVL2)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D18 Disable Alarm of Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)

196
 Function Block Reference

Supervision
Flag Code Description
Assign
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression(AOF)
2.12.4 Application Example1

It controls input based on the product output flow in the reaction kettle, and applies two control
valves to ensure the control precision and fast reaction of the valve. The valve for F1 controls via
tag FC001 and is a precision adjust valve. The valve for F2 controls via tag FC002 and is a rough
adjust valve. FO measures via tag FL001.

Figure 2-40 Split control diagram

Figure 2-41 Split control program

Split function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

FeedInControl1

 SRH1: 30

 SRL2: 20

 SVEU: %

 MVEU1: %

197
 Function Block Reference

 MVEU2: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

FeedInControl2

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 MVEU: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

After download, exit FeedInControl1 and FeedInControl2 from OOS mode, debug FeedInControl1
first and then debug FeedInControl2.

When debugging program, first invoke the function block panel and open the adjusting interface. If
the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001 and FC002, and adjust
the status of FC001 and FC002 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, FC002.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the
FlowControl2 is in MAN mode, as shown below. It can be switched manually.

198
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-42 FeedINControl1 in MAN status

2.12.5 Application Example 2

In the split control scheme of steam branch cylinder shown in Figure 2-43, the adjust object is
gas-distributing pressure, executor is enter steam valve (valve A) and vent valve (valve B).

199
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-43 Split control diagram

The action curve is shown below. When PID adjuster outputs 0~50%, valve A acts from wholly
open to wholly closed, valve B is wholly closed. When PID adjuster outputs 50~100%, valve A is
wholly open, and valve B acts from wholly closed to wholly open.

Figure 2-44 Pressure adjusting rules of PIC_2009 gas-distributing cylinder

Build Program

The program can be built by PIDEX (extended PID control function block), SPLIT (split control
function block) and MANUAL (handheld function block). The split point of SPLIT can be set in
range 0-100%. Details are shown below.

200
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-45 Build split control program

Instruction for function block and examples are shown below:

Table 2-44 Instruction for function block and examples

No. Example Type Instruction

01 PI30601 AI Input PV Measuring Value

02 PV30601A AO Output A Valve Control

03 PV30601B AO Output B Valve Control

04 PIC30601 Function Block PID Function Block Tag

Tag
05 PIC30601_SPLIT Function Block Split Control Function Block
Tag Tag
06 HIC30601A Function Block A Valve Handheld Function
Tag Block
Function Block B Valve Handheld Function
07 HIC30601B
Tag Block

Parameter Settings

 PIDEX Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Positive and negative actions should be set as SWPN=OFF (positive).

 SV range L limit SVSCL, high value SVSCH, unit SVEU, should be same with PV
range unit.
 MV range L limit MVSCL, high value MVSCH, unit MVEU, keep the default 0~100%
for adjusting valve.
 SV L limit SVL, H limit SVH, should be same with SV range if SV limit function is not
required, or SV can be set in 0~100.

201
 Function Block Reference

 MV L limit MVL, H limit MVH, keep the default 0 and 100 for adjusting valve if MV
limit function is limited；
 Select PID_OPT as PID type, keep the default PD_I mode (i.e. PID_OPT=2,
proportion differential in advance).
 Back mode MODE_OPT keeps the default manual (i.e. MODE_OPT=OFF).
 Internal/ external set control source SV_OPT keeps the default program control
(SV_OPT=ON).
 Note: SV_OPT settings for above parameters are used to avoid mistake setting loop
as “Cascade” mode on panel.

 SPLIT Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Set operation parameter SWPN1 (output 1 positive/ negative actions select) of

basic parameter as negative (i.e. SWPN1=ON), operation parameter SWPN2
(output 2 positive/ negative actions select) as positive (i.e. SWPN2=OFF).
 Operation action 1 L limit SRL1 applies default value 0, H limit SRH1 is set as split
point 50. Operation action 2 L limit SRL2 is set as split point 50, H limit SRH2
applies default value 100.
 2-channel output range L limits MVSCL1 and MVSCL2, H limits MVSCH1 and
MVSCH2, units MVEU1 and MVEU2 applies default value 0~100%.
 SV range low values SVSCL1 and SVSCL2, high values SVSCH1 and SVSCH2,
unit SVEU applies default value 0~100%.
 Manual/ auto control source MAN_OPT keeps default panel control (i.e.
MAN_OPT=0FF). External set control source SV_OPT keeps default program
settings (i.e. SV_OPT=ON).
 Back mode MODE_OPT can keep the default manual back (i.e. MODE_OPT=OFF),
or set as auto back (i.e. MODE_OPT=ON). If set as auto back, SPLIT function block
can switch its status by the down stream module, and reduce manual operation.

 MANUAL Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Handheld PV range low value PVSCL, high value PVSCH, unit PVEU, MV range
low value MVSCL, high value MVSCH, unit MVEU are all set as 0~100%.
 Manual/auto of handheld selects control source as manual (i.e. MAN_OPT=OFF).
 Note: BKIN of upstream function block should connect BKOUT of down stream
function block, BKINERR should connect BKOUTERR of down stream. The down
stream function block of PID function block is split function block. The down stream

202
 Function Block Reference

function block of split function block is handheld function block. The down stream
function block of handheld function block is AO tag.
Alarm Settings

 Alarm functions of PID function block should set alarm enable and alarm limit as
required.

 Alarm functions of handheld function block should set alarm enable and alarm limit as
required.

Notes

 If input PV has fault, the PID loop enters into PVERR status, the loop enters into manual
status automatically. PID output MV keeps the same.

 Design for split control should judge the positive/ negative output of loop first, then
decide the split interval, such as split point bit 50% (AO output 12mA). Split action
intervals of adjusting valves are generally continuous, while not continuous or
overlapping are also acceptable.

 Split control for 3 or more adjusting valves need to add SPLIT function block, 2-level split.

 Valve position curves of typical dual-adjust valve split control are shown below (not
limited to examples here):

203
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-46Typical split control action relations

 Control panel can call function block name from HMI directly.

2.13 Handheld Function Block (MANUAL)

Auto/manual output can be set by handheld function block. In manual mode, output value can be
tuned; in auto mode, output can be tuned according to input value of upstream FB; In track mode,
output value changes with track value set; The function of forced manual mode is same as manual
mode but this mode cannot be transferred to manual mode and auto mode.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 and 2.1 before using the function block.

204
 Function Block Reference

2.13.1 Parameters Instruction

Table 2-45 Parameter instruction and application of MANUAL Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuratio
PVSCH PV high scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
PVSCL PV low scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Range n Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
Basic [0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
Parameters 3 as default).
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
PVEU PV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
PV decimal digits Configuratio
PVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
[MVSCL,MVSC
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE H]
Parameter
Perform H limits
Output for output value
Limits Value range
[MVSCL,MVSC
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE H]
Parameter
Perform L limits
for output value

205
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
External loop
Upstream block
IN － Input Pin control value
input value
MV
Base Process value of Connect to
Input Pin PV loop closed control － Input Pin measuring point
Settings process AI
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Connect to
upstream
Track switch:
interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
condition input,
ON=track
Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
Advance Forced manual
upstream
Input Pin switch:
EMMAN － Input Pin interlock
Settings OFF=off,
condition input,
ON=manual
Refer to Note1
Program manual and
auto control switch, Connect the
OFF=program upstream output
PSWAM － Input Pin
manual control, Enabled when
ON=program auto MAN_OPT=ON
control
Manual-automatic
control source
Connect the
switch, ON=
upstream output
manual-automatic
Related
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin
parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automatic
SWAM
selection controlled
by SWAM
Connect the
MV lock increase
upstream output
(MV cannot
Enabled when
SWINC increase) switch － Input Pin
the function
SWINC=ON, lock
block is auto or
increase
cascade

206
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect the
MV lock decrease upstream
(MV cannot output. enabled
SWDEC decrease) switch － Input Pin when function
SWINC=ON, lock block is
decrease automatic or
cascade
MV holds the current
Connect to
output value, ON=
HOLD － Input Pin upstream
hold the current
output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation output
MV － Output Pin electric manual
value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
Output BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Pin parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block
MODE Work mode － Output Pin
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Input
Alarm PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Settings value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
MODE_OP ON=auto return, Configuratio
－ Refer to 2.1.1
T OFF=manual return n Parameter
Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time TRUE
Parameter interference
Advance switch
Settings Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON

207
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
Fase/Slo
parameter:
w/Increas
MVSCH
e/Decreas
e Settings Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
MVSCL
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
When
Operator SWFIX=ON, not
Command output the
Operation control logic
SWFIX Fix command －
Parameter result of
function block to
downstream
function block
The output
value MV is
Manual equal to manual
Operation
Output MANMV Manual output value － SVMANMV in
Parameter
Value forced manual
or manual
mode.
Extended range
Configuratio
Extended HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
Range percentage
Settings Extended range Configuratio
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum percentage n Parameter

208
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm.
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOS OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
value Parameter
Settings OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON, Configuratio
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, when n Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note1: Running mode

Running mode of analogy manual instrument function block: OOS, IMAN, TR, FORCEMAN, MAN,
AUTO.

Priority: OOS > IMAN > TR > EMMAN > MAN/AUTO

EMMAN mode (MODE=9)

In non-track mode, i.e., SWTR=OFF and EMMAN=ON, it is in forced manual mode. The function
is same as manual mode but it only can be transferred to the track mode.

Note2: Balance value= IN-MV when manual/auto switch, if balance time TB is set as larger than
cycle TS value, so MV will be near IN after manual/auto switch, but not become IN directly. Achive
no disturbance function.

209
 Function Block Reference

2.13.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-46 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
Alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

210
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
H alarm value setting
of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
alarm enabled, or it
is disabled)
L alarm value setting
of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
alarm enabled, or it
is disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
Hystere PV Process value
HYS 0.000 －
sis alarm hysteresis
Balan
ce Balance time without
TB (s) TB (s) 0.000 －
Time interference switch
(s)
Trac Read-only, track
Trac (%) Trac (%) 0.000 －
(%) input value(%)
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
MV affected by selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
2.13.3 Flag
Table 2-47 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize(IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking(TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic(AUTO)
D8 Disable PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm(MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D18 Disable Alarm For Range High/Low Limit Reversal(REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D24 Disable Force Manual Alarm (EMMAN)

211
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D26 Disable Listing (FIX)
2.13.4 Application Example

To control the field manual adjusting valve, as shown in the figure below, and it can be displayed
and operated in the diagram.

Handheld can perform open-loop control for analog adjusting target, and is no need to perform the
closed-loop PID control. It is often used for controlling field manual adjusting valve, transducer
rotation setting and other control targets.

Figure 2-47 Diagram of handheld

Its programming is shown below, which can be realized via MANUAL, the interface of host
computer can achieve the control for AO via the tag of function block.

Figure 2-48 Programming of handheld

The function block instruction and examples are shown in the table below.

Table 2-48 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function Function Block Tag of
001 HIC_4103
Block Handheld
002 HY_4103 AO (Output) MV

Parameter settings of MANUAL:

 PVSCL: 0~100% in default

 PVSCH: 0~100% in default

 PVEU: 0~100% in default

212
 Function Block Reference

 If measurement value exists, its range should be set as same as the range of PV.

 MVSCL: 0~100% in default

 MVSCH: 0~100% in default

 MVEU: 0~100% in default

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 MAN_OPT: ON

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm function according to the requirements.

The operation parameters MAN_OPT, PSWAM (OFF in default) are set to prevent from wrong
operation to “AUTO” mode by the operator on the panel. The automatic control can be set when
required.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

2.14 Electric Manual Operation Function Block (MANUAL_EP)

The electric manual operation function block provides six work modes which are OOS, IMAN,
TRACK, OP, MAN, AUTO. In auto mode, output can be tuned according to input value of upstream
FB. In manual mode, output value can be tuned manually. In track mode, output value changes
with track value set. In override mode, output value changes with override input.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 100μs.

Please refer to the 0Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

213
 Function Block Reference

2.14.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-49 Parameter instruction and application of MANUAL_EP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as MV
Configuratio
MVSCH MV high scale － actual value H
n Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － actual value L
n Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuratio
SVSCH SV high scale － actual value H
n Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuratio
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
n Parameter
limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Range n Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
Basic displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuratio
Parameters SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
Parameter
]
Limits Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
Parameter
]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.

Base Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters downstream
Settings
block

214
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Upstream function External loop
IN － Input Pin
block input value control value MV
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring point
control process AI
Connect to
upstream
Switch to Manual interlock
TOM － Input Pin
Input condition input,
enabled when it
is ON.
Connect to
upstream
Switch to Auto interlock
TOA － Input Pin
Input condition input,
enabled when it
is ON.
Connect the
OV Override Input － Input Pin upstream output,
Refer to 2.14.1
Upstream
Override Input interlock
OS － Input Pin
Switch condition input,
Refer to Note4
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI.
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR.
Connect to
upstream
TR Track Input Switch － Input Pin
interlock
condition input,
Connect the
upstream output,
BSI Bias Input － Input Pin
can be set in
program.
Advance SV SV － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.3
Input Pin
Connect the
Settings
MV lock increase upstream output.
(MV cannot enabled when
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= function block is
lock increase automatic or
cascade
Connect the
MV lock decrease upstream output.
(MV cannot enabled when
SWDEC － Input Pin
decrease), ON= function block is
Lock decrease automatic or
cascade

215
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV holds the
current output
Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin
upstream output,
the current output
value
Connect to
PID operation
MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to
downstream
Current bias
BSO － Output Pin input
output
Can be set in
program
Output
Pin Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR value
Upstream Block
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Input
Alarm PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Settings value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
When the
upstream input or
inner logic of
Advance Enable or disable Operation function block is
Settings SWBS TRUE
bias in calculation Parameter set as ON, bias is
enabled in
calculation, Refer
Note2
to
When the
upstream input or
Enable or disable
Operation inner logic of
SWTB balance time in TRUE
Parameter function block is
calculation
set as ON, apply
Balance time
Operation
TB Balance time TRUE －
Parameter
ON=auto return
MODE_O Configuratio
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.3
PT n Parameter
return (as default)

216
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuratio
range limit. Used －
PT n Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decreas
e percentage in
MV manual slow function block
Operation
SMV increase/decreas TRUE properties
Parameter
e value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decreas
MV manual fast e percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties setting
Related
Fase/Slo
parameter:
w/Increas
MVSCL
e/Decreas
e Settings Set SV manual
slow
increase/decreas
e percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties setting
e value (%)
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decreas
SV fast e percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

217
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Operation
MAN Manual switch － Refer to 2.1.1
Operator Parameter
Command Operation
AUTO Auto switch － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
The function
block is in MAN
OM Manual output － Output Pin
mode, OM=ON,
or OM=OFF
Connect to
measuring point
AI (feedforward
Output signal),
compensation, Related
Status OA used for － Output Pin parameter: OK,
feedforward OB
control The function
block is in AUTO
mode, OA=ON,
or OA=OFF
Monitoring
MODE Work mode －
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
Manual Output value=
Manual output Operation
Output MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
Value manual mode
Extended range
Configuratio
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
percentage
Extended range
Configuratio
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
Extended percentage
Range Suppress module
Settings alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit to Parameter
display alarm.
Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at the
OOS OOS mode
Operation first time of
Settings SWOOS setting switch TRUE
Parameter function block
(ON= OOS mode)
downloading

218
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuratio
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T n Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV

Note 1. Work mode

The electric manual operation function block provides six work modes which are OOS, IMAN, TR,
OS, MAN, AUTO.

Priority: OOS > IMAN > TR > OS> MAN>AUTO.

OS mode (MODE=11)

When SWOOS=OFF, BKINERR=OFF, TR=OFF and OS=ON, the function block is in OS mode,
MV=OV in this case.

Note 2. Bias Output

When SWBS = ON, bias output is enabled.

In MAN mode, BSO = MV-IN, if now SWTB = OFF, BSO will be back written to BSI.

In AUTO mode, MV = BSI + IN, BSO = BSI.

When SWBS = OFF, bias input lock is 0.

Note 3. Balance Process

When it is switched to AUTO mode from other modes, there may be huge bias between the value
calculated from Input IN and the value of original output. In order to make output transition smooth,
use first inertia balance process. The output step is shown as follows:

219
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-9 Balance Process Figure

Note 4. OS logic

OS logic means that when the self-control system receiving abnormal signals, such as accident
alarm, bias alarm and fault, the OS logic will perform logic functions, such as switching auto to
manual, increase priority, decrease priority, increase prohibited, decrease prohibited, etc., and
transform the system to the safe status set previously.

220
 Function Block Reference

2.14.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-50 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference Limit HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
Settings enabled, or it is
disabled).

221
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
Hystere PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limit selection.
Settings L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limit selection.
Settings L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only, Bias
BSI BSI 0.000 －
Input
Read-only,
Mode IN IN 0.000 － Upstream function
block input value
Read-only, Override
OV OV 0.000 －
Input

222
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
Can only debug in
custom program,
Keep HOLD Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
Can only debug in
Lock custom program,
Options Increase SWINC Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
Can only debug in
custom program,
Decrease SWDEC Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
2.14.3 Flag
Table 2-51 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

1=function block in OOS status,
0 OOS
0= function block not in OOS status.
1= function block in IMAN status,
1 IMAN
0= function block not in IMAN status.
1= function block in MAN status,
2 MAN
0= function block not in MAN status.
1= function block in OS status,
3 OS
0= function block not in OS status.
1= function block in AUTO status,
4 AUTO
0= function block not in AUTO status.
1= function block in TR status,
5 TR
0= function block not in TR status.
1:generate PV HH Limit Alarm
8 PVHH
0:not generate PV HH Limit Alarm
1:generate PV LL Limit Alarm
9 PVLL
0:not generate PV LL Limit Alarm
1:generate PV H Limit Alarm
10 PVH
0:not generate PV H Limit Alarm
1:generate PV L Limit Alarm
11 PVL
0:not generate PV L Limit Alarm
1:generate SV H Limit Alarm
12 SVH
0:not generate SV H Limit Alarm
1:generate SV L Limit Alarm
13 SVL
0:not generate SV L Limit Alarm
1:generate MVH Alarm
14 MVH
0:not generate MV H Alarm
1:generate MV L Alarm
15 MVL
0:not generate MV L Alarm
1:generate alarm for range high/low
limit reversal
18 REVSCL
0:not generate alarm for range high/low
limit reversal
1:generate CFGERR Alarm
19 CFGERR
0:not generate CFGERR Alarm

223
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

1:generate MV Velocity H Limit
Alarm(DMVH)
22 DMVH
0:not generate MV Velocity H Limit
Alarm(DMVH)
1:generate MV Velocity L Limit
Alarm(DMVL)
23 DMVL
0:not generate MV Velocity L Limit
Alarm(DMVL)
1:AOF=ON
25 AOF
0:AOF=OFF
Else Undefined

2.14.4 Example

Adjust the temperature 11_44TE21A to achieve the temperature automatic control, and can be
shown and operated in graphics.

Single loop (simple control system), refers to a closed loop feedback control system consisted of a
controlled object, a detection transducer, a controller and a performer. It is often applied in
occasion with short delay time for controlled object, not a lot changes for load anf inteference, and
not high requirements for control quality.

Detail program is shown in Figure 2-49, in which applies PID control function block and handheld
function block. Operation node interface can achieve monitoring and control of loop in graphics via
calling handheld function block tag.

Figure 2-49 Single loop program with handheld

Instruction for function block and example is shown below:

Table 2-52 Instruction of function block and example

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

224
 Function Block Reference

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 11_44TCV03_PID Function block tag PID function block tag PID

002 11_44TCV03_OP Function block tag Handheld function block tag MANUAL_EP

003 11_44TCV03M AO output Level regulating valve

004 11_44TE21A AI input Level detect signal

Parameter settings of PID function block:

PSWAM: ON

Set program internal/external set control as ON

SWPN: set according to the feature settings of controlled object

MAN_OPT: ON

SV_OPT: ON

PID_OPT: 1

SVTR_OPT: ON

MODE_OPT: ON

MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU: same unit with PV range.

SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same unit with PV range.

DL (deviation alarm value of PV and SV) is set as 10％ of controlled object range.

MVH, MVL: same settings with performer range.

SVL, SVH: same with PV range if SV limit function is not required.

DMVLIM: 5

DB: 0.5％ of controlled object range.

MODE_OP=OFF

BKIN should connect BKOUT of handheld function block，BKINERR should connect BKOUTERR
of handheld function block.

Parameter settings of handheld function block:

225
 Function Block Reference

MVSCL, MVSCH: same with performer range.

SVSCL, SVSCH: same with PV range.

MVH, MVL: same settings with performer range.

SVL, SVH: same with PV range if SV limit function is not required.

DMVLIM: 2

Alarm settings

 Positive deviation alarm

 Negative deviation alarm

Note:

Control panel can call function block name from HMI directly.

2.15 Maximum Selection Function Block (ASH)

ASH function block can implement the input selection of the first channel, when value of the
second channel is larger than that of the first, the output switches to the second channel and alarm
is generated. It will not be switched to first channel until the value of the first channel is larger than
that of the second, meanwhile the alarm is eliminated.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 90μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.15.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-53 Parameter instruction and application of ASH Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Range The same as the
Input Range Configuration
Parameters Settings INSCH － actual value of IN
H Parameter
H

226
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as the
Configuration
INSCL Input Range L － actual value of IN
Parameter
L
The same as the
Output Range Configuration
OUTSCH － actual value of
H Parameter
OUT H
The same as the
Output Range Configuration
OUTSCL － actual value of
L Parameter
OUT L
Set in the function
IN actual Configuration
INEU － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
OUT actual Configuration
OUTEU － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
Input displayed on
Configuration
INDLEN decimal digits － function block
Parameter
[0,5] panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
Output displayed on
OUTDLE Configuration
decimal digits － function block
N Parameter
[0,5] panel (equal to 3
as default).
Contact to AI tag
Refer to Note1, 2
Extended Control the output
Parameters IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin and has the overall
switch function
from input range to
output range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM1 Input 1Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Note1, 2
Refer to
Contact to AI tag
Note1, 2
Refer to
Control the output
Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin and has the overall
switch function
from input range to
output range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM2 Input 2Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Refer to Note1, 2
Connect to
Feedback
BKIN － Input Pin BKOUT of
input
downstream block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream block
ERR
Connect to electric
Output Pin OUT Output value － Output Pin manual instrument
Refer to Note2

227
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback
BKOUT － Output Pin Block, Related
output value
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR status value
Upstream Block
Balance switch is
used when the
output selection
source changed,
and performs
Balance Operation
TFLT TRUE smooth transition
switch time (s) Parameter
for the output
value. When
Advance TFLT=0.0, the
Settings balance is
disabled.
Safety mode
selection
(OFF=
SAFE_OP Configuration Note3
ordinary － Refer to
T Parameter
mode, ON=
advanced
mode)
Display the
Input 1 Monitoring
SEL1 － currently selected
selected Parameter
signal1
Display the
Input 2 Monitoring
SEL2 － currently selected
selected Parameter
signal2
Input 1 bad Monitoring Display the signal
ERR1 －
quality Parameter quality1
Input 2 bad Monitoring Display the signal
ERR2 －
quality Parameter quality2
Status
Monitoring
ERR Module fault －
Parameter
Note1
Refer to
Override Monitoring
OVERIDE － “Override Alarm”
Alarm Parameter Note4

MV holds the
current output
value, ON= Monitoring Connect to
HOLD －
hold the Parameter upstream output,
current output
value
Suppress
module alarm. Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enabled and display alarm.
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6

228
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OOS mode Set as ON at the
OOS setting switch Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading

Note 1. Maximum Selection Output

When input ALM1=OFF and ALM2=OFF:

If IN1≧IN2, then OUT=IN1 and OVERRIDE=OFF;

If IN1<IN2, then OUT=IN2 and OVERRIDE=ON, until IN1≧IN2, alarm OVERRIDE=OFF and
OUT=IN1.

Note 2. Input Alarm

When IN1 is selected, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it
will not be switched to output IN2 even if IN1<IN2.

When IN1 is selected, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode.

When IN2 is selected, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it
will not be switched to output IN1 even if IN1≧IN2.

When IN2 is selected, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode

Note 3. Security Mode

When SAFE_OPT=OFF, if one input channel (IN1) is selected while the other input channel (IN2)
generates alarm (ALMn), the current selected channel (IN1) will be still selected and
BKOUTERR=OFF.

When SAFE_OPT=ON, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), the output will be maintained and BKOUTERR=ON.

229
 Function Block Reference

2.15.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-54 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Initial
Name Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Value
Name

Selected and the input

Alarm Input 1
Preference alarm is enabled
Enable Quality ALM1 － ON/OFF
Related parameter:
Alarm
ALM1

230
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Value
Name

Selected and the input

Input 2
alarm is enabled
Quality ALM2 － ON/OFF
Related parameter:
Alarm
ALM2

Balance Time
Switch Time Coefficient TFLT 1.000 － －
(s) (TFLT)
2.15.3 Flag
Table 2-55 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Hold
D1 IN1
D2 IN2
D3 IN3
D4 High Selection
D5 Medium Selection
D6 Low Selection
D7 Override Alarm
D8 Disabled
D9 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D10 Selection 1
D11 Selection 2
D12 Selection 3
D13 IN1 Quality is Bad
D14 IN2 Quality is Bad
D15 IN3 Quality is Bad
D16 Suppression 1
D17 Suppression 2
D18 Suppression 3
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D21 Manual (MAN)
D22 Automatic (AUTO)
D23 Error

231
 Function Block Reference

2.16 Minimum Selection Function Block (ASL)

ASL function block can implement the input selection of the first channel, when value of the
second channel is smaller than that of the first, the output switches to the second channel and
alarm is generated. It will not be switched to first channel until the value of the first channel is
smaller than that of the second, meanwhile the alarm is eliminated.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 90μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-56 Parameter instruction and application of ASL Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings INSCH Input Range H － the actual value
Parameter
of IN H
The same as
Configuration
INSCL Input Range L － the actual value
Parameter
of IN H
The same as
OUTSC Output Range Configuration
－ the actual value
H H Parameter
of OUT H
The same as
OUTSC Output Range Configuration
－ the actual value
L L Parameter
of OUT L
Set in the
function block
Configuration
INEU Input unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
OUTEU Output unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
Input decimal Configuration
INDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).

232
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
OUTDL Output decimal Configuration
－ function block
EN digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Contact to AI
tag
Refer to Note1,
Note2

Extended Control the

Parameters IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin output and has
the overall
switch function
from input
range to output
range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM1 Input 1Alarm － Input Pin AI.ERR
Note1,
Refer to
Note2

Contact to AI
tag
Note1, 2
Refer to
Input Pin Control the
output and has
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin
the overall
switch function
from input
range to output
range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM2 Input 2Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Refer to note1, 2
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
BKINER Feedback BKOUT of
－ Input Pin
R status input downstream
block ERR
Connect to
electric manual
OUT Output Value － Output Pin
instrument
Refer to Note2
Connect to the
Output BKIN of
Pin Feedback Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Block, Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUT Feedback
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
ERR status value
Upstream Block

233
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Balance switch
is used when
the output
selection source
changed, and
performs
Balance switch Operation
TFLT TRUE smooth
time (s) Parameter
transition for the
output value.
AdvanceS
When
ettings
TFLT=0.0, the
balance is
disabled.
Safety mode
selection
SAFE_O (OFF= ordinary Configuration Note3
－ Refer to
PT mode, ON= Parameter
advanced
mode)
Display the
Input 1 Monitoring
SEL1 － currently
selected Parameter
selected signal1
Display the
Input 2 Monitoring
SEL2 － currently
selected Parameter
selected signal2
Input 1 bad Monitoring Display the
ERR1 －
quality Parameter signal quality1
Input 2 bad Monitoring Display the
ERR2 －
quality Parameter signal quality2
Monitoring
ERR Module fault －
Status Parameter
Refer to high
select function
Note1
block
OVERID Monitoring
Override Alarm － “Override
E Parameter
Alarm”
Refer to 2.14.1
Note4

Connect the
upstream output
Monitoring
HOLD Hold Status － Enable when in
Parameter
automatic or
cascade mode
Alarm Suppress Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable module alarm, Parameter
and ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function block Set as ON at
OOS disabled Operation the first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON=prohibited Parameter function block
) downloading

Note 1. Minimum Selection Output

When input ALM1=OFF and ALM2=OFF:

234
 Function Block Reference

If IN1≦IN2, then OUT=IN1 and OVERRIDE=OFF;

If IN1>IN2, then OUT=IN2 and OVERRIDE=ON, until back to IN1≦IN2, alarm OVERRIDE=OFF
and OUT=IN1

Note 2. Input Alarm

When OUT=IN1, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it will
not be switched to output IN2 even if IN1>IN2.

When OUT=IN1, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode.

When OUT=IN2, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it will
not be switched to output IN1 even if IN1≦IN2.

When OUT=IN2, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mod

Note 3. Selection of Security Mode

When SAFE_OPT=OFF, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), the current output channel will be maintained and BKOUTERR=OFF.

When SAFE_OPT=ON, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), and the output is maintained will be maintained and BKOUTERR=ON.

235
 Function Block Reference

2.16.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-57 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selected and the
Preference Alarm input alarm is
Input 1 Quality
Enable ALM1 － ON/OFF enabled
Alarm
Related parameter:
ALM1

236
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selected and the
input alarm is
Input 2 Quality
ALM2 － ON/OFF enabled
Alarm
Related parameter:
ALM2
Balance Time
Switch Coefficient TFLT 1.000 － －
Time (TFLT)
2.16.3 Flag
Table 2-58 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Hold
D1 IN1
D2 IN2
D3 IN3
D4 High Selection
D5 Medium Selection
D6 Low Selection
D7 Override Alarm
D8 Disabled
D9 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D10 Selection 1
D11 Selection 2
D12 Selection 3
D13 IN1 QUALITY IS BAD
D14 IN2 Quality is Bad
D15 IN3 Quality is Bad
D16 Suppression 1
D17 Suppression 2
D18 Suppression 3
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D21 Manual (MAN)
D22 Automatic (AUTO)
D23 Error

2.16.4 Application Example

To achieve the filed-valve adjustment and control as shown in Figure 2-50, two PV detects on the

237
 Function Block Reference

loop are LT_3037 and TE_3071. To achieve low select control of loop control, and it can be
operated in flow chart.

Override control is a select control. When in normal working condition, control output will not
overlimit, and can output it directly; when in abnormal working condition, output will exceeds limit,
and the utmost limit method should be applied and select safe control output.

Override control often consists of low select override and high select override. Take two-loop low
select override control as an example.

Figure 2-50 One DI One DO Valve Diagram

Details of program are shown in below.

Figure 2-51 Low Select Override Control

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

Table 2-59 Instructions of Function Block and Example

No. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_3071 AI Input PV of PID1

002 LT_3073 AI Input PV of PID2

238
 Function Block Reference

No. Example Type Instruction Remark

003 TV_3071 AO Output Control Target

004 TIC3071 Function Block Tag PID1 Function Block Tag

005 LIC3073 Function Block Tag PID2 Function Block Tag

Low Select Override
006 TIC3071ASL Function Block Tag
Function Block
Hand Control Function
007 TIC30701MAN Function Block Tag
Block

Parameter settings of PID:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as its input PV range unit.

 SVL, SVH: when SV amplitude is not needed, it should be same with SV range.

Parameter settings of ASL:

 Low select override control ASL has range switch function, while in this example, both its
input and output correspond to valve opening, and the units of IN and OUT are set as
0~100%.

 INSCL=0

 INSCH=100

 OUTSCL=0

 OUTSCH=0

Alarm parameter settings:

 When PID inputting PV fault occurs, its PID loop enters into PVERR mode, and the loop
switches to manual status automatically, PID outputting MV keeps.
 When low select override function block ASL select IN2 as output, override alarm will
generate.

 PID function block inputs PV secondary H/L alarm when it is required.

The BKIN of input parameter in upstream function block basic parameter should connect with the
BKOUT of its downstream function block. BKINERR should connect with the BKOUTERR of its
downstream function block. The downsteam function block of PID is ASL. The downsteam function
block of ASL is handheld. The downsteam function block of handheld is AO tag.

Note:

Two-loop High Select Override Control

Two-loop high select override control replaces the low select ASL in two-loop low select override
control diagram to high select ASH, as shown below.

239
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-52 Two-loop High Select Override Control

Control panel can invoke the function block name in HMI directly.

2.17 Signal Distribution Function Block (FOUT)

It is mainly used for a master loop to distribute output signal to several slave loops. When the first
salve loop is in cascade mode, it will be processed at first, otherwise, process other salve loops.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 50μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.17.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-60 Parameter instruction and application of FOUT Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

240
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as MV1

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH1 MV1 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV1
Configuration
MVSCL1 MV1 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV2
Configuration
MVSCH2 MV2 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV2
Configuration
MVSCL2 MV2 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV3
Configuration
MVSCH3 MV3 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV3
Configuration
MVSCL3 MV3 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV4
Configuration
MVSCH4 MV4 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV4
Configuration
MVSCL4 MV4 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV5
Configuration
MVSCH5 MV5 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV5
Configuration
MVSCL5 MV5 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV6
Configuration
MVSCH6 MV6 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV6
Configuration
MVSCL6 MV6 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV7
Configuration
MVSCH7 MV7 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV7
Configuration
MVSCL7 MV7 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV8
Configuration
MVSCH8 MV8 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV8
Configuration
MVSCL8 MV8 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.

241
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV1 actual Configuration
MVEU1 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV2 actual Configuration
MVEU2 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV3 actual Configuration
MVEU3 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV4 actual Configuration
MVEU4 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV5 actual Configuration
MVEU5 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV6 actual Configuration
MVEU6 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV7 actual Configuration
MVEU7 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV8 actual Configuration
MVEU8 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV1 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN1 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV2 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN2 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV3 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN3 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV4 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN4 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).

242
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
MV5 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN5 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV6 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN6 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV7 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN7 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV8 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN8 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
Direct/Rev OFF=Direct
the increasing of
erse Switch Operation action,
SWPN1 PV in direct TRUE
Settings Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN2 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN3 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.

243
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN4 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN5 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN6 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN7 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN8 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Extended Connect to outer
Input Pin CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
Parameters
MV

244
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN1 Feedback input1 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR1 － Input Pin
input1 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN2 Feedback input2 － Input Pin
downstream block,
Refer to Note1
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR2 － Input Pin
input2 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN3 Feedback input3 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR3 － Input Pin
input3 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN4 Feedback input4 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR4 － Input Pin
input4 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN5 Feedback input5 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR5 － Input Pin
input5 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN6 Feedback input6 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR6 － Input Pin
input6 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1

245
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN7 Feedback input7 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR7 － Input Pin
input7 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN8 Feedback input8 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR8 － Input Pin
input8 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
PID operation
MV1 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 1
PID operation
MV2 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 2
PID operation
MV3 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 3
PID operation
MV4 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 4
PID operation
MV5 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 5
PID operation
MV6 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 6
Output Pin PID operation
MV7 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 7
PID operation
MV8 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 8
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback output Block, Related
BKOUT － Output Pin
value parameter:
BK_OPT
Refer to Note1
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
R value Upstream Block
Refer to Note1
SV for loop Operation
SV SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
closed control Parameter
Suppress
Alarm module alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable and On=prohibit to Parameter
Suppress display alarm.
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the
OOS setting switch Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading

246
 Function Block Reference

Note . Basic function

BKINn and BKINERRn connect the corresponding BKOUT, BKOUTERR of the nth downstream
salve loop.

BKOUT, BKOUTERR connect the corresponding BKIN, BKINERR of upstream master loop.

It is mainly used in cascade control of a master loop distributing output to several salve loops.

When the amount of cascade modes of salve loops is greater than 0, the salve loop newly added
to the cascade mode will receive the cascade output of master loop directly, which means the set
value input jumping.

When the amount of cascade modes of salve loops is 0, the salve loop newly added to the
cascade mode will have the function of bumpless transfer, which means the set value is bumpless.
If switched in at the same time, the one with the lower order is prior.

247
 Function Block Reference

2.17.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-61 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name

PID Operation Output Read-only,

Value % MV1 MV1 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 1
Read-only,
MV2 MV2 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 2

248
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only,
MV3 MV3 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 3
Read-only,
MV4 MV4 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 4
Read-only,
MV5 MV5 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 5
Read-only,
MV6 MV6 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 6
Read-only,
MV7 MV7 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 7
Read-only,
MV8 MV8 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 8
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH1 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 1 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL1 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH2 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 2 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL2 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Range1 Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH3 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 3 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL3 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH4 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 4 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL4 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
Range2 H Limit MVSCH5 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 5 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL5 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH6 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 6 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL6 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV

249
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH7 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 7 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL7 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH8 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 8 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL8 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
D/R Selecting direct
Direct Action
Action SWPN1 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 1
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN1 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN2 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 2
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN2 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN3 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 3
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN3 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN4 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 4
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN4 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN5 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 5
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN5 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN6 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 6
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN6 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN7 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 7
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN7 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.

250
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN8 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 8
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN8 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
2.17.3 Flag
Table 2-62 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.17.4 Application Example

To control the water level, as shown below, the rotation speeds of two pumps should be same to
avoid back flow for the output header pipe caused by the different rotation speeds. And the two
pumps can be switched between same rotation setting mode and separately setting mode, and it
can be shown and operated in the diagram.

Figure 2-53 Diagram of single AI and double AO adjusting control

The single AI and double AO adjusting control means that the one PID loop controls 2 adjusting
valves or handhelds at the same time. It is often applied when 2 adjusting valves or handhelds are
required synchronized actions.

Its programming, which is shown in the figure below, can be achieved by applying function blocks
such as PIDEX, FOUT and MANUAL, etc. And the data display and operation of the host computer
interface can be achieved by the tags of function blocks.

251
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-54 Programming of reactor water level control

The function block instruction and examples are shown in below.

Table 2-63 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 LT_201 AI (Input) PV

002 VI_303AP AI (Input) Handheld Feedback1

003 VI_303BP AI (Input) Handheld Feedback2

004 SC_303AP AO (Output) Frequency Conversion1

005 SC_303AP AO (Output) Frequency Conversion 2

Tag of Function
006 LIC_201 Block
Tag of PID

Tag of Function Tag of Signal Distribution

007 SIC_303P
Block Function Block
Tag of Function Tag of Handheld1 Function
008 SIC_303AP
Block Block
Tag of Function Tag of Handheld2 Function
009 SIC_303BP
Block Block

Setting the parameters of PIDEX.

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as the input PV range unit (0~600KPa)

 The ranges of SVL and SVH should be the same as SV when the SV limit function is not
required.

 MVSCL, MVSCL, MVEU: use the default value 0~100%

 MVL, MVH: are set in 0~100 when the MV output limit function is not required

 Parameter setting of FOUT: no setting

 Parameter setting of MANUAL:PVSCL, PVSCH, PVEU, MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU:

0~100%

 Alarm Setting: SWPWF=ON

Notice:

The signal distribution function is mainly applied for distributing the setting output of a major loop

252
 Function Block Reference

to various minor loops of the downstream.

253
 Function Block Reference

Section 3 Logical Control Function Block Library

There are thirteen complex function blocks and seven simple function blocks in logical control
function block library. Panel parameters of complex function blocks can be operated in real-time
supervision software.

3.1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block (SPO)

SPO function block switch the digital input signal to pulse output signal. The output pulse is
controlled by the input signal and pulse select time. When the lasting time of input signal is less or
equals to the change time of designated pulse width, output the first pulse. Otherwise, output the
second pulse.

SPO function block is simple function block, and its runtime is 12µs.

Table 3-1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block Parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Digital input signal.
IN and TPLS work
together to control
the output signal, Connected to
Input pin IN － Input pin
which is one of the digital signal.
two pulse signal with
same cycle and
different pulse width.
Output cycle pulse
Output pin OUT － Output pin －
signal.
Pulse cycle (in
Set in the
second). The cycle Operation
Basic TPLS TRUE parameter
is related to the parameter
Parameters Properties.
cycle of program.
Pulse select time (in
second). The Set in the
Operation
TSW interval of the two TRUE parameter
Operation parameter
output signal is Properties.
parameter decided by TSW.
Set in the
Pulse width for first Operation
TPW1 TRUE parameter
pulse (in second). parameter
Properties.
Pulse width for Set in the
Operation
TPW2 second pulse (in TRUE parameter
parameter
second). Properties.

254
 Function Block Reference

The output pulse is controlled by the input signal and pulse select time, the relation between of
output signal and input signal is described following.

 When IN=ON, and the lasting time of input signal is less or equals to the choosing time of
pulse, the output width is TPW1.

 When IN=ON, and the lasting time of input signal is greater then the choosing time of
pulse, the output width is TPW2.

 When IN=OFF, stop pulse outputting and OUT=OFF.

 When the pulse choosing time equals to 0, the width of output pulse is TPW1, TPW2
does not work.

 When TPW1, TPW2 and TPW ARE LESS THAN 0, force TPW1=1, TPW2=0 and
TPW=0.

 When TPW1 and TPW2 are more then TPLS, TPW1 and TPW2 equal to TPLS.

 When TPLS are more than 0, but less than the period of current program, TPLS equals
to the period of current program.

The timing sequence figures of output signal are shown as follow, please refer to Figure 3-1 to
Figure3-4, and the “n” in the figure is a nature number.

Figure 3-1 TPW2>TPW1 and (TSW-TPLS×n)>TPW2

Figure 3-2 TPW2>TPW1 and (TWS-TPLS×n)<TPW2

255
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-3 TPW2>TPW1 and (TSW-TPLS×n)<TPW2

Figure3-4 Timing sequence figure when TPW2<TPW1

3.2 Digital Status Change Function Block (DSCA)

DSCA function block can count the status change times of input digital. It can count positive jump,
negative jump or both of input digital by the setting of statistic mode “MODE”.

DSCA function block is simple function block, and its running time is 4µs. The parameters of DSCA
function block is described in Digital Status C.

3.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-2 Digital Status Change Function Block Parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Switch Input － Input pin －
Parameters
Switch for
Statistics
input pin STARTUP Start/Stop: － Input pin －
OFF=Stop,
ON=Start
Reset Signal:
RST － Input pin －
ON=Reset

256
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output for Change
Time. Detail
output
OUT description of － Output pin －
pin
OUT is shown
below this table.
Statistics Mode:
0=Amount of
configur Positive Hopping, Set in the
ation 1=Amount of configuration configuration
MODE －
paramet Negative Hopping, parameter Properties.
er 2=Amount of
Positive
Hopping/Negative
3.2.2 Application Example

To count the ON/OFF times of the field electromagnetic valve, and display on the diagram, as
shown in below.

Figure 3-5 Diagram of counting valve status modification

The digital signals are “1” and “0”. In application, the statistics such as counting and accumulation
should be performed for the digital change times. It is often used for counting the ON/OFF times of
field valve and electric machine.

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via DSCA. The statistics data of the host
computer displayed data can be monitored via custom tag.

Figure 3-6 Programming of valve ON/OFF status statistics

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 3-3 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 BOOL_IN DI (Input) Tag of DI

002 BOOL_RST Custom BOOL Tag of Reset

257
 Function Block Reference

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

For Accumulation
003 BOOL_STA Custom UDINT Custom Tag
Display

Setting parameters of DSCA:

 STARTUP: ON

 MODE: 2

Setting parameters of TP:

 DT: 1

 No alarm setting

3.3 Switch Status Time Accumulation Function Block (SSTA)

SSTA function block accelerates the time when the digital status is ON or OFF. Statistic mode
MODE sets to accelerate which status and the output acceleration time can be set in 4 formats:
second, minute, hour and day.

SSTA function block is simple function block, and its running time is 11µs.

3.3.1 Parameter Instruction

The parameters of SSTA function block is described in Switch status TI.

Table 3-4 Switch status time accumulation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Switch Input － Input pin －
Parameters
Start/Stop Switch
for Accumulation:
STARTUP － Input pin －
ON=Start,
input pin OFF=Stop
Valid while
Reset Signal: Positive
RST － Input pin
ON=Reset transition-sen
sing
Accumulative
Time Output.
output pin OUT Detail description － Output pin －
of OUT is shown
below this table.

258
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
operation Set in the
Accumulation operation
paramete INITVAL TRUE function block
Initial Value parameter
r Properties.
Select Switch for
Accumulation
Mode
configurat
Mode=[0~3], On Set in the
ion configuration
MODE Status Time － parameter
paramete parameter
Accumulation Properties.
r
Mode=[4~7], Off
Status Time
Accumulation

Description of OUT:

 When STARTUP=ON, output the change time of input digital status.

 When STARTUP=OFF, this function block stop to statistics. And the OUT will keep the
statistics of the last week.

 When RST changing from OFF to ON, the OUT will be equal to INITVAL and the inner
count of function block will be set as INITVAL.

 When the master controller cold startup, the OUT will be equal to INITVAL and STARTUP
will be OFF and the inner count of function block will be set as 0.

Choices of MODE:

When Start/Stop Switch for accumulation STARTUP=ON, start acceleration.

 MODE=0

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit) + acceleration initial value

 MODE=1

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/60+acceleration initial value

 MODE=2

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/3600+acceleration initial value

 MODE=3

259
 Function Block Reference

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/86400+acceleration initial value

 MODE=4

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)+acceleration initial value

 MODE=5

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/60+acceleration initial value

 MODE=6

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/3600+acceleration initial value

 MODE=7

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/86400+acceleration initial value

3.3.2 Application Example

To count the running time of the field pump as shown below, and display in the flow chart. The
digital signals are 1 and 0. The switch status time should be accumulated, displayed and counted.

Figure 3-7 Diagram of pump running time display

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via SSTA. The host computer interface can
display data and monitor the statistic data via custom tag.

260
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-8 Programming of valve switch status statistics

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 3-5 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 BOOL_IN DI (Input) Digital Input Tag

002 BOOL_RST Custom BOOL Reset Tag

003 ON_TIME Custom REAL Custom Tag For Time Display

Parameter settings of SSTA:

 STARTUP: ON

 MODE: 0

3.4 Eight Input QOR Function Block (QOR_8)

QOR-8 function block restricts or operates 8inout BOOL type variables. QOR_8 function block is
simple function block, and its running time is 6µs.

The parameters of QOR_8 function block is described in 8 input QOR function block.

3.4.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-6 8 input QOR function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic input pin IN1 Switch Input1 － Input pin －
Parameter
IN2 Switch Input2 － Input pin －

261
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
s IN3 Switch Input3 － Input pin －
IN4 Switch Input4 － Input pin －
IN5 Switch Input5 － Input pin －
IN6 Switch Input6 － Input pin －
IN7 Switch Input7 － Input pin －
IN8 Switch Input8 － Input pin －
Detail description
OUT of OUT is shown － Output pin －
output pin below this table.
Amount of ON
ONNUM － Output pin －
That Has Inputted.
Operation Mode:
configuration configuration
MODE ON=Greater and － －
parameter parameter
Equal; OFF=Equal
Set in the
operation Limit or Operation operation
NUM － function block
parameter Number. [0~8] parameter
Properties.

Description of OUT is:

 MODE=ON
When the number of function block variable ON is more than or equals to restricted or
operated number NUM, output is ON, otherwise, OFF.

 MODE=OFF
When the number of function block variable ON equals to restrict or operated number
NUM, output is ON, otherwise, OFF. ONNUM is the number of function block actual input
ON.

3.4.2 Application Example

To determine 8 DI, when there are 5 or more DI in status of ON, output is ON.

To determine the number of digital value, when the number of closed digital value is greater than
or equal to the set number, output (BOOL) is ON, or it is OFF.

Details of program are shown below, it applies QOR_8.

Figure 3-9 Program of Determine Digital Value Number

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

262
 Function Block Reference

Table 3-7 Instructions of Function Block and Example

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 BOOL_IN1~7 DI Input DI Tag 8 DI

002 BOOL_OUT Custom BOOL Output Tag

003 BOOL_NUM Custom UINT Custom Tag Number of Input ON

Parameter Settings of QOR_8:

 NUM: 5

 MODE: ON

Note: When MODE=ON, working mode is ”greater than or equal to”. When MODE=OFF, working
mode is ”equal to”.

3.5 Digital First SN Indicator Function Block (FIRST)

FIRST function block figures out the first digital serial number jumps from OFF to ON among 16
digital input. The priority of input signals is: when IN1 and IN2 jump from OFF to ON at the same
time, output the serial number of IN1.

QOR_8 function block is simple function block, and its running time is 12µs.

The parameters of QOR_8 function block is described in Table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Digital first SN indicator function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Switch Input1 － Input pin －
Parameters
IN2 Switch Input2 － Input pin －
IN3 Switch Input3 － Input pin －
IN4 Switch Input4 － Input pin －
IN5 Switch Input5 － Input pin －
IN6 Switch Input6 － Input pin －
IN7 Switch Input7 － Input pin －

263
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN8 Switch Input8 － Input pin －
IN9 Switch Input9 － Input pin －
IN10 Switch Input10 － Input pin －
IN11 Switch Input11 － Input pin －
IN12 Switch Input12 － Input pin －
IN13 Switch Input13 － Input pin －
IN14 Switch Input14 － Input pin －
IN15 Switch Input15 － Input pin －
IN16 Switch Input16 － Input pin －
Output “Reset
Switch”
(ON=Reset
Switch).
Output restore
switch RST can
only restore
Valid while
output when the
RST － Input pin Positive
input is not ON,
transition-sensing
when RST jumps,
OUT=0, CI=OFF,
eliminate input
jump status in
interior records. (It
is thought there is
no input jump.)
“Hold” only
relates to
whether output
first out value
and whether
Hold (ON: pause generate first
generating first out alarm, but
HOLD out value, OFF: - Input pin not relates to
restore generating other output
first out value) parameters and
will not
influence the
output of
QOROUT, CI,
and PACKOUT.
Serial Number of
Output Input Switch
Pin OUT － Output pin －
Value Which First
from OFF To ON.
When the number
of input digital ON
Restriction and is more than
QOROUT output of the 16 － Output pin NUM, set
input digitals. QOROUT=ON,
otherwise,
QOROUT=OFF.

264
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Indication That
Input Switch
CI Value Hopping: － Output pin －
OFF=No Hopping,
ON=Hopping
PACKOUT is the
package output of
input signals, that
Package Inputs is, to compress 16
and Output It. The BOOL type input
PACKOUT data type of － Output pin signals to 16
PACKOUT is integer output.
UNIT. IN16 is the highest
and IN1 is the
lowest.

Operatio Number or Default Operation

NUM TRUE －
n ON, [0~16] Parameter
Paramet Module Alarm Operation
er AOF TRUE -
Shield Parameter
Alarm
Alarm ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE -
Parameter
Paramet
er Alarm
FLAG Flag - -
Parameter

Note:

 When the output digital does not change, output OUT=0, CI=OFF.

 When the output digital changes from OFF to ON, output OUT is the first digital serial
number that jumps from OFF to ON(1~16) and CI parameter ON. When there is no input
signal jumps in this period, but several inputs jump at the same time, output OUT is the
smallest serial number.

Table 3-9 Flag for FIRST

Flag Monitoring Value Instruction

D0 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppress (AOF)
First Out Alarm
D1 Disable
(FIRST_ON)
D2 Disable Input Jump Indication (CI)
D3 Disable Limit or Output (QOROUT)
D4-D7 - -

3.6 Blink Function Block (BLINK)

BLINK function block generates the output signals of pulse. When both input are ON, it blinks all
the time.

BLINK function block is simple function block, and its running time is 1µs.

265
 Function Block Reference

The parameters of BLINK function block is described in Table 3-10.

Table 3-10 Blink function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Switch Input1 － input pin －
pin IN2 Switch Input2 － input pin －

Basic Flash Output

Parameters When IN1=IN2=ON, output OFF
Outpu OU and ON statuses on tern. Each
－ output pin －
t pin T status maintains one running
period. Otherwise, output OUT
trace IN1 input value.

Its true value table is shown as follows:

Table 3-11 Blink function block input and output true value table

IN1 IN2 OUT

OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF ON
ON ON ON, OFF Blinking

3.7 Interval Control Function Block (DGAP)

DGAP function block and PID function block are different in control mode: PID function block
outputs a series signal to control the equipments like valve; DGAP function block outputs the
digital signal to control discrete equipments like switch valve.

This function block has two work modes. When MODE=OFF, the function block is in 2 modes and
2 statuses work mode; when MODE=ON, the function block is in 2 modes and 3 statuses work
mode. In addition, this function block supports functions like measuring value alarm, error alarm,
manual operation mode, hold mode and setting vale tracing measuring value.

DGAP function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

The parameters of DGAP function block is described in following table.

3.7.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-12 Parameter instruction of DGAP

266
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application

Input Range Configuration Equal to high limit
SVSCH －
High Limit Parameter of PV.
Input Range Configuration Equal to low limit
SVSCL －
Low Limit Parameter of PV.
Range Set in the
Parameters Engineering Configuration
EU － parameter
Basic Unit Parameter
Properties
Parameters
Display on panel
Decimal Digits Configuration
DLEN － of this function
[0,5] Parameter
block.
Operation
Set in the
Mode: Configuration
Work mode MODE － parameter
OFF=BISTATE, Parameter
Properties.
ON=TRISTATE
Extended Measured
PV － Input Pin Connect to AI,
Parameters Value
Input pins Connect to output
CSV Outer Set Point － Input Pin of upper function
block.
OUTINC Forward Output － Output Pin Digital Signal
OUTDEC Inverted Output － Output Pin Digital Signal
When function
block work in
cascade,
Feedback BKOUT=SV.
BKOUT － Output Pin
Output When function
Output pins block work in
non-cascade,
BKOUT=PV.
Function Block
ERR － Output Pin －
Alarm
Whether Connect to the
BKOUTE Function Block BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR Mode is upper function
Cascade Stage block.
Man/Auto
Switch: Operation
SWAM － －
On=Auto, Parameter
Off=Man
Optional Switch
for Setting
Value:
Operation Operation
SWSV ON=Outer － －
parameters Parameter
Setting Value,
OFF=Inner
Setting Value
Local Setting Operation
SV TRUE －
Value Parameter
Monitoring
EI Deviation － EI=PV-SV
Parameter
Alarm Input HH Limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Setting Alarm Value Parameter
Input High Limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm Value Parameter

267
 Function Block Reference

PV L Alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Value Parameter
PV LL Alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Value Parameter
Positive Error Operation
DVH TRUE －
Alarm Limit Parameter
Negative
Operation
DVL Error Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Limit
Error Alarm
Operation
DVHYS Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter
Value
PV Alarm
Operation
PVHYS Hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Value
Operation
GAP Gap Width TRUE －
Gap Parameter
Settings Gap Hysteresis Operation
GAPHYS TRUE －
Value Parameter
SV Track
Switch in
Manual Mode:
SWSVTR=ON,
Configuration
SV Track SWSVTR SV Tracks PV; － －
Parameter
SWSVTR
=OFF, SV
Does not Track
PV
Module Alarm
Suppress
Alarm Operation
AOF ON=Alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable Parameter
Display
Disabled

1. Function Block Logic Figure

268
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-10 function block logic figure

1) 2 positions and 2 statuses work mode

When MODE=OFF, the function block is in 2 positions and 2 statuses work mode. The function
block outputs OUTINC and OUTDEC statuses by comparing error EI (EI=SV - PV) and gap GAP
between set value SV and process value PV.

In automatically operation status:

When EI descends to the low limit of GAP in non-sensitive area, OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF.

When EI=GAP/2, OUTDEC keep the value of last week, and OUTINC=OFF.

When EI ascends to the high limit of GAP in non-sensitive area, OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=ON.

When EI=-GAP/2, OUTDEC=OFF and OUTDEC keep the value of last week.

When EI returns to non-sensitive area (-GAP/2< EI < GAP/2), OUTINC and OUTDEC maintains
the original values. That is, when EI ascends from the low limit of GAP in non-sensitive area to
non-sensitive area, OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF; when EI descends from the high limit of GAP in
non-sensitive area to non-sensitive area, OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=ON.

The input and output relationships of function block are shown as follows:

269
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-11 DGAP BISTATE operation mode

2) 2 positions and 3 statuses work mode

When MODE=ON, the function block is in 2 positions and 3 statuses work mode. The function
block outputs OUTINC and OUTDEC statuses by comparing error EI (EI = SV – PV) and gap GAP
between set value SV and process value PV, gap GAP and gap hysteresis GAPHYS.

In automatically operation status:

When error descends to EI< - (GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF.

When EI=(GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTDEC keep the value of last week and OUTINC=OFF.

When EI=-(GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTDEC=OFF and OUTDEC keep the value of last week.

When error returns to GAP in non-sensitive area (EI>-GAP/2), OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=OFF.

The input and output relationships of function block are shown as follows:

270
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-12 DGAP TRISTATE operation mode

3) Error alarm

The function block set positive error limit alarm dvh, negative error limit alarm dvl and error alarm
hysteresis DVHYS.

Positive error limit alarm: when error EI is more than or equals to positive error limit dvh, in the flag,
set positive error limit alarm symbol.

When error is less than DVH-DVHYS, in the flag, eliminate positive error limited alarm symbol.

Negative error limit alarm; when error EI is less than or equals to -DVL, in the flag, set negative
error limit alarm symbol. When error is more than -(DVL-DVHYS), in he flag, eliminate negative
error limit alarm symbol.

2. range high and low limit reversal alarm

When the limit of set value SVSCH is less than or equals to SVSCL, limit threshold overturn alarm.

3. Alarm limit threshold overturn alarm

When PVHH -PVHYS <= PVH or PVH - PVHYS <= PVL + PVHYS or PVL - PVHYS <= PVLL,
alarm limit threshold overturn alarm.

4. Manual operation mode

In manual operation mode, function block does not operate switch control, and OUTINC and
OUTDEC can be set.

5. Feedback output value

271
 Function Block Reference

When the function block is under string mode, BKOUT equals to set value.

When the function block is under non-string mode, BKOUT equals to process value

3.7.2 Parameters Description of Panel

Table 3-13 Parameters Description of DGAP Panel

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
PV PV HH Alarm Value. When the PVHH
HH PVHH 100.000 －
Alarm alarm is selected, this is effective.

272
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
PV high Alarm Value. PV high Alarm
H PVH 90.000 － Value. When the PVH alarm is selected,
this is effective.
PV low Alarm Value. When the PV low
L PVL 10.000 －
alarm is selected, this is effective.
PV LL Alarm Value. When the PVLL
LL PVLL 0.000 －
alarm is selected, this is effective.
HYS PVHYS 0.000 － Hysteresis of PV alarm.
EI EI 0.000 － Read only, EI=PV-SV
When this is selected, the positive
PEI － 100.000 －
deviation is effective.
EI Alarm
When this is selected, the negative
NEI － 100.000 －
deviation is effective.
DVHYS DVHYS 0.000 － －
MODE=OFF, the function block work in
BISTATE MODE － －
Work BISTRATE mode.
Mode MODE=ON, the function block work in
TRISTATE MODE √ －
TRISTATE mode.
Track SWSVTR √ － SWSVTR=ON, then SV track PV.
SV Track
Settings SWSVTR=OFF, then SV will not track
Not Track SWSVTR － －
PV.
GAP GAP 20.000 － －
GAP
HYS GAPHYS 0.000 － －
OUTINC OUTINC － － positive output
Output
OUTDEC OUTDEC － － negative output
3.7.3 Flag
Table 3-14 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual (MAN)
D2 Automatic (AUTO)
D3 Cascade (CAS)
D4 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D5 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D6 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D7 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D8 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D9 NEI alarm(NEI)
D10 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D11 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D13 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

273
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D14 Error

3.8 Pulse Position Function Block (PULPOS)

PULPOS function block compares two analog input signals---set value and feedback value of
process parameter (process value) and output two BOOL type output according to the result.
When the process value is less than set value, generate positive output pulse; when it is more
than the set value, generate negative output pulse.

PULPOS function block is simple function block, and its running time is 16µs.

Table 3-15 Pulse position function block parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Setting process value in
SV － Input Pin
Parameters Value REAL
Input Pin
Measured process value in
PV － Input Pin
Value REAL
Forward
OUTINC Pulse － Output Pin －
Output
Output Pin
Reverse
OUTDE
Pulse － Output Pin －
C
Output
Monitoring Monitoring
EI Deviation － EI=SV-PV
Parameter Parameter
Operation Forward Operation
FSR TRUE Unit in PV
Parameter Travel Rate Parameter
Reverse Operation
RSR TRUE Unit in PV
Travel Rate Parameter
Deviation Operation
DB TRUE Unit in PV
Deadband Parameter

274
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output
Pulse
Cycle (Unit:
S).
When set
pulse
period
TCYC is
Operation
TCYC less than or TRUE
Parameter
equals to
pulse
width,
output
OUTINC in
pulse
period are
all ON.

3.8.1 Logic Time Sequencing

Figure 3-13 Logic Time Sequencing Figure

Each pulse period of function block outputs positive and negative pulse according to comparing
result of error and dead zone.

 When error EI is in the limit of dead zone [-DB, DB], there is no pulse output signal.

 When EI>DB, generate positive pulse.


 When EI<-DB, generate the negative pulse.

When setting FSR=0 and RSR=0, then interior system precision is 0.0000001.

275
 Function Block Reference

3.9 Motor Control Function Block (MOTOR)

MOTOR function block enables control and interlock protect to a single equipment by last level
sequence control command or operators by penal.

MOTOR function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.9.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-16 Motor control function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Mode 0=Pulse, 1=Pulse Configurati
Parameters Setting OUTTYPE Sequence, 2=Long － on －
SignalNote2 Parameter
Configurati
SETTYPE Run ModeNote1 － on －
Parameter
Reverse Stop
Command Respond
Mode, valid in
manual mode and
When in manual
automatic mode.
and auto mode
0=In the process of
and lock mode,
operating output,
the system
system does not Configurati
responds to
REVTYPE respond to negative － on
input negative
stop command. Parameter
command and is
1=In the process of
irreverent to
operating output,
REVTYPE
system responds to
setting.
negative stop
command and
output stop
command.

276
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to Confirm
Running Fault.
Set OPFLACK=OFF,
running fault does
not need to be
confirmed and is not
considered as
restricted condition
of new command
input.
Operation
OPFLACK Set OPFLACK=ON, TRUE －
Parameter
running fault needs
to be confirmed and
is considered as
restricted condition
of new command
input and is effective
to interlock
command and
manual/auto
command.
Whether
Auto-Remove
Running Fault.
Set AUTOCLR=ON,
running fault alarm
OPFL will be
eliminated
automatically after
Operation
AUTOCLR status feedback TRUE －
Parameter
signal is restored.
Set AUTOCLR=OFF,
running fault alarm
OPFL will be
eliminated only after
panel confirmation
after status feedback
signal is restored.
Whether To Confirm
Trip Fault.
Set TRIPACK=OFF,
TRIP will not need to
confirmed and be
used as restricted
condition of new Operation
TRIPACK TRUE －
command input. Parameter
Set TRIPACK=ON,
TRIP will need to
confirmed and used
as restricted
condition of new
command input.

277
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Shield Alarm When
Input Command.
Set IGNORALM
=ON, FAIL, TRIP,
FAULT and OPFL
will not be used as
restricted condition
of new command
input.
IGNORAL Operation
Set IGNORALM TRUE －
M Parameter
=OFF, FAIL, TRIP,
FAULT and OPFL
will be used as
restricted condition
of new command
input. And this is
valid only in
automatic and
manual mode.
Slight Feedback
When Output
Instruction.
Set IGNORSTA=ON,
current output does
not judge feedback
Operation
IGNORSTA status and DRIVE is TRUE －
Parameter
completely output.
Set
IGNORSTA=OFF,
current output
judges feedback
status.
Width of Output
Pulse (Unit: S)
Output pulse width.
Time When single pulse Operation
Settings TPW TRUE TPW<TOC
and pulse list are Parameter
output, define the
width of high level of
output pulse.
Equipment Travel
Time (Unit: S)
Equipment runtime.
When the command
is output and
corresponding
output feedback TPW and TPLS
Operation
TOC after TOC time, TRUE are associate
Parameter
operation fault OPFL parameters.
appears. (When
status feedback is
ignored,
IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does
not appear.)

278
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output Pulse Cycle
(Unit: S)
Pulse period.
If TPLS<TPW,
Pulse period defined Operation
TPLS TRUE TPW=TPLS
when pulse list is Parameter
(TPLS<TOC)
output. When set
TPLS<TPW,
TPLS=TPW.
Setting Interval of
Operation
TWAIT Button Pop-Up (Unit: TRUE －
Parameter
S)
Extended Input Pin Run Status Measuring Point
RUNSTA － Input Pin
Parameters Feedback DI
Stop Status Measuring Point
STOPSTA － Input Pin
Feedback DI
Upstream
AUTRUN Auto-start Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTSTOP Auto-stop Command － Input Pin
Output
Interlock Startup Upstream
EMRUN － Input Pin
Command Interlock Input
Interlock Stop Upstream
EMSTOP － Input Pin
Command Interlock Input
Upstream
PROTECT Protect － Input Pin
Output
On-site Control
Upstream
TOLOC Switch － Input Pin
Output
(ON=On-site)Note3
Program Input
Confirm Signal
Eliminate the Upstream
PACK － Input Pin
running alarm by Output
panel or program
input signal PACK.
Program Manual and
Upstream
PSWAM Auto Control Digital － Input Pin
Output
InputNote4
Start Command
Enable Signal
When RUNPRM
Upstream
RUNPRM =ON, interlock run, － Input Pin
Output
auto run and manual
run can output
startup command.
Stop Command
Enable Signal
When STOPRM
=ON, interlock stop, Upstream
STOPRM － Input Pin
auto stop and Output
manual stop can
output stop
command.
Select MAN/AUTO
Upstream
FBOPT Control Source － Input Pin
Output
(OFF=Panel)Note4

279
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
DI Electrical Fault
FAULT － Input Pin Measuring Point
Output (ON=Fault)
DI
Run Instruction
RUN － Output Pin Output DO
Output Output
Pin Stop Instruction
STOP － Output Pin Output DO
Output
Operation
SWFIX Fix Command － －
Parameter
MAN Startup Operation
MANRUN － －
Command Parameter
Operation MAN Stop Operation
Paramete MANSTOP － －
Command Parameter
r
MAN/AUTO witch:
Operation
SWAM ON=Auto, － －
Parameter
OFF=ManualNote4
Acknowledgement Operation
ACK － －
Signal Parameter
Equipment Fault
(ON=Fault) When
run status feedback
RUNSTA and stop
Monitoring
FAIL status feedback － －
Parameter
STOPSTA are both
ON, feedback fault
alarm FAIL will be
started.
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL － －
(ON=Fault)Note5 Parameter
Trip Indication Monitoring
TRIP Note6 － －
(ON=Trip) Parameter
On-site Control Monitoring
LOC － －
Status Indication Parameter
Equipment Run
Monitoring
STARUN Status Indication － －
Parameter
(ON=Run)
Equipment Stop
Monitoring
STASTOP Status Indication － －
Parameter
(ON=Prohibited)
Equipment Mode Monitoring
MODE Note3 － －
(Observe) Parameter
Run Command
Monitoring
RUNFLAG Output Process － －
Parameter
(Observe)
Stop Command
STOPFLA Monitoring
Output Process － －
G Parameter
(Observe)
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enabled Alarm Parameter
and
Suppress FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
OOS
In OOS Status Operation
SETTING SWOOS TRUE －
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
S

280
 Function Block Reference

Note1: SETTYPE: run mode

1. 0=inching mode

 The output command will restore with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs command
when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

 1=consistent mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs command
when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

 2=lock mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 Whether the status feedback is ignored or not, the status feedback does not influence
the command output.

When the system is not on the process of command output and there is no running fault, and the
feedback of RUNSTA and STOPSTA are OFF, start up power-failure alarm POWOFF.

Note2: OUTTYPE: output mode choice

Figure 3-14 pulse output mode (OUTTYPE =0)

281
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-15 Pules list output mode (OUTTYPE = 1 )

Figure 3-16 Long signal output mode (OUTTYPE =2 )

Note3: Work Status

Function block mode and priority: OOS>on-site> close protection >interlock>manual /auto
selection

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 On-site(MODE=2)

When function block is not in OOS status and TOLOC=ON, function block is in on-site mode.
Output command restores and is not available. Function block is not restricted by switch.

 Close protection(MODE=3)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input close protection commands,
function block turns to close protection mode, output stop command. Close protection is not
restricted by switch or feedback signal or alarm.

When Input Pin PROTECT jumps from OFF to ON, trigger one stops command output.

 Interlock(interlock startup , interlock stop, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status and on-site status, input interlock startup or interlock
stop command, function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive
transmission check.

282
 Function Block Reference

When both interlock startup, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
to interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, execute interlock startup command first and then
interlock stop command after interlock startup command is inputted. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electric fault FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit can be
shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can be
shielded by IGNORALM.

 Manual/auto selection(manual mode=5, auto made=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode. Auto mode
output command is decided by AUTRUN and AUTSTOP while manual mode is by MANRUN and
MANSTOP. Manual/auto selection command input adopts positive transmission check. When
startup and stop commands are inputted at the same time, system does not respond.

When interlock startup EMRUN is continuously ON, manual stop and auto stop command disable.

When interlock stop EM STOP is continuously ON, manual startup and auto startup command
disable.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, respond to stop command according to parameter
REVTYPE. Otherwise, system does not respond to startup command.

The validity of manual/auto command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM/STOPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electrical accident FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit
can be shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can
be shielded by IGNORALM.

Note4: Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS, on-site, close protection, interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual
/auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Note5: Running Fault

IGNORALM=ON, repond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms are existed or

283
 Function Block Reference

not.

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command if FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

Set OPFLACK=OFF, and running fault needs no comfirmation, and is not a limiting condition for
inputing new command.

Set OPFLACK=ON, and running fault needs comfirmation, and is a limiting condition for inputing
new command, valid for interlock command and manual/auto commands.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.

In inching mode, when the lasting time of input command is less than runtime, no running fault will
be generated.

In inching and consistent mode, when running fault OPFL occurs, restore output commands RUN,
STOP.

In lock mode, when status feedback is not ignored and running fault OPFL occurs, restore output
commands RUN, STOP. Otherwise (IGNORSTA=ON), do not judge running fault and RUN, STOP
are completely output according to set OUTTYPE mode.

When there is OPFL alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate OPFL alarm.

Note6: Trip Alarm

When equipment is in running status and there is no effective stop command, run status feedback
disappears, and trip alarm TRIP is generated.

In lock mode, when status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored and there is error still after
runtime reaches after trip alarm, restore and output RUN and RUNFLAG.

In lock mode, when status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, trip alarm does not influence
output RUN and RUNFLAG.

When there is TRIP alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate TRIP alarm.

284
 Function Block Reference

3.9.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-17 MOTOR Parameter Instruction

Panel Function Block

Initial Value
Parameter Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name Name
Read only, OUTTYPE=0, Set in the parameter
Pulse OUTTYPE √ －
Properties.
OUT
TYP Pulse Read only, OUTTYPE=1, Set in the parameter
OUTTYPE － －
E Serial Properties.
Continuo Read only, OUTTYPE=2, Set in the parameter
OUTTYPE － －
us Properties.
Read only, SETTYPT=0, Set in the parameter
Inching SETTYPE － －
Properties.
SET
TYP Continuo Read only, SETTYPE=1, Set in the parameter
SETTYPE √ －
E us Properties.
Read only, SETTYPE=2, Set in the parameter
Lock SETTYPE － －
Properties.
When single pulse and pulse list are output,
TPW(s) TPW 5.000 ≥0
define the width of high level of output pulse.
When the command is output and
corresponding output feedback after TOC
TOC(s) TOC 20.000 ≥0 time, operation fault OPFL appears. (When
status feedback is ignored, IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does not appear.)
Read only, Pulse period defined when pulse
TPLS(s) TPLS 10.000 －
list is output.
Read only, 0=In the process of operating
Respond REVTYPE √ － output, system does not respond to negative
REV stop command.
TYP
E Read only, 1=In the process of operating
Not
REVTYPE － － output, system responds to negative stop
Respond
command and output stop command.

285
 Function Block Reference

Panel Function Block

Initial Value
Parameter Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name Name
Out Button is
RUN RUNPRM － Start Command Enable Signal
put pressed.
Ena Button is
ble STOP STOPPRM － Stop Command Enable Signal
pressed.

TW Read only, Interval of Button Pop-Up, Set in

Time(s) TWAIT 1.000 ≥0
AIT the parameter Properties.

SW Read only, FBOPT=OFF, Set in the parameter

Panel FBOPT √ ON/OFF
AM Properties.
Setti Read only, FBOPT=ON, Set in the parameter
ngs Program FBOPT － ON/OFF
Properties.

Ope RUN MANRUN － － MAN Startup Command

ratio
n STOP MANSTOP － － MAN Stop Command
Butt
on
ACK ACK － － Acknowledgement Signal

3.9.3 Flag
Table 3-18 Flag list

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable No The Spot (LOC)
D2 Disable Protection (PROTECT)
D3 Disable Interlock Start (EMRUNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Stop (EMSTPSTA)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D7 Disable Turn-Off Alarm (POWOFF)
D8 Disable Electrical Accident (FAULT)
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Disable Feedback Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Running Status of Device (STARUN)
D12 Disable Stop Status of Device (STASTOP)
D13 Disable Device Trip (TRIP)
D14 Disable Run Instruction Output Process (RUNPRO)
D15 Disable Stop Instruction Output Process (STOPRO)
D16 Disable Indicate Startup Condition of Interlock (EMRUNCON)
D17 Disable Indicate Stop Condition of Interlock (EMSTPCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 Enable (SWFIX Listing (FIX)
D20 Enable (RUNPRM) Indication of Startup Enable (RUNPRM)
D21 Enable (STOPRM) Indication of Stop Enable (STOPRM)
D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)
NONE Enable (MANRUN) Manual Startup (MANRUN)
NONE Enable (MANSTOP) Manual Stop (MANSTOP)
NONE Enable (ACK) Confirm (ACK)

286
 Function Block Reference

3.9.4 Example Application

To achieve the field-pump start and stop control as shown in Figure 3-17, and can be operated on
flow chart. When pump running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output
are different, open the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge. When pump trip
occurs, acknowledge first and execute other operation.

Dual-DI dual-DO pump refers to that the start and stop of filed pump device is controlled by two
DO signals, the pump status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks. It is often used to control start
and stop of high power pump.

Figure 3-17 Dual-DI Dual-DO Pump

Details of program are shown below. It applies MOTOR motor control function block, and the
upper computer interface can control DO via function block tag.

Figure 3-18 Program of Dual-DI Dual-DO Motor

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-19 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Pump Running Status Can perform 2 DI
001 RL_M1101A3 DI Input
Feedback construction
002 HS_M1101A1 DO Output Pump Start Control

003 HS_M1101A2 DO Output Pump Stop Control

Pump Control Function
004 M1101A1_CON Function Block Tag Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of MOTOR:

287
 Function Block Reference

 FBOPT: ON
 PSWAM: OFF
 OPFLACK: OFF
 AUTOCLR: ON
 TRIPACK: ON
 IGNORSTA: OFF
 If pulse control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=0, SETTYPE=1,
REVTYPE=1 and STPOUT=OFF;
 If long signal control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=2,
SETTYPE=1, REVTYPE=1, STPOUT=OFF; when long signal control is applied and
running time has reached, no matter the feedback arrives or not, output is OFF.

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 FAIL(Device Fault) alarm, when all function block switches are ON, FAIL outputs
alarm (FAIL=ON);
 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different
with its output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);
 TRIP(trip indication) alarm, if there is no stop output action, the open feedback
changes from ON to OFF, TRIP outputs alarm (TRIP=ON);
 Set the operation parameter IGNORALM (input shield alarm) of basic parameter as
not shield (IGNORALM=OFF), the input instruction is not influenced by alarm signals
FAIL and OPFL.
Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter
OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.10 Valve Control Function Block (VALVE)

VALVE function block enables control and interlock protect to a single equipment by last level
sequence control command or operator by panel.

VALVE function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

288
 Function Block Reference

3.10.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-20 Valve control function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Mode Output Instruction Mode

Configuratio
Parameters Setting OUTTYPE 0=Pulse, 1=Pulse Series, － －
n Parameter
2=Long-Signal
Mode: 0= Inching, Configuratio
SETTYPE － －
1=Continuum n Parameter
Answer Mode of Reverse
Instruction: Configuratio
REVTYPE － －
0=No Answer, 1=Answer and n Parameter
Output, 2=Answer And Stop
Output Instruction of STOP:
When STPOUT=OFF, stop
command only represents the
logical stop, it is not output to
Operation
STPOUT the equipment. TRUE －
Parameter
When STPOUT=ON, stop
command represents the
logical stop and is output with
TPW pulse width.
Whether to Confirm Running
Fault:
Set OPFLACK=OFF, running
fault does not need to be
confirmed and is not
considered as restricted
condition of new command
input. Operation
OPFLACK TRUE －
Set OPFLACK=ON, running Parameter
fault needs to be confirmed
and is considered as
restricted condition of new
command input and is
effective to interlock
command and manual/auto
command.

289
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether Auto-Remove
Running Fault:
Set AUTOCLR=ON, running
fault alarm OPFL will be
eliminated automatically after
status feedback signal is Operation
AUTOCLR TRUE －
restored. Parameter
Set AUTOCLR=OFF, running
fault alarm OPFL will be
eliminated only after panel
confirmation after status
feedback signal is restored.
Whether to Confirm Trip Fault:
When TRIPACK=OFF, then
the trip fault do not need to be
confirmed and do not use as
input condition of new
command. Operation
TRIPACK TRUE －
When TRIPACK＝ON, then Parameter
the trip fault:
need to be confirmed
use as input condition of new
interlock command and
Man/auto command.
Input Command Shield Alarm.
When IGNORALM=ON, then
FAIL, TRIP, FAULT, OPFL will
not use as input condition of
IGNORAL new command. Operation
TRUE －
M When IGNORALM=OFF, then Parameter
FAIL, TRIP, FAULT, OPFL will
use as input condition of new
interlock command and
Man/auto command.
Ignore Feedback That Output
Instruction.
When status feedback is
ignored and IGNORSTA=ON,
an OPN command or CLS
command will output
depending on OUTTYPE Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE －
setting. Parameter
When status feedback is not
ignored and
IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore
outputs command when
corresponding status
feedback reaches.
Time Output pulse width. When
Setting single pulse and pulse list are Operation
TPW TRUE －
s output, define the width of Parameter
high-level of output pulse.

290
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Devise Travel Time (Unit: S)
When the command is output
and corresponding output
feedback after TOC time,
Operation
TOC operation fault OPFL appears. TRUE －
Parameter
(When status feedback is
ignored, IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does not
appear.)
Output Pulse Cycle (Unit: S)
Pulse period defined when Operation
TPLS TRUE －
pulse list is output. When set Parameter
TPLS<TPW, TPLS=TPW.
Setting Interval of Button Operation
TWAIT TRUE －
Pop-Up (Unit: S) Parameter
Extended Input Measuring
OPNSTA Open Bit Feedback － Input Pin
Parameters pin Point DI
Measuring
CLSSTA Close Bit Feedback － Input Pin
Point DI
Upstream
AUTOPN Auto-Open Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTCLS Auto-Close Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTSTOP Auto-Stop Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
EMOPN Interlock Open Command － Input Pin Interlock
Signal
Upstream
EMCLS Interlock Close Command － Input Pin Interlock
Signal
Upstream
PROTECT Protect － Input Pin
Output
Control Switch with on The Upstream
TOLOC － Input Pin
Spot (ON=on the Spot) Output
Confirm Signal of Program
Input
Upstream
PACK Eliminate the running alarm or － Input Pin
Output
trip alarm by panel or program
input signal PACK.
Open-Output Enable Signal
Open permitted signal. When
OPNPRM=ON, interlock Upstream
OPNPRM － Input Pin
open, auto open and manual Output
open can output open
command.
Close- Output Enable Signal
Close permitted command.
When CLSPRM=ON, interlock Upstream
CLSPRM － Input Pin
close, auto close and manual Output
close can output close
command.
Control Switch Input of Upstream
PSWAM － Input Pin
Software Man/Auto Output

291
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Select Man/Auto Control
Upstream
FBOPT Source － Input Pin
Output
(OFF=Panel Control)
OPN Output the Open Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
Output
pin CLS Output the Close Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
STOP Output the Stop Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
Operation
SWFIX Command of Listing － －
Parameter
Operation
MANOPN Manual Open Command － －
Parameter
Operation
MANCLS Manual Close Command － －
Operati Parameter
on pin Operation
MANSTOP Manual Stop Command － －
Parameter
Man/Auto Switch: Operation
SWAM － －
ON=Auto, OFF=Man Parameter
Operation
ACK Confirm Signal － －
Parameter
Device Fault
When open status feedback
Monitoring
FAIL OPNSTA and close status － －
Parameter
feedback CLSSTA are both
ON, feedback fault FAIL=ON.
Monitoring
OPFL Running Fault (ON=Fault) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
TRIP Trip Indication (ON=Trip) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
LOC Indication of Device Open All － －
Parameter
Monitoring
STAOPN Indication of Device Close All － －
Status Parameter
Indication of Device Stop in Monitoring
STACLS － －
the Middle Parameter
Monitoring
STASTOP Device Mode (Observe) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Running Fault (ON=Fault) － －
Parameter
Output Process of Monitoring
OPNFLAG － －
Open-Command (Observe) Parameter
Output Process of Monitoring
CLSFLAG － －
Close-Command (Observe) Parameter
STOPFLA Output Process of Monitoring
－ －
G Stop-Command (Observe) Parameter
Alarm Operation
AOF Suppress Module Alarm TRUE －
Enable Parameter
d and
Suppre FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
ss
OOS
with OOS Status Operation
Setting SWOOS TRUE －
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
s

292
 Function Block Reference

3.10.2 Logic Time Sequencing

1) SETTYPE: Run mode

0= inching mode

 The output command will restore with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored and IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs
command when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored and IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

1=consistent mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored and IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs
command when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored and IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

2) OUTTYPE: output mode selection

Figure 3-19 Pulse Output Mode (OUTTYPE = 0)

Figure 3-20 Pulse Train Output Mode (OUTTYPE = 1 )

Figure 3-21Long Signal Output Mode( OUTTYPE = 2 )

3) Work Status

Function block status and priority: OOS>on-site> close protection >interlock>manual /auto
selection

293
 Function Block Reference

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 On-site(MODE=2)

When function block is not in OOS status and TOLOC=ON, function block is in on-site mode.
Output command restores and is not available. Function block is not restricted by switch.

 Close protection (MODE=3)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input close protection commands,
function block turns to close protection mode. Close protection mode is not restricted by switch or
feedback signal or alarm.

When Input Pin PROTECT jumps from OFF to ON, the trigger one stops command output.

 Interlock(MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input interlock open or interlock close
command, function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive
transmission check.

When both interlock open, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in effective
time of interlock open command, execute interlock open command first and then interlock stop
command after interlock open command is over. And vise versa.

The effective of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electric fault FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit can be
shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can be
shielded by IGNORALM.

 Manual stop (MODE=5)

Precedence level of manual stop is more than auto-open, auto-close, auto-stop, manual open and
manual close.

If interlock command EMOPN or EMCLS is ON, then manual stop command disables.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=6; Auto: MODE=7)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode. Automatic
status instruction includes AUTOPN, AUTCLS, and AUTSTOP. Manual status output instruction

294
 Function Block Reference

includes MANOPN, MANCLS.

Man/auto command input adopts up-jump check.

If interlock open EMOPN hold is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close command
disables.

If interlock-close EMCLS hold is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open command
disables.

The validity of Man/auto command is limited by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

feedback fault, trip fault, running fault. Trip fault limit can be shielded by TRIPACK; running fault
limit can be shielded by OPFLACK. At one time, above 3 alarms limit can be shielded by
IGNORALM.

4) Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS, on-site, close protection, interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual
/auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, WAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

5) Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.

In inching mode, when the lasting time of input command is less than runtime, no running fault will
be generated.

In inching and consistent mode, when running fault OPFL occurs, restore output commands RUN,
STOP.

When there is OPFL alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate OPFL alarm.

Trip Alarm

When there is no open command, generate TRIP when open feedback reaches or close feedback
undoes.

When there is no close command, generate TRIP when close feedback reaches or open feedback

295
 Function Block Reference

undoes.

When there is TRIP alarm, then new command is valid and the input of new command will
eliminate TRIP alarm.

3.10.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Figure 3-1 Panel Parameter Instruction

Function
Panel Parameter Block Initial Value
Application Instruction
Name Parameter Value Range
Name
Read only, OUTTYPE=0, Set in the
Pulse OUTTYPE √ －
parameter Properties.
OUT
TYP Pulse Read only, OUTTYPE=1, Set in the
OUTTYPE － －
E Serial parameter Properties.
Read only, OUTTYPE=2, Set in the
Continuous OUTTYPE － －
parameter Properties.
Run Read only, SETTYPT=0, Set in the
Inching SETTYPE － －
ning parameter Properties.
Mod Read only, SETTYPE=1, Set in the
e Continuous SETTYPE √ －
parameter Properties.
0=In the process of operating output,
Not
REVTYPE － － system does not respond to negative stop
Response
REV command.
TYP 1=In the process of operating output,
E Output REVTYPE √ － system responds to negative stop command
Mod and output negative stop command.
e
2=In the process of operating output,
Stop REVTYPE － － system responds to negative stop command
and is considered as stop command.

296
 Function Block Reference

Function
Panel Parameter Block Initial Value
Application Instruction
Name Parameter Value Range
Name
When single pulse and pulse list are output,
TPW(s) TPW 5.000 ≥0 define the width of high-level of output
pulse.
When the command is output and
corresponding output feedback after TOC
time, operation fault OPFL appears. (When
TOC(s) TOC 20.000 ≥0
status feedback is ignored,
IGNORSTA=ON, operation fault does not
appear.)
Read only, Pulse period defined when pulse
TPLS(s) TPLS 10.000 － list is output. When set TPLS<TPW,
TPLS=TPW.
The
Out OPNPRM RUNPRM button is － Start Command Enable Signal
put pressed.
Per
miss The
ion CLSPRM STOPPRM button is － Stop Command Enable Signal
pressed.
The
button is The button pressed means STPOUT=ON,
STP Enable STPOUT －
not and stop command is output.
OUT pressed.
Setti
ngs The
The button pressed means STPOUT=OF
Disable STPOUT button is －
and stop command will not be output.
pressed.
TW
AIT Read only, Setting Interval of Button
TWAIT(s) TWAIT 1.000 ≥0
Setti Pop-Up, Set in the parameter Properties.
ng
Man Read only, FBOPT=OFF, Set in the
Panel FBOPT √ －
ual/ parameter Properties.
Auto
_CS Read only, FBOPT=ON, Set in the
swit Program FBOPT － －
parameter Properties.
ch
OPN MANOPN － － Manual Open Command
Ope
CLS MANCLS － － Manual Close Command
ratio
n
Butt STP MANSTOP － － Manual Stop Command
on
ACK ACK － － Confirm Signal

3.10.4 Flag
Table 3-21 Flag list

Flag Code Supervision Assign Instruction

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable On The Spot (LOC)
D2 Disable Protect (PROTECT)
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock-Close (EMCLSSTA)

297
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Instruction

D5 Enable (MANSTOP) Manual stop (MANSTOP)
D6 Disable Manual (MAN)
D7 Enable(SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D8 Enable(OPNPRM) Open Enable(Opnprm)
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Enable(CLSPRM) Close Enable(Clsprm)
D11 Disable Feedback Fault(FAIL)
D12 Disable Devise Open All (STAOPN)
D13 Disable Devise Close All (STACLS)
D14 Disable Devise Middle Stop (STASTOP)
D15 Disable Devise Trip (TRIP)
D16 Disable Output Process of Open Instruction (OPNPRO)
D17 Disable Output Process of Close Instruction (CLSPRO)
D18 Disable Output Process of Stop Instruction (STOPRO)
D19 Disable Interlock Open Condition (EMOPNCON)
D20 Disable Interlock-Close Condition (EMCLSCON)
D21 Enable(AOF) Alarm Suppression(AOF)
D22 Enable(SWFIX) Listing (FIX)
D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)
NONE Enable(MANOPN) Manual open (MANOPN)
NONE Enable(MANCLS) Manual close (MANCLS)
NONE Enable(ACK) Confirm (ACK)
3.10.5 Example Application

To achieve the field-pump on, off and stop control as shown Figure 3-22, and can be operated on
flow chart. When pump running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output
are different, open the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge. When pump trip
occurs, acknowledge first and execute other operation.

Dual-DI three DO pump refers to that the on, off and stop of filed pump device is controlled by
three DO signals, the pump status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks.

Figure 3-22 Dual-DI Dual-DO pump

Details of program are shown below. It applies VALVE valve control function block, and the upper
computer interface can control DO via function block tag.

298
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-23 Program of Dual-DI Three DO Valve

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-22 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 SO_12 DO Output Valve On Control

002 SC_12 DO Output Valve Off Control

003 SP_12 DO Output Valve Stop Control

004 ZIO_12 DI Input Valve On Status Feedback

005 ZIC_12 DI Input Valve Off Status Feedback

006 VALVE002 Function Block Tag Valve Control Function Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of VALVE:

 FBOPT: ON
 PSWAM: OFF
 OPFLACK: OFF
 AUTOCLR: ON
 TRIPACK: OFF
 IGNORSTA: ON
 If pulse control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=2, SETTYPE=1,
REVTYPE=1 and STPOUT=ON;
 If long signal control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=2,
SETTYPE=1, REVTYPE=1, STPOUT=ON; when long signal control is applied and
running time has reached, no matter the feedback arrives or not, output is OFF.

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

299
 Function Block Reference

 FAIL(Device Fault) alarm, when all function block switches are ON, FAIL outputs
alarm (FAIL=ON);
 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different
with its output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);
 TRIP(trip indication) alarm, if there is no stop output action, the open feedback
changes from ON to OFF, TRIP outputs alarm (TRIP=ON);
 Set the operation parameter IGNORALM (input shield alarm) of basic parameter as
not shield (IGNORALM=OFF), the input instruction is not influenced by alarm signals
FAIL and OPFL.
Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter
OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.11 Two Outputs Balance Control Function Block (BALANCE)

In double- execution institution system, two control stations can be in auto mode. Automatically
control signals control corresponding execution institution though corresponding control station
and two institutions and assistant equipments change under the control of automatically control
signals.

When one side of institution cannot generate the equivalent force of another one as some fault,
proper operation will reduce control output of default side and the other side will compensate the
reduced force. That will reduce interfere to the process.

The balance control function block realizes its function with manual operator function block
together.

BALANCE function block is complex function block, and its running time is 10µs.

3.11.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-23 Two outputs balance control function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Output Limits Output A High Operation Value range is
MVH1 TRUE
Parameters Limit Parameter [SCL, SCH].

300
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output A Low Operation Value range is
MVL1 TRUE
Limit Parameter [SCL,SCH]
Output B High Operation Value range is
MVH2 TRUE
Limit Parameter [SCL,SCH]
Output B Low Operation Value range is
MVL2 TRUE
Limit Parameter [SCL,SCH]
Because of
integral, the
integral item
Integral High Operation is big when EI
MAX TRUE
Limit Parameter is big. So the
value range of
the integral is
limited.
Integral Limits
Because of
integral, the
integral item
Integral Low Operation is big when EI
MIN TRUE
Limit Parameter is big. So the
value range of
the integral is
limited.
Configurati
Range High
SCH － on －
Limit
Parameter
Configurati
Range Low
SCL － on －
Limit
Parameter
Configurati
Engineering
EU － on －
Unit
Parameter
Range Display
Settings Decimal Digits
Configurati
CSV Decimal of the input in
CSVDLEN － on
Digits [0,5] the panel, and
Parameter
the default
value is 3.
Display
Decimal Digits
Configurati
MV Decimal of the input in
MVDLEN － on
Digits [0,5] the panel, and
Parameter
the default
value is 3.
Extended Input Pin Balance Input The upper is
CSV － Input Pin
Parameters Value MV.
Connect to
Output A BKOUTERR
Track Switch of the
SWTR1 － Input Pin
(ON=Tracking MANUAL
) function block
A.
Connect to
BKOUTERR
Track Input of the
TV1 － Input Pin
Value A MANUAL
function block
A.

301
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Track Switch BKOUTERR
for Output B of the
SWTR2 － Input Pin
(ON=Tracking MANUAL
) function block
B.
Connect to
BKOUTERR
Track Input of the
TV2 － Input Pin
Value B MANUAL
function block
B.
Output A. When
Connects SWTR1=ON
input terminal and
Output Pin of A manual SWTR2=ON
MV1 － Output Pin
operator then
function block MV1=TV1
[MVL1, and
MVH1]. MV2=TV2.
When
SWTR1=ON
and
SWTR2=OFF,
then
MV1=TV1
and
MV2=2CSV –
MV1.
OutputB When
connects SWTR1=OFF
input terminal and
of B manual SWTR2=ON,
MV2 － Output Pin then
operator
function block MV1=2CSV –
[MVL1, MV2 and
MVH1]. MV2=TV2.
When
SWTR1=OFF
and
SWTR2=OFF,
then
MV1=CSV +
BIAS and
MV2=CSV –
BIAS.
Connect to
BKIN of upper
function block.
When
SWTR1= ON
Feedback
BKOUT － Output Pin and
Output
SWTR2=ON,
then BKOUT=
(TV1+TV2)/2.
Else
BKOUT=CSV.

302
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
BKIN of upper
function block.
When
Output
SWTR1= ON
BKOUTERR Feedback － Output Pin
SWTR2=ON,
Status
then BKOUT=
(TV1+TV2)/2.
Else
BKOUT=CSV.
In the OOS
OOS Status Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
SETTINGS (ON=Prohibit Parameter
ed)
Alarm
Suppress Operation
Enabled and AOF TRUE －
Module Alarm Parameter
Suppress
Man-Set Operation
BIAS － －
Biasing Value Parameter
Adjust the
speed of
Operation
GAIN Integral Gain TRUE integral
Parameter
accumulation
through GAIN.
When EI is
less than EI
Deadband,
the integral
Parameter item will not
Settings be
accumulated
EI Deadband Operation which means
DB_A TRUE
A Parameter that the
difference
between
target value
and current
value is in the
limit of
deadband.
EI Deadband Operation
DB_B TRUE －
B Parameter
Expand Configurati
HORLIM Range High － on －
Extend Range Limit Parameter
Settings Expand Configurati
LORLIM Range Low － on －
Limit Parameter

The output of this function block is:

When SWTR1=ON, SWTR2=ON, MV1=TV1, MV2=TV2;

When SWTR1=ON, SWTR2=OFF, MV1=TV1, MV2=2CSV-MV1;

When SWTR1=OFF, SWTR2=ON, MV1=2CSV-MV2, MV2=TV2;

303
 Function Block Reference

When SWTR1=OFF, SWTR2=OFF, MV1=CSV+BIAS, MV2=CSV - BIAS;

3.11.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-24 panel parameter instruction

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Track Input Input A(TV1) TV1 0.0000 － －
Value Input B(TV2) TV2 0.0000 － －
EI Deadband DB_A DB_A 0.0000 － －
Value DB_B DB_B 0.0000 － －
Integral Limits MAX MAX 100.0000 － －

304
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
MIN MIN –100.0000 － －
BIAS BIAS 0.0000 － －
Bias and Gain
GAIN GAIN 1.0000 － －
MVH1 MVH1 100.0000 [SCL,SCH] －
MV1 Limits
MVL1 MVL1 0.0000 [SCL,SCH] －
MVH2 MVH2 100.0000 [SCL,SCH] －
MV2 Limits
MVL2 MVL2 0.0000 [SCL,SCH] －
3.11.3 Flag
Table 3-25 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Code Instruction
Assign
D0 Enable(SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Enable(AOF) Alarm Suppression(AOF)
D2 Disable Track Input 1 (TR1)
D3 Disable Track Input 2 (TR2)
D4 Disable High Limit Alarm for Input 1 (MVH1)
D5 Disable Low Limit Alarm for Input 1 (MVL1)
D6 Disable High Limit Alarm for Input 2 (MVH2)
D7 Disable Low Limit Alarm for Input 2 (MVL2)

3.12 Single DI/DO Start/Stop Control Function Block (DIO-11M)

DIO-11M function block enables control and interlock protect to single DI feedback/ single DO
output equipment by last level sequence control command or operator by panel.

DIO-11M function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.12.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-26 Single DI/DO Start/Stop Control Function Block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Mode Device Runtime Operation
TOC TRUE -
Parameters Setting (Unit: s) Parameter
Whether to Confirm
Operation
OPFLACK Running Fault TRUE -
Parameter
(ON=Yes)
Whether to
Eliminate Operation
AUTOCLR TRUE -
Operation Failure Parameter
Auto(ON=Auto)
Output Command
Ignore Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE -
Feedback(OFF=N Parameter
O)

305
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output Safety
Mode
Operation
SAFE_OPT Selection(OFF=Not TRUE -
Parameter
Reset Output,
ON=Reset Output)
Extended Status Feedback
Parameters ACK (ON=Run - Input Pin Measuring Point DI
OFF=Stop)
Command Input
PCMD (ON=Start - Input Pin Upstream Output
OFF=Stop)
Interlock Startup Upstream Interlock
EMSTART - Input Pin
Command Input
Interlock Stop Upstream Interlock
EMSTOP - Input Pin
Command Input
Program Manual
Input Pin PSWAM and Auto Control - Input Pin Upstream Output
Digital Input
Start Command
RUNPRM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Enable Signal
Stop Command
STOPRM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Enable Signal
Manual-automatic
Control Source
FBOPT - Input Pin Upstream Output
Switch(OFF=Panel
)
Program Failure
PACK - Input Pin Upstream Output
Confirm
Output
DRIVE Driver Output - Output Pin Output DO
Pin
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE -
Enabled Alarm Parameter
and
Suppres FLAG Flag - Output Pin -
s
OOS
In OOS Status Operation
SETTIN SWOOS TRUE -
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
GS
Manual Command
Operation
MCMD (ON=Start - -
Parameter
Operatio OFF=Stop)
n Manual-automatic
Paramet Operation
SWAM Switch(ON=Auto - -
er Parameter
OFF=Manual)
Operation
MACK Manual Confirm - -
Parameter
Status Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL - -
(ON=Fault) Parameter
Device Running
Status Monitoring
STARUN - -
Indication(ON=Run Parameter
)
Device Stop Status
Monitoring
STASTOP Indication(ON=Pro - -
Parameter
hibited)

306
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Device Monitoring
MODE - -
Mode(Observe) Parameter
Startup Command
Monitoring
RUNFLAG Output - -
Parameter
Process(Observe)
Stop Command
Monitoring
STOPFLAG Output - -
Parameter
Process(Observe)
3.12.2 Logic Time Sequencing
Function block status

Function block status and priority: OOS>interlock>manual /auto selection

OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

Interlock(interlock startup/interlock stop, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock startup or interlock stop command,
function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive transmission
check.

When both interlock startup, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, execute interlock startup command first and then
interlock stop command after interlock startup command is over. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM), running
fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK,

Attention:

When interlock startup, DRIVE＝ON. When interlock stop, DRIVE＝OFF.

Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode.

Manual status output instruction is by MCMD. When MCMD＝ON, then DRIVE＝ON. When
MCMD＝OFF, then DRIVE＝OFF.

307
 Function Block Reference

Automatic status output instruction is decided by PCMD. When PCMD＝ON then DRIVE＝ON.
When PCMD＝OFF, then DRIVE＝OFF.

Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.

When interlock startup EMSTART is continuously ON, then manual stop and auto stop command
disables.

When interlock stop EMSTOP is continuously ON, then manual startup and auto startup command
is disabled.

The validity of man/auto command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM),

running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK.

Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system works in manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault. The DRIVE output
maintains.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal are
received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL. When
SAFE_OPT=ON, DRIVE=OFF.

When there is OPFL alarm, new command is not effective. And when OPFL alarm is eliminated,
new command will be effective again.

Alarm Confirmation

Eliminate the running alarm by panel or program input signal PACK.

Shield Alarm

IGNORALM=ON, respond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms exist or not.

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command when FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

308
 Function Block Reference

Set OPFLACK=OFF, running fault does not need to be confirmed and is not considered as
restricted condition of new command input.

Set OPFLACK=ON, running fault needs to be confirmed and is considered as restricted condition
of new command input and is effective to interlock command and manual/auto command.

Set AUTOCLR=ON, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated automatically after status
feedback signal is restored.

Set AUTOCLR=OFF, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated only after panel confirmation
after status feedback signal is restored.

Set IGNORSTA=ON, current output does not judge feedback status and DRIVE is completely
output.

Set IGNORSTA=OFF, current output judges feedback status.

3.12.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-27 Panel Parameter Instruction

Parameter
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Eliminate the running
alarm by panel or
Alarm Eliminated PACK OFF －
program input signal
PACK.
Output Start Enable RUNPRM ON － －
Enable/Disable Stop Enable STOPRM ON － －
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －

309
 Function Block Reference

3.12.4 Flag
Table 3-28 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Startup (EMSTART)
D4 Disable Interlock Stop (EMSTOP)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto(AUTO)
D7 - -
D8 - -
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 - -
D11 Disable Device Run Status (STARUN)
D12 Disable Device Stop Status (STASTOP)
D13 - -
D14 Disable Startup Command Output Process (RUNPRO)
D15 Disable Stop Command Output Process (STOPRO)
D16 Disable Interlock Startup Condition Indication (EMSTACON)
D17 Disable Interlock Stop Condition Indication (EMSTPCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
Enable
D20 Startup Permission Indication (RUNPRM)
(RUNPRM)
Enable
D21 Stop Permission Indication (STOPRM)
(STOPRM)

D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)

Null Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD)

Null Enable (ACK) Acknowledge (ACK)
3.12.5 Example Application

To achieve the field-pump transducer start and stop control as shown in Figure 3-24, and can be
operated on flow chart. When pump running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and
control output are different, open the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge. When
pump trip occurs, acknowledge first and execute other operation.

One DI one DO pump refers to that the on, off and stop of filed pump device is controlled by one
DO signal, the pump status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks. It is often used to control start
and stop of pump transducer.

310
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-24 One DI One DO Pump

Details of program are shown below. It applies DIO-11M function block, and the upper computer
interface can control DO via function block tag.

Figure 3-25 Program of One DI One DO Pump

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-29 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 ZS_001 DI Input Frequency Conversion
Feedback
002 MC_001 DO Output Frequency Conversion
Control
006 MOTOR001 Function Block Tag Function Block Tag of Supervision Tag
Frequency Conversion

Parameter settings of DIO-11M:

 FBOPT: ON
 PSWAM: OFF
 OPFLACK: OFF
 AUTOCLR: ON
 TRIPACK: OFF
 IGNORSTA: ON
 SAFE_OPT: OFF

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel.

311
 Function Block Reference

Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different
with its output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);
 If SAFE_OPT=ON, OPFL (running fault) alarm generates, and function block
DRIVE=OFF;

Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter

OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.13 Single DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-11V)

DIO-11V function block enables control and interlock protect to single DI feedback/single DO
output equipment by last level sequence control command or operator by panel.

DIO-11V function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.13.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-30 Single DI and Single DO Switch Function Block parameter instruction

Function Block Initial Value Application

Panel Parameter Name
Parameter Name Value Range Instruction
Device Runtime Operation
TOC TRUE －
(Unit: s) Parameter
Whether to Confirm
Operation
OPFLACK Running Fault TRUE －
Parameter
(ON=Yes)
Whether to
Eliminate Operation
Mod AUTOCLR TRUE －
Operation Failure Parameter
Basic e Auto(ON=Auto)
Parameters Setti
Output Command
ng
Ignore Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE －
Feedback(OFF=N Parameter
O)
Output Safety
Mode
Operation
SAFE_OPT Selection(OFF=Not TRUE －
Parameter
Reset Output,
ON=Reset Output)

312
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Initial Value Application

Panel Parameter Name
Parameter Name Value Range Instruction

Extended Status Feedback

Parameters ACK (ON=Open - Input Pin Measuring Point DI
OFF=Close)
Command Input
PCMD (ON=Open - Input Pin Upstream Output
OFF=Close)
Interlock Open Upstream Interlock
EMOPN - Input Pin
Command Input
Interlock Close Upstream Interlock
EMCLS - Input Pin
Command Input
Input Program Manual
Pin PSWAM and Auto Control - Input Pin Upstream Output
Digital Input
Open Permission
OPNPRM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Signal
Close Permission
CLSPRM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Signal
Manual-automatic
Control Source
FBOPT - Input Pin Upstream Output
Switch(OFF=Panel
)
Program Failure
PACK - Input Pin Upstream Output
Confirm
Outp Output, reset as
ut DO OFF when offline - Output Pin Output DO
Pin download.
Alar Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
m Alarm Parameter
Ena
bled
and
Sup FLAG Flag - Output Pin －
pres
s
OOS
SET In OOS Status Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
TIN (ON=Prohibited) Parameter
GS
Manual Command
Operation
MCMD (ON=Open - －
Oper Parameter
OFF=Close)
ation
Para Manual-automatic
Operation
mete SWAM Switch(ON=Auto - －
Parameter
r OFF=Manual)
Operation
MACK Manual Confirm - －
Parameter
Statu Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL - －
s (ON=Fault) Parameter
Device Running
Status Monitoring
STAOPN - －
Indication(ON=Ope Parameter
n)
Device Stop Status
Monitoring
STACLS Indication(ON=Clos - －
Parameter
e)

313
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Initial Value Application

Panel Parameter Name
Parameter Name Value Range Instruction
Device Monitoring
MODE - －
Mode(Observe) Parameter
Open Command
Monitoring
OPNFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)
Close Command
Monitoring
CLSFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)
Conf
igura Output Invert Set by the air open
Configurati
tion Switch (ON: Air and air closed
IVO - on
Para Closed. OFF: Air features of controlled
Parameter
mete Open) valve.
r
3.13.2 Logic Time Sequencing
1. Function block status

Function block status and priority: OOS>interlock>manual /auto selection

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 Interlock(interlock open/interlock close, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock open or interlock close command,
function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive transmission
check.

When both interlock open, interlock close commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock close command is inputted in
effective time of interlock open command, execute interlock open command first and then interlock
close command after interlock open command is over. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK,

When interlock startup, DO＝ON. When interlock stop, DO＝OFF.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode.

314
 Function Block Reference

Manual status output instruction is by MCMD. When MCMD＝ON, then DO＝ON. When MCMD＝
OFF, then DO＝OFF.

Automatic status output instruction is decided by PCMD. When PCMD＝ON then DO＝ON. When
PCMD＝OFF, then DO＝OFF.

Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.

If interlock open EMOPN is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close command
disables.

If interlock close EMCLS is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open command
disables.

The validity of man/auto command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK,

2. Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

3. Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault. The DO output
maintains.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal are
received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL. When
SAFE_OPT=ON, DO=OFF.

When there is OPFL alarm, new command is not effective. And when OPFL alarm is eliminated,
new command will be effective again.

4. Alarm Confirmation

Eliminate the running alarm by panel or program input signal PACK.

5. Shield Alarm

IGNORALM=ON, respond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms exist or not.

315
 Function Block Reference

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command when FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

Set OPFLACK=OFF, running fault does not need to be confirmed and is not considered as
restricted condition of new command input.

Set OPFLACK=ON, running fault needs to be confirmed and is considered as restricted condition
of new command input and is effective to interlock command and manual/auto command.

Set AUTOCLR=ON, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated automatically after status
feedback signal is restored.

Set AUTOCLR=OFF, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated only after panel confirmation
after status feedback signal is restored.

Set IGNORSTA=ON, current output does not judge feedback status and DRIVE is completely
output.

Set IGNORSTA=OFF, current output judges feedback status.

6. Air Open/ Closed Function

 IVO = OFF: air open

The mode can be used to control air open valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is ON, the air open valve is open. When valid input command is
OFF, i.e. closed command, output is OFF, the air open valve is closed.

 IVO = ON: air closed

The mode can be used to control air closed valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is OFF, the air closed valve is open. When valid input command
is OFF, i.e. closed command, output is ON, the air closed valve is closed.

 Cold Startup

No matter in air open or closed mode, function block outputs OFF when cold starting
controller.

316
 Function Block Reference

3.13.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-31 Panel Parameters Instruction

Parameter
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Eliminate the running
alarm by panel or
Alarm Eliminated PACK OFF －
program input signal
PACK.
Output On Enable OPNPRM ON － －
Enable/Disable Off Enable CLSPRM ON － －
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －
3.13.4 Flag
Table 3-32 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Close (EMCLSSTA)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto(AUTO)
D7 - -
D8 - -
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 - -
D11 Disable Device Open Status (STAOPN)
D12 Disable Device Close Status (STACLS)

317
 Function Block Reference

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
D13 - -
D14 Disable Open Command Output Process (OPNPRO)
D15 Disable Close Command Output Process (CLSPRO)
D16 Disable Interlock Open Condition Indication (EMOPNCON)
D17 Disable Interlock Close Condition Indication (EMCLSCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
Enable
D20 Open Permission Indication (OPNPRM_B)
(OPNPRM)
Enable
D21 Close Permission Indication (CLSPRM_B)_
(CLSPRM)

D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)

Null Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD)

Null Enable (ACK) Acknowledge (ACK)
3.13.5 Application Example

To achieve the field-valve switch control as shown in Figure 3-26, and can be operated on flow
chart. When valve running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output are
different, generate the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge.

One DI one DO valve refers to that the filed valve device is controlled by one DO signal, the valve
status is shown by one DI signal feedbacks.

Figure 3-26 One DI One DO Valve

Details of program are shown below. It applies DIO-11V function block, and the upper computer
interface can control DO via function block tag.

Figure 3-27 Program of One DI One DO Valve

318
 Function Block Reference

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-33 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 KY_1209A DO Output Valve Control

002 KZI_1209A DI Input Valve Status Feedback

006 KV1209A Function Block Valve Control Function Supervision Tag

Block Tag

Parameter settings of DIO-11V:

 FBOPT: ON
 PSWAM: OFF
 OPFLACK: OFF
 AUTOCLR: ON
 IGNORSTA: OFF
 SAFE_OPT: OFF

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 OPFL :ON
 If SAFE_OPT=ON, OPFL (running fault) alarm generates, and function block
DO=OFF;
Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter
OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.14 Dual-DI and Single DO Start & Stop Function Block (DIO-21M)

DIO-21M function block enables control and interlock protect to dual-DI feedback/single DO output
equipment by last level sequence control command or operator by panel.

DIO-21M function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

319
 Function Block Reference

3.14.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-34 Dual-DI and Single DO Start& Stop Function Block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Device Runtime Operation
TOC TRUE －
(Unit: s) Parameter
Whether to
Operation
OPFLACK Confirm Running TRUE －
Parameter
Fault (ON=Yes)
Whether to
Eliminate Operation
AUTOCLR TRUE －
Operation Failure Parameter
Auto(ON=Auto)
Input Command
Basic Mode Operation
IGNORALM Shield TRUE －
Parameters Setting Parameter
Alarm(OFF=NO)
Output Command
Ignore Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE －
Feedback(OFF=N Parameter
O)
Output Safety
Mode
Selection(OFF=N Operation
SAFE_OPT TRUE －
ot Reset Output Parameter
ON=Reset
Output)
Extended Input Pin Run Status Measuring
RUNSTA - Input Pin
Parameters Feedback Point DI
Stop Status Measuring
STOPSTA - Input Pin
Feedback Point DI
Command Input
Upstream
PCMD (ON=Start - Input Pin
Output
OFF=Stop)
Upstream
Interlock Startup
EMSTART - Input Pin Interlock
Command
Input
Upstream
Interlock Stop
EMSTOP - Input Pin Interlock
Command
Input
Program Manual
Upstream
PSWAM and Auto Control - Input Pin
Output
Digital Input
Start Command Upstream
RUNPRM - Input Pin
Enable Signal Output
Stop Command Upstream
STOPRM - Input Pin
Enable Signal Output

320
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Manual-automatic
Control Source Upstream
FBOPT - Input Pin
Switch(OFF=Pan Output
el)
Program Input Upstream
PACK - Input Pin
Confirm Signal Output
Output Pin DRIVE Driver Output - Output Pin Output DO
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enabled Alarm Parameter
and
Suppress FLAG Flag - Output Pin －
OOS In OOS Status Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
SETTINGS (ON=Prohibited) Parameter
Manual
Command Operation
MCMD - －
(ON=Start Parameter
OFF=Stop)
Operation
Parameter Manual-automatic
Operation
SWAM Switch(ON=Auto - －
Parameter
OFF=Manual)
Operation
MACK Manual Confirm - －
Parameter
Device Monitoring
FAIL - －
Fault(ON=Fault) Parameter
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL - －
(ON=Fault) Parameter
Device Running
Status Monitoring
STARUN - －
Indication(ON=Ru Parameter
n)
Device Stop
Status Status Monitoring
STASTOP - －
Indication(ON=Pr Parameter
ohibited)
Device Monitoring
MODE - －
Mode(Observe) Parameter
Startup Command
Monitoring
RUNFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)
Stop Command
Monitoring
STOPFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)
3.14.2 Logical Control
Function block status

Function block status and priority: OOS>interlock>manual /auto selection.

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 Interlock(interlock startup/interlock stop, MODE=4)

321
 Function Block Reference

When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock startup or interlock stop command,
function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive transmission
check.

When both interlock startup, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, execute interlock startup command first and then
interlock stop command after interlock startup command is over. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM), device
fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK, FAIL and
OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORALM.

Attention:

When interlock startup, DRIVE＝ON. When interlock stop, DRIVE＝OFF.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode.

Manual status output instruction is by MCMD. When MCMD＝ON, then DRIVE＝ON. When
MCMD＝OFF, then DRIVE＝OFF.

Automatic status output instruction is decided by PCMD. When PCMD＝ON then DRIVE＝ON.
When PCMD＝OFF, then DRIVE＝OFF.

Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.

If interlock startup EMSTART is continuously ON, then manual stop and auto stop command
disables.

If interlock stop EMSTOP is continuously ON, then manual startup and auto startup command
disables.

The validity of man/auto command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM), device
fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK. FAIL and
OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORAM.

Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

322
 Function Block Reference

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault. The DRIVE output
maintains.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.
When SAFE_OPT=ON, DRIVE=OFF.

When there is OPFL alarm, new command is not effective. And when OPFL alarm is eliminated,
new command will be effective again.

Feedback Fault

When run status feedback RUNSTA and stop status feedback STOPSTA are both ON, feedback
fault alarm FAIL will be started.

Power off Alarm

When it is not outputting instruction and has no running fault, if RUNSTA and STOPSTA are OFF
together, set the power off alarm as POWOFF.

Alarm Confirmation

Eliminate the running alarm by panel or program input signal PACK.

Shield Alarm

IGNORALM=ON, respond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms exist or not.

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command when FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

Set OPFLACK=OFF, running fault does not need to be confirmed and is not considered as
restricted condition of new command input.

Set OPFLACK=ON, running fault needs to be confirmed and is considered as restricted condition
of new command input and is effective to interlock command and manual/auto command.

Set AUTOCLR=ON, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated automatically after status
feedback signal is restored.

Set AUTOCLR=OFF, running fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated only after panel confirmation

323
 Function Block Reference

after status feedback signal is restored.

Set IGNORSTA=ON, current output does not judge feedback status and DRIVE is completely
output.

Set IGNORSTA=OFF, current output judges feedback status.

3.14.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-35 Panel Parameter Instruction

Initial
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Value
Eliminate the running
alarm by panel or
Alarm Eliminated PACK OFF －
program input signal
PACK.
Output Start Enable RUNPRM ON － －
Enable/Disable Stop Enable STOPRM ON － －
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －
3.14.4 Flag
Table 3-36 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Startup (EMSTART)
D4 Disable Interlock Stop (EMSTOP)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)

324
 Function Block Reference

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto(AUTO)
D7 Disable Power off Alarm (POWOFF)
D8 - -
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Device Run Status (STARUN)
D12 Disable Device Stop Status (STASTOP)
D13 - -
D14 Disable Startup Command Output Process (RUNPRO)
D15 Disable Stop Command Output Process (STOPRO)
D16 Disable Interlock Startup Condition Indication (EMSTACON)
D17 Disable Interlock Stop Condition Indication (EMSTPCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
Enable
D20 Startup Permission Indication (RUNPRM)
(RUNPRM)
Enable
D21 Stop Permission Indication (STOPRM)_
(STOPRM)

D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)

Null Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD)

Null Enable (ACK) Acknowledge (ACK)
3.14.5 Application Example

To achieve the field-pump start and stop control as shown in Figure 3-28, and can be operated on
flow chart. When pump running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output
are different, generate the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge.

Dual-DI one DO pump refers to that the filed pump device is controlled by one DO signal, the
pump status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks. It is often used to control start and stop of
pump.

Figure 3-28 Dual-DI One DO Pump

Details of program are shown below. It applies DIO-21M function block, and the upper computer
interface can control DO via function block tag.

325
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-29 Program of Dual-DI One DO Pump

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-37 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 611DI000 DI Input Pump Running Status
Feedback
002 611DI001 DI Input Pump Stop Status
Feedback
003 611DO000 DO Output Pump Start and Stop

004 MOTOR002 Function Block Tag Pump Control Function Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of DIO-21M:

 FBOPT: ON

 PSWAM: OFF

 OPFLACK: OFF

 AUTOCLR: ON

 IGNORSTA: ON

 SAFE_OPT: OFF

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different with its
output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);

 If SAFE_OPT=ON, OPFL (running fault) alarm generates, and function block

DRIVE=OFF;

Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter

OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

326
 Function Block Reference

3.15 Dual-DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-21V)

DIO-21V function block enables control and interlock protect to dual-DI feedback/single DO output
equipment by last level sequence control command or operator by panel.

DIO-21V function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.15.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-38 Dual-DI and Single DO Switch Function Block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Device Runtime Operation
TOC TRUE －
(Unit: s) Parameter
Whether to
Operation
OPFLACK Confirm Running TRUE －
Parameter
Fault (ON=Yes)
Whether to
Eliminate Operation
AUTOCLR TRUE －
Operation Failure Parameter
Auto(ON=Auto)
Input Command
Basic Mode Operation
IGNORALM Shield TRUE －
Parameters Setting Parameter
Alarm(OFF=NO)
Output Command
Ignore Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE －
Feedback(OFF=N Parameter
O)
Output Safety
Mode
Selection(OFF=N Operation
SAFE_OPT TRUE －
ot Reset Output Parameter
ON=Reset
Output)
Extended Input Pin Open Status Measuring
OPNSTA - Input Pin
Parameters Feedback Point DI
Close Status Measuring
CLSSTA - Input Pin
Feedback Point DI
Command Input
Upstream
PCMD (ON=Start - Input Pin
Output
OFF=Stop)
Upstream
Interlock Open
EMOPN - Input Pin Interlock
Command
Input

327
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Upstream
Interlock Close
EMCLS - Input Pin Interlock
Command
Input
Program Manual
Upstream
PSWAM and Auto Control - Input Pin
Output
Digital Input
Open Permission Upstream
OPNPRM - Input Pin
Signal Output
Close Permission Upstream
CLSPRM - Input Pin
Signal Output
Manual-automatic
Control Source Upstream
FBOPT - Input Pin
Switch(OFF=Pan Output
el)
Program Input Upstream
PACK - Input Pin
Confirm Signal Output
Output, Reset as
Output Pin DO OFF When - Output Pin Output DO
Download Offline
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enabled and Alarm Parameter
Suppress FLAG Flag - Output Pin －
OOS In OOS Status Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
SETTINGS (ON=Prohibited) Parameter
Manual
Command Operation
MCMD - －
(ON=Start Parameter
OFF=Stop)
Operation
Parameter Manual-automatic
Operation
SWAM Switch(ON=Auto - －
Parameter
OFF=Manual)
Operation
MACK Manual Confirm - －
Parameter
Device Monitoring
FAIL - －
Fault(ON=Fault) Parameter
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL - －
(ON=Fault) Parameter
Device Running
Status Monitoring
STAOPN - －
Indication(ON=Op Parameter
en)
Device Stop
Status Status Monitoring
STACLS - －
Indication(ON=Cl Parameter
ose)
Device Monitoring
MODE - －
Mode(Observe) Parameter
Open Command
Monitoring
OPNFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)
Close Command
Monitoring
CLSFLAG Output - －
Parameter
Process(Observe)

328
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set by the
Output Invert air open
Configurati
Configuratio Switch (ON: air and closed
IVO - on
n Parameter closed; OFF: air features of
Parameter
open) controlled
valve
3.15.2 Logical Control
Function block status

Function block status and priority: OOS>interlock>manual /auto selection

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 Interlock(interlock open/interlock stop, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock open or interlock close command,
function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive transmission
check.

When both interlock open, interlock close commands are inputted, the system does not respond to
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock close command is inputted in
effective time of interlock open command, execute interlock open command first and then interlock
close command after interlock open command is over. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM), device
fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK, FAIL and
OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORALM.

Attention:

When interlock startup, DO＝ON. When interlock stop, DO＝OFF.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode.

Manual status output instruction is decided by MCMD. When MCMD＝ON, then DO＝ON. When
MCMD＝OFF, then DO＝OFF.

Automatic status output instruction is decided by PCMD. When PCMD＝ON then DO＝ON. When
PCMD＝OFF, then DO＝OFF.

329
 Function Block Reference

Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.

If interlock open EMOPN is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close command
disables.

If interlock close EMCLS is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open command
disables.

The validity of man/auto command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

device fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded by OPFLACK. FAIL
and OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORAM.

Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault. The DO output
maintains.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.
When SAFE_OPT=ON, DO=OFF.

When there is OPFL alarm, new command is not effective. And when OPFL alarm is eliminated,
new command will be effective again.

Feedback Fault

When open status feedback OPNSTA and close status feedback CLSSTA are both ON, feedback
fault alarm FAIL will be started.

Power off Alarm

When it is not outputting instruction and has no running fault, if OPNSTA and CLSSTA are OFF
together, set the power off alarm as POWOFF.

Alarm Confirmation

330
 Function Block Reference

Eliminate the running alarm by panel or program input signal PACK.

Shield Alarm

IGNORALM=ON, respond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms exist or not.

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command when FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

Set OPFLACK=OFF, running fault does not need to be confirmed and is not considered as
restricted condition of new command input.

Set OPFLACK=ON, running fault needs to be confirmed and is considered as restricted condition
of new command input and is effective to interlock command and manual/auto command.

Set AUTOCLR=ON, valve check fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated automatically after status
feedback signal is restored.

Set AUTOCLR=OFF, valve check fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated only after panel confirmation
after status feedback signal is restored.

Set IGNORSTA=ON, current output does not judge feedback status and DRIVE is completely
output.

Set IGNORSTA=OFF, current output judges feedback status.

Air Open/ Closed Function

 IVO = OFF: air open

The mode can be used to control air open valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is ON, the air open valve is open. When valid input command is
OFF, i.e. closed command, output is OFF, the air open valve is closed.

 IVO = ON: air closed

The mode can be used to control air closed valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is OFF, the air closed valve is open. When valid input command
is OFF, i.e. closed command, output is ON, the air closed valve is closed.

 Cold Startup

No matter in air open or closed mode, function block outputs OFF when cold starting controller.

331
 Function Block Reference

3.15.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-39 Panel Parameter Instruction

Parameter
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Eliminate the running
alarm by panel or
Alarm Eliminated PACK OFF －
program input signal
PACK.
Output On Enable OPNPRM ON － －
Enable/Disable Off Enable CLSPRM ON － －
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －
3.15.4 Flag
Table 3-40 Flag list

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Close (EMCLSSTA)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto(AUTO)
D7 Disable Power off Alarm (POWOFF)
D8 - -
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Device Open Status (STAOPN)
D12 Disable Device Close Status (STACLS)
D13 - -

332
 Function Block Reference

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D14 Disable Open Command Output Process (OPNPRO)
D15 Disable Close Command Output Process (CLSPRO)
Interlock Open Condition Indication
D16 Disable
(EMOPNCON)
Interlock Close Condition Indication
D17 Disable
(EMCLSCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
D20 Enable (OPNPRM) Open Permission Indication (OPNPRM_B)

D21 Enable (CLSPRM) Close Permission Indication (CLSPRM_B)_

D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)

Null Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD)

Null Enable (ACK) Acknowledge (ACK)
3.15.5 Application Example

To achieve the field-valve start and stop control as shown in Figure 3-30, and can be operated on
flow chart. When valve running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output
are different, generate the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge.

Dual-DI one DO valve refers to that the filed valve device is controlled by one DO signal, the pump
status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks.

Figure 3-30 Dual-DI One DO Valve

Details of program are shown below. It applies DIO-21V function block, and the upper computer
interface can control DO via function block tag.

333
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-31 Program of Dual-DI One DO Valve

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-41 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 KY_1205A DO Output Valve Control

002 KZSO_1205A DI Input Valve Status Feedback

002 KZSC_1205A DI Input Valve Status Feedback

003 KV1205A Function Block Valve Control Function Supervision Tag

Block Tag

Parameter settings of DIO-21V:

 FBOPT: ON

 PSWAM: OFF

 OPFLACK: OFF

 AUTOCLR: ON

 IGNORSTA: OFF

 SAFE_OPT: OFF

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 FAIL (device fault) alarm, when all function block switch status are ON, FAIL output alarm
(FAIL=ON);

 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different with its
output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);

 If SAFE_OPT=ON, OPFL (running fault) alarm generates, and function block DO=OFF.

 When the operation parameter IGNORALM in basic parameter (input shield parameter)
is set as not shield (IGNORALM=OFF); when it is set as shield, FAIL, OPFL do not
generate alarms.

334
 Function Block Reference

Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter

OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.16 Dual-DI Start/Stop Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2M)

DI-2M function block enables dual-DI feedback start/stop valve observe alarm.

DI-2M function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-42 Dual-DI Start/Stop Valve Observe Function Block Parameter List

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

RUNSTA Run Status Feedback TRUE Input Pin Measuring Point DI
Input Pin Stop Status
STOPSTA TRUE Input Pin Measuring Point DI
Feedback
Suppress Module
Alarm
AOF=ON, Do not
Operation
AOF Show Real-Time TRUE －
Parameter
Alarm;
AOF=OFF, Show
Operation Real-Time Alarm
Parameter When SWOOS=ON, function
In OOS Status Operation
SWOOS TRUE block is in OOS status and alarm
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
is not generated.
Device Runtime Operation
TOC TRUE －
(Unit: s) Parameter
Power-Failure Alarm Operation
SWPWF TRUE －
Enable/Disable Parameter
When run status feedback
Monitoring Device Monitoring RUNSTA and stop status
FAIL -
Parameter Fault(ON=Fault) Parameter feedback STOPSTA are both ON,
feedback fault FAIL=ON.
Output Pin FLAG Flag - Output Pin －

If power-failure check is required, when RUNSTA and STOPSTA are both OFF., it is in action
process within the runtime (TOC) and power-failure alarm POWOFF will be generated while it is
out of the runtime (TOC).

335
 Function Block Reference

3.16.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-43 Panel Parameter Instruction

Panel Parameter Name Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －
3.16.3 Flag
Table 3-44 Flag list

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 - -
D4 - -
D5 - -
D6 - -
D7 Disable Power-failure Alarm (POWOFF )
D8 - -
D9 - -
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Device Run Status (STARUN)
D12 Disable Device Stop Status (STASTOP)
D13 - -
D14 - -
D15 - -
D16 - -
D17 - -
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -

336
 Function Block Reference

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D20 - -
D21 - -
Null - -

3.17 Dual-DI Switch Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2V)

DI-2V function block enables dual-DI feedback switch valve observe alarm.

DI-2V function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.17.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-45 Dual-DI Switch Valve Observe Function Block Parameter Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

OPNSTA Open Status Feedback - Input Pin Measuring Point DI
Input Pin
CLSSTA Close Status Feedback - Input Pin Measuring Point DI
Operation
AOF Suppress Module Alarm TRUE -
Parameter
When SWOOS=ON,
In OOS Status Operation function block is in OOS
SWOOS TRUE
Operation (ON=Prohibited) Parameter status and alarm is not
Parameter generated.
Operation
TOC Device Runtime (Unit: s) TRUE -
Parameter
Power-Failure Alarm Operation
SWPWF TRUE -
Enable/Disable Parameter
When open status
feedback OPNSTA and
Monitoring Monitoring close status feedback
FAIL Device Fault(ON=Fault) -
Parameter Parameter CLSSTA are both ON,
feedback fault
FAIL=ON.
Output Pin FLAG Flag - Output Pin -

When OPNSTA and CLSSTA are both OFF, it is in action process within the runtime (TOC) and
power-failure alarm POWOFF will be generated while it is out of the runtime (TOC).

337
 Function Block Reference

3.17.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-46 Panel Parameter Instruction

panel parameter name parameter name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Time of Course(s) TOC 20.0000 － －
3.17.3 Flag
Table 3-47 Flag list

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 - -
D4 - -
D5 - -
D6 - -
D7 Disable Power-failure Alarm (POWOFF )
D8 - -
D9 - -
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Device Open Status (STAOPN)
D12 Disable Device Close Status (STACLS)
D13 - -
D14 - -
D15 - -
D16 - -
D17 - -
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -

338
 Function Block Reference

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D20 - -
D21 - -
Null - -
3.17.4 Application Example

To determine the fault alarm and power-off alarm of a pair input switch valves status.

Switch valve status detection is used to detect whether the valve switch status is normal. This part
focuses on two-input switch valve detect alarm. The alarm content includes fault alarm and
power-off alarm(note: valve running fault alarm is not included).

Via valve control module the running fault detect can be achieved. Details please refer to program
guide of “one DI one DO valve” “dual-DI one DO valve” “dual-DI dual-DO valve”, etc.

Details of program are shown below. It applies DI-2V function block, and the upper computer
interface can achieve valve detect alarm via function block tag.

Figure 3-32 Program of Two Input Valve Detect Program

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-48 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 ZIO_12 DI Input Valve Open Feedback

002 ZIC_12 DI Input Valve Closed Feedback

003 ALM_12 Function Block Function Block Tag of Valve Supervision Tag
Detect Alarm

Parameter settings of DI-2V:

 TOC: 20

 SWPWF: ON

Note: DI-2V is mainly used to achieve valve detect alarm of upper computer (including valve fault
and valve power-off), and may invoke FAIL and POWEROFF from the upper computer to achieve
dynamic alarm.

339
 Function Block Reference

3.18 Interlock Function Block (INTERLOCK)

INTERLOCK function block enables Interlock process.

INTERLOCK function block is complex function block, and its running time is 15µs.

3.18.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-49 Interlock Function Block parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Interlock Switch Program
Input. When the input of PSW
is a positive transmission, then
SW=ON. When the input of Connect to DI/Do or
PSW - Input Pin
PSW is a negative pulse signal.
transmission, then SW=OFF.
Else the input of PSW has no
Input Pin effect to SW.
Interlock Open.
EMOPN The value of OPN is decided - Input Pin Connect to DI/Do
by SW and EMOPN.
Interlock Closed.
EMCLS The value of CLS is decided by - Input Pin Connect to DI/Do
SW and EMCLS.
Can be monitored in
Interlock Output to indicate the
ACT - Output Pin flow of real-time
status of interlock action.
monitoring software.
Interlock Open/Start.
Refer to Table 3-53
The value of 1DO is decided by
Can be monitored in
OPN OPN and CLS. Detail - Output Pin
flow of real-time
information refers to figure
monitoring software.
3-55.
Interlock Close/Stop.
Refer to Table 3-53
The value of 1DO is decided by
Output Pin Can be monitored in
CLS OPN and CLS. Detail - Output Pin
flow of real-time
information refers to figure
monitoring software.
3-55.
Refer to Table 3-54
Digital Interlock Output, detail
1DO - Output Pin Connect to DO.
information refers to figure
3-56.
Refer to Table 3-53
Adjustment Interlock Output,
MV - Output Pin Connect to AO
detail information refers to
figure 3-55.

340
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Function Block Monitoring
SWOOS TRUE -
Enable/Disable(ON=Disable) Parameter
Interlock Switch, and can be
modify manually.
Monitoring
SW When SW=ON, MV can be TRUE -
Monitoring Parameter
modify. When SW=OFF, MV
Parameter will not be modify.
Monitoring
FLAG Flag - -
Parameter
Monitoring
AOF Suppress Module Alarm TRUE -
Parameter
Operation
KOPN Interlock Opening Settings TRUE -
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
KCLS Interlock Closing Settings TRUE -
Parameter
3.18.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-50 Panel Parameter Instruction

parameter
panel parameter name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
name
Open condition EMOPN OFF － －
Close EMCLS OFF － －
Actions ACT OFF － －
Open Output OPN OFF － －
Close Output CLS OFF － －
Opening KOPN 100.0000 － －
Closing KCLS 0.0000 － －
3.18.3 Logic Time Sequencing

When the input of PSW is a positive transmission, then SW=ON.

341
 Function Block Reference

When the input of PSW is a negative transmission, then SW=OFF.

Else the input of PSW has no effect to SW.

The value of OPN is decided by SW and EMOPN.

The value of CLS is decided by SW and EMCLS.

The value of MV is decided by SW, EMOPN and EMCLS.

Table 3-51 Output Logical of MV

Condition Output
SW EMOPN EMCLS OPN CLS MV
ON ON OFF ON OFF =KOPN
ON OFF ON OFF ON =KCLS
ON ON ON ON ON =KCLS
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF MV will hold on.
OFF － － OFF OFF MV will hold on.

The value of 1DO and the value of ACT are both decided by OPN and CLS.

Table 3-52 Output Logical of 1DO and ACT

Condition Output
OPN CLS 1DO ACT
ON OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF Hold OFF
ON ON Hold ON
3.18.4 Flag
Table 3-53 Flag list

Flag Description
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
D8 Alarm Suppression(AOF)

3.19 Digital Setting Function Block (DSET_DI_EP)

DSET_DI_EP function block outputs a BOOL type data, which will be used in downstream function
blocks. Operator can operates it directly. Each function block output can be set as the following
types: hold type, pulse type and flip type.

DSET_DI_EP function block is complex function block, and its running time is 30µs.

342
 Function Block Reference

3.19.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-54 Digital setting function block parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

TV Track Value - Input Pin -
Input Pin
TR Track Switch - Input Pin -
OUT Output Value - Output Pin -
Output Pin
FLAG Flag - Output Pin -
Function Block Operation
SWOOS TRUE -
Enable/Disable(ON=Disable) Parameter
Operation
IN Operation Value - -
Parameter
Operation Operation
AOF Suppress Module Alarm TRUE -
Parameter Parameter
Operation
TP Pulse Time(s) TRUE -
Parameter
0=Hold Type
Operation
MODE 1=Pulse Type TRUE -
Parameter
2=Flip Type
3.19.2 Logic Time Sequencing
 When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status. Algorithm will not be executed and
output can be assigned in debug window.

 When SWOOS=OFF and TR=ON, function block is in track status and output value=TV,

 When SWOOS=OFF and TR=OFF, function block is in auto status and in this case:

Hold Type

OUT=IN;

Pulse Type

If a positive transmission is made in IN, OUT outputs a pulse with lasting time of TP, and IN=OFF
at the same time.

Flip Type

If a positive transmission is made in IN, OUT will be reversed. For example, OUT=OFF after the
positive transmission if OUT turns to ON at first, and IN= OFF at the same time.

343
 Function Block Reference

3.19.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-55 Panel Parameter Instruction

Parameter Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Name Instruction
TV TV OFF － －
OUT TR OFF － －
Hold Type
0=Hold
Mode Pulse Type MODE － －
Type
Flip Type
3.19.4 Flag
Table 3-56 Flag list

Bit Definition Description

1=Function block is in OOS status;
0 OOS
0=Function block is not in OOS status.
1=Function block is in TR status;
1 TR
0=Function block is not in TR status.
1=Function block is in AUTO status;
2 AUTO
0=Function block is not in AUTO status.
In OOS status: 0
3 TV
Not in OOS status: 1: TV=ON; 0:TV=OFF.
In OOS status: 0
4 OUT
Not in OOS status: 1: OUT=ON; 0: OUT=OFF.
1:AOF=ON,
5 AOF
0:AOF=OFF.
In OOS status: 0
6 IN
Not in OOS status: 1: IN=ON; 0: IN=OFF.
Other Bits Undefined -
3.19.5 Example Application

To achieve the field-pump stop pump control as shown in Figure 3-33, and can be operated on

344
 Function Block Reference

flow chart.

One DO strop pump control refers to that the filed pump device is controlled by one DO signal and
only can achieve stop pump control. Pump start is performed in filed or electric room. Pump status
is only used for monitoring and has nothing to do with stop logic. It is often used for the stop pump
control of filed pump.

Figure 3-33 One DO Pump Stop Pump Diagram

Details of program are shown below. It applies DSET_DI_EP function block, and the upper
computer interface can control DO via function block tag.

Figure 3-34 Program of One DO Stop Pump

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-57 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 HS_X1104A DO Output Pump Stop Control
006 X1104A_CON Pump Control Function
Function Block Tag Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of DSET_DI_EP:

Pulse Control:

 TP: 3.000

 MODE:1

Long Signal Control:

 MODE:0

345
 Function Block Reference

3.20 Control Function Block for Single Output (DIO-01V)

DIO-01V function block enables control and interlock protect to single DO output equipment by last
level sequence control command or operator by panel.

DIO-01V function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.20.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-58 Control function block for single output parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Command Input (ON=Open,
PCMD - Input Pin Upstream Output
OFF=Close)
Upstream Interlock
EMOPN Interlock Open Command - Input Pin
Input
Upstream Interlock
EMCLS Interlock Close Command - Input Pin
Input
Input Pin
Program Manual and Auto
PSWAM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Control Digital Input
Manual-automatic Control
FBOPT - Input Pin Upstream Output
Source Switch(OFF=Panel)
OPNPRM Open Permission Signal - Input Pin Upstream Output
CLSPRM Close Permission Signal - Input Pin Upstream Output
Output, reset as OFF when
Output Pin DO - Output Pin Output DO
download offline
OOS Operation
SWOOS In OOS Status TRUE -
SETTINGS Parameter
Manual Command Operation
MCMD - -
(ON=Open, OFF=Close) Parameter
Operation Manual-automatic
Operation
Parameter SWAM Switch(ON=Auto - -
Parameter
OFF=Manual)
Monitoring
MODE Device Mode(Observe) - -
Parameter
Alarm Operation
AOF Shield Module Alarm TRUE -
Enabled and Parameter
Shield FLAG Flag - Output Pin -
Set by the air open
Configurati
Configuratio Output Invert Switch (ON: air and closed
IVO - on
n Parameter closed; OFF: air open) features of
Parameter
controlled valve
3.20.2 Logic Time Sequencing
Function block status

346
 Function Block Reference

Function block status and priority: OOS>interlock>manual /auto selection.

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status. Algorithm will not be executed and output
can be assigned in debug window.

 Interlock(interlock open/interlock close, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock open or interlock close command,
function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive transmission
check.

When both interlock open, interlock close commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock close command is inputted in
effective time of interlock open command, execute interlock open command first and then interlock
close command after interlock open command is over. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM).

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode. Automatic
status output instruction is decided by PCMD and manual status output instruction is by MCMD.

Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.

If interlock open EMOPN is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close command
disables.

If interlock close EMCLS is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open command
disables.

The validity of man/auto command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

 Manual/auto switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

347
 Function Block Reference

Air Open/ Closed Function

 IVO = OFF: air open

The mode can be used to control air open valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is ON, the air open valve is open. When valid input command is
OFF, i.e. closed command, output is OFF, the air open valve is closed.

 IVO = ON: air closed

The mode can be used to control air closed valve. When valid input command is ON, i.e.
open command, output is OFF, the air closed valve is open. When valid input command
is OFF, i.e. closed command, output is ON, the air closed valve is closed.

 Cold Startup

No matter in air open or closed mode, function block outputs OFF when cold starting controller.

3.20.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-59 Panel Parameter Instruction

Panel Parameter Name Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
ON
RUNPRM ON － －
Output Enable
Enable/Disable OFF
STOPRM ON － －
Enable
3.20.4 Flag
Table 3-60 Flag list

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

348
 Function Block Reference

Flag Supervision Assignment Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Close (EMCLSSTA)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto (AUTO)
D7 - -
D8 - -
D9 - -
D10 - -
D11 - -
D12 - -
D13 - -
D14 - -
D15 - -
Interlock Open Condition Indication
D16 Disable
(EMOPNCON)
Interlock Close Condition Indication
D17 Disable
(EMCLSCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
Open Permission Indication
D20 Enable (RUNPRM)
(OPNPRM)
Close Permission Indication
D21 Enable (STOPRM)
(CLSPRM_B)
D22 Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD_B)
Interlock instruction conflict
D24 Disable
(DBEMCMD)
3.20.5 Example Application

To achieve the field-electricmagnetic valve switch control as shown in Figure 3-35, and can be
operated on flow chart.

One DO valve refers to that the filed valve device is controlled by one DO signal and has no
related valve status feedback.

Figure 3-35 One DO Pump Stop Pump Diagram

Details of program are shown below. It applies DIO-01V function block, and the upper computer
interface can control DO via function block tag.

349
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-36 Program of One DO Valve

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-61 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 HY_1201A1 DO Output Valve Switch Control
002 HSV1201A Valve Control Function
Function Block Tag Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of DIO-01:

 FBOPT: ON

 PSWAM: OFF

Note: Note: the settings above can avoid wrong operation for Auto button on the panel. Other
settings should be applied for auto control.

3.21 Digital Interlock Function Block (LOCK16)

LOCK16 function block interlocks 16 channels of input BOOL data so that only one of current 16
corresponding outputs can be output. Block cascade function is also available.

LOCK16 function block is simple function block, and its running time is 15µs.

350
 Function Block Reference

3.21.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-62 Parameter instruction of LOCK16

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Input Cascade Interlock Input

Pin CASLOCK (OFF=Upstream Unlocked, - Input Pin -
ON=Upstream Locked)
ENABLE Interlock Enable - Input Pin -
IN1 Input 1 - Input Pin -
IN2 Input 2 - Input Pin -
IN3 Input 3 - Input Pin -
IN4 Input 4 - Input Pin -
IN5 Input 5 - Input Pin -
IN6 Input 6 - Input Pin -
IN7 Input 7 - Input Pin -
IN8 Input 8 - Input Pin -

351
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN9 Input 9 - Input Pin -
IN10 Input 10 - Input Pin -
IN11 Input 11 - Input Pin -
IN12 Input 12 - Input Pin -
IN13 Input 13 - Input Pin -
IN14 Input 14 - Input Pin -
IN15 Input 15 - Input Pin -
IN16 Input 16 - Input Pin -
Outpu OUT1 Output 1 - Output Pin -
t Pin OUT2 Output 2 - Output Pin -
OUT3 Output 3 - Output Pin -
OUT4 Output 4 - Output Pin -
OUT5 Output 5 - Output Pin -
OUT6 Output 6 - Output Pin -
OUT7 Output 7 - Output Pin -
OUT8 Output 8 - Output Pin -
OUT9 Output 9 - Output Pin -
OUT10 Output 10 - Output Pin -
OUT11 Output 11 - Output Pin -
OUT12 Output 12 - Output Pin -
OUT13 Output 13 - Output Pin -
OUT14 Output 14 - Output Pin -
OUT15 Output 15 - Output Pin -
OUT16 Output 16 - Output Pin -
Output 1 was interlocked
LOCK1 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 2 was interlocked
LOCK2 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 3 was interlocked
LOCK3 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 4 was interlocked
LOCK4 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 5 was interlocked
LOCK5 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 6 was interlocked
LOCK6 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 7 was interlocked
LOCK7 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 8 was interlocked
LOCK8 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 9 was interlocked
LOCK9 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 10 was interlocked
LOCK10 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 11 was interlocked
LOCK11 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 12 was interlocked
LOCK12 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)

352
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output 13 was interlocked
LOCK13 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 14 was interlocked
LOCK14 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 15 was interlocked
LOCK15 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output 16 was interlocked
LOCK16 - Output Pin -
(ON=Locked)
Output Cascade Interlocked
LOCKNEXT (ON=Downstream Block was - Output Pin -
Locked)
NUMIND Current Channel ID - Output Pin -
3.21.2 Logic Time Sequencing
1. Shield interlock function

When shield switch ENABLE=OFF, OUTn=INn, NUMIND=0.

When shield switch ENABLE=ON, digital interlock function is enabled.

2. Digital interlock

When anyone of the 16 channels of input INn=ON, the corresponding output OUTn=ON,
LOCKn=OFF.

If two channels or more are ON at the same time, input would be invalid and the corresponding
output OUTn=OFF.

3. Cascade

When two LOCK16 blocks are cascaded, any channel can be output. The first block has a higher
priority than the follow-up.

LOCKNEXT of the first LOCK16 block is connected to CASLOCK of the next.

3.22 Dual-DI/ Dual-DO Switch Control Function Block (DIO-22V)

This function can achieve the basic control and interlock protection for device of dual-DI feedback
and dual-DO output, and control and operate the single controlled device via sequence control
instruction of higher level or operator by panel.

It is a complex function block with running time of 20μs.

353
 Function Block Reference

3.22.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-63 Parameter instruction of function block

Parameter Parameter Application

Parameter Name Description
Upload Properties Reference
Device Process Operation
TOC TRUE －
Time (s) Parameter
Whether the
running fault
OPFLAC Operation
needs to be TRUE －
K Parameter
acknowledged
(ON= Yes)
Whether the
running fault can
AUTOCL Operation
be eliminated TRUE －
R Parameter
automatically
(ON= Yes)
Basic Mode
Parameter Settings Input Command
IGNORAL Shield Alarm Operation
TRUE －
M (OFF= Not Parameter
Shield)
Output Instruction
IGNORST Ignore Feedback Operation
TRUE －
A (OFF= Not Parameter
Ignore)
Select Output
Safe Mode
SAFE_OP Operation
(OFF= Output not TRUE －
T Parameter
Reset, ON=
Output Reset)
Extended Input Pin Open Status
OPNSTA - Input Pin Test Point DI
Parameter Feedback
Close Status
CLSSTA - Input Pin Test Point DI
Feedback
Program
Command Input
PCMD (ON= Program - Input Pin Upstream Output
Open, OFF=
Program Closed)
Upstream Interlock
EMOPN Interlock Open - Input Pin
Input
Upstream Interlock
EMCLS Interlock Closed - Input Pin
Input
Program
PSWAM Man/Auto Control - Input Pin Upstream Output
Switch
Open Instruction
OPNPRM - Input Pin Upstream Output
Allow Signal

354
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Parameter Application

Parameter Name Description
Upload Properties Reference
Closed
CLSPRM Instruction Allow - Input Pin Upstream Output
Signal
Select Man/Auto
Control Source
FBOPT - Input Pin Upstream Output
(OFF= Panel
Control)
Program Input
PACK - Input Pin Upstream Output
Confirm Signal
Output OPN Open Output - Output Pin Output DO
Pin CLS Closed Output - Output Pin Output DO
Alarm Module Alarm Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enable Shield Parameter
and
Shield FLAG Flag - Output Pin －
Disable Function
OOS Operation
SWOOS Block (ON= TRUE －
Settings Parameter
Disable)
Operation
MOPN Manual Open - －
Parameter
Operation
MCLS Manual Close - -
Parameter
Operatio Man/ Auto Select
n Switch: OFF= Operation
paramet SWAM - －
Manual, ON= Parameter
er Auto
Manual Operation
MACK - －
Acknowledge Parameter
Operation
RST Reset Instruction - -
Parameter
Device Fault Monitoring
FAIL - －
(ON= Fault) Parameter
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL - －
(ON= Fault) Parameter
Device Open
Monitoring
STAOPN Status Indication - －
Parameter
(ON= Open)
Status Device Closed
Monitoring
Indicatio STACLS Status Indication - －
Parameter
n (ON= Closed)
Device Mode Monitoring
MODE - －
(Observe) Parameter
Open Command
OPNFLA Monitoring
Output Process - －
G Parameter
(Observe)
Close Command
Monitoring
CLSFLAG Output Process - －
Parameter
(Observe)

3.22.2 Logic Control

Work Status of Function Block

355
 Function Block Reference

Function block status and priority: OOS> Interlock> Man/Auto

 OOS (MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status, not respond to commands output,
output hold.

 Interlock (Interlock Open, Interlock Close, MODE=4)

When it is not OOS, enters into interlock mode when inputting interlock open/ close
commands. Interlock command input applies up jump check.
If interlock open/ close commands come together, not respond to interlock command,
generate DBEMCMD alarm.
If interlock open command comes first, while in its valid time interlock close command
comes too, perform interlock open first, and perform interlock close as soon as it comes.
If interlock close command comes first, while in its valid time interlock open command
comes too, perform interlock close first, and perform interlock open as soon as it comes.
Validity of interlock command input is limited by open/ close permit (OPNPRM,
CLSPRM), device fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. The running fault limit can be
shielded by OPFLACK, and FAIL and OPFL limits can be shielded by input command
shield alarm IGNORALM.

Attention:

Output OPN＝ON and CLS=OFF when interlock start. Output OPN＝OFF and
CLS=ON when interlock stop.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

When OOS and interlock do not happen, it is in manual /auto mode.

Manual status output instruction is decided by manual command MOPN and MCLS.
MOPN and MCLS parameters track the current output command.
Automatic status output instruction is decided by program command input PCMD. When
PCMD＝ON, output: OPN=ON and CLS=OF. When PCMD＝OFF, output: OPN=OFF
and CLS=ON.
Man/auto command input adopts jump check.
If interlock open EMOPN is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close
command are disabled.

356
 Function Block Reference

If interlock close EMCLS is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open
command disabled.
The validity of man/auto command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM,
CLSPRM), device fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be shielded
by OPFLACK. FAIL and OPFL limit can be shielded by input command shield alarm
IGNORAM.
Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS and interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual /auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Power off Alarm

When it is not outputting instruction and has no running fault, if OPNSTA and CLSSTA are OFF
together, set the power off alarm as POWOFF.

Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault. OPN and CLS
maintain output.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, set running fault alarm OPFL. When
SAFE_OPT=ON, OPN=OFF, CLS=OFF.

When there is OPFL alarm, new command is not effective. And when OPFL alarm is eliminated,
new command input will be valid.

Feedback Fault

When open status feedback OPNSTA and close status feedback CLSSTA are both ON, feedback
fault alarm FAIL will be started.

Alarm Confirmation

Eliminate the running alarm by panel or program input signal PACK.

Shield Alarm

357
 Function Block Reference

Set OPFLACK=OFF, running fault does not need to be confirmed and is not considered as
restricted condition of new command input.

Set OPFLACK=ON, running fault needs to be confirmed and is considered as restricted condition
of new command input and is effective to interlock command and manual/auto command.

Set AUTOCLR=ON, valve check fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated automatically after status
feedback signal is restored.

Set AUTOCLR=OFF, valve check fault alarm OPFL will be eliminated only after panel confirmation
after status feedback signal is restored.

Set IGNORSTA=ON, current output does not judge feedback status and DRIVE is completely
output.

Set IGNORSTA=OFF, current output judges feedback status.

Output Reset
In manual mode, if interlink input command doesn’t exist, reset output via RST. This function can
support valve control of command lock, and reset output to save gas source after feedback
reached.
3.22.3 Panel Parameter

Table 3-64 Panel parameter instruction of DIO-21V

Paramet
Panel Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
er

358
 Function Block Reference

Paramet
Panel Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
er
The running fault can be
Alarm Eliminate PACK OFF － eliminated via “Eliminate
Alarm” on panel.
OPNPR
Open Enable ON － －
Enable Output M
Close Enable CLSPRM ON － －
Runtime (TOC) (s) TOC 20.0000 － －
Reset output command
Reset RST OFF - in manual mode after
feedback reached.

3.22.4 Flag
Table 3-65 Flag

Monitoring
Flag Instruction
Assignment
Enable
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 - -
D2 - -
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Close (EMCLSSTA)
D5 Disable Manual ( (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto (AUTO)
D7 Disable Power off Alarm (POWOFF)
D8 - -
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Device Open Status (STAOPN)
D12 Disable Device Close Status (STACLS)
D13 - -
D14 Disable Open Instruction Output Process (OPNPRO)
D15 Disable Close Instruction Output Process (CLSPRO)
D16 Disable Interlock Open Condition Indication (EMOPNCON)
D17 Disable Interlock Close Condition Indication (EMCLSCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 - -
Enable
D20 Open Permission Indication (OPNPRM_B)
(OPNPRM)
Enable
D21 Close Permission Indication (CLSPRM_B)
(CLSPRM)
D23 Enable (ACK) Acknowledge (ACK)
D24 Disable Interlock Instruction Conflict (DBEMCMD)
D25 Disable Stop Instruction Output Process (STOPRO)

359
Function Block Reference

360
 Function Block Reference

Section 4 Analog Processing Function Block Library

The analog processing function block has totally of 36 function blocks, including eight complicated
function blocks and 28 simple function blocks. As a complicated function blocks, each function
block are the corresponding panel, operating in the monitor screen function block parameters in
the panel. Integral Function Block (INTEGRAL)

4.1 Integral Function Block(INTEGRAL)

Integral function block can make integral action to the input, and used in cumulation calculation.

This function block is a complicated function block, the running time is 30μs.

4.1.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-1 Integral function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Basic GAIN, Achieve
Gain Operation
Parameters GAIN Equivalent TRUE -
Settings Parameter
Coefficient
Value
Output Low Limit Operation
OUTL TRUE Range[INSCL,INSCH
Value Parameter
Output ]
Note2
Limits Value
Output High Limit Operation
OUTH TRUE Range[INSCL,INSCH
Value Parameter
]
Ranges Input High Limit Configuratio
INSCH - -
SettingsNote Value of Range n Parameter
1
Input Low Limit Configuratio
INSCL - -
Value of Range n Parameter
Configuratio
INEU Input Unit - -
n Parameter
Configuratio
OUTEU Output Unit - -
n Parameter
Used for Data
Displayed on
IN Decimal Digits Configuratio
INDLEN - Function Block Panel
[0,5] n Parameter
(Equal to 3 as
Default)

361
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Used for Data
Displayed on
OUT Decimal Digits Configuratio
OUTDLEN - Function Block Panel
[0,5] n Parameter
(Equal to 3 as
Default)
Extended Calculation Input Connect to AI and
IN - Input Pin
Parameters Value function block
Connect the Error
Calculation Input state of previous
INERR Note3 - Input Pin
Value Status module. Can not
connect
Program Reset Connect to digital,
PRST - Input Pin
Switch(ON= Reset) Related RST_OPT
Program Pause Connect to digital,
PHOLD - Input Pin
Switch(ON=Keep) Related HOLD_OPT
Input Pin Select Reset
Control Source
(ON Connect to digital,
RST_OPT - Input Pin
=Program Control, Related PRST/RST
OFF=Panel
Note4
Control)
Select Pause
Control Source
HOLD_OP (ON=Program Related Parameter
- Input Pin
T Control, PHOLD/HOLD
OFF=Panel
Control)Note5
Calculation Output
OUT Note6 - Output Pin Related MODE
Value
Output Pin
Block Alarm,
ERR - Output Pin -
ERR=ON
Function Block
OOS Operation
SWOOS Disable(ON=Disabl TRUE -
Settings Parameter
e)
Panel Retention Operation
HOLD TRUE Related HOLD_OPT
(ON=Keep) Parameter
Panel Reset
Run (ON=Reset), keep
Control ON for a period Operation
RST TRUE Related RST_OPT
after executing Parameter
command, then
reset as OFF
Output Reach High Monitoring
Calculation FINISH -
Limit, FINISH= ON Parameter
Status
Monitor Preceding Reset Operation
OUT_LT TRUE -
Cumulation Value Parameter
Suppress Module
Alarm
Alarm AOF=ON,
Enabled Real-Time Alarm Operation
and AOF TRUE -
Do not Show; Parameter
Suppress AOF=OFF,
Real-Time Alarm
Show

362
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Parameter Alarm
Enable (Set
Operation
ENALM parameter via TRUE -
Parameter
select the “Settings
“or not)
FLAG Flag Code - Output Pin Refer to 4.1.3
Input HH Alarm Operation
INHH TRUE -
Value Parameter
Input High Limit Operation
INH TRUE -
Alarm Value Parameter
Input Alarm Input Low Limit Operation
Settings INL TRUE -
Alarm Value Parameter
Input LL Alarm Operation
INLL TRUE -
Value Parameter
Input Operation
INHYS TRUE -
Hysteresis( 0.0) Parameter
Select Mode:
0=Amplitude Configuration set in
Mode Configuratio
Settings
MODE Limiting, 1=Auto -
n Parameter
the Program
Reset, 2=No Stop Properties
Note7
Cumulation

Note 1: Input High Limit Value must be more or equals to Input Low Limit Value. Otherwise, range
threshold overturn alarm occurs and ERR=ON.

Note 2: Output High Limit Value must be more or equals to Output Low Limit Value. Otherwise,
range threshold overturn alarm occurs and ERR=ON. When integral is less than low limit, the
program forces it to be equal to low limit and restart cumulation from the low limit. When output
value reaches the high limit, FINISH=ON.

Note 3: When INERR=ON surpasses half of times of status of function block, ERR=ON.

Note 4: When integral function block is in restore status, the output value equals to output low limit
and status statistic value will be reset. The priority of restore is higher than that of hold, that is,
restore when restore command occurs in hold status.

Note 5: When integral function block is in hold status, the output value and status statistic value
(run time of function block and time of INERR=ON) remain the same with last week. Only function
block is in neither hold nor restore status, start the cumulation.

Note 6: Output=output value of last period + input * run period * GAIN When cold-starting, do not
restore cumulation value.

Note 7: Users can choose to use integral limit function or not. When MODE=0, it is in integral limit
status mode and output value will be restricted in high limit when it reaches the high limit. When
MODE=1, it is in automatically restore status, output value will restore to the low limit when it
reaches the high limit. When MODE=2, it is in the stop status, cumulation output will continue until
it is overflowed when output value reaches the high limit.

363
 Function Block Reference

4.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Panel Parameter Function Block

Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name Parameter Name
Input HH Alarm Value
Alarm Setting (the option
Limits INHH INHH 100.0000 [INSCL,INSCH]
selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
Input High Limit Alarm
Value Setting (the option
INH INH 90.0000 [INSCL,INSCH]
selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)

364
 Function Block Reference

Panel Parameter Function Block

Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name Parameter Name
Input Low Limit Alarm
Value setting (the option
INL INL 10.0000 [INSCL,INSCH]
selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
Input LL Alarm Value
setting(the option
INLL INLL 0.0000 [INSCL,INSCH]
selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
INHYS INHYS 0.0000 － Input Hysteresis
Output High Limit Value
OUTH OUTH 100.0000 － (the option selected
OUT alarm, otherwise invalid)
Limits Output Low Limit Value
OUTL OUTL 0.0000 － (the option selected
alarm, otherwise invalid)
Camulate
Complete
ENALM ENALM OFF － －
Alarm
Enable
Gain GAIN GAIN 1.0000 － －
HOLD, Read-only, can be set in
2(No Stop
Mode AUTO, MODE － the Function Block
Cumulation)
DEMAND Properties window.
4.1.3 Flag
Table 4-3 Flag list

Flag Code Description Supervising Assign Shield

D0 Tag Disable(OOS) Enable(SWOOS) No
D1 Hold (HOLD) Enable(HOLD) No
D2 Reset (RESET) Enable(RST) No
D3 Finish (FINISH) Disable No
D4 Fault (ERR) Disable No
D5 Input HH Alarm(INHH) Disable Yes
Input High Limit
D6 Disable Yes
Alarm(INH)
D7 Input Low Alarm (INL) Disable Yes
D8 Input LL Alarm (INL) Disable Yes
Output High Alarm
D9 Disable Yes
(OUTH)
Output Low Alarm
D10 Disable Yes
(OUTL)
Alarm High and Low
D11 Limit Reversal Disable No
Alarm(REVALM)
Range High and Low
D12 Limit Reversal Disable No
Alarm(REVSCL)
Config Error
D13 Disable No
(CFGERR)
Alarm Suppression
D14 Enable(AOF) No
(AOF)
D15 Retain - -

365
 Function Block Reference

4.2 Differential Function Block (DIFF)

This function block realizes differential coefficient calculation.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 10μs.

Table 4-4 Differential function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Connect AI and
Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Output Pin OUT Output Value － Output Pin －
Operation
GAIN Gain TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Derivative Time Constant Operation
TD TRUE －
(S) Parameter

4.3 Nonlinear Error Calculation Function Block (DEV)

This function block realizes nonlinear EI calculation. This function block is a simple function block,
the running time is 10μs.

Table 4-5 Nonlinear error calculation function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

IN1 Input Value 1 － Input Pin Connect AI and Function Block
Input Pin
IN2 Input Value 2 － Input Pin Connect AI and Function Block
OUTNote1 EI Output Value － Output Pin －
OUTHALM High AlarmNote2 － Output Pin Associate OUTH
Output Pin Note3
OUTLALM Low Alarm － Output Pin Associate OUTL
Note4 Connect INERR of the next
ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin
module
Operation Operation
K1 Input 1 Gain TRUE －
Parameter Parameter

366
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Operation
K2 Input 2 Gain TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C1 Input 1 Bias TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C2 Input 2 Bias TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
OUTH Output High Limit TRUE
Parameter
Associate OUTHALM
Operation
OUTL Output Low Limit TRUE
Parameter
Associate OUTLALM
Operation
DB Input Deadband TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
ALMHYS Alarm Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter

Note 1: The Output logic of bias is shown as follows.

 EI calculation

 EI=(IN1*K1+C1) - (IN2*K2+C2);

 Output logic

 When EI >= OUTH + DB, OUT = OUTH;

 When DB < EI < OUTH + DB, OUT = EI - DB;
 When -DB <= EI <= DB, OUT = 0.0;
 When OUTL -DB < EI < -DB, OUT = EI + DB;
 When EI <= OUTL - DB, OUT = OUTL.

Note 2: High limit alarm logic is shown as follows

 When EI >= OUTH + DB + ALMHYS, OUTHALM = ON;

 When EI < OUTH + DB -ALMHYS, OUTHALM = OFF;
 When OUTH + DB - ALMHYS <= EI < OUTH + DB + ALMHYS, OUTHALM holds.

Note 3: Low limit alarm logic s shown as follows

 When EI <= OUTL-DB -ALMHYS, OUTLALM = ON;

 When EI> OUTL- DB + ALMHYS, OUTLALM = OFF;
 When OUTL-DB - ALMHYS < EI <= OUTL -DB + ALMHYS, OUTLALM holds.

Note 4: Block alarm is shown as follows

 When high limit alarm or low limit alarm occurs, block alarm ERR = ON.

367
 Function Block Reference

 Input High Limit Value must be more or equals to Input Low Limit Value. Otherwise,
range threshold overturn alarm occurs and ERR=ON.

Figure 4-1 Nonlinear EI calculation function block Algorithm sketch map

4.4 H Limit Alarm Function Block (HIGHMON)

This function block checks one- side high limit alarm and hysteresis judges the alarm. This
function block is a simple function block, the running time is 10μs.

Table 4-6 H limit alarm function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin Connect AI and Function Block
Not
HALM
Output Pin e1 Output Value － Output Pin －

Operation
INH H Limit Value TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
HYS Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter

Note 1: The Output logic is shown as follows.

 When IN >= INH, HALM = ON

 When IN < INH -HYS, HALM=OFF

 When INH - HYS <= IN < INH, HALM holds

368
 Function Block Reference

4.5 L Limit Alarm Function Block (LOWMON)

This function checks one-side low limit alarm and hysteresis judges the alarm. This function block
is a simple function block, the running time is 10μs.

Table 4-2 L limit alarm function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and
Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Output Pin LALMNote1 Output Value － Output Pin －
Operation
INL H Limit Value TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
HYS Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter

Note 1: The Output logic is shown as follows.

 When IN <= INL, LALM = ON

 When IN > INL + HYS, LALM = OFF

 When INL < IN <= INL + HYS, LALM holds

4.6 H/L Limit Delay Alarm Function Block (HLMON)

This function block checks high and low limit alarm of input point and alarm check has functions
like time-lapse and hysteresis. This function block is a simple function block, the running time is
10μs.

Table 4-3 H/L limit delay alarm function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and Function
Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin
Block

Output Pin HALMNote1 High Limit Alarm － Output Pin

Associate SVH,TSH
and HYSH

LALM
Note1
Low Limit Alarm － Output Pin
Associate SVH,TSH
and HYSH

369
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Note2
ALM Alarm － Output Pin －
NOALMNote
2 No Alarm － Output Pin －

Operation
SVH SV High Limit Value TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
SVL SV Low Limit Value TRUE －
Parameter
Ultra-High Limit Delayed Operation
TSH TRUE －
Operation Time, the unit is second Parameter
Parameter Ultra-Low Limit Delayed Operation
TSL TRUE －
Time, the unit is second Parameter
Operation
HYSH High Limit Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
HYSL Low Limit Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter

Note 1: The logic of function block is shown as follows.

 When input value IN surpasses high limit SVH, and the lasting time surpasses TSH, high
limit alarm occurs (HALM=ON);

 When input value IN is less than low limit SVH, and the lasting time surpasses TSL, low
limit alarm occurs (LALM=ON);

 When high limit alarm occurs, it can be reset only when IN is less than SVH-HYSH;

 When low limit alarm occurs, it can be reset only when IN is more than SVL+HYSL.

 Note 2: When high limit alarm or low limit alarm occurs, ALM=ON, NOALM=OFF;
When neither of them occurs, ALM=OFF, NOALM=ON.

4.7 Leading and Hysteresis Function Block (LDLAG)

This function block has functions of first order lag processing, first order lead processing, lead-lag
processing and outputting values changing with set value according to choose switch. Lead mode
can responds to positive or negative jump or both of them. It processes pulse respond to input
value. In tracking mode, output value changes with input value. This function block is a simple
function block, the running time is 15μs.

Table 4-4 Leading and hysteresis function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference

Input Pin Connect AI and

IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block

370
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Tracking
SWTRNote3 － Input Pin OUT Track IN
Switch(ON=Tracking)
Calculation Output Output
Output Pin OUT － －
Value Pin
Lag Time( 0.0) , the Operation
TLAG TRUE －
unit is second Parameter
Operation Leading Time( 0.0) , Operation
Parameter TLED TRUE －
the unit is second Parameter
Operation
GAIN Gain TRUE －
Parameter
Select Mode:
Configurat Configuration set in
Note1 0=First Order Lag,
MODE － ion the Program
1=First Order Leading,
Parameter Properties
2=Lead-Lag
Configuration Pulse Mode: 0=
Parameter Positive
Transition-Sensing, 1= Configurat Configuration set in
IMMODENote2 Negative － ion the Program
Transition-Sensing, 2= Parameter Properties
Positive/Negative
Transition-Sensing

Note 1. The detailed instruction of mode is shown as follows.

 lag mode

 In lag mode:
GAIN
OUT  * IN
 1  TLAGs
 In lag mode, its response graph is shown as follows:

371
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-5 Lead-lag Function Block response curve in lag mode

 Lead mode

 In lead mode:
 OUT = IN * TLEDs/ (1 + TLEDs)
 In lead mode, its response curve is shown as follows:

372
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-6 Lead-lag Function Block response curve in lead mode

 Lead-lag mode

 In lead-lag mode:
GAIN(1  TLEDs)
OUT  * IN
 1  TLAGs
 In lead-lag mode, its respond graph is shown as follows:

373
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-7 Lead-lag Function Block response curve

Note 2. In lead mode, there are three modes to choose: positive jump mode, negative jump mode
and positive/negative jump mode. In positive jump mode, output only responds to positive jump
signal. In negative jump mode, situation is the same. In positive/negative jump mode, output value
changes with the input value.

Note 3. Following mode

Users can transfer the three modes above to tracking mode by SWTR. In tracking mode, output
value changes with tracing value.

Modifying lead time or lag time will influence ascending (descending) curve. Thus, please
modify the time parameters in balanced process.

4.8 Pure Hysteresis Function Block (DED)

Pure lag function block simulates dynamic features of pure lag which is used to transfer delay and
distance rate lag. It has two modes: auto and trace. This function block is a simple function block,
the running time is 29μs.

Table 4-8 Pure hysteresis function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Connect AI and
IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Input Pin OUT Track TV,
TV Tracking Value － Input Pin
associate SWTR
Tracking Selection Switch
SWTR
(ON=Tracking)
－ Input Pin Associate TV
Output Pin OUT Calculation Output Value － Output Pin -
Operation Operation
TDED Pure Lag Time (Unit: S, >=0.0) TRUE －
Parameter Parameter

Note: When function block is in trace mode, pure lag fails and output value changes with tracing
value. When function block switches from trace mode to pure lag mode, implement pure lag
function. After going through pure lag time, current value of output hold will equal input value of
switch.

The precision and control period of function block is relevant to control period and pure lag time.
For example, control period is 50ms, pure lag time is 10s, 10/0.05/32=6.25, and thus the sampling

374
 Function Block Reference

precision of every point is 7*0.05s=0.35s. That is, record once every 7 run periods and cut a
32-digit to save sampling data. If pure lag time is long, then sampling points are sparse and
precision becomes low.

4.9 Deadband Function Block (DB)

When input value changes in set deadband, output 0. This function block is a simple function block,
the running time is 5μs.

Table 4-9 Deadbabd function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and
Input Pin IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Output Pin OUTNote1 Calculation Input Value － Output Pin －
Operation
DB Deadband(0.0) TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
HYS Lag Magnitude(0.0) TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Rise Scale Operation
K1 TRUE －
Coefficient(0.0) Parameter
Decline Scale Operation
K2 TRUE －
Coefficient(0.0) Parameter

Note 1: The logic of Deadband Function Block is shown as follows.

 When inputting IN >= DB, output OUT=IN*K1;

 When inputting IN <= -DB, output OUT = IN * K2.

 When last period output OUT = IN * K1 and DB>IN >= DB - HYS in current period, OUT =
IN * K1;

 When last period output OUT = IN * K2 and DB<IN <= -DB + HYS in current period, OUT
= IN * K2.

 Otherwise, OUT = 0.

375
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-10 Deadband function block operation process

4.10 Steam Compensation Function Block (STMCOMP)

This function block can compensate the density to over heat steam and saturated steam. This
function block is a simple function block, the running time is 31μs.

4.10.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-11 Steam compensation function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and
IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Input Pin Working Press(Unit:
PRESS1 － Input Pin －
Mpa)
Working
TMPRT1 － Input Pin －
Temperature(Unit: °C)
Calculation Output
OUT － Output Pin －
Value
Output Pin
ERRNote2 Block Alarm － Output Pin －
STA Block Alarm Status － Output Pin －
Design Press(Unit: Operation
PRESS0 TRUE －
Mpa) Parameter
Design Operation
TMPRT0 TRUE －
Temperature(Unit: °C) Parameter
Operation
If temperature or
Parameter
pressure exceed
Compensation Bypass Operation compensation range,
BYPASS TRUE
Enable Switch Parameter enable compensation
bypass function and
OUT=IN.
Configuration set in
Configuration Working Mode Configuration
MODENote1 － the Program
Parameter Selection [0~8] Parameter
Properties

376
 Function Block Reference

Tips:

The maximum range of processed over heat steam: temperature (100~800)°C,

pressure(-0.001325~29.898675)MPa.

The maximum range of saturated steam: temperature (0~373.946)°C, pressure

(-0.100325~21.962675)MPa.

  and   1 . Calculate flow signal by following formula:



 FLOW 
1
 0  SIGNAL
 If pressure difference signal is processed, the formula is:

 FLOW   1
 0  SIGNAL
 If flow and density is linear transformation:

 FLOW   1
 0  SIGNAL

Note1: 0 is designed density, SIGNAL is input value and FLOW is output value.

Note2: This function block has nine modes.

 Mode 1 (MODE=0)

Adopt formula OUT  1

 0  IN
 to compensate over heat steam. The input

signal is flow signal of differential pressure flowmeter, and the value got is flow value
after compensation.

 Mode 2 (MODE=2)

 Adopt formula OUT  1 to compensate over heat steam. The input signal
 0  IN
is differential pressure signal or flow signal which be measured by linear orifice or
flow value. This function block can also process over heat steam compensation of
flow (vortex flow) that the flow has directed proportion to density.

 Mode 3 (MODE=3)

Adopt formula OUT  1

 0  IN
 to compensate saturated steam by pressure.

The input signal is flow signal of differential pressure flowmeter and the value got is
flow value after compensation.

377
 Function Block Reference

 Mode 4 (MODE=5)

 Adopt formula OUT  1 to compensate saturated steam by pressure.

 0  IN
The input signal is differential pressure signal or flow signal which be measured by
linear orifice or flow value. This function block can also process saturated steam
compensation of flow (vortex flow) that the flow has directed proportion to density.

 Mode 5 (MODE=6)

 Adopt formula OUT  1 to compensate saturated steam by temperature.

 0  IN
The input signal is flow signal of differential pressure flowmeter and the value got is
flow value after compensation.

 Mode 6 (MODE=8)

 Adopt formula OUT  1 to compensate saturated steam by pressure. The

 0  IN
input signal is differential pressure signal or flow signal which be measured by linear
orifice or flow value. This function block can also process over heat steam
compensation of flow (vortex flow) that the flow has directed proportion to density.

Mode=0, 3, 6 apply same process formula, while check 3 different tables.

Mode=2, 5, 8 apply same process formula, while check 3 different tables.

Note 2: ERR Alarm

 When designed/work pressure exceeds design range, and MODE=1/4/7, ERR is ON,
and STA=1.

 When steam corresponding to designed/work pressure and temperature is not in over

heat zone or surpass design range, and MODE=0/1/2, ERR=ON. When steam
corresponding to designed pressure and temperature is not in over heat zone or surpass
design range, STA=0x2. When steam corresponding to work pressure and temperature
is not in over heat zone or surpass design range, STA=0x4. When both are not in over
heat zone or out of designed range, STA=0x6.

 When the designed/work pressure is out of designed range, and MODE=3/5, ERR=ON.
When the designed pressure is out of designed range, STA=0x2. When the work
pressure is out of designed range, STA=0x4. When both are out of designed range,
STA=0x6.

 When the designed/work temperature is out of designed range, and MODE= 6/8,
ERR=ON. When the designed temperature is out of designed range, STA=0x2. When
the work temperature is out of designed range, STA=0x4. When both are out of designed

378
 Function Block Reference

range, STA=0x6.

4.10.2 Application Example

Refer to 4.30.2 Application Example.

4.11 Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMP)

This function block can compensate approximative ideal gas, and converse it to standard air
pressure (pressure: 0.1013223Mpa, temperature: 20 ).

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 13μs.

Table 4-12 Ideal gas compensation function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and
IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Input Pin Working Pressure(Unit:
PRESS － Input Pin －
Mpa)
Working Temperature(Unit:
TMPRT － Input Pin －
)
OUT Calculation Output Value － Output Pin －
Note2
Output Pin ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin －
STA Alarm Status － Output Pin －
Configurati Configuration set in
Configuration MODENot
Parameter e1 Select Work Mode[0~2] － on the Program
Parameter Properties

Note 1: This function block follows ideal gas balance formula:

P1V1 P0V0

T1 T0

There are 2 modes of this function block, Mode 1 applies to (but not limited to) using a volumetric
flow meter to measure the volume flow, the volume of gas flow is converted to standard conditions;
Mode 2 applies to (but not limited to) using the differential pressure flowmeter to measure the
volume flow, volume flow of the gas conversion to the standard conditions.

The 2 modes are shown below:

 Mode 1(MODE=0)

379
 Function Block Reference

 IN * ( PRESS  0.1013223) * 293.15

OUT 
(TMPRT  273.15) * 0.1013223

 Mode 2 (MODE=1)

( PRESS  0.1013223) * 293.15

OUT  IN *
 (TMPRT  273.15) * 0.1013223

Note 2: When pressure or temperature is out of the range, STA = 1, ERR = ON. When pressure
and temperature and MODE are in the range and when IN<0.0, OUT=0.0, ERR = ON, and STA =
4.

4.12 Limiting Function Block (LIM)

Limit the threshold of input and change rate. This function block is a simple function block, the
running time is 14μs.

Table 4-13 Limiting function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and Function
IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Block
TV Tracking Value － Input Pin Related SWTR
INH High Limit Value TRUE Input Pin －
INL Low Limit Value TRUE Input Pin －
Input Pin Positive Rate Alarm Value
PRIN TRUE Input Pin －
(>=0.0)
Negative Rate Alarm
NRIN TRUE Input Pin －
Value (>=0.0)
Track Selection Switch
SWTR － Input Pin Related TV
(ON=Tracking)
HOLD Keep Switch (ON=Keep) TRUE Input Pin －
Note1
OUT Calculation Output Value － Output Pin －
Note3
ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin －
Note
INHIND
2 High Alarm Indication － Output Pin Related INH
Output
Pin INLINDNote2 Low Alarm Indication － Output Pin Related INL
Positive Rate Alarm
PRININD － Output Pin Related PRIN
Indication
Negative Rate Alarm
NRININD － Output Pin Related NRIN
Indication

380
 Function Block Reference

Note 1: Limit function block has three modes: automation, tracing and holding.

 In tracing mode, all limits are unavailable and all alarm information does not happen.
When it is switched to automatic mode, rate alarm does not happen in first period.

 In holding mode, output value is maintained. Priority: tracking > holding > automation.

 In automatic mode, when output change rate is less than set change rate, output
continues to change with set change rate until it equals to input value. Then it changes
with input value.

Note 2: Output value is in the range of high limit and low limit.

 When OUT>INH, OUT=INH, INHIND=ON;

 When OUT<INL, OUT=INL, INLIND=ON;

 When IN>INH, INHIND=ON;

 When IN<INL, INLIND=ON.

Note 3: In automatic mode, when high limit is less than low limit, output ERR=ON.

4.13 Filter function Block (FILTER)

Filter function block filter processes the input with five filter methods: first order lag filter,
ButterWorth second order filter, moving average value filter, medium value filter and cumulation
average value. Choose filter mode by parameter MODE. This function block is a simple function
block, the running time is 35μs.

4.13.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-14 Filter function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Connect AI and
Input Pin IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
Calculation Output
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Value
Operation Filter Time (>=0.0), the Operation
TI TRUE －
Parameter unit is second Parameter

381
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
In average value filter
Filter Mode: and middle value filter
0=First Order, modes, the input time
Configurati
1=Butterworth, is limited in 1~8.
MODENote1 － on
2=Moving Average, When it overruns, the
Configuration Parameter
3=Mid-Value, filter does not work
Parameter 4=Cumulation Average and output changes
with input value.
Filter Input Number Configurati
NUM with AV Filter and － on －
Mid-Value Filter [1~8] Parameter

Note 1: There are five modes:

 First order lag filter

When MODE=0, it is in first order lag filter mode and OUT  1

 * IN . The respond
1  TIs
curve is shown as follows.

Figure 4-15 First order lag filterresponse curve

 ButterWorth filter

 When MODE=1, it is in ButterWorth filte mode and high frequency interfere is

filtered. OUT  1
* IN , its frequency is 2 / TI rad/s.
1  TIs  (TIs) 2 / 2

 Moving average value filter

 When MODE=2, it is in moving average value filter mode, OUT=

(IN(K)+IN(K-1)+…+IN(K-(N-1)))/N. Users can set sampling period by setting TI. For
example, when TI=1. IN (K) renews the data every one second. When TI is less
than control period, IN (K) renews data with control period as unit.

382
 Function Block Reference

 Middle value filter

 When MODE=3, it is in middle value filter. Sort N input values and dismisses 1/3 big
and small values, and average 1/3 middle values, the result is output value. When
there are less than three input values, take the average value. Its sampling rule is
same with moving average value filter function block. When NUM is not three
multiple, take the integer of NUM/3.

 Cumulation average value filter

 When MODE=4, it is in cumulation average value filter mode to take average value
of input data input once every scan period in certain time. When it is not set time,
output the average value of data in last period of time. The maximum set time is
256*scan period.
SPV
 Output= . SPV is cumulation value of input value in certain time.
TI
4.13.2 Application Example

A water level height measurement device is shown in the figure below. As the water level will
waves with the water level, the filter should be performed for the field gathering signals to reduce
the wave and get the PV. Thus the first order lag filter should be performed for the water level
signal of 4-20mA.

Figure 4-16 Diagram of analog filter

Its FBD programming is shown below and can be achieved by FILTER. Filter function block can
perform filter for input signal and has 5 filter methods: first order lag filter, ButterWorth second
low-pass filter, movement average filter, medium filter and accumulation average filter. The filter
mode can be chosen via the parameter MODE. The filter function of tag table is first order lag filter.

Figure 4-17 Programming of analog filter

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

383
 Function Block Reference

Table 4-7 Function block instruction and example

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 LI_101 AI (Input) Tag of AI Field AI
Tag of Function
002 LI_101A Output Tag Tag Displayed
Block

Parameter settings for FILTER:

 TI: 1s (take the control cycle as unit to update data when TI is less than the system
control cycle)

 MODE: 0

 Parameter settings of PVIEX:

 INSCH: the same as the input tag

 INSCL: the same as the input tag

 INEU: the same as the input tag

 The tag status alarm is transferred by the input tag.

Notice:

1. In application, the signal filter can be performed only when the user agree to.

2. Take the control cycle as unit to update the data when applying the FILTER movement
average filter and TI is less than the system control cycle.

3. When applying FILTER medium filter, take the average value when NUM is less than 3,
take the integer of NUM/3 when NUM is not the multiple of 3.

4. When applying FILTER average filter and medium filter, if NUM is not in the range of 1~8,
filter does not work, and the output is equal to input.

4.14 Statistic Function Block (STAT)

This function block works out cumulation value, average value, maximum and minimum values of
input value in certain period of time.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 11μs.

Table 4-18 Statistic function block parameter instruction

384
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Connect AI and Function
IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Block
Reset Statistics Value
Input Pin RSTNote1 － Input Pin Related MODE
(ON=Reset)
HOLD
Note3 Keeping － Input Pin －

OUT Calculation Output Value － Output Pin －

Output Pin Indication Which Statistics
FINISH － Output Pin －
Has Finished
Operation
TM Statistics Time (>=0.0) TRUE Related SWTM
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
IV Statistics Original Value TRUE When RST=ON,OUT=IV
Parameter
Statistics Mode:
Configurati
MODENo 0=Accumulated Value,
te1 － on Related RST
1=AV, 2=Maximum,
Parameter
3=Minimum
Configuration Statistics Unit: Configurati
Parameter SWTM
Note2 0=Second, 1=Minute, － on Related TM
2=Hour, 3=Day Parameter
Configurati
TM_PT Statistics Parting Time (S) － on －
Parameter

Note 1:

 When restore signal RST=ON, output value is original value IV.

 When restore signal RST=OFF, according to MODE, select following calculation:

 When MODE=0, choose cumulation mode, output OUT (K) = OUT (K-1) + IN (K)*TS.
TS is control period.
 When MODE=1, choose average mode to get average value in certain period of
time started when RST=OFF.
 When MODE=2, choose maximum value mode, and output OUT (K) = MAX (OUT
(K-1), IN (K));
 When MODE=3, choose minimum value mode, and output OUT (K) = MIN (OUT
(K-1), IN (K));
 Note 2: When SWTM=0, statistic time has second as unit; when SWTM=1, minute
as unit; when SWTM=2, hour as unit; and when SWTM=3, day as unit.
 Note 3: When RST=OFF and HOLD=ON, statistic pauses. When HOLD=OFF,
continue the statistic until FINISH=ON.

4.15 Hysteresis Compare Function Block (CMP_LAG)

This function block works compare operation with lag features. It compares input signal and set

385
 Function Block Reference

value and decide output status of this period according to compare result and that of last period.

Main parameters are: REAL type input signal IN, output status OUT, input high limit HL and low
limit LL. This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 35μs.

Table 4-19 Hysteresis compare function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Connect AI and
Input Pin IN Calculation Input Value － Input Pin
Function Block
OUTNote1 Calculation Output Value － Output Pin Related HL, LL
Output Pin Note2
ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin Related HL, LL
Operation
HL Input High Limit TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
LL Input Low Limit TRUE －
Parameter

Note 1: When the output status of last period OUT (n-1)= OFF and IN >= HL, OUT = ON; When IN
<HL, OUT = OFF.

 When the output status of last period OUT (n-1)= ON and IN <= LL, OUT = OFF;
When IN > LL, OUT = ON.

Note 2: When HL<LL, output remains with that of last period and ERR = ON.

4.16 Error Alarm Function Block (DVALM)

Alarm process the difference of two input values. When input1 is bigger than input2, positive error
alarm happens and when it is smaller than input2, negative error alarm happens. Either of alarms
happens, error alarm=ON. This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 4μs.

Table 4-20 Error alarm function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

IN1 Calculation Input Value － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Calculation Input Value － Input Pin －

386
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Note1
ALM Deviation Alarm － Output Pin －
Output Pin PALMNote1 Positive Deviation Alarm － Output Pin Related PDEV
NALMNote1 Negative Deviation Alarm － Output Pin Related NDEV
Positive Deviation Alarm Operation
PDEV TRUE Related PALM
Operation Value (>=0.0) Parameter
Parameter Negative Deviation Alarm Operation
NDEV TRUE Related NALM
Value (>=0.0) Parameter

Note 1: When IN1-IN2>=PDEV, positive error alarm PALM=ON, ALM=ON;

When IN1-IN2<=-NDEV, negative error alarm NALM=ON, ALM=ON.

4.17 Signal Generation Function Block (SGNLGEN)

Generate sine wave, square wave, saw tooth wave, triangle wave, random wave and pulse signal
according to user requirement. This function block is a simple function block, the running time is
45μs.

Table 4-21 Signal generation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin START Begin to Produce Signal － Input Pin －
OUT Calculation Output Value － Output Pin －
Output Pin
ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin －
Operation
HOUTNote1 Output High Limit TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
LOUTNote1 Output Low Limit TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
TCNote2 Cardiaco-Vascular Cycle ( 0.0)) TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
TPW Pulse Width (0.0) TRUE －
Parameter
Mode Selection:
Note 0=Sine Wave, 1=Square Wave, Configurati
Configuration MODE
1 2=Delta Wave, － on －
Parameter
3=Sawtooth Wave, 4=Random Parameter
Wave, 5=Pulse Wave

Note 1: When output high limit is smaller than low limit, HL=LL.

Note 2: When TC is less than 2*control period, TC=2*control period.

387
 Function Block Reference

Note 3: When MODE set has errors, ERR=ON. When START=OFF and MODE=0, OUT=
(HOUT+LOUT)/2.0; Otherwise, OUT=LOUT.

Note 4: Output value is in the limit of HOUT and LOUT. When it is out of range, OUT=HOUT or
OUT=LOUT.

4.18 Water Enthalpy Compensation Function Block (ENTHALPY)

This function block calculates enthalpy of saturated water, steam and overheats Water enthalpy
c.This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 7μs.

Table 4-22 Water enthalpy compensation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
PRESS Input Pressure (Unit: Mpa) － Input Pin －
Input Pin
TMPRT Input Temperature (Unit: ) － Input Pin －
Enthalpy Value Output (Unit:
OUT － Output Pin －
Kj/Kg)
Output Pin
ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin -
STANote2 Alarm Status － Output Pin Related ERR
Configurati
Configuration Note1
MODE Mode Selection [0,4] － on －
Parameter
Parameter

Note1: This function block has five modes.

 Calculate saturated water enthalpy by temperature (MODE=0)

 In this mode, input signal is temperature signal and output value is enthalpy of
saturated water under this temperature. When temperature is out of range of
(0.00~374.15) , ERR=ON.

 Calculate saturated water enthalpy by pressure(MODE=1)

 In this mode, input signal is temperature signal and output value is enthalpy of
saturated water under this pressure. When pressure is out of range of
(0.0010~22.12) MPa, ERR=ON.

 Calculate saturated steam enthalpy by temperature(MODE=2)

388
 Function Block Reference

 In this mode, input signal is temperature signal and output value is enthalpy of
saturated steam under this temperature. When temperature is out of range of
(0.00~374.15) , ERR=ON.

 Calculate saturated steam enthalpy by pressure (MODE=3)

 In this mode, input signal is temperature signal and output value is enthalpy of
saturated steam under this pressure. When pressure is out of range of
(0.0010~22.12) MPa, ERR=ON.

 Calculate enthalpy of overheat according to temperature and pressure(MODE=4)

 In this mode, input signal is temperature and pressure signals and the output value
is enthalpy of overheat steam under this temperature and pressure. When pressure
and temperature are out of rage of (0.10~10.5) MPa and (100~560) respectively,
ERR=ON. When pressure and temperature are not in overheat steam status,
ERR=ON.

When MODE=4 and pressure is in the range of (0.10~10.5) MPa and temperature in (100~560) ,
because scrambling of overheat steam density exits in non -overheat steam area, the five digit is 1,
otherwise, it is 0; when the mode has any error, the forth digit is 1, otherwise, it is 0.

Note 2: When ERR=ON, STA indicates ERR.

 When temperature is low than low limit, then the lowest digit is 1, otherwise, it is 0.

 When temperature is higher than high limit, the first digit is 1, otherwise, it is 0.

 When pressure is lower than low limit, the second digit is1, otherwise, it is 0.

 When pressure is higher than high limit, the third digit is1, otherwise, it is 0.

4.19 Natural Gas Compensation Function Block (GASCOMP)

This function block compensates volume flow and quality flow and measures energy flow. This
function block is a simple function block, the running time is 260μs.

Table 4-23 Natural gas compensation function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

389
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Select Input
Signal Type:
0=Differential
Input Configurati
MOD Pressure Signal,
Signal Type － on －
ENote1 1=Volume Flow
Selection Parameter
Compensating,
2=Mass Flow
Compensating
Operation
CH4 Methane TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C2H6 Ethane TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C3H8 Propane TRUE －
Parameter
C4H1 Operation
2-Methyl-Propane TRUE －
0_i Parameter
C4H1 Operation
N-Butane TRUE －
0_n Parameter
C5H1 Operation
2-Methyl-Propane TRUE －
2_i Parameter
C5H1 Operation
N-Pentane TRUE －
2_n Parameter

Basic C6H1 Operation

N-Hexane TRUE －
Parameters 4 Parameter
C7H1 Operation
N-Heptane TRUE －
6 Parameter
Nature Gas
Component C8H1 Operation
N-Octane TRUE －
SettingNote2 8 Parameter
Operation
N2 Azote TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
H2 Hydrogen TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
O2 Oxygen TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
He Helium TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Ar Argon TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
CO Carbon Monoxide TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
CO2 Carbon Dioxide TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
H2S Hepatic Gas TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
H2O Water TRUE －
Parameter
Extended Input Pin IN Input Signal － Input Pin Connect AI
Parameters
Natural Gas
PRES Pressure with
－ Input Pin －
S Operative Mode
(Unit: Mpa)

390
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Natural Gas
TMPR Temperature with
－ Input Pin －
T Operative Mode
(Unit: )
Volume Flow
(M3/S) With
QVNote Normal
1 － Output Pin Related MODE
Temperature-Pres
sure (20
0.1013223Mpa)
Output Pin QMNot
e1 Mass Flow (Kg/S) － Output Pin Related MODE

QENote Energy Flow

1 － Output Pin Related MODE
(MJ/S)
ERRN Function Block
ote3 － Output Pin －
Illegality Alarm
Iterations Limit for Configurati
Iterative
ITE_Z Calculate － on －
Times
Compressibility Z Parameter
Flow Iterations Limit for Configurati
SWDI
Properties Calculate － on －
STEN
Compressibility Z Parameter
Fluid Isentropic Operation
EXP TRUE －
Index Parameter
Configurati
Natural Gas Molar
MM － on －
Mass (Kg/Kmol)
Parameter
Natural Gas
Configurati
DENS Density in Normal
－ on －
N Temperature-Pres
Parameter
sure (Kg/M^3)
Natural Gas
Configurati
DENS Density in
－ on －
F Operative Mode
Parameter
(Kg/M^3)
Natural Gas
Coefficient of
Configurati
Compressibility in
ZN － on －
Normal
Parameter
Temperature-Pres
sure
Natural Gas
Configurati
Coefficient of
ZF － on －
Compressibility in
Parameter
Operative Mode
Natural Gas
Configurati
GAS_ Number of Value Range
－ on
SUM Components Sum [SUML,SUMH]
Parameter
General
Component Sum Configurati
SUM
General Allow － on －
H
High Limit (%) Parameter
Component Sum Configurati
SUML General Allow － on －
Low Limit (%) Parameter
Runout Operation
C TRUE －
Coefficient Parameter

391
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Dilatancy
Coefficient of
DIST Throttling Element Operation
TRUE －
EN Positive Terminal Parameter
Fetch Pressure
Stoma
Fluid Density of
Throttle Device
ROW Operation
Positive Terminal TRUE －
1 Parameter
Fetch Pressure
Stoma (Kg/M^3)
Flag FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
D_PI Tubing Internal Operation
TRUE －
Pipe PE Conjugate (M) Parameter
Settings D_OR Orifice Plate Operation
TRUE －
IF Conjugate (M) Parameter

Note 1: Output is shown as follows.

1) Differential pressure signal input measure(MODE=0)

 Input required parameters in this mode: mol fraction, TF, PF, D_PIPE, D_ORIF,
ROW1, C, DISTEN (EXP is input if function block processes interior compensation)

1) Quality flow

 Throttling differential pressure measurement is:

C 
 qm  1 d 2 2p1
1  4 4

 q m ----quality flow, kg/s;

 C ----flow efficient;

  ----diameter proportion,   d ;
D

  1 ----Dilatancy coefficient of throttling element positive terminal fetches pressure

stoma;
 d ----diameter of hole in throttling element, m;

 p ----differential pressure signal, Pa;

 1 ----Fluid density of throttling element positive terminal fetches pressure stoma,

kg/m3;
 D ----pipe diameter, m.

392
 Function Block Reference

 In the expression, 6 parameter are classified to actual measurement parameter

[ d , 1 , p ,  (D) ] and statistics parameter [ C ,  1 ].

 real measurement

 d, D----d is squre of flow. It is related with precision and overall precision, also
temperature should be considered.

 1 ----it is in the same position with p . Enhance both precisions of p and 1 .

 p ----it is got by equipments. Its precision is influenced by making craft and install

specification.

 Statistics

 C-Outflow coefficient is regarded as constant in certain range of flow. The actual

flow coefficient is relevant with Reynolds number. When Reynolds number is low,
the outflow coefficient is influenced dramatically. And Reynolds number is relevant
with actual flow. Therefore, outflow coefficient can be regarded constant in certain
range of flow. When flow changes dramatically, outflow coefficient can be corrected
by offline calculation.

 Offline correction of outflow coefficient: Select several typical measuring points qi

in the whole measurement range (0~ qmax ). Calculate Red (i ) of these points

(  is measured fluid viscosity (Pa*s) in work status; D

4q i
according to Red (i) 
D
is piping bore (m) in work status). And then outflow coefficients of each point will be
obtained according to the relation between outflow coefficient and Reynolds
number.

  1 ----Dilatancy coefficient. In the ISO5167,  1  1  (0.41  0.35   4 ) p ;

p1

  1 -expansion coefficient, when differential pressure flowmeter measures gas and

steam, liquid
  --isentropic index
 p1 --absolute hydrostatic of throttling element upriver fetch pressure stoma plane.

393
 Function Block Reference

 p 2 --absolute hydrostatic of throttling element dowenstream fetch pressure stoma

plane

p2
 The formula is applicable when  0.75 . Compensation methods above of the
p1

coefficient are set available. Its relevant coefficient will be input only when
compensation is selected.

2) Volume flow

 Standard volume flow QV in the status of 293.15K, 101.325Kpa can be obtained by

qm
weight flow dividing density in standard status, i.e, v n  ,  n -flow density in
n
standard status. The density can be calculated by absolute static pressure pn, mole
mass of gas Mm, thermodynamic temperature Tn, compression coefficient Zn and

pn M m
general gas constant Ra, i.e., n  .
Tn Z n R a

3) Energy flow

 E n  q m * Hsnm .

 qm -Weighty flow of natural gas;

n 1 Mj
 Hsnm   ( x j * )H j
j 0 M

 x j -mole component of component j;

 M j -mole mass of component j;

 M-mole mass of mixture;

 H j -- Ideal mass thermal power of component j;

5. Volume flow compensation(MODE=1)

 Volume flow compensation transforms volume flow from work condition to standard
status 293.15K, 101.325Kpa. TUF, EMF, VSF measures volume flow which will
compensate to standard volume flow.

394
 Function Block Reference

p f Tn Z n
 Compensation formula v n  v f
p nT f Z f

 Vn, Tn, Pn, Zn----volume flow, absolute temperature, absolute pressure and
condensed coefficient in standard status respectively.
 Vf, Tf, Pf, Zf----volume flow, absolute temperature, absolute pressure and
condensed coefficient in work status respectively.
 Quality flow is transformed from volume flow and density in work status

qm  v f *  f .

 Natural gas energy flow is standard volume flow multiplied with unit standard energy
of real gas which is sum of ingredient and multiple of high position energy.

 E n  v n * Hsnv

 En----energy flow of natural gas, MJ/s;

 Vn----standard volume flow of natural gas, m3/s;
 Hsnv----high position energy of unit standard volume, MJ/m3;
n 1

x
j 0
j * H j [t1 ,V (t 2 , p 2 )]
 Hsnv 
Z mix (t 2 , p 2 )

 x j ----mol fraction of J

 H j [t1 ,V (t 2 , p2 )] ----ideal gas volume energy of j, burning temperaturet1, measuring

temperature t2 and pressure p2;

 Z mix (t 2 , p2 ) ----condensed factors in measuring and comparing condition

 IN is volume flow signal. PF and TF are pressure and temperature in work status.

6. Quality flow compensation(MODE=2)

 Input signal is quality flow and the compensation formula is

p f Tn Z n
 q mn  q mf 
p nT f Z f

 Qmn ----quality flow after compensation

 qmf ----input quality flow signal

395
 Function Block Reference

 Tn, Pn, Zn----absolute temperature, absolute pressure and condensed coefficient in

standard status respectively.
 Tf, Pf, Zf----absolute temperature, absolute pressure and condensed coefficient in
work status respectively.

qm
 Standard volume flow vn is got by formula: v n 
n

 Energy flow QE is got by following formula: E n  q m * Hsnm

 qm ----quality flow of natural gas

 Hsnm----high position energy of unit quality

n 1 Mj
 Hsnm   ( x j * )H j
j 0 M

 x j ----mol fraction of j;

 M j ----mol quality of j;

 M ----mol quality of mixture;

 H j ----ideal quality energy of j;

 IN is quality flow signal and PF, TF are pressure and temperature in work status.

Note 2: The gas ingredients of natural gas should input firs. The value indicates mol fraction, and
the set is 0 when there is no ingredient.

Energy flow measurement adopts state standard GB/T11062-1998. It has restriction to gas
ingredients.

 (CH4)>=0.5;

 (C2H6)<=0.15;

 (N2)<=0.3,

 (CO2)<=0.15;

 And other ingredients should not surpass 0.05.

Note 3: Alarm function

 ALM_GAS, component sum alarm. When the summation of all component is in the range
of [SUML,SUMH](99.995-100.005 by default), ALM_GAS=ON, ERR=ON and stop
calculation until summation is in the range.

396
 Function Block Reference

 ALM_MODE, mode fault alarm. When mode is not 0,1and 2, ALM_MODE=ON,

ERR=ON;

 ALM_ITE, condensed coefficient calculation overrun alarm. When it surpasses set times,
ALM_ITE=ON. ERR=ON;

 ALM_REVSCL, summation threshold overturn alarm. When set SUMH is smaller than
SUMH, generate alarm and block alarm ERR=ON.

4.20 Air Compensation Function Block (ATMCOMP)

The function block is mainly used to implement temperature and pressure compensation for gas
volume measured by float flowmeter, temperature and pressure compensation for volume flow of
wet gas measured by frequency type vortex flowmeter, analogy vortex flowmeter and differential
pressure flowmeter and calculation for volume of dry part of wet gas.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 450μs.

Table 4-24 Air compensation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Input Signal － Input Pin －
Parameters
Gas Temperature
TMPRT1 in the Operating － Input Pin －
Mode (Unit: )
Input Pin Gas Pressure in
PRESS1 the Operating － Input Pin －
Mode (Unit: Mpa)
Relative Humidity
HUMID1 in the Operating － Input Pin －
Mode [[0,1]
Input Signal Type:
0=Frequency Type
Configuratio Vortex Street,
Configuration
n Parameter MODENote1 1=Analog Type － －
Parameter
Vortex Street,
2=Difference
Pressure, 3=Bob
Design
Configuration
TMPRT0 Temperature － －
Parameter
[-25,100]
Design Pressure Configuration
PRESS0 － －
(Unit: Mpa) Parameter

397
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Relative Humidity
Configuration
HUMID0 in the Design － －
Parameter
Status [0,1]
Vortex Street
Flowmeter Meter Configuration
K － －
Coefficient (Unit: Parameter
P/M^3)
Azote Mole Operation
N2 TRUE －
Fraction Parameter
Oxygen Mole Operation
O2 TRUE －
Fraction Parameter
Operation Argon Mole Operation
Parameter Ar TRUE －
Fraction Parameter
Carbon Dioxide Operation
CO2 TRUE －
Mole Fraction Parameter
Water Mole Operation
H2O TRUE －
Fraction Parameter
Output Volume Related
QVNote1 － Output Pin
Fluid (Unit: M^3/H) MODE
Output Volume
Note1 Flow which It is Dry Related
QVG － Output Pin
Part of Wet Gas MODE
Output Pin (Unit: M^3/H)
Related
Function Block
ERRNote2 － Output Pin ITE_LIM,
Illegality Alarm
SUMH, SUM
FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
Extended Restrict Frequency
Parameters for Default
Configuration
ITE_LIM Compressibility － －
Parameter
Iterative
Computation

configuration Allow High Limit of

parameter Each Composition Configuration
SUMH － －
Component Sum Parameter
General (%)
Allow Low Limit of
Each Composition Configuration
SUML － －
Component Sum Parameter
General (%)

Note 1: Output is shown as follows.

1. Frequency output vortex street flowmeter (MODE=0)

1) Calculation of wet gas flow

 In this work mode, when input signal type is frequency vortex street flowmeter,
calculate the volume flow and convert it from the current status to the standard
status (101.325kpa, 20 ).
 The compensation formula is:

398
 Function Block Reference

 f p f Tn Z n
qvn 
K p nT f Z f

 qvn - Volume flow in standard status, m3/h;

 f- Frequency of vortex, pulse amount/h (P/h);

 K-Instrument coefficient of flowmeter, pulse amount/m3;

 p n , p f - Absolute pressure in standard status and work status, (MPa);

 Tn , T f - Thermodynamics temperature in standard status and work status, K;

 Z n , Z f - Gas compression coefficient in standard status and work status;

2) Wet gas flow instruction

 In this mode, IN is frequency signal input of vortex street flowmeter (pulse

amount/h); Input TMPRT1 is pressure in work status; Input PRESS1 is temperature
in work status; Input K is instrument coefficient; QV is output value of volume flow
after compensation;

 K is relevant with size of eddy happen tubing and Strouhal number S r . S r is

relevant with shape of vortex and reynolds number. However, S r can be regarded

as constant in normal work range of instrument.

3) Flow calculation of dry part of wet gas

 The flow of dry part of the wet air is obtained by converting the volume flow from
work status to standard status and then deducting steam pressure.
 The compensation is:

p f   f p sf max Tn Z n f p f   f p sf max Tn Z n
 q vg  q vf      
pn Tf Z f K pn Tf Z f

 qvg - Volume flow of dry part of wet air, Nm3/h;

 qvf - Volume flow of wet air in work status, m3/h;

 f- Output frequency of vortex flowmeter, P/h;

 K-Instrument coefficient of frequency type vortex flowmeter, P/m3;

  f - Relative humidity of wet gas in work status, 0~100%;

399
 Function Block Reference

 psf max - Pressure of saturation steam in work status;

  sf - Steam density in work status, kg/m3;

  sf max - Saturation steam density in work status, kg/m3;

 Tn , p n - Absolute temperature and absolute pressure of gas in standard status;

 T f , p f - Absolute temperature and absolute pressure of gas in work status;

 Z n , Z f - Compression coefficient of gas in standard status and work status;

4) Instruction of dry part flow of wet gas

 When calculate this part flow, it require relative humidity (HUMID 1) in operating
mode.
 Carry-out bit of flow calculation of dry part in wet gas is QVG.

2. analog output vortex street flowmeter(MODE=1)

1) Flow algorithm of wet gas

p f Td Z d
 q vd  q vf
pd T f Z f

 q vd --volume flow in the design mode, m3/h;

 qvf --volume flow in the operative mode, m3/h;

 p d , p f --absolute pressure of design mode or operative mode (MPa);

 Td , T f --thermodynamic temperature of design mode or operative mode (K);

 Z d , Z f --gas compression coefficient of design mode or operating mode.

2) Wet gas flow explain

 Require IN is indication value of volume flow of flowmeter; input temperature of

operating mode to TMPRT1; input pressure of operating mode to PRESS1; QV is
volume flow output value after compensating.

3) Flow algorithm for dry part of wet gas

400
 Function Block Reference

 When operative mode and design mode (temperature, pressure, relative humidity,
coefficient of compressibility) differ, must carry out compensating.
 Compensating algorithm:

p f   f p sf max Td Z d
 q vd  qVf  
p d   d p sd max Tf Z f

 Among:

 qVf --volume flow of gas (meter indication value) in the operative mode.m3/h;

 p f --absolute pressure of gas in the operative mode, (MPa);

 T f --absolute temperature of gas in the operative mode, (K);

  f -- relative humidity of wet gas in operative mode, 0~100%;

 psf max --moist team pressure in operative mode, (MPa);

 pd --absolute pressure of wet air in the design mode, (MPa);

  d --relative humidity of wet air in design mode, 0~100%;

 p sd max --moist team pressure of wet air in design mode. Unit same pd ;

 Td --temperature of wet air in design mode, K;

 Z d --coefficient of compressibility of wet air in design mode.

4) Slow explain for dry part of wet gas

 IN is volume flow indication value of flowmeter; input TMPRT1; input PRESS1; input
HUMID1;
 Set TMPRT0; set PRESS0; set HUMID0;
 QVG is volume flow output value of dry part of wet gas which is calculating gain.

3. Throttling flow meter (MODE =2)

5) Wet gas flow

 When input signal type is throttling flow meter, carry out density compensating for
departure of reality usage and designed operating mode.

401
 Function Block Reference

f
 qd  qf
d

 q f --volume flow of measured gas in operative mode, m3/h;

  f --density of measured gas in operative mode, kg/m3;

  d --density of measured gas in design mode, kg/m3;

 qd --set scale of meter with designed operative mode, it is meter value, m3/h;

6) Explain for flow of wet gas

 IN is volume flow signal of throttling flow meter; input TMPRT1, PRESS1, HUMID1;
 Set HUMID0, TMPRT0, PRESS0.

7) Flow algorithm for dry part of wet gas

p f   f p sf max Z n Tn d
 q vg'  q v     ;
pn Tf Z f f

 q vg' --flow actual value of dry part in wet gas NTP, Nm3/h;

 qv --meter value of volume flow in the wet gas operative mode, m3/h;

  f -- relative humidity in wet gas operative mode, 0~100%;

  d --relative humidity in wet gas design mode, 0~100%;

  d --density in wet gas design mode, kg/m3;

  f --density in wet gas operative mode, kg/m3;

 p f --absolute pressure of gas in operative mode, (MPa);

 T f --absolute temperature of gas in operative mode, (K);

 psf max --moist team pressure in operative mode, (MPa);

 Z n --coefficient of compressibility of wet air in NTP mode;

 Z f --coefficient of compressibility of wet air in operative mode.

402
 Function Block Reference

8) Explain for flow of dry part of wet gas

 IN is volume flow signal of throttling flow meter; input TMPRT1, PRESS1, HUMID1;
 Set HUMID0, TMPRT0, PRESS0.

4. bob flowmeter (MODE=3)

9) Wet gas flow

p f Tn
 q v  q vf 
p nT f

 qv --actual volume flow, Nm3/h;

 qvf --meter showed value, m3/h;

 Tn , p n -- absolute temperature/pressure of gas in NTP;

 T f , p f -- absolute temperature/pressure of gas in operative mode.

10) Explain for wet gas flow

 IN is volume flow signal of bob flowmeter; input TMPRT1, PRESS1.

Note 2: Alarm function

1. Input signal type illegality alarm

 When input signal are not 0, 1, 2, 3, set D5 of flag code to alarm, and set Block
alarm ERR=ON.,
 Alarm with iterative computation of coefficient of compressibility overrun When
calculate coefficient of compressibility, if iterative computation excess ITE_LIM, then
set D6 of flag code to alarm, and set Block alarm ERR=ON.

2. Alarm for air component general overrun

 When all component general of wet gas are not [SUML, SUMH], set D4 bit of flag
code to alarm, and set Block alarm ERR=ON.

3. Alarm for measured temperature overrun

 When measure temperature is not in the -25 ~100 , set D7 bit of flag code to
alarm, and set Block alarm ERR=ON.

4. Alarm for relative humidity overrun in operative mode

403
 Function Block Reference

 If input relative humidity are not [0, a] in operative mode, then set D8 bit of flag code
to alarm, and set Block alarm ERR=ON.

5. Alarm for high and low limit of component general reversal

 If high and low limit of component general of compressed air reversal

(SUMH<SUML), then set D9 bit of flag code, and set Block alarm ERR=ON.

Note 3: Water component content of wet gas ask user supply. Default of each gas component is
gas in the standard dry air. When happen function block ERR alarm (except coefficient of
compressibility iterative computation overrun), inner flow computation is shielded, and output is
held.

4.21 Linearization Function Block (FXY)

The function block can implement processing of two-dimensional broken-line diagram.

This function block is a complicated function block, the running time is 25μs.

4.21.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-25 Linearization function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
st
Basic X Axis X Axes Input 1 Operation
X1Note1 TRUE －
Parameters Coordinate Coordinate Parameter
Setting X Axes Input 2
nd
Operation
X2 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
rd
X Axes Input 3 Operation
X3 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 4th Operation
X4 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 5th Operation
X5 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 6th Operation
X6 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 7th Operation
X7 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 8th Operation
X8 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input 9th Operation
X9 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X10 TRUE －
10th Coordinate Parameter

404
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
X Axes Input Operation
X11 TRUE －
11th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X12 TRUE －
12th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X13 TRUE －
13th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X14 TRUE －
14th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X15 TRUE －
15th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X16 TRUE －
16th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X17 TRUE －
17th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X18 TRUE －
18th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X19 TRUE －
19th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X20 TRUE －
20th Coordinate Parameter
X Axes Input Operation
X21 st TRUE －
21 Coordinate Parameter
st
Y Axis Y Axes Input 1 Operation
Y1 TRUE －
Coordinate Coordinate Parameter
Setting Y Axes Input 2
nd
Operation
Y2 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
rd
Y Axes Input 3 Operation
Y3 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 4th Operation
Y4 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 5th Operation
Y5 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 6th Operation
Y6 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 7th Operation
Y7 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 8th Operation
Y8 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input 9th Operation
Y9 TRUE －
Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y10 TRUE －
10th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y11 TRUE －
11th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y12 TRUE －
12th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y13 TRUE －
13th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y14 TRUE －
14th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y15 TRUE －
15th Coordinate Parameter

405
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Y Axes Input Operation
Y16 TRUE －
16th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y17 TRUE －
17th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y18 TRUE －
18th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y19 TRUE －
19th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y20 TRUE －
20th Coordinate Parameter
Y Axes Input Operation
Y21 st TRUE －
21 Coordinate Parameter
Not
Segment SEGUSE Used Operation
e3 TRUE －
Settings Segment[1,20] Parameter
Configurati
Input Range
INSCH － on －
High Value
Parameter
Configurati
Input Range
INSCL － on －
Low Value
Parameter
Configurati
Output Range
OUTSCH － on -
High Value
Parameter
Configurati
Output Range
OUTSCL － on -
Low Value
Parameter
Used for Data
Range Configurati Displayed on
Settings Input Decimal
INDLEN － on Function Block
Digits[0,5]
Parameter Panel (Equal to
3 as Default)
Input Configurati
INEU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Output Configurati
OUTEU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Used for Data
Output Configurati Displayed on
OUTDLEN Engineering － on Function Block
Unit[0,5] Parameter Panel (Equal to
3 as Default)
Extended Input Pin IN Input Variable － Input Pin －
Parameters Note2
OUT Output Variable － Output Pin Related MODE
Note1
Output Pin ERR Block Alarm － Output Pin －
Function Block
STA － Output Pin －
Status
OFF=Incline
Operation
Mode settings MODE Mode TRUE －
Parameter
ON=Jump Mode
Status Is OOS Operation
OOS settings SWOOS TRUE －
(ON= Forbid) Parameter

406
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Suppress
Module Alarm
AOF=ON,
Real-Time
Alarm Operation
AOF Alarm Do not TRUE －
Enabled and Parameter
Show;
Suppress AOF=OFF,
Real-Time
Alarm Show
FLAG Flag Code - Output Pin Refer to 4.21.3

Note 1: Input X coordinate value X1 and X2 must put in order from small to large. Otherwise bring
ERR (ERR=ON) alarm. STAindicate low-bit of arrange error.

Note 2: The program first judge segment number of IN which in X axes 20th coordinate, then carry
out interpolating calculation.

 If IN is value between X[i] and X [i+1]:

 Y [i  1]  Y [i ]
OUT  Y [i]  ( IN  X [i ]) *
X [i  1]  X [i ]
 If IN<X1, then output Y1; if IN>X21, then output Y21.
 If IN=X[i], then OUT=Y[i].

Note 3: The amount of interval segment can be configured, allowed range is 1~20. Parameter
illegality detecting is only used in the segment.

407
 Function Block Reference

4.21.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-26 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function Block
Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name
X,Y(1-16) Parameter SEGUSE SEGUSE 1 [1,20] Seguse of Broken Line
Read-only, can be set in the
Function Block Properties
STA STA 0 －
window or in the program
settings
Set MODE = OFF in the
Function Block Properties
Ramp MODE Selected － window, select the "Ramp"
slope or function block panel
button settings

408
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name
MODE = ON is set in the
Function Block Properties
Not
Jump MODE － window set for the transition
selected
or "Jump" button is selected
in the function panel
Not be set when the set box
set gray. Can be set to the
X-axis coordinate number
and the number of
X1 X1 0.0000 －
segments, if the number of
segments is set to N, you
can set the X-axis
coordinate for N +1
X2 X2 1.0000 － With X1
X3 X3 0.0000 － With X1
X4 X4 0.0000 － With X1
X5 X5 0.0000 － With X1
X6 X6 0.0000 － With X1
X7 X7 0.0000 － With X1
X8 X8 0.0000 － With X1
Y-axis coordinates can be
set, but the entry into force
of the Y-axis coordinate
number and the number of
Y1 Y1 0.0000 －
segments, if the number of
segments is set to N, the
entry into force of the Y-axis
coordinate for N +1
Y2 Y2 0.0000 － With Y1
Y3 Y3 0.0000 － With Y1
Y4 Y4 0.0000 － With Y1
Y5 Y5 0.0000 － With Y1
Y6 Y6 0.0000 － With Y1
Y7 Y7 0.0000 － With Y1
Y8 Y8 0.0000 － With Y1
X9 X9 0.0000 － With X1
X10 X10 0.0000 － With X1
X11 X11 0.0000 － With X1
X12 X12 0.0000 － With X1
X13 X13 0.0000 － With X1
X14 X14 0.0000 － With X1
X15 X15 0.0000 － With X1
X16 X16 0.0000 － With X1
Y9 Y9 0.0000 － With Y1
Y10 Y10 0.0000 － With Y1
Y11 Y11 0.0000 － With Y1
Y12 Y12 0.0000 － With Y1

409
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name
Y13 Y13 0.0000 － With Y1
Y14 Y14 0.0000 － With Y1
Y15 Y15 0.0000 － With Y1
Y16 Y16 0.0000 － With Y1
X17 X17 0.0000 － With X1
X18 X18 0.0000 － With X1
X19 X19 0.0000 － With X1
X20 X20 0.0000 － With X1
X21 X21 0.0000 － With X1
X,Y(17-21) Y17 Y17 0.0000 － With Y1
Y18 Y18 0.0000 － With Y1
Y19 Y19 0.0000 － With Y1
Y20 Y20 0.0000 － With Y1
Y21 Y21 0.0000 － With Y1

4.21.3 Flag
Table 4-27 Flag List

Flag code Supervising assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Config Error (CFGERR)
D2 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
4.21.4 Application Example

The densities of saturated steam and saturated water will change a lot with the modification of
drum pressure, thus the pressure compensation should be performed to the drum water level.
Water measuring methods include single-room balance vessel measurement and double-room
balance vessel measurement, the former is used more often, and this part takes it as an example.

The FBD program is shown below.

410
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-28 Steam Flow Compensation Program

FIX function block parameter settings (set in the function block properties interface).

 X : drum pressure of saturated water.

 Y: drum pressure of saturated steam, density broken line table.

 THRSELX function block parameter settings (set in the function block properties
interface).

 MODE: 3, use the medium value.

4.22 Indication Function Block (PVI)

This function block can display signals from I/O and other function blocks and has functions of rate
alarm and error alarm.

This function block is a Complicated function block, the running time is 30μs.

4.22.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-29 Indication function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

When range high limit is less
Basic Range Input
Configuration than high limit, generate
Parameters Settings INSCH Range －
Parameter range threshold overturn
High Limit
alarm.

411
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input
Configuration
INSCL Range － Ditto
Parameter
Low Limit
Configuration
INEU Input Unit － －
Parameter
Decimal Used for Data Displayed on
Configuration
DLEN Digits － Function Block Panel (Equal
Parameter
[0,5] to 3 as Default)
Extended Connect to AI and function
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Parameters block
Whether
Disable
OOS Function Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
Settings Block Parameter
(ON=Disa
ble)
Error
Monitoring
Indicatio EI Deviation － －
Parameter
n
Positive
AlarmNote PRININ Rate Monitoring The functional block name
1 Note2 －
D Alarm Parameter displayed in the flowchart.
Indication
Negative
NRININ Rate Monitoring The functional block name
Note2 －
D Alarm Parameter displayed in the flowchart.
Indication
Positive
PDEVIN Deviation Monitoring
Note3 － －
D Alarm Parameter
Indication
Negative
NDEVIN Deviation Monitoring
Note3 － －
D Alarm Parameter
Indication
Input
Alarm Can be set in the function
Monitoring
HHHIND Indication － panel
rd Parameter
of 3 High
Limit
Input HH
Monitoring
HHIND Alarm －
Parameter
Indication
Input High
Limit Monitoring
HIND －
Alarm Parameter
Indication
Input Low
Limit Monitoring
LIND －
Alarm Parameter
Indication
Input LL
Monitoring
LLIND Alarm －
Parameter
Indication

412
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input
Alarm
Monitoring
LLLIND Indication －
Parameter
of 3rd Low
Limit.
Suppress
Module
Alarm
AOF=ON
Real-Time
Alarm Alarm No Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enabled Shown Parameter
and AOF=OF
Suppres F
s Real-Time
Alarm
Shown
Enable Operation
ENALM TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin Refer to 4.22.3
Setting Operation
SV SV TRUE －
Value Parameter
Input 3rd
Alarm High Limit Operation
Limits INHHH TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Value
Input HH
Operation
INHH Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Value
Input High
Limit Operation
INH TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Value
Input Low
Limit Operation
INL TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Value
Input LL
Limit Operation
INLL TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Value
Input 3rd
Low Limit Operation
INLLL TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Value
Alarm
Operation
INHYS HYS TRUE －
Parameter
(>=0.0)
Positive
Rate
Operation
PRIN Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Value
(>=0.0)
Negative
Rate
Operation
NRIN Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Value
(>=0.0)

413
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Positive
Deviation
Operation
PDEV Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Value
(>=0.0)
Negative
Deviation
Operation
NDEV Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Value
(>=0.0)

Note 1: High high high limit happens and the relationship of input and alarm is shown as follows:

Figure 4-30 indicate function block input alarm process sign

Note 2: Rate alarm

 This function block has indication function of rate alarm; when positive change
rate>=PRIN, generate positive rate alarm; when negative change rate>=NRIN,
generate negative rate alarm.

Note 3: Error alarm

414
 Function Block Reference

 This function block has error alarm function; when input value is bigger than SV and
error absolute value >=positive error alarm, generate positive error alarm; when
input value is smaller than SV and error absolute value >=negative error alarm,
generate negative error alarm.

Table 4-31 Indication function block flag list

Flag Code Explain Allow Shield

D0 OOS, Disable no
D1 HHH, 3rd High Limit Alarm yes
D2 HH, High-High Limit Alarm yes
D3 H, High Limit Alarm yes
D4 L, Low Limit Alarm yes
D5 LL, Low-Low Limit Alarm yes
D6 LLL, 3rd Low Limit Alarm yes
D7 PRIN, Positive Rate Alarm yes
D8 NRIN, Negative Rate Alarm yes
D9 PDEV, Positive Deviation Alarm yes
D10 NDEV, Negative Deviation Alarm yes
REVALM, Alarm High/Low Limit
D11 no
Reversal
REVSCL, Range High/Low Limit
D12 no
Reversal
D13~D15 Retain

415
 Function Block Reference

4.22.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-32 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Alarm Input HHH Alarm Value (the
Preference 100.00
Limits HHH INHHH [INSCH,INSCL] option selected alarm, otherwise
00
(%) invalid)
Input HH Alarm Value (the option
95.000
HH INHH [INSCH,INSCL] selected alarm, otherwise
0
invalid)
Input H Alarm Value (the option
90.000
H INH [INSCH,INSCL] selected alarm, otherwise
0
invalid)

416
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Read-only, can be set in the
Function Block Properties
HYS INHYS 0.0000 Not less than0
window or in the program
settings
Input L Alarm Value (the option
10.000
L INL [INSCH,INSCL] selected alarm, otherwise
0
invalid)
Input LL Alarm Value (the option
LL INLL 5.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] selected alarm, otherwise
invalid)
Input LLL Alarm Value (the
LLL INLL 0.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] option selected alarm, otherwise
invalid)
Positive Deviation Alarm Value
PDE 100.00
PDEV Not less than0 (the option selected alarm,
V 00
EI otherwise invalid)
Alarm Negative Rate Alarm Value (the
NDE 100.00
(%) NDEV Not less than0 option selected alarm, otherwise
V 00
invalid)
EI EI 0.0000 － －
Positive Rate Alarm Value (the
PRI 100.00
Veloci PRIN Not less than0 option selected alarm, otherwise
N 00
ty invalid)
Alarm Negative Rate Alarm Value (the
(%) NRI 100.00
NRIN Not less than0 option selected alarm, otherwise
N 00
invalid)
4.22.3 Flag
Table 4-33 Flag list

Flag code Supervising assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable HHH Alarm (HHH)
D2 Disable HH Alarm (HH)
D3 Disable High-Limit Alarm (H)
D4 Disable Low- Limit Alarm (L)
D5 Disable LL Alarm (LL)
D6 Disable LLL Alarm (LLL)
D7 Disable Positive Rate Alarm (PRIN)
D8 Disable Negative Rate Alarm (NRIN)
D9 Disable Positive Deviation Alarm (PDEV)
D10 Disable Negative Deviation Alarm (NDEV)
D11 Disable Alarm High/Low Limit Reversal (REVALM)
D12 Disable Range High/Low Limit Alarm (REVSCL)
D13 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

4.23 Segment Signal Generate Function Block (CURVE)

This function block curve outputs values by time and changes with set value of time sequence

417
 Function Block Reference

program.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 20μs.

Table 4-34 Segment signal generate function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Operation
T0 Time Dot 0 TRUE －
Parameters Parameter
Operation
T1 Time Dot 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T2 Time Dot 2 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T3 Time Dot 3 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T4 Time Dot 4 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T5 Time Dot 5 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Time T6 Time Dot 6 TRUE －
Parameter
Point
Settings Operation
T7 Time Dot 7 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T8 Time Dot 8 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T9 Time Dot 9 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T10 Time Dot 10 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T11 Time Dot 11 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T12 Time Dot 12 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
T13 Time Dot 13 TRUE －
Parameter
Output Operation
Y0 Output Value 0 TRUE －
Value Parameter
Settings Operation
Y1 Output Value 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y2 Output Value 2 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y3 Output Value 3 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y4 Output Value 4 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y5 Output Value 5 TRUE －
Parameter

418
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Operation
Y6 Output Value 6 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y7 Output Value 7 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y8 Output Value 8 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
Y9 Output Value 9 TRUE －
Parameter
Output Value Operation
Y10 TRUE －
10 Parameter
Output Value Operation
Y11 TRUE －
11 Parameter
Output Value Operation
Y12 TRUE －
12 Parameter
Output Value Operation
Y13 TRUE －
13 Parameter
Segment SEGU Used Segment Operation
－ －
Settings SE Number [1,13] Parameter
CASI
Cascade Input － Input Pin Related SEGUSE
NNote3
Cascade Input
CASN
Segment － Input Pin －
UM
Number
Cascade
Input Pin
CAST Tracking
－ Input Pin －
R (OFF=Tracking
)
HOLD
Note2 Maintain － Input Pin －

RST Reset － Input Pin －

OUTN
ote1 Output Value － Output Pin Related RST
Extended
Parameters Present
PNU
Segment － Output Pin －
M
Number

Output FINIS
End Symbol － Output Pin －
Pin H
Indicate
Present
PEND － Output Pin －
Segment
Reach
N
ERR
ote4 Block Alarm － Output Pin Related T0-T13

End
End Mode:
Mode MOD Configuration
OFF=Retention － －
Settings ENote5 Parameter
; ON=Reset

Note 1: RST relationship with OUT as follows.

 When RST=ON, output value OUT restore to original valueY0, PNUM=CASNUM,

PEND=OFF, FINISH=OFF;

419
 Function Block Reference

 When RST = OFF, output value OUT starts from Y0 and changes to Y1 in T1-T0 in
slope; PEND outputs a pulse signal, PNUM=CASNUM + 1; then changes to Y2 in
T2-T1 in slope, PNUM = CASNUM +2; at last changes to Y13, PNUM = CASNUM +
13, FINISH = ON.

Note 2: The hold functions as follows.

 In outputting but not restoring period, HOLD=ON, and output is maintained and
interior timing pauses; HOLD=OFF, output changes with former rule.

Note 3: The Trip functions as follows.

 When more than thirteen interval segment are required, adopt two function blocks
trip mode.
 Upriver function block PNUM inputs to lower function block CASNUM;
 Upriver function block FINISH inputs to lower function block CASTR;
 Upriver function block OUT inputs to lower function block CASIN; same set is
required in upriver function block [T13,Y13] and lower function block [T0,Y0].
 Through SEGUSE parameters configuration setting the used segues. For example
SEGUSE=5, use the front five interzone segues.

Note 4: In the amount of SEGUSE set interval segment, if time axes is not sorted from small to big,
generate alarm.

Note 5: The end mode as follows

 When MODE=OFF, output value maintains after the end of interval is output.
 When MODE=ON, output value restores to Y[0] after the end of interval is output.
 When the amount of interval segment is changed, restore and restart.

4.24 Text Calculation Function Block (CALC)

This function processes simple operation. In "content” of text calculation function block, take
mathematical and logic operation to function block. It supports ST language and function.

The width of line should be restricted to 50 and the amount of lines should be restricted to 1000.
This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 5μs.

420
 Function Block Reference

4.24.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-35 Text calculation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
User-defined
REAL1 － Input Pin －
Floating-point Date
User-defined
REAL2 － Input Pin －
Floating-point Date
Input Pin
User-defined
REAL3 － Input Pin －
Floating-point Date
User-defined
REAL4 － Input Pin －
Floating-point Date
User-defined Boolean Operation
BOOL1 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Boolean Operation
BOOL2 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Boolean Operation
BOOL3 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Boolean Operation
BOOL4 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Integral Operation
INT1 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Integral Operation
INT2 TRUE －
Operation Date Parameter
Parameter User-defined Integral Operation
INT3 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Integral Operation
INT4 TRUE －
Date Parameter
User-defined Operation
REAL5 TRUE －
Floating-point Date Parameter
User-defined Operation
REAL6 TRUE －
Floating-point Date Parameter
User-defined Operation
REAL7 TRUE －
Floating-point Date Parameter
User-defined Operation
REAL8 TRUE －
Floating-point Date Parameter
Output
N User-defined
Parameter REAL9 － Output Pin －
ote1 Floating-point Date

Note 1: The Input Pins, operation parameters and output parameters should be used to variables
on program. For example, when BOOL1＝ON, REAL9=REAL1+REAL5; when BOOL1=OFF,
REAL9=0, the program is show as follow.

421
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-36 Example of CALC function block

Tip:

Adjust the window size by dragging.

4.24.2 Application Example

Example 1

 To achieve the pressure drop of ATR burner nozzle, to figure out a normalized
pressure drop and a low alarm PDAL-67019 (0.15 MPa) to show that the ART buner
nozzle is not operated basing on the design parameter and to monitor mechanical
integrity of mixture between ART buner nozzle and the oxygen and air.
 The formula is:
2
 6298   O 2 inlet P  0.0969   273  230 
Normalised dP  Measured dP         
  Measured O 2 flowrate   2.79   273  O 2 inlet T 

422
 Function Block Reference

 Normalized dP = MPa (PY-67018A)

 Measured dP = MPa (PY-67018B.PV)
 Measured O2 flowrate = kNm³/h (FIC-67021.PV)
 O2 inlet Pressure = MPa (g) (PI-67018.PV)
 O2 inlet T = °C (TIC-67015.PV)
 As the example shows that when the modules of DCS system cannot meet the
requirements for signal process directly, or the measuring device factory has
provided the compensation calculation formula, such as the wind rate and natural
gas flowrate of boiler device, the provided calculation sheet should be applied and
module CALC can be used for formula calculation.
 Its programming can be achieved via CALC, as shown below. CALC is used for the
experience formula calculation, and its inner algorithm can be customized based on
the compensation formula. PVIEX can achieve the functions such as output result
display and alarm process.

Figure 4-37 Programming of CALC

The instruction of function block and examples are shown below.

Table 4-8 Function block instruction and example

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 PY_67018B AI (Input) Input Signal 1

002 FIC_67021 AI (Input) Input Signal 2

003 PT_67018 AI (Input) Input Signal 3

004 TIC_67015 AI (Input) Input Signal 4

005 PY_67018A Custom REAL Output Signal

Parameter settings of PVIEX:

 INSCH: set when needed

 INSCL: set when needed

423
 Function Block Reference

 INEU: set when needed

 Alarm Enabled: set when needed

 Alarm Limit: set when needed

Parameter settings of CALC:

The inner parameter programming is shown below.

Figure 4-38 Programming of CALC

Example 2

 To gather and show a temperature signal of 4-20mA and alarm generated when the
change rate is higher than 5℃ in 1s. Analog rate change alarm is used when the
curve is required for temperature control, and the error alarm is used when the error
alarm is needed for the monitor measuring point. Functions such as small-signal
excision, filter, linear transition, H/L limit alarm, output hold, velocity alarm, SV alarm
and break point alarm (which cannot be used for straight line), etc. can be achieved
via PVIEX.

424
 Function Block Reference

 Its programming is shown below. The general AI tag can invoke I/O tag directly, and
the monitoring display and velocity change alarm of host computer can be achieved
by the channel properties settings of the tag.
 PVIEX can be used when the display and change rate alarm of the temperature
signal after calculation process is required.

Figure 4-39 Programming of analog rate change alarm

The instruction of function block and examples:

Table 4-9 General tag instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_001 AI (Input) Field Temperature Signal

Table 4-10 Calculated value

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_001 AI (Input) Field Temperature Signal
Tag of Function Calculated Temperature
002 TI_001
Block value

Parameter settings of general tag:

 Tag Running Cycle: 1000ms

 Change Rate Alarm: enabled

 Change Rate Alarm Value: 5

Parameter settings of PVIEX:

 M: 5

 N: 1

 Cycle of program page: 200ms (data sampling cycle TS=M*program page running
cycle; velocity detect cycle TC=N*data sampling cycle TS)

 PRIN: 5

 NRIN: 5

425
 Function Block Reference

4.25 Text Logic Calculation Function Block(ACTION)

This function block through alias manner access or modify dates, the dates is other functions”.
This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 5μs.

Table 4-40 Text logic calculation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
IN_D(IN_D＝
Input Pin Input Pin － Input Pin －
ON,effective)

The setting method is shown as follows.

1. In "Alias List” of ACTION function block, announce the tag of programming, and modify the
function name in the ”name” page. For example, reference the VALVE, PD_SI and
MANUAL function blocks, the VALVE is named VALVE 1, the PD_SI is named PD_SI1,
and MANUAL is named MANUAL1, which are shown as follows.

Figure 4-41 Excerpt the tag by alias manner

426
 Function Block Reference

Tip:

The tag can be excerpted after aliasing, and it can be excerpted 200 at most, and
supports global function block.

2. Parameters conforming to the parameter naming rules can be set in “Custom Parameter”
tab. The name should be started by letter, and contain letters, numbers and underline.
Other characters are illegal. If the names of new parameter and alias in custom
parameter list or “Alias List” are repeated, a prompt of repeated name will pop up and
create new parameter failed. Custom parameter cannot be input/ output pins.

Figure 4-42 Custom parameter

3. In "Content” of ACTION function block, compile ST code and write the tag (comprise the
function block) parameters. Excerpt the tag through the “alias.parameter” manner.

 For example, when BOOL1＝ON, REAL9=REAL1+REAL5; when BOOL1=OFF,

REAL9=0, the program is show as follows.
 For example, achieve VALVEEX1.OUT= VALVE1.OUT+2, it is shown as follows.

427
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-43 Example of ACTION function block

Tips:

 In "content” of ACTION function block, it supports program helper and displays

the key words, alias, member.

 The width of line should be restricted to 50 and the amount of lines should be
restricted to 1000.

 Adjust the window size by dragging.

The function block supports creating custom parameters of float, integer (6 types) and BOOL, and
perform ST coding via parameter, and achieve control logic.
The function block supports array set by controller, such as float, integer, BOOL, and supports
timer set by controller, such as minute, second and 100 milliseconds.

4.26 Extended Indicator Function Block (PVIEX)

This block can execute linear conversion for the input data, low cutting, filter calculation, rate alarm,
error alarm, high and low limit alarm, output holding, etc.

This function block is a Complicated function block, the running time is 50μs.

428
 Function Block Reference

4.26.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-44 Extended indicator functional block instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

When range high limit is
INSC Input Configuration less than high limit,
－
H maximum Parameter generate range threshold
overturn alarm.
INSC Input span Configuration
Basic Range － Ditto
L minimum Parameter
Parameters Settings
Configuration
INEU Input unit － －
Parameter
Used for Data Displayed
Decimal Configuration
DLEN － on Function Block Panel
digits[0,5] Parameter
(Equal to 3 as Default)
Extended Original Connect to AI and function
IN － Input Pin
Parameters input value block
Input Pin Raw input
INER
signal － Input Pin －
R
quality
Compensat
PV ion output － Output Pin －
value

Output General
Pin ALM alarm － Output Pin －
output
General
NOAL
normal － Output Pin －
M
output
Turning
Alarm Monitoring
FLEX Point Alarm － －
Parameter
indication
Positive
PRINI Monitoring
rate alarm － －
ND Parameter
indication
Negative
NRINI Monitoring
rate alarm － －
ND Parameter
indication
Positive
PDEV deviation Monitoring
－ －
IND alarm Parameter
indication
Negative
NDEV deviation Monitoring
－ －
IND alarm Parameter
indication
Input HHH
HHHI Monitoring
alarm － －
ND Parameter
indication
Input HH
HHIN Monitoring
limit alarm － －
D Parameter
indication

429
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input H
Monitoring
HIND limit alarm － －
Parameter
indication
Input L limit
Monitoring
LIND alarm － －
Parameter
indication
Input LL
Monitoring
LLIND limit alarm － －
Parameter
indication
Input LLL
LLLIN Monitoring
alarm － －
D Parameter
indication
Indicator
RININ for General Monitoring
－ Related PVP
D velocity Parameter
alarm
Indicator
DEVI Monitoring
for General － －
ND Parameter
error alarm
Function
block
OOS SWO Operation
Enable/Dis TRUE －
Settings OS Parameter
able (ON =
Disable)
Rate alarm Monitoring
PVP － Related RININD
initial value Parameter
Rate
sampling Monitoring
TS － －
cycle Parameter
display (s)
Velocity
check Monitoring
TC － －
period Parameter
value (s)
The
difference
of border
Other Monitoring
DEI upon － －
Param Parameter
sampling
Indicatio cycle
n (indication )
Change
rate in last
Monitoring
DDEI sampling － －
Parameter
cycle
(indication )
Velocity of
input value
at the
DDEI sampling Monitoring
－ －
_LT period Parameter
before
last(just for
indicator)
Error
Monitoring
Indicatio EI Error － EI=PV-SV
Parameter
n

430
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Suppress
Module
Alarm
AOF=ON,
not display
Operation
Alarm AOF real-time TRUE －
Parameter
Enabled alarm
and AOF=OFF,
Suppres display
s real-time
alarm
ENAL Alarm Operation
TRUE －
M enable Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 4.26.3
Bias alarm Operation
SV SV TRUE －
SV Parameter
SWL Low cut Operation
TRUE －
CUT switch Parameter
Low Cut
Low cut Operation
LCUT TRUE －
value (%) Parameter
Modified Operation
GAIN Gain TRUE －
Coefficie Parameter
nt Operation
Settings BIAS Bias value TRUE －
Parameter
Filter time Operation
TFLT TRUE －
(s) Parameter
For example, set as 1s, it
H/L alarm
Operation will not alarm immediately
TLAG delay time TRUE
Parameter when exceeding limits, but
(s)
alarm after 1s.
Sampling
cycle
multiple
Time MNote1 Operation
1 (sampling TRUE Range: [1,65535]
Settings Parameter
period
TS=M*run
cycle)
Rate
observation
period
Note11 Operation
N multiple(ob TRUE Range: [1,31]
Parameter
servation
period
TC=N*TS)
SV Operation Value
SV SVH TRUE
maximum Parameter Range[INSCH,INSCL]
LimitsNote
7 SV Operation Value
SVL TRUE
minimum Parameter Range[INSCH,INSCL]
Input the
INHH Operation
Alarm HHH limit TRUE －
H Parameter
LimitsNote alarm value
4
Input the
Operation
INHH HH limit TRUE －
Parameter
alarm value

431
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input the H
Operation
INH limit alarm TRUE －
Parameter
value
Input the L
Operation
INL limit alarm TRUE －
Parameter
value
Input the LL
Operation
INLL limit alarm TRUE －
Parameter
value
Input the
Operation
INLLL LLL alarm TRUE －
Parameter
value
H/L limit
INHY alarm Operation
TRUE －
S Hysteresis Parameter
(>=0.0)
Rate alarm
Operation
RHYS Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter
(>=0.0)
Positive
rate alarm
Operation
PRIN value(no TRUE －
Parameter
less than
0.0)
Negative
rate alarm
Operation
NRIN value(no TRUE －
Parameter
less than
0.0)
Positive
error alarm
Operation
PDEV value(no TRUE －
Parameter
less than
0.0)
Negative
error alarm
Operation
NDEV value(no TRUE －
Parameter
less than
0.0)
Inflexion
Turning
Alarm RSTF Operation
Point Alarm TRUE －
Reset LEX Parameter
Reset
Settings

Note:

1. Low Cut

 Execute the low cutting for the input IN in the range from INSCL to INSCH. When
the mode is started (SWLCUT= ON) and the percentage of input IN in the range
from INSCL to INSCH is less than LCUT, change signal to the low limitl.

2. Filter

432
 Function Block Reference

 The signal after the low cutting can be filter calculated to the OUT. The filter mode is
a first-order filter.

3. linear conversion

 The functional block can execute linear conversion calculation to the OUT, PV=
GAIN*OUT+ BIAS; the GAIN means the gain value, and the BIAS means the bias
value.

4. High and low limit alarm

 Judge the high and low alarm for the PV value which is linear converted.

 Only when PV exceeds alarm limit and maintains for TLAG, the alarm will be generated.

 The alarm has the function of alarm hysteresis. The alarm will be eliminated after the PV
value out the alarm hysteresis range.

5. Output holding

 When the input signal quality INERR= ON, the output PV will hold the value in last
period. The signal quality information is comprised in the multicast flag.

6. Rate alarm

Figure 4-45 Rate alarm

 Data sampling period TS= sampling period multiple M*program running period;

 Rate detecting period TC= detecting period multiple N*data sampling period TS;

 When the differential value which the current value minors the original value of the rate
detecting period is greater than and equal to PRIN, then the positive rate alarm will be
generated, and the positive rate alarm will be eliminated when the differential value is

433
 Function Block Reference

less than PRIN -RHYS.

 When the differential value which the original value minors the current value of the rate
detecting period is greater than and equal to NRIN, then the negative rate alarm will be
generated, and the negative rate alarm will be eliminated when the differential value is
less than NRIN -RHYS.

7. Setting value alarm

 When the input SV is over SVH, then SV will be limited within the SVH, and the high limit
alarm of the setting value will be generated.

 When the input SV is under SVH, then SV will be limited within the SVL, and the low limit
alarm of the setting value will be generated.

8. EI alarm

 When PV is greater than SV, and the error absolute value is greater than and equal to
positive error alarm value PDEV, the positive deviation alarm indication will be
generated.

 When PV is less than SV, and the error absolute value is greater than and equal to
negative error alarm value NDEV, the negative deviation alarm indication will be
generated.

9. Turning point alarm

 When turning point is appeared in the variation curve of PV, then the alarm will be
generated.
 When judging the turning point alarm, 3 sampling data values are needed, current
rate value DPV, last period rate value DDEI, and before last period rate value
DDEI_LT.
 When (DPV-DDEI) * (DDEI-DDEI_LT) < 0.0, the turning point alarm will be
generated.
 The turning point alarm detecting is related to the signal quality. When the noise bar
is large, filtering will be needed. When the signal period changes slowly, the
sampling period multiple TP can be adjusted.

10. General alarm

 Alarm output indication: general alarm output ALM, the normal output NOALM.

 When there is no alarm, ALM =OFF, NOALM=ON.

 When there is any alarm, ALM=ON, NOALM=OFF.

11. Parameter setting

434
 Function Block Reference

 When the parameter of M and N setting is unreasonable, then the alarm is

generated.
4.26.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-46 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function Block
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Alarm Input the HHH limit alarm value
Preference Limit HHH INHHH 100.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
Settin otherwise invalid)

435
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
gs(%) Input the HH limit alarm value
HH INHH 95.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
Input the H limit alarm value
H INH 90.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
HYS INHYS 0.0000 ≥0 H/L limit alarm Hysteresis
Input the L limit alarm value
L INL 10.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
Input the LL limit alarm value
LL INLL 5.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
Input the LLL limit alarm value
LLL INLLL 0.0000 [INSCH,INSCL] (the option selected alarm,
otherwise invalid)
TLA
TLAG 0.0000 － H/L alarm delay time
G
Positive error alarm value (the
option selected PDEV valid,
PEI PDEV 100.0000 －
otherwise invalid
EI )
Limit
Negative error alarm value (the
Settin
option selected NDEV valid,
gs(%) NEI NDEV 100.000 －
otherwise invalid
)
EI EI 0.0000 － Read-only. EI=PV-SV
SV maximum (the option
selected SVH valid, otherwise
H SVH 100.0000 [INSCH,INSCL]
invalid
Set
Limit
Value SV minimum (the option
selected SVL valid, otherwise
L SVL 0.0000 [INSCH,INSCL]
invalid
)
Rate Positive rate alarm value (the
Alarm DMV option selected PRIN valid,
PRIN 100.0000 ≥0
Set H otherwise invalid
)
Negative rate alarm value (the
DMV option selected NRIN valid,
NRIN 100.0000 ≥0
L otherwise invalid
)
Rate alarm initial value,
Read-only, can be set in the
Initia
PVP 0.0000 － Function Block Properties
l
window or in the program
settings
HYS RHYS 0.0000 ≥0 Rate alarm Hysteresis
Turni Turning Point Alarm Indication,
ng Check the" Turning Point
Point FLEX OFF － Alarm" effective, and then click
Alar the "alarm reset" button to
m complete the setup.

436
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Turning Point Alarm Reset,
Alar
Check the" Alarm Reset"
m
RSTFLEX OFF － effective, and then click the
Res
"alarm reset" button to
et
complete the setup.
Sam
pling
M 20 [1,65535] Sampling cycle multiple
Cyd
e
Mulit
ple
of
rate Rate observation period
N 1 [1,31]
dete multiple
ction
cvde
Rate (N)
Alarm
Set Rate
Sam Read-only, can be set in the
pling Function Block Properties
TS 0.0000 －
Cyd window or in the program
e settings
(TS)
Others
Rate
Dete Read-only, can be set in the
cting Function Block Properties
TC 0.0000 －
Cyd window or in the program
e(TC settings
)
GAI The gain value of linearity
Linear GAOM 1.0000 －
N conversion
Conv
ersion The bias value of linearity
BIAS BIAS 0.0000 －
conversion
Fiter
Filter
Time
Proce TFLT 0.0000 － －
(TFL
ss
T)
Low cut switch (the option
Low
SWL SWLCUT 0.0000 － selected SWLCUT valid,
Cut
CUT otherwise invalid)
4.26.3 Flag
Table 4-47 Flag list

Flag code Supervising assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable HHH limit alarm (HHH)
D2 Disable HH limit alarm (HH)
D3 Disable H limit alarm (H)
D4 Disable L limit alarm (L)
D5 Disable LL limit alarm(LL)
D6 Disable LLLlimit alarm(LLL)
D7 Disable Positive rate alarm(PRIN)
D8 Disable Negative rate alarm(NRIN)

437
 Function Block Reference

Flag code Supervising assign Description

D9 Disable Positive error alarm(PDEV)
D10 Disable Negative error alarm(NDEV)
D11 Disable Configuration error alarm(CFGERR)
D12 Disable Range high and low limit reversal alarm(REVSCL)
D13 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D14 Disable Input signal quality(ERR)
D15 Disable Setting value high limit (SVH)
D16 Disable Setting value low limit (SVL)
D17 Disable General alarm (ALM)
D18 Disable General normal (NOALM)
D19 Disable Turning point alarm (FLEX)
4.26.4 Application Example

Refer to 4.13.2, 4.21.4, 4.24.2 and 6.3.2.

4.27 Extended Linearization Chart Functional Block (FXYEX)

This extended linearization chart function block can realize the calculation function of the
linearization chart with 3-channel output. This function block is a Complicated function block, the
running time is 25μs.

4.27.1 Parameter instruction

Table 4-48 Extended linearization chart function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic X Axis X axis input Operation
X1 TRUE －
Parameters Settings coordinate 1 Parameter
Note1
X axis input Operation
X2 TRUE －
coordinate 2 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X3 TRUE －
coordinate 3 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X4 TRUE －
coordinate 4 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X5 TRUE －
coordinate 5 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X6 TRUE －
coordinate 6 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X7 TRUE －
coordinate 7 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X8 TRUE －
coordinate 8 Parameter

438
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

X axis input Operation
X9 TRUE －
coordinate 9 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
0 coordinate 10 Parameter
X axis input Operation
X11 TRUE －
coordinate 11 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
2 coordinate 12 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
3 coordinate 13 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
4 coordinate 14 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
5 coordinate 15 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
6 coordinate 16 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
7 coordinate 17 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
8 coordinate 18 Parameter
X1 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
9 coordinate 19 Parameter
X2 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
0 coordinate 20 Parameter
X2 X axis input Operation
TRUE －
1 coordinate 21 Parameter
Y Axis YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
A 1 coordinate 1 Parameter
Settings YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
2 coordinate 2 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
3 coordinate 3 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
4 coordinate 4 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
5 coordinate 5 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
6 coordinate 6 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
7 coordinate 7 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
8 coordinate 8 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
9 coordinate 9 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
10 coordinate 10 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
11 coordinate 11 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
12 coordinate 12 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
13 coordinate 13 Parameter

439
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
14 coordinate 14 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
15 coordinate 15 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
16 coordinate 16 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
17 coordinate 17 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
18 coordinate 18 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
19 coordinate 19 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
20 coordinate 20 Parameter
YA Y axis A input Operation
TRUE －
21 coordinate 21 Parameter
Y Axis YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
B 1 coordinate 1 Parameter
Settings YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
2 coordinate 2 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
3 coordinate3 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
4 coordinate 4 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
5 coordinate5 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
6 coordinate 6 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
7 coordinate 7 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
8 coordinate 8 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
9 coordinate 9 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
10 coordinate 10 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
11 coordinate 11 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
12 coordinate 12 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
13 coordinate 13. Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
14 coordinate 14 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
15 coordinate 15 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
16 coordinate 16 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
17 coordinate 17 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
18 coordinate 18 Parameter

440
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
19 coordinate 19 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
20 coordinate 20 Parameter
YB Y axis B input Operation
TRUE －
21 coordinate 21 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
1 coordinate 1 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
2 coordinate 2 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
3 coordinate 3 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
4 coordinate 4 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
5 coordinate 5 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
6 coordinate 6 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
7 coordinate 7 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
8 coordinate 8 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
9 coordinate 9 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
10 coordinate 10 Parameter
Y Axis
C YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
Settings 11 coordinate 11 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
12 coordinate 12 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
13 coordinate 13 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
14 coordinate 14 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
15 coordinate 15 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
16 coordinate 16 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
17 coordinate 17 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
18 coordinate 18 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
19 coordinate 19 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
20 coordinate 20 Parameter
YC Y axis C input Operation
TRUE －
21 coordinate 21 Parameter
SE
GU
Seguse Used Segment Operation
SE TRUE －
settings Note [1,20] Parameter
3

441
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Range INS Configurati

Settings CH Input 1 maximum － on －
1 Parameter
INS Configurati
CL Input 1 minimum － on －
1 Parameter
OU
Configurati
TS Output 1
－ on －
CH maximum
Parameter
1
OU
Configurati
TS
Output 1 minimum － on －
CL
Parameter
1
OU
Configurati
TS Output 2
－ on －
CH maximum
Parameter
2
OU
Configurati
TS
Output 2 minimum － on －
CL
Parameter
2
OU
Configurati
TS Output 3
－ on －
CH maximum
Parameter
3
OU
Configurati
TS
Output 3 minimum － on －
CL
Parameter
3
SV Configurati
Input PV and SV
SC － on －
maximum
H Parameter
SV Configurati
Input PV and SV
SC － on －
minimum
L Parameter
MV Configurati
Output MV
SC － on －
maximum
H Parameter
MV Configurati
Output MV
SC － on －
minimum
L Parameter
Configurati
INE Input 1
－ on －
U1 engineering unit
Parameter
OU Configurati
output 1
TE － on －
engineering unit
U1 Parameter
OU Configurati
output 2
TE － on －
engineering unit
U2 Parameter
OU Configurati
output 3
TE － on －
engineering unit
U3 Parameter
Configurati
SV SV and PV
－ on －
EU engineering unit
Parameter

442
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurati
MV MV engineering
－ on －
EU unit
Parameter
IN
Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
DL Input 1
－ on Function Block Panel (Equal
EN engineering unit
Parameter to 3 as Default)
1
OU
Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
TD Output 1 decimal
－ on Function Block Panel (Equal
LE digits [0,5]
Parameter to 3 as Default)
N1
OU
Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
TD Output 2 decimal
－ on Function Block Panel (Equal
LE digits [0,5]
Parameter to 3 as Default)
N2
OU
Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
TD Output 3 decimal
－ on Function Block Panel (Equal
LE digits [0,5]
Parameter to 3 as Default)
N3
SV SV and PV Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
DL decimal digits － on Function Block Panel (Equal
EN [0,5] Parameter to 3 as Default)
MV Configurati Used for Data Displayed on
MV decimal digits
DL － on Function Block Panel (Equal
[0,5]
EN Parameter to 3 as Default)

Extended Configurati
PB
Parameters Shield MV － on －
MV
Parameter
PB Configurati
Output OU Output 1 Shield － on －
Suppres T1 Parameter
s PB Configurati
Settings OU Output 2 Shield － on －
T2 Parameter
PB Configurati
OU Output 3 Shield － on －
T3 Parameter
IN1 Input variable 1 － Input Pin －
MV Input variable MV － Input Pin －
Input Pin
PV Input variable PV － Input Pin －
SV Input variable SV － Input Pin －
OU
Output variable 1 － Output Pin Related MODE
T1
OU
Output variable 2 － Output Pin Related MODE
T2
OU
Output variable 3 － Output Pin Related MODE
Output T3
Pin ER
Block alarm － Output Pin －
R
ST
Block state － Output Pin －
A
FL
Flag － Output Pin Refer to 4.27.3
AG

443
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

SW
OOS In OOS status Operation
OO TRUE －
Settings (ON=forbidden) Parameter
S
Suppress Module
Alarm
AOF=ON not
Suppres AO display the Operation
TRUE －
s Alarm F real-time alarm; Parameter
AOF=OFF display
the real-time
alarm
When the output is transitted
among different segments of
the X axis, if MODE=ON,
Mode MO OFF=ramp mode Operation
TRUE then the output is in the jump
Settings DE ON=jump mode Parameter
mode. If MODE =OFF, then
the output is in the ramp
mode.

Note:

 Input X coordinate value X1 to X21 must put in order from small to large, otherwise ERR
alarm will be generated and STA indicate low-bit of arrange error.

 The program first judge segment number of IN which in X axes 20th coordinate, then
carry out interpolating calculation. The algorithm is shown below:

 If IN is value between X[i] and X [i+1]: (The same to the OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, the Y axis
coordinate value is respectively YA[i], YB[i], YC[i])

Y [i  1]  Y [i ]
 OUT  Y [i ]  ( IN  X [i ]) *
X [i  1]  X [i ]

 If the input IN1<X1, then output OUT1=YA1, OUT2=YB1,OUT3=YC1;

 If the input IN1>X21, then output OUT1=YA21, OUT2=YB21,OUT3=YC21;
 If IN1=X[i], then OUT1=YA[i], OUT2=YB[i], OUT3=YC[i].

 The amount of interval segment can be configured, allowed range is 1~20. Parameter
illegality detecting is only used in the segment.

444
 Function Block Reference

4.27.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-11 Panel parameter operation instruction

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
The number of
X can be set,
while the valid
number is
Coordinate 1-7 determined by
X1 X1 0.0000 －
segment data.
If the segment
data is set as
N, the valid X
number is N+1.

445
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
The same as
X2 X2 1.0000 －
X1
The same as
X3 X3 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X4 X4 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X5 X5 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X6 X6 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X7 X7 0.0000 －
X1
The number of
Y can be set,
while the valid
number is
determined by
YA1 YA1 0.0000 －
segment data.
If the segment
data is set as
N, the valid Y
number is N+1.
The same as
YA2 YA2 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA3 YA3 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA4 YA4 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA5 YA5 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA6 YA6 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA7 YA7 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB1 YB1 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB2 YB2 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB3 YB3 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB4 YB4 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB5 YB5 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB6 YB6 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB7 YB7 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC1 YC1 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC2 YC2 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC3 YC3 0.0000 －
YA1

446
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
The same as
YC4 YC4 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC5 YC5 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC6 YC6 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC7 YC7 0.0000 －
YA1
Segment Segement data
SEGUSE 1 [1,20]
Data of broken line
Read-only. It
can be set in
the function
Status STA 0 －
properties
interface or in
the program.
When it is set
as
MODE=OFF in
the function
properties
interface, it is
Ramp MODE Selected －
in ramp mode.
Parameter And it also can
be set by
select “Ramp”
on the function
block panel.
When it is set
as
MODE=OFF in
the function
properties
Not interface, it is
Jump MODE －
Selected in jump mode.
And it also can
be set by
select “Jump”
on the function
block panel.
Read-only. It
can be set in
the function
PV PV 0.0000 －
properties
interface or in
the program.
Read-only. It
can be set in
Indication the function
SV SV 0.0000 －
properties
interface or in
the program.
Read-only. It
can be set in
the function
MV MV 0.0000 －
properties
interface or in
the program.

447
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
Coordinate The same as
X8 X8 0.0000 －
8-14 X1
The same as
X9 X9 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X10 X10 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X11 X11 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X12 X12 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X13 X13 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X14 X14 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
YA8 YA8 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA9 YA9 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA10 YA10 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA11 YA11 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA12 YA12 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA13 YA13 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA14 YA14 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB8 YB8 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB9 YB9 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB10 YB10 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB11 YB11 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB12 YB12 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB13 YB13 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB14 YB14 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC8 YC8 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC9 YC9 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC10 YC10 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC11 YC11 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC12 YC12 0.0000 －
YA1

448
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
The same as
YC13 YC13 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC14 YC14 0.0000 －
YA1
Coordinate The same as
X15 X15 0.0000 －
15-21 X1
The same as
X16 X16 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X17 X17 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X18 X18 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X19 X19 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X20 X20 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
X21 X21 0.0000 －
X1
The same as
YA15 YA15 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA16 YA16 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA17 YA17 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA18 YA18 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA19 YA19 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA20 YA20 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YA21 YA21 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB15 YB15 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB16 YB16 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB17 YB17 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB18 YB18 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB19 YB19 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB20 YB20 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YB21 YB21 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC15 YC15 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC16 YC16 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC17 YC17 0.0000 －
YA1

449
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application
Name Value Range
The same as
YC18 YC18 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC19 YC19 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC20 YC20 0.0000 －
YA1
The same as
YC21 YC21 0.0000 －
YA1
4.27.3 Flag
Table 4-12 Flag

Supervising
Flag Instruction
Assign
Enable
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Configuration error alarm(CFGERR)
D2 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

4.28 Alarm Auto Track Function Block (ALMTR)

This block is used to amend the alarm limit of AI automatically.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 30μs.

Table 4-49 alarm auto track function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin SV Set value － Input Pin －
HHH output Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
HHH － Output Pin
value MODE, BIAS
HH output Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
HH － Output Pin
value MODE, BIAS
Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
H H output value － Output Pin
Output MODE, BIAS
Note1
Pin Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
L L output value － Output Pin
MODE, BIAS
Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
LL LL output value － Output Pin
MODE, BIAS
LLL output Value Range[SCL,SCH],Related
LLL － Output Pin
value MODE, BIAS

450
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Alarm offset Operation
BIAS TRUE －
settings Parameter
Alarm offset
Operation value
Parameter type(OFF=actu Operation
MODE TRUE －
al value, Parameter
ON=percentag
e)
Configurati
Input span
SCH － on －
Configurati maximum
Parameter
on
Parameter Configurati
Input span
SCL － on －
minimum
Parameter

Note: Output is shown as follows.

 .MODE=OFF

 HHH = SV + 3 * BIAS
 HH = SV + 2 * BIAS
 H = SV + BIAS
 L = SV - BIAS
 LL = SV - 2 *BIAS
 LLL = SV - 3 * BIAS

 MODE=ON

 HHH = SV + 3 * BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)

 HH = SV + 2 * BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)
 H = SV + BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)
 L = SV - BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)
 LL = SV - 2 *BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)
 LLL= SV - 3 * BIAS / 100.0*(SCH-SCL)

4.29 Extended Integral Function Block (INTEGRALX)

The extended integral function block can make integral action to the input, and used in
accumulation calculation.

This function block is a Complicated function block, the running time is 30μs.

451
 Function Block Reference

4.29.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-50 Extended integral function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Equivalen Equivalent Operation
KFCT TRUE -
t coefficient Parameter
Coefficien
t Time Operation
SettingsNo TFCT TRUE -
te5
coefficient Parameter

Calculatio
n Finish Calculation Operation
FOUT TRUE Output limit value
Value finish value Parameter
Settings
Input Configuration
INSCH - -
maximum Parameter
Input span Configuration
INSCL - -
minimum Parameter
Basic Configuration
INEU Input unit - -
Parameters Parameter
OUTSC Output Configuration
- -
H maximum Parameter
OUTSC Output Configuration
Range - -
L minimum Parameter
Settings
Configuration
OUTEU Output unit - -
Parameter
Used for Data
IN decimal Configuration Displayed on Function
INDLEN -
digits[0,5] Parameter Block Panel (Equal to 3
as Default)
Used for Data
OUTDL OUTdecimal Configuration Displayed on Function
-
EN digits[0,5] Parameter Block Panel (Equal to 3
as Default)
Value
Extended Range[INSCL,INSCH],
Parameters IN Input value - Input Pin
Connect to AI and
function block
Program reset
Input Pin PRST - Input Pin -
input
Keep input of
PHOLD - Input Pin -
program
Startup input
PSTART - Input Pin -
of program
Value
Output OUTNote1 Output value - Output Pin Range[OUTSCL,OUTS
Pin CH]
ERR Block alarm - Output Pin -
Function
block
OOS Operation
SWOOS forbidden TRUE -
Settings Parameter
(ON=forbidde
n)

452
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Manual and
auto of
Operation
SWAM function - -
Parameter
block(ON=aut
o)
Run Hold
Operation
ControlNote HOLD enable/disabl -
Parameter
-
4
e (ON=hold)
Startup On/Off Operation
START - -
(ON=startup ) Parameter
Reset
Operation
RST Enable/Disabl - -
Parameter
e (ON=reset )
Module Run
Status:
Monitoring
RUN ON=Run ,OF - -
Parameter
F=Keep,
Read-only
Connect to
Function Monitoring
MODE - digital,Related
block mode Parameter
MODE_OPT
FINISHN Calculation Monitoring
ote3 - -
finish Parameter
Calculation
Monitoring
FINISH1 finish of - -
Parameter
Run preset alarm 1
Status Calculation
Monitor Monitoring
FINISH2 finish of - -
Parameter
preset alarm 2
Calculation
Monitoring
FINISH3 finish of - -
Parameter
preset alarm 3
Calculation Monitoring
TFINISH TRUE -
finish count Parameter
Previous reset
Monitoring
POUT cumulation TRUE -
Parameter
value
Calculation
Monitoring
ROUT value after TRUE -
Parameter
reset
Suppress Operation
Alarm AOF TRUE -
Module Alarm Parameter
Enabled
and FLAG Flag - Output Pin Refer to 4.29.3
Suppress Alarm Operation
ENALM TRUE -
enabled Parameter
Calculatio Calculation
n OUTDE finish of Operation
TRUE -
pre-Error V1 preset alarm Parameter
Setting error 1
Calculation
OUTDE finish of Operation
TRUE -
V2 preset alarm Parameter
error 2

453
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Calculation
OUTDE finish of Operation
TRUE -
V3 preset alarm Parameter
error 3
Input HH limit Operation
INHH TRUE -
alarm value Parameter
Input H limit Operation
INH TRUE -
alarm value Parameter
Input Input L limit Operation
INL TRUE -
Alarm alarm value Parameter
Settings Input LL limit Operation
INLL TRUE -
alarm value Parameter
Alarm
hysteresis Operation
INHYS TRUE -
value(No less Parameter
than 0.0)
Mode
selection:
0=limit
Mode MODE_ value,1=auto Operation
TRUE -
Settings OPT reset ,2=cumu Parameter
lation
incessdantly,
[0, 2]
Calculatio Calculation
n increase/decr
Operation
Increase/ SWID ease TRUE -
Parameter
Decrease switch(ON=
Setting decrease)
Low cut When SWLCUT=ON, if
SWLCU Operation
switch(ON=cu TRUE IN< LCUT, the current
Low Cut T Parameter
t) IN is not cumulated
Settings
Operation
LCUT Low cut value TRUE -
Parameter
Reset When cool startup, if
calculation RST_CLD =ON,then
Cold Start
RST_CL value while Configuration OUT=ROUT; if
Reset -
D cool startup Parameter RST_CLD=OFF, then
Settings
switch(ON=re the cumulation value
set) will hold still

Note 1. Basic algorithm

 The algorithm of extended integral function block is shown below:

 t
OUTPUT    INPUT 
1
*
1
dt  CUMULATION INITIAL（t0）
t0 TIME COEFFICIENT EQUIVALENT COEFFICIENT

 When SWID=OFF, the positive integral is applied:

 t
OUTPUT   INPUT 
1
*
1
dt  CUMULATION INITIAL（t0）
t0 TIME COEFFICIENT EQUIVALENT COEFFICIENT

 When SWID= ON, negative integral is applied:

454
 Function Block Reference

 t
OUTPUT    INPUT 
1
*
1
dt  CUMULATION INITIAL（t0）
t0 TIME COEFFICIENT EQUIVALENT COEFFICIENT

Note 2. Integral mode

 User can choose whether to execute integral limit function or not. When MODE =0, it is in
the integral limit status. The output value will be restricted in the cumulation finish value
(FOUT) when it reaches .FOUT

 When MODE=1, it is in automatically reset status. The output value will reset
automatically and cumulate from the calculation value after reset (ROUT) when it
reaches FOUT, TFINISH automatically plus 1 for every cumulation.

 When MODE=2, it is in the cumulation incessdantly status, cumulation output will

continue until it is reset to cumulation value manually when output value reaches FOUT.

Note 3. For the positive integral mode (SWID=OFF):

 When OUT>= FOUT, then FINISH=ON.

 When OUT>= FOUT-OUTDEV1, then FINISH1=ON.
 When OUT>= FOUT-OUTDEV2, then FINISH2=ON.
 When OUT>= FOUT-OUTDEV3, then FINISH3=ON.
 For the negative integral mode (SWID=ON)
 When OUT <= FOUT, then FINISH =ON.
 When OUT<= FOUT+ OUTDEV1, then FINISH 1=ON.
 When OUT<= FOUT+ OUTDEV2, then FINISH 2=ON.
 When OUT<= FOUT+OUTDEV3, then FINISH 3 =ON.

Note 4. Hold and reset

 When HOLD =ON or PHOLD makes a positive transmission, then RUN =OFF, and the
current integral function block is in the holding mode and set HOLD =OFF after holding
for a period, at same time preparing for next command.

 When START =ON or PSTART makes a positive transmission, then RUN =ON, and the
current integral function block is in the running mode and set START =OFF after holding
for a period, at same time preparing for next command..

 When the function block is in the holding status (RUN=OFF), the output value maintain
current value still.

 When RST=ON or PRST makes a positive transmission, then POUT=OUT, OUT=ROUT,

that means to reset cumulation value and store the one before reseting to POUT, and set
RST=OFF after holding for a period at same time preparing for next command.

Note 5. Equivalent coefficient (KFCT) and Time coefficient (TFCT)

455
 Function Block Reference

 It is used in span converting. For example, input IN is the flow, measure the flow of a
diesel oil. The density of the diesel oil is 0.86kg/L and the input unit is L/h. After
cumulation, the unit of the cumulation value is t. The parameter needs to be set to
KFCT=1/0.86*1000=1162.79, TFCT =3600.
4.29.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-51 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Value Range
Name

456
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Value Range
Name
Input HH limit alarm value (the
100.000 [INSCL,IN
HH INHH option selected alarm, otherwise
0 SCH]
invalid)
Input H limit alarm value(the
[INSCL,IN
Alarm H INH 90.0000 option selected alarm, otherwise
SCH]
Limit invalid)
Settings( Input L limit alarm value (the
[INSCL,IN
%) L INL 10.0000 option selected alarm, otherwise
SCH]
invalid)
Input LL limit alarm value (the
[INSCL,IN
LL INLL 0.0000 option selected alarm, otherwise
SCH]
invalid)
HYS INHYS 0.0000 － Alarm hysteresis value
Comp 100.000
FOUT － －
letive 0
Read-only, can be set in the
Error
Preference Function Block Properties window
Value OUTDEV1 0.0000 －
or in the program settings
1
Accumul
ative Read-only, can be set in the
Completi Error
Function Block Properties window
ve Value Value OUTDEV2 0.0000 －
or in the program settings
2

Read-only, can be set in the

Error
Function Block Properties window
Value OUTDEV3 0.0000 －
or in the program settings
3

Reset Previo
POUT 0.0000 － －
Setting( us
%) Rest ROUT 0.0000 － －
Time TFCT 1.0000 － －
Coefficie
nt Coeffi
KFCT 1.0000 － －
cient
Low
Signal
Others Cut
Excise LCUT 0.0000 － －
Value
Settings(
%)
Manual and auto of function
Manu
Mode block, Optional manual or
al,Aut SWAM Auto －
Set automatic control, click the
o
appropriate button to set
Integral mode selection, the
Limit MODE_OPT OFF － check is to select the integration
mode for limiting
Integral mode selection, the
Mode Auto MODE_OPT OFF － check is to select the integration
mode for auto reset
Alway
s
Integral mode selection, the
MODE_OPT ON － check is to select the integration
Cumu
late mode for cumulation incessdantly

457
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Value Range
Name
Calculation increase/decrease,
Inc SWID ON － the check is to select the increase
Accumul integration
ative
Direction Calculation increase/decrease,
Dec SWID OFF － the check is to select the
decrease integration
4.29.3 Flag
Table 4-52 Flag list

Flag Code Description Shield or Not

D0 OOS, Disable NO
D2 RESET, reset NO
D3 FINISH, finish NO
D4 ERR, error NO
D5 INHH, Measured Value HH limit alarm YES
D6 INH, Measured Value H limit alarm YES
D7 INL, Measured Value L limit alarm YES
D8 INLL, Measured Value LL limit alarm YES
REVSCL, range high and low limit
D12 NO
reversal alarm
D13 CFGERR, mode setting error NO
D14 AOF, Suppress Module Alarm NO
D15 MAN, manual NO
D16 AUTO, automatic NO
D17 RUN, running NO
D18 HOLD, hold NO
D19 FINISH1, finish preset alarm 1 NO
D20 FINISH2, finish preset alarm 2 NO
D21 FINISH3, finish preset alarm 3 NO

4.29.4 Application Example

The flow accumulation is used to check the instant flow of some fluid and gas in pipe and to count
the sum of a period of time. The flow signal FT_2103 (range: 0~7000, unit: kg/h) need to be
accumulated, and the unit of accumulated value is t.

Y TAG
_92 FQ
CUM

TAG
_91
F

458
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-53 Diagram of flow accumulation

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via INTERGRALX, which can perform
integral and accumulation calculation for input and functions such as hold, reset, small signal
cutting, input alarm function and cold-boot reset for accumulated value.

Figure 4-54 Programming of INTERGRALX

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 FT_2103 AI (Input) Tag of AI
Tag of Function Name of Flow
002 FIQ_2103
Block Accumulation Tag

Parameter settings of INTERGRALX:

 INSCH: keep the same with input tag.

 INSCL: keep the same with input tag.

 INEU: the range conforms to the technical requirements and cannot be set as infinity.

 OUTEU: the range conforms to the technical requirements and cannot be set as infinity.

 MODE_OPT: 2

 KFCT: 1000

 TFCT: 3600

 The two levels H/L limit alarms of IN can be set for INTERGRALX

 Other alarm functions are set as disabled.

4.30 Extended Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMPX)

This function block is an ideal gas compensation function block, which can compensate
approximate ideal gas in the setting mode.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 13μs.

459
 Function Block Reference

4.30.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-55 extended ideal gas compensation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
IN Calculate input value － Input Pin Connect AI
Air pressure in working
Input Pin PRESS － Input Pin －
(unit: MPa)
Temperature in working
TMPRT － Input Pin －
(unit: degree. C.)
OUT Calculate output value － Output Pin Related MODE

Output Pin Related MODE,

ERR Module alarm － Output Pin
ERR
STA Alarm status － Output Pin －
Configurati
Configuration
MODE Work mode selection [0,2] － on －
Parameter
Parameter
Compensation Operation
PRESS0 TRUE －
Operation Pressure(unit: MPa) Parameter
Parameter Compensation Operation
TMPRTO TRUE －
temperature Parameter

Note .

 This function block follows the below ideal gas balance equation:

P1V1 P0V0
 
T1 T0

 There are three modes.

 mode 1(MODE=0)

 Mode 1 is applied in (Not limited to) the measuring of volume flow using the volume
flowmeter.

IN * ( PRESS  0.101325) * (TMPRT 0  273.15)

 OUT 
(TMPRT  273.15) * ( PRESS 0  0.101325)

 mode 2 (MODE =1)

460
 Function Block Reference

 Mode 2 is applied in (Not limited to) the measuring of volume flow using the
differential pressure flowmeter. Volume flow is transferred to the value in the setting
condition. Mode 2 is applied when the signal is the flow signal.

( PRESS  0.101325) * (TMPRT 0  273.15)

 OUT  IN *
(TMPRT  273.15) * ( PRESS 0  0.101325)

 mode 3(MODE =2)

 Mode 3 is applied in (Not limited to) the measuring of volume flow using the
differential pressure flowmeter. Volume flow is transferred to the value in the setting
condition. Mode 2 is applied when the signal is the flow signal.
 Mode 3 is applied when the sent-up signal is the differential pressure signal.

IN * ( PRESS  0.101325) * (TMPRT 0  273.15)

 OUT 
(TMPRT  273.15) * ( PRESS 0  0.101325)

 If the temperature or pressure is not in the required range or MODE>2, then

ERR=ON. If temperature or pressure is not in the required range, then STA=1; if
MODE>2 then STA=2; if temperature or pressure is not in the required range and
MODE>2, then STA =3.
 If temperature and pressure is in the required range, then MODE is in the
reasonable range. If IN is less than 0.0, then OUT =0.0, ERR = ON, and STA = 4.

4.30.2 Application Example

Use a flowmeter to measure the flow of a technical gas (steam), its designed temperature is 250℃,
designed pressure is 1.05MPa (gauge pressure); its measured pressure is PT_0101: range is
0~4MPa, measured temperature is TE_0102: range is 0~500℃, flow is FT_0101: range is
0~7000Nm3/h (has been extracted the root in the transducer), the compensated flow us the
customized analog value FIB0101: range is 0~7000Nm3/h. It is needed to be performed the ideal
gas compensation and superheated steam flow compensation.

The density of gas changes wit the pressure and temperature. If the field devices have not
provided compensation for speed or volume types of flowmeters, the temperature and pressure
compensation is needed to be performed. The compensation varies with different gas mediums.
Generally, there are ideal gas gas flow compensation, superheated steam and saturated steam
flow compensation, special gas flow compensation. The definitions of various gas types:

 Ideal gas: refers to the gas, in any pressure and temperature, its status conforms to
P*V/T=constant value. Generally, gas difficult to be liquefied, such as H2, N2, O2, are ideal
gas, which requires temperature and pressure compensation. If the medium temperature

461
 Function Block Reference

is always near designed temperature (like normal temperature) and not often changed, it
only requires pressure compensation.

 Superheanted steam: when the temperature of steam with current pressure is higher
than the boiling temperature of liquid phase with the pressure, the steam is in
superheated status and requires temperature and pressure compensation.

 Saturated steam: when the molecule number entering into space in a unit time is equal to
the molecule number returning to the liquid, the evaporation and condensation are in
status of dynamic balance. The evaporation and condensation is performing, while
density of steam molecule in space stops increase. At that time, it is the saturated status.

 Special gas, such as air (it can be processed as ideal gas if the precision is not highly
required), natural gas and ammonia, etc. Normally the measurement device factory
should provide clear compensation calculation formula, such as the air volume (air) of
boiler devices and natural gas flow, etc., should conform to the calculation sheet
provided by the factory.

Figure 4-56 Diagram of gas compensation

If the flow compensation gas is ideal gas, apply PTCOMPX to perform flow compensation, its
programming is shown below.

Figure 4-57 Programming of PTCOMPX

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 4-13Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 FT_0101 AI (Input) Flow Tag
Real-time Temperature
002 TE_0102 AI (Input) Temperature Tag
of Compensation

462
 Function Block Reference

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Real-time Pressure of
003 PT_0101 AI (Input) Pressure Tag
Compensation
004 FIB0101 Custom REAL Compensated Flow Tag

Parameter settings of PTCOMPX:

 MODE: 1

 PRESS0: 1.05

 TMPRT0: 250

 The two levels H/L limit alarms can be set for the compensated flow according to the
requirements. It can be achieved via PVIEX.

 Other alarms, like change rate alarm, are set as disabled in default.

 If the flow compensation gas is superheated steam or saturated steam, apply

STMCOMP to perform flow compensation, its programming is shown below.

Figure 4-58 Programming of STMCOMP

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Parameter settings of STMCOMP:

 MODE: 0

 PRESS0: 1.05

 TMPRT0: 250

 The two levels H/L limit alarms can be set for the compensated flow according to the
requirements. It can be achieved via PVIEX.

 Other alarms, like change rate alarm, are set as disabled in default.

4.31 Setting Function Block (DSET)

Analog alarm limit, range and other parameters set. This function block is a complicated function
block, the running time is 30μs.

463
 Function Block Reference

4.31.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-59 setting function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Input HHH limit Operation
PVHHH TRUE －
alarm value Parameter
Input HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE －
alarm value Parameter
Input H limit Operation
PVH TRUE －
alarm value Parameter

Input Input L limit Operation

PVL TRUE －
Alarm alarm value Parameter
Settings Input LL limit Operation
PVLL TRUE －
alarm value Parameter
Input LLL limit Operation
PVLLL TRUE －
alarm value Parameter
PV alarm
hysteresis Operation
PVHYS TRUE －
value(No less Parameter
than 0.0)
Basic Set value Operation
SVH TRUE －
Parameters maximum Parameter
Set Set value Operation
SVL TRUE －
Value minimum Parameter
Limits Rate limit value
(No less than Operation
SVVL TRUE －
0.0,every Parameter
control period)
Configuration
SCH Input maximum － －
Parameter
Input span Configuration
SCL － －
minimum Parameter
Range Configuration
EU Input unit － －
Settings Parameter
Used for Data
Displayed on
Decimal digits Configuration
DLEN － Function Block
[0,5] Parameter
Panel (Equal to 3 as
Default)
Extended Input Pin PVNote1 Input － Input Pin －
Parameters
Output
OUT Output － Output Pin －
Pin
Function block
OOS Operation
SWOOS enable/disable TRUE －
Settings Parameter
(ON=disable )
Operation Value Range[SVL,
SV SV Set value TRUE
Parameter SVH]

464
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Positive rate
PRININ Monitoring
alarm － Related ENALM
D Parameter
indication
Negative rate
NRININ Monitoring
alarm － Related ENALM
D Parameter
indication
Input HHH
Monitoring
HHHIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
Input HH limit
Monitoring
HHIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
Input H limit
Monitoring
HIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
Alarm indication
Input L limit
Monitoring
LIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
Input LL limit
Monitoring
LLIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
Input LLL limit
Monitoring
LLLIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Related ENALM
Parameter
indication
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Related ENALM
indication Parameter
Alarm Operation
ENALM Alarm enabled TRUE －
Enable Parameter
and FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
Suppres
Suppress Operation
s AOF TRUE －
module alarm Parameter

Note 1. Measuring value

 HHH limit alarm for the measuring value.

Note 2. Setting value

 The setting value is limited in [SVL, SVH]. Execute the ramp action to the limited SV.
In the indication
 Function, SVVL means the variation in each period.

465
 Function Block Reference

Figure 4-60 indication

466
 Function Block Reference

4.31.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Figure 4-61 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
PV Alarm PV HHH limit alarm value (the option
HHH PVHHH 100.0000 [SCL,SCH]
Limit selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
Settings PV HH limit alarm value (the option
HH PVHH 95.0000 [SCL,SCH]
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
PV H limit alarm value (the option
H PVH 90.0000 [SCL,SCH]
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)

467
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
PV L limit alarm value (the option
L PVL 10.0000 [SCL,SCH]
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
PV LL limit alarm value (the option
LL PVLL 5.0000 [SCL,SCH]
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
PV LLL limit alarm value (the option
LLL PVLLL 0.0000 [SCL,SCH]
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
HYS PVHYS 0.0000 ≥0.0 Alarm hysteresis value
SV H limit alarm indication (the
H SVH 100.0000 － option selected alarm, otherwise
SV Limit invalid)
Settings
SV L limit alarm indication (the option
L SVL 0.0000 －
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
Velocity
SVVL 100.0000 － Rate limit value
Limit
SV Velocity Positive rate alarm indication (the
Limit DSVH PRININD OFF － option selected alarm, otherwise
Settings invalid)
Negative rate alarm indication (the
DSVL NRININD OFF － option selected alarm, otherwise
invalid)
Read-only, can be set in the Function
OUT OUT 0.0000 －
Block Properties window.
4.31.3 Flag
Table 4-62 Flag list

Flag Description
D0 Tag Disable(OOS)
D1 HHH limit alarm(HHH)
D2 HH limit alarm (HH)
D3 H limit alarm (H)
D4 L limit alarm (L)
D5 LL limit alarm (LL)
D6 LLL limit alarm (LLL)
D7 Positive rate alarm (PRIN)
D8 Negative rate alarm (NRIN)
D12 Range high and low limit reversal alarm (REVSCL)
D13 Alarm Suppression(AOF)
D15 SV H limit alarm (SVH)
D16 SV L limit alarm (SVL)

4.32 Setting Function Block (DSET_EP)

The function block is mainly used in the settings of the operator indicator, parameter, etc. This
function block is a complicated function block, the running time is 30μs.

468
 Function Block Reference

4.32.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 4-63 Setting function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

TV Track value － Input Pin Related TR
Input Pin
TR Track switch － Input Pin －
Value Range[SVL,
Output Pin SVNote1 Set value TRUE Output Pin
SVH],Related TR, SWOOS
Function block enable Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
/ disable (ON=disable) Parameter
Suppress module Operation
AOF TRUE －
alarm Parameter
Operation
SVH Set value maximum TRUE Value Range[SCL, SCH]
Parameter
Operation Operation
Parameter SVL Set value minimum TRUE Value Range[SCL, SCH]
Parameter
Set value slow
Operation
SSV increase/decrease － －
Parameter
value
Set value fast
Operation
FSV increase/decrease － －
Parameter
value
Setting value Monitoring
SVI － －
operation indication Parameter
Monitoring SV H limit alarm Monitoring
Parameter SVHIND － －
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － －
indication Parameter
Alarm FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
Enable and Operation
Suppress ENALM Alarm enabled TRUE －
Parameter
Configuration
SCH Input maximum － －
Parameter
Configuration
SCL Input span minimum － －
Configurati Parameter
on Configuration
Parameter EU Input unit － －
Parameter
Used for Data Displayed on
Input decimal digits [0, Configuration
DLEN － Function Block Panel (Equal
5] Parameter
to 3 as Default)

Note 1. This function block provides an analogy output for the downstream program. The function
block can be operated by operators in the supervision and send the analog indication.

Note 2. When SWOOS=ON, the function block is in the OOS status. In this mode, the algorithm
does not work and the output can be assigned in the debugging window.

469
 Function Block Reference

Note 3. When SWOOS=OFF:

 When TR =ON, the output SV tracks TV;

 When TR =OFF, the function block is in the manual status and SV can be set by operator;
and operator can write specific value directly or press the plus/minor button to modify SV.
For every operation, SVI send out a pulse.

4.32.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 4-64 Function Block Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Set value maximum (the option
H SVH 100.0000 －
SV Limit selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
Settings Set value minimum (the option
L SVL 0.0000 －
selected alarm, otherwise invalid)
4.32.3 Flag
Table 4-65 Flag list

Flag Code Definition Description

1=the function block is in OOS status,

0 OOS
0= the function block is not in OOS status

1= the function block is in TR status,

1 TR
0= the function block is not in TR status
1= the function block is in AUTO status,
2 AUTO
0= the function block is not in AUTO status.
1: SVL alarm enable
3 SVL
0: SVLalarm disable

470
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Definition Description

1: SVH alarm enable
4 SVH
0: SVH alarm disable
1: CFGERR alarm enable, that is limit reversal
alarm(SVH<SVL) ; does not limit when reversal limit
5 CFGERR
occurs
0: CFGERR alarm disable
1: REVSCL alarm enable, that is limit reversal
6 REVSCL alarm(SVH<=SVL)
0: REVSCL alarm disable
1:SVI=ON,
7 SVI
0:SVI=OFF
1:AOF=ON,
8 AOF
0:AOF=OFF
Other bits Not defined

4.33 Ramp Function Block (RAMP)

Generate ramp ascending or descending signal and limit the output.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 5μs.

Table 4-66 Ramp function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

When RST jumps from OFF to
RST Reset switch － Input Pin ON, the function block is in track
status, MODE=0
When RUN jumps from OFF to
RUN Run switch － Input Pin ON, the function block is in
running status, MODE=1
When HOLD jumps from OFF to
HOLD Keep switch － Input Pin ON, the function block is in
holding status, MODE=2
Input Pin IV Initial value － Input Pin －
Direction select
SW － Input Pin Related PR, NR
switch
Rising rate
PR TRUE Input Pin Related SW
(unit:/s)
Descend rate
NR TRUE Input Pin Related SW
(unit:/s)
OUTL Output minimum TRUE Input Pin －
OUTH Output maximum TRUE Input Pin －
Output Note1 Ramp output Value Range[OUTL,
OUT － Output Pin
Pin value OUTH],Related MODE

471
 Function Block Reference

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Related RST, RUN, HOLD All the
three modes are applied with
MODE Output status － Output Pin
rising edge jump detecting, the
priority is: 0>1>2.
Parameter
ERR － Output Pin Related OUTL, OUTH
settings error

Note 1. output process

1) When MODE=0: OUT=TV;

2) When MODE=1:

 SW=ON, OUT rises with rate PR;

 SW=OFF, OUT descends with rate NR;

3) When MODE =2: OUT keeps the current output;

Note 2. No matter in what mode, the output will be limited between OUTL and OUTH. If
OUTL>OUTH, then output limit will not work and the ERR alarm will be set to ON.

4.34 Date Timer Function Block (DATETIMER)

Output the system time of controller, and send out a single pulse when the current time reaches
the setting time.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 5μs.

Table 4-67 Data timer function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
OUTNote1 Output value － Output Pin －
Y Current year － Output Pin －
M Current month － Output Pin －
Output Pin D Current date － Output Pin －
H Current hour － Output Pin －
MIN Current minute － Output Pin －
SEC Current second － Output Pin －

472
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Name Upload Properties
Reference
Operation
M_SET Month set(>12 means anyone) TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
D_SET Date set(>31means anyone) TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
H_SET Hour set (>23 means anyone) TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Minute set (>59 means Operation
MIN_SET TRUE －
anyone) Parameter
Second set (>59 means Operation
SEC_SET TRUE －
anyone) Parameter
Note1 Operation
TZ Region (unit: h) － －
Parameter

Note:

 The unit of the time zone value is hour. For example, TZ=1.5 means that add 1.5
hours in the controller (1.5*60 = 90 minutes). The time zone value ranges in [-12.0,
13.0], and decimal like as 0.0, 0.25, 0.5 and 0.75 are also supported. There might
be precision loss for other time zone value end with decimal, but it does not matter
in the practical application. When the time zone value is used, the decimal will be
one of the 4 decimals 0.0, 0.25, 0.5 and 0.75.
 This function block will not adjust automatically the clock following the daylight
saving time. When used in those countries adopted the daylight saving time, users
should adjust the TZ by themselves.
 It is based on the standard Greenwich Mean Time, then plus the current time zone
value, get the current year, month, data, hour, minute, second.
 For example, China is located in the East 8 zone, so TZ=8.
 If the Greenwich Mean Time is 2010.05.07 13:00:00, then the Beijing Time will be
2010.05.07 21:00:00.
 If the current time is compared with the setting time, a pulse will be outputted when
the current time reaches or exceedes the setting time the first time. The pulse width
is the calculation period.

4.35 Moving-average Block (AVE_M)

The block is used to get the average value of the input sampling data in the past period of time. It
records the input value according to the setting sampling time and can record 60 sampling values
at most. This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 11μs.

473
 Function Block Reference

Table 4-68 Function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

Input value of
Input Pin IN － Input Pin －
moving-average block
Output value of
OUTNote1 － Output Pin Related MODE
moving-average block
Output Pin
Current (run, stop,
MODE － Output Pin Related RST, STOP
reset )
Sampling time, the
actual value is the In the running mode, the inner
Operation
TS integer multiple of scan TRUE sampling data will be reset
Parameter
period of function block when TS is modified
0.1~10000.0(Unit: s)
Value Range[0,60]
Number of sampling In the running mode, the
Operation
NUM point (No more than 60) － current available sampling
Parameter
data will be calculated for
output after NUM is modified
Operation
GAIN Gain TRUE －
Parameter
Operation Operation
RST Reset switch － －
Parameter Parameter
Operation
STOP Stop switch － －
Parameter
Earliest calculation Operation
PREV TRUE －
input value Parameter
When OUTH<OUTL, the
output limit does not work.
High limit of output Operation When OUTL<=OUTH, the
OUTH TRUE
value Parameter output limit work in the three
modes.

Low limit of output Operation

OUTL TRUE Ditto
value Parameter

Note 1. function mode

 reset mode

 When RST=ON, the function block is in the reset mode. MODE =0, OUT=IN, the
inner sampling data is reset.

 stop mode

 When RST=OFF, STOP=ON, the block is in the stop mode. MODE=1, OUT holding,
the inner sampling data is reset.

 Running mode

474
 Function Block Reference

 When RST=OFF, STOP=OFF, the function block is in the running mode, MODE=2,
OUT is the value of the average value of the current available sampling data
multiplied by GAIN.
 The available sampling data must be used for the average value calculation. That
means that the divisor is the amount of the recorded available sampling data, when
it reaches NUM and the divisor is NUM.
 The sampling data and the output are refreshed once in a sampling period.
 Create a piece of storage space in the function block to record the sampling data.
The data storage is shown as follows:

Figure 4-69 Data storage

 Create 60 input data buffers in function block which are used to store the sampling
value. Therefore, the sampling number NUM shall be in the range of [0, 60]. When
NUM > 60, NUM=60 will be forced by the program. When NUM=0, the function
block will output the current IN value.

Note 2. The calculation of TS is based on the integer multiple of the running period. When TS is
less than the running period of the function block, then TS is the running period. If TS is greater
than the running period, then the practical calculation time equals the maximum integer multiple of
the function block running period which is less than TS.

4.36 Sampling Function Block (SAMPLE)

Judge the mode according to the parameter. In the running mode, output the current sampling
value according to the sampling time.

This function block is a simple function block, the running time is 11μs.

475
 Function Block Reference

Table 4-70 Sampling function block parameter instruction

Name Name Upload Properties Application Reference

IN Input value of sampling data － Input Pin －
Input Pin
SW Enable switch to sampling － Input Pin －
RST Reset switch － Input Pin －
Not
OUT Output value of sampling
e1 － Output Pin Related MODE
calculation
Output Pin
Mode output value (reset =0,
MODE － Output Pin Related RST, SW
stop=1, run =2)
Operation
TS Sampling time(s) TRUE －
Parameter
Operation Operation
PSET Preset value TRUE －
Parameter Parameter
Reset output mode switch
RST_O Operation
(HOLD =ON, Output Preset TRUE －
PT Parameter
Value=,OFF)

Note 1. Output is processed as the mode.

1) Reset mode

 When RST=ON, the function block is in the reset mode, MODE=0, the inner timer will be
reset.

 When RST_OPT=ON, OUT will hold the current output value. When RST_OPT=OFF,
OUT=PSET.

2) Stop mode

 When RST=OFF and SW=OFF, the function block will be in the stop mode,
MODE=1. The inner timer will be reset and the output will be held.

3) Running mode

 When RST=OFF and SW=ON, the function block will be in the running mode,
MODE=2, and output the current sampling value according to the sampling time.

Note 2. TS sampling time

 The calculation of TS is based on the integer multiple of the running period. When
TS is less than the running period of the function block, then TS is the running
period. If TS is greater than the running period, then the practical calculation time

476
 Function Block Reference

equals the maximum integer multiple of the function block running period which is
less than TS.
 That means N*T<=TS, and the N is the maximum integral which can be chosen,
then the practical sampling time is N*T.

477
 Function Block Reference

Section 5 Selection Function Block Library User

Manual
Selection function block library contains 18 function blocks, including 6 complex function blocks
and 12 simple function blocks. For complex function blocks, each of them has its own function
block panel, and the parameter on the panel can be set in supervision widow.

5.1 Two to One Selector Function Block (TWOSEL)

Function block TWOSEL can select to output the average, maximum, minimum, input signal1 and
input signal2 of the two input signals according to the value of parameter MODE.

It is a complex function block, whose running time is 12μs.

5.1.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-1 Parameter Instruction of TWOSEL

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Testing point AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Testing point AI
Input Input the State of 1,
Pin IN1ERR － Input Pin Testing point AI.ERR
ON=Error
Input the State of 2,
IN2ERR － Input Pin Testing point AI.ERR
ON=Error

478
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output
When
MODE=0,OUT=(IN
1+IN2)/2
When
MODE=1,OUT=
Minimum Value Output Relevant parameter:
OUT － Note2
When parameter MODE
Output MODE=2,OUT=Ma
Pin ximum Value
When
MODE=3,OUT=IN1
When
MODE=4,OUT=IN2
Output Related
ERR Set Error Alarm －
parameter IN1ERR/IN2ERR/DL
Output
FLAG Flag － Refer to 5.1.3
parameter
Preset Deviation
Limit
(Non-Negative). If
Relevant parameter:
Difference between
Operation SCH, SCL
DL IN1and IN2 is TRUE
parameter Normally set to (SCH
larger than DL,ERR
- SCL)
＝ON, output
remain the same
with last cycle.
Operati
on Set as ON when
Function Block Operation
Param SWOOS TRUE function block is
Forbidden parameter
eter downloaded first time
Suppress Module
Alarm
When AOF=ON, It
is Not Displaying
Operation
AOF the Real-Time TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
Alarm.
When AOF=OFF, It
is Displaying the
Real-Time Alarm.
Configu Range High Limit
ration (Note: All Input and Configurati
Param SCH Output Share The － on －
eter Same Range, Unit parameter
and Decimal Digits)
Configurati
SCL Range Low Limit － on －
parameter
Selection Type:
0=Average Value;
Configurati
1=Minimum Value; Refer to parameter
MODE － on
2=Maximum OUT
parameter
Value;
3=IN1;4=IN2
Configurati
EU Unit － on －
parameter

479
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Configurati
DLEN Decimal Digits － on －
parameter

Note 1. Signal checking principle

 Signal redundancy control system usually uses two identical instruments to check
one signal. If one of the input signals is invalid, the detection system would output
the value of the valid one. If both of the signals are checked invalid, the detection
system would be considered in fault. If both of the signals are checked valid, the
checking system would further check the deviation between the two input signals. If
the deviation is larger than the setting value, the checking system would be
considered in problem.

Note 2. Description of MODE selection

1) When MODE=0, 1 or 2:

 If both of two inputs are invalid, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value of
last period.

 If one of two inputs is invalid, output the value of the other valid input.

 If both of two inputs are valid, then check whether the deviation between the inputs
exceeds the setting deviation limit DL. If the deviation exceeds the deviation limit (DL),
meaning that the output is incredible, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value
of last period. If the deviation does not exceed DL, then select to output the average,
minimum, or maximum of the two input signals, according to the value of MODE.

2) When MODE=3 or 4, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN1 or
IN2. If the corresponding input is invalid, meaning that the output is incredible, set error
alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

3) When MODE is set other value, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value of
last period.

480
 Function Block Reference

5.1.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 5-2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Initial
Panel Parameter Name Range Application Reference
Value
Work Read-only, if selected, sets
MAX MODE － －
Mode MODE=2
Read-only,if selected,sets
MIN MODE － －
MODE=1
Read-only,if selected,Sets
AVE MODE √ －
MODE=0
Read-only,if selected, sets
IN1 MODE － －
MODE=3

481
 Function Block Reference

Initial
Panel Parameter Name Range Application Reference
Value
Read-only,if selected, sets
IN2 MODE － －
MODE=4
Predefined Error DL 100.000 0~(SCH - SCL) Refer to parameter reference
5.1.3 Flag
Table 5-3 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Evaluation
Enable
D0 Tag Forbidden (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Error (ERR)
D2 Disable Input 1 is Error (IN1ERR)
D3 Disable Input 2 is Error (IN2ERR)
D4 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D5 Disable Range High and Low Limit Reversal Alarm (REVSCL)
D6 Disable Input 12 is Deviation Transfinite (DEV12)

5.2 Select One of Three Options Function Block (THRSEL)

Function block THRSEL can select to output the average, maximum, minimum, median value,
input signal1, input signal2 and input signal3 of the three input signals, or to output one of these
three signals, according to the value of parameter MODE.

It is a complex function block, running time is 12μs.

5.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-4 THRSEL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input Input the State of
IN1ERR － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
Pin 1, ON=Error
Input the State of
IN2ERR － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
2, ON=Error
Input the State of
IN3ERR － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
2, ON=Error

482
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
When MODE=0,
OUT=(IN1+IN2
＋IN3)/3
When MODE=1,
OUT=minimum
When
MODE=2,OUT=
maximum
When
MODE=3,OUT= Related
OUT － Output Pin Note2
median parameter:MODE
Outpu When
t MODE=4,OUT=I
Pin N1
When
MODE=5,OUT=I
N2
When
MODE=6,OUT=I
N3
Related
ERR Set Error Alarm － Output Pin IN1ERR/IN2ERR/IN3
ERR/DL
FLAG Flag － Output Pin
Related
Deviation Limit Operation parameter:SCH, SCL
DL TRUE
(Non-Negative) Parameter normally set to
be(SCH - SCL)
Opera Function Block
tion Set to be “ON” when
Forbidden (ON Operation
Para SWOOS TRUE function block is
stands for mode Parameter
meter downloaded first time
OOS)
Suppress
Module Alarm Operation
AOF TRUE
AOF=ON, It is Parameter
Not Displaying
Range High Configuration
SCH － －
Limit Parameter
Configuration
Confi SCL Range Low Limit － －
Parameter
gurati
on Configuration Related
MODE Working Mode －
Para Parameter parameter:OUT
meter Configuration
EU Output Unit － －
Parameter
Decimal Digits Configuration
DLEN － －
[0,5] Parameter

Note 1. Signal checking principle

 Some important interlock control systems have higher requirement for checking the
input signals, usually using the 2 of 3 detection mode which is, among 3 input
signals, only two or above are valid then consider the detection system is normal.
Based on this thought, THRSEL is designed. It is similar to TWOSEL but increases

483
 Function Block Reference

the number of input signals to 3. According to the value of selective parameter

MODE, THRSEL would select to output the average, maximum, minimum or
median value of the three input signals, or to output one of these three signals.

Note 2. Description of MODE selection

1. When MODE=0,1,2 or 3:

1) If all of the three input signals are invalid, meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON,
and hold the output value of last period.

2) If two of the three input signals are invalid, output the value of the valid one.

3) If one of the three input signals is invalid:

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals does not exceed the deviation limit
(DL), output the corresponding value according to the value of MODE: when MODE=0 or
3, output their average; MODE=1, output their minimum; when MODE=2, output their
maximum.

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL),
meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

4) If all of the three input signals are valid:

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals exceed the deviation limit (DL),
set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

 If one deviation between two input signals does not exceed the deviation limit (DL), while
the other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals exceed the
deviation limit (DL), output the average of these two input signals.

 If one deviation between two input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL), while the
other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals do not exceed
the deviation limit (DL), output the value of the third input signal, median value of the
three input signals.

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals do not exceed the deviation limit,
output the average, minimum maximum or median value of the three input signals
according to the value of MODE.

1. When MODE=4, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN1. If
IN1ERR=ON, meaning input 1 is invalid, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output
value of last period.

2. When MODE=5, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN2. If
IN2ERR=ON, meaning input 2 is invalid, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last
period.

3. When MODE=6, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN3. If
IN3ERR=ON, meaning input 3 is invalid, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last

484
 Function Block Reference

period.

4. When MODE>6, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

5.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 5-5 Panel Parameter Instruction

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name
Work Read only,chosen,stands for
Mode MAX MODE － － setting MODE=2 in function
block Properties

485
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name
Read only,chosen,stands for
MIN MODE － － setting MODE=1 in function
block Properties
Read only,chosen,stands for
AVE MODE √ － setting MODE=0 in function
block Properties
Read only,chosen,stands for
MID MODE － － setting MODE=3 in function
block Properties
Read only,chosen,stands for
IN1 MODE － － setting MODE=4 in function
block Properties
Read only,chosen,stands for
IN2 MODE － － setting MODE=5 in function
block Properties
Read only,chosen,stands for
IN3 MODE － － setting MODE=6 in function
block Properties
Predefined Error
DL 100.000 0~(SCH - SCL) Refer to parameter reference
Limit
5.2.3 Flag
Table 5-6 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Evaluation
Enable
D0 Tag Forbidden (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Error (ERR)
D2 Disable Input 1 is Error (IN1ERR)
D3 Disable Input 2 is Error (IN2ERR)
D4 Disable Input 3 is Error (IN3ERR)
D5 Disable Range High and Low Limit Reversal Alarm (REVSCL)
D6 Disable Input 12 Deviation Transfinite (DEV12)
D7 Disable Input 13 Deviation Transfinite (DEV13)
D8 Disable Input 23 Deviation Transfinite (DEV23)
D9 Disable Input 123 Deviation Transfinite (DEV123)
D10 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

5.3 Eight Input Signal Select Function Block (ISEL8)

Function block ISEL8 can select to output the maximum, minimum, average, low-median value,
high-median or any specified input, according to the value of parameters OPSEL and MODE.

It is a complex function block, running time is 27μs.

486
 Function Block Reference

5.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-7 ISEL8 parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Configurati
Range Maximum
Parameters SCH － on －
Limit
Parameter
Configurati
SCL Range Minimum Limit － on －
Range Parameter
Settings Configurati
Output Engineering
EU － on －
Unit
Parameter
Configurati
DLEN Decimal Digits[0,5] － on －
Parameter
Operation Selection
0=Output Depends
On MODE, and Operation
OPSEL TRUE －
Others Select Parameter
Corresponding
Inputs.Note1
Mode Selection
Settings When OPSEL Is 0,
0=Maximum
Selection, 1=Minimum When OPSEL=0,
Operation
MODE Selection TRUE MODE setting is
Parameter
2= Average Value, 3= effective
Low-Median Value
4=High-Median
ValueNote1, Note2
Enable Input 1 Disable
ENIN1 － Input Pin －
Input Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 2 Disable
ENIN2 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 3 Disable
ENIN3 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 4 Disable
ENIN4 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 5 Disable
ENIN5 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 6 Disable
ENIN6 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
Input 7 Disable
ENIN7 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.

487
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input 8 Disable
ENIN8 － Input Pin －
Switch: OFF=Disable.
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Pin IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin Connect to AI

Extended Output OUT Output － Output Pin －

Parameters Pin ERR
Note1
Set Error Alarm － Output Pin －
WHETHER
Set to be “ON” when
SWOO FUNCTION BLOCK Operation
TRUE function block is
S IS IN OOS STATE(ON Parameter
downloaded first time
stands for OOS State)
Suppress Module
Others Alarm
WHEN AOF=ON, IT Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
IS NOT DISPLAYING Parameter
THE REAL-TIME
ALARM.
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 5.3.3

Note 1. Selection instruction

 ISEL8 has 8 REAL type inputs and gives an output according to the value of OPSEL
and MODE. ENIN1~ENIN8 are the enable keys of input IN1~IN8. When they are
OFF, the corresponding inputs are forbidden and excluded from operation. When
they are ON, the corresponding input are enabled and included in operation.
 When OPSEL is non-zero, output the corresponding input signal (for example: if
OPSEL=2, OUT=IN2; if OPSEL=4, OUT=IN4), whether it is enabled or not.
 When OPSEL=0, output the result operated under specified algorithm according to
MODE. Only those enabled input signals are included in operation. When OPSEL=0,
but there is no enabled input, set ERR=ON and alarm.
 If MODE=0, output the maximum.
 If MODE=1, output the minimum.
 If MODE=2, output the average.
 If MODE=3, output the low-median value.
 If MODE=4, output the high-median value.
 If MODE>4, ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

488
 Function Block Reference

Note 2. Definition of median value

 Whenever the number of flag entered is even, rank them from the large to the small
ones, the two numbers in the middle are called median. The larger one of them is
called high median while the smaller one of them is called low median.
 For example, if there are four numbers, 100, 53, 27 and 18, in that way, 27 is the low
median and 53 is the high median of the four of them.

5.3.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

489
 Function Block Reference

Table 5-8 Panel parameteropera instruction

Function Block
Panel Parameter
Parameter Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Name
Input 1 suppress
IN1 ENIN1 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 2 suppress
IN2 ENIN2 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 3 suppress
IN3 ENIN3 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 4 suppress
IN4 ENIN4 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Mode
Input 5 suppress
IN5 ENIN5 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 6 suppress
IN6 ENIN6 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 7 suppress
IN7 ENIN7 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 8 suppress
IN8 ENIN8 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
If chosen, stands for setting
MAX MODE － － MODE=0 in function block
Properties
If chosen, stands for setting
MIN MODE － － MODE=1 in function block
Properties
Input Value If chosen, stands for setting
Enable AVE MODE √ － MODE=2 in function block
Properties
If chosen, stands for setting
MID-L
MODE － － MODE=3 in function block
OW
Properties
If chosen, stands for setting
MID-
MODE － － MODE=4 in function block
HIGH
Properties
If chosen, OPSEL=0,
conditional output. If not
OPSEL MOD
OPSEL √ － chosen, OPSEL does not equal
Settings E
to 0(reference 1),directly
output.
If Do not chose conditional
output, output number is can
Direct OPSE
OPSEL － [0,8] be set. Setting input number to
Output L
be 0 equals choosing
conditional output.
5.3.3 Flag
Table 5-9 Flag list

Supervision
Flag Description
Evaluation
D0 Enable(SWOOS) Tag Forbidden (OOS)
D1 Disable Error (ERR)
D5 Disable Range High and Low Limit Reversal Alarm (REVSCL)
D7 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

490
 Function Block Reference

5.3.4 Application Example

To output maximum of signals PT_1003A, PT_1003B, PT_1003C, PT_1003D, PT_1003E,

PT_1003F, PT_1003G and PT_1003H, and the operator can choose output method in the flow
chart.

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via ISEL8. The select output for various
analog signals can be performed by the host computer interface via function block tag, and the
output value can be made sure based on the parameters OPSEL and MODE. The analog
select-one-from-many can out put the average, minimum, maximum, H medium value, L medium
value and all input signals of various input signals when required.

Figure 5-1 Programming of ISEL8

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 PT_1003A AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 1

002 PT_1003B AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 2

003 PT_1003C AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 3

004 PT_1003D AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 4

005 PT_1003E AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 5

006 PT_1003F AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 6

007 PT_1003G AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 7

008 PT_1003H AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 8

OPSEL Select Operation
009 M_OPSEL Custom USINT
Tag
010 M_ISEL8 Custom USINT MODE Select Tag
Select-One-from-Many
011 PE_ISEL8 Custom REAL
Output Tag
012 ALM_ ISEL8 Custom BOOL Invalid Alarm Output

ISEL8 can make sure the output value according to parameters OPSEL and MODE.

491
 Function Block Reference

ENIN1~ENIN8 are enabled switches for input IN1~IN8.

Note: the data can be invoked via ISEL8 without custom tag.

 Parameter settings of ISEL8:

 SCH: keep the same with the designed I/O tag

 SLH: keep the same with the designed I/O tag

 EU: keep the same with the designed I/O tag

 MODE: 0

 EN1IN-EN8IN: ON

 No related alarm settings.

5.4 Digital Switch Function Block (DS)

Function block DS can output one of the two BOOL inputs, according to the value of parameter
SW.

It is a simple function block, running time is 1μs.

Table 5-10 DS parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －
Basic When
Parameters SW=ON,O
Output UT=IN2
OUT － Output Pin Related parameter:SW
Pin When
SW=OFF,O
UT=IN1

5.5 Analog Switch Function Block (ASW)

Function block ASW can output one of the two REAL inputs, according to the value of parameter
SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

492
 Function Block Reference

Table 5-11 ASW parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －
When
SW=ON,O
UT=IN2
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin Related parameter:SW
When
SW=OFF,O
UT=IN1
Basic
During output switch, can
Parameters
smooth deviation between
IN1 and IN2 to make it
possible for output to switch
to desired value smoothly.
Operation TFL Filtering Operation Suggesting engineering
TRUE
Parameter T Coefficient Parameter value is 1, meaning the
value one second after
switch is effective value.
Default value is 0.0000,
meaning output switch is
not through smoothing.

5.6 Multi-choice of Eight Digital Signal Select Function Block (SS8)

Function block SS8 can count the input ON of 8 BOOL input signals, and compare the result with
NUM, a preset parameter of number of input ONs. If the input ON is larger than NUM, SS8 outputs
ON, and specifically the forbidden inputs are not counted.

It is a complex function block, whose running time is 6μs.

5.6.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-12 SS8 parameter instruction

493
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to DI
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to DI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to DI
Input IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin Connect to DI
Pin IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin Connect to DI
IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin Connect to DI
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin Connect to DI
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin Connect to DI
Outp If number of ON input is larger
ut OUT or equal to NUM,OUT=ON. － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, OUT=OFF
Input 1Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN1 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Input 2 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN2 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Ba Input 3 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN3 － Input Pin
sic OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Par Input 4 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
am Ena ENIN4 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
ete ble
rs Input Input 5 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN5 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Input 6 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN6 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Input 7 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN7 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Input 8 Disable Switch: ON=correspondent
ENIN8 － Input Pin
OFF=Disable. input enable switch
Configurati
The Number of Pre-Setting ON Related
NUM － on
is 0~8. parameter:OUT
Parameter
WHETHER FUNCTION Set to be “ON” when
Operation
SWOOS BLOCK IS IN OOS STATE(ON TRUE function block is
Othe Parameter
stands for OOS State) downloaded first time
rs
Suppress Module Alarm
WHEN AOF=ON, IT IS NOT Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
DISPLAYING THE REAL-TIME Parameter
ALARM.
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 5.6.2

494
 Function Block Reference

5.6.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
Sign Input 1 suppress
IN1 ENIN1 － －
al switch(unselected=suppress)
Input Input 2 suppress
Swit IN2 ENIN2 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
ch
Input 3 suppress
IN3 ENIN3 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 4 suppress
IN4 ENIN4 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)

495
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
Input 5 suppress
IN5 ENIN5 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 6 suppress
IN6 ENIN6 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 7 suppress
IN7 ENIN7 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Input 8 suppress
IN8 ENIN8 － －
switch(unselected=suppress)
Pred
ictive
Num
Number Read only, set in function Properties
ber NUM 0 [0,8]
of ON settings
of
ON
Input
5.6.3 Flag
Supervision
Flag Description
Evaluation
D0 Enable(SWOOS) Tag Forbidden (OOS)
D1 Enable(AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

5.7 USINT Select Function Block (USINTSW)

Function block USINTSW can output one of the USINT input signals, according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-13 USINTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input
Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －
Basic When
Parameters SW=ON,OUT=I
Output N2 Related
OUT － Output Pin
Pin When parameter: SW
SW=OFF,OUT=I
N1

496
 Function Block Reference

5.8 UINT Select Function Block (UNITSW)

Function block UNITSW can output one of the two UINT input signals according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-14 UINTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －
Basic When
Parameters SW=ON,OUT=I
Output N2 Related
OUT － Output Pin
Pin When parameter:SW
SW=OFF,OUT=I
N1

5.9 UDINT Select Function Block (UDINTSW)

Function block UDINTSW can output one of the UDINT input signals according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-15 UDINTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Parameters Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －

497
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
When
Output OU SW=ON,OUT=IN2 Related
－ Output Pin
Pin T When parameter:SW
SW=OFF,OUT=IN1

5.10 SINT Select Function Block (SINTSW)

Function block SINTSW can output one of the two SINT input signals according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-16 SINTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input
Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Basic SW Switch － Input Pin －
Parameters When
Output SW=ON,OUT=IN2 Related
OUT － Output Pin
Pin When parameter:SW
SW=OFF,OUT=IN1

5.11 INT Select Function Block (INTSW)

Function block INTSW can output one of the two INT input signals according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-17 INTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －

498
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameters Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
SW Switch － Input Pin －
When
SW=ON,OUT
Output =IN2 Related
OUT － Output Pin
Pin When parameter:SW
SW=OFF,OU
T=IN1

5.12 DINT Select Function Block (DINTSW)

Function block DINTSW can output one of the two DINT input signals according to the value of
parameter SW.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 2μs.

Table 5-18 DINTSW parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input
Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Basic SW Switch － Input Pin －
Parameters When
Output SW=ON,OUT=IN2 Related
OUT － Output Pin
Pin When parameter:SW
SW=OFF,OUT=IN1

5.13 16-channel Digital Selection Function Block (BSEL16)

Function block BSEL16 can select one channel input of 16 channels input to output via the serial
number selection parameter.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 27μs.

499
 Function Block Reference

Table 5-19 BSEL16 parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin －
IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin －
IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin －
IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin －
Input
Pin IN9 Input 9 － Input Pin －
IN10 Input 10 － Input Pin －
IN11 Input 11 － Input Pin －
Basic IN12 Input 12 － Input Pin －
Parameters
IN13 Input 13 － Input Pin －
IN14 Input 14 － Input Pin －
IN15 Input 15 － Input Pin －
IN16 Input 16 － Input Pin －
OPSEL Select NO.(0= Hold) － Input Pin Range is [0,16]
When OPSEL=0,output
remains the same with
the value of last round.
When OPSEL is not
Output
OUT equal to 0,chose an － Output Pin －
Pin
output according to the
value of OPSEL. For
instance, when
OPSEL=8,OUT=IN8

500
 Function Block Reference

5.14 Extended Two Input Signal Selector Function Block (TWOSELX)

Function Block TWOSELX can select to output one of two input signals according to the setting
MODE.

It is a complex function block, whose running time is 8μs.

5.14.1 Prameter Instruction

Table 5-20 TWOSELX parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Preset
Operation
DL Deviation TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Limit
Parameter
Selection Operation
MODE Note2 TRUE －
Mode Parameter
Range Configurati
SCH Maximum － on －
Limit Parameter
Basic
Parameters Range Configurati
SCL Minimum － on －
Configuration Limit Parameter
Parameter Output Configurati
EU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Configurati
Decimal
DLEN － on －
Digits[0,5]
Parameter
Extended IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input 1
Quality
IN1ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
Input (OFF=input is
Pin good)
Input 2
Quality
IN2ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)

501
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
When
MODE=0,
OUT=(IN1+IN
2)/2
When
MODE=1,
OUT=minimu
m
When
MODE=2, Related
OUT OUT=maximu － Output Pin parameter:MODE
Note2
m Refer to
Output When
Pin MODE=3,
OUT=IN1
When
MODE=4,
OUT=IN2
When
MODE>4, set
manually；
Module Illegal
ERR AlarmNote1, － Output Pin －
Note2

FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 5.14.3

WHETHER
FUNCTION
Set to be “ON”
BLOCK IS IN
Operation when function block
SWOOS OOS TRUE
Parameter is downloaded first
STATE(ON
time
stands for
OOS State)
Operation Suppress
Parameter Module Alarm
WHEN
AOF=ON, IT
Operation
AOF IS NOT TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
DISPLAYING
THE
REAL-TIME
ALARM.
ADPTIN1=ON
Monitoring
ADPTIN1 , then IN1is － －
Parameter
valid
ADPTIN2=ON
Supervision Monitoring
ADPTIN2 , then IN2is － －
Parameter Parameter
valid
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV12 － －
IN1 AND IN2 Parameter
OVERLIMIT

Note 1. Signal detecting principle

 Refer to 5.1.1 Note1

502
 Function Block Reference

Note 2. Selection instruction

1. When MODE=0, 1 or 2:

1) If both of two inputs are invalid, the output is incredible. Set error alarm ERR=ON, and
hold the output value of last period.

2) If one of two inputs is invalid, output the value of the other valid input.

3) If both of two inputs are valid:

 If the deviation between the two inputs exceeds the setting deviation limit DL, set error
alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

 If the deviation between the two inputs does not exceed DL, then select to output the
average, minimum, or maximum of the two input signals, according to the value of
MODE.

1. When MODE=3, output the input value of the specified transmitter, that is the value of
IN1. If IN1ERR=ON means that input 1 is invalid, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the
output value of last period.

2. When MODE=4, output the input value of the specified transmitter, that is the value of
IN2. If IN2ERR=ON means that input 2 is invalid, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the
output value of last period.

3. When MODE>4, set error alarm ERR=ON, and the output could be set manually.

503
 Function Block Reference

5.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 5-21 HMI Parameters list

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name

Work If chosen, stands for setting

Maximu
Mode MODE － － MODE= in function block
m
Properties MODE=2
If chosen, stands for setting
Minimu
MODE － － MODE= in function block
m
Properties MODE=1

504
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name
If chosen, stands for setting
Average MODE √ － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=0
If chosen, stands for setting
Input 1 MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=3
If chosen, stands for setting
Input 2 MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=4
Set
If chosen, stands for setting
Value
MODE － － MODE= in function block
Manuall
Properties MODE>4
y
If chosen, input 1 is valid, Read
Input1 ADPTIN1 √ ON/OFF only, modify in function block
Effecti Properties
ve
Input If chosen, input 2 is valid, read
Input2 ADPTIN2 √ ON/OFF only, modify in function block
Properties
Predefined Error
DL 100.000 0~(SCH - SCL) Refer to 5.1.1
Limit
5.14.3 Flag
Table 5-22 FLAG list

Flag Description
D0 Tag Forbidden (OOS)
D1 Error (ERR)
D2 Input 1 Quality is Error (IN1ERR)
D3 Input 2 Quality is Error (IN2ERR)

D5 Range High and Low Limit Reversal Alarm (REVSCL)

D6 Input 12 Deviation Overlimit (DEV12)

D10 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
5.14.4 Application Example

It can output the average of TE_0610 and TE_0611 for the technical field when required, and the
operator can choose the output method in the flow chart.

Figure 5-2 Diagram of analog select-one-from-two

505
 Function Block Reference

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via TWOSELX. The host computer interface
can select and output 2 analog signals via function block tag. According to the 2 REAL type input
signals and by selecting the value of type parameter MODE, it can select and output the average,
maximum, minimum, input signal 1 and input signal 2 of 2 input signals. Many functions can be
performed by assigning values for MODE in TWOSELX.

Figure 5-3 Programming of TWOSELX

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 5-23 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_0610 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 1

002 TE_0611 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 2

Select-one-from-two Output
004 TE_TWOSEL Custom REAL MODE=0
Tag
 Parameter settings of TWOSELX:

 SCH: keep the same with designed I/O tag

 SLH: keep the same with designed I/O tag

 EU: keep the same with designed I/O tag

 MODE: 0

 If one input error occurs to TWOSELX, TWOSELX will ignore the error input and take
another normal input to calculate the average. The loop error alarm (ERR) generates.

 If two errors occur to TWOSELX, it will take the last normal value. The loop error alarm
(ERR) generates.

 If the deviation of two input values is larger than the preset DL (set as DL=100 in default),
TWOSELX will take the last deviated value in normal range. The loop error alarm (ERR)
generates.

Notice:

1. The parameter MODE of TWOSEL can only be set in the program. The MODE pin of
TWOSELX can be selected and used. The related tag can be invoked via pin. Operator
can select at the monitoring interface.

2. When MODE=0, MODE=1, MODE=2

506
 Function Block Reference

 If both inputs are invalid, set ERR=ON, output holds the value of last period.

 If one input is invalid, the output is equal to the valid input value.

 If both inputs are valid, when the deviation of two input signals exceeds the preset DL,
the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, output the value of last period; when the deviation
of two input signals does not exceed the preset DL, output the average, maximum and
minimum of the two input signals.

 When MODE=3 or MODE=4, the output is equal to the input value of transducer, output
the value of IN1 or IN2. If the input is invalid, the output is incredible, set ERR=ON,
output holds the value of last period.

 When MODE is equal to other values, set ERR=ON, output holds the value of last period.

5.15 Extended Three Input Signal Selector Function Block

(THRSELX)

Function Block THESELX can select to output one of three input signals according to the setting
MODE.

It is a complex function block, whose running time is 12μs.

5.15.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-24 THRSELX parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Preset
Operation
Parameters DL Deviation TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Limit
Parameter
Selection Operation Related
MODE TRUE
Mode Parameter parameter:OUT
Configuration Range Configurati
Parameter SCH Maximum － on －
Limit Parameter
Range Configurati
SCL Minimum － on －
Limit Parameter

507
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output Configurati
EU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Configurati
Decimal
DLEN － on －
Digits[0,5]
Parameter
Extended IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input 1
Quality
IN1ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
Input
Pin Input 2
Quality
IN2ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
Input 3
Quality
IN3ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
When
MODE=0,
OUT=(IN1+IN
2+IN3)/2
When
MODE=1,
OUT=minimu
m
When
MODE=2,
OUT=maximu
m
When
OUT MODE=3, － Output Pin Refer toNote1
OUT=medium
When
Output MODE=4,
Pin OUT=IN1
When
MODE=5,
OUT=IN2
When
MODE=6,
OUT=IN3
When
MODE>6, set
manually
Related
Module Illegal
ERR Note1 － Output Pin IN1ERR/IN2ERR/IN3
Alarm
ERR/DL
Set to be “ON” when
FLAG Flag TRUE Output Pin function block is
downloaded first time

508
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
WHETHER
FUNCTION
BLOCK IS IN
Operation
SWOOS OOS TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
STATE(ON
stands for
OOS State)
Operation Suppress
Parameter Module Alarm
WHEN
AOF=ON, IT Set to be “ON” when
Operation
AOF IS NOT TRUE function block is
Parameter
DISPLAYING downloaded first time
THE
REAL-TIME
ALARM.
ADPTIN1=ON
ADPTIN Monitoring
, then IN1is － －
1 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN2=ON
ADPTIN Monitoring
, then IN2is － －
2 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN3=ON
ADPTIN Monitoring
, then IN3is － －
3 Parameter
valid
Supervision DIFFERENC
Parameter E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV12 － －
IN1 AND IN2 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV23 － －
IN2 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV13 － －
IN1 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT

Note 1. Selection instruction

When MODE=0,1,2 or 3:

If all of the three input signals are invalid, meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and hold
the output value of last period.

If two of the three input signals are invalid, output the value of the value of the valid one.

If one of the three input signals is invalid:

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals does not exceed the deviation limit
(DL), output the corresponding value according to the value of MODE: when MODE=0,
output the average; MODE=1, output the minimum; when MODE=2, output the
maximum; when MODE=3,if IN1 and IN3 are invalid, output the value of IN2, if IN2 is

509
 Function Block Reference

invalid, output the value of IN1.

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL),
meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

If all of the three input signals are valid:

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals exceed the deviation limit (DL),
set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

 If one deviation between two input signals does not exceed the deviation limit (DL), while
the other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals exceed the
deviation limit (DL), output the corresponding value according to the value of MODE:
when MODE=0, output the average of the two input signals whose deviation does not
exceed the deviation limit (DL); when MODE=1, output the minimum value of the two
input signals; when MODE=2, output the maximum value of the two input signals; when
MODE=3, output IN2 if IN1 and IN3 exceed, or output IN1 if IN2 exceeds.

 If one deviation between two input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL), while the
other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals do not exceed
the deviation limit (DL), output the value of the third input signal, median value of the
three input signals.

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals do not exceed the deviation limit,
output the average, minimum maximum or median value of the three input signals
according to the value of MODE.

When MODE=4, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN1. If IN1ERR=ON,
meaning input 1 is invalid, set error alarm ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

When MODE=5, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN2. If IN2ERR=ON,
meaning input 2 is invalid, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

When MODE=6, output the input value of the specified transmitter, value of IN3. If IN3ERR=ON,
meaning input 3 is invalid, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

When MODE=7, set error alarm ERR=ON, and the output could be set manually.

When MODE=8, if one of the 3 inputs is bad, and the difference of the other two are not over set
limit, output the average value of the 2 good points. Otherwise, output as MODE=3.

510
 Function Block Reference

5.15.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 5-25 HMI Parameters list

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name

Work If chosen, stands for setting

Mode MAX MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=2
If chosen, stands for setting
MIN MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=1
If chosen, stands for setting
AVG MODE √ － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=0
If chosen, stands for setting
MID MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=3
If chosen, stands for setting
IN1 MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=4

511
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial
Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Name
If chosen, stands for setting
IN2 MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=5
If chosen, stands for setting
IN3 MODE － － MODE= in function block
Properties MODE=6
Set
If chosen, stands for setting
Value
MODE － － MODE= in function block
Manu
Properties MODE>6
ally
If chosen, input 1 is valid, read
ADPTIN1=ON,
IN1 √ ON/OFF only, modify in function block
then IN1is valid
Properties
Effective If chosen, input 2 is valid, read
ADPTIN2=ON ,
Input IN2 √ ON/OFF only, modify in function block
then IN2is valid
Properties
If chosen, input 3 is valid, read
ADPTIN3=ON ,
IN3 √ ON/OFF only, modify in function block
then IN3is valid
Properties
0~(SCH -
Predefined Error DL 100.000 Refer to 5.1.1
SCL)
5.15.3 Flag
Table 5-26 FLAG list

Flag Description
D0 Tag Forbidden (OOS)
D1 Error (ERR)
D2 Input 1 Quality is Error (IN1ERR)
D3 Input 2 Quality is Error (IN2ERR)
D4 Input 3 Quality is Error (IN3ERR)
D5 Range High and Low Limit Reversal Alarm (REVSCL)
D6 Input 12 Deviation Overlimit (DEV12)
D7 Input 13 Deviation Overlimit (DEV13)
D8 Input 23 Deviation Overlimit (DEV23)
D9 Input 123 Deviation Overlimit (DEV123)
D10 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
5.15.4 Application Example

As shown in the figure below, output the medium value of signals TE_0610, TE_0611 and
TE_0612 for technical fields can be achieved. Operator can select output method in the flow chart.

512
 Function Block Reference

TAG
_51

TAG Y TAG
_52 _54
SS

TAG
_53

Figure 5-4 Diagram of analog select-one-from-three

Its programming is shown below and can be performed via THRSELX. The host computer
interface can select and output the 3 analog signals via function block tag. According to the 3
REAL type input signals and by selecting the value of type parameter MODE, the function block
can select and output the average, minimum, maximum, medium, input signal 1, input signal 2 and
input signal 3.

Figure 5-5 Programming of THRSELX

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 5-27 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_0610 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 1

002 TE_0611 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 2

003 TE_0612 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag 3

Tag of Function Select-one-from-three
005 TE_THRSEL
Block Output Tag
 Parameter settings of THRSELX:

 SCH: keep the same with designed I/O tag.

 SLH: keep the same with designed I/O tag.

 EU: keep the same with designed I/O tag.

 MODE: 3

513
 Function Block Reference

 If one input error occurs to THRSELX, it will be ignored, and THRSELX will figure out the
average of other two normal inputs.

 If two input errors occur to THRSELX, they will be ignored, and THRSELX will take the
other normal input value.

 If the deviation of the two input values is larger than the preset DL (set DL=100 in default),
THRSELX will ignore the two incredible inputs, and take the other normal input value.

 If three errors occur to THRSELX, it will keep the value before error, and the loop error
alarm (ERR) generates.

 If the deviations between each two input values of three are larger than the preset DL
(set DL=100 in default), THRSELX will keep the last value in normal deviation, and the
loop error alarm (ERR) generates.

Notice:

 MODE can only be set in program in the THRSEL. The MODE pin of THRSELX can
be select and used. The related tag can be invoked by pin. Operator can select at
the monitoring interface.

5.16 Maximum Selection Function Block (THRSELH)

Function Block THRSELH can select to output the available maximum value of three input signals,
according to their qualities, deviations and values.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 12μs.

5.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-28 THRSELH parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Preset Output will be

Operation Operation
Parameters DL Deviation TRUE affected if deviation
Parameter Parameter
Limit is larger than DL
Configuration Range Configurati
Parameter SCH Maximum － on －
Limit Parameter

514
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Range Configurati
SCL Minimum － on －
Limit Parameter
Output Configurati
EU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Configurati
Decimal
DLEN － on －
Digits[0,5]
Parameter
Extended IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input 1
Quality
Connect to
IN1ERR Direction － Input Pin Note1
AI.ERR
(OFF=input
is good)
Input
Pin Input 2
Quality
Connect to
IN2ERR Direction － Input Pin
AI.ERRNote1
(OFF=input
is good)
Input 3
Quality
Connect to
IN3ERR Direction － Input Pin Note1
AI.ERR
(OFF=input
is good)
Choose the
largest one
OUT of the three － Output Pin －
inputs as
Output output.
Pin
Module Related
ERR Illegal － Output Pin IN1ERR/IN2ERR/IN
AlarmNote1 3ERR/DL
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
WHETHER
FUNCTION
BLOCK IS
Operation
SWOOS IN OOS TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
STATE(ON
stands for
OOS State)
Operation Suppress
Parameter Module
Alarm
WHEN Set to be “ON” when
AOF=ON, IT Operation function block is
AOF TRUE
IS NOT Parameter downloaded first
DISPLAYIN time
G THE
REAL-TIME
ALARM.

Supervision ADPTIN1=
Monitoring
Parameter ADPTIN1 ON, then － －
Parameter
IN1is valid

515
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
ADPTIN2=
Monitoring
ADPTIN2 ON , then － －
Parameter
IN2is valid
ADPTIN3=
Monitoring
ADPTIN3 ON , then － －
Parameter
IN3is valid
DIFFEREN
CE
BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV12 － －
IN1 AND Parameter
IN2
OVERLIMIT
DIFFEREN
CE
BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV23 － －
IN2 AND Parameter
IN3
OVERLIMIT
DIFFEREN
CE
BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV13 － －
IN1 AND Parameter
IN3
OVERLIMIT

Note: selection instruction

1. If all of the three input signals are invalid, meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON,
and hold the output value of last period.

2. If two of the three input signals are invalid, output the value of the valid one.

3. If one of the three input signals is invalid:

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals does not exceed the deviation limit
(DL), output their maximum value

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL),
meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

4. If all of the three input signals are valid:

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals exceed the deviation limit (DL),
set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=8, IN3=14. N3-IN1=12, IN3-IN2=6, IN2-IN1=6, the deviations

between each two of the three values exceed 4, thus the output value is equal to the
value of last cycle.

 If one deviation between two input signals does not exceed the deviation limit (DL), while
the other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals exceed the
deviation limit (DL), output the maximum value of the two input signals.

516
 Function Block Reference

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=8, IN3=10. N3-IN1=8, IN3-IN2=2, IN2-IN1=6, the deviations

between IN1-IN2 and IN1-IN3 exceed the limit, IN3＞IN2, thus the output value is
equal to the value of IN3, and OUT=10.

 If one deviation between two input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL), while the
other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals do not exceed
the deviation limit (DL), output the value of the third input signal, median value of the
three input signals.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=5, IN3=8. N3-IN1=6, IN3-IN2=3, IN2-IN1=3, the deviation

between IN1-IN3 exceed the limit, while the deviations between IN1-IN2 and
IN2-IN3 do not exceed the limit, IN3＞IN2, thus the output value is equal to the
medium value IN2, and OUT=5.

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals do not exceed the deviation limit,
output the average, minimum maximum or median value of the three input signals
according to the value of MODE.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=3, IN3=4. N3-IN1=2, IN3-IN2=1, IN2-IN1=1, all deviations

between the three values do not exceed the limit 4, thus the output value is equal to
the maximum value IN3, and OUT=4.
5.16.2 Flag
Table 5-29 Flag

Flag Instruction
D4 IN3 Quality is Bad
D3 IN2 Quality is Bad
D2 IN1 Quality IS Bad
D5 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D1 Error
D0 Disabled
D6 IN12 Error Exceeds Limit
D7 IN13 Error Exceeds Limit
D8 IN23 Error Exceeds Limit
D9 IN123 Error Exceeds Limit
D10 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

5.17 Median Selection Function Block (THRSELM)

Function Block THRSELM can select to output the available median value of three input signals,
according to their qualities, deviations and values.

517
 Function Block Reference

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 12μs.

5.17.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-30 THRSELM parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Preset
Operation Operation
DL Deviation TRUE －
Parameter Parameter
Limit
Range Configurati
SCH Maximum － on －
Limit Parameter

Basic Range Configurati

Parameters SCL Minimum － on －
Configuration Limit Parameter
Parameter Output Configurati
EU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Configurati
Decimal
DLEN － on －
Digits[0,5]
Parameter
Extended IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input 1
Quality
IN1ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
Input
Pin Input 2
Quality
IN2ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
Input 3
Quality
IN3ERR Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
(OFF=input is
good)
Choose the
Output median of the
Pin OUT － Output Pin －
three inputs
Note1
as output.

518
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Related
Module Illegal
ERR － Output Pin IN1ERR/IN2ERR/IN
Alarm
3ERR/DL
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
WHETHER
FUNCTION
BLOCK IS IN
Operation
SWOOS OOS TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
STATE(ON
stands for
OOS State)
Operation Suppress
Parameter Module Alarm
WHEN
Set to be “ON” when
AOF=ON, IT
Operation function block is
AOF IS NOT TRUE
Parameter downloaded first
DISPLAYING
time
THE
REAL-TIME
ALARM.
ADPTIN1=O
ADPTIN Monitoring
N, then IN1is － －
1 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN2=O
ADPTIN Monitoring
N , then IN2is － －
2 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN3=O
ADPTIN Monitoring
N , then IN3is － －
3 Parameter
valid
Supervision DIFFERENC
Parameter E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV12 － －
IN1 AND IN2 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV23 － －
IN2 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV13 － －
IN1 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT

Note1: selection instruction

1. If all of the three input signals are invalid, meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON,
and hold the output value of last period.

2. If two of the three input signals are invalid, output the value of the valid one.

3. If one of the three input signals is invalid:

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals does not exceed the deviation limit
(DL), output IN2 if IN1 and IN3 are invalid, or output IN1 if IN2 is invalid.

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL),

519
 Function Block Reference

meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

4. If all of the three input signals are valid:

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals exceed the deviation limit (DL),
set ERR=ON, and hold the output value of last period.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=8, IN3=14. N3-IN1=12, IN3-IN2=6, IN2-IN1=6, the deviations

between each two of the three values exceed 4, thus the output value is equal to the
value of last cycle.

 If one deviation between two input signals does not exceed the deviation limit (DL), while
the other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals exceed the
deviation limit (DL), output IN2 if IN1 and IN3 exceed, or output IN1 if IN2 exceeds.

 If one deviation between two input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL), while the
other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals do not exceed
the deviation limit (DL), output the value of the third input signal, median value of the
three input signals.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=5, IN3=8. N3-IN1=6, IN3-IN2=3, IN2-IN1=3, the deviation

between IN1-IN3 exceed the limit, while the deviations between IN1-IN2 and
IN2-IN3 do not exceed the limit, thus the output value is equal to the medium value
IN2, and OUT=5.

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals do not exceed the deviation limit,
output the average, minimum maximum or median value of the three input signals
according to the value of MODE.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=3, IN3=4. N3-IN1=2, IN3-IN2=1, IN2-IN1=1, all deviations

between the three values do not exceed the limit 4, thus the output value is equal to
the maximum value IN3, and OUT=4.

5.17.2 Flag
Table 5-31 Flag

Flag Instruction
D4 IN3 Quality is Bad
D3 IN2 Quality is Bad
D2 IN1 Quality is Bad
D5 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D1 Error
D0 Disabled
D6 IN12 Error Exceeds Limit

520
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D7 IN13 Error Exceeds Limit
D8 IN23 Error Exceeds Limit
D9 IN123 Error Exceeds Limit
D10 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

5.18 Minimum Selection Function Block (THRSELL)

Function Block THRSELL can select to output the available minimum value of three input signals,
according to their qualities, deviations and values.

It is a simple function block, whose running time is 12μs.

5.18.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 5-32 THRSELL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Preset
Operation Operation
DL Deviation TRUE －
Parameter Parameter
Limit
Range Configurati
SCH Maximum － on －
Limit Parameter

Basic Range Configurati

Parameters SCL Minimum － on －
Configuration Limit Parameter
Parameter Output Configurati
EU Engineering － on －
Unit Parameter
Configurati
Decimal
DLEN － on －
Digits[0,5]
Parameter
Extended Input IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Parameters Pin
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin Connect to AI
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin Connect to AI
Input 1
Quality
IN1ER
Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
R
(OFF=input is
good)

521
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input 2
Quality
IN2ER
Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
R
(OFF=input is
good)
Input 3
Quality
IN3ER
Direction － Input Pin Connect to AI.ERR
R
(OFF=input is
good)
Choose the
smallest of
OUT the three － Output Pin －
input as
Output output
Note1

Pin
Related
Module Illegal
ERR － Output Pin IN1ERR/IN2ERR/I
Alarm
N3ERR/DL
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
WHETHER
FUNCTION
BLOCK IS IN
SWOO Operation
OOS TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
S Parameter
STATE(ON
stands for
OOS State)
Operation Suppress
Parameter Module Alarm
WHEN Set to be “ON”
AOF=ON, IT when function
Operation
AOF IS NOT TRUE block is
Parameter
DISPLAYING downloaded first
THE time
REAL-TIME
ALARM.
ADPTIN1=O
ADPTI Monitoring
N, then IN1is － －
N1 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN2=O
ADPTI Monitoring
N , then IN2is － －
N2 Parameter
valid
ADPTIN3=O
ADPTI Monitoring
N , then IN3is － －
N3 Parameter
valid
Supervision DIFFERENC
Parameter E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV12 － －
IN1 AND IN2 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV23 － －
IN2 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT
DIFFERENC
E BETWEEN Monitoring
DEV13 － －
IN1 AND IN3 Parameter
OVERLIMIT

522
 Function Block Reference

Note: definition of mode selected

1. If all of the three input signals are invalid, meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON,
and hold the output value of last period.

2. If two of the three input signals are invalid, output the value of the valid one.

3. If one of the three input signals is invalid:

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals does not exceed the deviation limit
(DL), output their minimum value

 If the deviation between the two valid input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL),
meaning the output is incredible, set ERR=ON, and keep the output value of last period.

4. If all of the three input signals are valid:

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals exceed the deviation limit (DL),
set ERR=ON, and keep the output value of last period.

 If DL=4, IN1=2,IN2=8, IN3=14. N3-IN1=12, IN3-IN2=6, IN2-IN1=6, the deviation

between each two of them exceeds 4, thus the output value is the same as last
period.

 If other deviation between two input signals does not exceed the deviation limit (DL),
while the other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals
exceed the deviation limit (DL), output the minimum value of the two input signals.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=8, IN3=10. N3-IN1=8, IN3-IN2=2, IN2-IN1=6, the deviations

between IN1-IN2, and IN1-IN3 exceed the limit, the deviation between IN2-IN3 does
not exceed the limit, IN3＞IN2, the output value is the same as IN2, OUT=8.

 If the deviation between two input signals exceeds the deviation limit (DL), while the
other two deviations between the third input signal and these two signals do not exceed
the deviation limit (DL), output the value of the third input signal, median value of the
three input signals.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=5, IN3=8. N3-IN1=6, IN3-IN2=3, IN2-IN1=3, the deviation

between IN1-IN3 exceeds the limit, while the deviations between IN1-IN2 and
IN2-IN3 do not exceed the limit, the output value is median value IN2, OUT=5.

 If all of the deviations between every two input signals do not exceed the deviation limit,
output minimum value of the three input signals.

 If DL=4, IN1=2, IN2=3, IN3=4. N3-IN1=2, IN3-IN2=1, IN2-IN1=1, the deviations

between them do not exceed the limit 4, thus the output value is the maximum IN1,
OUT=2.

523
 Function Block Reference

5.18.2 Flag
Table 5-33 Flag

Flag Instruction
D4 IN3 Quality is Bad
D3 IN2 Quality is Bad
D2 IN1 Quality is Bad
D5 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D1 Error
D0 Disabled
D6 IN12 Error Exceeds Limit
D7 IN13 Error Exceeds Limit
D8 IN23 Error Exceeds Limit
D9 IN123 Error Exceeds Limit
D10 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

524
 Function Block Reference

Section 6 Arithmetic Function Block Library

There are 44 simple function blocks in arithmetic function block library.

6.1 ADD Function Block (ADD)

Function block ADD implements the addition and correct of the two REAL inputs. Parameter
instruction refers to table below.

The running time of this function block is 4μs.

Table 6-1 Parameter Instruction of ADD

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
Output OUT  ( IN1 * K1  C1)  ( IN 2 * K 2  C
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin
Operation
Basic K1 Offset Coefficient of Input 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Parameters
Operation
Operation K2 Offset Coefficient of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter
Paramete
r Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

6.2 Eight-Channel ADD Function Block (ADD8)

Function block ADD8 implements the addition of the eight REAL inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 8μs.

525
 Function Block Reference

Table 6-2 ADD8 parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin －
Input IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin －
Pin IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin －
OUT=IN1+IN2+I
Output
OUT N3+IN4+IN5+IN － Output Pin －
Pin
6+IN7+IN8

6.3 Subtraction Function Block (SUB)

Function block SUB implements the correct and subtraction of the two REAL inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

6.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 6-3 SUB parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Parameters Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OU OUT=(IN1*K1+C1)-
Output Pin － Output Pin －
T (IN2*K2+C2)
Operation Offset Coefficient of Operation
K1 TRUE －
Parameter Input 1 Parameter

526
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Offset Coefficient of Operation
K2 TRUE －
Input 2 Parameter
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter
6.3.2 Application Example

As shown in the figure below, the D-values between former and later temperature, pressure,
flowrate and water level of tank and pipe need to be calculated often. The system in the figure
below can achieve the calculation and display of the D-value of two pressure signals (signal
difference signal) and enable the alarm of pressure difference signal.

Figure 6-1 Diagram of D-value

Apply SUB for D-value calculation, and apply PVIEX for data display to achieve fault process and
alarm. The display for D-values of host computer interface can be achieved via function block tag.
The instruction of function block and examples are shown below.

Table 6-4 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 PI_101 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag Field AI

002 PI_102 AI (Input) Analog Input Tag Field AI

Tag of Function Pressure Difference
003 DPI_101 Tag Display
Block Display

Its programming is shown below.

527
 Function Block Reference

Figure 6-2 Programming of pressure difference calculation

 Parameter settings of PVEX:

 INSCH: keeps the same as the range and unit of I/O signal

 INSCL: keeps the same as the range and unit of I/O signal

 INEU: keeps the same as the range and unit of I/O signal

 When input error occurs to either of the two input signal, and the input error status “ERR”
will be sent to PVIEX, and the loop error alarm will be generated. The D-value is the
same with the value before error occurred.

 The three levels H/L limits alarms of analog input tag can be set when required. The
general definitions for three levels alarms: H/L third-level alarms, disabled; HH/LL alarms,
interlock action alarm; H/L alarm, general alarms. The two levels alarms mentioned
below refer to the HH/LL alarms and H/L alarm.

 Other alarms, such as change rate alarm and extended range alarm, etc., are often not
used and set as disabled in default.

Notice:

 The input process variables should be same (such as relative temperature and
absolute temperature, relative pressure and absolute pressure).

6.4 (Multiplication) Function Block (MUL)

Function block MUL implements the correct and multiplication of the two REAL inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

Table 6-5 MUL parameter instruction

528
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OUT=(IN1*K1+C1)
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
*(IN2*K2+C2)
Offset Coefficient Operation
Basic K1 TRUE －
of Input 1 Parameter
Parameters
Offset Coefficient Operation
K2 TRUE －
Operation of Input 2 Parameter
Parameter Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

6.5 Division Function Block (DIV)

Function block DIV implements the correct and division of the two REAL inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to table below.

Its running time is 5μs.

Table 6-6 DIV parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OUT=(IN1*K1+
IN2*K2+C2=0
OUT C1)/(IN2*K2+C － Output Pin
OUT=0
Output Pin 2)
IN2*K2+C2=0
ERR Set Error Alarm － Output Pin
ERR=ON
Basic Offset
Operation
Parameters K1 Coefficient of TRUE －
Parameter
Input 1
Offset
Operation
Operation K2 Coefficient of TRUE －
Parameter
Parameter Input 2
Offset of Input Operation
C1 TRUE －
1 Parameter
Offset of Input Operation
C2 TRUE －
2 Parameter

DIV implements the following algorithm:

529
 Function Block Reference

 When IN 2 * K 2  C 2  0

 OUT  ( IN1 * K1  C1) /( IN 2 * K 2  C 2)

 ERR  OFF
 When IN 2 * K 2  C 2  0
 OUT  0.0
 ERR  ON

6.6 Square Root Function Block (SQRT)

Function block SQRT works out the square root of the REAL input and has the function of
small-signal cutting. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 11μs.

Table 6-7 SQRT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When IN<|DB|, OUT=0
Output Pin OUT When IN≥|DB|, － Output Pin －
OUT  IN * K  C
Basic Operation
Parameters K Offset Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation Operation
Parameter C Offset Of Input TRUE －
Parameter
Small-Signal Cutting no Operation
DB TRUE －
smaller than(0.0) Parameter

6.7 Absolute Value Function Block (ABS)

Function block ABS works out the absolute value of the REAL input. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 5μs.

Table 6-8 ABS parameter instruction

530
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
OUT  IN * K  C
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Basic
Parameters Operation
K Offset Coefficient TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C Offset Of Input TRUE －
Parameter

6.8 EXP Function Block (EXP)

Function block works out the exponent of the REAL input. Parameter instructions refer to table
below.

The running time of this block is 31μs.

Table 6-9 EXP parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －

Output Pin OUT OUT  e IN * K  C －

Output
－
Pin
Basic Operation
Parameters K Offset Coefficient TRUE Paramete －
Operation r
Parameter Operation
C Offset Of Input TRUE Paramete －
r

6.9 POW Function Block (POW)

Function block POW works out the power of the two REAL inputs. Parameter instructions refer to
table below.

The running time of this block is 110μs.

Table 6-10 POW parameter instruction

531
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
When IN1=0.0 and IN2<0.0,
OUT = 0 and ERR = ON
When IN1<0.0,IN2is not
Output OUT integer, OUT = 0,ERR = ON － Output Pin －
Basic Pin Otherwise,
Parameters OUT  K * IN1IN2  C ,
ERR = OFF
ERR Set Error Alarm － Output Pin －
Operation
K Offset Coefficient TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C Offset Of Input TRUE －
Parameter

6.10 Natural Logarithm Function Block (LN)

Function block LN works out the natural logarithm of the REAL input. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 40μs.

Table 6-11 LN parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Pin
When IN≤0.0, OUT = 0,ERR
= ON Otherwise,
Output OUT － Output Pin －
OUT  K * LN ( IN )  C
Basic Pin
,ERR = OFF
Parameters
ERR Set Error Alarm － Output Pin －
Operation
K Offset Coefficient TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C Offset Of Input TRUE －
Parameter

6.11 Logarithm Function Block (LOG)

Function block LOG works out the logarithm of the REAL input. Parameter instructions refer to
table below.

The running time of this block is 41μs.

532
 Function Block Reference

Table 6-12 LOG parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Pin
When IN≤0.0, OUT = 0,ERR
= ON
Output OUT Otherwise, － Output Pin －
Basic Pin OUT  K * LOG( IN )  C ,
Parameters ERR = OFF
ERR Set Error Alarm － Output Pin －
Operation
K Offset Coefficient TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C Offset Of Input TRUE －
Parameter

6.12 Module Function Block (MOD)

Function block MOD works out the modulus of the REAL inputs. Parameter instructions refer to
table below.

The running time of this block is 7μs.

Table 6-13 MOD parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Paramet Pin IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
ers
Result
OUT  ( K 1 * IN1  C1) MOD ( K 2 * IN 2  C Output
OUT When ( K 2 * IN2  C 2)  0 , Set Error － －
Output Pin
Pin Alarm ERR  ON ,output 0
Output
ERR Set Error Alarm － －
Pin
Operati Operation
on K1 Offset Coefficient of Input 1 TRUE Paramete －
Param r
eter Operation
K2 Offset Coefficient of Input 2 TRUE Paramete －
r

533
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE Paramete －
r
Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE Paramete －
r

6.13 Polynomial Function Block (POLY)

Function block POLY works out the six polynomials of the REAL input. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 420μs.

Table 6-14 POLY parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Pin
Result
Output OU OUT  C 0  C1 * IN  C 2 * IN 2  C 3 － Output Pin －
Pin T
 C 4 * IN 4  C 5 * IN 5  C 6 * IN 6
Operation
C0 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C1 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Basic Parameter
Parameters Operation
C2 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation Operation
Parameter C3 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C4 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C5 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter
Operation
C6 Polynomial Coefficient TRUE －
Parameter

6.14 DINT to REAL Function Block (DINT2REAL)

Function Block DINT2REAL coverts the type of the DINT input to REAL. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

534
 Function Block Reference

Table 6-15 DINT2REAL parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Polynomial Coefficient:
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Basic DINT
Parameters Output Polynomial Coefficient:
OUT OUT=IN － Output Pin
Pin REAL

6.15 REAL to DINT Function Block (REAL2DINT)

Function block REAL2DINT converts the type of the REAL input to DINT. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-16 REAL2DINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Polynomial
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Basic Coefficient:REAL
Parameters Polynomial
Output Pin OUT ResultOUT=IN － Output Pin
Coefficient:DINT

6.16 DOUBLE to REAL Function Block (DOUBLE2REAL)

Function block DOUBLE2REAL combines 2 unsigned integer data of 4-byte as a dual-precision

float, and converts it to single precision float to output.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-17 DOUBLE2REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin Low 4-byte Integer
INL － Input Pin －
Parameters Original Code Input

535
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
High 4-byte Integer
INH － Input Pin －
Original Code Input
Output keeps the
Single Precision Float value of last period
OUT － Output Pin
Output when float error
happens.
Errors of float:
error of parsing
Output integer data to
Pin dual-precision
Float Error Indication
float. Overflow
ERR (OFF: No Error; ON: － Output Pin
when dual
Float Error)
precision
converting to
single precision
float.

6.17 INT to REAL Function Block (INT2REAL)

Function block INT2REAL converts the type of the INT input to REAL. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-18 INT2REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Polynomial
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Basic Coefficient:INT
Parameters Polynomial
Output Pin OUT ResultOUT=IN － Output Pin
Coefficient:REAL

6.18 REAL to INT Function Block (REAL2INT)

Function block REAL2INT converts the type of the REAL input to INT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

536
 Function Block Reference

Table 6-19 REAL2INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Polynomial
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Basic Coefficient:REAL
Parameters Result Polynomial
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin
OUT=IN Coefficient:INT

6.19 REAL to LREAL Function Block (REAL2LREAL)

Function block REAL2LREAL converts the type of the REAL input to LREAL. Parameter
instructions refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-20 REAL2LREAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Polynomial
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin
Basic Coefficient:REAL
Parameters Result Polynomial
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin
OUT=IN Coefficient:LREAL

6.20 LREAL to REAL Function Block (LREAL2REAL)

Function block LREAL2REAL converts the type of the LREAL input to REAL. Parameter
instructions refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-21 LREAL2REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

537
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic Pin
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.21 SINT to INT Function Block (SINT2INT)

Function block SINT2INT converts the type of the SINT input to INT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-22 SINT2INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.22 INT to SINT Function Block (INT2SINT)

Function block INT2SINT converts the type of the INT input to SINT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-23 INT2SINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic Pin
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.23 UDINT to DINT Function Block (UDINT2DINT)

Function block UDINT2DINT converts the type of the UDINT input to DINT. Parameter instructions

538
 Function Block Reference

refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-24 UDINT2DINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.24 DINT to UDINT Function Block (DINT2UDINT)

Function block DINT2UDINT converts the type of the DINT input to UDINT. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-25 DINT2UDINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.25 UNIT to INT Function Block (UNIT2INT)

Function block UNIT2INT converts the type of the UNIT input to INT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-26 UNIT2INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

539
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic Calculate the
Parameters Output Pin OUT output value － Output Pin －
OUT=IN

6.26 INT to UNIT Function Block (INT2UNIT)

Function block INT2UNIT converts the type of the INT input to UNIT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-27 INT2UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.27 USINT to SINT Function Block (USINT2SINT)

Function block USINT2SINT converts the type of the UISINT to SINT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-28 USINT2SINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.28 SINT to USINT Function Block (SINT2USINT)

Function block SINT2USINT converts the type of the SINT input to USINT. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

540
 Function Block Reference

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-29 SINT2USINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.29 INT to DINT Function Block (INT2DINT)

Function block INT2DINT converts the type of the INT input to DINT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-30 INT2DINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

6.30 DINT to INT Function Block (DINT2INT)

Function block DINT2INT converts the type of the DINT input to INT. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-31 DINT2INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output Result
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin OUT=IN

541
 Function Block Reference

6.31 BOOL Assignment Sentence Function Block (MOV_BOOL)

Function block MOV_BOOL assigns a BOOL output for the BOOL input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-32 MOV_BOOL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input － Input Pin －
Pin
Output When HOLD=OFF, OUT  IN ；
Basic OUT － Output Pin －
Pin When HOLD=ON, Hold the Output
Parameters
Operati
on HOL Operation
HOLD=ON, hold the Output － －
Param D Parameter
eter

6.32 SINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_SINT)

Function block MOV_SINT assigns a SINT output for the SINT input. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-33 MOV_SINT function block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
OUT=IN;When Output
Basic Output Pin OUT － －
HOLD=ON, Hold the Pin
Parameters Output
Operation
Operation HOL HOLD=ON, hold the
－ Paramete －
Parameter D Output
r

542
 Function Block Reference

6.33 INT Assignment Function Block (MOV_INT)

Function block MOV_INT assigns an INT output for the INT input. Parameter instructions refer to
table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-34 MOV_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
OUT=IN; When Output
Basic Output Pin OUT － －
HOLD=ON, Hold the Pin
Parameters Output
Operation
Operation When HOLD=ON, Hold
HOLD － Paramete －
Parameter the Output
r

6.34 DINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_DINT)

Function block MOV_DINT assigns a DINT output for the DINT input. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-35 MOV_DINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
OUT=IN; When Output
Basic Output Pin OUT － －
HOLD=ON, Hold the Pin
Parameters Output
Operation
Operation When HOLD=ON, Hold
HOLD － Paramete －
Parameter the Output
r

543
 Function Block Reference

6.35 REAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_REAL)

Function block MOV_REAL assigns a REAL output for the REAL input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-36 MOV_REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
Basic OUT=IN; When
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Parameters HOLD=ON, Hold the
Output
Operation When HOLD=ON, Hold Operation
HOLD － －
Parameter the Output Parameter

6.36 LREAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_LREAL)

Function block MOV_LREAL assigns a LREAL output for the LREAL input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-37 MOV_LREAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When
HOLD=OFF,
Basic Output Pin OUT OUT=IN; When － Output Pin －
Parameters HOLD=ON, Hold
the Output
Operation HOL When HOLD=ON, Operation
－ －
Parameter D Hold the Output Parameter

544
 Function Block Reference

6.37 UNIT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UNIT)

Function block MOV_UNIT assigns an UNIT output for the UNIT input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-38 MOV_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
Basic OUT=IN; When
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Parameters HOLD=ON, Hold
the Output
Operation When HOLD=ON, Operation
HOLD － －
Parameter Hold the Output Parameter

6.38 UDINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UDINT)

Function block MOV_UDINT assigns an UDINT output for the UDINT input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 2μs.

Table 6-39 MOV_UDINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When
HOLD=OFF,
Basic Output Pin OUT OUT=IN; When － Output Pin －
Parameters HOLD=ON, Hold
the Output
Operation When HOLD=ON, Operation
HOLD － －
Parameter Hold the Output Parameter

545
 Function Block Reference

6.39 USINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_USINT)

Function block MOV_USINT assigns an USINT output for the USINT input. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 1μs.

Table 6-40 MOV_USINT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
When HOLD=OFF,
Basic OUT=IN; When
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Parameters HOLD=ON, Hold
the Output
Operation When HOLD=ON, Operation
HOLD － －
Parameter Hold the Output Parameter

6.40 Matrix Add Function Block (MADD)

Function block MADD implements the addition of two 3×3 matrixes. Parameter instructions refer to
table below.

The running time of this block is 10μs.

546
 Function Block Reference

Table 6-41 MADD parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameter of
Basic Input Row1 and
Parameters Pin A11 － Input Pin －
Column1 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row1 and
A12 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row1 and
A13 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row2 and
A21 － Input Pin －
Column1 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row2 and
A22 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row2 and
A23 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row3 and
A31 － Input Pin －
Column1 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row3 and
A32 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row3 and
A33 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
A
Parameter of
Row1 and
B11 － Input Pin －
Column1 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
Row1 and
B12 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
Row1 and
B13 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
Row2 and
B21 － Input Pin －
Column1 in Matrix
B

547
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameter of
Row2 and
B22 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
Row2 and
B23 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
B
Parameter of Row
B31 and Column1 in － InpuPin －
Matrix B
Parameter of
Row3 and
B32 － Input Pin －
Column2 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
Row3 and
B33 － Input Pin －
Column3 in Matrix
B
Parameter of
AB1 Row1 and Output
－ －
1 Column1 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB1 Row1 and Output
－ －
2 Column2 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB1 Row1 and Output
－ －
3 Column3 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB2 Row2 and Output
－ －
1 Column1 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
Extended Output AB2 Row2 and Output
Parameters Pin － －
2 Column2 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB2 Row2 and Output
－ －
3 Column3 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB3 Row3 and Output
－ －
1 Column1 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB3 Row3 and Output
－ －
2 Column2 in Matrix Parameter
AB
Parameter of
AB3 Row3 and Output
－ －
3 Column3 in Matrix Parameter
AB

548
 Function Block Reference

Note: MADD implements the following algorithm:

 A11 A12 A13   B11 B12 B13   A11  B11 A12  B12 A13  B13 
A A22 A23 ＋ B21 B22 B23 ＝ A21  B21 A22  B22 A23  B23 
 21
 A31 A32 A33   B31 B32 B33   A31  B31 A32  B32 A33  B33 

6.41 Matrix Multiply Function Block (MMUL)

Function block MMUL implements the multiplication of two 3×3 matrixes. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 30μs.

Table 6-42 MMUL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Input Parameter of Row1

Parameters Pin A11 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row1
A12 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row1
A13 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row2
A21 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A

549
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameter of Row2
A22 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row2
A23 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row3
A31 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row3
A32 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row3
A33 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix A
Parameter of Row1
B11 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row1
B12 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row1
B13 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row2
B21 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row2
B22 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row2
B23 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row3
B31 and Column1 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row3
B32 and Column2 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Parameter of Row3
B33 and Column3 in － Input Pin －
Matrix B
Extended Outp Parameter of Row1
Output
Parameters ut AB11 and Column1 in － －
Parameter
Pin Matrix AB
Parameter of Row1
Output
AB12 and Column2 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row1
Output
AB13 and Column3 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row2
Output
AB21 and Column1 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB

550
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameter of Row2
Output
AB22 and Column2 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row2
Output
AB23 and Column3 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row3
Output
AB31 and Column1 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row3
Output
AB32 and Column2 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB
Parameter of Row3
Output
AB33 and Column3 in － －
Parameter
Matrix AB

Note: MMUL implements the following algorithm:

 A11 A12 A13   B11 B12 B13 

A A22 A23    B21 B22 B23 
 21
 A31 A32 A33   B31 B32 B33 

 A11 B11  A12 B21  A13 B31 A11 B12  A12 B22  A13 B32 A11 B13  A12 B23  A13 B33 

= A21 B11  A22 B 21  A23 B31
 A21 B12  A22 B 22  A23 B32 A21 B13  A22 B 23  A23 B33 
 A31 B11  A32 B 21  A33 B31 A31 B12  A32 B 22  A33 B32 A31 B13  A32 B23  A33 B33 

6.42 UNIT Add Function Block (ADD_UNIT)

Function block ADD_UNIT implements the addition of the two UNIT inputs. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

Table 6-43 ADD_UNIT parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Parameters Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OUT = (IN1 +
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
C1) +(IN2 + C2)

551
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

6.43 INT Add Function Block (ADD_INT)

Function block ADD_INT implements the addition of the two INT inputs. Parameter instructions
refer to table below

The running time of this block is 4μs.

Table 6-44 ADD_INT parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OUT = (IN1 + C1)
Basic Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
+(IN2 + C2)
Parameters
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

6.44 UNIT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_UNIT)

Function block SUB_UNIT implements the subtraction of the two UNIT inputs. Parameter
instructions refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

Table 6-45 SUB_UNIT parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Parameters Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －

552
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OUT = (IN1 + C1) －
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
(IN2 + C2)
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

6.45 INT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_INT)

Function block SUB_INT implements the subtraction of the two INT inputs. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

The running time of this block is 4μs.

Table 6-46 SUB_INT parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 of ADD － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input 2 of ADD － Input Pin －
OUT = (IN1 + C1)
Basic Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
－(IN2 + C2)
Parameters
Operation
C1 Offset of Input 1 TRUE －
Operation Parameter
Parameter Operation
C2 Offset of Input 2 TRUE －
Parameter

553
 Function Block Reference

Section 7 Logical Operation Function Block Library

Logical operation function block library includes 19 simple function blocks and 1 complex function
block.

7.1 AND Function Block

Function block AND implements logical AND operation of two BOOL inputs.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 1μs.

7.1.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-1 AND parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input Pin
Basic IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Parameters
Output OUT = IN1
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin AND IN2

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-2 Relation between input and output of AND

IN1 OFF OFF ON ON

IN2 OFF ON OFF ON
OUT OFF OFF OFF ON

7.1.2 Example

Please refer to 7.14.2 Application Example.

7.2 OR Function Block

Function block OR implements logic OR operation of two BOOL inputs.

554
 Function Block Reference

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 1μs.

7.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-3 OR parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Basic Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Parameters
Output OUT = IN1 OR
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin IN2

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-4 Relation between input and output of OR

IN1 OFF OFF ON ON

IN2 OFF ON OFF ON
OUT OFF ON ON ON
7.2.2 Application Example

Refer to 6.3.2.

7.3 NOT Function Block

Function block NOT implements logical NOT operation of two BOOL inputs.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 1μs.

7.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-5 NOT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters Output OUT =
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin NOT( IN)

The logic relation is shown below.

555
 Function Block Reference

Table 7-6 Relation between input and output of NOT

IN OFF ON
OUT ON OFF
7.3.2 Application Example

Refer to 7.14.2 Application Example.

7.4 XOR Function Block

Function Block XOR implements logical XOR operation of two BOOL inputs.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 1μs.

Table 7-7 XOR parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Input Pin
Basic IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Parameters
Output OUT = IN1
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin XOR IN2

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-8 Relation between input and output of XOR

IN1 OFF OFF ON ON

IN2 OFF ON OFF ON
OUT OFF ON ON OFF

7.5 AND8 Function Block

Function block AND8 implements logical AND operation of eight BOOL inputs. Parameter
instructions refer to Table 7-9.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 2μs.

556
 Function Block Reference

Table 7-9 AND8 parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin －
Input IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin －
Pin IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin －
Output OUT = IN1 AND
Output IN2 AND IN3 AND IN4
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin AND IN5 AND IN6 AND
IN7 AND IN8

7.6 OR8 Function Block

Function block OR8 implements logical OR operation of eight BOOL inputs. Parameter
instructions refer to Table 7-10.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 2μs.

Table 7-10 OR8 parameter instruction

Propertie Applicatio
Name Description Upload n
s
Reference

557
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Applicatio
Name Description Upload n
s
Reference
IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input 3 － Input Pin －
Input IN4 Input 4 － Input Pin －
Pin IN5 Input 5 － Input Pin －
Basic IN6 Input 6 － Input Pin －
Parameters
IN7 Input 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input 8 － Input Pin －
Output OUT =
IN1 OR IN2 OR
Output Output
OUT IN3 OR IN4 OR － －
Pin Pin
IN5 OR IN6 OR
IN7 OR IN8

7.7 WIPEOUT Function Block

Function Block WIPEOUT implements logical AND of the first BOOL input and NOT of the second
BOOL input.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 1μs.

Table 7-11 WIPEOUT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin －
Basic Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin －
Parameters
Output Output OUT=IN1 AND Output
OUT － －
Pin (NOT( IN2)) Pin

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-12 Relation between input and output of WIPEOUT

IN1 OFF OFF ON ON

IN2 OFF ON OFF ON
OUT OFF OFF ON OFF

558
 Function Block Reference

7.8 PVDI Function Block

Function block PVDI implements rising edge count of the BOOL input. Number of rising edges
counted can be displayed on the faceplate.

This function block is a complex function block, and its running time is 30μs.

7.8.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-13 PVDI parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Input － Input Pin －
Parameters
Program Set Rising PRST=ON , reset
PRST － Input Pin
Edge Counter the AV result.
Reset Source
Selection
When RST_OPT=ON,
carry out program reset
control, panel follows
RST_OP the result of program
－ Input Pin －
T control；
When RST_OPT=OFF,
carry out panel reset
control, program
follows the result of
panel control
Input
Pin Jump Accumulate
PHOLD － Input Pin －
Program Suspension
Cumulative
Suspension Control
Source Selection
When
HOLD_OPT=ON, carry
out program pause
control, panel follows
HOLD_
the result of program － Input Pin －
OPT
control.
When
HOLD_OPT=OFF,
carry out panel pause
control, program
follows the result of
panel control.
Operatio Panel Set Rising Edge Operation When RST=ON,
RST －
n Counter Parameter reset AV
Paramet Jump Accumulate Operation
er HOLD － －
Panel Suspension Parameter

559
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Rising Edge Jump
Accumulation
When SWOOS=OFF, if
panel preset
Display the result
HOLD=OFF or Operation
AV TRUE of rising edge jump
program preset Parameter
accumulation
PHOLD=OFF, count
the times of IN switch
from OFF to ON, result
display as AV.
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enable Alarm Parameter
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE －
Suppres Parameter
s
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
PROHIBITED Set to be ON when
OOS FUNCTION Operation function block is
SWOOS TRUE
Settings BLOCK(ON stands for Parameter downloaded first
mode OOS)Note1 time
7.8.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 7-14 Panel parameter instruction

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete Value
r Name

Alarm For the selected item in the

Preference ON ENALM － － program “ON Status
Enable
Alarm(ON)”
For the selected item in the
OFF ENALM － － program “OFF Status
Alarm(OFF)”

560
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete Value
r Name
For the selected item in the
RJump ENALM － － program “ Positive Jump
Alarm(RJUMP)”
For the selected item in the
FJump ENALM － － program “ Negative Jump
Alarm(FJUMP)”
Accum Count the jump from OF to
AV 0 Natural Number
Value ON
Rising Edge Jump
Accumulation Start
PHOLD/H
Start － ON/OFF Corresponding function
OLD
Rising block parameter set to be
Edge OFF
Counter Corresponding function
PHOLD/H
Hold － ON/OFF block parameter set to be
OLD
ON
Corresponding function
PHOLD/H
Reset － ON/OFF block parameter set to be
OLD
OFF
7.8.3 Flag
Table 7-15 Flag list

Monitoring
Flag Description
Evaluation
Permission
D0 Tag Prohibition (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Prohibited ON Status Alarm (ON)
D2 Prohibited OFF Status Alarm (OFF)
D3 Prohibited Positive Jump Alarm (RJUMP)
D4 Prohibited Negative Jump Alarm (FJUMP)
Permission
D5 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
(AOF)

7.9 RS Function Block

Function block RS is a reset-preferred and the most basic time-sequence logical device.
Whenever it is, its output is decided not only by the this-time BOOL input, but also by the previous
status. It is a bitable trigger. Triggered by the input signal, RS switches its output from one stable
status to another stable status, and holds on until the next trigger signal. It has a function of
memory.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 3μs.

561
 Function Block Reference

Table 7-16 RS parameter instruction

Descriptio Application
Name Upload Properties
n Reference
Reset
Input R － Input Pin －
Input
Pin
S Set Input － Input Pin －
Output
DV Output － －
Basic Pin
Parameters Trigger
Output Another
Pin Status Output
RV － －
Output Pin
RV = NOT
DV

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-17 Relation between input and output of RS

Set Input S OFF OFF ON ON

Reset Input R OFF ON OFF ON
Status Output DV Unchanged OFF ON OFF
Another Status
Unchanged ON OFF ON
Output RV

Time-sequence graph is shown in figure 7-17:

Figure 7-1 Time-sequence graph of RS function block

7.10 SR Function Block

Function block SR is a reset-preferred and the most basic time-sequence logical device.
Whenever it is, its output is decided not only by the this-time BOOL input, but also by the previous
status. It is a bitable trigger. Triggered by the input signal, SR switches its output from one stable
status to another stable status, and holds on until the next trigger signal. It has a function of
memory.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 3μs.

562
 Function Block Reference

Table 7-18 SR parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
S SET INPUT － Input Pin －
Input
Pin RESET
R － Input Pin －
INPUT
DV Output － Output Pin －
Basic
Parameters Trigger
Output Another
Pin Status
RV － Output Pin －
Output
RV = NOT
DV

The logic relation is shown below.

Table 7-19 Relation between input and output of SR

Set Input S OFF OFF ON ON

Reset Input R OFF ON OFF ON
Status Output DV Unchanged OFF ON ON
Another Status
Unchanged ON OFF OFF
Output RV

Time-sequence graph is shown in figure:

Figure 7-2 Time-sequence graph of SR function block

7.11 DFF Function Block

Function block DFF is an analog of hardware D trigger. Main parameters: input signal IN, clock
signal input CLK, reset signal R, set signal S, positive output DV, negative output RV. Parameter
instructions refer to table below.

563
 Function Block Reference

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 3μs.

Table 7-20 DFF parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN Input － Input Pin －
CLK Clock Input － Input Pin －
Input
Pin RESET
R － Input Pin －
INPUT
S SET INPUT － Input Pin －
Basic Note1
Parameters DV Output － Output Pin －
Trigger
Output Another
Pin Status
RV － Output Pin －
Output
RV = NOT
Note1
DV

Implementation steps of D trigger:

 If set signal S=ON, output DV=ON and its priority is higher than CLK”s.

 If reset signal R=ON, output DV=OFF and its priority is higher than CLK”s.

 If R=ON and S=ON at the same time, RS holds. If this time comes the rising-edge of CLK,
then output DV=IN.

 Otherwise, DV holds.

 RV is the negative of DV.

Time-sequence graph is shown in figure

564
 Function Block Reference

Figure 7-3 Time sequence graph (DFF)

7.12 COUNTER Function Block

Function block COUNTER is used to count the input pulses and it has increasing counting and
decreasing counting. When MODE=OFF, it is increasing counting. When MODE=ON, it is
decreasing counting. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 3μs.

Table 7-21 COUNTER parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Impulse Signal
Parameters PI Impulse Signal Input － Input Pin Input is counted by
its rising edge
Rising edge
Input RST Reset Signal － Input Pin
counts
Pin
Pre-Set Value: The
Counting Pause Value
COUNT
of Increasing － Input Pin －
ER
Counting, and Initial
Value of Decreasing.
Counting Output
Marking. For Stop counting
increasing counting, when rising edge
Output
CI when CV=COUNTER, － Output Pin of RST arrives,
Pin
CI=ON. For reset CV to its
decreasing counting, initial and CI=OFF
when CV=0 CI=ON

565
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Working Mode of
Counter: When
MODE=OFF, It is
Configuration
MODE Increasing Counting. － －
Parameter
Configu When MODE=ON, It
ration is Decreasing
Param Counting.
eter For increasing
counter, CV=0. For
Configuration
CV Counting Unit － decreasing
Parameter
counter,
CV=COUNTER.

7.13 TRIG Function Block

Function block TRIG is an edge-trigger and can output a pulse lasting for a program period
according to the changes of input. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 2μs.

Table 7-22 TRIG parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input － Input Pin －
Output
OUT Output － Output Pin －
Pin
Mode Switch
When MODE=0,
Basic
Rising-Edge is
Parameters Configur
Triggering. When Configurati
ation
MODENote1 MODE=1, － on －
Paramet
Falling-Edge is Parameter
er
Triggering. When
MODE=2, Edge is
Triggering.Note1

Note:

 MODE=0

 Relation between input and output is:

566
 Function Block Reference


 MODE=1

 Relation between input and output is:

 MODE=2

 Relation between input and output is:

7.14 TON Function Block

Function block TON is a standard timer and can generate a delay output when input jumps from
OFF to ON. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 8μs.

7.14.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-23 TON parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic SET Set Signal － Input Pin －
Parameters
Force reset of
Input Pin RST Reset Signal － Input Pin
output
Holding Time and
DT TRUE Input Pin －
the Unit is Second
Output OUT Output Note1 － Output Pin －

567
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Pin ET The Passed time － Output Pin －

When SET jumps from OFF to ON and holds for sufficient time, then DT time later, OUT become
high level and holds until SET resets. If the length of SET=ON is less than DT, OUT remains 0.
When the rising-edge of RST coming, OUT resets immediately. Time-sequence graph is shown in
6 Time-sequence graph 6.

Figure 7-46 Time-sequence graph (TON)

7.14.2 Application Example

When the digital signal is set as ON (the digital is “1”), it flashes in the flow chart.

The digital signal changes between 0 and 1 in low frequency. It can meet the requirements of flash
and dynamic effect for picture.

Its programming is shown below, which can be achieved by normal logic function block. The flash
cycle and pulse width can be set via TIME1 and TIME2.

Figure 7-5 Programming of flash

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 7-24 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TIME1 Custom REAL Period Setting

002 TIME2 Custom REAL Pulse Width Setting

003 BOOL_IN DI (Input) Flash Enabled Target

004 BOOL_SHINE Custom BOOL Flash Variable Monitoring Tag

 Parameter settings:

 TIME1: 2.0

568
 Function Block Reference

 TIME2: 1.0

As parameters set above, the flash period is 2s and the pulse width is 1s.

7.15 TOFF Function Block

Function block TOFF is a standard timer and can generate a delay output when input falls from ON
to OFF. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 8μs.

Table 7-25 TOFF parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SET Set Signal － Input Pin －

Input RST Reset Signal － Input Pin －

Pin Holding Time
Basic
Parameters DT and the Unit TRUE Input Pin －
is Second
Output OUT Output Note1 － Output Pin －
Pin ET Passed time － Output Pin －

Note: function block description

 When SET from OFF to ON, OUT become high level and holds. When a
falling-edge of SET comes and SET remains low level, then after a DT delay, OUT
resets. If the holding time is shorter than DT, OUT remains high level even the
falling-edge of SET comes. OUT resets as long as the rising-edge of RST comes.
Time-sequence is shown in figure below Time-sequence graph.

Figure 7-6 Time-sequence graph (TOFF)

569
 Function Block Reference

7.16 TP Function Block

Function block TP is a standard timer and can generate fixed length pulses. Parameter
instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 8μs.

7.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-26 TP parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SET Set Signal － Input Pin －
Compel output
RST Reset Signal － Input Pin
Input Pin reset
Basic Holding Time
Parameters DT and the Unit is TRUE Input Pin －
Second
Output OUT Output Note1 － Output Pin －
Pin ET Passed time － Output Pin －

As long as SET jumps from OFF to ON and there is no reset signal, OUT is a series of pulses
whose length is DT. During the timing, if the rising-edge of RST comes, OUT resets immediately
until the next rising-edge of SET. Time-sequence graph is shown in figure below.

Figure 7-7 Time-sequence graph (TP)

7.16.2 Application Example

Refer to 3.2.2, 3.3.2 and 7.14.2.

7.17 TIMER Function Block

Function block TIMER is a basic timer.

570
 Function Block Reference

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 8μs. Parameter instructions refer
to table below.

Table 7-27 TIMER parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SET Set Signal － Input Pin －
RST Reset Signal － Input Pin －
Input Pin
Holding Time
Basic DT and the Unit is TRUE Input Pin －
Parameters Second
OUT Output － Output Pin －
Output Pin Passed
ET Note1 － Output Pin ET<DT
time

When SET jumps from OFF to ON, then DT time later, OUT becomes high level and holds for an
operation period. When the rising-edge of RST comes, timer stops and resets OUT, and waits for
the next rising-edge of SET. If SET jumps from OFF to ON, and within DT, another rising-edge of
SET arrives, and then the second jump would be shielded. Time-sequence graph is shown in
figure below Time-sequence graph.

Figure 7-8 Time-sequence graph (TIMER)

7.18 TON_HOLD Function Block

Function block TON_HOLD is a lag-set and hold function block.

This function block is a simple function block, and sits running time is 8μs. Parameter instructions
refer to below.

571
 Function Block Reference

Table 7-28 TON_HOLD parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SET Set Signal － － Input Pin

Input RST Reset Signal － － Input Pin

Pin Holding Time
Basic
Parameters DT and the Unit is TRUE － Input Pin
Second
Output OUT Output Note1 － － Output Pin
Pin ET Passed time － － Output Pin

When the rising-edge of SET comes, then DT time later, OUT become high level and holds until
the rising-edge of RST arrives. After OUT resets, OUT remains low level, even SET is high level,
until the next rising-edge of SET arrives

Figure 7-9 Time-sequence graph (TON_HOLD)

7.19 TP_TR Function Block

Function block TP_TR is a pulse-following timer.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 8μs. Parameter instructions
refer to table below.

Table 7-29 TP_TR parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SET Set Signal － Input Pin －

Input RST Reset Signal － Input Pin －

Pin Holding Time
Basic
Parameters DT and the Unit is TRUE Input Pin －
Second
Output OUT Output Note1 － Output Pin －
Pin ET Passed time － Output Pin －

572
 Function Block Reference

When SET jumps from OFF to ON and holds, OUT follows SET and generates a pulse whose
length is DT. If the time when SET remains ON is shorter than DT, OUT would follows SET to fall to
OFF. When timing, OUT resets as soon as the rising-edge of RST arrives, and holds until the next
rising-edge of SET. If DT is longer than 0 but shorter than a control period, the time of OUT
remaining as ON will last a control period. Time-sequence is shown in 7-36 Time-sequence graph.

Figure 7-10 Time-sequence graph (TP_TR)

7.20 TIMEREX Function Block

Extended Timer Function Block generates fixed width pulse by delaying a fix time for input
command. Parameter instructions refer to table below.

This function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 8μs.

7.20.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-30 TIMEREX Parameter Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

SET Set Signal － Input Pin －
RST Reset Signal － Input Pin －
Input Holding Time and the Unit
Pin DT TRUE Input Pin －
Basic is Second
Parameters Refer to the application
TLAG Delay Reset Time (Unit: s) TRUE Input Pin
reference
Output OUT OutputNote1 － Output Pin －
Pin ET Passed time － Output Pin ET<DT

When the rising-edge of SET comes, then DT time later, OUT becomes high level and resets after
holding for TLAG time. When a positive transmission is made in RST, timer stops and resets OUT,
and waits for the next rising-edge of SET. If SET jumps from OFF to ON, and within DT + TLAG,
another rising-edge of SET arrives, and then the second jump would be shielded. Time-sequence
graph is shown as follows.

573
 Function Block Reference

Figure 7-11 Time-sequence graph (TIMEREX)

7.21 Bypass Monitoring Function Block (MOS_SOR_WD)

Bypass monitoring function block MOS_SOR_WD has functions of timing monitoring, notification
and condition restore. One MOS_SOR_WD correspond to one bypass switch. SOR and MOS
apply the same function block, and can be set in configuration parameter.

MOS_SOR_WD is complex function block with running time of 50μs.

7.21.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 7-31 Parameter instruction of MOS_SOR_WD

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input IN Input － OFF -
Output OUT Output － Output Pin -
Timing of IN= Monitoring Unit can be set as
ET －
ON Parameter minute or hour.
Timing of
Monitoring Unit can be set as
DET Operation －
Parameter minute.
Delay
Operation Monitoring
HT － -
Monitoring Hold Times Parameter
Parameter Bypass Total Monitoring Unit can be set as
BPT －
Time Parameter minute or hour.
Overtime
Monitoring Unit can be set as
OT Alarm Total －
Parameter minute or hour.
Time
Monitoring
FLAG Flag － -
Parameter
Operation Operation Unit can be set as
DT Set Time TRUE
Parameter Parameter minute or hour.
Set Time of Operation Unit can be set as
DDT TRUE
Delay Parameter minute.
Hold Bypass Operation
KEEP TRUE
Status Parameter
Bypass
Operation
BYPASS Operation TRUE
Parameter
Signal

574
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Lock Operation
LCK TRUE
Signal Parameter
Auto Unlock
Operation
AUTLCK_C Alarm TRUE
Parameter
Acknowledge
Module Alarm Operation
AOF TRUE
Shield Parameter
Select overtime alarm,
serious overtime alarm
Alarm
ENALM Alarm Enable － － and auto unlock alarm,
Parameter
and unselect bypass
alarm in default.
DT unit, OFF=
Configuration
DT_UNIT Minute, ON= － -
Parameter
Hour
Input Type,
OFF= Hard Configuration
TYPE_IN － -
Input, ON= Parameter
Configuration Soft Input
Parameter
Interlock
Mode, Configuration
MODE_LCK － -
OFF=MOS, Parameter
ON=SOR
Configuration
DLEN Decimal Digits － -
Parameter

7.21.2 Usage

Bypass monitoring function block has functions of timing monitoring, notification and condition
restore, and is a custom function block (FB). One FB correspond to one bypass switch. SOR
(Startup Overrides) and MOS (Maintenance Override Switch) apply the same function block, while
usages for software and hardware are different.

For Hardware Switch (DI Signal)

1. Set time when increasing jump happening to IN, ET starts to count.

2. When ET counted time reaches DT, overtime alarm will generated.

3. If IN= ON after DDT time of overtime alarm generated, generate bypass overtime serious
alarm.

4. If operator select holding bypass before overtime, ET starts to count again, until the
overtime alarm is generated again when reaching DT. If operator select holding bypass
after overtime, the function will generate overtime alarm while panel will show as alarm
acknowledged. Count the bypass total time, operation hold times and record all events.
Overtime alarm will flash after count time again and until reaching DT (i.e. overtime alarm
will continue to flash after 1s), as shown in Figure 7-12.

5. If operator selects hard reset (i.e. input IN generates decreasing signal), eliminate the

575
 Function Block Reference

bypass and overtime alarm, and record data.

6. OUT= IN

Figure 7-12 MOS_SOR_WD for hardware switch (DI signal)

For Software Switch

1. Set time when increasing jump happening to IN, ET starts to count.

2. When ET counted time reaches DT, overtime alarm will generated.

3. If operator does nothing after DDT time of overtime alarm generated, and when
TYPE_IN=ON, so OUT= OFF, ET and IN become OFF, and generate “Auto Eliminate”
alarm.

4. If operator select holding bypass before overtime, ET starts to count again, until the
overtime alarm is generated again when reaching DT. If operator select holding bypass
after overtime, the function will generate overtime alarm while panel will show as alarm
acknowledged. Count the bypass total time, operation hold times and record all events.
Overtime alarm will flash after count time again and until reaching DT (i.e. overtime alarm
will continue to flash after 1s), as shown in Figure 7-13.

576
 Function Block Reference

5. During counting time or DDT of overtime alarm, if operator selects to reset bypass
((LCK=ON), eliminate the bypass and overtime alarm, output OUT as OFF, and record
data.

6. If IN=OFF, BYPSS=ON, so IN=ON, OUT=ON, start to count time. If during counting time
IN=ON, BYPSS=ON will not influence the time sequence logic.

Figure 7-13 MOS_SOR_WD for software switch

7.21.3 Flag
FLAG Assign Value in Monitoring Instruction
D0 Enable Module Alarm Shield AOF
D1 Disable Bypass Overtime Alarm OVRT
D2 Disable Bypass Serious Overtime Alarm SOVRT
D3 Disable Auto Unlock Alarm AUT_LCK
D4 Enable Bypass BYPASS
D5 Enable Keep KEEP
D6 Enable Interlock LCK

577
 Function Block Reference

7.21.4 Examples
Parallel Connection

Serial Connection

 IN Null

 IN from Software Switch

578
 Function Block Reference

Section 8 Comparison Function Block Library

Comparison function block library contains 18 simple function blocks.

8.1 NE Function Block

Function block NE can implement unequal-to comparison of two inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-1.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-1 NE parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≠IIN2,
Output output OUT = ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT = OFF

8.2 EQ Function Block

Function block EQ can implement equal-to comparison of two inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-2.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-2 EQ parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Input － Input Pin －

579
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Parameters IN2 Input － Input Pin －
When IN1=IN2,
output OUT= ON.
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.3 GT Function Block

Function block can implement greater-than comparison of two inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-3.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-3 GT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN2 Input － Input Pin －
When
IN1>IN2,
Basic output OUT=
Parameters ON.
Output Pin OUT Otherwise, in － Output Pin －
other words
IN1≤IN2,
output OUT=
OFF

8.4 GE Function Block

Function block GE can implement greater-than-or-equal-to comparison of two inputs. Parameter

instructions please refer to Table 8-4.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-4 GT parameter comparison

580
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 > =IN2,
Outpu output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
t Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.5 LT Function Block

Function block can implement less-than comparison of two inputs. Parameter instructions please
refer to Table 8-5.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-5 LT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －

Basic When IN1

Parameters <IN2, output
Outpu OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
t Pin Otherwise,
output OUT=
OFF

8.6 LE Function Block

Function block LE can implement less-than-or-equal-to comparison of two inputs. Parameter

instructions please refer to Table 8-6.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-6 LE parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

581
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≤IN2,
Outpu output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
t Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.7 NE_INT Function Block

Function block NE_INT can implement unequal-to comparison of two INT inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to Table 8-7.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-7 NE_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≠IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.8 EQ_INT Function Block

Function block can implement equal-to comparison of two INT inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-8.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-8 EQ_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Parameters Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －

582
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
When IN1=IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.9 GT_INT Function Block

Function block GT_INT can implement greater-than comparison of two INT inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to Table 8-9.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-9 GT_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 >IN2, output
Output OU
OUT= ON. Otherwise, － Output Pin －
Pin T
output OUT= OFF

8.10 GE_INT Function Block

Function block can implement greater-than-or-equal-to comparison of two INT inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to Table 8-10.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-10 GE_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≥IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

583
 Function Block Reference

8.11 LT_INT Function Block

Function block can implement less-than comparison of two INT input. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-11.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-11 LT_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 <IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.12 LE_INT Function Block

Function block can implement less-than-or-equal-to comparison of two INT inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to Table 8-12.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-12 LE_INT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 ≤IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.13 NE_UNIT Function Block

Function block can implement unequal-to comparison of two UNIT inputs. Parameter instructions

584
 Function Block Reference

please refer to Table 8-13.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-13 NE_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≠IN2,
Output OU output OUT= ON.
－ Output Pin －
Pin T Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.14 EQ_UNIT Function Block

Function block can implement equal-to comparison of two UNIT inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-14.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-14 EQ_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 =IN2, output
Output OU
OUT= ON. Otherwise, － Output Pin －
Pin T
output OUT= OFF

8.15 GT_UNIT Function Block

Function block can implement greater-than comparison of two UNIT inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-15.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

585
 Function Block Reference

Table 8-15 GT_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1>IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － Output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.16 GE_UNIT Function Block

Function block can implement greater-than-or-equal-to comparison of two UNIT inputs. Parameter
instructions please refer to Table 8-16.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-16 GE_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1≥IN2, output
Output
OUT OUT= ON. Otherwise, － Output Pin －
Pin
output OUT= OFF

8.17 LT_UNIT Function Block

Function block can implement less-than comparison of two UNIT inputs. Parameter instructions
please refer to Table 8-17.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

586
 Function Block Reference

Table 8-17 LT_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 <IN2,
Output OU output OUT= ON.
－ Output Pin －
Pin T Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

8.18 LE_UNIT Function Block

Function block LE_UNIT can implement less-than-or-equal-to comparison of two UNIT inputs.
Parameter instructions please refer to Table 8-18.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 2μs.

Table 8-18 LE_UNIT parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Input － Input Pin －
Pin IN2 Input － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters When IN1 ≤IN2,
Output output OUT= ON.
OUT － output Pin －
Pin Otherwise, output
OUT= OFF

587
 Function Block Reference

Section 9 I/O Special Process Function Block Library

I/O special process and sequence control function block library contains 18 function blocks, 7 of
them are complex function blocks and the other 11 are simple function blocks. When talking about
complex function blocks, we refer to those which has specific function faceplate, and whose
parameters can be set in supervision windows.

9.1 PATCON Function Block

Function block PATCON is used to control AM711 module. Using this function block, elementary
Properties and parameters should be set. While setting parameters, the information of node and
rack of the very channel must be set. Meanwhile, information such as dead zone and manually
changed step value of channel which are already included in I/O builder can only be observed but
not changed.

This function block is a complex function block, its running time is 50μs.

9.1.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-1 PATCON parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

UPPER
Basic LIMIT OF Operation
Parameters SVH TRUE range[SCH,SCL]
SET Parameter
VALUE
SV Limits
LOWER
LIMIT OF Operation
SVL TRUE range[SCH,SCL]
SET Parameter
VALUE
Upper Limit
Range Configurati
of
Settings SCH - on -
Measuring
Parameter
Range
Lower Limit
Configurati
of
SCL - on -
Measuring
Parameter
Range
Configurati
Engineerin set in function block Properties
EU - on
g Unit interface
Parameter

588
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurati
Decimal use to display data on function
DLEN - on
Digitals[0,5] block panel, default value is 3
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
NODE - on
Node[0~7]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
RACK - on
Rack[0~3]
Parameter keep identical with address of
Hardware
Address of Configurati block builder AM711. Otherwise,
Settings
IOM Module[0~ - on CNFERR=ON alarm is on
15] Parameter
Address of
Configurati
I/O
CH - on
Channel[0~
Parameter
3]
Extended Set Value
Input Pin SV - Input Pin -
Parameters of Valve
Feedback
PV - Output Pin Connect to AI
of Valve
Flag of
Output CNFER BKINERR of the function blocks
Configurati - Output Pin
Pin R after
on Error
ERROR
PVERR OF PV - Output Pin Connect to AI.ERR
CHANNEL
Out of
OOS SWOO Service Operation Set to be ON when function
TRUE
Settings S Flag, Parameter block is downloaded first time
ON=OOS
Monitoring Dead Zone must be smaller than
DB Dead Zone -
Parameter Threshold
Monitoring Threshold must be larger than
TH Threshold -
Parameter Dead Zone
Fast
Increase
Monitoring
MFV Step Value - -
Parameter
Manually(S
)
Configurat Slowly
ion Increase
Paramete Monitoring
MSV Step Value - -
r Parameter
Manually
(Ms)
Time of
Threshold Monitoring
TSTD - -
Stability Parameter
(Ms)
Filtering Monitoring
TF - -
Time (S) Parameter
Control Monitoring
TS - -
Period (S) Parameter

589
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Suppress
Module
Alarm
(AOF=ON: Operation
AOF TRUE -
Alarm Not to Parameter
Enable Display the
and Real-Time
Suppress Alarm)
Click on “Settings” to set, if
Alarm Alarm
ENALM TRUE chosen, alarm is valid, otherwise
Enable Parameter
neglected
FLAG Flag - Output Pin refer to 9.1.2
Negative
Limit Monitoring
NLALM - -
Alarm(ON= Parameter
Alarm)
Positive
Limit Monitoring
PLALM - -
Alarm(ON= Parameter
Alarm)
Increasing
ASCEN Monitoring
status(ON= - -
D Parameter
increasing)
Decreasing
DESCE status(ON= Monitoring
- -
ND decreasing Parameter
)
Disconnecti
on Alarm Monitoring
Status BLALM - -
Status(ON= Parameter
Alarm)
Feedback
FB_OP of Interlock Monitoring
- -
N Open(ON= Parameter
Alarm)
Feedback
FB_CL of Interlock Monitoring
- -
S Closed(ON Parameter
=Alarm)
Feedback
FB_ST of Interlock Monitoring
- -
OP stopped(O Parameter
N=Alarm)
Feedback
FB_MA of Manual Monitoring
- -
N Status(ON= Parameter
Manual)

590
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

When
STOP=ON,
stop all the
functions
towards the
correspond
ing PAT
Operator channel to
Operation
Command STOP the function TRUE -
Parameter
block.
When
STOP
switch from
ON to OFF,
enter
“manual
status” first.
MAN=ON
stands for
block
PATenters
“manual
Operation
MAN status”, DO TRUE -
Parameter
of block
PAT only
respends to
user
commands
Compare
set value
with
feedback
value, and Operation
AUTO TRUE -
control Parameter
through
add short
pulse to
long pulse

591
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Command
of Manual
Increase.
Can only
be used
under
manual
status. INC
valid
indicates
an
increasing Operation
INC TRUE -
pulse Parameter
output from
PAT block,
length of
pulse is
decided by
setting
“Command
of Manual
Increase” in
hardware
builder.
Command
of Manual
Decrease.
Refer to
INC,
instead of
increasing
pulse, we Operation
DEC TRUE -
use Parameter
decreasing
pulse here.
Definition
of length of
pulse is the
same with
that of INC.
Command
of Manual
Increase
Slowly.
Refer to
INC, but
here length
of pulse is
Operation
SINC decided by TRUE -
Parameter
setting
“Command
of Manual
Increase/d
ecrease
slowly” in
hardware
builder.

592
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Command
of Manual
decrease
Slowly.
Refer to
INC, but
here length
of pulse is
Operation
SDEC decided by TRUE -
Parameter
setting
“Command
of Manual
Increase/d
ecrease
slowly” in
hardware
builder.
When
LCK_OPN
=ON,
function
block
outputs
LCK_O Operation
open signal TRUE -
PN Parameter
directly.
Threshold
keep
increasing,
until totally
open.
When
LCK_CLS
=ON,
function
block
outputs
LCK_C Operation
close signal TRUE -
LS Parameter
directly.
Threshold
keep
decreasing,
until totally
closed.

593
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

When
LCK_STOP
＝ON, jump
out of
“LCK_OPN
/
LCK_CLS”
status, DO
LCK_S of function Operation
block TRUE -
TOP Parameter
output stop
immediatel
y. This
button is
valid under
“LCK_OPN
/
LCK_CLS”
status.

594
 Function Block Reference

9.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 9-2 PATCON Panel parameter instruction

Parameter
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Set upper limit of value. (Alarm is
H SVH 90.0000 [SCH,SCL] valid when “ENALM” is chosen,
SV Limit otherwise neglected)
(%) Set lower limit of value.(Alarm is
L SVL 0.0000 [SCH,SCL] valid when “ENALM” is chosen,
otherwise neglected)
Parameter Deadzon Read only, set in function block
DB 0.0000 －
e(%) Properties interface or in program.

595
 Function Block Reference

Parameter
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Name
Read only, set in function block
MSV(ms) MSV 0.0000 －
Properties interface or in program.
Read only, set in function block
TF(s) TF 0.0000 －
Properties interface or in program.
Threshold Read only, set in function block
TH 0.0000 －
(%) Properties interface or in program.
TSTD(ms Read only, set in function block
TSTD 0.0000 －
) Properties interface or in program.
Read only, set in function block
TS TS 0.0000 －
Properties interface or in program.
Read only, set in function block
Step MFV 0.0000 －
Properties interface or in program.
Read only, set while structure
Domain － － －
building.
Read only, set while structure
Controller － 0 －
building.
Read only, set in function block
Address Node NODE 0 [0,7]
Properties interface
Informatio
n Read only, set in function block
Rack RACK 0 [0,3]
Properties interface
Read only, set in function block
IOM IOM 0 [0,15]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
CH CH 0 [0,3]
Properties interface.
9.1.3 Flag
Table 9-2 Flag list

Settings of
Flag Remarks
Monitoring
Enable
D0 The Tag is Out of Service (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Err
D3 Disable Configuration ERROR (CFGERR)
D4 Disable Upper Limit And Lower Limit of Alarm Reversed (REVALM)
D5 Disable Manual Status (MAN)
D6 Disable Negative Alarm (NALM)
D7 Disable Positive Alarm (PALM)
D8 Disable Ascend Status (ASCEND)
D9 Disable Descend Status (DESCEND)
D10 Disable Disconnection Alarm (BALM)
D11 Disable Feedback of Interlock Open, ON= Open
D12 Disable Feedback of Interlock Close, ON= Close
D13 Disable Feedback of Interlock Stop, ON= Stop
D14 Disable Low Alarm of Set Value (SVL)
D15 Disable High Alarm of Set Value (SVH)
D16 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

596
 Function Block Reference

9.2 TC_CJC Function Block

Function block TC_CJC is used to control the cold junction temperature of AI721-S and AI722-S.
In the following two conditions, TC_CJC must be used when AI721-S or AI722-S is used.

1) If Cold Junction Compensation is set as “Local”, Temperature Amend is set as “ON”, the
function block will take the output of TC_CJC as the amended value of local cold junction
temperature, and use it to calculate the final test result.

2) If Cold Junction Compensation is set as “Remote”, no matter the Temperature Amend is

set as “ON” or “OFF”, modules AI721-S and AI722-S both apply the “SV of Remote Cold
Junction Temperature” as the cold junction temperature.

the function block is a simple function block, and its running time is 15μs.

Table 9-3 TC_CJC parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Set Value of
Remote Cold
Input Pin SV － Input Pin -
Junction
Temperature
Real-Time Value
of Situ Cold
PV － Output Pin Connect to AI
Junction
Temperature
Alarm of Wrong Connect to BKINERR of next
ERR － Output Pin
Calculation block
Cold Junction
Compensation:
Output Pin REMOTE － Output Pin －
ON=Remote ,OF
F=In Situ
Temperature
Amend:
AMEND － Output Pin －
ON=Amend,
OFF=Disable
Cold Junction Connect to BKIN of next
AMDPV － Output Pin
Temperature block
Configuration Configurati Need to be identical to block
Address of
Parameter NODE － on builder address
Node[0,7]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
RACK － on
Rack[0,3]
Parameter

597
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Address of
Module[0,15], Configurati
IOM IOM must be even － on
when block is Parameter
redundent
Enitial Situ Cold Configurati
FIELD_PV Junction － on －
Temperature Parameter
Enitial Remote Configurati
FIELD_SV Cold Junction － on －
Temperature Parameter
RDDFLAG comes
from hardware
builder, indicates
whether there is
redundency(ON=r
edundent,OFF= Configurati
RDDFLAG not － on －
redundent),IOM Parameter
must be even
when block is
redundant,
otherwise set
ERR=ON

9.3 CABALM Function Block

Function block CABALM is used to check the assist power source, system power source and
cabinet temperature in the cabinet and alarm. Node number, rack number and block number
needs to be set in the function block builder parameters, basing on the address of CN733.
Parameter instructions refer to Table 9-4.

CABLAM is normally used for cabinet alarm block”s debugging, rack number should be set as “3”
while block number should be set as “15” when building basing one the address of CN733.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 15μs.

598
 Function Block Reference

Table 9-4 CABALM parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Match with
Address of Configuration
NODE － hardware
Node[0~7] Parameter
builder
Basic Configuration
Parameters Parameter Address of Configuration
RACK － Set to be 3
Rack[0~3] Parameter
Address of Configuration
IOM － Set to be 5
Module[0~15] Parameter
Auxiliary Power
SPS1HAL connect to
1 upper limit － Output Pin
M BKIN
alarm
Auxiliary Power
SPS1LAL connect to
1 lower limit － Output Pin
M BKIN
alarm
Auxiliary Power
SPS2HAL connect to
2 upper limit － Output Pin
M BKIN
alarm
Auxiliary Power
SPS2LAL connect to
2 lower limit － Output Pin
M BKIN
alarm
MPS1HAL System Power 1 connect to
－ Output Pin
M upper limit alarm BKIN
MPS1LAL System Power 2 connect to
－ Output Pin
Extended M lower limit alarm BKIN
Output Pin MPS2HAL System Power 1 connect to
Parameters － Output Pin
M upper limit alarm BKIN
MPS2LAL System Power 2 connect to
－ Output Pin
M lower limit alarm BKIN
Fan Flag 1 err connect to
FAN1ERR － Output Pin
alarm BKINERR
Fan Flag 2 err connect to
FAN2ERR － Output Pin
alarm BKINERR
Fan Flag 3 err connect to
FAN3ERR － Output Pin
alarm BKINERR
Fan Flag 4 err connect to
FAN4ERR － Output Pin
alarm BKINERR
Closet Connect to
TMPRT － Output Pin
temperature AI
Abnormal connect to
ERR － Output Pin
Operation BKINERR

9.4 PIACCUM Function Block

Function block implements calculation of the accumulation of PI module.

This function block is a complex function block, its running time is 30μs.

599
 Function Block Reference

9.4.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-5 PIACCUM parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output
OUT Accumulate output － connect to BKIN
Pin
Connect to BKINERR. When
Abnormal Operation. Output
ERR － block status alarm or illegal block
Alarm when ERR=ON Pin
ID occurs, alarm if ERR=ON
Output Pin Status of Function
Block.When fetal err, lost Output
STA － connect to BKINSTA
of block or channel err Pin
occurs, set STA=16
Output
FLAG Flag － refer to 9.4.2
Pin
Operation
SWOO Out of Service Flag, Set to be ON when function
－ Paramete
S ON=OOS block is downloaded first time
r
Operation
AOF Suppress Module Alarm － Paramete －
r
Operation
Indicates value of each pulse,
GAIN Pulse Equivalence － Paramete
set accrowding to situation
r
When set RST=ON, Operation
Reset as OFF after keeping ON
Operation RST reset accumulate output TRUE Paramete
for a period.
Parameter OUT r
Set HOLD=OFF and
start accumulation.
While accumulation set
Operation
HOLD=ON and pause
HOLD TRUE Paramete －
accumulation. Set
r
HOLD=OFF and
continue with
accumulation.
Operation
High Limit of
HLIM TRUE Paramete Reference parameter:HALM
Accumulation
r
Monitorin
Supervision If accumulation exceeds g
HALM － －
Parameter HLIM, engenders HALM Paramete
r
Alarm Click on “Settings” to set, if
Alarm
ENALM Alarm Enable － Paramete chosen, alarm is valid, otherwise
Parameter
r neglected
Configurati Configurat Need to be identical to address
on ion of function builder PI711.
NODE Address of Node[0,7] －
Parameter Paramete Otherwise, engender ERR=ON
r alarm and set STA=2.

600
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurat Meanwhile, display function
ion block ID error or illegal function
RACK Address of Rack[0,3] －
Paramete block error alarm on panel.
r
Configurat
ion
IOM Address of Module[0,15] －
Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of I/O ion
CH －
Channel[0,31] Paramete
r
Configurat
ion
EU Unit of Accumulation － －
Paramete
r
Configurat
ion
DLEN Decimal Digitals[0,5] － －
Paramete
r
9.4.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 9-2 PIACCUM parameter instruction

Parameter Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Indicate the value each pulse
Pulse
Gain (%) GAIN 1.0000 － stands for, set according to
Coefficient
situation.
Set accumulation exceeds HLIM
HALM(% alarm.(Alarm is valid when
Alarm Enable HALM OFF －
) “ENALM” is chosen, otherwise
neglected)

601
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Read only, set while structure
DOMAIN － － －
building.
Read only, set while structure
CON － 0 －
building.
Read only, set in function block
NODE NODE 0 [0,7]
Address Properties interface.
Information Read only, set in function block
RACK RACK 0 [0,3]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
IOM IOM 0 [0,15]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
CH CH 0 [0,31]
Properties interface.
9.4.3 Flag
Table 9-6 Flag list

Settings of
Flag Remarks
Monitoring
Enable
D0 The Tag is Out of Service (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Mismatch of Modules (ID_ERR)
D2 Disable Error (ERR)
D3 Disable High Alarm of Accumulation (HALM)
D4 Disable Status Alarm (UNCOMM)
D5 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression(AOF)
9.4.4 Application Example

Suppose there is a flowmeter (50pulses/gallon), whose maximum rate of flow is 100gallons/minute.

And the requirement for resolution is 0.1Hz.

First of all, the maximum of frequency must be checked so that we can decided if the resolution is
reachable. According to the performance of block PI711-S, to reach the resolution 0.1Hz, the
frequency being tested cannot be higher than 1kHz. In this specific condition, the maximum
frequency is

50pulses/gallon×100gallons/minute÷60second/minute＝83.33 pulses/second＝83.33Hz

Set parameters in PIACCUM function block”s Properties interface as follow:

GAIN: Pulse equivalent is 1/50=0.02. In other words, each one of the pulse stands for 0.2 gallon of
flow.

NODE: Stay identical to PI711”s function module builder address.

RACK: Stay identical to PI711”s function module builder address.

IOM: Stay identical to PI711”s function module builder address.

CH: Stay identical to PI711”s function module builder address.

602
 Function Block Reference

EU: Hz.

DLEN: 2

Default values of other parameters remain unchanged.

When debugging the program, open the interface of the function block, as shown in figure 9-9. The
accumulative total state is equal to hold mode, click on “Startup” to start the accumulation process.

Figure 9-1 FlowControl2 MAN state of function block

9.5 SOEACCUM Function Block

Function block SOEACCUM implements calculation of the accumulation of SOE module.

This function block is a complex function block, its running time is 30μs.

9.5.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-7 SOEACCUM parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output Pin Accumulate Output
OUT － connect to BKIN
output Pin

603
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Abnormal
connect to BKINERR.If block status
Operation. Output
ERR － alarm or illegal block ID occurs,
alarm when Pin
alarm when ERR=ON
ERR=ON
Status of
Function Block.
When fetal err,
Output
STA lost of block or － connect to BKINSTA
Pin
channel err
occurs, set
STA=16
Output
FLAG Flag － refer to 9.5.2
Pin
Operation
Out of Service Set to be ON when function block is
SWOOS TRUE Paramete
Flag, ON=OOS downloaded first time
r
Operation
Suppress
AOF TRUE Paramete －
Module Alarm
r
Operation Indicate the value each pulse
Pulse
GAIN Paramete stands for, set according to
Equivalence
r situation.
When
Operation
RST=ON, reset Reset as OFF after keeping ON for
RST TRUE Paramete
accumulate a period.
r
output OUT
Operation Set
Parameter HOLD=OFF
and start
accumulation.
While
accumulation
Operation
set HOLD=ON
HOLD TRUE Paramete －
and pause
r
accumulation.
Set
HOLD=OFF
and continue
with
accumulation.
Operation
High Limit of
HLIM TRUE Paramete －
Accumulation
r
If accumulation Monitorin
Supervision exceeds HLIM, g
HALM － －
Parameter engenders Paramete
HALM r
Alarm
Alarm
ENALM Alarm Enable － Paramete －
Parameter
r
Configurat Need to be identical to address of
Configuratio Address of ion function builder PI711 or DI714.
n Parameter NODE －
Node[0,7] Paramete Otherwise, engender ERR=ON
r alarm and set STA=2. Meanwhile,
Configurat display function block ID error or
Address of ion illegal function block error alarm on
RACK － panel.
Rack[0,3] Paramete
r

604
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurat
Address of ion
IOM －
Module[0,15] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of I/O ion
CH －
Channel[0,31] Paramete
r
Configurat
Unit of ion
EU － －
Accumulation Paramete
r
Configurat
Decimal ion
DLEN － －
Digitals[0,5] Paramete
r
9.5.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 9-8 SOEACCUM parameter instruction

Parameter Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Indicate the value each pulse
Pulse
GAIN(%) GAIN 1.0000 － stands for, set according to
Coefficient
situation.
Set accumulation exceeds HLIM
alarm.(Alarm is valid when
Alarm Enable HALM(%) HALM OFF －
“ENALM” is chosen, otherwise
neglected)
Address Read only, set while structure
DOMAIN － － －
Information building.
Read only, set while structure
CON － 0 －
building.

605
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Name Value
Read only, set in function block
NODE NODE 0 [0,7]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
RACK RACK 0 [0,3]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
IOM IOM 0 [0,15]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
CH CH 0 [0,31]
Properties interface.
9.5.3 Flag
Table 9-9 Flag list

Settings of
Flag Remarks
Monitoring
Enable
D0 The Tag is Out of Service (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Mismatch of Modules (ID_ERR)
D2 Disable Error (ERR)
D3 Disable High Alarm of Accumulation (HALM)
D4 Disable Status Alarm (UNCOMM)
D5 Enable (AOF) Alarm Restrain (AOF)
9.5.4 Application Example

Refer to 9.4.4 Application Example.

9.6 IO_FLAG Function Block

Function block implements decoding of flags of AI, AO, DI, and DO. Set the tag type of the
connecting IO, then flag information of this type would be output in BOOL. Parameter Instructions
refer to Table 9-10.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 50μs.

606
 Function Block Reference

9.6.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-8 IO_FLAG parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin IN IO flag input － Input Pin Connect to FLAG
Output Pin ERR Tag err alarm － Output Pin Connect to BKINERR of last block
High High Monitoring
HHH － －
High Alarm Parameter
High upper Monitoring
HH － －
limit alarm Parameter
upper limit
H － Output Pin －
alarm
lower limit
L － Output Pin －
alarm
Low lower Monitoring
LL － －
limit alarm Parameter
Low low low Monitoring
LLL － －
alarm Parameter
Monitoring
DPV Rate Alarm － －
Parameter
Rise-Jump Monitoring
RJUMP － －
Alarm Parameter
Fall-Jump Monitoring
FJUMP － －
Alarm Parameter
Over Upper
Limit of Monitoring
ORH － －
Measuring Parameter
Range alarm

607
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Over lower
limit of Monitoring
ORL － －
measuring Parameter
range alarm
Output upper Monitoring
OUTH － －
limit alarm Parameter
Output lower Monitoring
OUTL － －
limit alarm Parameter
Fluctuate Monitoring
FLICK － －
alarm Parameter
Monitoring
ONALM ON alarm － DI=ON, alarm
Parameter
Monitoring
OFFALM OFF alarm － DI=OFF, alarm
Parameter
Disable or
Monitoring
OOS Not(ON=disab － －
Parameter
le)
Force or Not Monitoring
SWAM － －
(ON=Force) Parameter
Simulate or
Not Monitoring
SIMUL － －
(ON=Simulate Parameter
)
Track or Not Monitoring
TR － －
(ON=Track) Parameter
Safety Error
Status or Not Monitoring
SAFESTA － －
(ON=Safety Parameter
Error Status
Error
Recovery
Monitoring
RECOVER Status － －
Parameter
(ON=Error
Recovery)
Suppress Operation
AOF TRUE －
Module Alarm Parameter
Configurati Configurati
0=AI,1=AO,2=
on TYPE － on －
DI,3=DO
Parameter Parameter
9.6.2 Application Example

To achieve I/O flag analysis determination, and participate in interlock via I/O flag analysis value.

The module achieves tag alarm signal invoking and ouputting functions by ECS-700 tag FLAG
with AIALM module. The alarm H/L limits settings of AI tag can be set in tag table or set the alarm
area in device panel.

Details of programming is shown below. It applies IO_FLAG, and the tag input interlock program
can achieve interlock program via output pins “H, L, HH, LL” of the module.

608
 Function Block Reference

Figure 9-1 Program of IO_FLAG

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

Table 9-9 Instructions of Function Block and Example

Function Block
No. Description Related Tag Type Remarks
Pin
Input Parameter

001 IN FLAG Type AI/AO/DI/DO Input

Output Parameter
Alarm generates when
001 H (AI) Tag H Alarm Custom BOOL
ON.
002 L (AI) Tag L Alarm Custom BOOL

003 HH (AI) Tag HH Alarm Custom BOOL

004 LL (AI) Tag LL Alarm Custom BOOL

(DI) Positive Jump Custom BOOL

005 RJUMP
Alarm
(DI) Negative Jump Custom BOOL
006 FJUMP
Alarm
(DI) Alarm generates Custom BOOL
007 ONALM
when DI is ON.
(DI) Alarm generates Custom BOOL
008 OFFALM
when DI is OFF.
Configuration Parameter
Configure Based on Inout
001 TYPE Input Tag Type of IN Pin Set in Module IN Type:
0-AI;1-AO;2-DI;3-DO

Parameter settings of IO_FLAG:

609
 Function Block Reference

 In configuration parameter of basic parameter, TYPE sets the parameter based on input
parameter type, 0=AI, 1=AO, 2=DI, 3=DO.

Alarm Settings

 Set AI tag alarm range in tag device panel and tag table.

9.7 TC_CJCX Function Block

Function Block TC_CJCX implements cold junction temperature compensation of FW352, XP314,
SP314, FW358 modules.

According to the channel setting of hardware configuration, the cold junction temperature
compensation function has two situations as follows.

1) If cold junction compensation mode is set as “Local”, the temperature acquired by its own
sensor is used as cold junction temperature.

2) If cold junction compensation mode is set as “Remote”, “remote cold junction temperature
set value” set in the function block is used as cold junction temperature.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 15μs.

 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-10 TC_CJCX parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Set Value of
Remote Cold
Input Pin SV Junction － Output Pin －
Temperature(℃
)
Alarm of Wrong
Calculation.
Output Pin ERR － Output Pin －
alarm when
ERR=ON

Configuration Configurati
Address of
Parameter NODE － on
Node[0,7]
Parameter
Configurati Stay identical to hardware
Address of
RACK － on builder address
Rack[0,3]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
IOM － on
Module[0,15]
Parameter

610
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Enitial value of
Configurati
FIELD_S Remote Cold
－ on －
V Junction
Parameter
Temperature
RDDFLAG
comes from
hardware
builder,
indicates
whether there
is
redundency(O Configurati
RDDFLA
N=redundent,O － on －
G
FF= not Parameter
redundent),IO
M must be
even when
block is
redundant,
otherwise set
ERR=ON

9.8 PTM Function block

Function block PTM corresponds to position input module AM713. Before using it, please read
reference of AM713.

All data configuration and supervision of AM713 module are implemented through FBD
programming and Graphics programming.

The parameters contained in hardware configuration such as Digits of coder, comparison values,
etc. could only be observed but not be modified. The forceful modification of them does not make
any sense. Parameter instructions refer to Table 9-12.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 50μs.

Table 9-11 PTM parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurat
Basic Hardware NOD Address of ion stay identical to block
Parameters Settings － builder address of AM713
E Node[0~7] Paramete
r

611
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurat
Address of ion
RACK －
Rack[0~3] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of
ion
IOM Module[0~1 －
Paramete
5]
r
Extended on-time Output
Output Pin DTV － On-time address
Parameters address Pin
Output Mode
of Coder
Signal(OFF=
Parallel
Monitorin
output,
COKI g Can only be set in
ON=SSI －
ND Paramete hardware builder.
output, only
r
parallel
output is
Configuration available
Data Monitor now)
Input Mode
Monitorin
of Coder
CDKI g
Signal(OFF= － －
ND Paramete
Gray cold,
r
ON=binary)
Monitorin
Digits of
CDN g Recommended
Coder Input －
UM Paramete range[8,13]
Signal
r
Monitorin Can only be set in
Output1Setting CMP1 Compare g hardware builder.
－
V value1 Paramete Reference
r parameter:Q1WAY
Monitorin Can only be set in
Q1TI DO1 output g hardware
－
ME pulse time Paramete builder.(Reserved, not
r availble now)
Monitorin
Q1ST g ON indicates output is
DO1status －
A Paramete closed.
r
DQ1 input
Q1EN flag(OFF=cl － Input Pin －
osed)

612
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

DO1 output
mode (When
DO1 input
flagQ1EN=O
N,
0:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value1,
DO1output
closed.
Smaller than
Q1WA Compare
－ Input Pin －
Y value1,
output open.
1:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value1,
DO1output
open.Smalle
r than
Compare
value1,
output
closed.
Monitorin Can only be set in
Output2 Setting CMP2 Compare g hardware builder.
－
V value2 Paramete Reference
r parameter:Q2WAY
Monitorin Can only be set in
Q2TI DO2Output g hardware
－
ME pulse time Paramete builder.(Reserved, not
r availble now)
Monitorin
Q2ST g ON indicates output is
DO2status －
A Paramete closed.
r
DQ2 input
flag
Q2EN － Input Pin －
(OFF=close
d)

613
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

DO2 output
mode (DO2
input flag
Q2EN is
ON, :
0:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value2,
DO2output
closed.
Smaller than
Q2WA Compare
－ Input Pin －
Y value2,
output open.
1:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value2,
DO2output
open.Smalle
r than
Compare
value2,
output
closed.
Monitorin Can only be set in
Output3 Setting CMP3 Compare g hardware builder.
－
V value3 Paramete Reference
r parameter:Q3WAY
Monitorin Can only be set in
Q3TI DO3Output g hardware
－
ME pulse time Paramete builder.(Reserved, not
r availble now)
Monitorin
Q3ST g ON indicates output is
DO3status －
A Paramete closed.
r
DQ3 input
flag
Q3EN － Input Pin －
(OFF=close
d)

614
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

DO3 output
mode (DO3
input flag
Q3EN is
ON, :
0:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value3,
DO3output
closed.
Smaller than
Q3WA Compare
－ Input Pin －
Y value3,
output open.
1:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value3,
DO3output
open.Smalle
r than
Compare
value3,
output
closed.
Monitorin Can only be set in
Output4 Setting CMP4 Compare g hardware builder.
－
V value4 Paramete Reference
r parameter:Q4WAY
Monitorin Can only be set in
Q4TI DO4Output g hardware
－
ME pulse time Paramete builder.(Reserved, not
r availble now)
Monitorin
Q4ST g ON indicates output is
DO4status －
A Paramete closed.
r
DQ4 input
flag
Q4EN － Input Pin －
(OFF=close
d)

615
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

DO4 output
mode (DO4
input flag
Q4EN is
ON, :
0:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value4,
DO4output
closed.
Smaller than
Q4WA
Compare － Input Pin －
Y
value4,
output open.
1:address
value is
larger than
Compare
value4, DO4
output open.
Smaller than
Compare
value4,
output
closed.
Monitorin
Q5ST g
DO5status － －
A Paramete
r
Monitorin
Q6ST g
DO6status － －
A Paramete
r
Normal DO
Monitorin
Output Setting
Q7ST g
DO7status － －
A Paramete
r
Q5 DO5 output － Input Pin If ON, close output DO5
Q6 DO6 output － Input Pin If ON, close output DO6
Q7 DO7 output － Input Pin If ON, close output DO7
Q8 DO8 output － Input Pin If ON, close output DO8
Monitorin
Reserved RUPR Function g
Param － －
ES1 Reserve Paramete
r
Monitorin
RUPR Function g
－ －
ES2 Reserve Paramete
r
Monitorin
CFGR Function g
－ －
ES1 Reserve Paramete
r

616
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Monitorin
CFGR Function g
－ －
ES2 Reserve Paramete
r
Operation
RDW Function
TRUE Paramete －
RES1 Reserve
r
Operation
RDW Function
TRUE Paramete －
RES2 Reserve
r
Monitorin
Relative
RELA g
displacemen － －
DIST Paramete
t
Moto Status r
Monitor Monitorin
Coder
PULP g
Rotation － －
S Paramete
Rate
r
While processing, can set
RSTCIR=ON, and clear
circle of coder to 0. When
RSTC
Coil Reset Circle reset － Input Pin block is charged first time,
IR
RSTCIR=ON, initiate
block input signal, pass
on-time output of coder.
Upper limit Operation
UPLI Upper limit of address can
of address TRUE Paramete
MIT be reached in reality.
Position Signal signal r
Limit Lower limit Operation
LOWL Lower limit of address can
of address TRUE Paramete
IMIT be reached in reality.
signal r

9.9 HCM Function Block

Function block HCM corresponds to rapid count module AM714-S. Before using it, please read
reference of AM714-S.

All data configuration and supervision of AM714 module are implemented through FBD
programming and Graphics programming.

HCM function block parameters such as Node No., Rack No., Model No., Channel No. should be
filled in. The parameters contained in hardware configuration such as pulse type, set value,
comparison value, etc. could only be observed but not be modified. The forceful modification of
them does not make any sense.

Tags are not required to configure to every channel of AM714-S, but the specified function block
HCM should be configured in custom program.

This is a simple function block, its running time is 50μs.

617
 Function Block Reference

 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-12 HCM parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

DO1 output
mode (DO1
input flag
Q1EN is ON, :
0:on-time value
is Smaller than
Compare
value1, DO1
Output output
Basic open.Otherwis Operation
Mode Q1WAY TRUE －
Parameters e, output Parameter
Settings
closed.
1:on-time value
is larger than
Compare
value1, DO1
output
open.Otherwis
e, output
closed.
DO2 output
mode (DO2
input flag
Q2EN 为 ON, :
0:on-time value
isSmaller than
Compare
value2, DO2
output
open.Otherwis Operation
Q2WAY TRUE －
e, output Parameter
closed.
1:on-time value
is larger than
Compare
value2, DO2
output
open.Otherwis
e, output
closed.
Reserved, each channel
DQ3 output Operation
Q3WAY TRUE of AM714-S still only
mode Parameter
have 2 DO output now.

618
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Reserved, each channel
DQ4 output Operation
Q4WAY TRUE of AM714-S still only
mode Parameter
have 2 DO output now.
Configurati
Address of
NODE － on
Node[0~7]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
RACK － on
Rack[0~3] Need to be identical to
Hardware Parameter
block builder address of
Settings Configurati
Address of AM714
IOM － on
Module[0~15]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of I/O
CH － on
Channel[0~1]
Parameter
Extended Channel
CTV － Output Pin －
Parameters on-time value
Only valid in continuous
Channel Pulse
counting mode.
Output FREQ Frequency － Output Pin
Reference parameter:
Pin Value
CTSTA
Channel
counter status
CTSTA － Output Pin －
(OFF=stop
counting)
0 = 5V
difference AB
pulse; 1 = 24V
single end AB
Monitoring
PIKIND pulse; 2 = 24V －
Parameter
direction pulse;
3 = 24V up and
down pulse
-+
Channel
counting
mode(0 =
Monitoring
CTMODE continuous － －
Parameter
counting；1 =
Config cyclicity
Settings counting)
Channel
enable mode(0
= inner enable
mode；1 = Monitoring
GATKIND － －
outerenable Parameter
mode1；2 =
outer enable
mode2)
Channel setting
mode(0 = inner
Monitoring
SETKIND directly set；1 = － －
Parameter
outer directly
set)

619
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Channel
software
counting
SWEN － Input Pin －
enable
(ON=counting
enabled)
Channel
counting
software setting
SWSET － Input Pin －
(ON=Set the
value of
counter)
Channel DO1
input flag
Input Pin Q1EN － Input Pin －
(OFF=not
output)
Channel DO2
input flag
Q2EN － Input Pin －
(OFF=output
invalid)
Channel DO3
Reserved, each channel
input flag
Q3EN － Input Pin of AM714-S still only
(OFF=output
have 2 DO output now.
invalid)
Channel DO4
Reserved, each channel
input flag
Q4EN － Input Pin of AM714-S still only
(OFF=output
have 2 DO output now.
invalid)
Status Channel setting Monitoring
LOADV － －
Monitor value Parameter
Channel Monitoring Reserved, this function
ALMV －
alarm value Parameter is still invalible now.
Channel
Monitoring
CMP1V Compare －
Parameter
value1 Can only be set in
Channel hardware builder.
Monitoring
CMP2V Compare －
Parameter
value2
Channel
Monitoring Can only be set in
CMP3V Compare －
Parameter hardware builder.
value3
Reserved, each channel
Channel of AM714-S still only
Monitoring
CMP4V Compare － have 2 DO output now.
Parameter
value4
Channel
Monitoring
Q1TIME DO1Output －
Parameter
pulse time
Channel
Monitoring
Q2TIME DO2Output － Can only be set in
Parameter
pulse time hardware builder.
Channel Reserved, this function
Monitoring is still invalible now.
Q3TIME DO3Output －
Parameter
pulse time
Channel
Monitoring
Q4TIME DO4Output －
Parameter
pulse time

620
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Channel DO1
status Monitoring
Q1STA － －
(ON= output Parameter
closed.
Channel DO2
status Monitoring
Q2STA － －
(ON= output Parameter
closed.
Channel DO3
status Monitoring
Q3STA －
(ON= output Parameter
closed. Reserved, each channel
of AM714-S still only
Channel DO4 have 2 DO output now.
status Monitoring
Q4STA －
(ON= output Parameter
closed.
Monitoring
RUPRES Reserve － －
Parameter
Operation
RDWRES Reserve TRUE －
Parameter
Other
CFGRES Monitoring
Reserve － －
1 Parameter
CFGRES Monitoring
Reserve － －
2 Parameter

9.10 SSIM Function Block

Function block SSIM corresponds to rapid count module AM715-S. Before using it, please read
reference of AM715-S.

All data configuration and supervision of AM715-S module are implemented through FBD
programming and Graphics programming.

SSIM function block parameters such as Node No., Rack No., Model No., Channel No. should be
filled in. The parameters contained in hardware configuration such as pulse type, set value,
comparison value, etc. could only be observed but not be modified. The forceful modification of
them does not make any sense.

Tags are not required to configure to every channel of AM715-S, but the specified function block
HCM should be configured in custom program.

This is a simple function block, its running time is 50μs.

621
 Function Block Reference

Table 9-13 SSIM parameter instruction

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Reference

Basic DO1output
Parameters Q1EN enable(OFF=output － Input Pin －
invalid)
DO1output
mode(0-address
value is larger than
Output1 or equal to CMPV1,
Setting output closed.
Reference
Q1WAY Otherwise, output － Input Pin
parameter:Q1EN
open.1-address
valueSmaller than
CMPV1, output
closed. Otherwise,
output open.
DO2output
Q2EN enable(OFF=output － Input Pin －
invalid)
DO2output
mode(0-address
value is larger than
Output2 or equal to CMPV2,
Setting output closed.
Reference
Q2WAY Otherwise, output － Input Pin
parameter:Q2EN
open.1-address
valueSmaller than
CMPV2, output
closed. Otherwise,
output open.
Reserved, each
Output3 DO3output
channel of AM714-S
Setting Q3EN enable(OFF=output － Input Pin
still only have 2 DO
invalid)
output now.

622
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Reference
DO3output
mode(0-address
value is larger than
or equal to CMPV3,
output closed.
Reference
Q3WAY Otherwise, output － Input Pin
parameter:Q3EN
open.1-address
valueSmaller than
CMPV3, output
closed. Otherwise,
output open.
Reserved, each
DO4output
channel of AM714-S
Q4EN enable(OFF=output － Input Pin
still only have 2 DO
invalid)
output now.
DO4output
mode(0-address
Output4 value is larger than
Setting or equal to CMPV4,
output closed.
Reference
Q4WAY Otherwise, output － Input Pin
parameter:Q4EN
open. 1-address
valueSmaller than
CMPV4, output
closed. Otherwise,
output open.
Configurat
Address of ion
NODE －
Node[0~7] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of ion
RACK －
Rack[0~3] Paramete
Hardwar r Need to be identical to
e block builder address
Settings Configurat of AM715
Address of ion
IOM －
Module[0~15] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of I/O ion
CH －
Channel[0~1] Paramete
r
Extended EXTCNT Extend counting
Input Pin － Input Pin －
Parameters EN enable
Output
CPV on-time address － －
Pin
Output
ERR Fault － －
Pin
Output The range of
Pin displacement of the
RELADI Relative Output
－ block to the whole
ST displacement Pin
range(%), value is
between -25 and 125
Output
FLAG Flag － －
Pin

623
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Reference
Address status
PSALM
alarm － Input Pin －
EN
enable(ON=open)
Upper limit of actual
UPLIM address setting － Input Pin －
Position value
Signal Lower limit of actual
Limit LOWLIM address setting － Input Pin －
value
LOWAL Address over lower Output
－ －
M limit alarm Pin
Address over upper Output
UPALM － －
limit alarm Pin
Address Compare Can only be set in
CMPV1 － Input Pin
value1 hardware builder.
Output1
Setting DO1status(ON
Output
Q1STA indicates output is － －
Pin
closed.)
Address Compare Can only be set in
CMPV2 － Input Pin
value2 hardware builder.
Output2
Setting DO2status(ON
Output
Q2STA indicates output is － －
Pin
closed.)
Address Compare Can only be set in
CMPV3 － Input Pin
value3 hardware builder.
Output3
Setting DO3status(ON
Output
Q3STA indicates output is － －
Pin
closed.)
Address Compare Can only be set in
CMPV4 － Input Pin
value4 hardware builder.
Output4
Settings DO4status(ON
Output
Q4STA indicates output is － －
Pin
closed.)
Monitorin
Code type of coder
CODET g Can only be set in
(0 Gray code,1 －
YPE Paramete hardware builder.
binary)
r
Coder signal check
Monitorin
type(0=no
CHECK g
check,1=odd － －
Configur TYP Paramete
check,2=even
ation r
check)
Data
Monitor Monitorin
CODEN Code number of g Can only be set in
－
UM coder Paramete hardware builder.
r
Monitorin
Clock
CLKFRE g
frequency(Unit is － －
Q Paramete
KHz)
r

9.11 PI_MIG Function Block (Calculation PI Signal Process)

This function block processes calculation signals of modules FW368, XP335 and SP335. Thus

624
 Function Block Reference

channels of the hardware configuration corresponding to the address must be “Cumulation” signal.
When the channel is set as “Frequency”, tags corresponding to the channel can be used directly.

This is a complex function block, its running time is 5μs.

9.11.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-13 Parameter Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

For example, if 1 pulse
Pulse Pulse Operation stands for 0.1L flow, to
GAIN TRUE
Equivalent Equivalence Parameter display unit L/s, set Pulse
Equivalence=0.1
PV upper Operation
PVH TRUE －
PV Limit limit alarm Parameter
Settings PV lower Operation
PVL TRUE －
limit alarm Parameter
High Limit of
Cumulation Operation
HLIM Accumulatio TRUE －
H Limit Parameter
n
Decimal Configuratio
DLEN － －
Digitals[0,5] n Parameter
Basic Range Unit of Configuratio
PVEU － －
Parameters Settings average flow n Parameter
Unit
Configuratio
OUTEU accumulate － －
n Parameter
value
Address of Configuratio
NODE －
Node[1~7] n Parameter
Address of Configuratio Need to Match with
RACK －
Rack[0~3] n Parameter hardware builder. When ID
Address of is illegal, engender ERR
Hardware Configuratio
IOM Module[0~1 － alarm. FLAG
Settings n Parameter
5] correspondent Address bit,
then panel will display
Address of CFGERR.
I/O Configuratio
CH －
Channel[0~7 n Parameter
]
Accumulate
output.Outpu
Extended t values that
Output Pin OUT are － Output Pin －
Parameters
processed
by Pulse
Equivalence

625
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Average
output.
Accumulate
pulses of If average is larger than
module for upper limit alarm, engender
10 seconds, PVH upper limit alarm. If
PV then devide － Output Pin average is smaller than
it by time. lower limit alarm,
After engenderPVL lower limit
processed alarm
by Pulse
Equivalence,
output PV.
When block
duplicate
fault, block
missing,
channel
Fault or
function
ERR=ON, correspondent
block status
ERR － Output Pin flag address bit, panel
alarm
displays ERR alarm
occurs,
function
block
engenders
ERR
alarm(ERR=
ON)
Set
RST=ON,
Operation Reset as OFF after keeping
RST reset －
Parameter ON for a period.
accumulate
output OUT
Set
HOLD=OFF
start
accumulate；
Operator while
Command accumulatio
n, set Operation
HOLD HOLD=ON － －
Parameter
stop
accumulatio
n. When
HOLD=OFF,
go on with
accumulatio
n.
Out of
OOS Service Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
Settings Flag, Parameter
ON=OOS

626
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

When
accumulatio
n exceeds
High Limit of Monitoring
Alarm HALM － Relevant to ENALM
Accumulatio Parameter
n,
engender(H
ALM)
Suppress
Operation
AOF Module TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Alarm
Enable and
Alarm Alarm
Suppress ENALM TRUE －
Enable Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
9.11.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 9-14 Panel Parameter Instruction

Parameter Value
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Application Instruction
Name Range
Indicate the value each pulse
Pulse
Pulse GAIN 1.0000 － stands for, set according to
Coefficient
situation.
PV lower limit alarm value.(Alarm is
PVL PVL 0.0000 － valid when “ENALM” is chosen,
otherwise neglected)
AVE Alarm
PV upper limit alarm value.(Alarm
PVH PVH 100.0000 － is valid when “ENALM” is chosen,
otherwise neglected)
Set accumulation exceeds HLIM
alarm.(Alarm is valid when
AV Alarm AV Alarm HALM OFF －
“ENALM” is chosen, otherwise
neglected)

627
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Value
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Application Instruction
Name Range
Read only, set while structure
DOMAIN － － －
building.
Read only, set while structure
CON － 0 －
building.
Read only, set in function block
NODE NODE 0 [0,7]
Address Properties interface.
Information Read only, set in function block
RACK RACK 0 [0,3]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
IOM IOM 0 [0,15]
Properties interface.
Read only, set in function block
CH CH 0 [0,31]
Properties interface.
9.11.3 Flag
Table 9-14 Flag position definition instruction

Settings of
Flag Remarks
Monitoring
Enable
D0 The Tag is Out of Service (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Configuration ERROR (CFGERR)
D2 Disable Module Error (ERR)
D3 Disable -
D4 Disable High Alarm of Accumulation (HALM)
D5 Disable PV High Alarm (H)
D6 Disable PV Low Alarm (L)
D7~D14 - -
D15 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

9.12 PAT_MIG Function Block (PAT Position Adjust Function Block)

This function block is used to control modules FW342, XP341, SP341. The basic Properties and
parameter setting of the function block must be filled in after adding. In parameter setting, address
information of the channel like node and rack, and module information like signal type, deadband
and channel fast increase step value manually must be filled in.

This is a complex function block, its running time is 5μs.

9.12.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-15 Parameter Instruction of PAT_MIG

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s

628
 Function Block Reference

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s
UPPER LIMIT Operation
SVH OF SET TRUE Paramete range[SCH,SCL]
SV VALUE r
Limits LOWER Operation
SVL LIMIT OF SET TRUE Paramete range[SCH,SCL]
VALUE r
Operation
Upper limit of
MVH － Paramete －
Valve threshold
r
Position
Limits Operation
Lower limit of
MVL － Paramete －
threshold
r
Configurat
Engineering ion set in function block
EU －
Unit Paramete Properties interface
r
Configurat
use to display data on
Decimal ion
DLEN － function block panel, default
Digitals[0,5] Paramete
value is 3
Range r
Settings Configurat
Upper Limit of
ion
SCH Measuring － －
Paramete
Range
r
Configurat
Basic Lower Limit of
ion
Parameters SCL Measuring － －
Paramete
Range
r
Address
feedback
signal Configurat
type(1:resista ion
TYPE － (Must be filled)
nce,2:4~20m Paramete
A r
current,3:0~1
0mA current)
Configurat
Address of ion
NODE －
Node[1~7] Paramete
Hardwar r
e
Settings Configurat
Address of ion
RACK －
Rack[0~3] Paramete
r Match with hardware
Configurat builder(Must be filled)
Address of ion
IOM －
Module[0~15] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of I/O ion
CH －
Channel[0~3] Paramete
r

629
 Function Block Reference

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s
Setting value.
User
expected
threshold, this
Extended setting value
Parameters Input Pin SV can be set － Input Pin －
manually by
user or set
automatically
by function
block program
Threshold
feedback
value. Can
increase/decr
Output
PV ease － Connect to AI
Pin
according to
feedback, or
Output enter
Pin auto-control.
Flag of
CNFER Configuration Output
－ －
R Error,ON=Fau Pin
lt
ERROR OF Output
PVERR － －
PV CHANNEL Pin
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender stop
Operator command.Wh Operation
Comma STOP en negative TRUE Paramete －
nd transmission r
occurs,
engender
start
command.
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender
auto
command.
Meanwhile,
function block Operation
AUTO by comparing TRUE Paramete －
setting value r
with feedback
value, carry
out auto
control
through long
pulse and
short pulse.

630
 Function Block Reference

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender
manual
control
Operation
command.
MAN TRUE Paramete －
Meanwhile
r
output DO on
module is only
affected by
user
command(like
INC and DEC)
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender
manual
increase
command. Operation
INC Module TRUE Paramete －
outputs a r
increasing
pulse, length
of the pulse is
“manual
function step
time”
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender
manual
decrease
command. Operation
DEC Module TRUE Paramete －
outputs a r
decreasing
pulse, length
of the pulse is
“manual
function step
time”
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender Operation
LEARN learn TRUE Paramete －
command, r
module enters
learning
status.

631
 Function Block Reference

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s
When positive
transmission
occurs,
engender
upload
learning
parameters
When module upload its own
command. Operation
parameters, it will upload
UPDATA When TRUE Paramete
on-time threshold, dead
negative r
zone and stable time.
transmission
occurs,
engender
upload user
set
parameters
command
Out of Service Operation
OOS
SWOOS Flag, TRUE Paramete －
Settings
ON=OOS r
Operation
Dead
DB TRUE Paramete (Must be filled)
Zone(%)
r
Dynamo
Operation
change
INTVAL TRUE Paramete －
interval(unit is
r
ms)
Operation
TH threshold(%) TRUE Paramete －
r

Paramet Threshold
Operation
er stable
TSTD TRUE Paramete －
Settings time(unit is
r
ms)
Minimum step Operation
MSTEP time(unit is TRUE Paramete －
ms) r
Manual Operation
TSTEP function step TRUE Paramete (Must be filled)
time(unit is s) r
SP341
Operation
module
TOC TRUE Paramete －
process
r
time(unit is s)
Monitorin
Nagative Limit
Status g
NLALM Alarm(ON=Al － －
Paramete
arm)
r
Monitorin
Positive Limit
g
PLALM Alarm(ON=Al － －
Paramete
arm)
r
Monitorin
Increasing
ASCEN g
status(ON=inc － －
D Paramete
reasing)
r

632
 Function Block Reference

Propertie
Name Description Upload Application Reference
s
Monitorin
Decreasing
DESCE g
status(ON=de － －
ND Paramete
creasing)
r
Disconnection Monitorin
Alarm g
BLALM － －
Status(ON=Al Paramete
arm) r
Feedback of Monitorin
MAN_ST Manual g
－ －
A Status(ON=M Paramete
anual) r
Learning Monitorin
LRN_ST status g
－ －
A flag(ON=learn Paramete
ing) r
Monitorin
Dead zone of g
DBLN － －
learning(%) Paramete
r
Monitorin
Threshold of g
THLN － －
learning(%) Paramete
r
Monitorin
Stable time of
g
TSTDLN learning(unit － －
Paramete
is ms)
r
Minimum step Monitorin
MSTEPL of g
－ －
N learning(unit Paramete
is ms) r
Operation
Suppress
AOF TRUE Paramete －
Alarm Module Alarm
r
Enable
and Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE Paramete －
s r
Output
FLAG Flag － －
Pin

633
 Function Block Reference

9.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 9-16 panel parameter instruction

Parameter Value
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Application Instruction
Name Range
Indicate the value each pulse
Pulse
Pulse GAIN 1.0000 － stands for, set according to
Coefficient
situation.
PV lower limit alarm value.
AVE Alarm (Alarm is valid when “ENALM”
PVL PVL 0.0000 －
is chosen, otherwise
neglected).

634
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Value
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Application Instruction
Name Range
PV upper limit alarm value.
(Alarm is valid when “ENALM”
PVH PVH 100.0000 －
is chosen, otherwise
neglected).
Set accumulation exceeds
HLIM alarm. (Alarm is valid
AV Alarm AV Alarm HALM OFF －
when “ENALM” is chosen,
otherwise neglected).
Read-only. Set in the
DOMAIN － － －
VFSysBuilder.
Read-only. Set in the
CON － － －
VFSysBuilder.
Read-only. Set in the function
NODE NODE 0 [0,7]
Address block properties interface.
Information Read-only. Set in the function
RACK RACK 0 [0,3]
block properties interface.
Read-only. Set in the function
IOM IOM 0 [0,15]
block properties interface.
Read-only. Set in the function
CH CH 0 [0,31]
block properties interface.
9.12.3 Flag
Table 9-17 Flag position definition instruction

Settings of
Flag Remarks
Monitoring
Enable
D0 The Tag is Out of Service (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 Disable Error (ERR)
D2 -- --
D3 Disable Configuration ERROR (CFGERR)
D4 Disable Automatic Status (AUTO)
D5 Disable Manually (MAN)
D6 Disable Negative Alarm (NALM)
D7 Disable Positive Alarm (PALM)
D8 Disable Self-learn Status
D9 Disable Ascend Status (ASCEND)
D10 Disable Descend Status (DESCEND)
D11 Disable Disconnection Alarm (BALM)
D12~D13 -- --
D14 Disable Low Alarm of Set Value (SVL)
D15 Disable High Alarm of Set Value (SVH)
D16 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D17 Disable IS/Not SP341

9.13 SERVO_MIG Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module)

This function block controls module FW346 and displays its status information.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 100μs.

635
 Function Block Reference

Table 9-18 Parameter Instruction of SERVO_MIG

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Address of Configuration
NODE －
Node[0~7] Parameter
Need to Match
Basic Configuration Address of Configuration
RACK － with hardware
Parameters Parameter Rack[0~3] Parameter builder
Address of Configuration
IOM －
Module[0~15] Parameter
Extended LVDT
Input Pin MANZER
Parameters manually － Input Pin －
O
clear value(%)
LVDT
MANFUL
manually turn － Input Pin －
L
full value(%)
Signal
frequency that
FREQ would avoid － Input Pin －
jam.(10Hz or
20Hz)
Signal range
RANGE that would － Input Pin －
avoid jam.(%)
Manually
STEPRAT
function step － Input Pin －
E
rate(%)

636
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Speed of
change when
SPEEDT
clear or － Input Pin －
R
change
range(%/s)
Auto clear or
range change
AUTOTU
enable(OFF= － Input Pin －
NE
stop,ON=start
)
LVDT
manually
setting zero
MANEN － Input Pin －
valid(OFF=not
valid,
ON=valid)
Avoid jam
funcition
enable(OFF= Operation
SKEN － －
not Parameter
allowed,ON=a
llow)
Scale
KP parameter(0.0 － Input Pin －
1~655.35)
Integrate
parameter
TI － Input Pin －
(0.0s~6553.5s
)
Differential
parameter
TD － Input Pin －
(0.0s~6553.5s
)
Outer set
ESV － Input Pin －
value
Output tracing
TV － Input Pin －
value(%)
Output lower
ML － Input Pin －
limit(%)
Output upper
MH － Input Pin －
limit(%)
Output tracing
switch
SWTV (OFF=not － Input Pin －
trace,ON=trac
e)
Enable serve
module to
PIDWRE upload PID
－ Input Pin －
N value(OFF=n
ot allowed,
ON=allow)
Feedback of
Output Pin spacific
R_PIDSV － Output Pin －
threshold of
DEH

637
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
DEH
MV threshold － Output Pin －
output
LVDT high
LVDTH1 － Output Pin －
selected value
LVDT1
LVDT1 sample － Output Pin －
vlue(%)
LVDT2
LVDT2 sample － Output Pin －
value(%)
LVDT zero
position
RLVDTZ － Output Pin －
readback
value
LVDT range
and phase
RLVDTF － Output Pin －
readback
value
Logic flag of
module
BOOT (0=not in start － Output Pin －
logic,1=in
start logic)
Feedback of
manual/auto
RCARDA status of
－ Output Pin －
M module
(0=module,1=
auto)
LVDT auto set
zero success
ZEROOK － Output Pin －
flag(0=succes
s,1=fail)
LVDT auto set
range
FULLOK success － Output Pin －
flag(0=succes
s,1=fail)
LVDT auto set
zero /set
range
TUNING status(0=not － Output Pin －
started or
ended,1=proc
eeding)
Alarm when
difference
between
LVDT1 and
LVDTERR － Output Pin －
LVDT2 is too
large(0=no
alarm,1=alar
m)

638
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
manually set
zero /set
range status
LOOPAL
err － Output Pin －
M
alarm(0=no
alarm,1=alar
m)
circle output
SVOUTAL alarm(0=no
－ Output Pin －
M alarm,1=alar
m)
OUTHDA
Reserve － Output Pin －
LM
LVDT1AL LVDT1offline
－ Output Pin －
M alarm
LVDT2AL LVDT2 offline
－ Output Pin －
M alarm
RKP readback KP － Output Pin －
RTI readback TI － Output Pin －
RTD readback TI － Output Pin －
DD tap
DDVPOSI Address － Output Pin －
feedback
Flag of
CFGERR Configuration － Output Pin －
Error
Function
ERR － Output Pin －
block alarm

9.14 SERVOCON Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module)

This function block controls module AM722-S and displays its status information. Before using it,
please read reference of AM722-S.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 100μs.

9.14.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-19 Parameter Instruction of SERVOCON

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

639
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Configurati
Address of
NODE － on
Node[0~7]
Parameter

Basic Hardware Configurati Need to Match with

Address of
Parameters Settings RACK － on hardware builder
Rack[0~3]
Parameter
Configurati
Address of
IOM － on
Module[0~15]
Parameter
Extended SV preset value － Input Pin －
Parameters
output tracing
switch
Input Pin SWTV － Input Pin －
(OFF=not
tracing,ON=trace)
output tracing
TV － Input Pin －
value(%)
module manual
flag
R_AM － Output Pin －
(OFF=auto,ON=m
anual)
Output circle setting
PIDSV － Output Pin －
Pin value(%)
circle measured
PIDPV － Output Pin －
value(%)
circle output
PIDMV － Output Pin －
value(%)
ACKLVDT LVDT1 offline Operation
－ －
Operator 1 recover flag Parameter
Command ACKLVDT LVDT2 offline Operation
－ －
2 recover flag Parameter
auto set zero/set
AUTOTU range Operation
－ －
NE enable(OFF=stop Parameter
,ON=start)
oil switch tripout
respond
OILTRPE Operation
enable(OFF=not TRUE －
N Parameter
respond ,ON=res
Auto pond)
Zero-adju
st and preset value rate
Amplitude SPEEDT of change of set Operation
TRUE －
-adjust R zero/set range Parameter
(%/s)
auto set zero/set
PERCEN Monitoring
range complete － －
T Parameter
rate
auto set zero/set
ZEROBA range success Monitoring
－ －
D flag(OFF=succes Parameter
s,ON=fail)

640
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
manual writing
LVDT set zero/set
MANWRE range Operation
Manual － －
N enable(OFF=unch Parameter
Zero-adju angable,ON=chan
st and gable)
Amplitude
-adjust MANZER LVDT manual set Operation
TRUE －
O zero value(%) Parameter
MANFUL LVDT manual full Operation
TRUE －
L value(%) Parameter
avoid jam function
enable(OFF=not Operation
SKEN － －
allowed,ON=allow Parameter
ed)
Anti-jamm Signal frequency
ing that would avoid Operation
FREQ － －
jam. (10Hz or Parameter
20Hz)
Signal range that
Operation
RANGE would avoid jam. － －
Parameter
(%)
Accelerated
velocity
feedfoward
ACCFBE Operation
control － －
Accelerati N Parameter
enable(OFF=not
on feedfoward,ON=f
Feedforw eedfoward)
ard
ACCRAT Accelerate Operation
－ －
E parameter Parameter
Accelerate Monitoring
R_ACC － －
rate(r/min/s) Parameter
Rate
Operation
KP parameter(0.01~6 TRUE －
Parameter
55.35)
Accumulate
Operation
TI parameter(0.0s~6 TRUE －
Parameter
553.5s)
PID Differential
Setting Operation
TD parameter(0.0s~6 TRUE －
Parameter
553.5s)
PID circle positive Monitoring
PIDPEI －
deviation alarm Parameter
PID circle
Monitoring
PIDNEI negative deviation
Parameter
alarm
Output upper Operation
MH TRUE －
Output limit(%) Parameter
Limits Output lower Operation
ML TRUE －
limit(%) Parameter
HandHeld STEPRAT Manual function Operation
－ －
Settings E step value(%) Parameter

641
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Module
Manual/auto
DEBUGA Operation
switch － －
M Parameter
(OFF=auto,ON=
manual )

Debug Debug switch

(OFF=not Operation
DEBUG － －
debug,ON=debug Parameter
)
Threshold manual
Operation
MANMV setting － －
Parameter
value(%Debug )
LVDT large
Operation
DLLVDT deviation alarm TRUE －
Parameter
limit(%)
LVDT large
deviation alarm Operation
HYSLVDT TRUE －
hold-up circle Parameter
Alarm value(%)
Limit
Setting value
Operation
DLSVPV deviation alarm TRUE －
Parameter
limit(%)
Setting value
TIMESVP Operation
deviation alarm TRUE －
V Parameter
time limit(s)
Alarm
Alarm ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE －
Parameter
Enabled
Suppress Module Operation
and AOF TRUE －
Alarm Parameter
Suppress
FLAG Flag － Output Pin －
LVDT1 sample
LVDT1 － Output Pin －
value(%)
LVDT2 sample
LVDT2 － Output Pin －
value(%)
LVDT zero
Monitoring
R_LVDTZ position readback － －
Parameter
value(%)
LVDT range
Monitoring
R_LVDTF readback － －
Parameter
LVDT value(%)
Monitor LVDT1 check
LVDT1BA
(OFF=normal,ON － Output Pin －
D
=offline)
LVDT2 check
LVDT2BA
(OFF=normal,ON － Output Pin －
D
=offline)
LVDT input mode:
0=double
SAMPMO Monitoring
high;1=LVDT2sin － －
DE Parameter
gle;2=LVDT1singl
e
Module First output Monitoring
MV1 － －
Status value(%) Parameter
Monitor Second output Monitoring
MV2 － －
value(%) Parameter

642
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Module is in start
status
Monitoring
BOOTING (OFF=start － －
Parameter
finished,ON=starti
ng)
Auto/manual set
Monitoring
HDWMAN (OFF=auto,ON= － －
Parameter
manual )
PIDtrace status
Monitoring
PIDTR (OFF=auto,ON=tr － －
Parameter
ace)

Module LVDT display

Fault LVDTMB output circuit Monitoring
－ －
Monitor AD Fault(OFF=norma Parameter
l,ON=Fault)
DDV2 output
DDV2BA circuit Fault Monitoring
－ －
D (OFF=normal,ON Parameter
=Fault)
DDV1 output
DDV1BA circuit Fault Monitoring
－ －
D (OFF=normal,ON Parameter
=Fault)
LVDT module 15V
LVDTPBA power fault Monitoring
－ －
D (OFF=normal,ON Parameter
=Fault)
Auxiliary Power
AUXPBA Fault Monitoring
－ －
D (OFF=normal,ON Parameter
=Fault)
LVDT large Monitoring
EILVDT － －
deviation alarm Parameter
Check channel
Fault Monitoring
FAIL － －
(OFF=normal,ON Parameter
=Fault)
Flag of
Monitoring
CFGERR Configuration － －
Parameter
Error
Communication Monitoring
COMERR － －
fault Parameter
Function block Monitoring
ERR － －
alarm Parameter
Speed meter
module 1 match
Monitoring
SM1DISM flag － －
Parameter
(OFF=match,
ON=not match)
Speed meter
module 2 match
Monitoring
SM2DISM flag － －
Parameter
(OFF=match,
ON=not match)

643
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Speed meter
module 3 match
Monitoring
SM3DISM flag － －
Parameter
(OFF=match,
ON=not match)
9.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Table 9-20 Panel Parameter of SERVOCON

Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Name Value Range

644
 Function Block Reference

Parameter Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Read only, set in
Loop R_AM OFF － function block Properties
interface or in program.
Read only, set in
Booting BOOTING OFF － function block Properties
interface.
Read only, set in
Manual HDWMAN OFF － function block Properties
STATE
interface.
Read only, set in
LVDT Module SAMPMODE 0 － function block Properties
interface.
ACK LVDT1 ACK LVDT1 OFF － －
ACK LVDT2 ACK LVDT2 OFF － －
SWTV SWTV OFF － －

PID KP(%) KP － － －
Parame TI(s) TI － － －
ter
TD(s) TD － － －
Output H(%) MH － － －
Parameter Limits L(%) ML － － －
Settings Read only, set in
ACC(r/
R_ACC － － function block Properties
min/s)
interface.
Trend
PLUS ACCRATE － － －
ACCF
ACCFBEN OFF － －
BEN
Auto Tuning AUTOTUNE OFF －
Read only, set in
Start PERCENT 0 － function block Properties
interface.
Rate(%/s) SPEEDTR 5.0000 － －
Complete(%) ZEROBAD OFF － －
PARAM Read only, set in
Zero(%) MANZERO 0.0000 － function block Properties
interface or in program.
Read only, set in
Range(%) MANFULL 0.0000 － function block Properties
interface or in program.
Manual Set MANWREN OFF － －
Step Manual STEPRATE 0.1000 － －
JAM Test SKEN OFF － －

Anti-jammi Choose 10Hz or 20Hz,

ng Frequency FREQ 10Hz － and click on “Yes”
button.
Range (%) RANGE 0.0100 － －
9.14.3 Flag
Table 9-21 Flag

Flag Instruction

645
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D0 Error
D1 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D2 Status Alarm
D5 LVDT Large Error Alarm
D7 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D6 NEI Alarm(NEI)
D8 LVDT1 Disconnection Alarm
D9 LVDT2 Disconnection Alarm
D10 Manual (MAN)
D4 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

9.15 SPEED_MIG Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed

Protect Module)

This function block controls module FW345 and FW382 and displays their status information.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 100μs.

9-22 Parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
60 teeth is normally
Input used, to ensure that
Teeth number of Speed test
Pin TNUM － Input Pin speed test is nice,
fluted disc
suggest using more
than 20 teeth
OPCLMT = ON:forbid 103
function.In other words, not
function to signals over speed
OPCLMT 103%.OPCLMT = OFF:Do not － Input Pin －
forbid 103 function.In other
words, function to signals over
speed 103%

646
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OPCPRT = ON:forbid 110
function.In other words, not
function to signals over speed Not suggest to fobid
OPCPRT 110%.OPCPRT = OFF:Do not － Input Pin over speed 110%
forbid 110 function.In other protect function
words, function to signals over
speed 110%
Under machinery
over speed test
machinery over speed test status, module
OVSPEED － Input Pin
(OFF=not allowed,ON=allowed) change protect
value from 110%
to 112%
oil switch tripout signal
OILSLIP － Input Pin －
(OFF=allowed,ON=forbid )
SPEED rotation rate － Output Pin －
Speed channel Fault
FAIL － Output Pin －
(OFF=not Fault,ON=Fault)
103% alarm output
ALM103 － Output Pin －
(OFF=no alarm, ON=alarm)
110% alarm output
ALM110 － Output Pin －
(OFF=no alarm,ON=alarm)
Emergency
STOP － Output Pin －
stop(OFF=none,ON=yes)
When address set by hardware
Outpu builder is not module type FW345
t Pin CFGERR or FW382, engender flag of － Output Pin －
Configuration Error.(OFF=no
alarm,ON=alarm)
When module is in missing status
for more than 10 seconds,
COMERR － Output Pin －
engender communication err
alarm(OFF=no alarm, ON=alarm)
When function block
When function block engenders engenders ERR
CFGERR or COMERR, alarm, function
ERR － Output Pin
engenders err alarm at the same block does not
time(OFF=no alarm,ON=alarm) renew data passing
through it
Configurati
NODE Address of Node[0,7] － on
Confi Parameter
gurati Configurati Need to Match with
on RACK Address of Rack[0,3] － on hardware builder
Para Parameter
meter
Configurati
IOM Address of Module[0,15] － on
Parameter

9.16 SPEEDTST Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed

Protect Module)

This function block controls module AM761-S and displays its status information.

647
 Function Block Reference

This function block is a complex function block, its running time is 100μs.

9.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-23 Parameter Instruction

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Instruction
Configurat
Address of ion
NODE －
Node[0~7] Paramete
r
Configurat
Basic Hardware Address of ion Need to Match with
Parameters Settings RACK － hardware builder
Rack[0~3] Paramete
r
Configurat
Address of ion
IOM －
Module[0~15] Paramete
r
allowed
machinary over machinary over speed
Extended ENOV speed test test status, module
Parameters － Input Pin
SPD (OFF=not change protect value
allowed,ON=allo from 110% to 112%
wed)
Input Pin 110 protect
Not suggest to fobid
FOBID forbid flag
－ Input Pin over speed 110%
110 (OFF=open,ON=
protect function
forbid )
103limit forbid
FOBID flag
－ Input Pin －
103 (OFF=open,ON=
forbid )
Output Pin rotation Output
SPEED － －
rate(RPS) Pin
accelerate Output
ACC － －
rate(r/min/s) Pin
110 protect
output status
110PO Output
(OFF=no － －
UT Pin
output,ON=outp
ut)
103limit output
status
103LM Output
(OFF=no － －
OUT Pin
output,ON=outp
ut)

648
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Instruction
machinary over
speed test
TSTOV status(OFF=not Output
－ －
SPD in over speed Pin
test,ON=in over
speed test)
jamproof
frequency test
Operation
ENFRE enable
－ Paramete －
Q (OFF=not
r
enable,ON=ena
ble)
Operation
103DO
103limit output1 － Paramete －
1
r
Operation
103DO
Operation 103limit output2 － Paramete －
2
Parameter r
Operation
110DO 110 protect
－ Paramete －
1 output1
r
Operation
110DO 110 protect
－ Paramete －
2 output2
r
2 out of 3 logic
Operation
EN3S test
－ Paramete －
W2 enable(OFF=clo
r
sed,ON=open)
Alarm
ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE Paramete －
r
Alarm
Enable and Operation
Suppress
Suppress AOF TRUE Paramete －
Module Alarm
r
Output
FLAG Flag － －
Pin
jamproof
frequency test
status(OFF=not
Monitorin
Status in jamproof
TSTFR g
Monitor frequency test － －
EQ Paramete
status,ON=in
r
jamproof
frequency test
status)
110 protect
Monitorin
forbid status
110FO g
(OFF=not － －
BID Paramete
forbid ,ON=forbi
r
d)
103limit forbid
Monitorin
status
103FO g
(OFF=not － －
BID Paramete
forbid ,ON=forbi
r
d)

649
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Instruction
oil switch tripout
Monitorin
status
OILTRI g
(OFF=not － －
P Paramete
tripout,ON=tripo
r
ut)
emergent stop
Monitorin
function(OFF=no
EMST g
t emergent － －
OP Paramete
stop,ON=emerg
r
ent stop)
rotation rate
Monitorin
input 15V power
SPD15 g
Fault － －
BAD Paramete
(OFF=normal,O
r
N=Fault)
emergent
Monitorin
stop24V power
STP24 g
Fault － －
BAD Paramete
(OFF=normal,O
r
N=Fault)
oil switch
Monitorin
tripout24V power
OIL24B g
Fault － －
AD Paramete
(OFF=normal,O
r
N=Fault)
Terminal Board Monitorin
TU24B 24V power fault g
－ －
AD (OFF=normal,O Paramete
N=Fault) r
Auxiliary Power Monitorin
SUPLY connection fault g
－ －
BAD (OFF=normal,O Paramete
N=Fault) r
Speed test Monitorin
channel Fault g
FAIL － －
(OFF=normal,O Paramete
N=Fault) r
When address
set by hardware
Monitorin
builder is not
CFGE g
module type － －
RR Paramete
AM721-S,
r
engender Error
CFGERR alarm)
When module is
in missing
Monitorin
status, engender
COME g
communication － －
RR Paramete
err
r
alarm(COMERR
)

650
 Function Block Reference

Propertie Application
Name Description Upload
s Instruction
When function
block engenders
CFGERR or
When function block
COMERR, Monitorin
engenders ERR alarm,
engenders err g
ERR － function block cannot
alarm at the Paramete
update the data
same r
transmitted through it
time(OFF=no
alarm,ON=alarm
)
9.16.2 Flag
Table 9-24 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Error
D1 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D2 Status Alarm
D4 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

9.17 MODULECOMM Function Block

Function block is used to detect and alarm display communication information of communication
block.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 100μs.

9.17.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 9-25 MODULECOMM parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
When module is
valid and in missing
status, engender
When
communication
COMMSTA=OFF,
Output Pin module fault
COMMSTA － Output Pin communication
(COMMSTA=ON)ala
module is in
rm.When module
normal status
builder is not
affective, set err
alarm immediately.

651
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Communication port
of correspondent
function block that
matches the address Match with
RACK － Output Pin
of Rack. For hardware builder
example, number 2
matches third port of
module COM741-S
Alarm when node
address, logic
module number
ERR － Output Pin －
inner error or illegal
function block alarm
occurs.
CANAERR Bus A Fault - Output Pin -
CANBERR Bus B Fault - Output Pin -
Configurati
NODE Address of Node[0,7] － on
Configuration Parameter Match with
Parameter Configurati hardware builder
Logic module
LOGICIOM Note1 － on
number[0,63]
Parameter

Note1: Logic block number is according to the logic number displayed by the hardware builder, for
instance:

652
 Function Block Reference

Figure 9-2 Display of logic number

9.18 CANCOMM Function Block

Function block CANCOMM is used to detect and display alarm information of the bus
communication information of the node.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 100μs.

Table 9-26 CANCOMM parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

653
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Bus0 fault
CAN0ERR (ON=Fault,OFF= － Output Pin －
normal)
Bus1 fault
CAN1ERR (ON=Fault,OFF= － Output Pin －
normal)
Bus2 fault
CAN2ERR (ON=Fault,OFF= － Output Pin －
Output Pin normal)
Bus3 fault
CAN3ERR (ON=Fault,OFF= － Output Pin －
normal)
Alarm when
node number
ERR inner fault or － Output Pin －
illegal function
error occurs.
Configurati
Configuration Address of Need to Match with hardware
NODE － on
Parameter Node[0~7] builder
Parameter

9.19 Cold Startup Function Block (COLD_START)

The function block can find out whether controller is cold started, and outputs single period pulse if
yes.

Table 9-27 Parameters of COLD_START

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output Value (ON refers
Output Output single period pulse after
OUT to controller cold startup, － Output Pin
Pin cold startup.
OFF refers to not.)

654
Function Block Reference

655
 Function Block Reference

Section 10 Sequence Control Function Block

Sequence control function block library contains 1 complex function block and 1 simple function
block.

10.1 SQC Function Block

Function block is used to show the current status of sequential program.

This function block is a simple function block, its running time is 50μs.

Table 10-1 SQC parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic START=ON, Main

Input Pin Main Sequence
Parameters START - Input Pin Sequence Control
Control Start
Start
FINISH=ON, Main
Main Sequence
FINISH - Input Pin Sequence Control
Control Finished
Finished
Reverse REV_RUN=ON,
REV_RUN Sequence - Input Pin Reverse Sequence
Control Running Control Running
Main Sequence PERMIT=ON, Main
PERMIT Control Start - Input Pin Sequence Control
Permit Start Permit
AUX_F=ON,
Auxiliary Cabinet
AUX_F - Input Pin Auxiliary Cabinet
Fail
Fail
Step 1 fail, STEPF1
STEPF1 Step 1 fail - Input Pin
＝ON

656
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Step 2 fails,
STEPF2 Step 2 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 3 fails,
STEPF3 Step 3 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 4 fails,
STEPF4 Step 4 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 5 fails,
STEPF5 Step 5 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 6 fails,
STEPF6 Step 6 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 7 fails,
STEPF7 Step 7 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 8 fails,
STEPF8 Step 8 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 9 fails,
STEPF9 Step 9 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
Step 10 fails,
STEPF10 Step 10 fail - Input Pin
STEPF1＝ON
M_RUN=ON,
main Sequence
M_RUN - Output Pin -
Control is
Running
Output Pin S_RUN=ON,
S_RUN Sequence is - Output Pin -
Running
M_FAIL=ON,
M_FAIL Main Sequence - Output Pin -
Control Fail
RST＝ON, reset Operation Reset time is
RST -
Operation S_RUN Parameter defined by TRST
Parameter Operation
TRST Fault Reset Time - Unit is second
Parameter

Algorithm

 When main sequence control is permitted (PERMIT=ON), main sequence control

starts (START=ON) but not finished (FINISH=OFF), reverse sequence control is not
running (REV_RUN=OFF), auxiliary cabinet has no fault (AUX_F=OFF), and there
is no fault in STEPF1~ STEPF10, then M_RUN=ON, which means main sequence
control is running.
 When main sequence control is running (M_RUN=ON), but not finished
(FINISH=OFF), and no reset (RST=OFF), then S_RUN=ON, which means program
is running.

657
 Function Block Reference

 When there is fault in any step of STEPF1~ STEPF10 or in auxiliary cabinet

(AUX_F=ON), or set PERMIT=OFF when program is running (S_RUN=ON), then
M_FAIL=ON.
 While program is running(S_RUN=ON), if PERMIT=OFF, set M_FAIL=ON,
M_RUN=OFF, and S_RUN=ON.
 If M_RUN=ON and S_RUN=ON, then when RST=ON, S_RUN=OFF(M_RUN=ON
remains). After time TRST, return to S_RUN=ON.

10.2 STP Function Block

Function block STP is used to realize as many as 24 steps of sequence logic control, supporting
functions such as reset, run, pause, jump, step disable and so on.

This function block is a complex function block, its running time is 50μs.

Table 10-2 STP parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Step
Basic Order Step Order Operation
Parameters STPTN TRUE (1~24)Steps
Number Amount Parameter
Setting
Input Positive transition
RST Reset Switch - Input Pin
Switch effective
Step Order Run
PERMIT - Input Pin PERMIT=ON, allow
Permit Condition
Step Order Stop STOP=ON, stop step
STOP - Input Pin
Switch order
Positive transition
STRT Startup Switch - Input Pin
effective

658
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Step Order Pause Positive transition
PAUSE - Input Pin
Switch effective
JUMP=ON, jump to
JUMP Jump-step Switch - Input Pin step indicated by
JUMPN
Disable Flag of Set step serial No. by
STPEN - Input Pin
Step bit.
JUMPN Jump-step Order - Input Pin -
STPRUN＝ON
STPRUN Step Order - Output Pin -
Running
STPFAIL=ON
STPFAIL - Output Pin -
Step Order Fault
STPEND=ON
STPEND - Output Pin -
Step Order Finish
STPPAUS STPPAUSE=ON
- Output Pin -
Status E Step Order Pause
Current Step
STPN - Output Pin -
Order
Current Step Run
TRUN - Output Pin -
Time
Current Step Left
TRST - Output Pin -
Time
Monitoring
MODE Module Status - Refer to 10.2.1
Parameter
Reset as OFF after
Operation
MRST Reset Switch - keeping ON for a
Parameter
period.
Reset as OFF after
Operation
MSTRT Startup Switch - keeping ON for a
Operator Parameter
period.
Comman
d Reset as OFF after
Step Order Pause Operation
MPAUSE - keeping ON for a
Switch Parameter
period.
Reset as OFF after
Operation
MJUMP Jump-step Switch - keeping ON for a
Parameter
period.
Extended Feedbac Test the result of this
Feedback Signal
Parameters k Signal FB1 - Input Pin step, if ON, carry on
of Step 1
the next step
Feedback Signal
FB2 - Input Pin -
of Step 2
Feedback Signal
FB3 - Input Pin -
of Step 3
Feedback Signal
FB4 - Input Pin -
of Step 4
Feedback Signal
FB5 - Input Pin -
of Step 5
Feedback Signal
FB6 - Input Pin -
of Step 6
Feedback Signal
FB7 - Input Pin -
of Step 7

659
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Feedback Signal
FB8 - Input Pin -
of Step 8
Feedback Signal
FB9 - Input Pin -
of Step 9
Feedback Signal
FB10 - Input Pin -
of Step 10
Feedback Signal
FB11 - Input Pin -
of Step 11
Feedback Signal
FB12 - Input Pin -
of Step 12
Feedback Signal
FB13 - Input Pin -
of Step 13
Feedback Signal
FB14 - Input Pin -
of Step 14
Feedback Signal
FB15 - Input Pin -
of Step 15
Feedback Signal
FB16 - Input Pin -
of Step 16
Feedback Signal
FB17 - Input Pin -
of Step 17
Feedback Signal
FB18 - Input Pin -
of Step 18
Feedback Signal
FB19 - Input Pin -
of Step 19
Feedback Signal
FB20 - Input Pin -
of Step 20
Feedback Signal
FB21 - Input Pin -
of Step 21
Feedback Signal
FB22 - Input Pin -
of Step 22
Feedback Signal
FB23 - Input Pin -
of Step 23
Feedback Signal
FB24 - Input Pin -
of Step 24
Output Output Command
D1 - Output Pin If D1=ON, run step 1.
Comman of Step 1
d Output Command
D2 - Output Pin -
of Step 2
Output Command
D3 - Output Pin -
of Step 3
Output Command
D4 - Output Pin -
of Step 4
Output Command
D5 - Output Pin -
of Step 5
Output Command
D6 - Output Pin -
of Step 6
Output Command
D7 - Output Pin -
of Step 7
Output Command
D8 - Output Pin -
of Step 8
Output Command
D9 - Output Pin -
of Step 9

660
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output Command
D10 - Output Pin -
of Step 10
Output Command
D11 - Output Pin -
of Step 11
Output Command
D12 - Output Pin -
of Step 12
Output Command
D13 - Output Pin -
of Step 13
Output Command
D14 - Output Pin -
of Step 14
Output Command
D15 - Output Pin -
of Step 15
Output Command
D16 - Output Pin -
of Step 16
Output Command
D17 - Output Pin -
of Step 17
Output Command
D18 - Output Pin -
of Step 18
Output Command
D19 - Output Pin -
of Step 19
Output Command
D20 - Output Pin -
of Step 20
Output Command
D21 - Output Pin -
of Step 21
Output Command
D22 - Output Pin -
of Step 22
Output Command
D23 - Output Pin -
of Step 23
Output Command
D24 - Output Pin -
of Step 24
Step Setting Time of
Operation When time up, switch
Order TSET1 the 1st Step TRUE
Parameter to next step.
Set Time Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET2 the 2nd Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET3 the 3rd Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET4 the 4th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET5 the 5th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET6 the 6th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET7 the 7th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET8 the 8th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order

661
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET9 the 9th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET10 the 10th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET11 the 11th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET12 the 12th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET13 the 13th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET14 the 14th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET15 the 15th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET16 the 16th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET17 the 17th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET18 the 18th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET19 the 19th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET20 the 20th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET21 the 21st Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET22 the 22nd Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET23 the 23rd Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Setting Time of
Operation
TSET24 the 24th Step TRUE -
Parameter
Order
Step Step running time
Limit Time of the Operation
Order TLMT1 st TRUE exceed time limit,
1 Step Order Parameter
Limit fault alarm.
Time Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT2 TRUE -
2nd Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT3 TRUE -
3rd Step Order Parameter

662
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT4 TRUE -
4th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT5 TRUE -
5th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT6 TRUE -
6th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT7 TRUE -
7th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT8 TRUE -
8th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT9 TRUE -
9th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT10 TRUE -
10th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT11 TRUE -
11th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT12 TRUE -
12th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT13 TRUE -
13th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT14 TRUE -
14th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT15 TRUE -
15th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT16 TRUE -
16th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT17 TRUE -
17th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT18 TRUE -
18th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT19 TRUE -
19th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT20 TRUE -
20th Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT21 TRUE -
21st Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT22 TRUE -
22nd Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT23 TRUE -
23rd Step Order Parameter
Limit Time of the Operation
TLMT24 TRUE -
24th Step Order Parameter
OOS status Operation SWOOS=ON, switch
SWOOS TRUE
switch Parameter to OOS status.
Others Operation
AOF Suppress Alarm TRUE -
Parameter
FLAG Flag - Output Pin -

Algorithm

1) Mode processing

663
 Function Block Reference

 In the situation of cold startup, reset command (RST or MRST) jumping from OFF to
ON, STOP=ON, or exiting from OOS status, sequence control would be in initial
status, MODE = 0.
 When sequence control is in initial status and the sequence control condition is met
(PERMIT = ON), sequence control would turn in condition permitted status, MODE
= 1.
 When sequence control is in condition permitted status, pause status, fault status,
the startup command(STRT or MSTRT) turns from OFF to ON, and sequence
control would turn into running status, MODE = 2.
 When sequence control is in running status, pause command (PAUSE or MPAUSE)
turns from OFF to ON, sequence control would turn into pause status, MODE = 3. (If
process startup command after pausing, sequence control will to on with its
process)
 When the operation time of certain step exceeds the limit time, sequence control
would turn into fault status, MODE = 4. If setting time of certain step is set to be 0,
setting time of certain step will not be considered and would be considered to be
infinite.
 When the largest step is finished, sequence control would turn into complete status,
MODE = 5. After sequence control process, reset step number to be “0”, and reset
step time to be “0”.
 When SWOOS = ON, function block would turn into OOS status, MODE =6.

1. Logic description

 MODE=0

 All step command output set to be OFF. Step order set to be 0. Any command would
not be responded.

 MODE=1

 Maintain initial status output, only respond to startup command.

 MODE=2

 After turning into running status, sequence control would be executed from current
step, and set the running mark STPRUN to ON.
 If the disable mark of current step is ON, then turn into next step. If the disable mark
is OFF, current step order output is set ON, and if the previous period is not in pause
status, the counter would be reset and start to count.

664
 Function Block Reference

 After current step feedback becoming ON, or reaching the set time, the current step
output and the counter would be reset, and the next step order command would be
executed. If the feedback hasn”t be received and running time exceeds limit time,
the current step output would be reset, and turns into fault status. Pause, jump,
reset commands would be responded.

 MODE=3

 When being pause status, maintain current step output command, step timer stop, if
the feedback jump from OFF to ON, next command would not be executed. Startup,
jump, reset commands would be responded.
 When receiving startup command, sequence control runs from current step, and
timer accumulates from current time. When receiving jump command, sequence
control jumps to the pointed step order and holds pause status, and the time is reset.
When receiving reset command, sequence control would turn into initial status.

 MODE=4

 When being fault status, STPFAIL= ON, STPRUN = OFF, and output is reset.
Startup, jump, reset commands would be responded.
 When receiving startup command, turn into the first step to restart, and output
STPFAIL is reset. When receiving jump command, jump to pointed step to run, and
output STPFAIL is reset. Then reset the commands and turn into initial status.

 MODE=5

 When being complete, status, STPFIN =ON. Startup, reset commands would be
responded. When receiving startup command, turn into the first step to restart, and
STPFIN is reset, set STPRUN to ON. When receiving reset command, turn into
initial status, and STPFIN is reset.

 MODE=2, 3, 4

 Respond to jump command, and jump to pointed step order. If current step is the
last step, turn into complete status.

 STOP=ON

 No matter in any status, when STOP = ON, then STPFAIL =ON, output is reset, and
turn into initial status. When STOP = ON, run, pause and jump commands would not
be responded. After STOP turning to OFF, the fault alarm is eliminated.

665
 Function Block Reference

10.2.1 Flag
Table 10-3 Flag

Flag Definition Remark

1=Function block is in OOS status.
0 OOS
0= Function block isn”t in OOS status.
1:AOF=ON
1 AOF
0:AOF=OFF
1= Function block is in RESET status.
2 RESET
0= Function block isn”t in RESET status.
1= Function block is in PER status.
3 PER
0= Function block isn”t in PER status.
1= Function block is in RUN status.
4 RUN
0= Function block isn”t in RUN status.
1= Function block is in PAUSE status.
5 PAUSE
0= Function block isn”t in PAUSE status.
1= Function block is in FAIL status.
6 FAIL
0= Function block isn”t in FAIL status.
1= Function block is in FIN status.
7 FIN
0= Function block isn”t in FIN status.
8~15 Undefined
10.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel

Figure 10-1 STP panel

666
 Function Block Reference

10.2.3 Program Example

Figure 10-2 Program Example

667
 Function Block Reference

Section 11 Communication Auxiliary Function Block

Library
Communication auxiliary function block library contains 22 simple function blocks. All conversion
blocks are input by decimal number, and debugging will show decimal number too.

11.1 BCD2DEC Function Block

Function block BCD2DEC converts the 4-bit BCD input to a decimal output. The largest decimal
output is 9999.

The input is required to be a BCD code and cannot be a combination of two UNSINT inputs
serving as one BCD code.

The running time of this function block of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-1 BCD2DEC parameter

Applicatio
Name Description Upload Properties n
Reference
Input Value 1, Standing for
IN1 － Input Pin －
L2 LSB
Input Pin
Input Value 2, Standing for 2
IN2 － Input Pin －
Basic MSB
Parameters OUT UNIT OutputNote1 － Output Pin －
Output When any bit of the input
Pin ERR BCD code is beyond 9, － Output Pin －
ERR=ON.

Note:

 BCD2DEC separates the BCD input into two bytes. Every 4 bits consist of one BCD
code. IN1 is the l2 LSB, and IN2 is 2 MSB. If input IN2IN1=DBCA, then the changed
unit is D*1000+C*100+B*10+A.

Table 11-2 Conversion from BCE code to decimal code

Input IN2 IN1

668
 Function Block Reference

Domain Zone4 Zone3 Zone2 Zone1

Digit 8765 4321 8765 4321
Convert to Integer
Digit 1000s 100s 10s 1s
Output X X X X

For example, if IN1=67(=0x43),IN2=101(=0x65),then OUT=6543.

11.2 DEC2BCD Function Block

Function block DEC2BCD converts the UNIT input to a BCD output. The largest UNIT input is
9999.

The running time is 4μs.

Table 11-3 DEC2BCD parameter instruction

Applicatio
n
Name Description Upload Properties
Instructio
n
Input Pin IN Decimal InputNote1 － Input Pin －
BCD Output 1, Standing for
OUT1 － Output Pin －
L2 LSB
Basic Parameters Output BCD Output 2, Standing for
OUT2 － Output Pin －
Pin 2 MSN
The decimal input should
ERR be within 9999. If not, － Output Pin －
ERR=ON

Note:

 DEC2BCD takes each digit of the decimal input, and transfers it into 4-bit code and
saves in one INT variable.
 For example, the decimal input is DCBA: A can be got through dividing it by 10, and
B can be got through dividing it by 100, and so do C and D. Then use 4-digit binary
separately to denote these four values and output it after combination.

Table 11-4 Conversion of decimal code to BCD code

Digit 1000s 100s 10s 1s

Input X X X X

669
 Function Block Reference

Convert to BCD Code

Output OUT2 OUT1
Domain Zone4 Zone3 Zone2 Zone1
Digit 8765 4321 8765 4321

For example, if IN=8765, OUT1=101(=0x65), OUT2＝135(=0x87).

11.3 HEX2DEC Function Block

Function block HEX2DEC converts the 4-digit hex input into a decimal output.

Because A~F of hex cannot be be input in the system, so this 4-digit hex code consists of 4
UNSINT inputs and uses 10~15 to replace A~F. Each input is limited within 0~15. If any one is
beyond 15, ERR=ON.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-5 HEX2DEC parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Hex Input 1 (Lowest Digit) － Input Pin －
IN2 Hex Input 2 (Lower Digit) － Input Pin －
Input Pin
Basic IN3 Hex Input 3 (Higher Digit) － Input Pin －
Parameters IN4 Hex Input 4 (Highest Digit) － Input Pin －
Parameter
OUT Output 2-byte unsigned integer － Output Pin －
Output
Pin When any input beyond 15,
ERR － Output Pin －
ERR=ON.

For example, if IN1=1(=0x01), IN2=02(=0x02),IN3=10(=0x0A),IN4=11(=0x0B), then

OUT=47649(=0xBA21).

11.4 DEC2HEX Function Block

Function block DEC2HEX converts a UNIT decimal input to 4 UNSIT hex outputs. It takes out 4
values of the decimal input in the 4-bit unit from left to right and assigns them separately to
OUT4~OUT1.

The running time of this function block is 4μs.

670
 Function Block Reference

Table 11-6 DEC2HEX parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN UNIT Decimal Input － Input Pin －
Hex Output 1 (Lowest
OUT1 － Output Pin －
Digit)
Basic Hex Output 2 (Lower
OUT2 － Output Pin －
Parameters Output Digit)
Pin Hex Output 3 (Higher
OUT3 － Output Pin －
Digit)
Hex Output 4 (Highest
OUT4 － Output Pin －
Digit)

For example, if IN=47649(=0xBA21), then OUT1=01(=0x01), OUT2=02(=0x02), OUT3=10(0x0A),

OUT4=11(=0x0B).

11.5 BIN2BCD Function Block

Function block BIN2BCD converts the binary input to a BCD output. The largest BCD output is 9. If
it is beyond 9, output 9 and set ERR=ON.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-7 BIN2BCD parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Binary Input 1 (Lowest Digit) － Input Pin －
IN2 Binary Input 2 (Lower Digit) － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN3 Binary Input 3 (Higher Digit) － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameters IN4 Binary Input 4 (Highest Digit) － Input Pin －
OUT BCD Output － Output Pin －
Output
Pin If BCD beyond 9, output 9 and
ERR － Output Pin －
set ERR=ON

671
 Function Block Reference

For example, if IN1=ON, IN2=OFF, IN3=OFF, IN4= OFF, then OUT=1;

If IN1=ON, IN2=OFF, IN3=OFF, IN4=ON, 则 OUT=9.

11.6 BCD2BIN Function Block

Function block BCD2BIN converts the BCD input to a binary output.

The input is required to be 4-digit BCD code (save format).

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-8 BCD2BIN parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN BCD Input － Input Pin －
Binary Output 1 (Lowest
OUT1 － Output Pin －
Digit)
Binary Output 2 (Lower
OUT2 － Output Pin －
Digit)
Basic
Parameters Output Binary Output 3 (Higher
Pin OUT3 － Output Pin －
Digit)
Binary Output 4 (Highest
OUT4 － Output Pin －
Digit)
If IN beyond 9, then set
ERR － Output Pin －
ERR=ON.

11.7 BLOGIC_16 Function Block

Function block BLOGIC_16 implements the logical bit-operation of two 16-bit integer inputs,
including AND, OR, XOR and NOT operation bitwisely.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-9 BLOGIC_16 parameter instruction

672
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
16-Bit Integer Input
IN1 － Input Pin －
1
Input Pin
16-Bit Integer Input
IN2 － Input Pin －
2
Result of Logical
OUT － Output Pin －
Bit-Operation
Basic Output Pin If IN1is same as
Parameters IN2, EQ=ON; if IN1
EQ － Output Pin －
is not the same as
IN2, EQ=OFF.
Modes of Logical This parameter can
Bit-Operation: be set in the Function
Configuration Configuration
MODE 0=Band, 1=Bor, － Block Properties
Parameter Parameter
2=Bxor, window, and user can
3=Bnot(For In1) not set in debugging.

Operating mode as follows.

 When MODE=0,
 BLOGIC_16 implements BAND of the two 16-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.
 OUT= (IN1) BAND (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xFF00, IN2=0x0FFF
 Then: OUT=0x0F00.

1) When MODE=1,

 BLOGIC_16 implements BOR of the two 16-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs the
result.
 OUT = (IN1) BOR (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xFF00,IN2=0x000F
 Then: OUT=0xFF0F.

2) When MODE=2,

 BLOGIC_16 implements BXOR of the two 16-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.
 OUT = (IN1) BXOR (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xF0F0, IN2=0x00FF
 Then: OUT=0xF00F.

3) When MODE=3,

 BLOGIC_16 implements BNOT of the two 16-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.

673
 Function Block Reference

 OUT = BNOT (IN1)

 For example: IN1=0xFF00
 Then: OUT=0x00FF.
 When IN1=IN2, set EQ=ON, otherwise set EQ=OFF.


11.8 BLOGIC_32 Function Block

Function block BLOGIC_32 implements logical bit-operation of the two 32-bit integer inputs,
including BAND, BOR, BXOR, BNOT and so on.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-10 BLOGIC_32 parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
32-Bit Integer Input
IN1 － Input Pin －
1
Input Pin
32-Bit Integer Input
IN2 － Input Pin －
2
32-Bit Integer
OUT － Output Pin －
Output
Basic Output Pin If IN1is same as
Parameters IN2, EQ=ON; if IN1
EQ － Output Pin －
is not the same as
IN2, EQ=OFF.
Modes of Logical This parameter can
Bit-Operation: be set in the Function
Configuration Configuration
MODE 0=BAND, 1=BOR, － Block Properties
Parameter Parameter
2=BXOR, window, and user can
3=BNOT (For IN1) not set in debugging.

Operating mode as follows.

 When MODE=0,
 BLOGIC_32 implements BAND of the two 32-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.
 OUT= (IN1) BAND (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xFFFF FF00, IN2=0x0000 0FFF
 Then: OUT=0x0000 0F00.

674
 Function Block Reference

1) When MODE=1,

 BLOGIC_32 implements BOR of the two 32-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs the
result.
 OUT= (IN1) BOR (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xFFFF FF00, IN2=0x0000 000F
 Then: OUT=0xFFFF FF0F.

2) When MODE=2,

 BLOGIC_32 implements BAND of the two 32-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.
 OUT= (IN1) BXOR (IN2)
 For example: IN1=0xFF0F FF00, IN2=0x0000 000F
 Then: OUT=0xFF0F FF0F.

3) When MODE=3,

 BLOGIC_32 implements BNOT of the two 32-bit integer inputs, and OUT outputs
the result.
 OUT= BNOT (IN1)
 For example: IN1=0xFF0F FF00
 Then: OUT=0x00F0 00FF.
 When IN1=IN2, set EQ=ON, otherwise set EQ=OFF.

11.9 LSH_16 Function Block

Function block LSH_16 implements logical shift operation of the 16-bit integer input, including
logical left-shift and logical right-shift.

The running time of this function block is 4μs.

Table 11-11 LSH_16 parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic 16-Bit Integer
Input Pin IN － Input Pin －
Parameters Input
16-Bit Integer
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Output

675
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Operation Result of Logical Operation
N － －
Parameter Shift Operation Parameter
Modes of Logical
This parameter can be
Shift Operation:
set in the Function
Configuration OFF=Logical Configuration
MODE － Block Properties
Parameter Left-Shift, Parameter
window, and user can
ON=Logical
not set in debugging
Right-Shift

Operating mode as follows.

 When MODE=OFF,
 The 16-bit integer input IN is logically left-shifted by N bits, and its right bits would be
filled with zeros. OUT outputs the result.

1) When MODE=ON,

 The 16-bit integer input IN is logically right-shifted by N bits, and its left bits would be
filled with zeros. OUT outputs the result.

11.10 LSH_32 Function Block

Function block LSH_32 implements logical shift operation of the 32-bit integer input, including
logical left-shift and logical right-shift.

The running time of this function block is 4μs.

Table 11-12 LSH_32 parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

32-Bit
Input Pin IN － Input Pin －
Integer Input
32-Bit
OU
Output Pin Integer － Output Pin －
T
Output
Result of
Operation Operation
Basic N Logical Shift － －
Parameter Parameter
Parameters Operation
Modes of
Logical Shift
This parameter can be set in
Configuration Operation:
MO Configuration the Function Block Properties
Parameter OFF=Logical －
DE Parameter window, and user can not set
Left-Shift,
in debugging
ON=Logical
Right-Shift

676
 Function Block Reference

Operating mode as follows.

1) When MODE=OFF,

 The 32-bit integer input IN is logically left-shifted by N bits, and its right bits would be
filled with zeros. OUT outputs the result.

2) When MODE=ON,

 The 32-bit integer input IN is logically right-shifted by N bits, and its left bits would be
filled with zeros. OUT outputs the result.

11.11 RSH_16 Function Block

Function block RSH_16 implements round shift of the 16-bit integer input, including round left-shift
and round right-shift.

The running time of this function block is 8μs.

Table 11-13 RSH_16 parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

16-Bit Integer
Input Pin IN － Input Pin －
Input
16-Bit Integer
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Output
Operation Result of Logical Operation
N － －
Basic Parameter Shift Operation Parameter
Parameters Modes of
Logical Shift This parameter can be
Operation: set in the Function
Configuration Configuration
MODE OFF=Round － Block Properties
Parameter Parameter
Left-Shift, window, and user can
ON=Round not set in debugging
Right-Shift

Operating mode as follows.

 When MODE=OFF,

 The 16-bit integer input IN is round left-shifted by N bits. The bits shifted out from
the left would be inserted in the right. OUT outputs the result.

1) When MODE=ON,

677
 Function Block Reference

 The 16-bit integer input IN is round right-shifted by N bits. The bits shifted out from
the right would be inserted in the left. OUT outputs the result.

11.12 RSH_32 Function Block

Function block RSH_32 implements round shift of the 32-bit integer input, including round left-shift
and round right-shift.

The running time of this function block is 21μs.

Table 11-14 RSH_32 parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

32-Bit Integer
Input Pin IN － Input Pin －
Input
32-Bit Integer
Output Pin OUT － Output Pin －
Output
Operation Result of Logical Operation
N － －
Basic Parameter Shift Operation Parameter
Parameters Modes of
Logical Shift This parameter can be
Configuration Operation: set in the Function
Configuration
Parameter MODE OFF=Round － Block Properties
Parameter
Left-Shift, window, and user can
ON=Round not set in debugging
Right-Shift

Operating mode as follows.

1) When MODE=OFF,

 The 32-bit integer input IN is round left-shifted by N bits. The bits shifted out from
the left would be inserted in the right. OUT outputs the result.

2) When MODE=ON,

 The 32-bit integer input IN is round right-shifted by N bits. The bits shifted out from
the right would be inserted in the left. OUT outputs the result.

11.13 ASCTRAN Function Block

Function block ASCTRAN implements ASCII conversion of 0~9 and A~F, which means the range
of IN is 0~15, 10~15 stands for A~F, 0~9 and A~F shands 48~57(0x30~0x39)and
65~70(0x41~0x46).

678
 Function Block Reference

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-15 ASCTRAN parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Pin
Basic OUT Output Value － Output Pin －
Parameters Output If the input is out of this range,
Pin ERR there generates an ERR alarm － Output Pin －
(ERR=ON).

For example, if IN=9(number 9), then OUT=57, if IN=14(capital E), then OUT=69.

11.14 ASCPARSE Function Block

ASCPARSE can parse the ACSII data in communication. The range of its input is 0~9 and A~F,
and the corresponding ASCII value is 0x30~0x39 (48~57) and 0x41~0x46 (65~70). Output is the
result after parsing the ASCII code.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-16 ASCPARSE parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Input
IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Pin
Basic
Parameters OUT Output Value － Output Pin －
Output If the input is out of this range,
Pin ERR there generates an ERR alarm － Output Pin －
(ERR=ON).

For example, if IN=57(number 9), then OUT=9(number 9), if IN= IN=66 (capital E), then
OUT=11(capital B).

679
 Function Block Reference

11.15 USIPARSE Function Block

Function block USIPARSE can parse one USINT input into one high 4-bit and low 4-bit USINT
outputs. The low 4-bit is saved in OUT1, and the high 4-bit is saved in OUT2.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-17 USIPARSE parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Basic Parameters OUT1 Output 1 (Low 4-Bit) － Output Pin －
Output Pin
OUT2 Output 2(High 4-Bit) － Output Pin －

For example, if IN=57(=0x39), then OUT1=9(=0x09), OUT2=3(=0x03).

11.16 GETUDI Function Block

Function block GETUDI can merge two UNIT inputs into one UDINT output.

The running time of this function block is 4μs.

Table 11-18 GETUDI parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input 1(How-Byte
IN1 － Input Pin －
Part)
Input Pin
Basic Input 2(High-Byte
Parameters IN2 － Input Pin －
Part)
Output
OUT Output － Output Pin －
Pin

In communication, the data read from counters and the like might be 32-bit. It can be divided into 2
UNIT data, one high-byte UNIT and one low-byte UNIT, and can be merged to UDINT data again
by GETUDI.

For example: IN1=4779(=0x12AB), IN2=61234(=0xEF32), then

680
 Function Block Reference

OUT=4013036203(=0xEF3212AB).

11.17 REALTRAN Function Block

Function block REALTRAN is used to implement the shift of those 4-byte float communication data
during IO communication tag.

The running time of this function block is 3μs.

Table 11-19 REALTRAN parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Pin
Basic Parameters Output
OUT Output Value － Output Pin －
Pin

Suppose little-endian of one float data is ABCD. During communication in certain protocol, say in
Modbus protocol, its coney form would be BADC, so tag AI cannot parse it with little-endian or
big-endian. Then REALTRAN be used to parse this data.

For example:

IN=223437, and its actual save form in memory is 0x40, 0x33, 0x5a, 0x48(increasing physical
address).

After it is parsed by REALTRAN, its save form become 0x33, 0x40, 0x48, 0x5a(still increasing
physical address). Then the float output of the transformed data is 14091395782410240.0000.

11.18 UNITPARSE Function Block

Function block UNITPARSE can parse one UNIT input into 16 BOOL outputs by bit from the lowest
bit to the highest one, and the results are saved in OUT0~OUT15. And OUT0 is the lowest bit, and
OUT15 is the highest bit.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

681
 Function Block Reference

11.18.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 11-20 UNITPARSE parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin －
OUT0 BIT0 － Output Pin －
OUT1 BIT1 － Output Pin －
OUT2 BIT2 － Output Pin －
OUT3 BIT3 － Output Pin －
OUT4 BIT4 － Output Pin －
OUT5 BIT5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 BIT6 － Output Pin －
Basic Parameters OUT7 BIT7 － Output Pin －
Output Pin
OUT8 BIT8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 BIT9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 BIT10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 BIT11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 BIT12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 BIT13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 BIT14 － Output Pin －
OUT15 BIT15 － Output Pin －

For example, if IN=6, then OUT0=OFF, OUT1=ON, OUT2=ON, OUT3=OFF,

(OUT4~OUT15)=OFF.

11.18.2 Application Example

To split the communicated AI tag into 16 BOOL values, packing the 16 BOOL values into real
numbers for communication with isomery intelligent device.

682
 Function Block Reference

When communicating with isomery intelligent device, the tag table of ECS-700 system will analize
all types of analog data read to real number, and transform all types of analog data to real number
and send to others. The reshapped data packed by BOOL value cannot be processed directly.
This part introduces a tag splitting and packing method via program to solve the problem.

Details of program is shown below, it applies UINTPARSE to achieve tag splitting.

Figure 11-1 PLC Sends Supervision

Figure 11-2 ECS-700 Receives Program

Note: set the AI tag linear switch properties as “ Not Switch”, set the maximum and minimum of
original code to ensure that the communication data is in the range. OUT0~OUT7\OUT8~OUT15
of UINTPARSE corresponds to V32.0~V32.7\V33.0~V33.7.

Use BOL16 for packing BOOL tag. Details of program is hsown below.

683
 Function Block Reference

Figure 11-3 ECS-700 Sends Supervision

Figure 11-4 PLC Receives Program

Note: Set AO tag as not switch, IN0~IN7\IN8~IN15 of BOL16 corresponds to

V0.0~V0.7\V1.0~V1.7, OUT1 output misplaces with high/low bytes of VW0.

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

Table 11-21 UINTPARSE

Corresponding Tag
No. Function Block Pin Description Remarks
Type
Input Parameter
Use REAL2INT and
Communication AI
001 IN Input INT2UINT to change
Input
Format of UINT.
Output Parameter
Double-byte 16 Bytes No.1
001 OUT0 BIT0 Custom BOOL
BOOL
002 OUT1 BIT1 Custom BOOL

684
 Function Block Reference

003 OUT2 BIT2 Custom BOOL

004 OUT3 BIT3 Custom BOOL

005 OUT4 BIT4 Custom BOOL

006 OUT5 BIT5 Custom BOOL

007 OUT6 BIT6 Custom BOOL

008 OUT7 BIT7 Custom BOOL

009 OUT8 BIT8 Custom BOOL

010 OUT9 BIT9 Custom BOOL

011 OUT10 BIT10 Custom BOOL

012 OUT11 BIT11 Custom BOOL

013 OUT12 BIT12 Custom BOOL

014 OUT13 BIT13 Custom BOOL

015 OUT14 BIT14 Custom BOOL

016 OUT15 BIT15 Custom BOOL

Table 11-22 BOL16

Corresponding Tag
No. Function Block Pin Description Remarks
Type
Input Parameter
Communication sends
001 IN0 BIT0 Custom BOOL
data No.1 BOOL.
002 IN1 BIT1 Custom BOOL

003 IN2 BIT2 Custom BOOL

004 IN3 BIT3 Custom BOOL

005 IN4 BIT4 Custom BOOL

006 IN5 BIT5 Custom BOOL

007 IN6 BIT6 Custom BOOL

008 IN7 BIT7 Custom BOOL

009 IN8 BIT8 Custom BOOL

010 IN9 BIT9 Custom BOOL

011 IN10 BIT10 Custom BOOL

012 IN11 BIT11 Custom BOOL

013 IN12 BIT12 Custom BOOL

014 IN13 BIT13 Custom BOOL

685
 Function Block Reference

015 IN14 BIT14 Custom BOOL

016 IN15 BIT15 Custom BOOL

Output Parameter
Communication AO Set no byte switch in tag
001 OUT1 Output
Output configuration.

11.19 UDINTPARSE Function Block

Function block UDINTPARSE can parse one UDINT input into 32 BOOL outputs by bit from lowest
the bit to the highest one, and the results are saved in OUT0~OUT31. And OUT0 is the lowest bit,
and OUT1 31 is the highest bit.

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

686
 Function Block Reference

Table 11-23 UDINT parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin －
OUT0 BIT0 － Output Pin －
OUT1 BIT1 － Output Pin －
OUT2 BIT2 － Output Pin －
OUT3 BIT3 － Output Pin －
OUT4 BIT4 － Output Pin －
OUT5 BIT5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 BIT6 － Output Pin －
OUT7 BIT7 － Output Pin －
OUT8 BIT8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 BIT9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 BIT10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 BIT11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 BIT12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 BIT13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 BIT14 － Output Pin －
Basic Parameters OUT15 BIT15 － Output Pin －
Output Pin
OUT16 BIT16 － Output Pin －
OUT17 BIT17 － Output Pin －
OUT18 BIT18 － Output Pin －
OUT19 BIT19 － Output Pin －
OUT20 BIT20 － Output Pin －
OUT21 BIT21 － Output Pin －
OUT22 BIT22 － Output Pin －
OUT23 BIT23 － Output Pin －
OUT24 BIT24 － Output Pin －
OUT25 BIT25 － Output Pin －
OUT26 BIT26 － Output Pin －
OUT27 BIT27 － Output Pin －
OUT28 BIT28 － Output Pin －
OUT29 BIT29 － Output Pin －
OUT30 BIT30 － Output Pin －
OUT31 BIT31 － Output Pin －

For example, if IN=7, 则 OUT0=ON, OUT1=ON, OUT2=ON, OUT3=OFF, (OUT4~OUT31)=OFF.

11.20 BOOL2UDINT Function Block

Function block BOOL2UDINT can parse 32 BOOL input into one UDINT outputs by bit from lowest
the bit to the highest one. OUT0 is the lowest bit, and OUT1 31 is the highest bit.

687
 Function Block Reference

The running time of this function block is 2μs.

Table 11-24 BOOL input into UDINT BOOLoutput parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Parameters Input Pin IN0 BIT0 － Input Pin －
IN1 BIT1 － Input Pin －
IN2 BIT2 － Input Pin －
IN3 BIT3 － Input Pin －
IN4 BIT4 － Input Pin －
IN5 BIT5 － Input Pin －
IN6 BIT6 － Input Pin －
IN7 BIT7 － Input Pin －
IN8 BIT8 － Input Pin －
IN9 BIT9 － Input Pin －
IN10 BIT10 － Input Pin －
IN11 BIT11 － Input Pin －

688
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

IN12 BIT12 － Input Pin －
IN13 BIT13 － Input Pin －
IN14 BIT14 － Input Pin －
IN15 BIT15 － Input Pin －
IN16 BIT16 － Input Pin －
IN17 BIT17 － Input Pin －
IN18 BIT18 － Input Pin －
IN19 BIT19 － Input Pin －
IN20 BIT20 － Input Pin －
IN21 BIT21 － Input Pin －
IN22 BIT22 － Input Pin －
IN23 BIT23 － Input Pin －
IN24 BIT24 － Input Pin －
IN25 BIT25 － Input Pin －
IN26 BIT26 － Input Pin －
IN27 BIT27 － Input Pin －
IN28 BIT28 － Input Pin －
IN29 BIT29 － Input Pin －
IN30 BIT30 － Input Pin －
IN31 BIT31 － Input Pin －
Output Pin OUT Output Value － Output Pin －

For example, if IN0=OFF, IN1=ON, IN2=ON, IN3=ON, (IN4~IN31)=OFF, then 14.

11.21 Parse REAL to UDINT Function Block (SREAL_UDINT)

The function block parses and output the 4-byte float data memory as 4-byte unsigned data.

Running time of the function block is 3μs.

Table 11-25 Parameters of SREAL_UDINT

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Basic
Parameter Output OU
Output Value － Output Pin －
Pin T

If a float is saved in small mode, parse its 4-byte saved as UDINT and work out the output value.

689
 Function Block Reference

For example, IN = 100.0, the 4-byte memory data is saved as 0x00 0x00 0xC8 0x42 in small mode,
parse the memory as UDINT, so OUT = 0x42c80000 = 1120403456.

11.22 Parse UDINT to REAL Function Block (GREAL_UDINT)

The function block parses and output the 4-byte unsigned data memory as 4-byte float data.

Running time of the function block is 3μs.

Table 11-26 Parameters of GREAL_UDINT

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input
IN Input Value － Input Pin －
Basic Pin
Parameter Output
OUT Output Value － Output Pin －
Pin

If a float is saved in small mode, parse its 4-byte saved as REAL and work out the output value.

For example, IN = 1120403456, the 4-byte memory data is saved as 0x00 0x00 0xC8 0x42 in
small mode, parse the memory as REAL, so OUT = 100.0.

690
 Function Block Reference

Section 12 Inter-station Communication Function

Block Library

12.1 Introduction

Inter-station communication function block supplies three pairs of function blocks:

SEND_MIX/GET_MIX function blocks, SEND_REAL/GET_REAL function blocks,
SENDSPEC/GETSPEC function blocks. These function blocks must be used by pair, which
means in sending and getting station, function blocks with the same serial number must
correspondingly match. For example: if function block 0 in the sending station is a SEND_REAL,
then function block 0 in the getting station must be a GET_REAL correspondingly.

One control station can be configured 8 sending function blocks at most(their serial numbers
cannot be repetitive) and is able to receive multicast data of 16 control stations. The serial
numbers of sending/getting function block are required to be consistent.

For one sending function block, when sending fails or its serial number is beyond 7, ERR=ON.

For one getting function block,

If the sending function block with the same serial number in the station is other type instead of the
corresponding one, then the getting function block displays mismatch and STA=4, ERR=ON.

If the sending function block with the same serial number in the station does not exist but there
exist sending function blocks with other serial number, then the getting function block displays
mismatch and STA=4, ERR=ON.

If the sending function block with the same serial number in the station does not exist meanwhile
there exist no other sending function block, then the getting function block displays mismatched
and STA=3, ERR=ON.

If control stations whose multicast data is received by one receiving station is more than 16, then
status of the 17th receiving function block is buffer area non-allocate or full, and STA=2, ERR=ON.

If the domain address (the control station address range is [0, 15] when controller is FCU711, and
is [0, 59] when controller is FCU712), IP address (2~127) or serial number (0~7) of one control
station is out of the range, then STA=1 and ERR=ON.

Among the status codes above, priority of STA=1 is the highest, and STA=2 is after it. Once STA=1,
only STA=1 is displayed. If STA! =1 and STA=2, only STA=2 is displayed.

When both sending and getting are normal, ERR=OFF.

691
 Function Block Reference

12.2 SEND_MIX Function Block

Function block SEND_MIX can send 10 REAL (IN1~IN10) and 24 BOOL data(IN11~IN34).

The running time of this function block is 7μs.

12.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 12-1 SEND_MIX parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Input Value 1 － Input Pin －
Parameters
IN2 Input Value 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input Value 3 － Input Pin －
IN4 Input Value 4 － Input Pin －

692
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN5 Input Value 5 － Input Pin －
IN6 Input Value 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input Value 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input Value 8 － Input Pin －
IN9 Input Value 9 － Input Pin －
IN10 Input Value 10 － Input Pin －
IN11 Input Value 11 － Input Pin －
IN12 Input Value 12 － Input Pin －
IN13 Input Value 13 － Input Pin －
IN14 Input Value 14 － Input Pin －
IN15 Input Value 15 － Input Pin －
IN16 Input Value 16 － Input Pin －
IN17 Input Value 17 － Input Pin －
IN18 Input Value 18 － Input Pin －
IN19 Input Value 19 － Input Pin －
IN20 Input Value 20 － Input Pin －
IN21 Input Value 21 － Input Pin －
IN22 Input Value 22 － Input Pin －
IN23 Input Value 23 － Input Pin －
IN24 Input Value 24 － Input Pin －
IN25 Input Value 25 － Input Pin －
IN26 Input Value 26 － Input Pin －
IN27 Input Value 27 － Input Pin －
IN28 Input Value 28 － Input Pin －
IN29 Input Value 29 － Input Pin －
IN30 Input Value 30 － Input Pin －
IN31 Input Value 31 － Input Pin －
IN32 Input Value 32 － Input Pin －
IN33 Input Value 33 － Input Pin －
IN34 Input Value 34 － Input Pin －
ERR Abnormal Operation － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Output Pin Working Status, When
STA STA is not equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and alarm
Configuration erial Number of Function Configuration
SN － －
Parameter Block, Range 0~7 Parameter
12.2.2 Application Example

To achieve the analog and didgital data exchange and read functions between domain 0# CS 2#
and domain 1# CS 4#. Domain 0# CS 2# sends data and domain 1# CS 4# receive data.

It can archieve the data read and exchange functions between CSs and control domains of
ECS-700.

693
 Function Block Reference

The programming is shown below. It applies SEND_MIX to send data and applies GET_MIX to
receive data.

Figure 12-1 Program of In-station Communication

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

Table 12-2 Instructions of Function Block and Example

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

Send In-station
001 AI00040000 AI Inout
Communication
Send In-station
002 DI00040000 DI Inout
Communication
Receive In-station
003 AO0004000 AO Output
Communication
Receive In-station
004 DO0004000 DO Output
Communication

Table 12-3 SEND_MIX

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

694
 Function Block Reference

Input Parameter
Corresponding to Output
001 IN1~IN10 No. 1~10 Input Pin REAL Pins OUT1~OUT10 of
GET_MIX
Corresponding to Output
No. 11~34 Input
002 IN11~IN34 BOOL Pins OUT11~OUT34 of
Pin
GET_MIX
Configuration Parameter
Serial No. of Same SN serial No. of the
001 SN Function Block Settings in Module module cannot be set in
[0,7] the same CS.

Table 12-4 GET_MIX

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

Input Parameter
Corresponding to Input
No. 1~10 Output
001 OUT1~OUT10 REAL Pins OUT1~OUT10 of
Pin
SEND_MIX
Corresponding to Input
No. 11~34 Output
002 OUT11~OUT34 BOOL Pins OUT11~OUT34 of
Pin
SEND_MIX
Configuration Parameter
Set as 1
Serial No. of
Keep the same as the
001 SN Function Block Settings in Module
serial NO. of data sending
[0,7]
station function block.
Set as 0
Domain
002 DMADDR Settings in Module Domain Adress of Data
Address[0,15]
Sending Station
Set as 2
003 IP IP Address[2,127] Settings in Module IP Adress of Data Sending
Station

Parameter settings of SEND_MIX:

 SN: 0~7

Parameter settings of GET_MIX:

 DMADDR: controller domain address of sending station

 IP: controller IP address of sending station

 SN: SEND_MIX serial No. of sending station

Alarm Settings:

 No alarm parameter setting.

695
 Function Block Reference

12.3 GET_MIX Function Block

Corresponding to SEND_MIX, GET_MIX can get 10 REAL (OUT1~OUT10)and 24

(OUT11~OUT34)BOOL data.

The running time of this function block is 10μs.

12.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 12-5 GET_MIX parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Output Pin OUT1 Output Value 1 － Output Pin －
Parameters
OUT2 Output Value 2 － Output Pin －

696
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OUT3 Output Value 3 － Output Pin －
OUT4 Output Value 4 － Output Pin －
OUT5 Output Value 5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 Output Value 6 － Output Pin －
OUT7 Output Value 7 － Output Pin －
OUT8 Output Value 8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 Output Value 9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 Output Value 10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 Output Value 11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 Output Value 12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 Output Value 13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 Output Value 14 － Output Pin －
OUT15 Output Value 15 － Output Pin －
OUT16 Output Value 16 － Output Pin －
OUT17 Output Value 17 － Output Pin －
OUT18 Output Value 18 － Output Pin －
OUT19 Output Value 19 － Output Pin －
OUT20 Output Value 20 － Output Pin －
OUT21 Output Value 21 － Output Pin －
OUT22 Output Value 22 － Output Pin －
OUT23 Output Value 23 － Output Pin －
OUT24 Output Value 24 － Output Pin －
OUT25 Output Value 25 － Output Pin －
OUT26 Output Value 26 － Output Pin －
OUT27 Output Value 27 － Output Pin －
OUT28 Output Value 28 － Output Pin －
OUT29 Output Value 29 － Output Pin －
OUT30 Output Value 30 － Output Pin －
OUT31 Output Value 31 － Output Pin －
OUT32 Output Value 32 － Output Pin －
OUT33 Output Value 33 － Output Pin －
OUT34 Output Value 34 － Output Pin －
Abnormal
ERR － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Operation
Working Status,
When STA is not
STA equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and
alarm

Configuration
corresponding to
Domain Address Configuration
Parameter DMADDR
of Station
－
Parameter
sending domain
address
Configuration corresponding to
IP IP Address －
Parameter sending IP ress

697
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Serial Number of
Configuration
SN Function Block, － －
Parameter
Range0~7
12.3.2 Application Example

Refer to 12.2.2 Application Example.

12.4 SEND_REAL Function Block

Function block SEND_REAL can send 16 REAL data.

The running time of this function block is 10μs.

Table 12-6 SEND_REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Input Value 1 － Input Pin －
Parameters
IN2 Input Value 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input Value 3 － Input Pin －
IN4 Input Value 4 － Input Pin －
IN5 Input Value 5 － Input Pin －
IN6 Input Value 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input Value 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input Value 8 － Input Pin －
IN9 Input Value 9 － Input Pin －
IN10 Input Value 10 － Input Pin －
IN11 Input Value 11 － Input Pin －
IN12 Input Value 12 － Input Pin －

698
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN13 Input Value 13 － Input Pin －
IN14 Input Value 14 － Input Pin －
IN15 Input Value 15 － Input Pin －
IN16 Input Value 16 － Input Pin －
ERR Abnormal Operation － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Output Pin Working Status, When
STA STA is not equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and alarm
Serial Number of
Configuration Configuration
SN Function Block, － －
Parameter Parameter
Range0~7

12.5 GET_REAL Function Block

Corresponding to SEND_REAL, GET_REAL can get 16 REAL data.

The running time of this function block is 10μs.

Table 12-7 GET_REAL parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Output Pin OUT1 Output Value 1 － Output Pin －
Parameters
OUT2 Output Value 2 － Output Pin －
OUT3 Output Value 3 － Output Pin －
OUT4 Output Value 4 － Output Pin －
OUT5 Output Value 5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 Output Value 6 － Output Pin －

699
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OUT7 Output Value 7 － Output Pin －
OUT8 Output Value 8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 Output Value 9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 Output Value 10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 Output Value 11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 Output Value 12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 Output Value 13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 Output Value 14 － Output Pin －
OUT15 Output Value 15 － Output Pin －
OUT16 Output Value 16 － Output Pin －
Abnormal
ERR － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Operation
Working Status,
When STA is not
STA equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and
alarm
Domain Address corresponding to
Configuration
DMADDR of Station, Range －
Parameter
sending domain
0~15 address
Configuration IP Address, Configuration corresponding to
Parameter IP －
Range 2~17 Parameter sending IP ress
Serial Number of
Configuration
SN Function Block, － －
Parameter
Range 0~7

12.6 SENDSPEC Function Block

SENDSPEC can send 2 LREAL(IN1~IN2), 3 DINT(IN3~IN5), 3 UDINT(IN6~IN8), 4 INT(IN9~IN12),

4 UNIT(IN13~IN16), 4 SINT(IN17~IN20) and 4 USINT(IN21~IN24)data.

The running time of this function block is 10μs.

700
 Function Block Reference

Table 12-8 SENDSPEC parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Input Value 1 － Input Pin －
Parameters
IN2 Input Value 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input Value 3 － Input Pin －
IN4 Input Value 4 － Input Pin －
IN5 Input Value 5 － Input Pin －
IN6 Input Value 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input Value 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input Value 8 － Input Pin －
IN9 Input Value 9 － Input Pin －
IN10 Input Value 10 － Input Pin －
IN11 Input Value 11 － Input Pin －
IN12 Input Value 12 － Input Pin －
IN13 Input Value 13 － Input Pin －
IN14 Input Value 14 － Input Pin －
IN15 Input Value 15 － Input Pin －
IN16 Input Value 16 － Input Pin －
IN17 Input Value 17 － Input Pin －
IN18 Input Value 18 － Input Pin －
IN19 Input Value 19 － Input Pin －
IN20 Input Value 20 － Input Pin －

701
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN21 Input Value 21 － Input Pin －
IN22 Input Value 22 － Input Pin －
IN23 Input Value 23 － Input Pin －
IN24 Input Value 24 － Input Pin －
ERR Abnormal Operation － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Output pin Working Status, When
STA STA is not equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and alarm
Serial Number of
Configuration Configuration
SN Function Block, Range － －
Parameter Parameter
0~7

12.7 GETSPEC Function Block

Corresponding to SENDSPEC, GETSPEC can receive 2 LREAL(IN1~IN2), 3 DINT(IN3~IN5), 3

UDINT(IN6~IN8), 4 INT(IN9~IN12), 4 UNIT(IN13~IN16), 4 SINT(IN17~IN20) and 4
USINT(IN21~IN24).

The running time of this function block is 10μs.

Table 12-9 GETSPEC parameter instruction

702
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OUT1 Output Value 1 － Output Pin －
OUT2 Output Value 2 － Output Pin －
OUT3 Output Value 3 － Output Pin －
OUT4 Output Value 4 － Output Pin －
OUT5 Output Value 5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 Output Value 6 － Output Pin －
OUT7 Output Value 7 － Output Pin －
OUT8 Output Value 8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 Output Value 9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 Output Value 10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 Output Value 11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 Output Value 12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 Output Value 13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 Output Value 14 － Output Pin －
Output Pin OUT15 Output Value 15 － Output Pin －
OUT16 Output Value 16 － Output Pin －
OUT17 Output Value 17 － Output Pin －
Basic OUT18 Output Value 18 － Output Pin －
Parameters OUT19 Output Value 19 － Output Pin －
OUT20 Output Value 20 － Output Pin －
OUT21 Output Value 21 － Output Pin －
OUT22 Output Value 22 － Output Pin －
OUT23 Output Value 23 － Output Pin －
OUT24 Output Value 24 － Output Pin －
Abnormal
ERR － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Operation
Working Status,
When STA is not
STA equal to 0, set － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON and
alarm
Domain Address corresponding to
Configuration
DMADDR of Station, Range －
Parameter
sending domain
0~15 address
Configuration IP Address, Configuration corresponding to
Parameter IP －
Range 2~17 Parameter sending IP ress
Serial Number of
Configuration
SN Function Block, － －
Parameter
Range 0~7

12.8 UDINT Data Inter-station Send Function Block (SEND_UDINT)

UDINT data inter-station send function block sends 16 UDINT data.

Its running time is 10μs.

703
 Function Block Reference

Table 12-10 Parameters of SEND_UDINT

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN1 Input Value 1 － Input Pin －
IN2 Input Value 2 － Input Pin －
IN3 Input Value 3 － Input Pin －
IN4 Input Value 4 － Input Pin －
IN5 Input Value 5 － Input Pin －
IN6 Input Value 6 － Input Pin －
IN7 Input Value 7 － Input Pin －
IN8 Input Value 8 － Input Pin －
Input Pin
IN9 Input Value 9 － Input Pin －
IN10 Input Value 10 － Input Pin －
IN11 Input Value 11 － Input Pin －
Basic IN12 Input Value 12 － Input Pin －
Parameter IN13 Input Value 13 － Input Pin －
IN14 Input Value 14 － Input Pin －
IN15 Input Value 15 － Input Pin －
IN16 Input Value 16 － Input Pin －
Function Block
ERR － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
Illegal Alarm
Function block
Output Pin status. When
STA is not eual
STA － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
to 0, generate
ERR=ON
alarm.
Configurati
Configuration Function Serial
SN － on －
Parameter No. [0,7]
Parameter

704
 Function Block Reference

12.9 UDINT Data Inter-station Get Function Block (GET_UDINT)

UDINT data inter-station sending function block gets 16 UDINT data.

Its running time is 10μs.

Table 12-11 Parameters of SEND_UDINT

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Ba Outp OUT1 Calculate Output Value 1 － Output Pin －
sic ut
OUT2 Calculate Output Value 2 － Output Pin －
Par
am OUT3 Calculate Output Value 3 － Output Pin －
ete
OUT4 Calculate Output Value 4 － Output Pin －
r
OUT5 Calculate Output Value 5 － Output Pin －
OUT6 Calculate Output Value 6 － Output Pin －
OUT7 Calculate Output Value 7 － Output Pin －
OUT8 Calculate Output Value 8 － Output Pin －
OUT9 Calculate Output Value 9 － Output Pin －
OUT10 Calculate Output Value 10 － Output Pin －
OUT11 Calculate Output Value 11 － Output Pin －
OUT12 Calculate Output Value 12 － Output Pin －
OUT13 Calculate Output Value 13 － Output Pin －
OUT14 Calculate Output Value 14 － Output Pin －
OUT15 Calculate Output Value 15 － Output Pin －
OUT16 Calculate Output Value 16 － Output Pin －
ERR Function Block Illegal Alarm － Output Pin Refer to 12.1

705
 Function Block Reference

Function block status. When

STA STA is not eual to 0, generate － Output Pin Refer to 12.1
ERR=ON alarm.
Correspond
Configurati
DMAD to Send
Domain Address [0,15] － on
Conf DR Domain
Parameter
igura Address
tion Configurati Correspond
Para IP IP Address [2,127] - on to Send IP
mete Parameter Address
r
Configurati
SN Function Serial No. [0,7] － on -
Parameter

12.10 Inter-station Communication Programming Example

Tag FT001 is collected by controller 1(physical address 0.4), and controller 2(physical address
10.6) needs the value of this tag and compel/uncompel state to put into calculation. In controller 2,
we use user-defined analog parameter FT_001 to receive the value of FT001.PV and use
user-defined digital parameter FT_001_SWAM to receive the value of FT001.SWAM. Then,

Controller 1 builder is shown below:

Figure 12-2 Program

Controller 2 builder is shown below:

Figure 12-3 Program

Initial Setting:

 For controller 1, set the function block number of SEND_MIX SN=3. Other
parameters remain unchanged.

706
 Function Block Reference

 For controller 2, set the address of domain of GET_MIX to be 0, IP address to be 4

and function block number SN to be 3. Other parameters remain unchanged.

707
 Function Block Reference

Section 13 Industrial Function Block Library

The function blocks of industrial function block library are complex function block. All blocks have
panel corresponding and can setup parameters in the panel.

13.1 Fuzzy Control Function Block(FLC)

Function block FLC is the fuzzy controller achieved by fuzzy control algorithm. It gains outputs by
fuzzy operation with error and error rate. FLC can realize single loop control, cascade control and
other control functions. Its using method is similar to function block PID. As fuzzy controller is a
nonlinear controller, it isn”t sensitive to the change of object parameters and noise. It is used to
control those objects whose character changing with load. So it has smaller overshoot, faster rise
time and adjusting time.

When using FLC function block, three parameters are needed to tune: KE, KDE, KDU. The
smaller the KE is, the bigger the impact of error EI on MV would be. The smaller the KDE is, the
bigger the impact of error rate on MV would be. The bigger the KDU is, the bigger the impact of
MV would be at the same EI and error rate.

The using method of FLC is the same to PID except the three tune parameters and tuning method,
so the usage introduction of PID function block could be a reference.

The FLC is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

13.1.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-1 The FLC Parameters Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic The same as MV
Range Settings MV range high Configuration
Parameters MVSCH － actual value H
value parameter
limit
The same as MV
MV range low Configuration
MVSCL － actual value L
value parameter
limit

708
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as PV
SV range high Configuration
SVSCH － actual value H
value parameter
limit
The same as PV
SV range low Configuration
SVSCL － actual value L
value parameter
limit
Set in the
SV engineer Configuration function block
SVEU －
unit parameter properties
settings interface
Set in the
MV engineer Configuration function block
MVEU －
unit parameter properties
settings interface
Used for Data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] parameter
panel (Equal to 3
as default)
Used for Data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] parameter
panel (Equal to 3
as default)
Value range
MV high limit Operation
MVH TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
value parameter
H]
Value range
MV low limit Operation
MVL TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
value parameter
H]
SV high limit Operation Value range
SVH TRUE
value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Limits
SV low limit Operation Value range
SVL TRUE
value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output Rate
variety limit
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer part 2.1.6
parameter
from overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
action select
switch. SV is not
changed, the
SWPN=OFF
MV Increases
equal to direct
with the
Direct/Reverse Operation action;
SWPN increasing of PV TRUE
Switch Settings parameter SWPN=ON
in Direct action,
equal to reverse
and decreases
action
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse
action.

709
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Extended Function block BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN － Input pin
feedback input downstream
block
Connect to
Function block
BKOUTERR of
BKINERR feedback status － Input pin
downstream
input
block
The measured
PV value of loop － Input pin Connect to AI
Control object
Connect to MV
The cascade
CSV － Input pin of upstream
setpoint
block
Base Input Pin Tracking Connect to AI
Settings input(MV=TV Related
TV － Input pin
when tracking parameter:
status) SWTR
Tracking
selecting switch. Use to upstream
MV track TV interlock
SWTR when － Input pin condition input
SWTR=ON; Do Related
not track when parameter: TV
SWTR=OFF
Connect
Output
feedforward
compensating
signal AI.
OA value. Use to － Input pin
Related
feedforward
parameters are
control
OK and OB
Actuator
Advanced Input feedback value.
Pin Settings MF － Input pin Connect to AI
Use to
monitoring
Input
compensating
Connect to AI.
value. Use to
Refer part 2.1.2;
improve
IA － Input pin Related
controllability of
parameter IK
procedure with
and IB.
long dead zone
time.
MAN/AUTO
switch for
program control. Connect to
The program output of
Man control upstream block.
PSWAM － Input pin
when Significance
PSWAM=OFF; when
program AUTO MAN_OPT=ON
control when
PSWAM=ON

710
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The SV/CSV
selecting switch
Connect to
for program
output of
control. Adopt
upstream block.
PSWSV SV when － Input pin
Significance
PSWSV=OFF;
when
adopt CSV
SV_OPT=ON
when
PSWSV=ON
MAN/AUTO
control source
select switch. If
MAN_OPT=ON
then Connect to
MAN/AUTO output of
select switch is upstream block.
MAN_OPT controlled by the － Input pin Related
PSWAM; if parameter
MAN_OPT=OF PSWAM and
F then SWAM
MAN/AUTO
select switch is
controlled by
SWAM
SV/CSV control
source select
switch. If it is
ON then Connect to
SV/CSV select output of
switch is upstream block.
SV_OPT controlled by the － Input pin Related
PSWSV; if it is parameter
OFF then PSWSV and
SV/CSV select SWSV
switch is
controlled by the
SWSV.
Switch of
closedown Connect to
increase for upstream block
MV(MV can not out. It is active
SWINC － Input pin
increase). Carry when block is
out closedown AUTO/CAS
increase when status.
SWINC=ON
Switch of
closedown Connect to
decrease for upstream block
MV(MV can not out. It is active
SWDEC － Input pin
increase). Carry when block is
out closedown AUTO/CAS
decrease when status.
SWDEC=ON
Connect to
Switch for MV upstream block
hold. The MV out. It is active
HOLD － Input pin
hold when when block is
HOLD=ON AUTO/CAS
status.

711
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Function block
MV － Output pin Connect to AO
output value
Connect to
upstream block
Function block
BKIN
BKOUT feedback value － Output pin
Related
output
parameter is
BK_OPT
Output pin Function block Connect to
BKOUTER
feedback status － Output pin upstream block
R
output BKINERR
Select switch for
BKOUT value. If
BK_OPT=ON Related
Configuration
BK_OPT then BKOUT － parameter is
parameter
track measured BKOUT
value else track
setpoint.
KE decreases
with the
Error setting Operation
KE TRUE increasing of the
factor parameter
effect of EI for
MV
KDE decreases
with the
Error change
Operation increasing of the
Blur Param KDE ratio setting TRUE
parameter effect of error
Setting factor
change ratio for
MV
KDU increasing
with the
increasing of the
Out increment Operation
KDU TRUE effect of MV
setting factor parameter
when the same
EI and error
change ratio.
Operator Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer part 2.1.1
Command parameter
Stand-by work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer part 2.1.1
mode parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_OP Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer part 2.1.1
T parameter
return (default)
Manual and
auto switch: Operation It is active for
SWAM －
OFF=manual, parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Suto/ cascade
selection: Operation It is active for
SWSV －
OFF=auto, parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade

712
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to
equal to preset
MV value when
switch to aoto
status. PMV
enable switch. Related
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE parameter is
parameter
SWPMV=ON, PMV
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decrea
se are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
OOS/IMAN/TR/ Operation It is active for
PMV TRUE
MAN modes to parameter SWPMV=ON
AUTO or CAS
mode
Setpoint for loop Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
control parameter
When manual
Operator Data Manual output Operation
MANMV － mode, MV=
value parameter
MANMV
Monitoring
EI error － Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
PV HH alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV H alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV L alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV LL alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
Measured value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
Input Alarm DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value parameter
Settings
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) parameter
Valve position Related
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE parameter: NMF.
parameter
thresholds Refer to 2.1.6
Related
Valve position
Operation parameter:
PMFLIM positive error TRUE
parameter PMF. Refer to
thresholds
2.1.6
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
hysteresis time

713
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Bypass PID
operation, when
BYPASS=ON,
excise PID Operation
BYPASS TRUE Refer to
calculation, parameter
switch SV to MV
directly for
output
Enable switch,
when
Operation Related
Advance SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
parameter parameter: DB
Calculation deadband
Settings enable
Deadband band Operation It is active when
DB TRUE
size parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to
hysteresis parameter
Control output
type:
OFF=position Configuration Related
OUT_OPT －
type, parameter parameter: MV
ON=increment
type
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
PV H Limit Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
PV LL limit Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication parameter
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
MV positive rate Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication parameter
MV negative
Monitoring
DMVLIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
alarm indication

714
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
alarm indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2.
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
parameter
gain parameter: IA.
Input Refer to 2.1.2.
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Related
parameter
Compensation bias value parameter: IA.
Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4.
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
parameter
gain parameter: OA.
Output Refer to 2.1.4.
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
parameter
bias value parameter: OA.
Set MV manual
slow
MV manual slow increase/decrea
Operation
SMV increase/decrea TRUE se percentage in
parameter
se value (%) function block
properties
settings
Set MV manual
fast
MV manual fast increase/decrea
Operation
FMV increase/decrea TRUE se percentage in
parameter
se value (%) function block
properties
Fase/Slow/Increa settings
se/Decrease
Settings Set SV manual
slow
SV slow increase/decrea
Operation
SSV increase/decrea TRUE se percentage in
parameter
se value (%) function block
properties
settings
Set SV manual
fast
SV fast increase/decrea
Operation
FSV increase/decrea TRUE se percentage in
parameter
se value (%) function block
properties
settings
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
parameter
Extended Range percentage
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
parameter
percentage

715
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp
function switch.
When changing
Related
set value,
parameter:
incline it to SV
Operation RAMP
SWRAMP according to the TRUE
parameter active when in
set RAMP (s).
automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
Related
Ramp Operation
RAMP TRUE parameter:
SV Advance coefficient parameter
SWRAMP
Settings
SV track PV
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/ SVL,
SVTR_OP SV= range limit. Configuration
－ Refer to 2.1.3
T used to prevent parameter
the output MV
from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Operation
AOF module alarm, TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
Alarm Enabled on=prohibit to
and Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag code － Output pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at the
Function block
Operation first time of
SWOOS disable TRUE
parameter function block
(ON=disable)
downloading
Related
Output value in Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
OOS status parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
Output value
OOS Settings
type in OOS
status. when
OOS_OPT
=ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, parameter
when
OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV

716
 Function Block Reference

13.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

The “Preference” and “Other Item” parameters of FLC are the same as PID except “FLC item”.

717
 Function Block Reference

Table 13-2 Panel Instruction of FLC

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
PV Set the HH limit alarm value of
Preference 100.00
Alarm HH PVHH [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
0
(%) means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the H limit alarm value of
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the L limit alarm value of
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)

718
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Set the LL limit alarm value of
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
HYS PVHYS 0.000 － Alarm hysteresis value of PV
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop SV. (Selecting the alarm
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: SV limit will not be
SV affected by the selection.
Limits
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
SV. (Selecting the alarm means
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: SV limit will not be
affected by the selection.
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
100.00
H MVH [MVSCL,MVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
0
Note: MV limit will not be
MV affected by the selection.
Limits
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: MV limit will not be
affected by the selection.
Read-only. EI= SV-PV
EI EI 0.000 － (Selecting the alarm means
enable, or it is disbled.)
DMV
H Selecting positive deviation
－ － －
(Selec alarm means enabled.
EI ted)
Alarm
(%) DMVL
Selecting negative deviation
(Selec － － －
alarm means enabled.
ted)
100.00 ± (Range H Limit
DL DL SV of Deviation alarm
0 – Range L Limit)
DLHY
DLHYS 0.000 － SV of alarm hysteresis value
S
100.00 Selecting positive deviation
PMF PMFLIM －
MF 0 alarm means enabled.
Alarm 100.00 Selecting negative deviation
NMF NMFLIM －
(%) 0 alarm means enabled.
TMFH TMFHYS 0.000 － SV of lag time.
DMV
H Selecting the positive velocity
－ － －
MV (Selec alarm means enabled.
Veloci ted)
ty DMVL
Limits Selecting the negative velocity
(Selec － － －
(%) alarm means enabled.
ted)
DMVL 100.00
DMVLIM － SV of loop MV velocity limit
IM 0

719
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
100.00 SV of bias adjusting factor
KE KE
0 parameter
FLC
Para 100.00 SV of output increment
KDE KDE
meter 0 adjusting factor parameter
SV of output increment
KDU KDU 0.000
adjusting factor parameter
Enabl
e Selecting the deadband
SWDB －
(Selec parameter means enable.
ted)
Dead Disabl
band Selecting the deadband
e
(%) SWDB √
(Selec parameter means disable.
ted)
DB DB 0.000 Size of deadband
DBHY
DBHYS 0.000 Hysysteris value of deadband
S
Enabl
e Selecting the SV ramp action
SWRAMP －
(Selec means enable.
FFLC SV ted)
Ramp Disabl
Action e Selecting the SV ramp action
(%) SWRAMP √
(Selec means disable.
ted)
RAM 100.00 SV of ramp coefficient (slope)
RAMP
P 0 parameter
Direct
Selecting the direct action
(Selec SWPN －
Contr means enable.
ted)
ol
Directi Rever
on se Selecting the reverse action
SWPN √
(Selec means enable.
ted)
The modification of function
block panel is enabled for the
Run BYPASS √
function block properties dialog
FLC in debugging.
Action The modification of function
Bypas block panel is disabled for the
BYPASS －
s function block properties dialog
in debugging.
Others Value Read-only. It can be set in
IA 0.000 －
Input (IA) configuration or program.
Comp Coeffi
ensati cient IK 1.000 － Input compensation gain
on (IK)
(%)
Bias
IB 0.000 － Input compensation bias value
(IB)
Outpu Value
OA 0.000 － Read-only, feedforward signal.
t (OA)

720
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Comp Coeffi
ensati cient OK 1.000 － Output compensation gain
on (OK)
(%) Bias Output compensation bias
DB 0.000 －
(DB) value
Error Coeffi
Alarm cient KSV 1.000 0~100 Bias filter coefficient
Filter (KSV)
Settin Time
gs TSV 0.000 0~1000s Constant between errors (s)
(TSV)
Feedb Track Read-only. It can be set in
BK_OPT － －
ack PV configuration or program.
Outpu
t Track Read-only. It can be set in
BK_OPT √ －
Track SV configuration or program.
SVTR_OP Read-only. It can be set in
Track √ －
SV T configuration or program.
Track Not SVTR_OP Read-only. It can be set in
－ －
Track T configuration or program.
MAN_ Read-only. It can be set in
Panel MAN_OPT √ －
OPT configuration or program.
Settin Progr Read-only. It can be set in
gs MAN_OPT － －
am configuration or program.
SV_O Read-only. It can be set in
Panel SV_OPT － －
PT configuration or program.
Settin Progr Read-only. It can be set in
gs SV_OPT √ －
am configuration or program.
Track Value Read-only. Track the input
TV 0.000 －
(%) value (%).
13.1.3 Flag
Table 13-3 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)

721
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
ALARM FOR MV POSITIVE VELOCITY AMPLITUDE
D22
LIMITING (DMVH)
ALARM FOR MV NEGATIVE VELOCITY AMPLITUDE
D23
LIMITING (DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
13.1.4 Programming Example for Application

The programming method reference part 2.2.3

13.2 Predictive Function Control Function Block For Single

Variable(PFC)

PFC is a model predictive control algorithm: Predictive Functional Control. PFC has easy
algorithm, small calculating quantity, fast tracing, high precision and other characters. PFC has
been successfully applied in industrial robot for fast and high precision tracing, target tracing in
martial domain and other fast control systems as well as chemical batch reaction process, rolling
and other relatively slow rate control systems. It has also been successfully applied in PVC
polymeric reaction, PH control, chloridizing PVC and other producing processes.

PFC uses the first-order pure lag model to control the first-order pure lag object with fitting high
order asymptotic stable objects to first-order pure lag objects. PFC has PID in it. It could combine
process object with PID to make a whole, and define it a predictive control generalized object.
Regulating PID parameters to make generalized objects first-order pure lag objects.

The PFC is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

722
 Function Block Reference

13.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-4 PFC Function Block Parameter

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

MV high Configuratio
MVSCH － If the MVSCH and MVSCL
scale n parameter
reversal then output
MV low Configuratio REVSCL
MVSCL －
scale n parameter
SV high Configuratio
SVSCH － If the SVSCH and SVSCL
scale n parameter
reversal then output
Configuratio REVSCL
SVSCL SV low scale －
Range n parameter
Settings SV engineer Configuratio
SVEU － －
unit n parameter
MV engineer Configuratio
MVEU － －
unit n parameter
SV decimal Configuratio
Basic SVDLEN － －
digits [0,5] n parameter
Parameters
MVDLE MV decimal Configuratio
－ －
N digits [0,5] n parameter
MV high limit Operation
MVH TRUE If the MVH and the MVL
value parameter
reversal then output
MV low limit Operation REVSCL
MVL TRUE
value parameter
SV high limit Operation
SVH TRUE If the SVH and the SVL
value parameter
reversal then output
SV low limit Operation REVSCL
SVL TRUE
value parameter
Limits MV output
Rate variety
limit value.
Used to
prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE －
MV from parameter
overlarge
modification
in a short
time.
Base Function
Extended block Connect to BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN － Input pin
Parameters feedback downstream block
Settings
input
Function
BKINER block Connect to BKOUTERR of
－ Input pin
R feedback downstream block
status input
The
measured
PV value of loop － Input pin Connect to AI
Control
object
The cascade Connect to upstream block
CSV － Input pin
setpoint MV

723
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Tracking
input(MV=T
TV V when － Input pin Connect to AI
tracking
status)
Tracking
selecting
switch.MV
track TV
Connect to upstream block
SWTR when － Input pin
interlock input
SWTR=ON;
Do not track
when
SWTR=OFF
MAN/AUTO
switch for
program
control. The
program
Advance Man control Connect to upstream block
Input Pin PSWAM when － Input pin output
Settings PSWAM=OF Active with MAN_OPT=ON
F; program
AUTO
control when
PSWAM=O
N
The SV/CSV
selecting
switch for
program
control. Connect to upstream block
PSWSV Adopt SV － Input pin output
when Active with SV_OPT=ON
PSWSV=OF
F; adopt
CSV when
PSWSV=ON
MAN/AUTO
control
source
select
switch. If
MAN_OPT=
ON then
MAN/AUTO Connect to output of
MAN_O select switch upstream block.
－ Input pin
PT is controlled Related parameter
by the PSWAM and SWAM
PSWAM; if
MAN_OPT=
OFF then
MAN/AUTO
select switch
is controlled
by SWAM

724
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

SV/CSV
control
source
select
switch. If it is
ON then
SV/CSV
Connect to output of
select switch
upstream block.
SV_OPT is controlled － Input pin
Related parameter
by the
PSWSV and SWSV
PSWSV; if it
is OFF then
SV/CSV
select switch
is controlled
by the
SWSV.
Switch of
closedown
increase for
MV(MV can
not Connect to upstream block
SWINC increase). － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
increase
when
SWINC=ON
Switch of
closedown
decrease for
MV(MV can
not Connect to upstream block
SWDEC increase). － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
decrease
when
SWDEC=ON
Switch for
MV hold. Connect to upstream block
HOLD The MV hold － Input pin out. It is active when block
when is AUTO/CAS status.
HOLD=ON
Output Function
Pin MV block output － Output pin Connect to AO
value
SV control
output. The
out mode
used to
The block inter control
SVOUT cascade. － Output pin
output
The PFC is
outer loop
and PID is
inter loop.
Predictive
The block inter control
OUT control － Output pin
output
output

725
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Increment
DMV － Output pin －
value
Predictive
control
STEP_S
disport step － Output pin －
V
increment
output
Operation
TC Control cycle TRUE －
parameter
Adjust
parameter of
reference Operation
LAMD TRUE －
obit dynamic parameter
response
speed. [0,1]
Prediction Operation
PSTEP TRUE －
step parameter
Gain of
Operation
KM prediction TRUE －
parameter
model
Time
PFC constant of
Operation
Param TM prediction TRUE －
parameter
Settings model
(unit:s)
Time
constant B of
Operation
TMB prediction TRUE －
parameter
model
(unit:s)
Pure
hysteresis
time of Operation
TDED TRUE －
pridiction parameter
model (unit:
s)
Pure DEO=TDED/TC. If DEO
Monitoring
DEO hysteresis － over 99 then output
parameter
step number. DEOALM
Operation
MODE Work model － Refer to 2.1.1
parameter
Manual and
auto switch: Operation Active with
Operator SWAM －
OFF=manua parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
Comma l, ON=auto
nd
Suto/
cascade
Operation
SWSV selection: － Active with SV_OPT=OFF
parameter
OFF=auto,
ON=cascade
Setpoint for Operation
SV TRUE －
Operator loop control parameter
Data Manual Operation
MANMV － －
output value parameter
Input PV HH alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE －
Alarm value parameter

726
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Settings PV H alarm Operation
PVH TRUE －
value parameter
PV L alarm Operation
PVL TRUE －
value parameter
PV LL alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE －
value parameter
Measured
Operation
PVHYS value alarm TRUE －
parameter
hysteresis
Prediction
model type:
1=first-order;
2=second-or
Configuratio
MODEL der not － －
n parameter
self-barance;
3=second-or
der
self-barance.
Advance If
Calculati OUT_OPT=
on ON then
OUT_O Configuratio
Settings MV=OUT; if － －
PT n parameter
OUT_OPT=
OFF then
MV=SVOUT
Stepper
STEP_S Operation
increment TRUE －
VH parameter
high limit
Stepper
STEP_S Operation
increment TRUE －
VL parameter
low limit

Alarm PVHHIN PVHH alarm Monitoring

－ －
D indication parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
PV L limit
Monitoring
PVLIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
PV LL limit
PVLLIN Monitoring
alarm － －
D parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
SV L limit
Monitoring
SVLIND alarm － －
parameter
indication
MV positive
DMVHIN Monitoring
rate limit － －
D parameter
indication

727
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

MV negative
DMVLIN Monitoring
rate limit － －
D parameter
indication
MV manual
Set MV manual slow
slow
Operation increase/decrease percent
SMV increase/dec TRUE
parameter in function block properties
rease value
settings
(%)
MV manual
Set MV manual fast
fast
Fase/Slo Operation increase/decrease percent
FMV increase/dec TRUE
w/Increa parameter in function block properties
rease value
se/Decre settings
(%)
ase
Settings SV slow Set MV manual slow
increase/dec Operation increase/decrease percent
SSV TRUE
rease value parameter in function block properties
(%) settings
SV fast Set MV manual fast
increase/dec Operation increase/decrease percent
FSV TRUE
rease value parameter in function block properties
(%) settings
Extended
range Configuratio
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
maximum n parameter
Extende percentage
d Range
Settings Extended
range Configuratio
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum n parameter
percentage
SV ramp
function
switch.
When
changing set
value, incline
SV it to SV
Advance RAMP_ according to Operation Active with AUTO or CAS
TRUE
Settings OPT the set parameter Related parameter:RAMP
RAMP (s).
OFF=SV
ramp
function off,
ON=SV
ramp
function on
Ramp
Operation Related parameter:
RAMP coefficient. TRUE
parameter SWRAMP
Unit: s

728
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

SV track PV
switch
enable/disab
le: OFF=not
track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/
SVL, SV=
SVTR_O range limit. Configuratio
－ Refer to 2.1.3
PT used to n parameter
prevent the
output MV
from
interference
when
changing the
control
mode.
Suppress
module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm, TRUE
Enabled parameter
on=prohibit
and to
Suppres
Alarm Alarm
s ENALM TRUE
enable parameter
FLAG Flag code － Output pin
Function
block disable Operation
SWOOS TRUE －
(ON=disable parameter
)
Output value
Operation
OOSVAL in OOS TRUE －
parameter
status
Output value
OOS
type in OOS
Settings
status. when
OOS_OPT
=ON,
OOS_O Configuratio
MV=OOSVA － －
PT n parameter
L, when
OOS_OPT
=OFF,
maintain the
MV

729
 Function Block Reference

13.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

730
 Function Block Reference

Table 13-5 Panel parameter instruction of PFC

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Set the HH limit
alarm value of
PV Alarm loop PV.
Preference (%) HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (Selecting the
alarm means
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Set the H limit
alarm value of
loop PV.
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (Selecting the
alarm means
enable, or it is
disbled.)

731
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Set the L limit
alarm value of
loop PV.
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (Selecting the
alarm means
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Set the LL limit
alarm value of
loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (Selecting the
alarm means
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Alarm hysteresis
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
value of PV
Set the H limit
alarm value of
loop SV.
(Selecting the
alarm means
H SVH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Note: SV limit will
not be affected by
SV the selection.
Limits(%) Set the L limit
alarm value of
loop SV.
(Selecting the
alarm means
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Note: SV limit will
not be affected by
the selection.
Set the H limit
alarm value of
loop MV.
(Selecting the
alarm means
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Note: MV limit will
not be affected by
MV the selection.
Limits(%) Set the L limit
alarm value of
loop MV.
(Selecting the
alarm means
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
enable, or it is
disbled.)
Note: MV limit will
not be affected by
the selection.

732
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selecting the
DMVH positive velocity
－ －
(Selected) alarm means
enabled.
MV Rate Selecting the
Limit Alarm DMVL negative velocity
－ －
(Selected) alarm means
enabled.
SV of loop MV
DMVLIM (%) DMVLIM 100.000
velocity limit
The gain
KM KM 1.000 parameter SV of
predict model
The time constant
TM TM 1.000 parameter SV of
predict model
Model
Parameter The time constant
TMB TMB 10.000 B parameter SV of
predict model
The pure lag time
constant
TDED TDED 1.000
parameter SV of
predict model
SV of control
TC (s) TC 1.000
period parameter
SV of pure lag
DEO DEO 1
step parameter
SV of predict step
PSTEP PSTEP 20.000
parameter
SV of referenced
locus dynamic
PFC LAMD LAMD 0.779 [0,1]
response speed
parameter
Parameter SV of step
STEP_SVH STEP_SVH 0.020 increment
parameter
SV of step
STEP_SVL STEP_SVL 0.020 increment L
parameter
Predict control
STEP_SV STEP_SV 0.000 distribution
increment output
Control output of
SVOUT SVOUT 0.000
SV
1st Order st
MODEL √ 1 Order =1
(Selected)
2nd 2nd
Model Nonautonomous MODEL － Nonautonomous
Type (Selected) =2
nd
2 Automomous 2nd Automomous
MODEL －
(Selected) =3

733
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selecting the ramp
Enable RAMP_OPT － SV action means
enable.

Ramp SV Selecting the ramp

Disable RAMP_OPT √ SV action means
disable.
SV of ramp
RAMP (%) RAMP 1.000 coefficient (slope)
parameter
Read-only. It can
OUT Control be set in
OUT_OPT √
Output configuration or
Output program.
Mode Read-only. It can
SVOUT Control be set in
OUT_OPT －
Output configuration or
program.
Read-only. It can
be set in
Track SWTR √
configuration or
program.
Track SV
Read-only. It can
be set in
Not Track SWTR －
Others configuration or
program.
Read-only. It can
be set in
Panel SV_OPT －
configuration or
SV_OPT program.
Control
Source Read-only. It can
be set in
Program SV_OPT √
configuration or
program.
Read-only. It can
be set in
Panel MAN_OPT √
configuration or
MAN_OPT program.
Control
Source Read-only. It can
be set in
Program MAN_OPT －
configuration or
program.
Read-only. It can
be set in
DMV DMV 0.000
configuration or
program.
Read-only. Track
Track Value (%) TV 0.000 the input value
(%).
13.2.3 Flag
Table 13-6 Flag

Bit Serial Number Alarm Bit Serial Number Alarm

D0 OOS status(OOS) D1 IMAN status (IMAN)

734
 Function Block Reference

Bit Serial Number Alarm Bit Serial Number Alarm

D2 Traking status(TR) D3 MAN status(MAN)
D4 AUTO status(AUTO) D5 CAS status(CAS)
Pure hysteresis step
Measured value HH
D6 over limit alarm D7
alarm(PVHH)
(DEO)
Measured value high
D8 D9 Measured value L alarm(PVL)
limit alarm(PVH)
Measusred value LL
D10 D11 SV high limit alarm(SVH)
alarm(PVLL)
SV Low limit
D12 D13 MV high limit alarm(MVH)
alarm(SVL)
MV Low limit Control rate high limit alarm
D14 D15
alarm(MVL) (DMVH)
Control rate low limit Config go awry alarm
D16 D19
alarm (DMVL) (CFGERR)
Range limit reversal Shield function block
D17 D20
alarm (REVSCL) alarm(AOF)
13.2.4 Prediction Control Algorithm

The basic principle figure of Predictive Functional Control is shown as follows:

Figure 13-1 Principle Figure of Predictive Functional Control

C is the setpoint value. Yp (k) is the output of process. Tr is the time constant of referenced track. u
is the output of PFC. d is the disturbance in the process.

The final goal of Predictive Functional Control is to make the output of process object Yp(k) to
follow the referencing track(Referencing track is the output curve that has been defined in advance,
commonly a first order exponential curve) and gradually reach the set point value C. Through
contracting predictive model to simulate the features of actual inputs and outputs of process
objects, and calculate the intending outputs of the predictive model based on historical information
and intending inputs. So as long as PFC control output U to make the predictive model to put out
alonging referencing curve, that is equal to that the output curve of process object alonging
referencing curve. As predictive model is not strictly the same as actual process objects, use the
discrepancy between output of predictive model and actual object as a feedforward compensation
through the predictor to proofread the output of process to decrease the model mismatch problem
caused by disturbance, noise and so on.

735
 Function Block Reference

13.2.5 Method of Place in Service

Predictive control output

1) Select OUT_OPT=ON. Then MV=OUT.

2) BKIN and BKINERR link to feedback value of down stream function block

3) Manipulating set MV to step change, and observe change curve of object.

4) Capture gain, time constant and pure lag time of first-order pure lag object by step curve.
Then write these parameters to KM, TM and TDED. If the object is in reverse
characteristic then set KM to negative.

5) The MAN switch to AUTO and change SV

Setpoint value control output

1) Select OUT_OPT=OFF. Then MV=SVOUT.

2) BKIN and BKINERR link to feedback value of down stream function block

3) This mode are used to cascade control. The PFC is outer loop and the PID is inner loop.
STEP_SV be used to inner loop setpoint.

4) First set inner loop to AUTO. Then change SV to step change and adjust PB_PID, TI_PID,
TD_PID, and adjust step response of object to border first-order pure lag curve.

5) Capture gain, time constant and pure lag time of first-order pure lag object by step curve.
Then write these parameters to KM, TM and TDED

6) Set the CSV of inner loop and then put outer loop to AUTO. Wait some times, then slow
let go STEP_SVH and STEP_SVL, achieve the PFC-PID cascade control.

13.3 PID Self-tune Function Block (PID_TUN)

Function block PID_TUN is to achieve PID parameters self-tuning function. After using relay
identification method to approximate the object to first-order pure lag, tune parameters through the
standard ZN method, CHR method and Lambda method.

The using method of PID_TUN is the same to PID except the PID parameters self-tuning function,
so the usage introduction of PID function block could be a reference.

The PID_TUN algorithm is the same as the PID function block. The block performance period is
150μs.

736
 Function Block Reference

13.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-7 PID_TUN Function Block Parameter Instrument

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic MV high Configuration The same as MV actual
MVSCH －
Parameters scale parameter value H limit
MV low Configuration The same as MV actual
MVSCL －
scale parameter value L limit
SV high Configuration The same as PV actual
SVSCH －
scale parameter value H limit
Configuration The same as PV actual
SVSCL SV low scale －
parameter value L limit
Set in the function block
Range SV engineer Configuration
SVEU － properties settings
Settings unit parameter
interface
Set in the function block
MV engineer Configuration
MVEU － properties settings
unit parameter
interface
Used for Data displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block panel (Equal
digits [0,5] parameter
to 3 as default)
Used for Data displayed on
MVDLE MV decimal Configuration
－ function block panel (Equal
N digits [0,5] parameter
to 3 as default)
MV high limit Operation Value range
MVH TRUE
value parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
MV low limit Operation Value range
MVL TRUE
value parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
SV high limit Operation Value range
SVH TRUE
value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
SV low limit Operation Value range
SVL TRUE
value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Limits MV output
Rate variety
limit value.
Used to
prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from parameter
overlarge
modification
in a short
time.

737
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Direct/Rever
se action
select
switch. SV is
not changed,
the MV
Increases
Direct/R direct action with SWPN
with the
everse Operation
SWPN increasing of TRUE ＝OFF and reverse action
Switch parameter
PV in Direct with SWPN＝ON
Settings
action, and
decreases
with the
increasing of
PV in
reverse
action.
Function
Extended block Connect to BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN － Input pin
feedback downstream block
input
Function
BKINER block Connect to BKOUTERR of
－ Input pin
R feedback downstream block
status input
The
measured
PV value of loop － Input pin Connect to AI
Control
object
The cascade Connect to MV of upstream
CSV － Input pin
setpoint block
Tracking
Base
input(MV=T
Input Pin Connect to AI
TV V when － Input pin
Settings Related parameter: SWTR
tracking
status)
Tracking
selecting
switch.MV
track TV Use to upstream interlock
SWTR when － Input pin condition input
SWTR=ON; Related parameter: TV
Do not track
when
SWTR=OFF
Output
compensatin
Connect feedforward signal
g value. Use
OA － Input pin AI. Related parameters are
to
OK and OB
feedforward
control
Advance PVERR PV fault? － Input pin Connect to AI.ERR
d Input
Connect to upstream block
Pin SVERR SV fault? － Input pin
output
Settings
TVERR TV fault? － Input pin Connect to AI.ERR
Connect to upstream block
OAERR OA fault? － Input pin
output

738
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Actuator
feedback
MF － Input pin Connect to AI
value. Use to
monitoring
Input
compensatin
g value. Use
to improve Connect to AI. Refer part
IA controllability － Input pin 2.1.2; Related parameter
of procedure IK and IB.
with long
dead zone
time.
MAN/AUTO
switch for
program
control. The
program
Connect to output of
Man control
upstream block.
PSWAM when － Input pin
Significance when
PSWAM=OF
MAN_OPT=ON
F; program
AUTO
control when
PSWAM=O
N
The SV/CSV
selecting
switch for
program
Connect to output of
control.
upstream block.
PSWSV Adopt SV － Input pin
Significance when
when
SV_OPT=ON
PSWSV=OF
F; adopt
CSV when
PSWSV=ON
MAN/AUTO
control
source
select
switch. If
MAN_OPT=
ON then
MAN/AUTO Connect to output of
MAN_O select switch upstream block.
－ Input pin
PT is controlled Related parameter
by the PSWAM and SWAM
PSWAM; if
MAN_OPT=
OFF then
MAN/AUTO
select switch
is controlled
by SWAM

739
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

SV/CSV
control
source
select
switch. If it is
ON then
SV/CSV
Connect to output of
select switch
upstream block.
SV_OPT is controlled － Input pin
Related parameter PSWSV
by the
and SWSV
PSWSV; if it
is OFF then
SV/CSV
select switch
is controlled
by the
SWSV.
Switch of
closedown
increase for
MV(MV can
not Connect to upstream block
SWINC increase). － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
increase
when
SWINC=ON
Anti-integral Connect to measuring point
saturation AI,
RRL input, used － Input Pin related parameters: BKIN.
for control Refer to 2.1.4
overshoot
Switch of
closedown
decrease for
MV(MV can
not
Connect to upstream block
increase).
SWDEC － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out
is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
decrease
when
SWDEC=O
N
Switch for
MV hold. Connect to upstream block
HOLD The MV hold － Input pin out. It is active when block
when is AUTO/CAS status.
HOLD=ON
Output Function
Pin MV block output － Output pin Connect to AO
value
Function Connect to upstream block
block BKIN
BKOUT － Output pin
feedback Related parameter is
value output BK_OPT

740
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Function
BKOUT block Connect to upstream block
－ Output pin
ERR feedback BKINERR
status output
Select
switch for
BKOUT
value. If
BK_OPT=O
N then Configuration Related parameter is
BK_OPT －
BKOUT parameter BKOUT
track
measured
value else
track
setpoint.
Proportion Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
band size parameter
Integral time Operation
TI TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
(s) parameter
PID
Param When TD=0, suppress
Derivative Operation
Settings TD TRUE derivation action, Refer to
time (s) Parameter
2.1.8
Derivative
Operation
KD filter TRUE －
parameter
coefficient
Self-tune Object static Monitoring
K TRUE －
Settings gain parameter
Object time Monitoring
T TRUE －
constant parameter
Object
Monitoring
L hysteresis TRUE －
parameter
time
When
STC=ON
Operation
STC into TRUE －
parameter
auto-setting
model
If
auto-update Operation
UPDATE TRUE －
after setting parameter
finish
Setting Operation
OS TRUE －
method parameter
Jump
Operation
MA stepper TRUE －
parameter
value
Operation
NB Noise belt TRUE －
parameter
PB setting Monitoring
PBC TRUE －
value parameter
TI setting Monitoring
TIC TRUE －
value parameter
TD setting Monitoring
TDC TRUE －
value parameter

741
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

STC_M Setting Monitoring
－ －
ODE status parameter
PID run
TUN_TY Operation
model － －
PE parameter
selecting
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer part 2.1.1
parameter
Stand-by Monitoring
IMODE － Refer part 2.1.1
work mode parameter
ON=auto
return,
MODE_ Configuration
OFF=manua － Refer part 2.1.1
OPT parameter
l return
(default)
Manual and
auto switch: Operation It is active for
SWAM －
OFF=manua parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
l, ON=auto
Suto/
cascade
selection: Operation It is active for
SWSV －
OFF=auto, parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascad
e
Whether to
Operator equal to
Comma preset MV
nd value when
switch to
aoto status.
PMV enable
switch.
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE Related parameter is PMV
parameter
SWPMV=O
N, MV =
PMV, MV
velocity
alarm, lock
increase/dec
rease are
disabled
Preset MV
when
switching
from
Operation
PMV OOS/IMAN/ TRUE It is active for SWPMV=ON
parameter
TR/MAN
modes to
AUTO or
CAS mode
Setpoint for Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
loop control parameter
Operator Manual Operation When manual mode, MV=
Data MANMV －
output value parameter MANMV
Monitoring
EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.3
parameter
Input PV HH alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm value parameter

742
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Settings PV H alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV L alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV LL alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
Measured
Operation
PVHYS value alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
parameter
hysteresis
Deviation
Operation
DL alarm set TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
value
Deviation
alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis parameter
value
Deviation
Operation
KSV filter TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
coefficient
Deviation
Operation
TSV filter time TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
constant(s)
Valve
position
Operation Related parameter: NMF.
NMFLIM negative TRUE
parameter Refer to 2.1.6
error
thresholds
Valve
position Operation Related parameter: PMF.
PMFLIM TRUE
positive error parameter Refer to 2.1.6
thresholds
Valve
position
TMFHY Operation
error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
S parameter
hysteresis
time
Bypass PID
operation,
when
Advance BYPASS=O
Calculati When cascade adjusting,
N, excise Operation
on BYPASS TRUE used to excise inner loop
PID parameter
Settings when it fails
calculation,
switch SV to
MV directly
for output
Proportion
supress
switch, when Operation
STOPP TRUE -
STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Integral
supress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE -
STOPI=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action

743
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Enable
switch, when
Operation
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE Related parameter: DB
parameter
deadband
enable
Deadband Operation It is active when
DB TRUE
band size parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband
Operation
DBHYS band TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
hysteresis
Non-linear
gain range Operation
GW TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
non-linear Parameter
gain range
Non-linear
gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
[0,1.0]
Non-linear
gain
selection
switch,
switch the
relation
between
error and
output
change
value to Related parameters: GW,
NGN_O nonlinear. Configuration PB and KN When
－
PT used for parameter NGN_OPT＝ON; GW and
control when PB when NGN_OPT＝OFF
proportional
gain needs
nonlinear
change.
OFF=Error
square root
function,
ON=Gap
action
function
Integral
excise
coefficient.
when EI >
EA, excise
coefficient,
when EI< Operation
EA TRUE Related parameter: DK
EA, excising parameter
coefficient is
disabled,
used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge

744
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Proportion
modified
Operation Related parameter: EA
DK value when TRUE
Parameter Please refer to 2.2.1Note5
integral
excising
Control
output type:
OUT_O OFF=positio Configuration
－ Related parameter: MV
PT n type, parameter
ON=increme
nt type
PID_OPT ＝0 then
Select
execute standard PID；
PID_OP switch for Configuration
－ PID_OPT＝1 then execute
T PID control parameter
algorithm D_PI；PID_OPT＝2 then
execute PD_I

Alarm PVHHIN PVHH alarm Monitoring

－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
PV L limit
Monitoring
PVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
PV LL limit
PVLLIN Monitoring
alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
SV L limit
Monitoring
SVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
Positive
deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm parameter
indication
Negative
deviation Monitoring
NEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm parameter
indication
MV positive
DMVHIN Monitoring
rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication
MV negative
DMVLIN Monitoring
rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication

745
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Valve
position
error Monitoring
NMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
negative parameter
alarm
indication
Valve
position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
alarm
indication
Input
Operation
IK compensatio TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
parameter
n gain
Input
Operation
IB compensatio TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Compen parameter
n bias value
sation
Settings Output
Operation
OK compensatio TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
n gain
Output
Operation
OB compensatio TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
n bias value
MV manual
Set MV manual slow
slow
Operation increase/decrease
SMV increase/dec TRUE
parameter percentage in function
rease value
block properties settings
(%)
MV manual
Set MV manual fast
fast
Fase/Slo Operation increase/decrease
FMV increase/dec TRUE
w/Increa parameter percentage in function
rease value
se/Decre block properties settings
(%)
ase
Settings SV slow Set SV manual slow
increase/dec Operation increase/decrease
SSV TRUE
rease value parameter percentage in function
(%) block properties settings
SV fast Set SV manual fast
increase/dec Operation increase/decrease
FSV TRUE
rease value parameter percentage in function
(%) block properties settings
Extended
range Configuration
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
maximum parameter
Extende percentage
d Range
Settings Extended
range Configuration
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum parameter
percentage

746
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

SV ramp
function
switch.
When
changing set
value, incline
it to SV
Related parameter: RAMP
SWRAM according to Operation
TRUE active when in automatic or
P the set parameter
cascade mode
RAMP (s).
OFF=SV
ramp
function off,
ON=SV
ramp
function on
SV Ramp Operation Related parameter:
RAMP TRUE
Advance coefficient parameter SWRAMP
Settings SV track PV
switch
enable/disab
le: OFF=not
track,
ON=track. If
SV=range limit when PV
PV> SVH/
exceeds SVH and SVL. It is
SVL, SV=
used to prevent the
SVTR_O range limit. Configuration
－ interference generated with
PT used to parameter
the MV output when control
prevent the
mode is modified. Refer to
output MV
2.1.3
from
interference
when
changing the
control
mode.
Suppress
module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm, TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled parameter
on=prohibit
and to
Suppres
Alarm Alarm
s ENALM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
enable parameter
FLAG Flag code － Output pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function
OOS Set as ON at the first time
block disable Operation
Settings SWOOS TRUE of function block
(ON=disable parameter
downloading
)
Output value
Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL in OOS TRUE
parameter OOS_OPT=ON
status

747
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output value
type in OOS
status. when
OOS_OPT
=ON,
OOS_O Configuration
MV=OOSVA － Refer to 1.1.1
PT parameter
L, when
OOS_OPT
=OFF,
maintain the
MV
13.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

The PID_TUN function block face plate parameters same as the PID function block except

748
 Function Block Reference

“self-tuning” page parameters. The “self-tune” page parameters shown as follow.

Table 13-8 Panel parameter of PID_TUN

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Set the HH limit alarm value of
Preference HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the H limit alarm value of
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
PV Alarm
Set the L limit alarm value of
(%)
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the LL limit alarm value of
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
HYS PVHYS 0.000 － Alarm hysteresis value of PV
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop SV. (Selecting the alarm
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: SV limit will not be
SV Limits affected by the selection.
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
loop SV. (Selecting the alarm
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: SV limit will not be
affected by the selection.
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: MV limit will not be
MV affected by the selection.
Limits
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] means enable, or it is disbled.)
Note: MV limit will not be
affected by the selection.

749
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Read-only. EI=
EI EI 0.000 － SV-PV(Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
PEI
Selecting positive deviation
(Selec － － －
alarm means enabled.
ted)
EI Alarm
(%) NEI
Selecting negative deviation
(Selec － － －
alarm means enabled.
ted)
± (Range H Limit
DL DL 100.000 SV of Deviation alarm
– Range L Limit)
DLHY
DLHYS 0.000 － Hysteresis value of bias alarm
S
Selecting positive deviation
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 －
alarm means enabled.
MF
Alarm Selecting negative deviation
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 －
(%) alarm means enabled.
TMFH
TMFHYS 0.000 － SV of lag time
YS (s)
DMV
H Selecting the positive velocity
－ － －
(Selec alarm means enabled.
MV ted)
Velocity
Limits DMVL
Selecting the negative velocity
(%) (Selec － － －
alarm means enabled.
ted)
DMVL
DMVLIM 100.000 － SV of loop MV velocity limit
IM
PID PB(% SV of loop proportional
PB 100.000 ≧0
) parameter
PID SV of loop integral time
TI(S) TI 20.000 ≧0
parameter
SV of loop differential time
TD(S) TD 0.000 ≧0
parameter
Incomple
te
Differenti Incomplete differential filter
KD(S) KD 10.000 ≧0
al coefficient
Coefficie
nt
Enabl
e Selecting the deadband
SWDB － －
(Selec parameter means enabled.
ted)
Deadban Disabl
d (%) e Selecting the deadband
SWDB √ －
(Selec parameter means disabled.
ted)
DB DB 0.000 － Size of deadband
DBHY
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB] Hysteresis value of deadband
S

750
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Gap
Read-only, non-linear gain
Action
NGN_OPT － － selection switch, ON= gap
(Selec
action
ted)
Non-line Squar
ar Gain e Read-only, non-linear gain
(%) Root NGN_OPT √ － selection switch, OFF=square
(Selec root
ted)
GW GW 0.000 － Action range of non-linear gain
KN KN 1.000 [0,1.0] Non-linear gain coefficient
EA EA 0.000 － SV of range parameter
Integral
Seperati Integral cutting coefficient.
on (%) When EI>EA, cut the integral;
DK DK 0.000 －
when EI<EA, integral cutting is
disabled.
Enabl
e Selecting the SV ramp action
SWRAMP － －
(Selec means enable.
ted)
SV
RampAct Disabl
ion (%) e Selecting the SV ramp action
SWRAMP √ －
(Selec means disable.
ted)
RAM
RAMP 100.000 － SV of coefficient parameter
P
Direct
Selecting the direct action
(Selec SWPN － －
means enable.
ted)
Control
Direction Rever
se Selecting the reverse action
SWPN √ －
(Selec means enable.
ted)
Run
Selecting proportional action
(Selec STOPP √ －
Proportio means enabled.
ted)
nal
Selecting proportional action
Stop STOPP － －
means disabled.
Selecting integral action means
Run STOPI √ －
Integral enabled.
Action Selecting integral action means
Stop STOPI － －
disabled.
The modification of function
block panel is enabled for the
Run BYPASS √ －
function block properties dialog
PID in debugging.
Action The modification of function
Bypas block panel is disabled for the
BYPASS － －
s function block properties dialog
in debugging.
Others Input Read-only. It can be set in
IA IA 0.000 －
Compen configuration or program.
sation IK IK 1.000 － Input compensation gain

751
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
(%) Bias value of input
IB IB 0.000 －
compensation
Output OA OA 0.000 － Read-only, feedforward signal
Compen OK OK 1.000 － Output compensation gain
sation
(%) Bias value of output
DB DB 0.000 －
compensation
Set EI KSV KSV 1.000 0~100 Bias filter coefficient
alarm
filter TSV TSV 0.000 0~1000s Constant between errors (s)
Read-only. It can be set in
Feedbac PV BK_OPT － －
configuration or program.
k Output
Track Read-only. It can be set in
SV BK_OPT √ －
configuration or program.
SVTR_OP Read-only. It can be set in
Track √ －
T configuration or program.
SV Track
Not SVTR_OP Read-only. It can be set in
－ －
Track T configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
MAN_O Panel MAN_OPT √ －
configuration or program.
PT
Settings Progr Read-only. It can be set in
MAN_OPT － －
am configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
Panel SV_OPT － －
SV_OPT configuration or program.
Settings Progr Read-only. It can be set in
SV_OPT √ －
am configuration or program.
Read-only. Track the input
TV (%) TV 0.000 －
value (%).
Self-tune Mode Read-only. It can be set in
MODE √
0 configuration or program.
Mode Read-only. It can be set in
MODE －
1 configuration or program.
Mode Read-only. It can be set in
Tuning MODE －
2 configuration or program.
Mode
Option Mode Read-only. It can be set in
MODE －
3 configuration or program.
Mode Read-only. It can be set in
MODE －
4 configuration or program.
Mode Read-only. It can be set in
MODE －
5 configuration or program.
Tuning Read-only. It can be set in
NB NB 1.000
Paramet configuration or program.
er Read-only. It can be set in
Settings MA MA 10.000
configuration or program.
Auto
Read-only. It can be set in
Updat UPDATE －
configuration or program.
Paramet e
er Manu
Update al Read-only. It can be set in
UPDATE √
Updat configuration or program.
e

752
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Stabili
zing STC_MOD Read-only. It can be set in
－
Waitin E configuration or program.
g
Tuning Relay
STC_MOD Read-only. It can be set in
Process Oscill －
E configuration or program.
ation
Tunin
g STC_MOD Read-only. It can be set in
－
Failur E configuration or program.
e
Tunin
Read-only. It can be set in
g STC －
configuration or program.
Mode Mode
Option Contr
Read-only. It can be set in
ol STC √
configuration or program.
Mode
Read-only. It can be set in
P －
configuration or program.
Tuning
Objectiv Read-only. It can be set in
PI －
e configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
PID √
configuration or program.
PBC Read-only. It can be set in
PBC 100.000
(%) configuration or program.
TIC Read-only. It can be set in
TIC 1.000
(s) configuration or program.
PID TDC Read-only. It can be set in
TDC 1.000
Tuned (s) configuration or program.
Paramet Read-only. It can be set in
er K K 1.000
configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
T (s) T 1.000
configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
L (s) L 1.000
configuration or program.
13.3.3 PID Parameters Self-Tuning
 Start Self-tuning

 In no mode can self-tuning mode been entered in except in manual, automatic and
cascade modes. Make STC = ON to enter in self-tuning mode. MA ,that is, the
amplitude of relay oscillation must be set before starting self-tuning.

 Tuning Process

1) After entering into self-tuning mode, switch loop to manual and keep the current output
value unchanged. Note that automated and cascade button can not be manipulated at
this time, otherwise tuning would be failed to. A certain period of time should be waited
for stability.

2) After reaching stability, calculate the mean of the current object and noise band;

753
 Function Block Reference

3) Do relay oscillation;

4) End the relay oscillation, and calculate PID parameters according to settings;

5) Complete tuning.

13.3.4 Flag
Table 13-9 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D22 Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVH)
D23 Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D20 Tricking Value Error (TVERR)
D21 Output Compensation Value Error (OCVERR)
D29 PV Error
D30 SV Error
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

13.3.5 Programming Example For Apply

The programming method refer to 2.2.3

754
 Function Block Reference

13.4 SMITH Predictor Function Block (SMITH)

Industrial process objects usually have pure lag. Pure lag part would make it difficult to control the
process, resulting in decreased in quality control, and even cause system instability. It is difficult to
obtain good control effect using conventional PID in pure lag systems. In order to achieve effective
control for pure lag systems, the pure delay compensation control method could be used. SMITH
predictor is the most commonly used method in industry.

SMITH contains SMITH predictor and PI controller, which could be applied to pure lag objects
control. The control effect is badly affected by the stability of the lag character of objects. The
control effect would be well when the lag character is stable, otherwise the effect would
deteriorate.

The using method of SMITH is the same to PID except the internal controls, tuning parameters
and tuning method. so the usage introduction of PID function block can be a reference.

The SMITH is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

13.4.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-10 SMITH Function Block Parameter Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Basic Range Configurati

The same as MV actual
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － on
value H limit
parameter
Configurati
The same as MV actual
MVSCL MV low scale － on
value L limit
parameter
Configurati
The same as PV actual
SVSCH SV high scale － on
value H limit
parameter
Configurati
The same as PV actual
SVSCL SV low scale － on
value L limit
parameter
Configurati Set in the function block
SV engineer
SVEU － on properties settings
unit
parameter interface
Configurati Set in the function block
MV engineer
MVEU － on properties settings
unit
parameter interface

755
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Configurati Used for Data displayed on
SV decimal
SVDLEN － on function block panel (Equal
digits [0,5]
parameter to 3 as default)
Configurati Used for Data displayed on
MVDLE MV decimal
－ on function block panel (Equal
N digits [0,5]
parameter to 3 as default)
MV high limit Operation Value range
MVH TRUE
value parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
MV low limit Operation Value range
MVL TRUE
value parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
SV high limit Operation Value range
SVH TRUE
value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
SV low limit Operation Value range
SVL TRUE
Limits value parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output
Rate variety
limit value.
Used to Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
prevent the MV parameter
from overlarge
modification in
a short time.
Direct/Reverse
action select
switch. SV is
not changed,
the MV
Direct/R
Increases with SWPN=OFF equal to direct
everse Operation
SWPN the increasing TRUE action; SWPN=ON equal to
Switch parameter
of PV in Direct reverse action
Settings
action, and
decreases with
the increasing
of PV in
reverse action.
Extended Base Function block Connect to BKOUT of
BKIN － Input pin
Parameters Input Pin feedback input downstream block
Settings Function block
BKINER Connect to BKOUTERR of
feedback － Input pin
R downstream block
status input
The measured
PV value of loop － Input pin Connect to AI
Control object
The cascade Connect to MV of upstream
CSV － Input pin
setpoint block
Tracking
input(MV=TV Connect to AI
TV － Input pin
when tracking Related parameter: SWTR
status)
Tracking
selecting
switch.MV
Use to upstream interlock
track TV when
SWTR － Input pin condition input
SWTR=ON;
Related parameter: TV
Do not track
when
SWTR=OFF

756
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Output
compensating Connect feedforward signal
OA value. Use to － Input pin AI. Related parameters are
feedforward OK and OB
control
Advance Actuator
d Input feedback
MF － Input pin Connect to AI
Pin value. Use to
Settings monitoring
Input
compensating
value. Use to
Connect to AI. Refer to
improve
IA － Input pin 2.1.2; Related parameter
controllability
IK and IB.
of procedure
with long dead
zone time.
MAN/AUTO
switch for
program
control. The Connect to output of
program Man upstream block.
PSWAM － Input pin
control when Significance when
PSWAM=OFF; MAN_OPT=ON
program AUTO
control when
PSWAM=ON
The SV/CSV
selecting
switch for
program Connect to output of
control. Adopt upstream block.
PSWSV － Input pin
SV when Significance when
PSWSV=OFF; SV_OPT=ON
adopt CSV
when
PSWSV=ON
MAN/AUTO
control source
select switch. If
MAN_OPT=O
N then
MAN/AUTO
Connect to output of
select switch is
MAN_O upstream block.
controlled by － Input pin
PT Related parameter
the PSWAM; if
PSWAM and SWAM
MAN_OPT=O
FF then
MAN/AUTO
select switch is
controlled by
SWAM

757
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

SV/CSV
control source
select switch. If
it is ON then
SV/CSV select
Connect to output of
switch is
upstream block.
SV_OPT controlled by － Input pin
Related parameter PSWSV
the PSWSV; if
and SWSV
it is OFF then
SV/CSV select
switch is
controlled by
the SWSV.
Switch of
closedown
increase for
MV(MV can Connect to upstream block
SWINC not increase). － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
increase when
SWINC=ON
Switch of
closedown
decrease for
MV(MV can Connect to upstream block
SWDEC not increase). － Input pin out. It is active when block
Carry out is AUTO/CAS status.
closedown
decrease when
SWDEC=ON
Switch for MV
Connect to upstream block
hold. The MV
HOLD － Input pin out. It is active when block
hold when
is AUTO/CAS status.
HOLD=ON
Function block
MV － Output pin Connect to AO
output value
Connect to upstream block
Function block
BKIN
BKOUT feedback value － Output pin
Related parameter is
output
BK_OPT
Function block
BKOUT Connect to upstream block
feedback － Output pin
Output ERR BKINERR
status output
Pin
Select switch
for BKOUT
value. If
BK_OPT=ON Configurati
Related parameter is
BK_OPT then BKOUT － on
BKOUT
track parameter
measured
value else
track setpoint.

758
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

when T decreases, the
Setting
response speed of system
parameter. T
becomes faster, but the
can be
Operation stability reduces. When T
T regarded as TRUE
parameter increases, the response
the time
speed of system becomes
constant of
slower, while the stability
closed-loop
increases
Model
SMITH parameter. Operation
Param L TRUE －
Object time parameter
Settings constant
Model
parameter.
Operation
D Object pure TRUE －
parameter
hysteresis time
constant
Model
Operation
K parameter. TRUE －
parameter
Object gain
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
parameter
Stand-by work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode parameter
ON=auto
Configurati
MODE_ return,
－ on Refer to 2.1.1
OPT OFF=manual
parameter
return (default)
Manual and
auto switch: Operation It is active for
SWAM －
OFF=manual, parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Suto/ cascade
selection: Operation It is active for
SWSV －
OFF=auto, parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Operator Whether to
Comma equal to preset
nd MV value
when switch to
aoto status.
PMV enable
switch. When Operation
SWPMV TRUE Related parameter is PMV
SWPMV=ON, parameter
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decre
ase are
disabled
Preset MV
when switching
from
Operation
PMV OOS/IMAN/TR TRUE It is active for SWPMV=ON
parameter
/MAN modes
to AUTO or
CAS mode

759
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Setpoint for Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
loop control parameter
Operator Manual output Operation When manual mode, MV=
Data MANMV －
value parameter MANMV
Monitoring
EI error － Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
PV HH alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV H alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV L alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
PV LL alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value parameter
Measured
Operation
PVHYS value alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
parameter
hysteresis
Deviation Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
alarm set value parameter
Input Deviation
Operation
Alarm DLHYS alarm hystersis TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
Settings value
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient parameter
Deviation filter
Operation
TSV time TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
constant(s)
Valve position
Operation Related parameter: NMF.
NMFLIM negative error TRUE
parameter Refer to 2.1.6
thresholds
Valve position
Operation Related parameter: PMF
PMFLIM positive error TRUE
parameter Refer to 2.1.6
thresholds
Valve position
TMFHY Operation
error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
S parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
operation,
Advance when
Calculati BYPASS=ON, When cascade adjusting,
Operation
on BYPASS excise PID TRUE used to excise inner loop
parameter
Settings calculation, when it fails
switch SV to
MV directly for
output
Enable switch,
when
Operation
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE Related parameter: DB
parameter
deadband
enable
Deadband Operation It is active when
DB TRUE
band size parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband
Operation
DBHYS band TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
hysteresis

760
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Control output
type:
Configurati
OUT_O OFF=position
－ on Related parameter: MV
PT type,
parameter
ON=increment
type
PVHHIN PVHH alarm Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
PV L limit
Monitoring
PVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
PV LL limit
PVLLIN Monitoring
alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
SV L limit
Alarm Monitoring
SVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
indication
MV positive
DMVHIN Monitoring
rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication
MV negative
DMVLIN Monitoring
rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
D parameter
indication
Valve position
error negative Monitoring
NMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm parameter
indication
Valve position
error positive Monitoring
PMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm parameter
indication
Compen Input
Operation
sation IK compensation TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
parameter
Settings gain
Input
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
parameter
bias value

761
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

Output
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
gain
Output
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
parameter
bias value
MV manual Set MV manual fast
fast Operation increase/decrease
SMV TRUE
increase/decre parameter percentage in function
ase value (%) block properties settings
Set SV manual slow
SV slow
Operation increase/decrease
Fase/Slo FMV increase/decre TRUE
parameter percentage in function
w/Increa ase value (%)
block properties settings
se/Decre
ase Set SV manual fast
SV fast
Settings Operation increase/decrease
SSV increase/decre TRUE
parameter percentage in function
ase value (%)
block properties settings
MV manual Set MV manual fast
fast Operation increase/decrease
FSV TRUE
increase/decre parameter percentage in function
ase value (%) block properties settings
Extended
Configurati
range
HORLIM － on Refer to 2.1.5
maximum
Extende parameter
percentage
d Range
Settings Extended
Configurati
range
LORLIM － on Refer to 2.1.5
minimum
parameter
percentage
SV ramp
function
switch. When
changing set
value, incline it
SV to SV Related parameter: RAMP
Advance SWRAM Operation
according to TRUE active when in automatic or
Settings P parameter
the set RAMP cascade mode
(s).
OFF=SV ramp
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
Ramp Operation Related parameter:
RAMP TRUE
coefficient parameter SWRAMP

762
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application reference

SV track PV
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/ SV=range limit when PV
SVL, SV= exceeds SVH and SVL, to
Configurati
SVTR_O range limit. prevent the inteference
－ on
PT used to generated with the MV
parameter
prevent the output when control mode
output MV is modified. Refer to 2.1.3
from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Alarm Operation
AOF module alarm, TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled parameter
on=prohibit to
and
Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
parameter
s
FLAG Flag code － Output pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function block Set as ON at the first time
Operation
SWOOS disable TRUE of function block
parameter
(ON=disable) downloading
Output value in Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
OOS status parameter OOS_OPT=ON
Output value
type in OOS
OOS
status. when
Settings
OOS_OPT
=ON, Configurati
OOS_O
MV=OOSVAL, － on Refer to 1.1.1
PT
when parameter
OOS_OPT
=OFF,
maintain the
MV

763
 Function Block Reference

13.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

The SMITH function block face plate parameters same as the PID function block except “SMITH”
page parameters. The “SMITH” page parameters shown as follow.

764
 Function Block Reference

Table 13-11 Panel parameter instruction of SMITH

Function Block Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Name Value Range
Set the HH limit alarm value of
Preference 100.00 [SVSCL,SV
HH PVHH loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
0 SCH]
means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the H limit alarm value of
[SVSCL,SV
H PVH 90.000 loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
SCH]
means enable, or it is disbled.)
PV
Alarm Set the L limit alarm value of
[SVSCL,SV
(%) L PVL 10.000 loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
SCH]
means enable, or it is disbled.)
Set the LL limit alarm value of
[SVSCL,SV
LL PVLL 0.000 loop PV. (Selecting the alarm
SCH]
means enable, or it is disbled.)
ALARM HYSTERESIS VALUE
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
OF PV
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop SV. (Selecting the alarm
[SVSCL,SV
H SVH 40.000 means enable, or it is disbled.)
SCH]
Note: SV limit will not be
SV
affected by the selection.
Limits
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
loop SV. (Selecting the alarm
[SVSCL,SV
L SVL 0.000 means enable, or it is disbled.)
SCH]
Note: SV limit will not be
affected by the selection.
Set the H limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
100.00 [MVSCL,M
H MVH means enable, or it is disbled.)
0 VSCH]
Note: MV limit will not be
MV affected by the selection.
Limits
(%) Set the L limit alarm value of
loop MV. (Selecting the alarm
[MVSCL,M
L MVL 0.000 means enable, or it is disbled.)
VSCH]
Note: MV limit will not be
affected by the selection.

765
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Name Value Range
Read-only. EI=
EI EI 0.000 － SV-PV(Selecting the alarm
means enable, or it is disbled.)
PEI
(Sel Selecting positive deviation
－ － －
ecte alarm means enabled.
d)
EI NEI
Alarm (Sel Selecting negative deviation
(%) － － －
ecte alarm means enabled.
d)
± (Range H
100.00 Limit –
DL DL SV of Deviation alarm
0 Range L
Limit)
DLH
DLHYS 0.000 － Hysteresis value of bias alarm
YS
100.00 Selecting positive deviation
PMF PMFLIM －
0 alarm means enabled.
MF
Alarm 100.00 Selecting negative deviation
NMF NMFLIM －
(%) 0 alarm means enabled.
TMF
TMFHYS 0.000 － SV of lag time
HYS
DMV
H
Selecting the positive velocity
(Sel － － －
alarm means enabled.
ecte
MV d)
Veloci
ty DMV
Limits L
Selecting the negative velocity
(%) (Sel － － －
alarm means enabled.
ecte
d)
DMV 100.00
DMVLIM － SV of loop MV velocity limit
LIM 0
SMITH Read-only. It can be set in
K K 1.000
configuration or program.
Model
Para 100.00 Read-only. It can be set in
L L
meter 0 configuration or program.
Read-only. It can be set in
D D 0.000
configuration or program.
Ena
ble
Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel SWDB －
configuration or program.
ecte
d)
Disa
Dead
ble
band Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel SWDB √
(%) configuration or program.
ecte
d)
Read-only. It can be set in
DB DB 0.000
configuration or program.
DBH Read-only. It can be set in
DBHYS 0.000
YS configuration or program.

766
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Name Value Range
Tunin
g Read-only. It can be set in
T T 200
Para configuration or program.
meter
Ena
ble
Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel SWRAMP －
configuration or program.
ecte
d)
SV
Ramp Disa
Action ble
Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel SWRAMP √
configuration or program.
ecte
d)
RAM 100.00 Read-only. It can be set in
RAMP
P 0 configuration or program.
Dire
ct
Contr Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel SWPN －
ol configuration or program.
ecte
Directi
d)
on
Rev Read-only. It can be set in
SWPN √
erse configuration or program.
Run
(Sel Read-only. It can be set in
BYPASS √
ecte configuration or program.
SMIT d)
H Bypa
Action ss
Read-only. It can be set in
(Sel BYPASS －
configuration or program.
ecte
d)
Others Input Read-only. It can be set in
IA IA 0.000 －
Comp configuration or program.
ensati IK IK 1.000 － Input compensation gain
on
(%) IB IB 0.000 － Input compensation bias value
Outpu OA OA 0.000 － Read-only, feedforward signal
t
OK OK 1.000 － Output compensation gain
Comp
ensati
Output compensation bias
on DB DB 0.000 －
value
(%)
Bias KSV KSV 1.000 0~100 Bias filter coefficient
Alarm
Filter
Settin TSV TSV 0.000 0~1000s Constant between errors (s)
gs
Feedb Read-only. It can be set in
PV BK_OPT － －
ack configuration or program.
Outpu
t Read-only. It can be set in
SV BK_OPT √ －
Track configuration or program.
SV Trac Read-only. It can be set in
SVTR_OPT √ －
Track k configuration or program.

767
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Initial Value

Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Name Value Range
Not
Read-only. It can be set in
Trac SVTR_OPT － －
configuration or program.
k
MAN_ Pan Read-only. It can be set in
MAN_OPT √ －
OPT el configuration or program.
Settin Prog Read-only. It can be set in
gs MAN_OPT － －
ram configuration or program.
SV_O Pan Read-only. It can be set in
SV_OPT － －
PT el configuration or program.
Settin Prog Read-only. It can be set in
gs SV_OPT √ －
ram configuration or program.
Read-only. Track the input
TV (%) TV 0.000 －
value (%).
13.4.3 Flag
Table 13-12 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
ALARM FOR MV POSITIVE VELOCITY AMPLITUDE
D22
LIMITING (DMVH)
ALARM FOR MV NEGATIVE VELOCITY AMPLITUDE
D23
LIMITING (DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

768
 Function Block Reference

13.4.4 Programming Example For Apply

The programming method refer to 2.2.3

13.4.5 Matters Need Attention

 The processes are looked as first-order lag objects in this controller, that is

K
 G (s)  e  Ds
Ls  1
 K is the object gain, L is the time constant for the object, D is the pure lag time of the
object.
 Model parameters K, L, D should be set in function blocks when in application. The
more accurate the model parameters are, the better the control effect would be.
Intending control effect may be not reached without accurate model parameters.
 Controller need to tune parameter T, which can be regarded as the time constant of
closed-loop systems. Therefore, when T decreases, the response speed of system
becomes faster, but the stability reduces. When T increases, the response speed of
system becomes slower, while the stability increases.

13.5 Branches Balance Control of Oil Furnace Function Block

(BALANCE8)

Function block (BALANCE) balance controls 8 branches at most. Tube-type heating furnace is the
most common heating furnace in production of oil refining &chemical industry, which costs about
10% of the equipment investment. It is used to heat the oil in the furnace to the required
temperature and then go on with fractional distillation, cracking and reactions in the next process
equipment. Because of the large amount of oil to be heated, it is usually divided into multiple
branches in heating furnace. As the combustion in the furnace chamber is uneven and the heat
transfer characteristics of each branch tube is different, outlet temperature of each branch is also
different, which has a great effect on the level operation of the downstream atmospheric tower.
Therefore, the Crude Oil Unit Furnace outlet temperature balance is an important control target
aim, which is of great importance to production safety and reducing energy consumption.

The BALANCE8 is complex function block. The block performance period is 2000μs.

769
Function Block Reference

770
 Function Block Reference

13.5.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-13 Parameter instruction list

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Input Parameter
0/
Header pipe
FTTL REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
flow
urable
0/
FTTLSE Set Header
REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
T pipe flow
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS1 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 1
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS2 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 2
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS3 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 3
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS4 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 4
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS5 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 5
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS6 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 6
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS7 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 7
urable
0/
Branch flow
FPASS8 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
PV 8
urable
Branch 0/
TPASS1 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
1 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS2 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
2 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS3 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
3 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS4 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
4 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS5 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
5 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS6 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
6 urable

771
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Branch 0/
TPASS7 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
7 urable
Branch 0/
TPASS8 REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
8 urable
0/
Temperature
TCS1 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 1
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS2 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 2
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS3 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 3
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS4 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 4
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS5 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 5
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS6 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 6
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS7 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 7
urable
0/
Temperature
TCS8 REAL Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
in furnace 8
urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN1 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 1 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN2 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 2 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN3 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 3 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN4 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 4 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN5 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 5 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN6 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 6 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN7 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 7 urable
Feedback of 0/
BKIN8 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 8 urable

772
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R1 branch flow
urable
SV 1
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R2 branch flow
urable
SV 2
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R3 branch flow
urable
SV 3
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R4 branch flow
urable
SV 4
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R5 branch flow
urable
SV 5
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R6 branch flow
urable
SV 6
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R7 branch flow
urable
SV 7
Status
0/
BKINER feedback of
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R8 branch flow
urable
SV 8
0/
FTTLER HeaderPipe
BOOL Non-config OFF No Yes No
R flow fault
urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
1
1 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
2
2 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
3
3 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
4
4 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
5
5 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
6
6 fault urable

773
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
7
7 fault urable
Branch 0/
TPSERR
BOOL temperature Non-config OFF No Yes No
8
8 fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 1 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R1
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 2 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R2
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 3 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R3
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 4 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R4
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 5 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R5
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 6 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R6
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 7 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R7
fault urable
Temperature 0/
TCSER
BOOL in furnace 8 Non-config OFF No Yes No
R8
fault urable
Output
Paramet
er
Feedback of 0/
FPSET1 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 1 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET2 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 2 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET3 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 3 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET4 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 4 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET5 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 5 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET6 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 6 urable
Feedback of 0/
FPSET7 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 7 urable

774
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Feedback of 0/
FPSET8 REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV 8 urable
0/
BKOUT REAL BKOUT Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
urable
0/
BKOUT
BOOL BKOUTERR Non-config OFF No Yes No
ERR
urable
Monitori
ng
Paramet
er
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R21 2-branch
urable
balance 1
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R21
2-branch urable
balance 1
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R22 2-branch
urable
balance 2
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R22
2-branch urable
balance 2
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R41 4-branch
urable
balance 1
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R41
4-branch urable
balance 1
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R23 2-branch
urable
balance 3
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R23
2-branch urable
balance 3
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R24 2-branch
urable
balance 4

775
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R24
2-branch urable
balance 4
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R42 4-branch
urable
balance 2
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R42
4-branch urable
balance 2
Maximum
0/
FMAXE flow error of
REAL Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R8 8-branch
urable
balance
Maximum
temperature 0/
TMAXE
REAL error of Non-config 100.0 No Yes No
R8
8-branch urable
balance
0/
USIN Current work
MODE Non-config 0 No Yes No
T mode
urable
0/
USIN Standby
IMODE Non-config 0 No Yes No
T work mode
urable
Branch 0/
RUN_ST UDIN
running Non-config 0 No Yes No
AT T
status urable
Whether
0/
USIN output can
PERMIT Non-config 0 No Yes No
T manually set
urable
Bit0
0/
UDIN
FLAG Flag Non-config 0 No Yes No
T
urable
Actual SV
value of 0/
MODE_
REAL model Non-config 0.0 No Yes No
SV
method urable
branch
5/
Select OOS
SWOOS BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
status
e
Cascade
select
switch: 5/
SWSV BOOL OFF= Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
non-cascade e
, ON=
cascade

776
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
5/
Select
SWAM BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
auto/manual
e
2-branch 5/
SW21 BOOL balance 1 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
2-branch 5/
SW22 BOOL balance 2 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
4-branch 5/
SW41 BOOL balance 1 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
2-branch 5/
SW23 BOOL balance 3 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
2-branch 5/
SW24 BOOL balance 4 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
4-branch 5/
SW42 BOOL balance 2 Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
6-branch 5/
SW6 BOOL balance Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
8-branch 5/
SW8 BOOL balance Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
switch e
Select
control
method, 0=
differential 5/
SWMOD USIN
method, 1= Configurabl 0 Yes Yes Yes
E T
model e
method, 2=
average
method
5/
Module
AOF BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
alarm shield
e
Troubleshoot
ing mode,
OFF: only
5/
influence
SWFAIL BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
fault branch
e
ON: all
branches
exit switch
5/
Enable feed
SWFF BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
forward
e
5/
SWDEB
BOOL Debug mode Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
UG
e

777
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Average
method,
5/
SWAME OFF= output
BOOL Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
ND non-balance,
e
ON= - output
balance
Positive and
negative 5/
SWPN BOOL action, ON= Configurabl OFF Yes Yes Yes
negative e
action
Operatio
n
Paramet
er
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
1
branch flow e
SV 1
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
1
branch flow e
SV 1
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L1 branch flow
e
SV 1
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2
branch flow e
SV 2
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
2
branch flow e
SV 2
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L2 branch flow
e
SV 2
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
3
branch flow e
SV 3
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
3
branch flow e
SV 3

778
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L3 branch flow
e
SV 3
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
4
branch flow e
SV 4
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
4
branch flow e
SV 4
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L4 branch flow
e
SV 4
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
5
branch flow e
SV 5
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
5
branch flow e
SV 5
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L5 branch flow
e
SV 5
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
6
branch flow e
SV 6
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
6
branch flow e
SV 6
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L6 branch flow
e
SV 6
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
7
branch flow e
SV 7
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
7
branch flow e
SV 7

779
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L7 branch flow
e
SV 7
Feedback
output high 5/
FPSETH
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
8
branch flow e
SV 8
Feedback
output low 5/
FPSETL
REAL limit of Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
8
branch flow e
SV 8
Feedback
5/
FPSETV rate limit of
REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
L8 branch flow
e
SV 8
2-branch 5/
K211 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K212 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K213 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
2-branch 5/
K221 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K222 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K223 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
2-branch 5/
K411 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K412 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K413 REAL balance 1 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
2-branch 5/
K231 REAL balance 3 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K232 REAL balance 3 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K233 REAL balance 3 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e

780
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
2-branch 5/
K241 REAL balance 4 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K242 REAL balance 4 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K243 REAL balance 4 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
4-branch 5/
K421 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
2-branch 5/
K422 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
2-branch 5/
K423 REAL balance 2 Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
8-branch 5/
K81 REAL balance Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
coefficient 1 e
8-branch 5/
K82 REAL balance Configurabl 0.5 Yes Yes No
coefficient 2 e
8-branch 5/
K83 REAL balance Configurabl 20 Yes Yes No
coefficient 3 e
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
21
2-branch e
balance 1
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
21
2-branch e
balance 1
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
22
2-branch e
balance 2
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
22
2-branch e
balance 2
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
41
4-branch e
balance 1

781
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
41
4-branch e
balance 1
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
23
2-branch e
balance 3
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
23
2-branch e
balance 3
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
24
2-branch e
balance 4
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
24
2-branch e
balance 4
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
42
4-branch e
balance 2
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
42
4-branch e
balance 2
Flow
deviation 5/
FERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
8
8-branch e
balance
Flow
deviation 5/
TERLMT
REAL limit of Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
8
8-branch e
balance
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT21 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 1
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT21 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 1

782
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT22 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 2
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT22 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 2
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT41 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
4-branch
e
balance 1
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT41 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
4-branch
e
balance 1
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT23 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 3
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT23 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 3
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT24 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 4
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT24 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
2-branch
e
balance 4
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT42 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
4-branch
e
balance 2
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT42 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
4-branch
e
balance 2
Output high
5/
limit of
HLMT8 REAL Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
8-branch
e
balance
Output low
5/
limit of
LLMT8 REAL Configurabl -100.0 Yes Yes No
8-branch
e
balance
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
1
parameter of e
branch 1

783
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE1 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 1
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
1
parameter of e
branch 1
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
2
parameter of e
branch 2
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE2 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 2
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
2
parameter of e
branch 2
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
3
parameter of e
branch 3
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE3 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 3
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
3
parameter of e
branch 3
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
4
parameter of e
branch 4
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE4 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 4
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
4
parameter of e
branch 4

784
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
5
parameter of e
branch 5
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE5 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 5
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
5
parameter of e
branch 5
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
6
parameter of e
branch 6
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE6 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 6
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
6
parameter of e
branch 6
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
7
parameter of e
branch 7
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE7 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 7
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
7
parameter of e
branch 7
Average
method 5/
PB_AVE
REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
8
parameter of e
branch 8
Average
method 5/
TI_AVE8 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 8

785
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Average
method 5/
TD_AVE
REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
8
parameter of e
branch 8
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF1 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 1
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF1 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 1
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF1 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 1
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF2 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 2
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF2 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 2
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF2 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 2
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF3 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 3
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF3 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 3
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF3 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 3
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF4 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 4

786
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF4 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 4
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF4 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 4
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF5 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 5
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF5 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 5
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF5 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 5
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF6 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 6
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF6 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 6
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF6 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 6
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF7 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 7
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF7 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 7
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF7 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 7

787
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Feed
forward 5/
PB_FF8 REAL proportion Configurabl 100.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 8
Feed
forward 5/
TI_FF8 REAL integral Configurabl 20.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 8
Feed
forward 5/
TD_FF8 REAL differential Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
parameter of e
branch 8
5/
Temperature
TPS_DB REAL Configurabl 0.0 Yes Yes No
dead zone
e
Model 5/
KPM1 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 1 e
Model 5/
TPM1 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 1 e
Model 5/
LPM1 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 1 e
Model 5/
KPM2 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 2 e
Model 5/
TPM2 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 2 e
Model 5/
LPM2 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 2 e
Model 5/
KPM3 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 3 e
Model 5/
TPM3 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 3 e
Model 5/
LPM3 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 3 e
Model 5/
KPM4 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 4 e
Model 5/
TPM4 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 4 e
Model 5/
LPM4 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 4 e

788
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Model 5/
KPM5 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 5 e
Model 5/
TPM5 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 5 e
Model 5/
LPM5 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 5 e
Model 5/
KPM6 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 6 e
Model 5/
TPM6 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 6 e
Model 5/
LPM6 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 6 e
Model 5/
KPM7 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 7 e
Model 5/
TPM7 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 7 e
Model 5/
LPM7 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 7 e
Model 5/
KPM8 REAL coefficient K Configurabl 1.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 8 e
Model 5/
TPM8 REAL coefficient T Configurabl 10.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 8 e
Model 5/
LPM8 REAL coefficient L Configurabl 2.0 Yes Yes No
of branch 8 e
5/
Estimated
PSTEP REAL Configurabl 20 Yes No No
steps
e
5/
Sampling
TC UINT Configurabl 1.0 Yes No No
cycle
e
adjust
parameter
by reference 5/
LAMD REAL of contrail Configurabl 0.779 Yes No No
dynamic e
response
velocity [0,1]
Alarm
Paramet
er

789
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
5/
UDIN Alarm
ENALM Configurabl 0 Yes Yes No
T Enable
e
Configur
ation
Paramet
er
High limit of 0/
FTTLSC
REAL header pipe Non-config 100.0 No No No
H
flow urable
Low limit of 0/
FTTLSC
REAL header pipe Non-config 0.0 No No No
L
flow urable
High limit of 0/
FPSCH REAL branch flow Non-config 100.0 No No No
PV urable
Low limit of 0/
FPSCL REAL branch flow Non-config 0.0 No No No
PV urable
Branch 0/
TPSCH REAL temperature Non-config 100.0 No No No
high limit urable
Branch 0/
TPSCL REAL temperature Non-config 0.0 No No No
low limit urable
Temperature 0/
TCSSC
REAL in furnace Non-config 100.0 No No No
H
high limit urable
Temperature 0/
TCSSCL REAL in furnace Non-config 0.0 No No No
low limit urable
Unit of 0/
EUTY
FTTLEU header pipe Non-config 0 No No No
PE
flow urable
Unit of 0/
EUTY
FPEU branch flow Non-config 0 No No No
PE
PV urable
Branch 0/
EUTY
TPEU temperature Non-config 0 No No No
PE
unit urable
Temperature 0/
EUTY
TCSEU in furnace Non-config 0 No No No
PE
unit urable
Header pipe 0/
FFTLDL USIN
flow decimal Non-config 3 No Yes No
EN T
digits [0,5] urable
Branch flow 0/
USIN
FPDLEN PV decimal Non-config 3 No Yes No
T
digits [0,5] urable
Branch
0/
USIN temperature
TPDLEN Non-config 3 No Yes No
T decimal
urable
digits [0,5]

790
 Function Block Reference

Panel Confirm
Upload Extend
Name Type Description Operation Default Panel
Parameter Parameter
Authority Operation
Temperature
0/
TCSDLE USIN in furnace
Non-config 3 No Yes No
N T decimal
urable
digits [0,5]
2-branch,
0/
RUN_M USIN 4-branch,
Non-config 0 No No No
ODE T 6-branch,
urable
8-branch
ON= auto 0/
MODE_
BOOL back, OFF= Non-config OFF No No No
OPT
manual back urable

13.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

The function block panel include: branch temperature alarm page, furnace tube surface
temperature alarm page, input rate alarm page etc. branch model coefficient page shown as
follow.

791
Function Block Reference

792
Function Block Reference

793
Function Block Reference

794
Function Block Reference

795
Function Block Reference

796
 Function Block Reference

Table 13-14 Panel parameter instruction of BALANCE8

Function
Initial
Panel Parameter Block Range Application
Value
Parameter
Branch
TPASS1～ Branch temperature is
temperature, 0.0 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
8 overlimit, shown as red.
branches 1~8
Branch flow output, FPSET1～ [FTTLSCL, If branch BKINERR= ON,
0.0
Major panel branches 1~8 8 FTTLSCH] the frame is red.
[FTTLSCL, If header pipe flow PV has
Header pipe flow FTTL 0.000
FTTLSCH] fault, the frame is red.
Set header pipe [FTTLSCL, Read-only, can be set in
FTTLSET 0.000
flow FTTLSCH] configuration or program.
Temperature
Preference deviation dead TPS_DB 0.0 -
zone

797
 Function Block Reference

Function
Initial
Panel Parameter Block Range Application
Value
Parameter
If the temperature fault is
Temperature in ON, the frame is red. Fault
furnace, branches TCS1～8 0.0 parameter corresponding to
1~8 TCS1 is TCSERR1, others
are in the same way.
Branch flow PV, FPASS1～
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH] -
branches 1~8 FPASS8
RUN_MO
Balance mode 0 - -
DE
Control mode SWMODE 0 - -
Positive and
SWPN OFF - -
negative action
Troubleshooting SWFAIL OFF - -
MODE_O
Restore fault OFF - -
PT
Flow
Branch EI FERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
1 0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 1 configuration or program.
2-branch n
balance Temper
1 ature TERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 1 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 1 configuration or program.
n
Flow
FERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
2 0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 2 configuration or program.
2-branch n
balance Temper
2 ature TERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 2 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 2 configuration or program.
n
2-branch Flow
FERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
balance deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
3 0 deviation limit
3 n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 3 configuration or program.
n

798
 Function Block Reference

Function
Initial
Panel Parameter Block Range Application
Value
Parameter
Temper
ature TERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 3 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 3 configuration or program.
n
Flow
FERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
4 0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 4 configuration or program.
2-branch n
balance Temper
4 ature TERLMT2 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 4 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER2 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 4 configuration or program.
n
Flow
FERLMT4 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
1 0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER4 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 1 configuration or program.
4-branch n
balance Temper
1 ature TERLMT4 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 1 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER4 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 1 configuration or program.
n
Flow
FERLMT4 100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio [FPSCL,FPSCH]
2 0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um FMAXER4 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio 2 configuration or program.
4-branch n
balance Temper
2 ature TERLMT4 100.00 Parameter SV of
[TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 2 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um TMAXER4 Read-only, can be set in
0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 2 configuration or program.
n

799
 Function Block Reference

Function
Initial
Panel Parameter Block Range Application
Value
Parameter
Flow
100.00 Parameter SV of flow
deviatio FERLMT8 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
0 deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um Read-only, can be set in
FMAXER8 0.000 [FPSCL,FPSCH]
deviatio configuration or program.
8-branch
n
balance/
6-branch Temper
balance ature 100.00 Parameter SV of
TERLMT8 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio 0 temperature deviation limit
n limit
Maxim
um Read-only, can be set in
TMAXER8 0.000 [TPSCL,TPSCH]
deviatio configuration or program.
n
High Branch FPSETL1
100.0 - -
limit es 1~8 ～8
Flow output Branch FPSETL1
limit Low limit 0.0 - -
es 1~8 ～8
Rate Branch FPSETVL
100.0 - -
limit es 1~8 1～8
Differential Output
HLMT21～
method high 100.0 - -
HLMT24
coefficient limit
Output
LLMT21～
low -100.0 - -
2-branch LLMT24
limit
balance
K211～
1~4 K1 100.0 - -
K241
K212～
K2 0.5 - -
K242
K213～
K3 20.0 -
K243
Output
HLMT41～
high 100.0 - -
HLMT42
limit
Output
LLMT41～
low -100.0 - -
4-branch LLMT42
limit
balance
K411～
1~2 K1 100.0 - -
K421
K412～
K2 0.5 - -
K422
K413～
K3 20.0 -
K423
2-branch Output
balance high HLMT8 100.0 - -
limit
Output
low LLMT8 -100.0 - -
limit
K1 K81 100.0 - -

800
 Function Block Reference

Function
Initial
Panel Parameter Block Range Application
Value
Parameter
K2 K82 0.5 - -
K3 K83 20.0 - -
Branch
1~ KPM1～
K 1.0 - -
branch KPM8
8
Branch
1~ TPM1～
T 10.0 - -
branch TPM8
8
Branch
1~ LPM1～
Branch L 2.0 - -
branch LPM8
model 8
coefficient
Estimat
ed PSTEP 20 - -
steps
Estimate
d Sampli
paramet ng TC 1.0 - -
er cycle
settings Adjusti
ng
LAMD 0.779
parame
ter
Branch PB_AVE1
1~
P(%) ～ 100.0 - -
branch
PB_AVE8
8
Branch
1~ TI_AVE1～
Average I(s) 20.0 - -
branch TI_AVE8
method 8
parameter
Branch TD_AVE1
1~
D(s) ～ 0.0 - -
branch
TD_AVE8
8
SWAMEN OFF= output non-balance
Output balance OFF -
D ON= output balance
Branch 1~ PB_FF1～
P(%) 100.0 - -
branch 8 PB_FF8
Branch 1~ TI_FF1～
I(s) 20.0 - -
Feed-forwar branch 8 TI_FF8
d parameter Branch 1~ TD_FF1～
D(s) 0.0 - -
branch 8 TD_FF8
OFF= output non-balance
Output balance SWFF OFF -
ON= output balance

13.5.3 Function Block Flag Code

Table 13-15 Flag

Flag Instruction

801
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS
D1 IMAN
D2 MAN
D4 AUTO
D5 CAS
D6 FF
D8 AOF

13.5.4 HMI Parameters

Table 13-16 HMI parameter list

Parameter Instruction Properties

Read-only, default reference parameter
FLAG Flag
of the function block
Function block forbidden
OOS Read/write
mark
AOF Module alarm shield Read/write
IMAN IMAN status Read-only
AUTO Automatic status Read/write
CAS Cascade status Read/write

13.5.5 Define branch running status (RUN_STAT)

Bit Offset Instruction

D0 2-branch in operation
D1 4-branch in operation
D2 6-branch in operation
D3 8-branch in operation

D4 Temperature difference between branch 1 and branch 2

D5 Flow difference between branch 1 and branch 2

D6 Temperature difference between branch 3 and branch 4

D7 Flow difference between branch 3 and branch 4
D8 Temperature difference between branch 5 and branch 6
D9 Flow difference between branch 5 and branch 6
D10 Temperature difference between branch 7 and branch 8
D11 Flow difference between branch 7 and branch 8

802
 Function Block Reference

Bit Offset Instruction

D12 Temperature difference of branches 1~4
D13 Flow difference of branches 1~ 4
D14 Temperature difference of branches 5~ 8
D15 Flow difference of branches 5~ 8
D16 Temperature difference of branches 1~6
D17 Flow difference of branches 1~6
D18 Temperature difference of branches 1~8
D19 Flow difference of branches 1~8

13.5.6 Define Branch Mode (RUN_MODE)

RUN_MODE= 0, branch 1and branch 2 perform balance operation. RUN_MODE= 1, branches

1~4 perform balance operation. RUN_MODE= 2, branches 1~6 perform balance operation.
RUN_MODE= 3, branches 1~8 perform balance operation.

Perform balance operation according to branches in operation currently.

13.5.7 Switch Mode

OOS: useless.
IMAN: trace change of downstream block.
When RUN_MODE= 0, if all BKINERR= ON for branch 1 and branch 2, enter into IMAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 1, if all BKINERR= ON for branches 1~4, enter into IMAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 2, if all BKINERR= ON for branches 1~6, enter into IMAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 3, if all BKINERR= ON for branches 1~ 8, enter into IMAN status.

 If MODE_OPT= auto back, SWAM and SWSV keep the same.

 If MODE_OPT= manual back, SWAM= OFF, SWSV= OFF.

MAN (manual):

 If MODE_OPT= auto back

 If SWFAIL= OFF

 SWAM=ON
When RUN_MODE= 0, if a BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON or all TPS_ ERR= ON for branch
1 and branch 2, enter into MAN status, not perform balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 1, if 3 BKINERR || TPS_ERR= ON or all TPS_ ERR= ON for
branches 1~4, enter into MAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 2, if 5 BKINERR || TPS_ERR= ON or all TPS_ ERR= ON for
branches 1~6, enter into MAN status.

803
 Function Block Reference

When RUN_MODE= 3, if 7 BKINERR || TPS_ERR= ON or all TPS_ ERR= ON for

branches 1~8, enter into MAN status.
 SWAM= OFF
When RUN_MODE= 0, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branch 1 and branch 2, enter
into MAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 1, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~4, enter into MAN
status.
When RUN_MODE= 2, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~6, enter into MAN
status.
When RUN_MODE= 3, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~ 8, enter into MAN
status.

 If SWFAIL= ON

 SWAM= ON
If a channel temperature measurement has fault or BKINERR= ON, enter into MAN
status, not perform balance control.
 SWAM= OFF
When RUN_MODE= 0, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branch 1 and branch 2, enter
into MAN status.
When RUN_MODE= 1, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~4, enter into MAN
status.
When RUN_MODE= 2, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~6, enter into MAN
status.
When RUN_MODE= 3, if at least 1 BKINERR= OFF for branches 1~ 8, enter into MAN
status.
In manual status, not modify SWAM and SWSV values automatically.

 If MODE_OPT= auto back

In manual status, SWAM= OFF , SWSV= OFF.

When SWAM turn from ON to OFF, none branch will switch. In non-debugging mode,
none branch will perform balance control.
In debugging mode, single branch can be switched in manual mode.
AUTO (automatic)

 SWAM= ON, SWSV= OFF

 If SWFAIL= OFF

804
 Function Block Reference

When RUN_MODE= 0
If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branch 1 and branch 2, enter into AUTO mode, and
perform 2-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 1
If 2 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~4, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If one MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~4, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If no BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON, perform 4-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 2
If 4 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 6, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If 3 MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6,
enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If 2 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 4
branches. If 1 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6, enter into AUTO mode,
perform balance control for 5 branches. If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~6, enter into AUTO mode, perform 6-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 3
If 6 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If 5 MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8,
enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If 4 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 4
branches. If 3 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode,
perform balance control for 5 branches. If 2 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 6 branches. If 1 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 7
branches. If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 8, enter into AUTO mode,
perform 8-branch balance control.
 If SWFAIL= ON, a channel temperature measurement has fault or BKINERR= ON,
enter into MAN status, not perform balance control.

 SWAM= ON, SWSV= ON

 If SWFAIL= OFF
When RUN_MODE= 0

805
 Function Block Reference

If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branch 1and branch 2, enter into AUTO mode, and
perform 2-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 1
If 2 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~4, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If one MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~4, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If no BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON, perform 4-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 2
If 4 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 6, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If 3 MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6,
enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If 2 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 4
branches. If 1 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~6, enter into AUTO mode,
perform balance control for 5 branches. If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~6, enter into AUTO mode, perform 6-branch balance control.
When RUN_MODE= 3
If 6 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform
balance control for 2 branches. If 5 MON BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8,
enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 3 branches. If 4 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 4
branches. If 3 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~8, enter into AUTO mode,
perform balance control for 5 branches. If 2 BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches
1~8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 6 branches. If 1 BKINERR ||
TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 8, enter into AUTO mode, perform balance control for 7
branches. If no BKINERR || TPS_ERR=ON for branches 1~ 8, enter into AUTO mode,
perform 8-branch balance control. If SWFAIL= ON, a channel temperature measurement
has fault or BKINERR= ON, enter into MAN status, not perform balance control.

 If MODE_OPT= manual back, SWSV= OFF.

 If MODE_OPT= auto back, not modify SWSV value automatically.

CAS: cascade

Compare header pipe flow and set flow, assign operation results to output values according to
each branch flow.

When RUN_MODE= 0, if any loop BKINERR= ON for branch 1 and branch 2, or exit cascade

806
 Function Block Reference

status if branch temperature PV has fault, enter into MAN status.

When RUN_MODE= 1, if any loop BKINERR= ON for branches 1~4, or exit cascade status if
branch temperature PV has fault, enter into AUTO status.

When RUN_MODE= 2, if any loop BKINERR= ON for branches 1~6, or exit cascade status if
branch temperature PV has fault, enter into AUTO status.

When RUN_MODE= 3, if any loop BKINERR= ON for branches 1~ 8, or exit cascade status if
branch temperature PV has fault, enter into AUTO status.

FF: feed forward

When feed forward, control temperature in furnace. If temperature in furnace has fault, cut the
feed forward of that channel. Feed forward applies present PD control algorithm of proportion
differential.

13.5.8 Programming Instruction For Apply

Reduce pressure branch balance control program shown as follow.

807
 Function Block Reference

13.5.9 Algorithm
Differential method

In differential method, 2 branches form a pair, 4 branches form a group and 8 branches form a set.

 2-branch balance

Figure 13-2 Schematic diagram 1

2-branch balance controls branch flow by PD controller. To PD controller, temperature

feedback of branch 1 is the set value (SV), temperature feedback of branch 2 is process
value (PV), and EI= PV - SV.
2-branch output 1 = BKIN1 + PD controller output,
2-branch output 2 = BKIN2 - PD controller output.
If temperature feedback of branch 1 is greater than that of branch 2, then EI is less than
0. Accordingly PD controller output is also less than 0, so that 2- branch output 1 will
decrease and 2- branch output 2 will increase. Thus two branches will finally reach
balance. And vise versa.

 4- branch balance

4-branch balance controls branch flow by PD controller based on two 2-branch balances.
To 4-branch balance controller, SV = (temperature feedback of branch 1 + temperature
feedback of branch 2)/2, PV = (temperature feedback of branch 3 + temperature
feedback of branch 4)/2, and EI= PV - SV.
4-branch balance output = PD controller output.
2-branch balance 1 output 1 = BKIN1 + 2-branch 1 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance output *K212,
2-branch balance 1 output 2 = BKIN2 - 2-branch 1 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance output *(1-K212),

808
 Function Block Reference

2-branch balance 2 output 1 = BKIN3 + 2-branch 2 PD controller output - 4-branch

balance output *K222,
2-branch balance 2 output 2 = BKIN4 - 2-branch 2 PD controller output - 4-branch
balance output *(1-K222).
If (temperature feedback of branch 1 + temperature feedback of branch 2) >
(temperature feedback of branch 3 + temperature feedback of branch 4), then 4-branch
output < 0. Thereby, 2-branch output 1 and 2 decrease, and 2-branch output 3 and 4
increase.

Figure 13-3 Schematic diagram 2

If any of the 4 branches has fault, enter into 3-branch balance.

For example, branch 1 fault
Balance controller takes branch 2temperature feedback as SV, takes (branch
3temperature feedback+ branch 4temperature feedback)/ 2 as PV, deviation= PV-SV.
4-branch balance output= PD controller output.
2-branch balance 1 output 1= BKIN1
2-branch balance 1 Output 2= BKIN2- 2-branch 1PD controller output+ 4-branch
balance output.

809
 Function Block Reference

2-branch balance 2 Output 1= BKIN3+ 2-branch 2PD controller output- 4-branch

balance output* K222.
2-branch balance 2 Output 2= BKIN4- 2-branch 2PD controller output- 4-branch balance
output* (1- K222).
If any 2 of the 4 branches have fault, enter into 2-branch balance mode.

 6-branch balance

6-branch balance applies PD controller to perform 6-branch flow balance control.

6-branch balance controller takes (branch 1 temperature feedback+ branch 2
temperature feedback+ branch 3 temperature feedback+ branch 4 temperature
feedback)/ 4 as SV, takes (branch 5temperature feedback+ branch 6temperature
feedback)/ 2 as PV, deviation= PV- SV.
6-branch balance output= PD controller output.
2-branch balance 1 output 1
= BKIN1+ 2-branch 1PD controller output+ 4-branch balance 1output* K212+ 8-branch
balance output* K412,
2-branch balance 1 Output 2
= BKIN2- 2-branch 1PD controller output+ 4-branch balance 1 output* (1-K212)+
8-branch balance output* K412,
2-branch balance 2 output 1
= BKIN3+ 2-branch 2PD controller output- 4-branch balance 1 output* K222+ 8-branch
balance output* (1-K412),
2-branch balance 2 Output 2
= BKIN4- 2-branch 2PD controller output- 4-branch balance 1 output* (1- K222)+
8-branch balance output* (1-K412),
2-branch balance 3 output 1
= BKIN5+ 2-branch 3PD controller output+ 4-branch balance 2 output* K232 8-branch
balance output* K422,
2-branch balance 3 Output 2
= BKIN6- 2-branch 3PD controller output+ 4-branch balance 2 output* (1-K232)-
8-branch balance output* K422,
If (branch 1temperature feedback+ branch 2temperature feedback+ branch
3temperature feedback+ branch 4temperature feedback)/4 > (branch 5temperature
feedback+ branch 6temperature feedback)/ 2, 6-branch balance output will be less than

810
 Function Block Reference

0, and 2-branch output 1, 2-branch output2, 2-branch output 3 and 2-branch output 4 will
be decreased, while 2-branch output 5 and 2-branch output 6 will be added.

 8-branch balance

8-branch balance controls branch flow by PD controller. To 8-branch balance controller,

SV = (temperature feedback of branch 1 + temperature feedback of branch 2 +
temperature feedback of branch 3 + temperature feedback of branch 4)/4, PV =
(temperature feedback of branch 5 + temperature feedback of branch 6 + temperature
feedback of branch 7 + temperature feedback of branch 8)/4, and EI= PV - SV.
8-branch balance output = PD controller output.
2-branch balance 1 output 1 = BKIN1 + 2-branch 1 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance 1 output / 2 + 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 1 output 2 = BKIN2 - 2-branch 1 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance 1 output / 2 + 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 2 output 1 = BKIN3 + 2-branch 2 PD controller output - 4-branch
balance 1 output / 2 + 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 2 output 2 = BKIN4 - 2-branch 2 PD controller output - 4-branch
balance 1 output / 2 + 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 3 output 1 = BKIN5 + 2-branch 3 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance 2 output / 2 - 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 3 output 2 = BKIN6 - 2-branch 3 PD controller output + 4-branch
balance 2 output / 2 - 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 4 output 1 = BKIN7 + 2-branch 4 PD controller output - 4-branch
balance 2 output / 2 - 8-branch balance output / 4,
2-branch balance 4 output 2 = BKIN8 - 2-branch 4 PD controller output - 4-branch
balance 2 output / 2 - 8-branch balance output / 4,
If (temperature feedback of branch 1 + temperature feedback of branch 2 + temperature
feedback of branch 3 + temperature feedback of branch 4) > (temperature feedback of
branch 5 + temperature feedback of branch 6 + temperature feedback of branch 7 +
temperature feedback of branch 8), then 8-branch output < 0. Thereby, 2-branch output
1, 2, 3 and 4 decrease, and 2-branch output 5, 6, 7 and 8 increase.

811
 Function Block Reference

Figure 13-4 Schematic diagram 3

Model method

 If 8-branch balance, 4-branch balance 1 and 2 are all switched

812
 Function Block Reference

 branch flow process value i * branch temperature i * ki

SV  i 1
8

 branch flow process value i * ki

i 1

 Model controller

Each branch is approximated as first-order pure time lag by model controller and the
object model is as follows.

Average Method

 2-branch balance

SV= (branch 1 temperature feedback+ branch 2 temperature feedback)/ 2.

MV1= PID (SV- branch 1 temperature feedback).
MV2= PID (SV- branch 2 temperature feedback).
When branch 1 temperature feedback is larger than branch 2 temperature feedback, if
SV is less than branch 1temperature feedback, branch 1 output is decreased, if SV is
larger than branch 2temperature feedback, branch 2 output will be added, vice versa.

 4-branch balance

SV= (branch 1 temperature feedback+ branch 2 temperature feedback +branch 3

temperature feedback+ branch 4 temperature feedback)/ 4.
MV1= PID (SV- branch 1 temperature feedback).
MV2= PID (SV- branch 2 temperature feedback).
MV3= PID (SV- branch 3 temperature feedback).
MV4= PID (SV- branch 4 temperature feedback).

 6-branch balance

SV= (branch 1 temperature feedback+ branch 2 temperature feedback+ branch 3

temperature feedback+ branch 4 temperature feedback+ branch 5 temperature
feedback+ branch 6 temperature feedback)/ 6.
MV1= PID (SV- branch 1 temperature feedback).
MV2= PID (SV- branch 2 temperature feedback).
MV3= PID (SV- branch 3 temperature feedback).

813
 Function Block Reference

MV4 = PID (SV- branch 4 temperature feedback).

MV5= PID (SV- branch 5 temperature feedback).
MV6= PID (SV- branch 6 temperature feedback).

 8-branch balance

SV= (branch 1 temperature feedback+ branch 2 temperature feedback+ branch 3

temperature feedback+ branch 4 temperature feedback+ branch 5 temperature
feedback+ branch 6 temperature feedback + branch 7 temperature feedback+ branch 8
temperature feedback)/ 8.
MV1= PID (SV- branch 1 temperature feedback).
MV2= PID (SV- branch 2 temperature feedback).
MV3= PID (SV- branch 3 temperature feedback).
MV4 = PID (SV- branch 4 temperature feedback).
MV5= PID (SV- branch 5 temperature feedback).
MV6= PID (SV- branch 6 temperature feedback).
MV7= PID (SV- branch 5 temperature feedback).
MV8= PID (SV- branch 6 temperature feedback).

 Output balance process

 SWAMEND= OFF, output non-balance

FPSET1= MV1
...
FPSET8= MV8
Different PID parameters set by each branch will lead to change of branch flow SV
feedback sum.
 SWAMEND= OFF, output balance
Adjust the output to keep the branch flow SV feedback sum as the same. Take all
8-branch balance switching as an example:
AVE = (MV1+...+MV8)/8 - (BKIN1+...+BKIN8)/8

FPSET1= (MV1-AVE )
...
FPSET8= (MV8-AVE )
Alarm

 Output of each balance controller must be between its high limit and low limit in

814
 Function Block Reference

differential method.

 Output of each branch set value must be between its high limit and low limit, and it is
limited by its velocity limit.

13.5.10 Keep Difference (Only Valid for Differential Method)

When branch 1and branch 2 flows have difference, if branch 1 flow is larger, in 2-branch balance,
branch 1 flow cannot be added, while branch 2 flow cannot be decreased. Vice versa.

When branch 1 and branch 2 temperatures have difference, in positive action, if branch 1
temperature is higher, in 2-branch balance, branch 1 temperature cannot be decreased, while
branch 2 temperature cannot be added, vice versa.

When both temperatures and flows of branch 1 and branch 2 have differences, if actions for
branch are opposite, output according to balance operation.

Other branches are similar.

13.5.11 Dead Zone

Differential method:

If temperature deviation is in TPS_DB, not perform operation.

Model method, average method:

Difference of branch temperature and all branch temperature average is in TPS_DB, the branch
output keeps.

13.6 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block(MOTOR_PT)

Function block MOTOR_PT is used for one driver common motor control.

The MOTOR_PT is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

815
 Function Block Reference

13.6.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-1 The MOTOR_PT Parameters Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application

Status Switch for the
Group/Stand-alone
Device selection. If
Basic MA=OFF then motor Connect to upstream
Parameters MA － Input pin
device status is block output
stand-alone control
else it is group
control
Startup Operation
Connect to upstream
MO with Group Control － Input pin
block output
Device
Stop Operation with
Group Control Connect to upstream
MC － Input pin
Device. Active with block output
up jumping signal.
Input Ready. It must be
Connect to upstream
Pin R R=ON when start － Input pin
block output
and running.
Running feedback.
Connect to DI.
If the running time
A － Input pin Related parameter is
over TM and A=OFF
TM and TM1.
then ALM=ON
F Device Fault － Input pin Connect to DI
Connect to upstream
ESTP Emergency stop － Input pin
block output
Technology
Interlock. Set Connect to upstream
LK － Input pin
LK=ON before block output
start-up.
Start Enabled. Set
Connect to upstream
STT STT=ON before － Input pin
block output
start-up.
Device Driver. When
no device stop
Connect to DO. If
alarm, R=ON, SLK
R=OFF, or ALM=ON,
C or LK is ON, － Output pin
or SLK anf LK is OFF
STT=ON, if STR or
all then C=OFF
MO occur up-jump
then C=ON.
Output
Pin Alarm Output. If
R_ALM or A_ALM
ALM － Output pin －
or F is ON then
ALM=ON
Indication of Device
STA － Output pin Data type:UNIT
Status
FLAG Flag code － Output pin
Operati Startup Operation
Operation
on STR with Stand-alone TRUE auto-reset per-cycle
parameter
Param Devic
eter Stop Operation with
Stand-alone Device. Operation
STP TRUE auto-reset per-cycle
Active with parameter
up-jumpimg

816
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application

Operation
CLR Alarm Reset TRUE auto-reset per-cycle
parameter
Release from Operation If CSLK=ON then
SLK TRUE
Technology Interlock parameter SLK=OFF
If running time over TM
Feedback Time of Operation
TM TRUE and A=OFF, then
Response parameter
ALM=ON
If CSLK=ON then Operation
CSLK TRUE －
SLK=OFF parameter
SHSL Hide or Show SLK Operation
TRUE －
K faceplate parameter
When R=ON, if drive
signal disappear and
Eliminating Time of Operation running feedback
TM1 TRUE
Response parameter signal Do not
disappear after TM1
then output A_ALM
Function block is
SWO Operation
OOS Status when TRUE －
OS parameter
SWOOS=ON
Operation
AOF Alarm shield TRUE －
parameter
Operate SLK Operation
MSLK TRUE －
manually, parameter
Alarm Output of
Supervi Ready Lose. If
sion A=ON and R down
R_AL Monitoring
Param jump then － －
M parameter
eter R_ALM=ON; if
CLR=ON then
R_ALM=OFF
Alarm Output of
Running. If C=ON
and A Do not return
inside TM then
A_AL A_ALM=ON; If Monitoring
－ －
M R=ON and C=OFF parameter
and A=ON inside
TM1 then A_ALM＝
ON. If CLR=ON
then A_ALM=OFF
Startup Enable
Status. If STT and R
Monitoring
STO all is ON then allow － －
parameter
STO =ON, else
STO=OFF
Stop Status for
Technology
Interlock. If LK and
Monitoring
LKO SLK is all OFF then － －
parameter
LKO=ON; if LK or
SLK is ON then LKO
= OFF

817
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application

Stop Status for Safe
Interlock. If F=ON
then FO=ON; if
Monitoring the FO=ON when safe
FO F=OFF then FO －
parameter interlock stop status.
hold; if CLR=ON
then clear this
alarm.

Bit definition of STA is as follows

Bit Parameter Description

0 R Ready. If R=ON then this bit is 1; if R=OFF then this bit is 0.
Running. If A=ON then this bit is 1; if A=OFF then this bit is
1 A
0.
Run alarm output. If ALM=ON then this bit is 1; if ALM=OFF
2 ALM
then this bit is 0.
13.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

Table 13-17 Panel parameter instruction of MOTOR_PT

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Run Enable STO － Lights on when STT=ON
Group Control MA － Lights on when MA=ON
State Ready R － Lights on when R=ON
Information Run A － Lights on when A=ON
Fault F － Lights on when F=ON
Drive C － Lights on when C=ON
Alarm Response
A_ALM － Lights on when A_ALM=ON
Information Fault

818
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial
Panel Parameter Name Value Range Application Instruction
Parameter Value
Name
Ready Lose R_ALM － Lights on when R_ALM=ON
Safe Stop FO － Lights on when FO=ON
Process Stop LKO － Lights on when LKO=ON
Start the single machine
Run STR －
(STR=ON)
Stop the single machine
Stop STP －
(STP=ON)
Operate
Reset CLR － Alarm reset
Unlock the technical interlock
Unlock SLK －
(SLK=ON)
Interlock LK √ Technical interlock (LK=ON)
13.6.3 Function Block Flag Code
Table 13-18 Flag

Flag Description Flag Description

Stand-alone device start-up
D0 OOS status (SWOOS) D12
(STR)
D1 group control status(MA) D13 Stand-alone device stop(STP)
Group control device start-up
D2 D14 Alarm reset(CLR)
(MO)
Group control device stop
D3 D15 Relieve of craft interlock(SLK)
(MC)
Condition of relieve of craft
D4 Ready (R) D16
interlock(CSLK)
Show SLK operation panel
D5 Running (A) D17
(SHSLK)
Alarm Output of Ready
D6 Device failure(F) D18
Lose.(R_ALM)
D7 Emergency stop(ESTP) D19 Running alarm output (A_ALM)
D8 Craft interlock(LK) D20 Start-up enable status(STO)
Stop status of craft interlock
D9 Start-up enable(STT) D21
(LKO)
Stop status of safe interlock
D10 Device drive(C) D22
(FO)
D11 Alarm output(ALM) D30 Alarm shield(AOF)
13.6.4 Logic Time Sequencing
Table 13-19 Start-up／stop／alarm logicsequencine list

Device Control Mode Control Element Device Drive Ststus

Group control Start-up R=ON, STT=ON, LK=ON, MO up-jump C=ON
(MA=ON) stop ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or MC up-jump C=OFF
Stand-alone control Start-up R=ON, STT=ON, LK=ON, STR up-jump C=ON
(MA=OFF) stop ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or STP up-jump C=OFF
Alarm status (ALM=ON) F=ON or R=OFF or A=OFF C=OFF

819
 Function Block Reference

13.7 Positive/Negative Rotating Motor Control with Position Limit

Function Block (MOTOR_FM)

Function block MOTOR_FM is used for positive/negative rotating motor control with position limit.

The MOTOR_FM is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

13.7.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-20 The MOTOR_FM Parameters Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Status Switch
Basic for the Connect to upstream
Input Pin GROUP － Input pin
Parameters Group/Stand-al block output
one Device
Positive Startup
Operation with Connect to upstream
G_DF － Input pin
Group Control block output
Device
Reverse
Startup
Connect to upstream
G_DR Operation with － Input pin
block output
Group Control
Device
Stop Operation
Connect to upstream
G_DC with Group － Input pin
block output
Control Device
Ready. Set
R=ON when Connect to upstream
R － Input pin
start-up and block output
running.
Positive run
feedback. After
startup, if not
FRN － Input pin Connect to DI
feedback inside
TM1 then
ALM=ON

820
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Reverse run
feedback. After
startup, if not
RRN － Input pin Connect to DI
feedback inside
TM1 then
ALM=ON
Positive Limit
SQF － Input pin Connect to DI
feedback
Reverse Limit
SQR － Input pin Connect to DI
feedback
Emergency Connect to upstream
ESTP － Input pin
stop block output
F Device Fault － Input pin Connect to DI
Technical
interlock. Set Connect to upstream
LOCK － Input pin
LOCK=ON block output
before startup.
Positive Drive
with Device. if
M_STP=OFF
and DR=OFF
and SQF=OFF
and R=ON and
SLK(or
DF － Output pin
LOCK)=ON
then DF=ON
when
stand-alone/gro
up control
device forward M_STP=ON condition:
signal up-jump ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or
M_DC =ON
Reverse Drive (stand-alone/group
with Device. if control mode)
M_STP=OFF
and DR=OFF
Output and SQF=OFF
Pin and R=ON and
SLK(or
DR － Output pin
LOCK)=ON
then DF=ON
when
stand-alone/gro
up control
device reverse
signal up-jump
Alarm Output. If
R_ALM or
A_ALM or
ALM － Output pin －
S_ALM or F is
ON then
ALM=ON
Indication of
STA － Output pin －
Device Status
FLAG Flag code － Output pin －
Operatio Positive Startup M_DF, M_DR, M_DC,
n Operation with Operation CLR are reset as OFF
M_DF TRUE
Paramet Stand-alone parameter after keeping ON for a
er Device period.

821
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Reverse
Startup
Operation
M_DR Operation with TRUE
parameter
Stand-alone
Device
Stop Operation
with Operation
M_DC TRUE
Stand-alone parameter
Device
Operation
CLR Alarm Reset TRUE
parameter
Release from
Technology
Operation
SLK Interlock. If TRUE －
parameter
CSLK=ON then
SLK=OFF.
Feedback Time After startup, if not have
Operation
TM1 of Response. TRUE ruuning feedback then
parameter
Unit: s output ALM alarm.
Feedback Time If not have limit feedback
Operation
TM2 of Position TRUE after run TM2 then
parameter
Limit. Unit: s ALM=ON
If CSLK=ON, Operation
CSLK TRUE －
then SLK=OFF parameter
Hide or Show Operation
SHSLK TRUE －
SLK panel. parameter
After R=ON and drive
Eliminating signal disappear and
Operation
TM3 Time of TRUE delay TM3, if run signal
parameter
Response not do disappear then
A_ALM=ON
If SWOOS=ON
Operation
SWOOS then block is TRUE －
parameter
OOS mode
Operation
AOF Alarm shield TRUE －
parameter
Operate SLK Operation
MSLK TRUE －
Manually parameter
If ready signal down-jump
Alarm Output of Monitoring then R_ALM＝ON. If
R_ALM －
Supervis Ready Lose. parameter CLR=ON then reset
ion R_ALM.
Paramet Running lose Monitoring
er A_ALM － A_ALM=ON when alarm
Alarm parameter
Position Limit Monitoring
S_ALM － S_ALM=ON when alarm
lose Alarm parameter

Bit definition of STA is as follows

bit parameters description

0 R Ready. If R=ON, this bit is 1. And if R=OFF, the bit is 0.
1 FRN, RRN If only one of them is ON, the bit is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
When RRN, FRN and SQR are all OFF and SQF is ON, the bit is
2 RRN, FRN, SQF, SQR
1. Otherwise, it is 0.

822
 Function Block Reference

When RRN, FRN and SQF are all OFF and SQR is ON, the bit is
3 RRN, FRN , SQF , SQR
1. Otherwise, it is 0.
Running alarm output. If ALM=ON, this bit is 1 and other bits are
4 ALM
all 0. If ALM=OFF, this bit is 0.

Note:

1) If feedback signal of positive run isn”t received (FRN=OFF) within time TM1 after positive
drive with device is delivered, running lose alarm will be generated. When R=ON, if
positive drive signal disappears and feedback signal of positive run does not disappear
(FRN=ON) after time TM3, running lose alarm will be generated too. So does the reverse
case. When alarm reset CLR=ON, alarm will be reset.

2) When positive drive is delivered and positive feedback is received, if positive limit SQF
does not turn OFF within time TM2, position limit lose alarm will be generated. So does
the reverse case. When alarm reset CLR=ON, alarm will be reset.

13.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameters

Table 13-21 Panel parameter instruction of MOTOR_FM

Function
Block Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Value Range
Name
State Combined GROUP － Lights on when GROUP=ON
Information
Ready R － Lights on when R=ON
Positive FRN － Lights on when FRN=ON
Positive DF － Lights on when DF=ON

823
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Value
Panel Parameter Name Application Instruction
Parameter Value Range
Name
Positive SQF － Lights on when SQF=ON
Reverse RRN Lights on when RRN=ON
Reverse DR Lights on when DR=ON
Invert SQR － Lights on when SQR=ON
Response A_ALM － Lights on when A_ALM=ON
Alarm
Information Ready R_ALM － Lights on when R_ALM=ON
Limit Fault S_ALM － Lights on when S_ALM=ON
Direct M_DF － Start the single machine directly
Reverse M_DR － Start the single machine reversely

Operate Stop M_DC － Stop the single machine

Unlock SLK － Unlock the technical interlock
Interlock LOCK √ Interlock
Reset CLR Alarm reset
13.7.3 Function Block Flag Code
Table 13-22 Flag

Flag Description Flag Description

D0 OOS status(SWOOS) D14 Reverse drive(DR)
D1 Group control(GROUP) D15 Alarm output(ALM)
Group control device positive
D2 D16 Stand-alone positive startup(M_DF)
startup(G_DF)
Group control device reverse
D3 D17 Stand-alone reverse startup(M_DR)
startup(G_DR)
D4 Group control stop(G_DC) D218 Stand-alone stop operation(M_DC)
D5 Ready (R) D19 Alarm reset(CLR)
D6 Positive running(FRN) D20 Remove craft interlock(SLK)
D7 Reverse running(RRN) D21 Craft interlock removing condition(CSLK)
Shown the panel of craft interlock
D8 Positive position limit(SQF) D22
removing(SHSLK)
D9 Reverse position limit(SQR) D23 Ready lose alarm output(R_ALM)
D10 Emergency stop(ESTP) D24 Running alarm output(A_ALM)
D11 Device failure(F) D25 Position limit lose alarm output(S_ALM)
D12 interlock(LOCK) D30 Module alarm shield(AOF)
D13 Positive drive(DF) － －
13.7.4 Logic Time Sequencing
Table 13-23 Start/Shutdown /Alarm Control Logic Instruction

Device Control Mode Control Element Device Drive Ststus

Positive
R=ON and LOCK=ON and G_DF up-jump DF=ON
startup
Group control
status: Reverse
R=ON and LOCK=ON and G_DR up-jump DR=ON
GROUP=ON startup
ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or G_DC up-jump or
stop DF=OFF, DR=OFF
SQF/SQR=ON

824
 Function Block Reference

Device Control Mode Control Element Device Drive Ststus

Positive
R=ON and LOCK=ON and M_DF up-jump DF=ON
startup
Stand-lone
control status: Reverse
R=ON and LOCK=ON and M_DR up-jump DR=ON
GROUP=OFF startup
ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or M_DC up-jump or
stop DF=OFF. DR=OFF
SQF/SQR=ON
Alarm status(ALM=ON) R_ALM or A_ALM or M_ALM or F is ON DF=OFF. DR=OFF
13.7.5 Application Example

To achieve the switch control of field valve as shown in Figure 13-5, and can be operated in flow
chart.

Dual-DI (Spacing) Dual-DI (Running) Dual-DO (Driver) Valve motor driven valve refers to device to
achieve valave performer switch control via direct/reverse motor driver. Valve switch status is
shown by dual-DI feedbacks. When valve control is applied, on DO and off driver should keep
output, and stop DO output when reached spacing. It is often used for limited direct/reverse motor
control, such as winding motor, motor driven door and flashboard valve.

Figure 13-5 Dual-DI (Spacing) Dual-DI (Running) Dual-DO (Driver) Valve Diagram

Its program is shown below, which applied MOTOR_FM and the upper computer can control DO
via function block tag.

825
 Function Block Reference

Figure 13-6 Valve Program of Dual-DI (Spacing) Dual-DI (Running) Dual-DO (Driver)

Function block and example instructions are shown below.

Table 13-24 Function Block and Example Instructions

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 M1501_READY DI Input Ready Signal

002 M1501_RUN_O DI Input Direct Running Signal

003 M1501_RUN_C DI Input Reverse Running Signal

004 M1501_O DI Input Direct Spacing Signal

005 M1501_C DI Input Reverse Spacing Signal

006 M1501_F DI Input Device Fault Signal

007 M1501_DO DO Output Device Direct Driver

008 M1501_DC DO Output Device Reverse Driver

Motor Control Function
009 M1501 Function Block Tag Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Table 13-25 MOTOR_FM

Corresponding Tag
No. Function Block Pin Description Remarks
Type
Input Parameter
001 R Ready DI Input M1501_READY

002 FRN Direct Running DI Input M1501_RUN_O

003 RRN Reverse Running DI Input M1501_RUN_C

004 SQF Direct Spacing DI Input M1501_O

005 SQR Reverse Running DI Input M1501_C

826
 Function Block Reference

006 F Device Fault DI Input M1501_F

Group Control
Direct Rotation
007 G_DF Device Start Custom BOOL
Automatically
Operation Directly
Group Control
Reverse Rotation
008 G_DR Device Start Custom BOOL
Automatically
Operation Reversely
Group Control
009 G_DC Custom BOOL Stop Automatically
DeviceClose Down
Group Control/
010 GROUP Single Machine Custom BOOL Manula/Auto Selection
Device Status Switch
Emergency When input ON, force to
011 ESTP Custom BOOL
Shutdown stop.
When interlock is
applied, LOCK input
012 LOCK Interlock Condition Custom BOOL
is OFF, interlock
stops.
Output Parameter

001 DF Device Direct Driver DO Output M1501_DO

Device Reverse
002 DR DO Output M1501_DC
Driver
Ready lost or running
003 ALM Alarm Output Custom BOOL alarm or spacing alarm
or fault=ON.
1: Ready 2, 3: Running
Device Status 4, 5: Direct Spacing 8,
004 STA Custom UINT
Indication 9: ReverseSpacing
16:Fault

Parameter settings of MOTOR_FM:

 When the operation parameter SHSLK in basic parameter is OFF, the interlock button on
flow chart device panel truns grey, when it is ON, the interlock button can be operated.

 When the operation parameter CSLK in basic parameter is ON, interlock is started
automatically.

Alarm Settings

 When the operation parameter TM1 in basic parameter is set as 3s, it means that there is
no DI running feedback in the 3s after outputing DO driver, alarm generates (supervision
parameter A_ALM and output parameter ALM is ON), driver output is canceled (the time
is adjustable).

 When the operation parameter TM2 in basic parameter is set as 30s, it means that there
is no spacing running feedback in the 30s after outputing DO driver, alarm space is
limited (supervision parameter S_ALM and output parameter ALM is ON), driver output is
canceled (the time is adjustable).

 When the operation parameter TM3 in basic parameter is set as 3s, it means that there is
DI running feedback in the 3s after canceling DO driver, alarm generates (supervision

827
 Function Block Reference

parameter A_ALM and output parameter ALM is ON), driver output is canceled (the time
is adjustable).

Example diagram of control panel is shown below.

Figure 13-7 Valve Instrument Panel of Dual-DI (Spacing) Dual-DI (Running) Dual-DO (Driver)

13.8 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block With

Simulation Function (MOTOR_SIM)

Function block MOTOR_SIM is used for one driver common motor control. The function block can
do simulation run.

The MOTOR_SIM is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

828
 Function Block Reference

13.8.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-26 The MOTOR_SIM Parameters Instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Feedback
Basic If running time over TM
Time of Operation
Parameters TM TRUE and A=OFF, then
Response parameter
ALM=ON
(s)
Operation
Parameter When R=ON, if drive
Eliminating
signal disappear and
Time of Operation
TM1 TRUE running feedback signal
Response parameter
Do not disappear after
(s)
TM1 then output A_ALM
Safe mode
selection
switch. If
SAFE_OPT
=OFF, then
running fault
hold and
output does
not reset
after startup
output take
place
ruuning fault;
Mode SAFE_O if Operation
Settings TRUE －
PT SAFE_OPT parameter
=ON then
running fault
hold and
output reset
after startup
output take
place
ruuning fault,
can set CLR
or set
simulation to
remove
running fault.
Running
fault clear
select
switch. If
AUTOCL AUTOCLR Operation
TRUE －
R =OFF then parameter
clear after
acknowledg
ement else
auto clear.

829
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Mode select
switch.
SWOUT=OF One drive mode: C=ON
F is one is output and C=OFF is
drive mode. stop out；
SWOUT=O Two drive mode:
Configuratio
SWOUT N is two － RUN=ON is output and
n parameter
drive mode. STOP=ON is stop
The output out.inhibition RUN and
plus which STOP is ON at the same
width is TPW time.
when two
drive mode.
Pulse width Configuratio Relate parameter: RUN
TPW －
time (s) n parameter and STOP
Status
Switch for
the
Group/Stand
-alone
Device
Extended selection. If
Input Pin Connect to upstream
Parameters MA MA=OFF － Input pin
block output
then motor
device status
is
stand-alone
control else
it is group
control
Group
control
device
Connect to upstream
PCMD start/stop － Input pin
block output
operation.
(OFF=stop,
ON=startup)
Ready. It
must be
Connect to upstream
R R=ON when － Input pin
block output
start and
running.
Running
feedback. If
the running Connect to DI.
A time over TM － Input pin Related parameter is TM
and A=OFF and TM1.
then
ALM=ON
F Device Fault － Input pin Connect to DI
Emergency Connect to upstream
ESTP － Input pin
stop block output
Technology
Interlock.
Set Connect to upstream
LK － Input pin
LK=ON block output
before
start-up.

830
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Start
Enabled. Set
Connect to upstream
STT STT=ON － Input pin
block output
before
start-up.
Release
from
Technology
Connect to upstream
SLK Interlock TRUE Input pin
block output
(OFF=not
release,
ON=release)
Simulation
switch.
SWSIM=OF
F is not
SWSIM simulation － Input pin －
mode ;
SWSIM=ON
is simulation
mode.
Simulation When
simulation, if
SWDO=OFF
then block
output to Configuratio
SWDO － －
DO；if n parameter
SWDO=ON
then block
Do not
output to DO
Device
Driver. When
no device
stop alarm,
Connect to DO. If
R=ON, SLK
Output Pin R=OFF, or ALM=ON, or
C or LK is ON, － Output pin
SLK anf LK is OFF all
STT=ON, if
then C=OFF
STR or MO
occur
up-jump
then C=ON.
Pulse output
with two
drive mode.
RUN － Output pin Connect to DO
The output
pulse width
is TPW.
The device
drive
stopwhen For two drive mode,
two drive must manual stop
STOP － Output pin
mode. The again when stop pulse
output pulse width output.
width is
TPW.

831
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Alarm
Output. If
R_ALM or
ALM － Output pin －
A_ALM or F
is ON then
ALM=ON
Indication of
STA Device － Output pin Data type:UNIT
Status
Alarm FLAG Flag code － Output pin －
Enabled
and Operation
AOF Alarm shield TRUE －
Suppress parameter
Alarm
Output of
Ready Lose.
If A=ON and
R down jump
Status Monitoring
R_ALM then － －
parameter
R_ALM=ON;
if CLR=ON
then
R_ALM=OF
F
Alarm
Output of
Running. If
C=ON and A
Do not return
inside TM
then
A_ALM=ON;
If R=ON and Monitoring
A_ALM － －
C=OFF and parameter
A=ON inside
TM1 then
A_ALM＝
ON. If
CLR=ON
then
A_ALM=OF
F
Startup
Enable
Status. If
STT and R
Monitoring
STO all is ON － －
parameter
then allow
STO =ON,
else
STO=OFF

832
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Stop Status
for
Technology
Interlock. If
LK and SLK
Monitoring
LKO is all OFF － －
parameter
then
LKO=ON; if
LK or SLK is
ON then
LKO = OFF
Stop Status
for Safe
Interlock. If
F=ON then
FO=ON; if Monitoring the FO=ON when safe
FO －
F=OFF then parameter interlock stop status.
FO hold; if
CLR=ON
then clear
this alarm.
One device
Operation
MSTR startup － －
parameter
operation
Operation One device
Parameter Operation
MSTP stop － －
parameter
operation.
Operation
CLR Alarm reset TRUE －
parameter
Function
block is OOS
OOS Operation
SWOOS Status when TRUE －
Settings parameter
SWOOS=O
N

Definition of STA is as follows:

If have not ready signal then show STA=5. It isn”t affected by simulation;

If have ready signal but exist equipment failure at one time then show STA=3. It isn”t affected by
simulation;

If have ready signal and have not equipment failure signal input but exist running fault then show
STA=4. when simulation have not this item;

When have ready signal and no equipment failure input and no running fault, if have running
feedback then STA=1 else STA=2. when simulation result rest with operation command.

13.8.2 Function Block Flag Code

Monitoring
Flag Description
Assign
Enable
D0 OOS Status(OOS_B)
(SWOOS)
D1 Enable(MA) Group/stand-alone device status switch(MA_B)

833
 Function Block Reference

Monitoring
Flag Description
Assign
D2 Disable Group control device startup/stop operation(PCMD_B)
D3 － －
D4 Disable Ready(R_B)
D5 Disable running(A_B)
D6 Disable Device fault(F_B)
D7 Disable Emergency stop(ESTP_B)
D8 Disable Craft interlock(LK_B)
D9 Enable(STT) Startup enable input(STT_B)
D10 Disable Device drive(C_B)
D11 Disable Alarm output(ALM_B)
D12 Enable(MSTR) Stand-alone device startup input(MSTR_B)
D13 Enable(MSTP) Stand-alone device stop input(MSTP_B)
D14 Enable(CLR) Alarm reset(CLR_B)
D15 Enable(SLK) Craft interlock remove input(SLK_B)
D16 － －
D17 － －
D18 Disable Ready lose alarm output(R_ALM_B)
D19 Disable Running alarm output(A_ALM_B)
D20 Disable Output for device safe interlock status(STO_B)
D21 Disable Output for device craft interlock(LKO_B)
D22 Disable Running fault(FO_B)
D23 Enable(SWSIM) Simulation switch(SWSIM_B)
D24~29 － －
D30 Enable(AOF) Alarm shield(AOF)
13.8.3 Logic Time Sequencing
Table 13-27 start-up／stop／drive/alarm logic sequencing list

Device Drive
Device Control Mode Control Element
Status
Group control startup R=ON, STT=ON, LK=ON, PCMD=ON Out is ON
(MA=ON) stop ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or PCMD=OFF Out is OFF
Stand-alone startup R=ON, STT=ON, LK=ON, MSTR up-jump Out is ON
control
(MA=OFF) stop ALM=ON or ESTP=ON or MSTP up-jump Out is OFF
One
SWOUT=OFF C
drive
Output mode
Two
SWOUT=ON RUN and STOP
drive
Alarm status (ALM=ON) F=ON or R=OFF or A=OFF C=OFF

13.9 Valve Control Function Block With Simulation Function

(DIO21V_SIM)

DIO-21V function block enables control and interlock protect to dual DI feedback/single DO output
equipment by last level sequence control command or operator operating. Monitoring can use

834
 Function Block Reference

user-defined panel mode.

The function block can simulation running. The function block direction for use respect to direction
of DIO-21V. Valve control function block with simulation

The DIO21V_SIM is complex function block. The block performance period is 150μs.

13.9.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 13-28 The DIO21V_SIM Parameters Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Device Run time
(Unit: s)
Basic Mode If the device run time
Operation
Parameters Settings TOC greater then TOC TRUE －
parameter
value and not
feedback, then output
OPEL=ON
Whether to Confirm
Running Fault.
(ON=Yes).
OPFLA Operation
It is active with TRUE －
CK parameter
interlock and
MAN/AUTO
command.
Whether to Eliminate
running Failure
Auto(ON=Auto).
When AUTOCLR=ON
and OPFL=ON, if
recover status
feedback then
AUTO Operation
OPEL=OFF. TRUE －
CLR parameter
When
AUTOCLR=OFF and
OPFL=ON, then
OPEL=OFF after
recover status
feedback and
acknowledgement.
Input Command
IGNOR Operation
Shield Alarm TRUE －
ALM parameter
(OFF=NO)

835
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to Output
Command Ignore
Feedback.
If the value is ON
If the value is ON then
then DO is not
IGNOR currently output Do Operation
TRUE affected by OPFL
STA not judge feedback parameter
else DO is
status; if the value is
affected by OPFL
OFF then currently
output judge feedback
status.
Output Safety Mode
SAFE_ Selection(OFF=Not Operation
TRUE －
OPT Reset Output, parameter
ON=Reset Output)
Extended OPNST Open Status
－ Input pin Connect to DI
Parameters A Feedback
CLSST Close Status
－ Input pin Connect to DI
A Feedback
Command Input
Connect to
PCMD (ON=Open － Input pin
upstream block.
OFF=Close)
EMOP Interlock Open Connect to
－ Input pin
N Command upstream block.
Input Pin
Interlock Close Connect to
EMCLS － Input pin
Command upstream block.
OPNP Open Permission Connect to
TRUE Input pin
RM Signal upstream block.
CLSPR Close Permission Connect to
TRUE Input pin
M Signal upstream block.
Manual-automatic
Connect to
SWAM Switch (ON=Auto － Input pin
upstream block.
OFF=Manual)
Simulation switch.
If SWSIM=OFF then
the valve function
block not have
simulation and DO
output normal; if Connect to
SWSIM － Input pin
SWSIM=ON then upstream block.
Simulatio valve function block
n have simulation
function and block
calculation value do
not output to DO.
DO output select
switch. Operation
SWDO TRUE －
(OFF=output, ON=not parameter
output)
Output DO Output － Output pin Connect to DO
Pin
ALM alarm － Output pin －

836
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Indication of Device
Status.
STA=1: FAIL=OFF,
OPFL=OFF,
OPNSTA=ON;
STA STA=2: FAIL=OFF, － Output pin －
OPFL=OFF,
CLSSTA=ON;
STA=3: FAIL=ON;
STA=4: FAIL=OFF,
OPFL=ON
Enabled Operation
AOF Module Alarm shield TRUE －
and parameter
Suppress FLAG Flag code － Output pin －
Device Fault.
If OPNSTA=ON and Monitoring
FAIL － －
CLSSTA=ON then parameter
FAIL=ON
If OPFL=ON then
new command
input
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL － ineffectiveness; if
(ON=Fault). parameter
OPEL=OFF then
new command
input effective
Device Running
Status STAOP Monitoring
Status － －
N parameter
Indication(ON=Open)
STACL Device Stop Status Monitoring
－ －
S Indication(ON=Close) parameter
Function Block Monitoring
MODE Note1 － －
Mode(Observe) parameter
Open Command
OPNFL Monitoring
Output － －
AG parameter
Process(Observe)
Close Command
CLSFL Monitoring
Output － －
AG parameter
Process(Observe)
Function block is OOS
OOS SWOO Operation
Status when TRUE －
Settings S parameter
SWOOS=ON
Manual Command
Operation
Operation MCMD (ON=Open － －
parameter
Paramete OFF=Close)
r Operation
MACK Manual Confirm － －
parameter

Note1:

The function block mode and precedence level: OOS>Interlock>Man/Auto

 OOS(MODE=1)

837
 Function Block Reference

 When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to
command output. The output maintains.

 Interlock(interlock open/interlock stop, MODE=4)

 When function block is not in OOS status, and input interlock open or interlock close
command, function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts
positive transmission check.
 When both interlock open, interlock close commands are inputted, the system does
not respond to interlock command.
 When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock close command is
inputted in effective time of interlock open command, execute interlock open
command first and then interlock close command after interlock open command is
over.
 When interlock close command is inputted first and interlock open command is
inputted in effective time of interlock close command, execute interlock close
command first and then interlock open command after interlock close command is
over.
 The validity of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM,
CLSPRM), device fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be
shielded by OPFLACK, FAIL and OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORALM.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=5; Auto: MODE=6)

 When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode.
Automatic status output instruction is decided by PCMD and manual status output
instruction is by MCMD.
 Man/auto command input adopts positive transmission check.
 If interlock open EMOPN is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close
command disables.
 If interlock close EMCLS is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open
command disables.
 The validity of man/auto command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM,
CLSPRM), device fault FAIL and running fault OPFL. Running fault limit can be
shielded by OPFLACK. FAIL and OPFL limit can be shielded by IGNORAM.
13.9.2 Function Block Flag Code
Table 13-29 Flag

838
 Function Block Reference

Supervision
Flag Description
Assignment
Enable
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
(SWOOS)
D1 － －
D2 － －
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPN_B)
D4 Disable Interlock Close (EMCLS_B)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN_B)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Auto (AUTO_B)
D7 － －
D8 － －
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL_B)
D10 Disable Device Fault (FAIL_B)
D11 Disable Device Open Status (STAOPN_B)
D12 Disable Device Close Status (STACLS_B)
D13 － －
D14 － －
D15 － －
D16 Enable (EMOPN) Interlock Open Condition Indication (EMOPN_B)
D17 Enable (EMCLS) Interlock Close Condition Indication (EMCLS_B)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 － －
Enable
D20 Open Permission Indication (OPNPRM_B)
(OPNPRM)
Enable
D21 Close Permission Indication (CLSPRM_B)
(CLSPRM)
D22 Enable (MCMD) Manual Command (MCMD_B)
D23 Enable (MACK) Acknowledge (MACK_B)
D24 Enable (SWSIM) Simulation switch (SWSIM_B)

839
 Function Block Reference

Section 14 FF Standard Function Block Library

14.1 FOUNDATION Overview

FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FF) is a fieldbus for process control developed by Fieldbus FOUNDATION. FF
provides the Function Block (FB) for user layer as basic unit for control engineer to perform control
application. FB is a software logic process unit taking data structure as the core, to execute an
independent and completed control function, and provides diagnosis and alarm functions.
Function block of filed device consists of FF standard function block and customized function block
of manufacturer.

ECS-700 system provides mapping function block for each FF standard function block. For
example, mapping function blocks FFAI, FFPID, FFAO are provided to correspond to FF standard
function blocks AI, PID, AO separately. For customized function block of manufacturer,
FFCUSTOM is provided for unified mapping.

Mapping function block represents the FF field device function block in DCS, by which to achieve
real-time monitoring, control scheme configuration, alarm collection and real-time control can be
achieved in ECS-700 system. Mapping function block connecting standard function block can
achieve mixed control.

14.1.1 Modes
Supported and Permitted Modes

All blocks have a mode parameter, which consists of Target Mode, Actual mode, Permit Mode,
Normal Mode.

 MODE_TRG

It is user-defined and should be an option of MODE_PER. Only one target mode can
be set at one time.

 MODE_ACT

The actual mode is worked out by FF function block combining target mode, input
parameter status and other parameter (such as track switch), etc.

 MODE_PER

It is user-defined and should be mode for the function block type permitted by FF
protocol. Several modes can be set once. IMAN and LO cannot be options of
Permitted Mode.

840
 Function Block Reference

 MODE_NR

It is user-defined and should be an option of MODE_PER. Its main function is

indication and has no influence for execution result of function block.

Mode Definition

FF standard protocol provides 8 modes, which sorted by priority are OOS > IMAN > LO > MAN >
AUTO > CAS > RCAS > ROUT.

 OOS

Function block is out of service.

 IMAN

When the downstream function block is not in CAS mode or not use the output
parameter of upstream function block to calculate output, the upstream function block
enters IMAN mode.

 LO

For control function block like FFPID, when SWTR = ON, and the function block cannot
meet higher priority condition, it enters LO mode, and the output is track input value. For
output function block FFAO, when the target mode is CAS, and the input value from
upstream function block cannot meet the condition to enter CAS mode, output hold or
failsafe value.

 MAN

Function block output is set by operator.

 AUTO

Activate function block control algorithm. SV of operator is used to calculated output

value.

 CAS

Activate function block control algorithm. Calculate output value via CSV (FF parameter
CAS_IN) set by upstream block. It connects BKOUT (FF parameter BKCAL_OUT) with
upstream function block and achieve non-reference switch o between modes.

 RCAS

841
 Function Block Reference

Activate function block control algorithm. Like CAS, while using RSVI (FF parameter
RCAS_IN) to calculate output value. It connects RSVO (FF parameter RCAS_OUT) with
upstream block to achieve non-reference switch between modes.

 ROUT

Like MAN, while it is given by outer program via ROI (FF parameter ROUT_IN), but not
by operator manually. It connects ROO (FF parameter ROUT_OUT) with upstream block
to achieve non-reference switch between modes.
14.1.2 I/O Block Channel Setting

Function blocks of input and output include FFAI, FFAO, FFDI, FFDO, FFMAI, FFMAO, FFMDI,
FFMDO, etc. They work with transducer blocks to achieve input and output of field signal.

Single-input/output blocks, such as FFAI, FFAO, FFDI, FFDO, can associate with transducer block
via CHANNEL.

Multi-input/output blocks, such as FFMAI, FFMAO, FFMDI, FFMDO, perform multi-channel mode
settings via CHANNEL. There are 2 methods, associate by fixed sequence, or each channel
perform single channel setting separately.

The number, serial number and measuring type of transducer block are different for different
device. Thus, one FFAI block has different channel values for different transducer block of device.
Please refer to the device user manual for details. The channel value is valid transducer block
serial number of device, the type of transducer block corresponding to channel value should be
same with the block type. FFAI block cannot associate with a transducer block of Discrete.

If the channel is set illegally, the device will generates alarm or not receive write-in of illegal value.

14.1.3 Failsafe Function

Only function blocks of output, i.e. FFAO, FFDO, FFMAO, FFMDO, support failsafe function.

Time counting will be started once the device function block detects fault. When the accumulated
time reaches FST_TIME, output function block activates failsafe function and enters LO mode,
keep output value or output FST_VAL, to achieve protection for field when fault occurs.

Conditions trigger starting fault time accumulation including communication failure, status of
cascade input pin is GoodCascade_Initiate Fault State, and power down restart.

User can set "Fault State to Value" and "Use Fault State Value on restart" of IO_OPTS,
MO_OPTS to use the output fault value of block when failsafe function is activated.

14.1.4 Process Alarm

Function block alarms include enabled alarm and disabled alarm.

842
 Function Block Reference

 Suppress Disabled Alarm

User cannot eliminate the alarm via alarm enable. It includes:

 ERR
ERR will be generated when the mapping function block detects that the fault of AM712
has accumulated to 8s, or corresponding device lost, or configuration mismatched.
When the alarm generates, the mapping function block will stop updating data of device
function block.
 FF_ALARM
When BLOCK_ERR is not 0, FF_ALARM is generated.

 Suppress Enabled Alarm

 Generated by Mapping Function Block

Enable the mapping function block alarm via ENALM_EX. If FF function block has limit
for parameter, the mapping function block will generate H/L Limit Alarm based on the
limit information, for example, the H/L Limit Alarm of FFPID.
 Generated by Device Function Block
Enable the device function block alarm via ENALM. Device function block define the
algorithm according to FF, and generates process alarm with alarm enabled parameter.
The process alarm types of device function block include HH limit alarm, H limit alarm, L
limit alarm, LL limit alarm, positive bias alarm, negative bias alarm, discrete alarm, etc.,
i.e. ENALM enables the alarm of field bus layer.
Enable the mapping function block alarm via ENALM_EX, i.e. when the device function
block generates H limit alarm, and send to controller, if ENALM_EX suppress H limit
alarm, the mapping function block will not generate H limit alarm, i.e. ENALM_EX enable
alarm of DCS layer.
14.1.5 Extend Pin

Each mapping function block supports 4 extend pins, P01 and P02 of REAL and P03, P04 of
USINT. Extend pin corresponds to the pin parameter of extend parameter/custom parameter in FF
device function block, and set as input or output pin. Except that, FF mapping function block has
no extend parameter and custom parameter.

In extend pin setting interface, user can build mapping relationship between extend pin and FF
custom parameter via selecting FF custom parameter.

Only when FF extend pin connects DCS function block, the mapping function block can update
data. When mapping function block connects or does not connect FF pin, the operations for FF

843
 Function Block Reference

device function block can be performed normally, while mapping function block cannot update
date.

14.1.6 Function Block Options

IO_OPTS

Table 14-1 IO_OPTS parameter instruction

Bit Meaning FFAI FFDI FFAO FFDO

0 Invert - Optional - Optional
1 SP- PV Track in MAN - - Optional Optional
2 Reserved - - - -
3 SP- PV Track in LO - - Optional Optional
4 SP Track Retained Target - - Optional Optional
5 Increase to Close - - Optional -
Fault State to Value
6 - - Optional Optional
0=Hold, 1=Preset Value
Use FSTATE_VAL (_D)
7 - - Optional Optional
Value on Restart
Target to MAN If Fault State
8 - - Optional Optional
Activated
9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT - - Optional Optional
10 Low Cutoff Optional - - -
11 Reserved - - - -
12 Units Conversion Optional - - -
13~15 Reserved - - - -

STATUS_OPTS

Table 14-2 STATUS_OPTS parameter instruction

Bit Meaning FFAI FFDI FFAO FFDO FFCTLSL FFPID

0 IFS if BAD IN - - - - Optional Optional
1 IFS if BAD CAS_IN - - - - - Optional
2 Use Uncertain as Good - - - - Optional Optional
3 Propagate Fault Forward Optional Optional - - - -

Propagate Fault
4 - - Optional Optional - -
Backward

Target to Manual
5 - - - - - Optional
if BAD IN
6 Uncertain if Limited Optional - - - - -
7 BAD if Limited Optional - - - - -
8 Uncertain if Man mode Optional Optional - - - -
Target to next permitted
9 - - - - - Optional
mode if BAD CAS_IN
Target to Man if BAD
10 - - - - - Optional
TRK_IN_D
11 IFS if BAD TRK_IN_D - - - - - Optional

844
 Function Block Reference

Bit Meaning FFAI FFDI FFAO FFDO FFCTLSL FFPID

12~15 Reserved - - - - - -

CONTROL_OPTS

Table 14-3 CONTROL_OPTS parameter instruction

Bit Meaning FFPID

0 Bypass Enable Optional
1 SP-PV Track in Ma Optional
2 SP-PV Track in ROut Optional
3 SP-PV Track in LO or IMan Optional
4 SP Track retained target Optional
5 Direct Acting Optional
6 Track if Bad TRK_IN_D Optional
7 Track Enable Optional
8 Track in Manual Optional
9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT Optional
10 Act on IR -
11 Use BKCAL_OUT with IN_1 -
12 Obey SP limits if Cas or RCas Optional
13 No OUT limits in Manual Optional
14~15 Reserved -

14.2 Status Process

Pin of FF function block consists of value and status. FF protocol defines the status specification,
please refer to it for details.

When pins of two function blocks connect, the value and status of pin will be sent from upstream
block to downstream block as a whole. The status transition of parameter is only valid for input and
output pins. Parameter with status of FF device function block consists of value and _STA.

The status parameter of mapping function block consists of value, _STA and _ERR.

In VFFBDBuilder, function block has 2 connection methods:

1. Connect/Not Connect FF Mapping Function Block

Connect the 2 FF pins to achieve transition between value and status, and keep the
status process function of FF function block.
Calculate _ERR via _STA.

845
 Function Block Reference

2. Connect FF Mapping Function Block and DCS Function Block.

 FF Input Pin

Achieve the value transition from DCS pin to FF input pin via the connection.
Calculate _STA via _ERR.

 FF Output Pin

Achieve the value transition from FF output pin to DCS pin via the connection.
Calculate _ERR via _STA.
14.2.1 Pin Status Instruction
Table 14-4 Pin Status Instruction of Mapping Function Block

ERR>STA STA>ERR
FFAI
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFPID

ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS; When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,

BKIN
ERR = ON, STA = GoodC_NI otherwise ERR=ON.

When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =

ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
CSV OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
FF_VAL OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
SWTR OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
TV OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
RSVI OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
BKOUT -
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
MV - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFAO
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
CSV OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.

846
 Function Block Reference

ERR>STA STA>ERR
When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
BKOUT -
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFDI
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFDO
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
CSV OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
BKOUT -
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFMAI
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT1~8 - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFMAO
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~8 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFMDI
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT1~8 - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFMDO
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~8 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFISEL
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~4 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
DIS1~4 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
OP_SEL OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
SEL - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFCTLSL
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~3 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
RR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS; When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
BKIN
ERR = ON, STA = Bad otherwise ERR=ON.

847
 Function Block Reference

ERR>STA STA>ERR
When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific or
BKOUT
- GoodC_NotSelect, ERR = OFF,
1~3
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFARTHM
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~3 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN_L OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFINT
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~2 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
RIN OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
REV1~2 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
PTRP - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
TRIP - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFSGCR
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
IN1~2 OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
OUT1~2 - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
FFSPLIT
BKIN1~ ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS; When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
2 ERR = ON, STA = Bad otherwise ERR=ON.
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
ERR = OFF, STA = GoodC_NS;
CSV OFF,
ERR = ON, STA = Bad
otherwise ERR=ON.
When STA is GoodC_NonSpecific, ERR = OFF,
BKOUT -
otherwise ERR=ON.

848
 Function Block Reference

ERR>STA STA>ERR
When in status of GoodNC or GoodC, ERR =
MV1~2 - OFF,
otherwise ERR=ON.
14.2.2 Notice of FF and DCS Blocks
 Different Result with only FF connection.

For single loop, the upstream PID is FF device function block, AO function block is DCS
block. If fault of AO occurs, the BKINERR of upstream FFPID block connected is ON, the
BKIN _STA value of FFPID is GoodC_NI. FFPID enters IMAN.
If AO function block is FF device function block, when fault (communication fault with
field) of AO occurs, _STA of BKIN is Bad_NoCommuWithLUV. FFPID enters IMAN,
while the BKIN status of FFPID will be different in 2 configurations.
For others, because the process of FF block is different with DCS block, for the same
program, applying FF block or DCS block will generate different results.

 Sub-status Information Loss

For example, when FFPID calculates IN_STA via IN_ERR, information loss will occur.
IN_ERR is provided by AI block of DCS, i.e. ERR pin of AI. Conditions when ERR=ON
include communication failure, AI block fault, AI channel fault. Sub-status cannot be
confirmed via ERR = ON. Thus, when IN_ERR=ON, set _STA as Bad_NonSpecific, the
sub-status information has a loss.

 Limit Information Loss

Because the write status cannot get the limit information of input, the sending _STA will
not contain limit information. If FFPID connects AO, and its BKIN loses limit information,
the anti-integral saturation function of FFPID will be influenced. For example, when the
downstream AO reaches maximum output, and FFPID does not reach limit, because
there is no limit information feedback to FFPID via BKIN, thus the integral will continue
accumulation till the limit of FFPID, and FFPID enters the saturation area of a range (AO
limit, FFPID limit).

849
 Function Block Reference

14.3 FFAI
14.3.1 Overview

FFAI block represents the field device function block AI, by which DCS can monitor and control the
field device AI.

14.3.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-5 FFAI Parameter instruction

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
Signal Operatio
Basic PV_FTI Filter Time n Not filter when it
Convert TRUE PV_FTIME
Parameters ME Constant Paramete is 0.
Setting
r
Configura Associate
CHAN tion transducer block
Channel TRUE CHANNEL
NEL Paramete in the same type
r of device.

850
 Function Block Reference

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
IO options. It
can be viewed Configura
Enable functions
IO_OP and configured tion
TRUE IO_OPTS of low cutoff and
TS by clicking Paramete
units conversion.
“Settings” r
button.
Signal
conversion
type. It can be Configura
Set the signal
L_TYP viewed and tion
TRUE L_TYPE conversion
E configured by Paramete
method.
clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Status options.
It can be
Configura
viewed and Process when
STA_O tion STATUS_O
configured by TRUE parameter status
PTS Paramete PTS
clicking is illegal.
r
“Settings”
button.
Configura
OUT_S Output Scale H tion OUT_SCAL
TRUE
CH Limit Paramete E
r
Configura
OUT_S Output Scale H tion OUT_SCAL
TRUE
CL Limit Paramete E
r Work for OUT
Configura and PV.
OUT_E tion OUT_SCAL
Output Unit TRUE
U Paramete E
r
Configura
OUT_D Output Decimal tion OUT_SCAL
TRUE
LEN Digits Paramete E
Scale r
Setting Configura Set the H/L limits
XD_SC Field Signal tion as same as
TRUE XD_SCALE
H Scale H Limit Paramete range of
r corresponding
Configura transducer
XD_SC Field Signal tion block, and the
TRUE XD_SCALE unit as same as
L Scale H Limit Paramete
r transducer
block. The unit
Configura type should be
Field Signal tion supported by
XD_EU TRUE XD_SCALE
Unit Paramete transducer
r block.
Configura Otherwise, the
XD_DL Field Signal tion function block
TRUE XD_SCALE
EN Decimal Digits Paramete will be in OOS
r mode.
Extended Output Output
OUT Output Value － OUT －
Parameters Pin Pin

851
 Function Block Reference

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
OUT_E Output
Output Quality － － －
RR Pin
Output status, it
can be viewed
OUT_S Output
by clicking － OUT －
TA Pin
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm, it
Monitorin
can be viewed
BLCK_ g BLOCK_ER
by clicking － －
ERR Paramete R
“Settings”
r
button.
Monitorin
g
H H Limit Alarm － HI_ALM
Paramete
r
Monitorin
g
HH HH Limit Alarm － HI_HI_ALM ON when the
Paramete
Alarm alarm occurs.
r
Indication Alarm is
Monitorin generated by
g device.
L L Limit Alarm － LO_ALM
Paramete
r
Monitorin
g LO_LO_AL
LL LL Limit Alarm －
Paramete M
r
Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － －
Paramete
r
Monitorin Detected value
Real FLD_V Raw Input g of hardware
Status － FIELD_VAL
AL Value Paramete channel,
r percentage.
Raw input
status, it can be Monitorin
FLD_S viewed by g
－ FIELD_VAL
TA clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Process value of
Monitorin
hardware
g
PV Process Value － PV channel,
Paramete
engineering
r
value.
Process Value
Status, it can Monitorin
PV_ST be viewed by g
－ PV
A clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.

852
 Function Block Reference

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
When static
Monitorin parameter
ST_RE － g changes, the
Static Revision ST_REV
V Paramete static revision
r will be
incremented.
Actual mode, it
Monitorin
can be viewed Actual mode of
MODE g
by clicking － MODE_BLK running function
_ACT Paramete
“Settings” block.
r
button.
In OOS and
Operatio MAN modes,
Manual
MANO n change
Operate Output TRUE －
UT Paramete MANOUT can
Value
r change output
value directly.
Target mode. It
can be viewed Operatio Target mode
MODE and configured n should be one of
Operate TRUE MODE_BLK
_TRG by clicking Paramete the permit
Command “Settings” r modes.
button.
Permit mode. It
can be viewed Operatio
MODE and configured n
TRUE MODE_BLK Permit Mode
_PRM by clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Normal mode.
Normal mode
It can be
Operatio provides
viewed and
MODE n guidance and
configured by TRUE MODE_BLK
_NR Paramete has no influence
clicking
r for control
“Settings”
algorithm.
button.
Operatio
Suppress n
AOF TRUE －
Module Alarm Paramete
r
Operatio
Automatically
ACK_O n ACK_OPTI
Acknowledged TRUE
PT Paramete ON
Alarm Options
r
Alarm Operatio
Managem Enable Suppress/
n ALARM_SU
ent ENALM Fieldbus Alarm TRUE Enable alarm in
Paramete M
in Device device.
r
Enable alarm in
controller, it can
Operatio
be viewed and Suppress/
ENALM n
configured by TRUE － Enable
_EX Paramete
clicking Controller Alarm
r
“Settings”
button.

853
 Function Block Reference

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
Operatio
Signal
LOW_ Low Cutoff n
Convert TRUE LOW_CUT Actual Value
CUT Value Paramete
Setting
r
Operatio
ALM_H Alarm n ALARM_HY
TRUE Unit: Percentage
YS Hysteresis Paramete S
r
Operatio
HH_LI n
HH Alarm Limit TRUE HI_HI_LIM
M Paramete
r
Operatio
n
H_LIM H Alarm Limit TRUE HI_LIM
Paramete
Alarm
r
Limits
Setting
H Limit Alarm of
Operatio OUT
n
L_LIM L Alarm Limit TRUE LO_LIM
Paramete
r

Operatio
n
LL_LIM LL Alarm Limit TRUE LO_LO_LIM
Paramete
r
Extend pin
of actual
configuratio
Extend Extend n
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function
block
Extend pin
status of
Extend Pin1
actual
status, it can be
configuratio
P01_S viewed by Extend
－ n －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function
block
Extend pin
of actual
configuratio
Extend n
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function
block

854
 Function Block Reference

FF
Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property Parameter
Instruction
Name
Extend pin
status of
Extend Pin2
actual
status, it can be
configuratio
P02_S viewed by Extend
－ n －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function
block

Extend pin
of actual
configuratio
Extend n
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function
block

Extend pin
status of
Extend Pin3
actual
status, it can be
configuratio
P03_S viewed by Extend
－ n －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function
block
Extend pin
of actual
configuratio
Extend n
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function
block
Extend pin
status of
Extend Pin4
actual
status, it can be
configuratio
P04_S viewed by Extend
－ n －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function
block
14.3.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of AI

855
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-1 Schematic of AI

Algorithm

 Transducer Block Association

Through setting the parameter CHANNEL of FFAI to associate transducer block

corresponding to device, define physical transducer and get field signal.
If CHANNEL value is set illegal, device function block will not receive, and the parameter
CHANNEL of device function block will keep the original value. For example, if channel
value is not device transducer block number, the transducer block corresponding to
channel value is not AI type.

 Scale Setting

 XD_SCALE
XD_SCH and XD_SCL are applied to the value the channel to produce the FIELD_VAL
in percent. Thus, the limits of range should be same with transducer block. Otherwise,
difference between output value and actual value will be generated.
The XD_EU unit must be same with the corresponding transducer block. Otherwise, the
function block will be in OOS mode.
XD_DLEN is applied when function block getting channel value from transducer block. It
will influence the later control precision.
 OUT_SCALE
OUT_SCH and OUT_SCL determine the conversion from FIELD_VAL to output. PV and
OUT always have identical scaling.
OUT_EU is normally set as the unit of transducer measuring signal.
OUT_DLEN will only work for display but has no influence for control precision.

 Signal Conversion

856
 Function Block Reference

FIELD_VAL = 100* (channel value - Scale H Limit)/ (Scale H Limit - Scale H Limit). The
scale is XD scale.
 Set L_TYPE as no conversion
PV = channel value.
 Set L_TYPE as linear conversion
PV = (FIELD_VAL/100) * (Scale H Limit - Scale H Limit) + Scale H Limit (The scale is
OUT scale).
 Set L_TYPE as linear conversion
PV = sqrt (FIELD_VAL/100) * (Scale H Limit - Scale H Limit) + Scale H Limit (The scale
is OUT scale).

 Low Cutoff

If IO_OPTS selects Low Cutoff, the Low Cutoff will be performed. When input signal is
less than Low Cutoff Value, AI value is 0% of scale, and equal to Scale H Limit.
Low Cutoff Value is Actual Value.

 Filter

The first order hysteresis filter performed by input AI signal can prevent from high/low
frequency interference, eliminate serious random interference and interference of large
input jump caused by unsteady field transducer.
Filter time is PV_FTIME, when PV_FTIME = 0, no filter.

 Supported Mode

OOS, MAN and AUTO.

 Alarm Types

The function block can perform alarm process, including HH, H, L, LL, for OUT, each
can has hysteresis.

 Panel

Input tag name in supervision to pop up the operation panel of FF block, the device
panel displays OUT trend.

 Other

FFAI does not support the setting of simulation function block and parameter alarm
priority. Simulation function block can be set via FFBuilder.

857
 Function Block Reference

14.3.4 Flag

FFAI flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-6 Flag of FFAI

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 PVL
D12 PVLL
D13 PVH
D14 PVHH
D15 -
D16 OUTH
D17 OUTL
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

858
 Function Block Reference

14.4 FFPID
14.4.1 Overview

FFPID block represents the field device function block PID, by which DCS can monitor and control
the field device PID.

14.4.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-7 FFPID parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Basic Limits Operation Value Range

MVH_ MV H Limit
Parameters Setting TRUE Paramete OUT_HI_LIM [MVSCL,MVSC
LIM Value
r H]
Operation Value Range
MVL_ MV L Limit
TRUE Paramete OUT_LO_LIM [MVSCL,MVSC
LIM Value
r H]
Operation Value Range
SVH_ SV H Limit
TRUE Paramete SP_HI_LIM [SVSCL,SVSCH
LIM Value
r ]
Operation Value Range
SVL_ SV L Limit
TRUE Paramete SP_LO_LIM [SVSCL,SVSCH
LIM Value
r ]
Operation Working in
SVRH SV Velocity H SP_RATE_U
TRUE Paramete AUTO mode.
_LIM Limit Value P
r

859
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Operation
SVRL SV Velocity L SP_RATE_D
TRUE Paramete
_LIM Limit Value N
r

Control Configure
options, It can functions such
be viewed Configurat as bypass, SV
CTR_ and ion CONTROL_O track,
TRUE
OPTS configured by Paramete PTS direct/indirect
clicking r acting, track
“Settings” mode and
button. output limit, etc.
Options
Setting

Status
options. It can
be viewed Configurat
Function
STA_ and ion STATUS_OP
TRUE configuration of
OPTS configured by Paramete TS
status.
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

Configurat
Scale FF_S FF_VAL Scale ion
Setting TRUE FF_SCALE
CH High Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
FF_S FF_VAL Scale ion
TRUE FF_SCALE
CL Low Limit Paramete
r Parameter of
Configurat FF_VAL Scale
FF_VAL
FF_E ion
Engineering TRUE FF_SCALE
U Paramete
Unit
r
Configurat
FF_D FF_VAL ion
TRUE FF_SCALE
LEN Decimal Digits Paramete
r
Configurat
MV_S MV Scale H ion
TRUE OUT_SCALE
CH Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
MV_S MV Scale H ion
TRUE OUT_SCALE
CL Limit Paramete
r Parameter of
Configurat MV Scale
MV
MV_E ion
Engineering TRUE OUT_SCALE
U Paramete
Unit
r
Configurat
MV_D MV Decimal ion
TRUE OUT_SCALE
LEN Digits Paramete
r

860
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
PV_S PV Scale H ion
TRUE PV_SCALE
CH Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
PV_S PV Scale H ion
TRUE PV_SCALE
CL Limit Paramete
r Parameter of PV
Configurat and SV Scales
PV
PV_E ion
Engineering TRUE PV_SCALE
U Paramete
Unit
r
Configurat
PV_D PV Decimal ion
TRUE PV_SCALE
LEN Digits Paramete
r
Configurat
TR_S TV Scale H ion
TRUE TRK_SCALE
CH Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
TR_S TV Scale H ion
TRUE TRK_SCALE
CL Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
TV Parameter of TV
TR_E ion
Engineering TRUE TRK_SCALE Scale
U Paramete
Unit
r

Configurat
TR_D TV Decimal ion
TRUE TRK_SCALE
LEN Digits Paramete
r

Connect to
BKOUT pin of
downstream
Extended Input function block,
Feedback
Parameters Pin BKIN － Input Pin BKCAL_IN and achieve
Input
troubleshooting
and
anti-saturation
functions.
When the
downstream is
DCS function
BKIN Feedback
－ Input Pin － block, connect
ERR Input Quality
to the
BKOUTERR
pin.

861
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Feedback
input status. It
can be viewed
BKIN and
－ Input Pin － －
_STA configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Cascade input
SV, assigned by
Cascade
CSV － Input Pin CAS_IN program link.
Input
Used in CAS
mode.
CSV_ Cascade
－ Input Pin － －
ERR Input Quality
Cascade input
status. It can
be viewed
CSV_ and
－ Input Pin CAS_IN －
STA configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Analog Input Process variable
IN － Input Pin IN
Value input value.
When AI is DCS
tag, if PID is
required to
IN_E Analog Input
－ Input Pin － process AI fault,
RR Value Quality
it could connect
ERR pin of AI
tag.
Analog input
value status. It
can be viewed
IN_ST and
－ Input Pin IN －
A configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.

FF_V Feedforward
－ Input Pin FF_VAL －
AL Value

FF_E Feedforward
－ Input Pin － －
RR Value Quality

862
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Feedforward
status. It can
be viewed
FF_S and
－ Input Pin FF_VAL －
TA configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Work with
“Track Enable”
SWT function of
Track Switch － Input Pin TRK_IN_D
R CTR_OPTS to
enable track
function.
SWT
Track Switch
R_ER － Input Pin － －
Quality
R
Track switch
status. It can
be viewed
SWT
and
R_ST － Input Pin TRK_IN_D －
configured by
A
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Track Input Input Value in
TV － Input Pin TRK_VAL
Value LO Mode
TV_E Track Input
－ Input Pin － －
RR Value Quality
Track input
value status. It
can be viewed
TV_S and
－ Input Pin TRK_VAL －
TA configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Operation Output
MV － OUT －
Pin Output Value Pin
Operation
MV_E Output
Output Value － － －
RR Pin
Quality
Operation
output status,
it can be
MV_S Output
viewed by － OUT －
TA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
If the upstream
function block
BKOU Feedback Output supporting
－ BKCAL_OUT
T Output Value Pin feedback,
connect to its
BKIN pin.

863
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
If the upstream
function block
supports
BKOU Feedback Output feedback and is
－ －
TERR Output Status Pin DCS function
block, connect
to its BKINERR
pin.
Feedback
output status,
it can be
BKO_ Output
viewed by － BKCAL_OUT －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Remot Remote Operation RCAS mode,
e RSVI Setpoint TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN SV calculation
Params Value r source.

Remote
setpoint
status. It can
be viewed Operation
RSVI
and TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN －
_STA
configured by r
clicking
“Settings”
button.

Feedback
output value in
Remote Operation RCAS mode,
RSVO Cascade TRUE Paramete RCAS_OUT connect to BKIN
Output r of function block
providing RSVI
parameter.
Remote
cascade
output status.
It can be Operation
RSVO
viewed and TRUE Paramete RCAS_OUT －
_STA
configured by r
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Input Value of Operation
ROUT mode,
ROI Remote TRUE Paramete ROUT_IN
input value.
Output Mode r

864
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Input status of
remote output
mode. It can
be viewed Operation
ROI_
and TRUE Paramete ROUT_IN －
STA
configured by r
clicking
“Settings”
button.

In ROUT mode,
feedback output
Output Value Operation value, connects
ROO of Remote TRUE Paramete ROUT_OUT with BKIN pin of
Output Mode r function block
providing ROI
parameter.
Output status
of remote
output mode It
can be viewed Operation
ROO_
and TRUE Paramete ROUT_OUT －
STA
configured by r
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm, it
Alarm Monitorin
can be viewed
Indicati BLCK g
by clicking － BLOCK_ERR －
on _ERR Paramete
“Settings”
r
button.
Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － － －
Paramete
r
Monitorin Alarm indication.
Deviation g ON when device
PEI － DV_HI_ALM
High Alarm Paramete generates the
r alarm.
Monitorin
Deviation Low g
NEI － DV_LO_ALM
Alarm Paramete
r
Monitorin
g
PVHH PV HH Alarm － HI_HI_ALM
Paramete
r
Monitorin
g
PVH PV H Alarm － HI_ALM
Paramete
r
Monitorin
g
PVL PV L Alarm － LO_ALM
Paramete
r

865
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Monitorin
g
PVLL PV LL Alarm － LO_LO_ALM
Paramete
r
Process variable
Monitorin value of IN after
g processing such
PV Process Value － PV
Paramete as filter, count
r output value
with SV.
Process Value
Status, it can Monitorin
PV_S be viewed by g
－ PV －
Real TA clicking Paramete
Status “Settings” r
button.

It will be
Monitorin
incremented
ST_R Static － g
ST_REV each time a
EV Revision Paramete
static parameter
r
is changed.

Operation
Suppress
AOF TRUE Paramete － －
Module Alarm
r
Enable
fieldbus alarm
in device. It
can be viewed Operation
ENAL Controller Alarm
and TRUE Paramete
M Enabled
Alarm configured by r
Manag clicking
ement “Settings”
button.
Enable alarm
in controller. It
can be viewed
Operation
ENAL and Device Alarm
TRUE Paramete －
M_EX configured by Enabled
r
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Actual mode,
Operat it can be Monitorin
e MOD
viewed by g
Comm E_AC － MODE_BLK Actual mode
clicking Paramete
and T
“Settings” r
button.
In OOS and
Manual Operation
MAN MAN modes,
Operate TRUE Paramete －
MV change MANMV
Output Value r
to change MV.
Operation Setpoint Value,
Setpoint
SV TRUE Paramete SP count output
Value
r value with PV.

866
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Setpoint value
status. It can
be viewed
Operation
SV_S and
TRUE Paramete SP －
TA configured by
r
clicking
“Settings”
button.

Target mode.
It can be
Target mode, it
MOD viewed and Operation
should be one of
E_TR configured by TRUE Paramete ALARM_SUM
the permitted
G clicking r
modes.
“Settings”
button.

Permit mode.
It can be
MOD viewed and Operation
E_PR configured by TRUE Paramete ALARM_SUM Permit Mode
M clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Normal mode.
It can be
Supporting
viewed and Operation
MOD mode, not
configured by TRUE Paramete ALARM_SUM
E_NR influence the
clicking r
control logic.
“Settings”
button.
Operation
FF_G Feedforward
TRUE Paramete FF_GAIN －
AIN Gain Value
r

Bypass. It can
be viewed
Advanc and Operation
ed BYPA
configured by TRUE Paramete BYPASS Bypass Switch
Options SS
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

Operation
PV_F Filter Time Filter time. Not
TRUE Paramete PV_FTIME
TIME Constant filter when it is 0.
r
Final
proportional
PID Operation
Proportional coefficient.
Params KP TRUE Paramete GAIN
Gain Value Proportional
r
action varies
with KP.

867
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Integral Time.
Unit: seconds.
Operation
Less the TI is,
TI Integral Time TRUE Paramete RESET
the more
r
powerful integral
action is.
Derivative Time.
Operation
Derivative Unit: seconds.
TD TRUE Paramete RATE
Time Derivative action
r
varies with TD.
Process Value Operation
ALM_
Alarm TRUE Paramete ALARM_HYS －
HYS
Hysteresis r
Operation
PEI_L H Deviation
TRUE Paramete DV_HI_LIM －
IM Alarm Limit
r
Operation
NEI_L L Deviation
TRUE Paramete DV_LO_LIM －
IM Alarm Limit
r
Alarm Operation
Limits PVHH PVHH Limit
TRUE Paramete HI_HI_LIM －
Setting _LIM Alarm Value
r
Operation
PVH_ PVH Limit
TRUE Paramete HI_LIM －
LIM Alarm Value
r
Operation
PVL_ PVL Limit
TRUE Paramete LO_LIM －
LIM Alarm Value
r
Operation
PVLL PVLL Limit
TRUE Paramete LO_LO_LIM －
_LIM Alarm Value
r
Manual Slow Operation
SMV Increase/Decr TRUE Paramete － －
ease Value r

Manual Fast Operation

FMV Increase/Decr TRUE Paramete － －
Fase/Sl
ease Value r
ow/Incr
ease/D
ecreas
e Value Setpoint
Setting Value Manual Operation
s Paramete
SSV Slow TRUE － －
Increase/Decr r
ease Value
Setpoint
Value Manual Operation
FSV Fast TRUE Paramete － －
Increase/Decr r
ease Value

868
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
P01_ be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
STA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

Extend
Pin Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
P02_ be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
STA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
P03_ be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
STA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.

869
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_ be viewed by Extend device
－ －
STA clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.4.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of PID

Figure 14-2 Schematic of PID

14.4.4 Algorithm
 Input Process

PID performs first-order filter to work out PV, the filter time is PV_FTIME. PV and SV
calculate the output value.

 SV Process

In AUTO mode, SV is determined by operator. In CAS mode, SV is calculated by

CAS_IN. In RCAS mode, SV is calculated by RCAS_IN. SV is the SP of Schematic.

870
 Function Block Reference

Perform SP_HI_LIM, SP_LO_LIM and SP_RATE_DN, SP_RATE_UP for input value.

Via "Obey SP limits if Cas or RCas" of CTR_OPTS, whether to perform SV limit in
modes of CAS and RCAS.
Via CTR_OPTS, function of tracking PV in different modes can be started. In modes of
IMAN, LO, ROUT and MAN, if SV tracks PV, limit will make the SV not be equal with PV.

 Direct/Indirect Action

Set the Direct/Indirect Action via changing Direct Acting options of CTR_OPTS.
Selected means direct acting, unselected means indirect action.

 Bypass

If the bypass is enabled, output is equal to the value of SP after scale conversion.

 PID Algorithm

GAIN means KP.

RESET means Integral Time, the Unit is second.
RATE means Derivative Time, Unit is second.
BAL_TIME means time of anti-integral saturation.

 Output Limit

OUT limit should be between OUT_HI_LIM and OUT_LO_LIM.

 Feedforward Action

After scale switch, add FF_VAL to PID algorithm Output. For example, if FF_VAL is BAD,
apply last good value for calculation.

 Supported Modes

OOS, IMAN, LO, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS, ROUT.

 OOS: set Target Mode in OOS mode, or run the mode when configuration error
occurring. OOS keeps output.
 IMAN: applied the mode when: 1. downstream block connecting FF block, the
downstream block is not in CAS mode. 2. downstream block connecting DCS
system block, BKINERR is ON. Output tracks the downstream block Feedback.
 LO: start SWTR switch, and set the status is good, check the Track Enable box of
CTR_OPTS. Run the LO mode, Output Value tracks TV.
 MAN: Target Mode is MAN, and not meets the condition of high priority. Set the
Output Value as MANOUT.

871
 Function Block Reference

 AUTO: Target Mode is AUTO, and not meets the condition of high priority. Operator
change the SV, count Output Value with PV.
 CAS: Target Mode is CAS, and not meets the condition of high priority. SV is
worked out via CSV set by upstream, and count Output Value with PV. Provide
BKOUT feedback to upstream block.
 RCAS: Target Mode is RCAS, and not meets the condition of high priority. SV is
worked out via RSVI, and count Output Value with PV. Provide RSVO feedback to
upstream block.
 ROUT: Target Mode is ROUT, and not meets the condition of high priority. ROUT is
like manual mode, while Output Value is set by ROI. Provide ROO feedback to
upstream block.
Among them, CAS, RCAS, ROUT modes can be run with upstream block.
Upstream/downstream blocks are all needed, and through the 4 pins. For example, in
CAS mode, the block initialization should be achieved via status transmission of the 4
pins, BKIN and OUT of upstream block and CSV and BKOUT of downstream block.
User can build the relation of block upstream/downstream, or via pin assignment
association in program.

 Alarm

Process Alarm from Device: 1. The function block can perform alarm process, including
HH, H, L, LL, for OUT, each can has hysteresis. 2. Perform H/L limit alarm for deviation.
 Process alarm from FFPID.
 Unified ERR and FF_ALARM alarms.
 MVH and MVL of output.
 SVH and SVL of SV.

 Panel

Input tag name in supervision to pop up the operation panel of FF block, the device
panel displays MV, PV, SV trends.

 Other

FFPID does not support the parameter alarm priority.

14.4.5 Flag

FFPID flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-8 Flag of FFPID

872
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 IMAN (Actual mode)
D2 LO (Actual mode)
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 CAS (Actual mode)
D6 RCAS (Actual mode)
D7 ROUT (Actual mode)
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 NEI
D10 PEI
D11 PVL
D12 PVLL
D13 PVH
D14 PVHH
D15 -
D16 MVH
D17 MVL
D18 SVH
D19 SVL
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

873
 Function Block Reference

14.5 FFAO
14.5.1 Overview

FFAO block represents the field device function block AO, by which DCS can monitor and control
field device AO.

14.5.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-9 FFAO parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Basic Operation Value Range

SVH_LI SV H Limit
Parameters TRUE Paramete SP_HI_LIM [SVSCL,SVSC
M Value
r H]
Operation Value Range
SVL_LI SV L Limit
TRUE Paramete SP_LO_LIM [SVSCL,SVSC
M Value
Limits r H]
Setting SV Velocity Operation
SVRH_L SP_RATE_U
H Limit TRUE Paramete
IM P Working in
Value r
AUTO, CAS,
Operation RCAS modes.
SVRL_LI SV Velocity L SP_RATE_D
TRUE Paramete
M Limit Value N
r
Associate
Configurat
transducer
CHANN ion
Channel TRUE CHANNEL block with
EL Paramete
same type of
r
device.
IO options. It Have functions
can be such as setting
Configurat
viewed and SV tracking
IO_OPT ion
configured TRUE IO_OPTS PV,
S Paramete
Signal by clicking direct/indirect
r
Convert “Settings” action and
Setting button. failsafe, etc.
Whether
Status generate alarm
options. It and transition
can be Configurat when it is in
STA_OP viewed and ion STATUS_OP statuses such
TRUE
TS configured Paramete TS as
by clicking r configuration
“Settings” performer fault/
button. LO Activation/
failsafe start.
Configurat
Scale PV Scale H ion Used by PV
Setting PV_SCH TRUE PV_SCALE and SV.
Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
PV Scale H ion
PV_SCL TRUE PV_SCALE
Limit Paramete
r

874
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
PV
ion
PV_EU Engineering TRUE PV_SCALE
Paramete
Unit
r
Configurat
PV_DLE PV Decimal ion
TRUE PV_SCALE
N Digits Paramete
r
Configurat
Field Signal
XD_SC ion
Scale H TRUE XD_SCALE
H Paramete
Limit
r
Configurat
Field Signal
ion
XD_SCL Scale H TRUE XD_SCALE
Paramete
Limit
r Used by OUT
Configurat and RBACK.
Field Signal ion
XD_EU TRUE XD_SCALE
Unit Paramete
r
Configurat
Field Signal
XD_DLE ion
Decimal TRUE XD_SCALE
N Paramete
Digits
r

Extended Cascade input,

Cascade
Parameters CSV － Input Pin CAS_IN set by user
Input
program.
CSV_ER Cascade
－ Input Pin － －
R Input Quality
Cascade
Input Pin
input status.
It can be
CSV_ST viewed and
－ Input Pin CAS_IN －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Output
OUT Output Value － OUT －
Pin Pin
OUT_E Output Output
－ － －
RR Quality Pin
Output
status, it can
OUT_ST be viewed by Output
－ OUT －
A clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Connect to
Feedback Output BKIN of
BKOUT － BKCAL_OUT
Output Value Pin upstream
block.

875
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
When
upstream block
is DCS
Feedback function block,
BKOUT Output
Output － － connect the pin
ERR Pin
Status to BKINERR
pin of
upstream
block.
Feedback
output
status, it can
BKO_ST Output
be viewed by － BKCAL_OUT －
A Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLCK_E viewed by g
－ BLOCK_ERR －
RR clicking Paramete
Alarm r
“Settings”
Indicatio
button.
n
Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － －
Paramete
r
Monitorin Original check
Process g or simulation,
PV － PV
Value Paramete PV_SCAL
r scale.
Process
Value Status,
Monitorin
it can be
g
PV_STA viewed by － PV
Paramete
clicking
r
“Settings”
button.
Monitorin Original check
Read Back g or simulation,
Real RBACK － READBACK
Value Paramete XD_SCALE
Status r scale.
Read Back
Value status,
Monitorin
it can be
RBACK_ g
viewed by READBACK －
STA Paramete
clicking
r
“Settings”
button.
When static
Monitorin parameter
Static g changes, the
ST_REV － ST_REV
Revision Paramete static revision
r will be
incremented.

876
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
MODE_ be viewed by g
－ MODE_BLK －
ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Change the
Manual parameter in
Operation
MANOU Operate OOS and MAN
TRUE Paramete －
T Output modes, to
r
Value change OUT
parameter.
Operation
Setpoint
SV TRUE Paramete SP －
Value
r
Setpoint
value status.
It can be
Operation
viewed and
SV_STA TRUE Paramete SP －
configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
Operate button.
Comma
Target
nd
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
TRG configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
PRM configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
NR configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Alarm Suppress Operation
Manage AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
ment Alarm r

877
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Enable
alarm in
controller. It
can be Operation Mapping
ENALM_
viewed and TRUE Paramete － function block
EX
configured r alarm enabled.
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Remote Operation In RCAS
RSVI Cascade TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN mode, input
Input r value.
Remote
setpoint
status. It can
be viewed Operation
RSVI_S
and TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN －
TA
configured r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Remote Monitorin In RCAS
Params Remote
g mode,
RSVO Cascade TRUE RCAS_OUT
Paramete feedback
Output
r output value.
Remote
cascade
output
status. It can Monitorin
RSVO_ be viewed g
TRUE RCAS_OUT －
STA and Paramete
configured r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Activate
Advance Operation failsafe
d FST_TI Failure Time, FSTATE_TIM
TRUE Paramete function when
Options ME (Unit: S) E
r reaching the
failure time.
Output the
value when
“Fault State to
Operation Value” of
FST_VA
Fault Value TRUE Paramete FSTATE_VAL IO_OPTS
L
r enabled and
failsafe
function
activated.

878
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Action of
remote
control
timeout. It
Operation
SHED_ can be
TRUE Paramete SHED_OPT －
OPT viewed and
r
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
P01_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
P02_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
P03_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.

879
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_ST be viewed by Extend device
－ －
A clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.5.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of AO

Figure 14-3 Schematic of AO

Algorithm

 Channel Setting

Associate function block and transducer via CHANNEL. Details refer to 14.1.2I/O Block
Channel Setting.

 SV Process

In CAS mode, SP can be worked out by CAS_IN. In RCAS mode, SP can be worked out
by RCAS_IN.
Perform H/L limits for SV via SP_HI_LIM, SP_LO_LIM. Perform rate limit for SV via
SP_RATE_DN, SP_RATE_UP 对 SV.

 Direct/Indirect Action

Set the direct/indirect action of AO via “Increase to close” option of IO_OPTS. When
enabled, invert the output value of AO in scale AO, and output to corresponding channel.

880
 Function Block Reference

 Signal Conversion

Temp = (SV - PV_SCL) / (PV_SCH - PV_SCL)

OUT = Temp * (XD_SCH- XD_SCL) +XD_SCL
Temp = (READBACK -XD_SCL) / (XD_SCH- XD_SCL)
PV = Temp * (PV_SCH - PV_SCL) + PV_SCL

 Supported Modes

OOS, IMAN, LO, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS.

 OOS: set Target Mode in OOS mode, or run the mode when configuration error
occurring. OOS keeps output.
 IMAN: when block output value cannot reach final output terminal via transducer
block, for example, the corresponding transducer block is in manual mode.
 LO: running the mode when failsafe function is activated.
 MAN: Target Mode is MAN, and not meets the condition of high priority. Set the
output value as MANOUT.
 AUTO: Target Mode is AUTO, and not meets the condition of high priority. Operator
change the SV, use SV to calculate output value.
 CAS: Target Mode is CAS, and not meets the condition of high priority. SV is
worked out via CSV set by upstream, and count Output Value with SV. Provide
BKOUT feedback to upstream block.
 RCAS: Target Mode is RCAS, and not meets the condition of high priority. SV is
worked out via RSVI, and count Output Value with SV. Provide RSVO feedback to
upstream block.

 Failsafe Function

Counting time started once the fault of block is detected. When it reaches FST_TIME,
failsafe function is activated. Keep output or output fault value. Details please refer to
14.1.3 Failsafe Function.

 Panel

Input tag name in supervision to pop up the operation panel of FF block, the device
panel displays OUT trends.

 Other

FFAO does not support simulation and parameter alarm priority.

881
 Function Block Reference

14.5.4 Flag

FFAO flag instruction is shown as below.

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 IMAN (Actual mode)
D2 TR (Actual mode)
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 CAS (Actual mode)
D6 RCAS (Actual mode)
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 OUTH
D17 OUTL
D18 SVH
D19 SVL
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

882
 Function Block Reference

14.6 FFDI
14.6.1 Overview

FFDI block represents the field device function block DI, by which DCS can monitor and control
the field device DI.

14.6.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-10 FFDI parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Associate
Configurat
transducer
CHAN ion
Channel TRUE CHANNEL block with
NEL Paramete
same type of
r
device.
Configure
IO options. It
“Invert”
can be
Configurat options,
viewed and
IO_OP ion whether to
Signal configured TRUE IO_OPTS
Basic TS Paramete invert when
Convert by clicking
Parameters r saving field
Setting “Settings”
detecting
button.
value to PV.
Status
options. It
can be Configurat
STA_O viewed and ion STATUS_OPT
TRUE －
PTS configured Paramete S
by clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Extended Output
OUT Output Value － OUT_D －
Parameters Pin
OUT_E Output Output
－ － －
RR Quality Pin
Output
Output
Pin
status, it can
OUT_S be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D －
TA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
Alarm it can be Monitorin
Indicatio BLCK_ viewed by g
－ BLOCK_ERR －
n ERR clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Monitorin
DISC_ g Discrete
Switch Alarm － DISC_ALM
ALM Paramete Alarm
r

883
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － －
Paramete
r
Monitorin Detecting
FLD_V Raw Input g Value of
－ FIELD_VAL_D
AL Value Paramete Hardware
r Channel
Raw input
status, it can Monitorin
FLD_S be viewed by g
－ FIELD_VAL_D －
TA clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Monitorin
Real Process g
PV － PV_D －
Status Value Paramete
r
Process
Value Status,
Monitorin
it can be
PV_ST g
viewed by － PV_D －
A Paramete
clicking
r
“Settings”
button.
Monitorin
ST_RE Static g
－ ST_REV －
V Revision Paramete
r
Actual
Operate mode, it can Monitorin
Comma MODE be viewed by g
－ MODE_BLK Actual mode
nd _ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
In OOS and
Manual MAN modes,
Operation
MANO Operate change
TRUE Paramete －
UT Output MANOUT to
r
Value change
Output Value.
Target
mode. It can
Target mode
be viewed
Operation should be
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK one of the
_TRG configured
r permitted
by clicking
modes.
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Permit Mode
_PRM configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

884
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Normal Mode
_NR configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r

Enable
fieldbus
alarm in
Alarm device. It
Manage Operation
can be
ment ENALM TRUE Paramete ALARM_SUM －
viewed and
r
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Enable
alarm in
controller. It
can be Operation
ENALM
viewed and TRUE Paramete － －
_EX
configured r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Signal Operation
PV_FTI Filter
Convert TRUE Paramete PV_FTIME －
ME Constant
Setting r
Operation
OUT_S Output
TRUE Paramete OUT_STATE －
Status TT status
r
Definitio
n Operation
XD_ST State of Field
TRUE Paramete XD_STATE －
T Value
r

Alarm Discrete Operation

DISC_ Discrete
Limits Alarm Status TRUE Paramete DISC_LIM
LIM Alarm Value
Setting Options r

Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device function
block

885
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Extend Pin1 Extend pin

status, it can status of actual
P01_S be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
TA clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin2 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P02_S be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
TA clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin3 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P03_S be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
TA clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device function
block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_S be viewed by Extend device function
－ －
TA clicking Pin block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.6.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of DI

886
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-4 Schematic of DI

Algorithm

 Filter Process

 Direct/Indirect Action

 Supported Modes

OOS, MAN, AUTO.

 Panel

Input tag name in supervision to pop up the operation panel of FF block, the device
panel displays OUT trends.

 Other

FFDI does not support the parameter alarm priority.

14.6.4 Flag

FFDI flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-11 Flag of FFDI

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -

887
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 DISC_ALM (Discrete Status Alarm )
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

888
 Function Block Reference

14.7 FFDO
14.7.1 Overview

FFDO block represents the field device function block DO, by which DCS can monitor and control
the field device DO.

14.7.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-12 FFDO parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Associate
Configurat
transducer
CHAN ion
Channel TRUE CHANNEL block with
NEL Paramete
same type of
r
device.
Configure
IO options. It
process
can be
Configurat variable invert,
viewed and
IO_OP ion track options of
configured TRUE IO_OPTS
TS Paramete SV, failsafe
Signal by clicking
Basic r mode and
Convert “Settings”
Parameters output invert,
Setting button.
etc.
Whether
Status generate alarm
options. It and transition
can be Configurat when it is in
STA_O viewed and ion STATUS_OP statuses such
TRUE
PTS configured Paramete TS as
by clicking r configuration
“Settings” performer fault/
button. LO Activation/
failsafe start.
Extended Cascade
CSV － Input Pin CAS_IN_D －
Parameters Input
CSV_E Cascade
－ Input Pin － －
RR Input Quality
Cascade
Input Pin input status.
It can be
CSV_S viewed and
－ Input Pin CAS_IN_D －
TA configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Output
OUT Output Value － OUT_D －
Pin Pin

OUT_E Output Output

－ － －
RR Quality Pin

889
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output
status, it can
OUT_S be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D －
TA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Feedback Output BKCAL_OUT
BKOUT － －
Output Value Pin _D
Feedback
BKOUT Output
Output － － －
ERR Pin
Status
Feedback
output
status, it can
BKO_S Output BKCAL_OUT
be viewed by － －
TA Pin _D
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
Alarm
BLCK_ viewed by g
Indicatio － BLOCK_ERR －
ERR clicking Paramete
n
“Settings” r
button.
Monitorin
Process g
PV － PV_D －
Value Paramete
r
Process
Value Status,
Monitorin
it can be
PV_ST g
viewed by － PV_D －
A Paramete
clicking
r
“Settings”
button.
Real
Status Monitorin
Read Back g READBACK_
RBCK － －
Value Paramete D
r
Monitorin
RBCK_ Read Back g READBACK_
－ －
STA Value Status Paramete D
r
Monitorin
ST_RE Static － g
ST_REV －
V Revision Paramete
r
Actual
Operate mode, it can Monitorin
Comma MODE be viewed by g
－ MODE_BLK Actual mode
nd _ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.

890
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

In OOS and
Manual MAN modes,
Operation
MANO Operate change
TRUE Paramete －
UT Output MANOUT to
r
Value change Output
Value.

Target
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Target Mode
_TRG configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Permit Mode
_PRM configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Normal Mode
_NR configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Operation
Setpoint
SV TRUE Paramete SP_D －
Value
r
Setpoint
value status.
It can be
Operation
SV_ST viewed and
TRUE Paramete SP_D －
A configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Suppress Operation
Alarm AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Manage Alarm r
ment Extend
FLAG Flag － － －
Pin
Activate
Advance Operation failsafe
d FST_V FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value TRUE Paramete function when
Options AL _D
r reaching the
failure time.

891
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output the
value when
“Fault State to
Operation Value” of
FST_TI FSTATE_TIM
Failure Time TRUE Paramete IO_OPTS
ME E
r enabled and
failsafe
function
activated.
Action of
remote
control
timeout. It
Operation
SHED_ can be
TRUE Paramete SHED_OPT －
OPT viewed and
r
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Remote Operation In RCAS
RSVI Cascade TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN_D mode, input
Input r value.
Remote
setpoint
status. It can
be viewed Operation
RSVI_
and TRUE Paramete RCAS_IN_D
STA
configured r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Remote
Params Remote Operation RCAS mode,
RCAS_OUT_
RSVO Cascade TRUE Paramete feedback
D
Output r output value.
Remote
cascade
output
status. It can
Operation
RSVO_ be viewed RCAS_OUT_
TRUE Paramete －
STA and D
r
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Operation
XD_ST Output
TRUE Paramete XD_STATE －
Status T status
r
Definitio
n Operation
PV_ST State of Field
TRUE Paramete PV_STATE －
T Value
r
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

892
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
P01_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
P02_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
P03_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_S be viewed by Extend device
－ －
TA clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.7.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of DO

893
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-5 Schematic of DO

Algorithm

 Failsafe Function

Details please refer to “Failsafe Function”.

 Supported Modes

OOS, LO, IMAN, MAN, AUTO, CAS, and RCAS. The MAN mode can be used to force
the output. It may be that MAN mode is not permitted, but it must be supported so that
MAN mode may be entered when leaving O/S. The IMAN mode is used to indicate that
there is no path to the final element.

 Panel

Input tag name in supervision to pop up the operation panel of FF block, the device
panel displays OUT trends.

 Other

FFDO does not support the parameter alarm priority.

14.7.4 Flag

FFDO flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-13 Flag of FFDO

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)

894
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D1 IMAN (Actual mode
D2 TR (Actual mode
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 CAS (Actual mode
D6 RCAS (Actual mode
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.8 FFARTHM
14.8.1 Overview

FFARTHM block represents the field device function block DO, by which DCS can monitor and
control the field device DO.

FFARTHM block provides general calculation function.

14.8.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-14 FFARTHM parameter instruction

895
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Arithmetic type.
It can be
Set Function
Basic viewed and
ARTH_ Operation Block
Parameters configured by TRUE ARITH_TYPE
TPY Parameter Arithmetic
clicking
Type
“Settings”
Operate button.
Param Input option Configure
settings. It can the process
be viewed and method
IN_OP Operation
configured by TRUE INPUT_OPTS when status
TS Parameter
clicking of input pin
“Settings” is failed or
button. suspicious.
Output
Operation Compensati
BIAS Bias Value TRUE BIAS
Parameter on Bias
Value
Bias Value for Operation Bias Value
BIAS1 TRUE BIAS_IN_1
IN1 Parameter for IN1
Bias Value for Operation Bias Value
BIAS2 TRUE BIAS_IN_2
IN2 Parameter for IN2
Gain and Bias Value for Operation Bias Value
BIAS3 TRUE BIAS_IN_3
Bias IN3 Parameter for IN3
Operation Feedforward
GAIN Gain Value TRUE GAIN
Parameter Gain Value
Gain Value for Operation Gain Value
GAIN1 TRUE GAIN_IN_1
IN1 Parameter for IN1
Gain Value for Operation Gain Value
GAIN2 TRUE GAIN_IN_2
IN2 Parameter for IN2
Gain Value for Operation Gain Value
GAIN3 TRUE GAIN_IN_3
IN3 Parameter for IN3
Input
CMPH Operation COMP_HI_LI
Compensation TRUE －
_LIM Parameter M
H Limit
Input
CMPL_ Operation COMP_LO_LI
Compensation TRUE －
LIM Parameter M
L Limit
Limits OUTH_ Operation
Output H Limit TRUE OUT_HI_LIM －
Setting LIM Parameter
OUTL_ Operation
Output L Limit TRUE OUT_LO_LIM －
LIM Parameter
INH_LI Operation
Input H Limit TRUE RANGE_HI －
M Parameter
INL_LI Operation
Input L Limit TRUE RANGE_LO －
M Parameter
Scale Configurati
OUT_S Output Scale H OUT_RANGE
Setting TRUE on －
CH Limit
Parameter
Configurati
OUT_S Output Scale H
TRUE on －
CL Limit
Parameter
Configurati
OUT_E
Output Unit TRUE on －
U
Parameter

896
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurati
OUT_D Output Decimal
TRUE on －
LEN Digits
Parameter
Configurati
PV_SC PV Scale H
TRUE on －
H Limit
Parameter
Configurati
PV_SC PV Scale H
TRUE on －
L Limit
Parameter
PV_SCALE
Configurati
PV_EU PV UNIT TRUE on －
Parameter
Configurati
PV_DL PV Decimal
TRUE on －
EN Digits
Parameter
Extended Input Pin IN Input Value － Input Pin IN －
Parameters
IN_ER
Input Quality － Input Pin － －
R
Input status. It
can be viewed
and configured
IN_STA － Input Pin IN －
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN_LO Local Input － Input Pin IN_LO －
IN_LO_ Local Input
－ Input Pin － －
ERR Quality
Local input
status. It can be
viewed and
IN_LO_
configured by － Input Pin IN_LO －
STA
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN1 IN1 － Input Pin IN_1
IN1_E
IN1 Quality － Input Pin － －
RR
IN1 status. It
can be viewed
IN1_ST and configured
－ Input Pin IN_1 －
A by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 IN2 － Input Pin IN_2 －
IN2_E
IN2 Quality － Input Pin － －
RR
IN2 status. It
can be viewed
IN2_ST and configured
－ Input Pin IN_2 －
A by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 IN3 － Input Pin IN_3 －

897
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN3_E
IN3 Quality － Input Pin － －
RR
IN3 status. It
can be viewed
IN3_ST and configured
－ Input Pin IN_3 －
A by clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Value － Output Pin OUT －
OUT_E
Output Quality － Output Pin － －
RR
Output
Output status, it
Pin
can be viewed
OUT_S
by clicking － Output Pin OUT －
TA
“Settings”
button.
Block error, it
can be viewed
BLCK_ Monitoring
by clicking － BLOCK_ERR －
ERR Parameter
“Settings”
button.
Monitoring
FLAG Flag － － －
Parameter
Alarm Suppress Operation
Param AOF TRUE － －
Module Alarm Parameter
Enable alarm in
controller. It
can be viewed
ENALM Operation
and configured TRUE － －
_EX Parameter
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Function
block
calculated
value, in
Real Calculated Monitoring AUTO
Status POUT － PRE_OUT
Output Value Parameter mode,
Output
Value OUT
is equal to
POUT.
Calculated
output status, it
POUT_ can be viewed Monitoring
－ PRE_OUT －
STA by clicking Parameter
“Settings”
button.
Input value
Monitoring of IN and
PV Process Value － PV
Parameter IN_LO
linear.

898
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Process Value
Status, it can
PV_ST be viewed by Monitoring
－ PV －
A clicking Parameter
“Settings”
button.
ST_RE Monitoring
Static Revision － ST_REV －
V Parameter
In OOS and
MAN
modes,
Manual
MANO Operation change
Operate Output TRUE －
UT Parameter MANOUT to
Value
change
Output
Value.
Actual mode, it
can be viewed
MODE Monitoring
by clicking － MODE_BLK Actual mode
_ACT Parameter
“Settings”
button.
Introduced
balanced
time to avoid
BAL_TI Operation
Balanced Time TRUE BAL_TIME jump when
ME Parameter
switching
manual to
auto.
Target mode. It
Target mode
can be viewed
should be
Operate MODE and configured Operation
TRUE MODE_BLK one of the
Param _TRG by clicking Parameter
permitted
“Settings”
modes.
button.
Permit mode. It
can be viewed
MODE and configured Operation Permit
TRUE MODE_BLK
_PRM by clicking Parameter Mode
“Settings”
button.
Normal mode.
It can be
Normal
viewed and
MODE Operation mode. Have
configured by TRUE MODE_BLK
_NR Parameter no influence
clicking
for control.
“Settings”
button.

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － Extend Pin －
associated
device
function block

899
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can be
actual
P01_S viewed by
－ Extend Pin configuration －
TA clicking
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － Extend Pin －
associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can be
actual
P02_S viewed by
－ Extend Pin configuration －
TA clicking
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － Extend Pin －
associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can be
actual
P03_S viewed by
－ Extend Pin configuration －
TA clicking
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － Extend Pin －
associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can be supported by
P04_S viewed by device
－ Extend Pin －
TA clicking function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.8.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of AR

900
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-6 Schematic of AR

Algorithm

Use IN and IN_LO to work out PV, and combine PV with IN1, IN2, IN3 to work out the function
value via selected ARTH_TYPE. Then perform gain and compensation, and limit process to work
out the final value. Count the Output Value according to mode.

 Equation for PV

PV = G*IN+ (1-G)*IN_LO
G is 0 for IN less than INL_LIM (FF parameter RANGE_LO), and it is 1 when IN is
greater than INH_LIM (FF parameter RANGE_HI). It is interpolated from 0 to 1 over the
range of INL_LIM to INH_LIM.

 Input Compensation

For each of IN1, IN2, IN3, there is a Gain and Bias, the compensation way is shown
below.
IN (k) enabled:

t (k )  GAIN (k )  ( BAIS (k )  IN (k ))

IN (k) disabled, t (k) applies the last good value.

 Calculation Modes

 Linear

func  f  PV

f  t (1) / t (2)

901
 Function Block Reference

 Square Root

func  f  PV

f  t (1) / t (2)

 Approximate

func  f  PV

f  t (1)  t (2)  t (3)

 BTU Flow

func  f  PV

f  t (1)  t (2)

 Traditional Multiply Divide

func  f  PV

f  (t (1) / t (2))  t (3)

 Average

func  ( PV  t (1)  t (2)  t (3)) / f

f =number of inputs used in computation (unusable inputs are not used).

 Traditional Summer

func  PV  t (1)  t (2)  t (3)

 Fourth order polynomial

func  PV  t (1) 2  t (2) 3  t (3) 4

 Simple HTG compensated level

 func  ( PV  t (1))
( PV  t (2))
 Fourth order polynomial based on PV

func  PV  GAIN1* PV 2  GAIN 2 * PV 3  GAIN 3 * PV 4

 Output Compensation

902
 Function Block Reference

Perform output compensation for calculated func by GAIN and BAIS. Compensation

mode is same with input compensation.

 Output Limit

Perform H/L limits for value performed output compensation and work out Algorithm
Output Value POUT (FF parameter PRE_OUT). In AUTO mode, Output Value is equal to
POUT.

 Supported Modes

OOS, MAN, AUTO.

14.8.4 Flag

FFARTHM flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-15 Flag of FFARTHM

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 OUTH
D17 OUTL
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR

903
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

904
 Function Block Reference

14.9 FFCTLSL
14.9.1 Overview

FFCTLSL block represents the field device function block Control Selector, by which DCS can
monitor and control the field device CS. FFCTLSL is mainly used to select control output variable.

14.9.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-16 FFCTLSL parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Input options
type. It can
be viewed Control
SEL Operation
Operate and options, have 3
_TP TRUE Paramete SEL_TPYE
Param configured choices, high,
YE r
by clicking low, middle.
“Settings”
button.
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE
H Limit Paramete
H
r
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE
L Limit Paramete
L
r
OUT_SCALE Output Scale
Configurat
OUT ion
Output Unit TRUE
_EU Paramete
Basic r
Parameters Configurat
OUT Output
ion
_DL Decimal TRUE
Paramete
EN Digits
Scale r
Setting Configurat
IN_S Input Scale ion
TRUE
CH H Limit Paramete
r
Configurat Input scale, not
IN_S Input Scale L ion FF parameter.
TRUE
CL Limit Paramete It will not
r influence
－
Configurat function block
IN_E Input Value ion logic process
TRUE but only
U Unit Paramete
r display them.
Configurat
Input
IN_D ion
Decimal TRUE
LEN Paramete
Digits
r
Extended Input IN1 IN1 － Input Pin SEL_1 －
Parameters Param
IN1_
IN1 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR

905
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN1 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN1_
configured － Input Pin SEL_1 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 IN2 － Input Pin SEL_2 －
IN2_
IN2 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN2 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN2_
configured － Input Pin SEL_2 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 IN3 － Input Pin SEL_3 －
IN3_
IN3 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN3 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN3_
configured － Input Pin SEL_3 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Connect to
BKI Feedback BKOUT of
Input Pin －
N Input downstream
function block.
When
downstream
block is DCS
BKI
Feedback function block,
NER － Input Pin －
Input Quality connect to
R
BKOUTERR of
downstream
function block.
Feedback
input status.
It can be
BKI
viewed and
N_S － Input Pin － －
configured
TA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Connect to
Output Feedback
BKO Output BKIN of
Param Output － BKCAL_SEL1
UT1 Pin upstream block
Value1
providing IN1.

906
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
If the upstream
block
connected to
Feedback
BKO IN1 is DCS
Output Output
1_E － － block, connect
Value1 Pin
RR the pin with
Quality
BKINERR pin
of upstream
block.
Feedback
Output
Value1
BKO
status, it can Output
1_ － BKCAL_SEL1 －
be viewed by Pin
STA
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Connect to
Feedback
BKO Output BKIN of
Output － BKCAL_SEL2
UT2 Pin upstream block
Value2
providing IN2.
If the upstream
block
connected to
Feedback
BKO IN2 is DCS
Output Output
2_E － － block, connect
Value2 Pin
RR the pin with
Quality
BKINERR pin
of upstream
block.
Feedback
output
BKO status, it can
Output
2_ be viewed by － BKCAL_SEL2 －
Pin
STA clicking
“Settings”
button.
Connect to
Feedback
BKO Output BKIN of
Output － BKCAL_SEL3
UT3 Pin upstream block
Value3
providing IN3.
If the upstream
block
connected to
Feedback
BKO IN3 is DCS
Output Output
3_E － － block, connect
Value3 Pin
RR the pin with
Quality
BKINERR pin
of upstream
block.
Feedback
Output
Value3
BKO
status, it can Output
3_ － BKCAL_SEL3 －
be viewed by Pin
STA
clicking
“Settings”
button.

907
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output
OUT Output Value － OUT －
Pin
OUT
Output Output
_ER － － －
Quality Pin
R
Output
status, it can
OUT
be viewed by Output
_ST － OUT －
clicking Pin
A
“Settings”
button.
Block error, it
can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Alarm Suppress Operation
Param AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Enable
alarm in
controller. It
ENA can be Operation
LM_ viewed and TRUE Paramete － －
EX configured r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Monitorin
Real ST_ Static g
－ ST_REV －
Status REV Revision Paramete
r

Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MO
be viewed by g
Param DE_ － MODE_BLK Actual mode
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.

In MAN and
Manual OOS modes,
Operation
MAN Operate change
TRUE Paramete －
OUT Output MANOUT to
r
Value change Output
Value

908
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Target
mode. It can
Target mode
be viewed
MO Operation should be one
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK of the
configured
TRG r permitted
by clicking
modes.
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Permit Mode
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Normal Mode
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Status
options. It
can be Configurat
STA
viewed and ion STATUS_OP Status process
_OP TRUE
configured Paramete TS options.
TS
by clicking r
“Settings”
button.
OUT Operation
Output H
H_LI TRUE Paramete OUT_HI_LIM －
Limit Value
Limits M r
Setting OUT Operation
Output L
L_LI TRUE Paramete OUT_LO_LIM －
Limit Value
M r
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
P01 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

909
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
P02 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
P03 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04
be viewed by Extend device
_ST － －
clicking Pin function block
A
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.9.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of CS

910
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-7 Schematic of CS

Algorithm

Function block provides 3 Input Pins for option, which connect Output Values of 3 upstream PID
blocks separately, through FFCTLSL, and select a valid output, to achieve the control of filed
execution device.

3. Mode

OOS: function block stops control logic calculation.

MAN: function block output does not calculated according to input, change the Output
Value via change MANOUT manually.
AUTO: according to input status, SEL_TYPE selects a channel input to output for the
function block.

4. Feedback Calculation

Function block provides 3 channels Feedback, which correspond to 3 channels Input Pin
separately. User connects Feedback pin to corresponding upstream function block
providing Input Pin, to achieve non-reference switch between different channels.
Status information of Feedback pin reflects that whether its Input Pin is selected or not.
14.9.4 Flag

FFCTLSL flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-17 Flag of FFCTLSL

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 IMAN (Actual mode)
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)

911
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 OUTH
D17 OUTL
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

912
 Function Block Reference

14.10 FFCUSTOM
14.10.1 Overview

FFCUSTOM is used to connect FF function blocks, excepting the supported 15 function blocks,
with the system. These function blocks can be FF standard function block, like RATIO, or custom
function blocks of manufacturer.

14.10.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-18 FFCUSTOM parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Basic Unassigned,
Parameters IN1 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN2 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN3 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN4 user can － Input Pin
customize it. After
associated
Unassigned, with pin
IN5 user can － Input Pin provided by
customize it. correspondin
Associate with
Unassigned, g device
selected FF
IN6 user can － Input Pin function
customize it. parameter. If
Input block, update
not selected,
Param Unassigned, and write the
not associate
IN7 user can － Input Pin associated
with FF
customize it. pin. If there is
parameter.
no associated
Unassigned, pin, it does
IN8 user can － Input Pin not represent
customize it. of FF
Unassigned, parameter.
IN9 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN10 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN11 user can － Input Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
IN12 user can － Input Pin
customize it.

Output Unassigned, Associate with After

Output
Param OUT1 user can － selected FF associated
Pin
customize it. parameter. If with pin
Unassigned, not selected, provided by
Output not associate correspondin
OUT2 user can －
Pin with FF g device
customize it.

913
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Unassigned, parameter. function
Output
OUT3 user can － block, update
Pin
customize it. the
Unassigned, associated
Output pin. If there is
OUT4 user can －
Pin no associated
customize it.
pin, it does
Unassigned, not represent
Output
OUT5 user can － of FF
Pin
customize it. parameter.
Unassigned,
Output
OUT6 user can －
Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
Output
OUT7 user can －
Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
Output
OUT8 user can －
Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
Output
OUT9 user can －
Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
OUT1 Output
user can －
0 Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
OUT1 Output
user can －
1 Pin
customize it.
Unassigned,
OUT1 Output
user can －
2 Pin
customize it.
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MOD Operation
and
E_TR TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Target Mode
configured
G r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operate MOD Operation
and
Param E_PR TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Permit Mode
configured
M r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MOD and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK Normal Mode
E_NR configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

914
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN1 status. It Represent of If the
can be the FF correspondin
Extended Input viewed and parameter g pin
IN1ST
Parameters Param configured － Input Pin status manages
A
by clicking associated device
“Settings” with function block
button. corresponding pin, the pin
IN2 status. It pin. If not associates
can be selected, it with FF pin
viewed and will not status. If not
IN2ST associate with associated, it
configured － Input Pin
A FF parameter. will not
by clicking
“Settings” represent of
button. FF
parameter.
IN3 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN3ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN4ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN5 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN5ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN6 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN6ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN7 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN7ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN8 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN8ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

915
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN9 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN9ST
configured － Input Pin
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN10 status.
It can be
viewed and
IN10S
configured － Input Pin
TA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN11status. It
can be
viewed and
IN11S
configured － Input Pin
TA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN12 status.
It can be
viewed and
IN12S
configured － Input Pin
TA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Represent of If the
value1 the FF correspondin
Output status, it can parameter g pin
OUT1 Output
Param be viewed by － status manages
STA Pin
clicking associated device
“Settings” with function block
button. corresponding pin, the pin
Output pin. If not associates
value2 selected, it with FF pin
status, it can will not status. If not
OUT2 Output associate with associated, it
be viewed by －
STA Pin FF parameter. will not
clicking
“Settings” represent of
button. FF
parameter.
Output
value3
status, it can
OUT3 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value4
status, it can
OUT4 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.

916
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output
value5
status, it can
OUT5 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value6
status, it can
OUT6 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value7
status, it can
OUT7 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value8
status, it can
OUT8 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value9
status, it can
OUT9 Output
be viewed by －
STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value10
status, it can
OUT1 Output
be viewed by －
0STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value11
status, it can
OUT1 Output
be viewed by －
1STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output
value12
status, it can
OUT1 Output
be viewed by －
2STA Pin
clicking
“Settings”
button.

917
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － －
Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
Alarm AOF Module TRUE Paramete －
Param Alarm r
Block error, it
can be Monitorin Correspond
BLCK viewed by g to Device
－ BLOCK_ERR
_ERR clicking Paramete Function
“Settings” r Block
button.
Monitorin
Real-time ST_R Static g
－ ST_REV
Status EV Revision Paramete
r
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
MOD
Operate be viewed by g
E_AC － MODE_BLK
Param clicking Paramete
T
“Settings” r
button.
14.10.3 Instruction Details

FFCUSTOM does not for a specific device function block, thus its algorithm is same with the
algorithm of specified device function block. FFCUSTOM can achieve data display and sending of
device function block pin.

User allocates FFCUSTOM to device function block, then configures each pin, and associates
them to pins of specified device function block. After configuration, the pin of device function block
can be monitored.

FFCUSTOM does not support the non-pin parameter of device function block.

Type parameter and BLOCK_ERR of function block associate corresponding parameter of device
function block as default.

14.10.4 Flag

FFCUSTOM flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-19 Flag of FFCUSTOM

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 IMAN (Actual mode)
D2 TR (Actual mode)
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 CAS (Actual mode)

918
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D6 RCAS (Actual mode)
D7 ROUT (Actual mode)
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.11 FFINT
14.11.1 Overview

FFINT block represents the field device integral function block Integrator, by which DCS can
monitor and control the field device Integrator.

FFINT can achieve accumulation for 2-channel input. It supports to accumulate rate signal and
accumulation signal. With the accumulation for flow signal by FFINT, total quality or total volume of
a period can be provided. FFINT has 2 accumulation modes, positive and negative, and it provides
accumulated reset function.

14.11.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-20 FFINT parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

919
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Reset period.
When setting
CLC as periodic
Basic Operation
K_P Integration reset mode,
Parameters TRUE Paramete CLOCK_PER
Period reset will be
ER r
performed
after the
period.
It will influence
whether the
final output
GO Operation
Good Status value status is
OD_ TRUE Paramete GOOD_LIM
L Limit Value good. Details
LIM r
refer to status
process of
Algorithm.
When
accumulated
SV distance is
PRE Distance Operation
less than the
_TRI Before Trip TRUE Paramete PRE_TRIP
value, PTRIP
P Limit r
indication will
Operate
Param be generated
and output.

When apply
SV reset
mode, when
accumulation
Integration Operation reaches SV,
SV Setpoint TRUE Paramete TOTAL_SP TRIP indication
Value r generates,
perform reset
or not
according to
the mode.

Influence
whether the
final out value
UNC Uncertain Operation
status is
R_LI Status L TRUE Paramete UNCERT_LIM
uncertain.
M Limit Value r
Details refer to
status process
in Algorithm.
Integration
options. It
Set the input
can be Configurat
Integratio INT_ signal and
viewed and ion
n Mode OPT TRUE INTEG_OPTS define status
configured Paramete
S process mode,
by clicking r
etc.
“Settings”
button.

920
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Integration
type. It can
be viewed Configurat Set integration
INT_
and ion direction and
TYP TRUE INTEG_TYPE
configured Paramete reset mode,
E
by clicking r etc.
“Settings”
button.
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE
H Limit Paramete
H
r
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE
L Limit Paramete Have no
L
Scale r influence for
Setting Configurat control
OUT ion algorithm.
Output Unit TRUE OUT_RANGE
_EU Paramete
r
Configurat
OUT Output
ion
_DL Decimal TRUE OUT_RANGE
Paramete
EN Digits
r
Extended Input IN1 IN1 － Input Pin IN_1
Parameters Param
IN1_
IN1 Quality － Input Pin －
ERR
IN1 status. It
can be －
viewed and
IN1_
configured － Input Pin IN_1
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 IN2 － Input Pin IN_2
IN2_
IN2 Quality － Input Pin －
ERR
IN2 status. It
can be －
viewed and
IN2_
configured － Input Pin IN_2
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Reset Program Reset
RIN － Input Pin RESET_IN
Command Signal Input
Reset
RIN_
Command － Input Pin －
ERR
Quality

921
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Reset
command
status. It can
be viewed
RIN_
and － Input Pin RESET_IN
STA
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN1
REV Positive/Neg
－ Input Pin REV_FLOW1
1 ative Integral
Type
IN1
REV
Positive/Neg
1_E － Input Pin
ative Integral
RR IN1
Type Quality
Positive/Negati
IN1
ve Integral
Positive/neg
Type
ative integral
type status.
REV
It can be
1_S － Input Pin REV_FLOW1
viewed and
TA
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2
REV Positive/Neg
－ Input Pin REV_FLOW2
2 ative Integral
Type
IN2
REV
Positive/Neg
2_E － Input Pin －
ative Integral
RR IN2
Type Quality
Positive/Negati
IN2
ve Integral
Positive/neg
Type
ative integral
type status.
REV
It can be
2_S － Input Pin REV_FLOW2
viewed and
TA
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Output
OUT Output Value － OUT
Param Pin

OUT
Output Output
_ER － －
Quality Pin
R Integration
Output Output Value
status, it can
OUT
be viewed by Output
_ST － OUT
clicking Pin
A
“Settings”
button.

922
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Integration
PTR Output
Pre-finished － OUT_PTRIP
P Pin
Sign
PTR Integration
Output
P_E Pre-finished － －
Pin Work with
RR Sign Quality
PRE_TRIP to
Integration
indicate
pre-finished
pre-integration.
sign status, it
PTR
can be Output
P_S － OUT_PTRIP
viewed by Pin
TA
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Integration
Output
TRIP Finished － OUT_TRIP
Pin
Sign
TRIP Integration
Output
_ER Finished － －
Pin
R Sign Quality Integration
Integration Finished Sign
finished sign
TRIP status, it can
Output
_ST be viewed by － OUT_TRIP
Pin
A clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm
Param Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
Real NUM
Reset g
Status _RS － N_RESET －
Counter Paramete
T
r

Percent of Monitorin
PCT
Integral g
_INC － PCT_INCL －
Value with Paramete
L
Good Status r

Accumulated
Absolute Monitorin
RTO Value of g
－ RTOTAL －
TAL Input With Paramete
Rejected r
Status

923
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Monitorin
SRT RTOTAL
g
OTA Value Before － SRTOTAL －
Paramete
L Reset
r
Monitorin
SV Value
g
SSV Before － SSP －
Paramete
Reset
r
Monitorin
TOTAL
STO g
Value Before － STOTAL －
TAL Paramete
Reset
r
Monitorin
Other ST_ Static g
－ ST_REV －
Param REV Revision Paramete
r
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MO
be viewed by g
Param DE_ － MODE_BLK －
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
TRG r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Operate reset
Operation command,
Reset
RST TRUE Paramete OP_CMD_INT parameter will
Command
r reset
automatically.
Operation
OTG Initialization
TRUE Paramete OUTAGE_LIM －
_LIM Limit Time
r

924
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
When IN1 is
pulse signal, it
PLS Operation means the
IN1
_VA TRUE Paramete PULSE_VAL1 actual value
Coefficient
L1 r represented by
one pulse of
IN1.
When IN2 is
pulse signal, it
PLS Operation means the
IN2
_VA TRUE Paramete PULSE_VAL2 actual value
Coefficient
L2 r represented by
one pulse of
IN2.
When the two
Convert channels are
UNT Operation
Coefficient rate signals,
_CO TRUE Paramete UNIT_CONV
from IN2 to convert IN2 to
NV r
IN1 IN1 by the
parameter.
In OOS and
Manual MAN modes,
Operation
MAN Operate change
TRUE Paramete －
OUT Output MANOUT to
r
Value change output
value.
Configurat
T_U IN1 Rate ion
TRUE TIME_UNIT1 －
NIT1 Time Type Paramete
r
Time Unit
Configurat
T_U IN2 Rate ion
TRUE TIME_UNIT2 －
NIT2 Time Type Paramete
r
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin1 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P01
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device function
block

925
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Extend Pin2 Extend pin

status, it can status of actual
P02
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin3 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P03
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device function
block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04
be viewed by Extend device function
_ST － －
clicking Pin block
A
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.11.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of Integrator

926
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-8 Schematic of Integrator

Algorithm

 Inputs

The basic function of the FFINT block is to integrate an analog value over time. It can
also accumulate the pulses coming from Pulse Input block or from other FFINT. The
block has 2 dual purpose inputs, IN1 and IN2. If IN2 is not connected, then calculations
for IN2 may be omitted. Input signals include rate signal and accumulation signal. User
can select signal type via IN1 accumulation and IN2 accumulation option of INT_OPTS.
When selected, it is accumulation signal, otherwise, it is rate signal.
 Rate
Rate input signal requires for rate time, and each input needs a parameter to define the
rate time unit: T_UNIT1 or T_UNIT2. The time units are used to convert the two rates in
unit of second.
The second input may have to be converted into the same units of the first input. This is
achieved by a unit conversion factor, given by the parameter UNT_CONV.

The following diagram is an example of the use of two rate inputs:

927
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-9 Increment Calculation with Rate Input

 Accum
When input signal comes from pulse block output, the input signal represents a
continuous accumulation of pulses signal, and the block should determine the deviation
value since the last execution.
The pulse signal will restart from 0 once it reaches a certain number. This situation
should be distinguished by integral block and perform special process. The pulse
accumulation of integral block wraps up when the counting reaches 999,999 and does
not increment or decrement by more than 499,999 per cycle, which means the block can
only accumulate the output pulse signal by above method.
The block can convert the accumulation of pulse to actual value to output via PLS_VAL1
and PLS_VAL2, for example, quality, volume, etc.

Figure 14-10 Increment Calculation with Counter Input

 Positive/Negative Accumulation

User can indicates 2 channels input value as positive and negative accumulation. When
REV*=1, invert IN* and accumulate. For example, for a device with inflow and outflow,

928
 Function Block Reference

set the input of inflow as positive accumulation, and set the REV2 of outflow IN2 as 1 to
achieve negative accumulation, to accumulate the net flow of device.

 Accumulation Method.

Output value can start positive accumulation from 0, and start negative accumulation
from SV. It provides reset methods, such as automatic rest, period reset and command
reset when accumulating. Above function can be configured via INT_TYPE, and
following methods can be supported:
 0 to SP-auto reset at SP: start positive accumulation from 0 to SV. When the
accumulation reaches SV, automatic reset for function block will be performed.
 0 to SP-demand reset: start positive accumulation from 0 to SV. Automatic reset for
function block will not be performed only when inputting reset.
 SP to 0-auto reset at SP: start negative accumulation from SV to 0. When the
accumulation reaches 0, automatic reset for function block will be performed.
 SP to 0-demand reset: start negative accumulation from SV to 0. Automatic reset for
function block will not be performed only when inputting reset.
 0 to ?-periodic reset: start positive accumulation from 0, reset for function block will
be performed based on the reset period CLOCK_PE.
 0 to ?-demand reset: start positive accumulation from 0. Automatic reset for function
block will not be performed only when inputting reset.
 0 to ?-periodic and demand reset: start positive accumulation from 0. Period reset
for function block will be performed by time, or when inputting reset.
TRIP and PTRIP can calculate for the former 4 accumulation methods, but for later 3
modes, SV, TRIP, PTRIP will not work. For the fifth accumulation mode, it will not
respond for the RIN reset of program input, but will respond for the RST reset command.

 Reset

 Reset Method
Perform reset via RIN (FF parameter RESET_IN) input pin. When input is 1, it is the
reset signal. When input is 0, not perform reset.
Operator performs reset for function block via RST (FF parameter OP_CMD_INT). RST
is an instant switch. Once reset command is reached and reset function is enabled,
initialization of RST as OFF will started right now.
 Save Reset Value

929
 Function Block Reference

When resetting, function block will save current accumulation types OUT, RTOTAL, SV
to STOTAL, SRTOTAL, SSV separately. These values will keep until next reset.
 Reset Time Limit
Function block will not respond to the new reset requirement in 5s last reset started.
 Reset Counter
Function block counts the reset times and saves in NUM_RST. NUM_RST cannot be
changed and reset. It will accumulate from 0 to 999999 in cycle.

 Output Completion Indication

In positive accumulation, when difference between output value and SV is equal to or

less than PRE_TRIP, function block generates indication, and Discrete Output PTRIP is
ON. When Output Value is equal to or larger than SV, function block generates indication,
Discrete Output TRIP is ON.
In negative accumulation, Output Value is equal to or less than PRE_TRIP, function
block generates indication, Discrete Output PTRIP is ON. When Output Value reaches 0,
function block generates indication, Discrete Output TRIP is ON.

 Supported Modes

OOS, MAN, AUTO.

In MAN mode, function block will not start accumulation. User can change MANOUT to
change OUT. When mode of function block turns from MAN to AUTO, function block
accumulates from current value. Reset Counter will count the times that OUT is changed
via MANOUT.

 Status Process

Function block determine the input signal status, and combines “Use Uncertain” and
“Use Bad”, “Add zero if bad” options of INT_OPTS, to perform different types of
accumulation for input with bad or suspicious status.
PCT_INCL refers to the percent of input value with good status in total accumulation.
 When PCT_INCL  GOOD_LIM, OUT status is Good.
 When PCT_INCL  UNCR_LIM, OUT status is Uncertain.
 Else, OUT status is Bad.
14.11.4 Flag

FFINT flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-21 Flag of FFINT

930
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26 -
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.12 FFISEL
14.12.1 Overview

FFISEL represents the field device input selection function block ISEL, by which DCS can monitor
and control the field device ISEL.

FFISEL selects from the 4-channel input signals based on configuration and gets the final output
value. Generally, it receives check signal from AI block, and supports selection modes such as
maximum, minimum, middle average and first good. It provides a soft switch.

14.12.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-22 FFISEL parameter instruction

931
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output Bad
when
Minimum number of
MIN Operation
Operate Limit With input signal
_GO － Paramete MIN_GOOG
Param Good Input with good
OD r
Status status is less
than the
parameter.
Input options Set selection
type. It can modes:
be viewed maximum,
SEL Operation
and SELECT_TY minimum,
_TP － Paramete
configured PE middle
YE r
by clicking average and
“Settings” first good,
Options button. etc.
Setting Status
options. It
can be Configurat
STA Status
viewed and ion STATUS_OP
_OP TRUE process
configured Paramete TS
TS options.
Basic by clicking r
Parameters “Settings”
button.
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE －
H Limit Paramete
H
r
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE －
H Limit Paramete
L
r

Configuration
Parameter Configurat
OUT ion
Output Unit TRUE OUT_RANGE －
_EU Paramete
r

Configurat
OUT Output
ion
_DL Decimal TRUE OUT_RANGE －
Paramete
EN Digits
r
Extended Input Param IN1 IN1 － Input Pin IN_1 －
Parameters
IN1_
IN1 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN1 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN1_
configured － Input Pin IN_1 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 IN2 － Input Pin IN_2 －
IN2_
IN2 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR

932
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN2 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN2_
configured － Input Pin IN_2 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 IN3 － Input Pin IN_3 －
IN3_
IN3 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN3 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN3_
configured － Input Pin IN_3 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 IN4 － Input Pin IN_4 －
IN4_
IN4 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN4 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN4_
configured － Input Pin IN_4 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN1 Disable
DIS1 － Input Pin DISABLE_1 －
Switch
DIS1 IN1 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN1 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS1 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_1 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

IN2 Disable
DIS2 － Input Pin DISABLE_2 －
Switch

DIS2 IN2 Disable

_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality

933
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN2 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS2 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_2 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 Disable
DIS3 － Input Pin DISABLE_3 －
Switch
DIS3 IN3 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN3 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS3 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_3 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 Disable
DIS4 － Input Pin DISABLE_4 －
Switch
DIS4 IN4 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN4 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS4 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_4 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Input
OP_
Selected － Input Pin OP_SELECT －
SEL
Number
Input
OP_
Selected
S_E － Input Pin － －
Number
RR
Quality
Input
OP_
Selected
S_S － Input Pin OP_SELECT －
Number
TA
Status
Output Param Output
OUT Output Value － OUT －
Pin
OUT
Output Output
_ER － － －
Quality Pin
R

934
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output
status, it can
OUT
be viewed by Output
_ST － OUT －
clicking Pin
A
“Settings”
button.

Select input
Selected Output number.
SEL － SELECTED
Parameter Pin When not
select, it is 0.

SEL Selected
Output
_ER Parameter － － －
Pin
R Quality
Selected
Parameter
SEL status, it can
Output
_ST be viewed by － SELECTED －
Pin
A clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm Param Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
ST_ Static g
－ ST_REV －
REV Revision Paramete
r
Real Status
Manual
Operation
MAN Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
OUT Output
r
Value
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MO
be viewed by g
Param DE_ － MODE_BLK －
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.

935
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
TRG r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Pin Extend configuration
P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
P01 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
P02 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

936
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
P03 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04
be viewed by Extend device
_ST － －
clicking Pin function block
A
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.12.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of ISEL

Figure 14-11 Schematic of ISEL

Algorithm

 Input Process

When Input Pin DIS* is 1, function block will not process corresponding IN* pin.

937
 Function Block Reference

Combine the “Use Uncertain as Good” and “Uncertain if Man mode” options of
STA_OPTS to process Uncertain Status of Input Pin. Pin with Bad status will not be
selected.
After above process, if there is no available Input Pin or the number of available Input
Pin is less than MIN_GOOD, Output PinSEL is 0, and selection will not be performed.

 Select Modes

1. When OP_SEL is not 0, select input of serial number corresponding to OP_SEL.

SEL_TYPE does not work. SEL is select serial number.

2. When OP_SEL is 0, select based on SEL_TYPE.

 First good: select the first available input with good status to output.
 Minimum: sort the available input pins, select the smallest input to output.
 Maximum: sort the available input pins, select the largest input to output.
 Middle: sort the available input pins, if the input pin number is odd, select the middle
input to output, SEL is the serial number of selected input pin. If the number is even,
remove the maximum and minimum and work out the average of left 2 input pins,
SEL is 0.
 Average: calculate the average of available input pin to output.
14.12.4 Flag

FFISEL flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-23 Flag of FFISEL

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -

938
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.13 FFISEL_EX
14.13.1 Overview

Main function of FFISEL_EX block please refers to Overview of FFISEL.

14.13.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-24 FFISEL_EX parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output Bad
when
Minimum number of
Basic MIN Operation
Operate Limit With input signal
Parameters _GO － Paramete MIN_GOOG
Param Good Input with good
OD r
Status status is less
than the
parameter.
Input options Set selection
type. It can modes:
be viewed maximum,
Options SEL Operation
and SELECT_TY minimum,
Setting _TP － Paramete
configured PE middle
YE r
by clicking average and
“Settings” first good,
button. etc.

939
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Status
options. It
can be Configurat
STA Status
viewed and ion STATUS_OP
_OP TRUE process
configured Paramete TS
TS options.
by clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE －
H Limit Paramete
H
r
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC TRUE OUT_RANGE －
H Limit Paramete
L
Configuration r
Parameter Configurat
OUT ion
Output Unit TRUE OUT_RANGE －
_EU Paramete
r
Configurat
OUT Output
ion
_DL Decimal TRUE OUT_RANGE －
Paramete
EN Digits
r

Extended
Input Param IN1 IN1 － Input Pin IN_1 －
Parameters

IN1_
IN1 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN1 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN1_
configured － Input Pin IN_1 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 IN2 － Input Pin IN_2 －
IN2_
IN2 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN2 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN2_
configured － Input Pin IN_2 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 IN3 － Input Pin IN_3 －
IN3_
IN3 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR

940
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN3 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN3_
configured － Input Pin IN_3 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 IN4 － Input Pin IN_4 －
IN4_
IN4 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN4 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN4_
configured － Input Pin IN_4 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN5 IN5 － Input Pin IN_5 －
IN5_
IN5 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN5 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN5_
configured － Input Pin IN_5 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN6 IN6 － Input Pin IN_6 －
IN6_
IN6 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR
IN6 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN6_
configured － Input Pin IN_6 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN7 IN7 － Input Pin IN_7 －

IN7_
IN7 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR

IN7 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN7_
configured － Input Pin IN_7 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN8 IN8 － Input Pin IN_8 －
IN8_
IN8 Quality － Input Pin － －
ERR

941
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN8 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN8_
configured － Input Pin IN_8 －
STA
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN1 Disable
DIS1 － Input Pin DISABLE_1 －
Switch
DIS1 IN1 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN1 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS1 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_1 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 Disable
DIS2 － Input Pin DISABLE_2 －
Switch
DIS2 IN2 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN2 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS2 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_2 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 Disable
DIS3 － Input Pin DISABLE_3 －
Switch
DIS3 IN3 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN3 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS3 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_3 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 Disable
DIS4 － Input Pin DISABLE_4 －
Switch

DIS4 IN4 Disable

_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality

942
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN4 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS4 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_4 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN5 Disable
DIS5 － Input Pin DISABLE_5 －
Switch
DIS5 IN5 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN5 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS5 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_5 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN6 Disable
DIS6 － Input Pin DISABLE_6 －
Switch
DIS6 IN6 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN6 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS6 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_6 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN7 Disable
DIS7 － Input Pin DISABLE_7 －
Switch
DIS7 IN7 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality
IN7 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS7 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_7 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN8 Disable
DIS8 － Input Pin DISABLE_8 －
Switch
DIS8 IN8 Disable
_ER Switch － Input Pin － －
R Quality

943
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN8 Disable
Switch
Status. It can
DIS8 be viewed
_ST and － Input Pin DISABLE_8 －
A configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Input
OP_
Selected － Input Pin OP_SELECT －
SEL
Number
Input
OP_
Selected
S_E － Input Pin － －
Number
RR
Quality
Input
OP_
Selected
S_S － Input Pin OP_SELECT －
Number
TA
Status
Output
OUT Output Value － OUT －
Pin
OUT
Output Output
_ER － － －
Quality Pin
R
Output
status, it can
OUT
be viewed by Output
_ST － OUT －
clicking Pin
A
“Settings”
button.
Select input
Selected Output number.
SEL － SELECTED
Parameter Pin When not
select, it is 0.
SEL Selected
Output Param Output
_ER Parameter － － －
Pin
R Quality
Selected
Parameter
SEL status, it can
Output
_ST be viewed by － SELECTED －
Pin
A clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Discrete Output
－ OUT_D －
_D Output Value Pin
OUT Discrete
Output
_D_ Output － － －
Pin
ER Quality
OUT Discrete
Output
_D_ Output － OUT_D －
Pin
ST status

944
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm Param Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
ST_ Static g
Real Status － ST_REV －
REV Revision Paramete
r
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
MO
be viewed by g
DE_ － MODE_BLK －
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.
Manual
Operation
MAN Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
OUT Output
r
Value
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
TRG r
by clicking
Operate “Settings”
Param button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
14.13.3 Instruction Details

Instruction details of FFISEL_EX please refer to 14.12.3 Instruction Details.

945
 Function Block Reference

14.13.4 Flag

FFISEL_EX flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-25 Flag of FFISEL_EX

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

946
 Function Block Reference

14.14 FFMAI
14.14.1 Overview

FFMAI represents the field device input selection function block MAI, by which DCS can monitor
and control the field device MAI.

FFMAI supports detect and input of 8-channel analog signal.

14.14.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-26 FFMAI parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Set the
selection
modes of 8
Configurat
Basic Signal CHA channels,
ion
Parameters Convert NNE Channel TRUE CHANNEL including
Paramete
Setting L unified
r
setting and
separate
setting.
Configurat
Configuration OUT
Output Scale ion
Parameter _SC － － －
H Limit Paramete
H
r

947
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
OUT
Output Scale ion
_SC － － －
H Limit Paramete
L
r
Configurat
OUT ion
Output Unit － － －
_EU Paramete
r
Extended Output Param OUT Output Output
－ OUT_1 －
Parameters 1 Value1 Pin
OUT Output
Output
1_E Value1 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value1
OUT status, it can
Output
1_S be viewed by － OUT_1 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_2 －
2 Value2 Pin
OUT Output
Output
2_E Value2 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value2
OUT status, it can
Output
2_S be viewed by － OUT_2 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.

OUT Output Output

－ OUT_3 －
3 Value3 Pin

OUT Output
Output
3_E Value3 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value3
OUT status, it can
Output
3_S be viewed by － OUT_3 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_4 －
4 Value4 Pin
OUT Output
Output
4_E Value4 － － －
Pin
RR Quality

948
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Output
value4
OUT status, it can
Output
4_S be viewed by － OUT_4 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_5 －
5 Value5 Pin
OUT Output
Output
5_E Value5 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value5
OUT status, it can
Output
5_S be viewed by － OUT_5 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_6 －
6 Value6 Pin
OUT Output
Output
6_E Value6 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
Value6
OUT status, it can
Output
6_S be viewed by － OUT_6 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_7 －
7 Value7 Pin
OUT Output
Output
7_E Value7 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value7
OUT status, it can
Output
7_S be viewed by － OUT_7 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.
OUT Output Output
－ OUT_8 －
8 Value8 Pin
OUT Output
Output
8_E Value8 － － －
Pin
RR Quality
Output
value8
OUT status, it can
Output
8_S be viewed by － OUT_8 －
Pin
TA clicking
“Settings”
button.

949
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm Param Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
ST_ Static g
－ ST_REV －
REV Revision Paramete
r
Manual
MAN Operation
Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
1 r
Value1
Manual
MAN Operation
Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
2 r
Value2
Manual
MAN Operation
Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
3 r
Value3
Manual
MAN Operation
Real Status Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
4 r
Value4
Manual
Operation
MAN Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
OU5 Output
r
Value5
Manual
Operation
MAN Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
OU6 Output
r
Value6
Manual
MAN Operation
Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
7 r
Value7
Manual
MAN Operation
Operate
OUT TRUE Paramete － －
Output
8 r
Value8
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MO
be viewed by g
Param DE_ － MODE_BLK －
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.

950
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
TRG r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Configurat
OUT Output
Configuration ion
_DL Decimal － － －
Parameter Paramete
EN Digits
r
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Pin Extend configuration
P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device function
block

Extend Pin1 Extend pin

status, it can status of actual
P01
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin2 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P02
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block

951
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device function
block

Extend Pin3 Extend pin

status, it can status of actual
P03
be viewed by Extend configuration
_ST － －
clicking Pin associated
A
“Settings” device function
button. block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device function
block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04
be viewed by Extend device function
_ST － －
clicking Pin block
A
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.14.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of MAI Process Flowchart

Figure 14-12 Schematic of MAI

952
 Function Block Reference

Algorithm

FFMAI can process 8 input channels simultaneously. It supports modes of OOS, MAN, AUTO.

14.14.4 Flag

FFMAI flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-27 Flag of FFMAI

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

953
 Function Block Reference

14.15 FFMAO
14.15.1 Overview

FFMAO represents the field device input selection function block MAO, by which DCS can monitor
and control the field device MAO.

14.15.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-28 FFMAO parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Set the
selection
modes of 8
Configurat
Signal channels,
Basic CHANN ion
Convert Channel TRUE CHANNEL including
Parameters EL Paramete
Setting unified
r
setting and
separate
setting.
Extended Input IN1 Remote SV1 － Input Pin IN_1 －
Parameters Param
IN1_ER Remote SV1
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV1
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN1_STA － Input Pin IN_1 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.

954
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN2 Remote SV2 － Input Pin IN_2 －
IN2_ER Remote SV2
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV2
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN2_STA － Input Pin IN_2 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 Remote SV3 － Input Pin IN_3 －
IN3_ER Remote SV3
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV3
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN3_STA － Input Pin IN_3 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 Remote SV4 － Input Pin IN_4 －
IN4_ER Remote SV4
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV4
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN4_STA － Input Pin IN_4 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN5 Remote SV5 － Input Pin IN_5 －
IN5_ER Remote SV5
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV5
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN5_STA － Input Pin IN_5 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN6 Remote SV6 － Input Pin IN_6 －
IN6_ER Remote SV6
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV6
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN6_STA － Input Pin IN_6 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.

955
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
IN7 Remote SV7 － Input Pin IN_7 －
IN7_ER Remote SV7
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV7
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN7_STA － Input Pin IN_7 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN8 Remote SV8 － Input Pin IN_8 －
IN8_ER Remote SV8
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV8
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN8_STA － Input Pin IN_8 －
configured by
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm, it
Monitorin
can be viewed
BLCK_E g
by clicking － BLOCK_ERR －
RR Paramete
“Settings”
r
button.
Alarm Monitorin
Param g
FLAG Flag － － －
Paramete
r
Operation
Suppress
AOF TRUE Paramete － －
Module Alarm
r
Monitorin
Static g
ST_REV － ST_REV －
Revision Paramete
Actual r
Param Monitorin
FST_ST Fault g FSTATE_STA
－ －
A Indication Paramete TUS
r
Actual mode,
it can be Monitorin
Operate MODE_ viewed by g
Param － MODE_BLK －
ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Target mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE_
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
TRG
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

956
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Permit mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE_
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
PRM
clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Normal mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE_
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
NR
clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Operation
FST_TI FSTATE_TIM
Failure Time TRUE Paramete －
ME E
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value1 TRUE Paramete Fault Value1
L1 _1
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value2 TRUE Paramete Fault Value2
L2 _2
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value3 TRUE Paramete Fault Value3
L3 _3
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value4 TRUE Paramete Fault Value4
L4 _4
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value5 TRUE Paramete Fault Value5
L5 _5
r
Advance
Operation
d FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value6 TRUE Paramete Fault Value6
Options L6 _6
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value7 TRUE Paramete Fault Value7
L7 _7
r

Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL
Fault Value8 TRUE Paramete Fault Value8
L8 _8
r

Failsafe
options. It can
be viewed
Operation
MO_OP and
TRUE Paramete MO_OPTS －
T configured by
r
clicking
“Settings”
button.

957
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
P01_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
P02_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
P03_ST be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
A clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.

958
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_ST be viewed by Extend device
－ －
A clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
Extend
Input Value
IN_SCH － Paramete － －
Scale H Limit
r
Extend
Input Value
IN_SCL － Paramete － －
Signal Scale H Limit
r
Convert
Setting Extend
Input Value
IN_EU － Paramete － －
Unit
r
Extend
IN_DLE Input Decimal
－ Paramete － －
N Digits
r
14.15.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of MAO

Figure 14-13 Schematic of MAO

Algorithm

FFMAO can process 8 input channels simultaneously. It supports modes of OOS, LO, AUTO. 8
channels support failsafe function individually.

14.15.4 Flag

FFMAO flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-29 Flag of FFMAO

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)

959
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D1 -
D2 TR (Actual mode)
D3 -
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

960
 Function Block Reference

14.16 FFMDI
14.16.1 Overview

FFMDI represents the field device input selection function block MDI, by which DCS can monitor
and control the field device MDI.

FFMDI supports detect and input of 8-channel digital signal.

14.16.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-30 FFMDI parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Set the
selection
Configurat modes of 8
Signal
Basic CHAN ion channels,
Convert Channel TRUE CHANNEL
Parameters NEL Paramete including
Setting
r unified setting
and separate
setting.
Extended Output Output
OUT1 Output Value1 － OUT_D1 －
Parameters Param Pin
OUT1_ Output Value1 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value1
status, it can
OUT1_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D1 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT2 Output Value2 － OUT_D2 －
Pin
OUT2_ Output Value2 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value2
status, it can
OUT2_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D2 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT3 Output Value3 － OUT_D3 －
Pin
OUT3_ Output Value3 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value3
status, it can
OUT3_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D3 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT4 Output Value4 － OUT_D4 －
Pin

961
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
OUT4_ Output Value4 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value4
status, it can
OUT4_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D4 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT5 Output Value5 － OUT_D5 －
Pin
OUT5_ Output Value5 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value5
status, it can
OUT5_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D5 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT6 Output Value6 － OUT_D6 －
Pin
OUT6_ Output Value6 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value6
status, it can
OUT6_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D6 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT7 Output Value7 － OUT_D7 －
Pin
OUT7_ Output Value7 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value7
status, it can
OUT7_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D7 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT8 Output Value8 － OUT_D8 －
Pin
OUT8_ Output Value8 Output
－ － －
ERR Quality Pin
Output Value8
status, it can
OUT8_ be viewed by Output
－ OUT_D8 －
STA clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm, it
Monitorin
Alarm can be viewed
BLCK_ g
Param by clicking － BLOCK_ERR －
ERR Paramete
“Settings”
r
button.

962
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － － －
Paramete
r

Operation
Suppress
AOF TRUE Paramete － －
Module Alarm
r
Monitorin
ST_RE Static g
－ ST_REV －
V Revision Paramete
r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT1
Output Value1 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT2
Output Value2 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT3
Output Value3 r
Real Manual Operation
Status MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT4
Output Value4 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
U5
Output Value5 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
U6
Output Value6 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT7
Output Value7 r
Manual Operation
MANO
Operate TRUE Paramete － －
UT8
Output Value8 r
Actual mode,
it can be Monitorin
Operate MODE viewed by g
Param － MODE_BLK －
_ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Target mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
_TRG
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

963
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Permit mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
_PRM
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

Normal mode.
It can be
viewed and Operation
MODE
configured by TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
_NR
clicking r
“Settings”
button.

Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
P01_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
P02_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

964
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
P03_S be viewed by Extend
－ configuration －
TA clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_S be viewed by Extend device
－ －
TA clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.16.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of MDI

Figure 14-14 Schematic of MDI

Algorithm

FFMDI can process 8 discrete input channels simultaneously. It supports modes of OOS, MAN,
AUTO.

965
 Function Block Reference

14.16.4 Flag

FFMDI flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-31 Flag of FFMDI

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

966
 Function Block Reference

14.17 FFMDO
14.17.1 Overview

FFISEL is used to connect FF function blocks excepting the supported 15 function blocks, with the
system. These function blocks can be FF standard function block, like RATIO, or custom function
blocks of manufacturer.

14.17.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-32 FFMDO parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Set the
selection
modes of 8
Configurat
Signal channels,
Basic CHANN ion
Convert Channel TRUE CHANNEL including
Parameters EL Paramete
Setting unified
r
setting and
separate
setting.
Extended Input IN1 Remote SV1 － Input Pin IN_D1 －
Parameters Param
IN1_ER Remote SV1
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV1
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN1_STA － Input Pin IN_D1 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN2 Remote SV2 － Input Pin IN_D2 －
IN2_ER Remote SV2
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV2
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN2_STA － Input Pin IN_D2 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN3 Remote SV3 － Input Pin IN_D3 －
IN3_ER Remote SV3
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality

967
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Remote SV3
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN3_STA － Input Pin IN_D3 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN4 Remote SV4 － Input Pin IN_D4 －
IN4_ER Remote SV4
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV4
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN4_STA － Input Pin IN_D4 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN5 Remote SV5 － Input Pin IN_D5 －
IN5_ER Remote SV5
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV5
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN5_STA － Input Pin IN_D5 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN6 Remote SV6 － Input Pin IN_D6 －
IN6_ER Remote SV6
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV6
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN6_STA － Input Pin IN_D6 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN7 Remote SV7 － Input Pin IN_D7 －
IN7_ER Remote SV7
－ Input Pin － －
R Quality
Remote SV7
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN7_STA － Input Pin IN_D7 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
IN8 Remote SV8 － Input Pin IN_D8 －

968
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

IN8_ER Remote SV8

－ Input Pin － －
R Quality

Remote SV8
status. It can
be viewed
and
IN8_STA － Input Pin IN_D8 －
configured
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLCK_E viewed by g
－ BLOCK_ERR －
RR clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm
Param Monitorin
g
FLAG Flag － － －
Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
Static g
ST_REV － ST_REV －
Revision Paramete
Actual r
Param Monitorin
FST_ST Fault g FSTATE_STAT
－ －
A Indication Paramete US
r
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MODE_ be viewed by g
Param － MODE_BLK －
ACT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
TRG configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
PRM configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

969
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_ and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
NR configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Operation
FST_TI
Failure Time TRUE Paramete FSTATE_TIME －
ME
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value1 TRUE Paramete －
L1 D1
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value2 TRUE Paramete －
L2 D2
r

Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value3 TRUE Paramete －
L3 D3
r

Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value4 TRUE Paramete －
L4 D4
r
Advance Operation
d FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value5 TRUE Paramete －
Options L5 D5
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VALD
Fault Value6 TRUE Paramete －
L6 _6
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value7 TRUE Paramete －
L7 D7
r
Operation
FST_VA FSTATE_VAL_
Fault Value8 TRUE Paramete －
L8 D8
r
Failsafe
options. It
can be
Operation
MO_OP viewed and
TRUE Paramete MO_OPTS －
T configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin1 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P01_ST be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
A clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block

970
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device function
block

Extend Pin2 Extend pin

status, it can status of actual
P02_ST be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
A clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device function
block
Extend Pin3 Extend pin
status, it can status of actual
P03_ST be viewed by Extend configuration
－ －
A clicking Pin associated
“Settings” device function
button. block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device function
block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04_ST be viewed by Extend device function
－ －
A clicking Pin block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.17.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of MDO

971
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-15 Schematic of MDO

Algorithm

FFMDO can process 8 discrete output channels simultaneously. It supports modes of OOS, LO,
AUTO. The 8-channel supports failsafe function separately.

14.17.4 Flag

FFMDO flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-33 Flag of FFMDO

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 -
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26

972
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.18 FFSGCR
14.18.1 Overview

FFSGCR represents the field device input selection function block SGCR, by which DCS can
monitor and control the field device SGCR.

FFSGCR provides 2-channel input and 2-channel output. It performs linear interpolation for
2-channel input value separately based on set group of coordinate value, and gets output value.

14.18.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-34 FFSGCR parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat Input range.
Basic Scale X Scale H ion Have no
Parameters Setting X_SCH TRUE X_RANGE
Limit Paramete influence for
r control
Configurat algorithm.
X Scale H ion
X_SCL TRUE X_RANGE
Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
ion
X_EU X Unit TRUE X_RANGE
Paramete
r

973
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
X Decimal ion
X_DLEN TRUE X_RANGE
Digits Paramete
r
Configurat
Y Scale H ion
Y_SCH TRUE Y_RANGE
Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
Y Scale H ion
Y_SCL TRUE Y_RANGE
Limit Paramete
Output
r
range. Have
no influence
Configurat for control
ion algorithm.
Y_EU Y Unit TRUE Y_RANGE
Paramete
r

Configurat
Y Decimal ion
Y_DLEN TRUE Y_RANGE
Digits Paramete
r

Curve Configurat Describe X

Definitio X1 Points of ion coordinate of
X1 TRUE CURVE_X
n Input Curve Paramete interpolation
r curve. It
Configurat must meet

X2
X2 Points of
TRUE
ion
CURVE_X
X i  X i 1 ,
Input Curve Paramete
r or the
function
Configurat block will
X3 Points of ion generate
X3 TRUE CURVE_X
Input Curve Paramete alarm and
r turn to OOS.
Configurat The
X4 Points of ion parameter
X4 TRUE CURVE_X should be
Input Curve Paramete
r set correctly
in the first
Configurat
time. Online
X5 Points of ion
X5 TRUE CURVE_X download of
Input Curve Paramete
the
r
parameter
Configurat after
X6 Points of ion modification
X6 TRUE CURVE_X
Input Curve Paramete is not
r supported.
Configurat
X7 Points of ion
X7 TRUE CURVE_X
Input Curve Paramete
r
Configurat
X8 Points of ion
X8 TRUE CURVE_X
Input Curve Paramete
r

974
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
X9 Points of ion
X9 TRUE CURVE_X
Input Curve Paramete
r
Configurat
X10 Points
ion
X10 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X11 Points
ion
X11 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X12 Points
ion
X12 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X13 Points
ion
X13 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X14 Points
ion
X14 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X15 Points
ion
X15 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X16 Points
ion
X16 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X17 Points
ion
X17 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X18 Points
ion
X18 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X19 Points
ion
X19 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X20 Points
ion
X20 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
X21 Points
ion
X21 of Input TRUE CURVE_X
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat Describe X
Y1 Points of ion coordinate of
Y1 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete interpolation
r curve.

975
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat When input
Y2 Points of ion and output of
Y2 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete channel2
r converted, it
Configurat must meet

Y3
Y3 Points of
TRUE
ion
CURVE_Y
Yi  Yi 1 , or
Input Curve Paramete the function
r block will
Configurat generate
Y4 Points of ion alarm and
Y4 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete turn to OOS.
r The
Configurat parameter
Y5 Points of ion should be
Y5 TRUE CURVE_Y set correctly
Input Curve Paramete
r in the first
time. Online
Configurat download of
Y6 Points of ion the
Y6 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete parameter
r after
Configurat modification
Y7 Points of ion is not
Y7 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete supported.
r
Configurat
Y8 Points of ion
Y8 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete
r
Configurat
Y9 Points of ion
Y9 TRUE CURVE_Y
Input Curve Paramete
r
Configurat
Y10 Points
ion
Y10 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y11 Points
ion
Y11 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y12 Points
ion
Y12 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y13 Points
ion
Y13 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y14 Points
ion
Y14 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y15 Points
ion
Y15 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r

976
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
Y16 Points
ion
Y16 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y17 Points
ion
Y17 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y18 Points
ion
Y18 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y19 Points
ion
Y19 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y20 Points
ion
Y20 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Configurat
Y21 Points
ion
Y21 of Input TRUE CURVE_Y
Paramete
Curve
r
Extended IN1 IN1 － Input Pin IN_1 －
Parameters
IN1_ERR IN1 Quality － Input Pin － －
IN1 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN1_STA configured － Input Pin IN_1 －
by clicking
“Settings”
Input button.
Param IN2 IN2 － Input Pin IN_2 －
IN2_ERR IN2 Quality － Input Pin － －
IN2 status. It
can be
viewed and
IN2_STA configured － Input Pin IN_2 －
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Output
OUT1 OUT1 － OUT_1 －
Param Pin
OUT1_ER OUT1 Output
－ － －
R Quality Pin
OUT1
status, it can
OUT1_ST be viewed by Output
－ OUT_1 －
A clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Output
OUT2 OUT2 － OUT_2 －
Pin

977
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
OUT2_ER OUT2 Output
－ － －
R Quality Pin
OUT2
status, it can
OUT2_ST be viewed by Output
－ OUT_2 －
A clicking Pin
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLCK_ER viewed by g
－ BLOCK_ERR －
R clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Monitorin
g
Alarm FLAG Flag － － －
Paramete
Param r

Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r

Monitorin
Actual Static g
ST_REV － ST_REV －
Param Revision Paramete
r
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MODE_A be viewed by g
Param － MODE_BLK －
CT clicking Paramete
“Settings” r
button.
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_T and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
RG configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_P and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
RM configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

978
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
Operation
MODE_N and
TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
R configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Manual
Operation
MANOUT Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
1 Output
r
Value1
Manual
Operation
MANOUT Operate
TRUE Paramete － －
2 Output
r
Value2
Configurat
Swap for ion
SWAP_2 TRUE SWAP_2 －
OUT_2 Paramete
r
Extend pin of
actual
Extend Extend configuration
Pin P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
actual
be viewed by Extend
P01_STA － configuration －
clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block

Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
actual
be viewed by Extend
P02_STA － configuration －
clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

979
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
actual
be viewed by Extend
P03_STA － configuration －
clicking Pin
associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
be viewed by Extend device
P04_STA － －
clicking Pin function block
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.18.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of SGCR

Figure 14-16 Schematic of SGCR

Algorithm

980
 Function Block Reference

 Interpolating Curve Definition

Draw a interpolating curve via parameters X1, X2...X21 and Y1, Y2...Y21, which
includes following points:

[X1,Y1],[X2,Y2]...[X21,Y21]

X1, X2, X3...X21 increase steadily, which means X i  X i 1 , otherwise BLOCK_ERR

will generate alarm and the block will enter OOS mode.
In the curve, X axis associates with IN, and Y axis associates with OUT.

 Interpolating Value Calculation

IN1 combines interpolating curve to work out OUT1, IN2 combines interpolating curve to
work out OUT2, the 2 channels calculation are separated.
Firstly, program judges that IN belonging to which segment in the 20 segments of X, then
perform interpolating calculation, the algorithm is shown as following.
When IN is between X[i] and X[i+1]:
Y [i  1]  Y [i ]
OUT  Y [i]  ( IN  X [i ]) *
X [i  1]  X [i ]
If IN<X1, output Y1. If IN>X21, output Y21.
If IN=X[i], OUT=Y[i].

 Input/Output Reverse

SWAP_2 can start reverse function between input and output of the second channel.
When SWAP_2 is ON, IN2 associates with Y axis, OUT2 associates with X axis. Thus,
Y2...Y21 should increase steadily, which means the interpolating curve should be single
increasing curve, and both X and Y axis should increase steadily.
SWAP_2 is ON having no influence for the first channel.
FFSGCR does not support feedback output, while by the second channel reverse
function, and apply the same interpolating curve, the feedback calculation can be
provided.

Attention:

The curve coordinate parameters FFSGCR X1, X2...X21 and Y1, Y2...Y21 should
be set as accurate value and downloaded after adding function block.
Modification after the first download is not supported.

981
 Function Block Reference

14.18.4 Flag

FFSGCR flag instruction is shown as below.

Table 14-35 Flag of FFSGCR

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 -
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 -
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

14.19 FFSPLIT
14.19.1 Overview

FFSPLIT represents the field device input selection function block SPLIT, by which DCS can
monitor and control the field device SPLIT.

FFSPLIT can split one channel input signal into two-channel output signal based on their working

982
 Function Block Reference

ranges. It can be applied to field device controlled by two valves.

14.19.2 Parameter Instruction

Table 14-36 FFSPLIT parameter instruction

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
When mode of
function block
or downstream
Basic Operation
Operate BAL Balanced function block
Parameters TRUE Paramete HYSTVAL
Param _TIM Time switches, it is
r
used for steady
transition of
output.
Setpoint
Operation
Value of
X11 TRUE Paramete IN_ARRAY
Output 1
r
Split L Point
Setpoint
Operation
Value of
X12 TRUE Paramete IN_ARRAY
Output 1
r
Split H Point
Setpoint Describe 2 split
Operation
Value of curves, [X11,
X21 TRUE Paramete IN_ARRAY
Output 2 Y11] and [X12,
r
Split L Point Y12] define
Setpoint channel1 split
Operation curve, [X21,
Value of
X22 TRUE Paramete IN_ARRAY Y21] and [X22,
Output 2
Split r Y22] define
Split H Point
Coordinate channel2 split
Output Value Operation curve. Cross
Y11 of Output 1 TRUE Paramete OUT_ARRAY and overlap is
Split L Point r forbidden when
Output Value Operation setting X axis.
Y12 of Output 1 TRUE Paramete OUT_ARRAY Details please
Split H Point r refer to
Algorithm.

Output Value Operation

OUT_ARRA
Y21 of Output 2 TRUE Paramete
Y
Split L Point r

Output Value Operation

Y22 of Output 2 TRUE Paramete OUT_ARRAY
Split H Point r
Operation
Setpoint
SV TRUE Paramete SP
Value
r
Setpoint
Actual value status.
Param It can be
Operation
SV_ viewed and
TRUE Paramete SP
STA configured
r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

983
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
MV1
MV1 Scale H ion OUT_1_RAN
_SC TRUE
Limit Paramete GE
H
r
Configurat
MV1
MV1 Scale H ion OUT_1_RAN
_SC TRUE Output range.
Limit Paramete GE
L Have no
Scale r
influence for
Setting Configurat
MV2 control
MV2 Scale H ion OUT_2_RAN algorithm.
_SC TRUE
Limit Paramete GE
H
r
Configurat
MV2
MV2 Scale H ion OUT_2_RAN
_SC TRUE
Limit Paramete GE
L
r
Connect
Extended Input BKOUT pin of
BKI Feedback
Parameters Param － Input Pin BKCAL_IN_1 downstream
N1 IN1
function block
receiving MV1.
When
downstream
function block
BKI
Feedback connecting
NER － Input Pin －
IN1 Quality MV1 is DCS
R1
function block,
connect its
BKOUTERR.
Feedback
IN1 status. It
can be
BKI1
viewed and
_ST － Input Pin BKCAL_IN_1 －
configured
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.

Connect
BKOUT pin of
BKI Feedback
－ Input Pin BKCAL_IN_2 downstream
N2 IN2
function block
receiving MV2.

When
downstream
function block
BKI
Feedback connecting
NER － Input Pin －
IN2 Quality MV2 is DCS
R2
function block,
connect its
BKOUTERR.

984
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Feedback
IN2 status. It
can be
BKI2
viewed and
_ST － Input Pin BKCAL_IN_2 －
configured
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Cascade
CSV － Input Pin CAS_IN －
Input
CSV
Cascade
_ER － Input Pin － －
Input Quality
R
Cascade
input status.
It can be
CSV
viewed and
_ST － Input Pin CAS_IN －
configured
A
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output Operation
Output
Param MV1 Output － OUT_1 －
Pin
Value1
Operation
MV1
Output Output
_ER － － －
Value1 Pin
R
Quality
Operation
Output
Value1
MV1
status, it can Output
_ST － OUT_1 －
be viewed by Pin
A
clicking
“Settings”
button.
Operation
Output
MV2 Output － OUT_2 －
Pin
Value2
Operation
MV2
Output Output
_ER － － －
Value2 Pin
R
Quality
Operation
Output
Value2
MV2
status, it can Output
_ST － OUT_2 －
be viewed by Pin
A
clicking
“Settings”
button.

985
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction

Connect BKIN
BKO Feedback Output pin of upstream
－ BKCAL_OUT
UT Output Value Pin function block
providing CSV.

When
upstream
BKO Feedback function block
Output
UTE Output － － providing CSV
Pin
RR Status is DCS function
block, connect
its BKIN pin.
Feedback
output
BKO status, it can
Output
_ST be viewed by － BKCAL_OUT －
Pin
A clicking
“Settings”
button.
Block alarm,
it can be Monitorin
BLC
viewed by g
K_E － BLOCK_ERR －
clicking Paramete
RR
“Settings” r
button.
Alarm
Param Monitorin
FLA g
Flag － － －
G Paramete
r
Suppress Operation
AOF Module TRUE Paramete － －
Alarm r
Monitorin
ST_ Static g
－ ST_REV －
REV Revision Paramete
r
Manual
Actual Operation
MAN Operate
Param TRUE Paramete － MANMV1
MV1 Output
r
Value1
Manual
Operation
MAN Operate
TRUE Paramete － MANMV2
MV2 Output
r
Value2
Actual
mode, it can Monitorin
Operate MO
be viewed by g
Param DE_ － MODE_BLK －
clicking Paramete
ACT
“Settings” r
button.
HYS Operation
Output Lock Hysteresis of
TVA TRUE Paramete HYSTVAL
Hysteresis LOCKVAL
L r

986
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Target
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
TRG r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Permit
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
PRM r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Normal
mode. It can
be viewed
MO Operation
and
DE_ TRUE Paramete MODE_BLK －
configured
NR r
by clicking
“Settings”
button.
Output 1
Work for
lock options.
channel1.
It can be Configurat
LOC Determine the
viewed and ion
KVA TRUE LOCKVAL MV1 output
configured Paramete
L mode when
by clicking r
CSV is larger
“Settings”
than X12.
Options button.
Setting Status
options. It
can be Configurat
STA
viewed and ion STATUS_OP
_OP TRUE －
configured Paramete TS
TS
by clicking r
“Settings”
button.
Configurat
Scale MV1
MV1 ion OUT_1_RAN
Setting Engineering TRUE －
_EU Paramete GE
Unit
r
Configurat
MV1 MV1
ion OUT_1_RAN
_DL Decimal TRUE －
Paramete GE
EN Digits
r
Configurat
MV2
MV2 ion OUT_2_RAN
Engineering TRUE －
_EU Paramete GE
Unit
r
Configurat
MV2 MV2
ion OUT_2_RAN
_DL Decimal TRUE －
Paramete GE
EN Digits
r

987
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Configurat
SV_ SV Scale H ion
TRUE － －
SCH Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
SV_ SV Scale H ion
TRUE － －
SCL Limit Paramete
r
Configurat
SV
SV_ ion
Engineering TRUE － －
EU Paramete
Unit
r

Configurat
SV_
SV Decimal ion
DLE TRUE － －
Digits Paramete
N
r

Extend pin of
actual
Extend Pin Extend configuration
P01 Extend Pin1 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin1
status of
status, it can
P01 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P02 Extend Pin2 － －
Pin associated
device
function block
Extend pin
Extend Pin2
status of
status, it can
P02 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P03 Extend Pin3 － －
Pin associated
device
function block

988
 Function Block Reference

FF Parameter Application
Parameter Name Description Upload Property
Name Instruction
Extend pin
Extend Pin3
status of
status, it can
P03 actual
be viewed by Extend
_ST － configuration －
clicking Pin
A associated
“Settings”
device
button.
function block
Extend pin of
actual
Extend configuration
P04 Extend Pin4 － －
Pin associated
device
function block.
Extend pin
status
Extend Pin4 parameter
status, it can supported by
P04
be viewed by Extend device
_ST － －
clicking Pin function block
A
“Settings” associating
button. based on
actual
configuration.
14.19.3 Instruction Details
Schematic of SPLIT

Figure 14-17 Schematic of SPLIT

Algorithm

 Split Calculation

The relationship of each output to the input may be defined by 2 lines, which are
determined by 4 groups of Split Coordinates. Among them, [X11, Y11] and [X12, Y12]
define the first split line, [X21, Y21] and [X22, Y22] define the second split line. The split
points and directions of two output lines can be defined by setting different split
coordinates, as shown in below.

989
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-18 SPLIT Range and Sequence Operation

For Split Coordinate, when X 12  X 11 , X 22  X 21 , BLOCK_ERR generates alarm, and

the block enters OOS mode.

 Over Limit Process for First Channel

When Input Value exceeds X12, output of OUT1 can be set via LOCKVAL. If LOCKVAL
is “LOCK”, and CSV > X12, MV1 outputs Y12. If LOCKVAL is “NO LOCK”, and CSV >
X12, MV1 outputs Y11, perform output and hysteresis for the first channel.

X  X 12  HYSTVAL : MV1 may be determined by the calculated y value.

X 12  HYSTVAL  X  X 12 : X enters hysteresis area and reaches X 12 , MV1 may be

determined by the calculated y value. X leaves hysteresis area is not X12, MV1 outputs
via LOCKVAL configuration.

X  X 12 : MV1 outputs via LOCKVAL configuration.

990
 Function Block Reference

Figure 14-19 OUT with LOCKVAL “LOCK”

Figure 14-20 OUT with LOCKVAL “NO LOCK”

 Mode Non-reference Switch

When 2 function block modes of downstream switch, which means entering or leaving
CAS mode, to secure the non-reference mode switch for whole control loop, FFSPLIT
has following 2 methods based on status of 2 channels Feedback Input Pin.
When another downstream block is not in CAS mode, take the feedback value as Y of
split curve, to calculate X of FFSPLIT feedback output value. Then notice upstream
block via BKOUT pin, to achieve non-reference switch of the whole closed loop.
When another downstream block is in CAS mode, calculate the deviation value between
feedback input value, and Y counted by current input value, and eliminate the difference
in BAL_TIM via ramp action, to achieve steady transition from Feedback Output to Y.

 Supported Modes

OOS, IMAN, AUTO, CAS.

When the 2 output blocks of downstream are not in CAS mode, FFSPLIT enters IMAN
mode.
14.19.4 Flag

FFSPLIT flag instruction is shown as below.

991
 Function Block Reference

Table 14-37 Flag of FFSPLIT

Flag Instruction
D0 OOS (Actual mode)
D1 IMAN (Actual mode)
D2 -
D3 MAN (Actual mode)
D4 AUTO (Actual mode)
D5 CAS (Actual mode)
D6 -
D7 -
D8 FF_ALARM (BLOCK_ERR Fault Occurs)
D9 -
D10 -
D11 -
D12 -
D13 -
D14 -
D15 -
D16 -
D17 -
D18 -
D19 -
D20 -
D21 -
D24 -
D25 -
D26
D27 CFGERR
D28 -
D29 ERR
D30 Alarm Suppress (AOF)
D31 -

992
 Function Block Reference

Section 15 Revision
Table 15-1 Retrofit list of the version

Applicable Software and Controller

Document Version Remarks
Versions

Combine the related user manuals. Add

SERVOCON and SPEEDTST to the I/O
Applicable Software Version: VisualField special process function blocks.
Function Block User V3.1+SP04 Improve the manual quality. Improve the
Manual (V1.0) Applicable Controller Version: V11.14.00 parameter instruction. Add panel
instruction to complex function block and
complete the application examples.

V 1.1 (Aug. 6th, 2015) VisualField V3.2 Update with the software.

993